OSBORNE DENTAL CLINIC ADD/ALT BUILDING · PDF fileOSBORNE DENTAL CLINIC ADD/ALT BUILDING 460 At the MCB Camp Lejeune, NC DESIGNED BY: ... ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME) ASME A13.1 (2007

eProjects 14RM003-11 Work Order Number(s): 1330842

Appropriation: O&M

OSBORNE DENTAL CLINIC ADD/ALT

BUILDING 460

At the

MCB Camp Lejeune, NC

DESIGNED BY:

RLF & SS&A 4750 NEW BROAD STREET ORLANDO, FLORIDA 32814

SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY:

Architectural: Robert Bendixen Civil: David Granik Structural: Jonathan Livingston Mechanical: Jacob Anderson Electrical: Kendall Mason Fire Prot.: Mark Troast Interior Design: Debra Sellers Specification: Robert Bendixen

Date: June 20, 2014

SPECIFICATION APPROVED BY:

For Commander, NAVFAC MID-ATLANTIC: Date: Digitally signed by

ABBOTT.BRIAN.G.1229521450 DN: c=US, o=U.S. Government, ou=DoD, ou=PKI, ou=USN, cn=ABBOTT.BRIAN.G.1229521450 Date: 2014.06.25 15:39:09 -04'00'

Submittal20 June 2014

SEALS PAGE

OSBORNE DENTAL CLINIC ADD/ALT BLDG 460MCB CAMP LEGEUNE, NC

14RM003-11ePROJECTS W.O. NO.: 1330842

ArchitectRobert Bendixen, AIA, ACHA, LEED AP BD+CRogers, Lovelock & Fritz, Inc.4750 New Broad StreetOrlando, FL 32814407-730-8600

CivilJoseph C. Avolis, PESherlock, Smith & Adams, Inc.3047 Carter Hill RoadMontgomery, AL 36111334-263-6481

CivilCharles Brown Jr., P.E., PLSSherlock, Smith & Adams, Inc.3047 Carter Hill RoadMontgomery, AL 36111334-263-6481




SEALS PAGE

Fire ProtectionDavid Wilson, P.E.Sherlock, Smith & Adams, Inc.327 N 2nd StWapello, IA 52653319-523-5502

InteriorsDebra Sellers, IIDA, LEED APRogers, Lovelock & Fritz, Inc.4750 New Broad StreetOrlando, FL 32814407-730-8600

Hazardous Materials EngineeringPaul GoldsmithCore Engineering1020 Railroad AvenueWinter Park, FL32789407-622-2673


SEALS PAGE



StructuralJonathon E. Livingston, PESherlock, Smith & Adams, Inc.3047 Carter Hill RoadMontgomery, AL 36111334-263-6481

Plumbing/MechanicalJacob Anderson, P.E., LEED APRogers, Lovelock & Fritz, Inc.4750 New Broad StreetOrlando, FL 32814407-730-8600

ElectricalKendall Mason, P.E., LEEP APRogers, Lovelock & Fritz, Inc.4750 New Broad StreetOrlando, FL 32814407-730-8600

THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

OSBORNE DENTAL CLINIC ADD/ALT BLDG 460 14RM003-11MCB CAMP LEJEUNE, NC ePROJECTS W.O. NO.: 1330842

PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS01 20 00.00 20 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS01 30 01.00 22 DESIGN, PROCUREMENT, AND INSTALLATION OF FURNITURE,

FIXTURES, AND EQUIPMENT01 32 17.00 20 NETWORK ANALYSIS SCHEDULES (NAS)01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES01 33 29 LEED(TM) DOCUMENTATION01 35 16.00 50 CUTTING AND PATCHING PROCEDURES01 35 26 GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS01 42 00 SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS01 45 00.00 20 QUALITY CONTROL01 50 00 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND CONTROLS01 57 13.00 22 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL01 57 19.00 20 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS01 57 19.01 20 SUPPLEMENTAL TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS01 58 00 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION01 60 00.00 22 REQUIREMENTS FOR PESTICIDE AND HERBICIDE COORDINATION01 62 35 RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA01 78 24.00 20 FACILITY ELECTRONIC OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SUPPORT

INFORMATION (eOMSI)01 78 30.00 22 DIGITAL DATA DELIVERABLES (GIS)01 91 13.00 50 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 41 00 DEMOLITION02 82 16.00 20 ENGINEERING CONTROL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS02 83 13.00 20 LEAD IN CONSTRUCTION02 84 16 HANDLING OF LIGHTING BALLASTS AND LAMPS CONTAINING PCBs

AND MERCURY

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE03 45 00 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

04 20 00 MASONRY

DIVISION 05 - METALS

05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL05 30 00 STEEL DECKS05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING05 43 13.00 50 SLOTTED CHANNEL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT FRAMING05 44 00 COLD-FORMED METAL TRUSSES05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS05 51 00 METAL STAIRS05 51 33 METAL LADDERS

PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1


05 52 00 METAL RAILINGS

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY06 61 16 SOLID POLYMER (SOLID SURFACING) FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 16 13.00 50 POLYMER MODIFIED CEMENT WATERPROOFING07 16 16.00 50 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING07 17 00 BENTONITE WATERPROOFING07 18 00.00 50 TRAFFIC COATINGS07 19 00 WATER REPELLENTS07 21 00.00 50 THERMAL INSULATION (SPRAY-APPLIED)07 21 13 BOARD AND BLOCK INSULATION07 21 16 MINERAL FIBER BLANKET INSULATION07 22 00 ROOF AND DECK INSULATION07 27 13.00 50 SELF-ADHERED AIR AND VAPOR BARRIER MEMBRANE07 31 13 ASPHALT SHINGLES07 42 13 METAL WALL PANELS07 52 00 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING07 60 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL07 72 00.00 50 ROOF ACCESSORIES07 72 01.00 50 ROOF VENTILATORS, GRAVITY-TYPE07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS07 95 00.00 50 EXPANSION CONTROL

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

08 11 13 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 14 00 WOOD DOORS08 31 13.00 50 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES08 41 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE08 81 00 GLAZING08 91 00 METAL WALL AND DOOR LOUVERS

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

09 22 00 METAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES09 24 23 STUCCO09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD09 30 13 TILING09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

10 14 00.20 INTERIOR SIGNAGE10 14 01 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE10 21 13 TOILET COMPARTMENTS10 21 23.16 IV TRACK AND HARDWARE10 26 13 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS10 28 13 TOILET ACCESSORIES10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS



10 90 00.00 50 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

11 70 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MEDICAL AND DENTAL EQUIPMENT11 71 00 WARMING CABINETS, STERILIZERS, AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT11 74 00 DENTAL EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES12 35 70 MEDICAL AND DENTAL CASEWORK12 48 13.13 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13 49 19 X-RAY SHIELDING

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

21 13 13.00 20 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES22 08 00.00 50 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS22 60 70 GAS AND VACUUM SYSTEMS FOR HEALTHCARE FACILITIES

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING

23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS23 03 00.00 20 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS23 05 48.00 40 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC AND PLUMBING PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS23 08 00.00 50 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC23 09 23.13 20 BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC23 11 25 FACILITY GAS PIPING23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING23 64 11.00 50 WATER CHILLERS, AIR COOLED TYPE23 64 26 CHILLED, AND HEATING HOT WATER PIPING SYSTEMS23 81 00.00 20 UNITARY AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT23 82 00.00 20 TERMINAL HEATING AND COOLING UNITS

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS26 08 00 APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING26 08 01.00 50 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS26 12 19.10 THREE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM26 27 14.00 20 ELECTRICITY METERING26 29 23 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEMS UNDER 600 VOLTS26 41 00 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM26 51 00.00 22 INTERIOR LIGHTING26 55 80.00 20 SURGICAL LIGHTING FIXTURES

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS



27 08 01.00 50 COMMISSIONING OF COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM27 51 16 RADIO AND PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS27 52 23.00 20 NURSE CALL SYSTEM27 54 00.00 20 COMMUNITY ANTENNA TELEVISION (CATV) SYSTEMS

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

28 31 76 INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL31 31 16 SOIL TREATMENT FOR SUBTERRANEAN TERMITE CONTROL

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 05 33 LANDSCAPE ESTABLISHMENT32 16 13 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND GUTTERS32 84 24 IRRIGATION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS32 92 23 SODDING

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES

33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION33 61 00 PREFABRICATED UNDERGROUND COOLING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM33 71 01 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION33 71 02.00 20 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION

-- End of Project Table of Contents --



SECTION 21 13 13.00 20

WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION04/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.

ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)

ASME A13.1 (2007; R 2013) Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems

ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

ASTM A53/A53M (2012) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless

ASTM D709 (2001; R 2007) Laminated Thermosetting Materials

FM GLOBAL (FM)

FM APP GUIDE (updated on-line) Approval Guide http://www.approvalguide.com/

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

NFPA 13 (2013) Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems

NFPA 1963 (2009; Errata 09-1) Standard for Fire Hose Connections

NFPA 24 (2013) Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

UL 668 (2004; Reprint Dec 2012) Hose Valves for Fire-Protection Service

UL Fire Prot Dir (2012) Fire Protection Equipment Directory

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Design and provide new automatic wet pipe fire extinguishing sprinkler systems for complete fire protection coverage throughout the entire building.

1.3 SPRINKLER SYSTEM DESIGN

Except as modified herein, design automatic wet pipe fire extinguishing

SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 1


sprinkler systems in accordance with the required and advisory provisions of NFPA 13, including all recommendations and advisory portions, which shall be considered mandatory; this includes advisory provisions listed in the appendices of such standard(s), as though the word "shall" had been substituted for the word "should" wherever it appears. Design system by hydraulic calculations for uniform distribution of water over the design area. Hydraulic calculations shall assume a12 psi pressure loss for the backflow preventer assembly. Locate sprinklers in a consistent pattern with ceiling grid, lights, and air supply diffusers. Provide sprinklers and piping system layout. All devices and equipment for fire protection service shall be UL Fire Prot Dir listed or FM APP GUIDE approved for use in wet pipe sprinkler systems.

1.3.1 Location of Sprinklers

Sprinklers in relation to the ceiling and the spacing of sprinklers shall not exceed the hazards indicated on the contract drawings. Uniformly space sprinklers on the branch piping. Sprinklers shall provide coverage throughout 100 percent of the building. This includes, but is not limited to, telephone rooms, electrical equipment rooms, boiler rooms, switchgear rooms, transformer rooms, and other electrical and mechanical spaces.

1.3.2 Water Distribution

Distribution shall be uniform throughout the area in which the sprinklers will open. Discharge from individual sprinklers in hydraulically most remote area shall be between 100 percent and 120 percent of the specified density.

1.3.3 Density of Application of Water

Size pipe to provide the specified density when the system is discharging the specified total maximum required flow. Application to horizontal surfaces below the sprinklers shall be as indicated on the contract drawings.

1.3.4 Sprinkler Discharge Area

Area shall be the hydraulically most remote area as determined by NFPA 13 and FM APP GUIDE Data Sheet 3-26. Size of area shall be as determined by FM APP GUIDE Data Sheet 3-26. Area reductions and increases from NFPA 13 shall not be applied to this area.

1.3.5 Outside Hose Allowances

Hydraulic calculations shall include a hose allowance of 250 gpm for outside hose streams

1.3.6 Water Supply

Base hydraulic calculations on the water supply data shown on the contract drawings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval.

SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 2


Partial submittals and submittals not fully complying with the requirements and recommended practices of NFPA 13 and this specification section shall be returned disapproved without review. This contract stipulation is non-negotiable.

The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Shop Drawings; G

Prepare 24 by 36 inch detail working drawings of sprinklers and piping. Floor plans shall be drawn to a scale not less than 1/8" = 1'-0". Show data essential for proper installation of each system. Show details, plan view, elevations and sections of the systems supply and piping. Show piping schematic of systems supply, devices, valves, pipe and fittings. Show point to point electrical wiring diagrams. Submit drawings signed by a registered fire protection engineer. Provide copies of the Sprinkler System Shop Drawings per specification Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, , no later than 21 days prior to the start of sprinkler system installation.

SD-03 Product Data

Pipe; G Fittings; G Valves, including gate, check, and globe; G Sprinklers ; G Pipe hangers and supports ; G Sprinkler Alarm Switches; G Fire department connections; G Mechanical couplings; G Backflow Prevention Assembly; G

Annotate descriptive data to show the specific model, type, and size of each item. Catalog cuts shall also indicate UL Listing/FM Approval and country of manufacture.

SD-05 Design Data

Hydraulic Calculations; G

Submit computer program generated hydraulic calculations to substantiate compliance with hydraulic design requirements. Calculations shall be performed by computer using software intended specifically for fire protection system design. Submit name of software program used.

SD-06 Test Reports

Request to schedule Preliminary Tests; G

Preliminary Test Report; G

Six copies of the completed Preliminary Test Report, no later that 7 days after the completion of the Preliminary Tests. The Preliminary Tests Report shall include both the Contractor's

SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 3


Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping and the Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping. All items in the Preliminary Tests Report shall be signed by the Fire Protection Engineer.

Request to schedule Final Acceptance Test; G

Final Acceptance Test Report; G

Six copies of the completed Final Acceptance Tests Reports, no later that 7 days after the completion of the Final Acceptance Tests. All items in the Final Acceptance Report shall be signed by the Fire Protection Engineer.

SD-07 Certificates

Inspection by Fire Protection Engineer; G

Concurrent with the Final Acceptance Test Report, certification by the Fire Protection Engineer that the sprinkler system is installed in accordance with the contract requirements, including signed approval of the Preliminary and Final Acceptance Test Reports.

Fire Protection Engineer; G

The name and documentation of certification of the proposed Fire Protection Engineer, no later than 14 days after the Notice to Proceed and prior to the submittal of the sprinkler system drawings and hydraulic calculations.

Sprinkler System Installer; G

Submit data showing the Sprinkler System Installer has successfully installed systems of the same type and design as specified herein. Data shall include names and locations of at least two installations where the Contractor, or the subcontractor referred to above, has installed such systems. Indicate type and design of each system and certify that each system has performed satisfactorily in the manner intended for not less than 18 months. Provide NICET certification of the system technician. Contractor shall submit data along with submittal of the Fire Protection Engineer Qualifications.

SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

Operating and Maintenance Instructions

Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA as supplemented and modifies by this specification section.

Provide six manuals in accordance with NFPA 13. The manuals shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, parts list, list of parts and tools that should be kept in stock by the owner for routine maintenance including the name of a local supplier, simplified wiring and controls diagrams, troubleshooting guide, and recommended service organization (including address and telephone number) for each item of equipment. Each service

SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 4


organization submitted shall be capable of providing 4 hour on-site response to a service call on an emergency basis.

SD-11 Closeout Submittals

As-built drawings

As-built shop drawings, at no later than 14 days after completion of the Final Tests. The Sprinkler System Drawings shall be updated to reflect as-built conditions after all related work is completed. Provide electronic drawings in dwg or pdf format.

On-site training

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

1.5.1 Fire Protection Engineer

A Fire Protection Engineer is a registered professional engineer (P.E.) who has passed the fire protection engineering written examination administered by the National Council of Examiners for Engineering and Surveys (NCEES).

1.5.2 Sprinkler System Installer

The Sprinkler System Installer shall be regularly engaged in the installation of the type and complexity of system specified in the Contract documents, and shall have served in a similar capacity for at least three systems that have performed in the manner intended for a period of not less than 6 months. Installation drawings, shop drawings and As-built drawings shall be prepared, by or under the supervision of, an system technician who is experienced with the types of works specified herein, and is currently certified by the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) as an engineering technician with minimum Level III certification in Automatic Sprinkler System program or by a fire protection engineer.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.6.1 Material and Equipment Qualifications

Provide materials and equipment that are standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship. Standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2 year period.

1.6.2 Alternative Qualifications

Products having less than a two-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or laboratory tests, can be shown.

1.6.3 Manufacturer's Nameplate

Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's

SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 5


name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

1.6.4 Field Fabricated Nameplates

ASTM D709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified in the technical sections or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style.

1.7 ACCESSIBILITY

Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance, and repair are readily accessible. Install concealed valves, expansion joints, controls, dampers, and equipment requiring access, in locations freely accessible through access doors.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be housed in a manner to preclude any damage from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Additionally, all pipes shall either be capped or plugged until installed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 UNDERGROUND PIPING COMPONENTS

2.1.1 Pipe

Pipe shall comply with NFPA 24. Minimum pipe size shall be 6 inches. Piping more than 5 feet outside the building walls shall comply with Section 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION.

2.1.2 Buried Utility Warning and Identification Tape

Provide detectable aluminum foil plastic backed tape or detectable magnetic plastic tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried piping. Tape shall be detectable by an electronic detection instrument. Provide tape in rolls, 3 inches minimum width, color coded for the utility involved with warning and identification imprinted in bold block letters continuously and repeatedly over the entire tape length. Warning and identification shall read "CAUTION BURIED WATER PIPING BELOW" or similar wording. Use permanent code and letter coloring unaffected by moisture and other substances contained in trench backfill material.

2.2 ABOVEGROUND PIPING COMPONENTS

All components of the aboveground piping shall fully comply with the requirements and recommended practices of NFPA 13 and this specification section. Aboveground piping shall be steel.

SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 6


2.2.1 Steel Pipe

Pipe shall be rigid black steel. Steel piping shall be Schedule 40 for sizes less than 2 1/2 inches and Schedule 10 for sizes 2 1/2 inches or larger. Fittings into which sprinklers, sprinkler riser nipples, or drop nipples are threaded shall be welded, threaded, or grooved-end type. Plain-end fittings with mechanical couplings, fittings that use steel gripping devices to bite into the pipe and segmented welded fittings shall not be permitted. Rubber gasketed grooved-end pipe and fittings with mechanical couplings shall be permitted in pipe sizes 1.5 inches and larger. Fittings, mechanical couplings, and rubber gaskets shall be supplied by the same manufacturer. Steel piping with wall thickness less than Schedule 30 shall not be threaded. Side outlet tees using rubber gasketed fittings shall not be permitted. Sprinkler pipe and fittings shall be metal.

2.2.2 Grooved Mechanical Joints and Fittings

Grooved couplings, fittings and grooving tools shall be products of the same manufacturer.

2.2.3 Sprinklers

Provide nominal 0.50 inch or 0.53 inch orifice sprinklers. Sprinklers with internal O-rings shall not be used. Sprinklers shall be used in accordance with their listed coverage limitations. Provide semi-recessed, quick response sprinklers in areas with ceilings. Semi-recessed sprinklers shall have a chrome finish. Provide brass upright quick response sprinklers in all areas with no ceiling. Temperature classification shall be ordinary. Sprinklers in high heat areas including attic spaces or in close proximity to unit heaters shall have temperature classification in accordance with NFPA 13. Extended coverage sprinklers shall not be used. Deflector shall not be more than 3 inches below suspended ceilings. Ceiling plates shall not be more than 0.5 inch deep. Ceiling cups shall not be permitted. Sprinkler guards shall be provided on all sprinklers in mechanical, electrical and communication spaces, regardless of height.

2.2.4 Valves

Provide valves of types approved for fire service. Valves shall open by counterclockwise rotation. Provide butterfly type control valves. Check valves shall be clear opening swing-check type with inspection and access cover plate for sizes 8 inches and larger. Each control valve shall be electrically supervised; minimum contact ratings shall be 2.5 amps at 24 volts DC. Provide supervision against valve closure or tampering of valve.

2.2.5 Pipe Supports

Provide Pipe hangers and supports in accordance with NFPA 13.

2.2.6 Electric Bell Alarms

Provide alarms (by Division 28 Contractor) of the approved weatherproof and guarded type, to sound locally on the flow of water in each corresponding sprinkler system. Mount alarms on the outside of the outer walls of each building at a location as directed. A flow switch shall be provided on the main riser at the service entry in the clinic to activate the alarm bell.

SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 7


2.2.7 Fire Department Connections

Fire department connection shall be projecting type with cast brass body, matching wall escutcheon lettered "Auto Spkr" with a polished brass finish. The connection shall have two inlets with individual self-closing clappers, caps with drip drains and chains. Female inlets shall have 2-1/2 inch diameter American National Fire Hose Connection Screw Threads (NH) per NFPA 1963.

2.2.8 Backflow Prevention Assembly

Provide listed reduced pressure principle valve assembly backflow preventer. Each check valve shall have a drain. Backflow prevention assemblies shall have current "Certificate of Approval from the Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research, FCCCHR List. Listing of the specific make, model, design, and size in the FCCCHR List shall be acceptable as the required documentation."

2.3 ALARM INITIATING AND SUPERVISORY DEVICES

2.3.1 Sprinkler Alarm Switches

Provide vane type flow switch(es) with circuit opener or closer for the automatic transmittal of an alarm over the facility fire alarm system. Connection of switch shall be under Section 28 31 76 INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM Vane type Alarm actuating devices shall have mechanical diaphragm controlled retard device adjustable from 10 to 60 seconds and shall instantly recycle.

2.3.2 Valve Supervisory (Tamper) Switch

Switch shall be suitable for mounting to the type of control valve to be supervised open. The switch shall be tamper resistant and contain one set of SPDT (Form C) contacts arranged to transfer upon removal of the housing cover or closure of the valve of more than two rotations of the valve stem.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

2.4.1 Sprinkler Cabinet

Provide metal cabinet with extra sprinklers and sprinkler wrench adjacent to each alarm valve. The number and types of extra sprinklers shall be as specified in NFPA 13.

2.4.2 Pipe Escutcheon

Provide split hinge metal plates for piping entering walls, floors, and ceilings in exposed spaces. Provide polished stainless steel plates or chromium-plated finish on copper alloy plates in finished spaces. Provide paint finish on metal plates in unfinished spaces.

2.5 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application. Where more than single type is specified for application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category.

SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 8


2.5.1 Plastic Pipe Markers

Provide snap-on or adhesive type pipe markers with nomenclature that closely matches contract drawings. Comply with designations indicated on contract drawings for piping system nomenclature and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length. Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as a separate unit of plastic.

a. Snap-On Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid snap-on, color-coded pipe markers, complying with ASME A13.1.

b. Pressure-Sensitive Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, permanent adhesive, color-coded, pressure-sensitive vinyl pipe markers, complying with ASME A13.1.

c. Application: For exterior diameters greater than 6 inch (including insulation if any), provide continuous directional flow arrow tape around pipe circumference; two places, before and after pipe marker. Provide adhesive plastic pipe markers. For external diameters less than 6 inch (including insulation if any), provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the following methods:

(1) Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plasticpipemarker.

(2) Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap.

(3) Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (orinsulation).

2.5.2 Color Coding

Color code marking shall be of the color listed in Table I and the side listed in Table II. The arrows shall be installed adjacent to each band to indicate the direction of flow in the pipe. The legends shall be printed in upper-case white letters as listed in Table I. Letter sizes shall be as listed in Table II. Marking shall be painted or applied using colored, pressure-sensitive adhesive markers of standard manufacturer. Paint shall be as specified for insulated and uninsulated piping.

TABLE I. COLOR CODES FOR MARKING PIPE Letters and Material Band Arrow Legend

Fire Mains Red White Fire Main Sprinkler Zone Piping Red White Sprinkler Zone Sprinkler Drains Red White Sprinkler Drain Main Drains Red White Main Drain

SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 9


TABLE II. COLOR CODE MARKING SIZES

Outside Diameter Width of Arrow Size of Legend of Pipe Covering Color Band Length X Width Letters and Numerals (in) (in) (in) (in)

Less than 1-1/2 8 8 x 2 1/2 1-1/2 to 2 8 8 x 2 3/4 2 to 6 12 8 x 2 1-1/4 8 to 10 24 12 x 3 2-1/2 Over 10 32 12 x 3 3

2.5.3 Valve Identification Signs

Engraved plastic laminate signs shall be affixed to each control valve, inspector test valve, main drain, auxiliary drain, test valve and similar valves as required by NFPA 13. The signs shall be affixed with corrosion resistant chains. The signs shall identify function and the portion of the building served. For sprinkler zones or system sections that require closure of more than one (1) valve to work on the system, provide a sign referring to the existence and location of the other valves. Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, white letters on red background, punched for fastening chains. Thickness: 1/16 inch for units up to 40 sq. in. or 8 inch length; 1/4 inch for larger units.

2.5.4 Plastic Equipment Markers

Provide manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, color coded equipment markers. Include terminology matching equipment schedules as closely as possible. Provide approximate 2-1/2 x 4 inch markers for control devices, and 4-1/2 x 6 inch for equipment. Identify equipment and electrical devices furnished under this section.

2.5.5 Lettering and Graphics

Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in fire protection identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of fire suppression systems and equipment.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION BY FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEER

The Fire Protection Engineer shall inspect the sprinkler system periodically during the installation to assure the sprinkler system is being provided and installed in accordance with the contract requirements and the approved sprinkler system submittal(s). The Fire Protection Engineer shall attend both the preliminary and final tests, and shall sign the test results. After the preliminary testing has been completed, the Fire Protection Engineer, shall certify in writing the system is ready for the final inspections and tests. This report shall document any discrepancies found and what actions will be taken to correct. Any discrepancy noted during the periodic site visits or the preliminary testing shall be brought to the attention of the Contracting Officer in writing, no later than three working days after the discrepancy is discovered.

SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 10


3.2 UNDERGROUND PIPING INSTALLATION

The methods of fabrication and installation of the underground piping shall fully comply with the requirements and recommended practices of NFPA 13, NFPA 24 and the contract drawings.

3.3 ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSTALLATION

The methods of fabrication and installation of the aboveground piping shall fully comply with the requirements and recommended practices of NFPA 13 and this specification section.

3.3.1 Piping in Finished Areas

In areas with suspended or dropped ceilings and in areas with concealed spaces above the ceiling, piping shall be concealed above ceilings. Piping shall be inspected, tested and approved before being concealed. Risers and similar vertical runs of piping in finished areas shall be concealed.

3.3.2 Pendent Sprinklers

Where sprinklers are installed below suspended or dropped ceilings, drop nipples shall be cut such that sprinkler ceiling plates or escutcheons are of a uniform depth throughout the finished space. The outlet of the reducing coupling shall not extend more than 1 inch below the underside of the ceiling. Pendent sprinklers in suspended ceilings shall be a centered in ceiling tiles.

3.3.3 Reducers

Reductions in pipe sizes shall be made with one-piece tapered reducing fittings. Bushings are prohibited.

3.3.4 Building Surface Penetrations

Cutting structural members for passage of pipes or for pipe hanger fastenings will not be permitted. Unless otherwise indicated, provide pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, and concrete floors with pipe sleeves fitted into place at the time of construction. Sleeves shall be fabricated of black steel pipe; ASTM A53/A53M, Standard weight. Extend each sleeve through its respective wall or floor and cut flush with each surface, except in floors; extend sleeves above slab at least 2 inches. Unless indicated to be equipped with a modular mechanical sealing assembly, or otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings, provide sleeves large enough to provide a minimum clearance of 1/4 inch all around the pipe/insulation penetrating the sleeve or as required for compliance with the selected UL listed penetration assembly for penetrations through rated assemblies. For insulated piping, insulation shall be continuous through the sleeve. Do not install sleeves in structural members except where indicated or approved. Sleeves in interior gypboard partitions are generally not required unless specifically indicated on the Architectural Drawing partition details.

3.3.4.1 Fire-Rated/Smoke-Rated Penetrations

Details are indicated on the Architectural Drawings, AE810 series, indicating conditions for penetrations through fire and smoke rate assemblies. Provide sleeved or non-sleeved installation as indicated.

SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 11


Seal the annular space between the pipe and sleeve with fire-stopping material and sealant that meet the requirement of Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.

3.3.4.2 Waterproof Penetrations

Sleeves in exterior below grade masonry walls, below grade concrete walls and slab-on-grade floors shall be equipped with an integral steel plate waterstop welded perpendicular to sleeve. Waterstop shall be positioned at the centerline of the substrate. Sleeves in exterior masonry and concrete walls below and above grade, and slab-on-grade floors shall be with a modular mechanical type sealing assembly. Seal shall consist of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe/conduit and sleeve with corrosion protected carbon steel bolts, nuts, and pressure plates. Links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and each nut. After the seal assembly is properly positioned in the sleeve, tightening of the bolt shall cause the rubber sealing elements to expand and provide a watertight seal between the pipe/conduit seal between the pipe/conduit and the sleeve. Each seal assembly shall be sized as recommended by the manufacturer to fit the pipe and sleeve involved.

3.3.5 Inspector's Test Connection

Provide test connections approximately 6 feet above the floor for each sprinkler system or portion of each sprinkler system equipped with an alarm device. Provide test connection piping to a drain location that can accept full flow where the discharge will be readily visible and where water may be discharged without property damage. Discharge to floor drains, janitor sinks or similar fixtures shall not be permitted. Provide discharge orifice of same size as corresponding sprinkler orifice. The penetration of the exterior wall shall be no greater than 1 foot above finished grade.

3.3.6 Backflow Preventer Test Connection

Provide downstream of the backflow prevention assembly UL 668 hose valves with 2.5 inch National Standard male hose threads with cap and chain. Provide one valve for each 250 gpm of system demand or fraction thereof. Provide a permanent sign in accordance with paragraph entitled "Identification Signs" which reads, "Test Valve."

3.3.7 Drains

Main drain piping shall be provided to discharge at the location indicated on the Contract Drawings. Auxiliary drains shall be provided as required by NFPA 13.

3.3.8 Installation of Fire Department Connection

Connection shall be mounted on the exterior wall approximately 3 feet above finished grade. The piping between the connection and the check valve shall be provided with an automatic drip in accordance with NFPA 13 and arranged to drain to the outside.

3.3.9 Identification Signs

Signs shall be affixed to each control valve, inspector test valve, main drain, auxiliary drain, test valve, and similar valves as appropriate or as

SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 12


required by NFPA 13. Valve identification signs shall be minimum 6 inches wide by 2 inches high with enamel baked finish on minimum 18 gauge steel or 0.024 inch aluminum with red letters on a white background or white letters on red background. Hydraulic design data nameplates shall be permanently affixed to each sprinkler riser as specified in NFPA 13.

3.4 ELECTRICAL WORK

Except as supplemented and modified herein, electric equipment and wiring shall be in accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Alarm signal wiring connected to the building fire alarm control system shall be in accordance with 28 31 76 INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM.

3.5 PIPE PAINTING AND COLOR CODE MARKING

Paint and color code mark sprinkler piping system as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.5.1 Piping System Identification

Install plastic pipe markers on each system, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows and wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, plenums) and exterior non-concealed locations. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve signage, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment. Identify each piping system and item of equipment indicated on contract drawings.

a. Near each valve and control device.

b. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for sprinklers; mark each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern.

c. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter non-accessible enclosures.

d. At access doors, and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping.

e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

f. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 25 feet along each piping run.

3.5.2 Hydraulic Design Data Plates

Hydraulic design data plates shall be provided and permanently affixed to each sprinkler riser as specified in NFPA 13.

3.5.3 VALVE IDENTIFICATION SIGNS

Provide identification signs at all valves as specified and as required by NFPA 13.

SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 13


3.6 PRELIMINARY TESTS

The system, including the underground water mains, and the aboveground piping and system components, shall be tested to assure that equipment and components function as intended. The underground and aboveground interior piping systems and attached appurtenances subjected to system working pressure shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 24.Submit request to schedule Preliminary Tests, no later than 14 days prior to the proposed start of the tests. Upon completion of specified tests, the Contractor shall submit for approval a Preliminary Test Report. The Fire Protection Engineer shall witness the preliminary tests and document that the system is installed completely.

3.6.1 Underground Piping

3.6.1.1 Flushing

Underground piping shall be flushed in accordance with NFPA 24.

3.6.1.2 Hydrostatic Testing

New underground piping shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with NFPA 24.

3.6.2 Aboveground Piping

3.6.2.1 Hydrostatic Testing

Aboveground piping shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with NFPA 13.

3.6.2.2 Backflow Prevention Assembly Forward Flow Test

Each backflow prevention assembly shall be tested at system flow demand, including all applicable hose streams, as specified in NFPA 13. The Contractor shall provide all equipment and instruments necessary to conduct a complete forward flow test, including 2.5 inch diameter hoses, playpipe nozzles, calibrated pressure gauges, and pitot tube gauge. The Contractor shall provide all necessary supports to safely secure hoses and nozzles during the test. At the system demand flow, the pressure readings and pressure drop (friction) across the assembly shall be recorded. A metal placard shall be provided on the backflow prevention assembly that lists the pressure readings both upstream and downstream of the assembly, total pressure drop, and the system test flow rate determined during the preliminary testing. The pressure drop shall be compared to the manufacturer's data and the readings observed during the final inspections and tests.

3.7 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TEST

Final Acceptance Test shall begin only when the Preliminary Test Report has been approved. Submit request to schedule Final Acceptance Test, no later than 14 days prior to the proposed start of the tests. Notification shall include a copy of the Contractor's Material & Test Certificates.

An experienced technician regularly employed by the system installer shall be present during the inspection. The Fire Protection Engineer shall attend the final inspections and tests. At this inspection, repeat any or all of the required tests as directed. Correct defects in work provided by

SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 14


the Contractor, and make additional tests until the systems comply with contract requirements. Furnish appliances, equipment, water, electricity, instruments, connecting devices, and personnel for the tests. The Mid-Atlantic Division, Naval Facilities Engineering Command, Fire Protection Engineer, will witness formal tests and approve systems before they are accepted.

3.8 ON-SITE TRAINING

Submit request to schedule the On-site Training, at least 14 days prior to the start of related training but prior to the final inspections and tests. The sprinkler contractor shall conduct a training course for operating and maintenance personnel as designated by the Contracting Officer. Training shall be provided for a period of 8hours of normal working time and shall start after the system is functionally complete and after the Final Acceptance Test. The On-Site Training shall cover all of the items contained in the approved Operating and Maintenance Instructions.

-- End of Section --

SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 15


SECTION 22 00 70

PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES11/11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4 (1999; Addenda A 2000, Addenda B 2001; R 2004) Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems

ANSI A13.1 (2007; R 2013) Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)

ASHRAE 90.1 - IP (2013; INT 1 2013; Errata 1-2 2013) Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE)

ASSE 1001 (2008) Performance Requirements for Atmospheric Type Vacuum Breakers (ANSI approved 2009)

ASSE 1010 (2004) Performance Requirements for Water Hammer Arresters (ANSI approved 2004)

ASSE 1011 (2004; Errata 2004) Performance Requirements for Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers (ANSI approved 2004)

ASSE 1012 (2009) Performance Requirements for Backflow Preventer with an Intermediate Atmospheric Vent - (ANSI approved 2009)

ASSE 1013 (2011) Performance Requirements for Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow Preventers - (ANSI approved 2010)

ASSE 1017 (2009) Performance Requirements for Temperature Actuated Mixing Valves for Hot Water Distribution Systems - (ANSI approved 2010)

SECTION 22 00 70 Page 1


ASSE 1018 (2001) Performance Requirements for Trap Seal Primer Valves - Potable Water Supplied (ANSI Approved 2002

ASSE 1019 (2011) Performance Requirements for Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants, Freeze Resistant, Automatic Draining Type (ANSI Approved 2004)

ASSE 1020 (2004; Errata 2004; Errata 2004) Performance Requirements for Pressure Vacuum Breaker Assembly (ANSI Approved 2004)

ASSE 1037 (1990) Performance Requirements for Pressurized Flushing Devices (Flushometers) for Plumbing Fixtures

ASSE 1071 (2012) Performance Requirements for Temperature Actuated Mixing Valves for Plumbed Emergency Equipment

AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)

AWWA 10084 (2005) Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater

AWWA B300 (2010; Addenda 2011) Hypochlorites

AWWA B301 (2010) Liquid Chlorine

AWWA C203 (2008) Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines - Enamel and Tape - Hot-Applied

AWWA C606 (2011) Grooved and Shouldered Joints

AWWA C651 (2005; Errata 2005) Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains

AWWA C652 (2011) Disinfection of Water-Storage Facilities

AWWA C700 (2009) Standard for Cold Water Meters - Displacement Type, Bronze Main Case

AWWA C702 (2010) Cold-Water Meters - Compound Type

AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)

AWS A5.8/A5.8M (2011; Amendment 2012) Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding

AWS B2.1/B2.1M (2009) Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification

AWS B2.2/B2.2M (2010) Specification for Brazing Procedure and Performance Qualification




ASME A112.1.2 (2012) Standard for Air Gaps in Plumbing Systems (For Plumbing Fixtures and Water-Connected Receptors)

ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 (2013) Standard for Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures and Hydraulic Requirements for Water Closets and Urinals

ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 (2008; Update 1 2009; Update 2 2011) Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures

ASME A112.36.2M (1991; R 2012) Cleanouts

ASME A112.6.1M (1997; R 2012) Floor Affixed Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use

ASME A112.6.3 (2001; R 2007) Standard for Floor and Trench Drains

ASME A112.6.4 (2003: R 2012) Roof, Deck and Balcony Drains

ASME B1.20.1 (1983; R 2006) Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)

ASME B16.18 (2012) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings

ASME B16.21 (2011) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges

ASME B16.22 (2013) Standard for Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings

ASME B16.23 (2011) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV

ASME B16.29 (2012) Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV

ASME B16.34 (2013) Valves - Flanged, Threaded and Welding End

ASME B16.5 (2013) Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard

ASME B31.1 (2012; INT 2-6, 8-10, 13, 15, 17-25, 27-31 and 42-46) Power Piping

ASME B31.5 (2013) Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components

ASME B40.100 (2013) Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments

ASME BPVC SEC IX (2010) BPVC Section IX-Welding and Brazing



Qualifications


ASTM A105/A105M (2013) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications

ASTM A193/A193M (2012a) Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service and Other Special Purpose Applications

ASTM A515/A515M (2010) Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature Service

ASTM A516/A516M (2010) Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate- and Lower-Temperature Service


ASTM A74 (2013a) Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

ASTM A888 (2013a) Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications

ASTM B117 (2011) Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus

ASTM B306 (2013) Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV)

ASTM B32 (2008) Standard Specification for Solder Metal

ASTM B370 (2012) Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction

ASTM B813 (2010) Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube

ASTM B88 (2009) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube

ASTM C564 (2012) Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D2822/D2822M (2005; E 2011; R 2011) Asphalt Roof Cement

ASTM E1 (2013) Standard Specification for ASTM



Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers

CAST IRON SOIL PIPE INSTITUTE (CISPI)

CISPI 301 (2009) Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications

CISPI 310 (2011) Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications

COPPER DEVELOPMENT ASSOCIATION (CDA)

CDA A4015 (2010) Copper Tube Handbook

FOUNDATION FOR CROSS-CONNECTION CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC RESEARCH (FCCCHR)

FCCCHR Manual (10th Edition) Manual of Cross-Connection Control

INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF PLUMBING AND MECHANICAL OFFICIALS (IAPMO)

IAPMO Z124.5 (2013) Plastic Toilet (Water Closet) Seats

INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)

ICC A117.1 (2009) Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities

ICC IPC (2012) International Plumbing Code

INTERNATIONAL SAFETY EQUIPMENT ASSOCIATION (ISEA)

ANSI/ISEA Z358.1 (2009) American National Standard for Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment

MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS)

MSS SP-110 (2010) Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends

MSS SP-25 (2008) Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and Unions

MSS SP-58 (2009) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation

MSS SP-67 (2011) Butterfly Valves

MSS SP-69 (2003; Notice 2012) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application (ANSI Approved American National Standard)



MSS SP-70 (2011) Gray Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends

MSS SP-71 (2011; Errata 2013) Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends

MSS SP-72 (2010a) Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for General Service

MSS SP-78 (2011) Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends

MSS SP-80 (2013) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves

MSS SP-85 (2011) Gray Iron Globe & Angle Valves Flanged and Threaded Ends

NACE INTERNATIONAL (NACE)

NACE SP0169 (1992; R 2007) Control of External Corrosion on Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)

ANSI Z535.1 (2006; R 2011) American National Standard for Safety--Color Code

NEMA 250 (2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)

NEMA MG 1 (2011; Errata 2012) Motors and Generators

NEMA MG 11 (1977; R 2012) Energy Management Guide for Selection and Use of Single Phase Motors

NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF)

NSF/ANSI 14 (2013) Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials

NSF/ANSI 61 (2012; Errata 1013; Addenda 2013) Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects

PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTITUTE (PDI)

PDI WH 201 (2010) Water Hammer Arresters Standard

SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE)

SAE J1508 (2009) Hose Clamp Specifications

U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)

PL 93-523 (1974; A 1999) Safe Drinking Water Act



U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

29 CFR 1910.144 Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards

40 CFR 50.12 National Primary and Secondary Ambient Air Quality Standards for Lead

PL 102-486 (1992) Residential Energy Efficiency Ratings


UL 1951 (2011) Electric Plumbing Accessories

UL 508 (1999; Reprint Oct 2013) Industrial Control Equipment

UL 778 (2010; Reprint May 2012) Standard for Motor-Operated Water Pumps


Provide complete and operable plumbing systems including sanitary and storm drainage, domestic water, plumbing fixtures, valves, pumps, water heaters, supports, and all associated appurtenances.

1.2.1 Sustainable Design Requirements

1.2.1.1 Local/Regional Materials

Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available from a minimum of three sources. Submit documentation indicating distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. Indicate distance of raw material origin from the project site. Indicate relative dollar value of local/regional materials to total dollar value of products included in project.

1.2.2 Performance Requirements

1.2.2.1 Plumbing Fixtures

Water flow and consumption rates shall, at a minimum, comply with requirements in PL 102-486.

1.2.3 Accessibility of Equipment

Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance, and repair are readily accessible. Install concealed valves, and equipment requiring access, in locations freely accessible through access doors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:



SD-02 Shop Drawings

Potable Water, Sanitary, Vent, Pump Discharge, Piping Systems; G

SD-03 Product Data

Local/Regional MaterialsPipe and Fittings; GPipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports; GValves; GPlumbing Fixtures; GBackflow Preventers; GDrains; GCleanouts; GWater Softener System; GSump Pump System Components; GBuilding Surface Penetrations; GPumps; GWater Service Meter; GVibration-Absorbing Features; GRoof Drains

SD-06 Test Reports

Tests, Flushing and Disinfection

Test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria, completion and testing of the installed system. Each test report shall indicate the final position of controls.

Test of Backflow Prevention Assemblies; G

Certification of proper operation shall be as accomplished in accordance with state regulations by an individual certified by the state to perform such tests. If no state requirement exists, have the manufacturer's representative test the device, to ensure the unit is properly installed and performing as intended. Provide written documentation of the tests performed and signed by the individual performing the tests.

SD-07 Certificates

Materials and Equipment

Certificate stating that the design, fabrication, and installation conform to the code, where equipment is specified to conform to requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

Welding

A copy of qualified procedures and a list of names and identification symbols of qualified welders and welding operators.

Bolts



Written certification by the bolt manufacturer that the bolts furnished comply with the specified requirements.


Plumbing System; G

Manuals in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and Section 01 78 24.00 20 FACILITY ELECTRONIC OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SUPPORT INFORMATION (eOMSI).


1.4.1 Qualifications

1.4.1.1 Manufacturer Qualifications

Manufacturers shall be regularly engaging in the manufacturing, supplying, and servicing of specified products and equipment, as well as, providing engineering and/or start-up services as specified. Provide evidence demonstrating compliance for a minimum of 5 years, and on 5 projects of similar complexity.

1.4.1.2 Installer Qualifications

Installer shall be licensed, and shall provide evidence of the successful completion of at least five projects of equal or greater size and complexity. Provide tradesmen skilled in the appropriate trade.

1.4.2 Welding

Weld piping in accordance with qualified procedures using performance-qualified welders and welding operators. Submit a list of names and identification symbols of qualified welders and welding operators. Provide documentation that welders, and welding operators are certified in accordance with American Welding Society Standard AWS B2.1/B2.1M. Qualify procedures and welders in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IX. Welding procedures qualified by others, and welders and welding operators qualified by another employer, may be accepted as permitted by ASME B31.1. Notify the Contracting Officer 24 hours in advance of tests, and perform the tests at the work site if practicable. Welders or welding operators shall apply their assigned symbols near each weld they make as a permanent record.

1.4.3 Regulatory Requirements

1.4.3.1 International Code Council (ICC) Codes

Unless otherwise required herein, perform plumbing work in accordance with the ICC IPC.

a. For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory, the word "should" shall be interpreted as "shall." Reference to the "code official" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For Navy owned property, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For leased facilities, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the "lessor." References to the "permit holder" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contractor."



b. For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of Chapter 1, "Administrator," do not apply. These administrative requirements are covered by the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulations (FAR) included in this contract and by the authority granted to the Officer in Charge of Construction to administer the construction of this project. References in the ICC Codes to sections of Chapter 1, shall be applied appropriately by the Contracting Officer as authorized by his administrative cognizance and the FAR.

1.4.3.2 Referenced Publications

In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer.


Products having less than a two-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or laboratory tests, can be shown.

1.4.5 Service Support

The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. Submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications. These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as approved by the Contracting Officer. Replace damaged or defective items.

1.6 Potable Water, Sanitary, Vent, Pump Discharge, Piping Systems

Submit dimensioned shop drawings of piping showing both the accurately scaled piping and its relationship to space enclosure. Provide in accordance with Section 01300 "Submittal Procedures" and as modified by this section. Illustration shall be drawn to a minimum scale of ¼ inch per foot. Drawings shall indicate actual plan dimensions and elevations above finished floor. Provide illustrations including sections to clarify elevations of equipment, equipment connections, piping and piping accessories. Drawings shall conform to standard drafting industry procedures. Include contractor's name, project title, date and phone number in title block. Include as a minimum the following:

a. Potable cold water piping.b. Potable hot water piping.c. Potable hot water recirculation piping.d. Sanitary piping.



e. Sanitary Vent piping.f. Water softeners.g. Plumbing pumps.h. Mixing valves.i. Plumbing fixtures.j. Floor drains.k. Medical equipment which requires plumbing.l. Appliances such as ice machines and drinking fountains.m. Piping from relief valves.n. Pipeline accessories such as backflow preventers, flow meters and strainers.o. Valves.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS

Provide materials and equipment which are the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products. Specified equipment shall essentially duplicate equipment that has performed satisfactorily at least two years prior to bid opening. Provide standard products that have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2 year period.

2.2 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE

Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable. See also paragraph "Nameplates" in PART 3.

2.3 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

Submit manufacturer's catalog data with highlighting to show model, size, options, etc., that are intended for consideration. Provide adequate data to demonstrate compliance with contract requirements. Submit certificate stating that the design, fabrication, and installation conform to the code, where equipment is specified to conform to requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

a. Plastic pipe, fittings, and solvent cement shall meet NSF/ANSI 14 and shall be NSF listed for the service intended. Plastic pipe, fittings, and solvent cement used for potable hot and cold water service shall bear the NSF seal "NSF-PW."

b. Cast-iron pipe shall contain a minimum of 100 percent recycled content. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe shall not be installed underground, under concrete floor slabs, or in crawl spaces below kitchen floors.

C. Provide steel pipe containing a minimum of 100 percent recycled content, with a minimum of 16 percent post-consumer recycled content. Select pipe schedules based on service requirements. Pipe fittings shall be compatible with the applicable pipe materials. Pipe threads (except dry seal) shall conform to ASME B1.20.1.



D. Material or equipment containing lead shall not be used in any potable water system. In line devices such as water meters, building valves, check valves, meter stops, valves, fittings and back flow preventers shall comply with PL 93-523 and NSF/ANSI 61, Section 8. End point devices such as water coolers, lavatory faucets, kitchen and bar faucets, ice makers, supply stops and end point control valves used to dispense water for drinking shall meet the requirements of NSF/ANSI 61, Section 9.

2.4 PIPE AND FITTINGS

2.4.1 Domestic Water Piping

Domestic water piping at service entrance (from 1 foot inside building to 5 feet outside): Same as indicated for outside utilities.

a. 2 inches and smaller after service entrance above grade:

(1) Copper tube conforming to ASTM B88, type L, with soldered joints and wrought copper ASME B16.22 or cast brass ASME B16.18 fittings.

(2) Shop fabricated copper tube extracted branch taps with brazed joints are acceptable where the tapped pipe is at least 1 inch diameter and where branch is at least 2 pipe sizes smaller. Field fabricated copper tube extracted branch taps are not acceptable.

(3) Press fittings for Copper Pipe and Tube are not acceptable.

b. Below grade:

(1) Copper tube conforming to ASTM B88, type K soft, with brazed joints and wrought copper ASME B16.22 fittings.

(2) Where below-grade run of piping is shorter than 50 feet, below-grade joints are not acceptable.

c. 2-1/2 to 4 inches after service entrance:

(1) Copper tube conforming to ASTM B88, type L, with soldered joints and wrought copper ASME B16.22 or cast brass ASME B16.18 fittings.

2.4.2 Drainage Piping (Soil, Waste, Vent, Indirect, and Storm)

a. Above grade:

(1) Cast-iron conforming to ASTM A74, hubbed pipe and fittings with ASTM C564 elastomeric push joints.

(2) Cast-iron conforming to CISPI 301 or ASTM A888, hubless pipe, fittings, and CISPI 310 elastomeric sealing sleeves with stainless-steel or cast iron clamps.

(3) Copper tube conforming to ASTM B306, type DWV or heavier, with soldered joints and wrought copper ASME B16.29 or cast brass ASME B16.23 drainage and vent fittings. Piping within MRI shielding shall be copper.

b. Below grade: Cast-iron conforming to ASTM A74, hubbed pipe and fittings with ASTM C564 elastomeric push joints.



2.4.3 Pressure Drainage Piping

a. Above grade (and in crawl spaces):

1. Copper tube conforming to ASTM B88, Type L, with soldered joints and wrought copper or cast brass DWV fittings (ASME B16.29 or ASME B16.23.

b. Below ground/slab:

1. Copper tube conforming to ASTM B88, Type K, with brazed joints and wrought copper DWV fittings.

2.4.4 Exposed Piping in Finished Areas

a. Chrome or nickel plated brass to wall or floor.

b. Piping 2 inches and larger may be provided with chrome or nickel plated brass sleeves to cover pipe and fittings in lieu of plating.

2.4.5 Trap Primer Pipe Between Primer Device and Drain

a. Above grade: Copper tube conforming to ASTM B88, type K or L, with soldered joints and wrought copper ASME B16.22 or cast brass ASME B16.18 fittings.

b. Below grade: Copper tube conforming to ASTM B88, type K soft, with soldered joints and wrought copper ASME B16.22 or cast brass ASME B16.18 fittings.

2.5 PIPE JOINT MATERIALS

Hubless cast-iron soil pipe shall not be used under ground. Solder containing lead shall not be used with copper pipe. Mark cast iron soil pipe and fittings with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. Joints and gasket materials shall conform to the following:

a. Coupling for Cast-Iron Pipe: for hub and spigot type ASTM A74, AWWA C606. For hubless type: CISPI 310

b. Coupling for Steel Pipe: AWWA C606.

c. Flange Gaskets: Gaskets shall be made of non-asbestos material in accordance with ASME B16.21. Gaskets shall be flat, 1/16 inch thick, and contain Aramid fibers bonded with Styrene Butadiene Rubber (SBR) or Nitro Butadiene Rubber (NBR). Gaskets shall be the full face or self centering flat ring type. Gaskets used for hydrocarbon service shall be bonded with NBR.

e. Brazing Material: Brazing material shall conform to AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP-5.

f. Brazing Flux: Flux shall be in paste or liquid form appropriate for use with brazing material. Flux shall be as follows: lead-free; have a 100 percent flushable residue; contain slightly acidic reagents; contain potassium borides; and contain fluorides.

g. Solder Material: Solder metal shall conform to ASTM B32 and be Code



approved "Lead Free" having a chemical composition equal to or less than 0.2 percent lead.

h. Solder Flux: Flux shall be liquid form, non-corrosive, Code approved "Lead Free" and conform to ASTM B813, Standard Test 1.

i. PTFE Tape: PTFE Tape, for use with Threaded Metal or Plastic Pipe.

j. Rubber Gaskets for Cast-Iron Soil-Pipe and Fittings (hub and spigot type and hubless type): ASTM C564.

k. Flanged fittings including flanges, bolts, nuts, bolt patterns, etc., shall be in accordance with ASME B16.5 class 150 and shall have the manufacturer's trademark affixed in accordance with MSS SP-25. Flange material shall conform to ASTM A105/A105M. Blind flange material shall conform to ASTM A516/A516M cold service and ASTM A515/A515M for hot service. Bolts shall be high strength or intermediate strength with material conforming to ASTM A193/A193M. Submit written certification by the bolt manufacturer that the bolts furnished comply with the specified requirements.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

Miscellaneous materials shall conform to the following:

a. Water Hammer Arrester: PDI WH 201. Water hammer arrester shall be diaphragm or piston type.

b. Copper, Sheet and Strip for Building Construction: ASTM B370.

c. Asphalt Roof Cement: ASTM D2822/D2822M.

d. Hose Clamps: SAE J1508.

e. Supports for Off-The-Floor Plumbing Fixtures: ASME A112.6.1M.

f. Metallic Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M.

g. Plumbing Fixture Setting Compound: A preformed flexible ring seal molded from hydrocarbon wax material. The seal material shall be nonvolatile nonasphaltic and contain germicide and provide watertight, gastight, odorproof and verminproof properties.

h. Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines: AWWA C203.

i. Hypochlorites: AWWA B300.

j. Liquid Chlorine: AWWA B301.

k. Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element: ASME B40.100.

l. Thermometers: ASTM E1. Mercury shall not be used in thermometers.

2.7 PIPE INSULATION MATERIAL

Provide insulation as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.



2.8 PIPE HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS

Provide pipe hangers, inserts, and supports conforming to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.

2.9 VALVES

Provide valves on supplies to equipment and fixtures. Valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall be ball type and shall be bronze with threaded bodies for pipe and solder-type connections for tubing. Valves 3 inches and larger shall have flanged iron bodies and bronze trim. Pressure ratings shall be based upon the application. Valves shall conform to the following standards:

Description Standard

Butterfly Valves MSS SP-67

Cast-Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends MSS SP-70

Cast-Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends MSS SP-71

Ball Valves with Flanged Butt-Welding Ends for General Service

MSS SP-72

Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends

MSS SP-110

Cast-Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends MSS SP-78

Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle, and Check Valves MSS SP-80

Steel Valves, Socket Welding and Threaded Ends ASME B16.34

Cast-Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends

MSS SP-85

Vacuum Relief Valves ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4Trap Seal Primer Valves ASSE 1018

Thermostatic Mixing Valves for Domestic Hot Water SystemsASSE 1017

ASSE 1017

Thermostatic Mixing Valves for Emergency Fixture ASSE 1071

2.10 PLUMBING FIXTURES

2.10.1 General

Fixtures shall be water conservation type, in accordance with ICC IPC. Fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall be in accordance with ICC A117.1. Provide vitreous china fixtures that are nonabsorbent, hard-burned, and vitrified throughout the body. No fixture will be accepted that shows cracks, crazes, blisters, thin spots, or other flaws. Equip fixtures with appurtenances such as traps, faucets, stop valves, and drain fittings. Each fixture and piece of equipment requiring connections



to the drainage system shall be equipped with a trap. Brass expansion or toggle bolts capped with acorn nuts shall be provided for supports, and polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and fittings shall be provided where exposed to view. Fixtures with the supply discharge below the rim shall be equipped with backflow preventers. Internal parts of flush and/or flushometer valves, shower mixing valves, shower head face plates, may contain acetal resin, fluorocarbon, nylon, acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS) or other plastic material, if the material has provided satisfactory service under actual commercial or industrial operating conditions for not less than 2 years. Plastic in contact with hot water shall be suitable for 180 degrees F water temperature. Maximum allowable lead content in wetted surfaces of pipes, pipe fittings, plumbing fittings and fixtures, as determined by a weighted average shall not exceed 0.25 percent.

2.10.2 Flushometer Valves

Provide hard-wired sensor operated flushometer valves with pushbutton override for manual flush, backcheck angle control stop, and vacuum breaker. Flushometer valves shall be either a large diaphragm, or fixed volume piston type with filtered metering bypass. Valve shall not be able to be converted externally or internally to exceed a low consumption flush. Packing, main seat, stop seat and vacuum breaker shall be molded from a chloramine resistant rubber compound. Provide valve body, cover, tailpiece and control stop in conformance with ASTM Alloy Classification for semi-red brass. All exposed surfaces shall be chrome plated. Flushometer valves shall conform to ASSE 1037. Flush valves and flushvalve transformer shall be provided by the Division 22 Contractor and shall be from the same manufacturer.

2.10.3 Automatic Controls

Where specified with a fixture, provide automatic, sensor operated faucets complying with ASSE 1037 and UL 1951. Faucet systems shall consist of solenoid-activated valves with light beam sensors. For sensor operated valves, provide 120/24 volt wiring box, transformers, and solenoids. Transformers may be grouped to serve multiple valves.

2.10.4 Fixture Descriptions

2.10.4.1 Electric Water Coolers

Provide self-contained, mechanically refrigerated electric water coolers with more than a single thickness of metal between the potable water and the refrigerant in the heat exchanger, wall-hung, bubbler style, air-cooled condensing unit, stainless steel splash receptor and basin, and stainless steel cabinet. Provide 8 gph minimum capacity of 50 degrees F water when supplied with 80 degrees F inlet water and a 90 degrees F room temperature. Control bubblers by push levers or push bars, front mounted or side mounted near the front edge of the cabinet. Bubbler spouts shall be mounted at maximum of 36 inches above floor and at front of unit basin with 27 inch minimum knee clearance from bottom of unit to finished floor. Spouts shall direct water flow at least 4 inches above unit basin and trajectory parallel or nearly parallel to the front of unit. Provide chrome plated 3/8 inch OD soft-copper tube supplies with set-screw escutcheons, and loose key stops. Provide chrome plated 1-1/4 x 1-1/2 inch semi-cast P-trap with cleanout with 17 gage x 1-1/2 inch chrome plated copper tube trap arm with set-screw escutcheon. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed steel pipe chair carriers.



2.10.4.1.1 EWC-1 (JSN R2201)

Accessible (forward facing), dual-level, recessed, brushed stainless steel, recessed refrigeration unit, dual level extensions with oval receptors, access panel cover, rounded corners, rounded edges, designed to eliminate splashing and standing waste water. Provide self-closing, semi-circular push bars with full 180 degree activation.

2.10.4.2 Emergency Fixtures

Provide copper alloy control valves. Provide an air-gap with the lowest potable eye and face wash water outlet located above the overflow rim by not less than the International Plumbing Code minimum. Provide a tempering valve, with leaving water temperature setpoint adjustable throughout the range 60 to 95 degrees F.

2.10.4.2.1 EW-1 (Similar to JSN P1965)

Eye/face wash, ANSI/ISEA Z358.1, deck-mounted (sink ledge), swing down, self-cleaning, non-clogging eye and face wash with quick opening, full-flow valve. Spray heads swing down from storage to operational position activating water flow. Spray heads shall be provided with flip-top dust covers. Coordinate configuration with sink faucet location. If required due to sink size, faucet shall be offset to allow for proper clearance at the faucet controls. Coordinate exact sink punching requirements prior to purchase. Improperly punched sinks will be replaced at no additional cost to the Government. Unit shall deliver 3 gpm of aerated water at 30 psi flow pressure. Thermostatic mixing valve (JSN P2450) shall be a solid bimetal thermostat directly linked to valve porting and capable of compensating for supply temperature and pressure fluctuations. The valve shall be provided with a locking temperature regulator, cold water bypass capable of minimum 4 gpm, 0-140 F dial thermometer, angle check stops and stainless steel cabinet with hinged door with cylinder lock (wall mounted below counter), ANSI/ISEA Z358.1 and ASSE 1071 compliant.

2.10.4.3 Lavatories

a. Provide ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, white vitreous china, integral back type wall hung lavatories with supply openings for use with top mounted faucet, and openings for concealed arm carrier installation. Provide chrome plated 3/8 inch OD soft-copper tube supplies with set-screw escutcheons, and loose key stops. Provide chrome plated 1-1/4 x 1-1/2 inch semi-cast P-trap with cleanout with 17 gage x 1-1/2 inch chrome plated copper tube trap arm with set-screw escutcheon. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair carriers with vertical steel pipe supports and concealed arms for the lavatory. Mount lavatory with the front rim 31 inches above the floor, except 34 inches above floor and with 29 inches minimum clearance from bottom of the front rim to floor for accessible lavatories.

1. L-1 (JSN P3100): 20 x 18 inches. Fixture shall be equipped with polished chrome deck mounted faucet, single hole installation, 120 volt plug-in transformer with electronic dual beam infra-red sensor, 1.5 GPM laminar flow gooseneck spout (min. 5-1/4 inches deep spout, center to center), dual supply for hot and cold water service, integral user adjustable temperature control mixer, above deck hermetically sealed electronics module and solenoid with filter screen, field adjustable modes and ranges, inlet supply check valves. The flow shall be limited to 1.5 gpm at a flowing



water pressure of 80 psig. Accessible mounting height per ICC A117.1. Provide chrome plated cast brass offset grid drain fitting with chrome plated cast brass elbow and 17 gauge 1-1/4 inch seamless brass offset tailpiece, "P" trap, and heavy duty brass body chrome plated angle stop valves. Provide accessible protection on exposed water supplies and "P" trap and drain piping with insulation kit molded from impact-resistant, stain-resistant, antimicrobial vinyl.

2. L-2 (JSN P3100): Fixture shall be equipped with polished chrome deck mounted faucet, single hole installation, 120 volt plug-in transformer with electronic dual beam infra-red sensor, 1.5 GPM laminar flow gooseneck spout (min. 5-1/4 inches deep spout, center to center), dual supply for hot and cold water service, integral user adjustable temperature control mixer, above deck hermetically sealed electronics module and solenoid with filter screen, field adjustable modes and ranges, inlet supply check valves. The flow shall be limited to 1.5 gpm at a flowing water pressure of 80 psig. Provide chrome plated cast brass offset grid drain fitting with chrome plated cast brass elbow and 17 gauge 1-1/4 inch seamless brass offset tailpiece, "P" trap, and heavy duty brass body chrome plated angle stop valves. Provide accessible protection on exposed water supplies and "P" trap and drain piping with insulation kit molded from impact-resistant, stain-resistant, antimicrobial vinyl.

2.10.4.4 Mop Service Basin

Provide terrazzo mop sinks made of marble chips cast in white portland cement to produce 3000 psi minimum compressive strength 7 days after casting. Provide floor or wall outlet copper alloy body drain cast integral with terrazzo, with polished stainless steel strainers.

JS-1 (JSN P4700): 36 x 24 x 12 inches, precast terrazzo with integral stainless steel cap with tiling flange, 3 inch cast brass drain with stainless strainer, lead caulk drain connection and 20 gauge type 304 stainless steel splash guards. Provide chrome plated 8 inch centers, wall mounted cast brass service sink faucet with rigid spout with integral vacuum breaker, 3/4 inch hose threads, pale hook, wall brace, indexed lever handles, hose, hose bracket, and mop hanger. Provide 1/2 inch ball valves and 1/2 inchcheck valves in supply piping to service sink faucet.

2.10.4.5 Plaster Traps

2.10.4.5.1 PT-1 (JSN P7650)

Small, 10 inches high by 6 inches wide by 6 inches long; shall be cast aluminum, rectangular with solid top and hinged bottom having integral baffles and 1/4 inch drain plug; bolted bottom shall provide easy access for removal of screens for cleaning and recovery of items in sediment bucket.

2.10.4.6 Showers

Provide single control pressure equalizing shower valves with body mounted from behind the wall with threaded connections. Provide tubing mounted from behind the wall between faucets and shower assembly. Provide separate globe valves or angle valves with union connections in each supply to



faucet. See Architectural Drawings and specifications for details.

2.10.4.6.1 SH-1 (JSN P5040)

SH-1 (JSN P5040): ADA compliant Wall mounted detachable spray assembly, 24 inch wall bar, elevated vacuum breaker, supply elbow and flange and valve. All external trim, chrome plated metal. Plastic shower head with flow control to limit discharge to 1.75 gpm, 5 foot length of rubber lined corrosion resistant steel, chrome plated metal flexible, or white vinyl reinforced hose and supply wall elbow. Design showerhead to fit in palm of hand. Provide corrosion resistant steel or chrome plated metal wall bar with an adjustable swivel hanger for showerhead. Fasten wall bar securely to wall for hand support. Combination thermostatic and pressure anti-scald balancing valve, with chrome plated metal lever type operating handle adjustable for rough-in variations and chrome plated metal or corrosion resistant steel face plate. Valve body shall be any suitable copper alloy. Internal parts shall be copper, nickel alloy, corrosion resistant steel or thermoplastic material. Valve inlet and outlet shall be 1/2 inch IPS. Provide external screwdriver check stops, vacuum breaker and temperature limit stops. Set stops for a maximum temperature of 105 degrees F. All exposed fasteners shall be vandal resistant. Valve shall provide a minimum of 6 gpm at 45 psi pressure drop.

2.10.4.6.2 SH-2 (Similar to JSN P5040)

SH-2 (Similar to JSN P5040): Wall mounted, shower head connected to shower arm. All external trim shall be chrome plated metal. Chrome plated metal head, adjustable ball joint, self cleaning with automatic flow control device to limit discharge to not more than 1.75 gpm. Body, internal parts of shower head and flow control fittings shall be copper alloy or corrosion resistant steel. Install showerhead 72 inches above finished floor. Combination thermostatic and pressure anti-scald balancing valve, with chrome plated metal lever with adjustment for rough-in variations, lever type operating handle and chrome plated brass or corrosion resistant steel face plate. Valve body shall be any suitable copper alloy. Internal parts shall be copper, nickel alloy, corrosion resistant steel or thermoplastic material. Valve inlet and outlet shall be 1/2 inch IPS. Provide external screwdriver check stops, and temperature limit stops. Set stops for a maximum temperature of 105 degrees F. Install valve 54 inches from bottom of shower receptor. All exposed fasteners shall be vandal resistant. Valve shall provide a minimum of 6 gpm at 45 psi pressure drop.

2.10.4.7 Sinks

Provide ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4, Type 302(18-8) or 304(18-8) stainless steel sinks with integral mounting rim for flush installation, with undersides fully sound deadened, with supply openings for use with top mounted faucet, and with 3.5 inch drain outlet. Sink depth less than or equal to 10 inch shall be 18 gage. Sink depth greater than 10 inch shall be 16 gage. Provide plain end laminar flow faucet spouts with flow control in base of spout unless noted otherwise. Water flow rate shall not exceed 1.5 gpm when measured at a flowing water pressure of 60 psi unless noted otherwise. 0.5 gpm aerators shall be used where indicated. Provide chrome plated 3/8 inch OD soft-copper tube supplied with set-screw escutcheons,



and loose key stops. Provide chrome plated 1-1/2 inch heavy cast brass P-trap with cleanout with 17 gauge x 1-1/2 inch chrome plated copper tube trap arm with set-screw escutcheon. Provide separate 1.5 inch P-trap and drain piping to vertical vent piping from each compartment. Coordinate hole quantities, locations, and centerings with faucet types indicated in fixture descriptions. Provide exact numbers of holes necessary. Use of faucet hole covers is not acceptable. Dimensions given are overall, and bowl in the following order: front to back, left to right, depth. Sinks located in casework designated as handicap accessible shall be same as specified except the basin depth shall not be greater than 6-1/2 inches and the drain outlet shall be located to the rear of the basin. Unless noted otherwise, faucets shall be heavy duty commercial grade chrome plated solid brass construction with chrome plated cast brass handles with red/blue color indexes and quarter turn renewable cartridges. At sinks with deck mounted emergency eye washes (EW-1) coordinate faucets and sink punches prior to ordering sinks.

2.10.4.7.1 S-1 (JSN U0001/U0002/U0021/U0021A)

Single bowl sink provided with casework. Faucet and fixture trim shall be provided as indicated for connection to sink provided with casework. Coordinate drain size with casework supplier. Provide polished chrome deck mounted faucet, single hole installation, minimum 5-1/4 inch radius gooseneck spout (min. 6-1/2 inches above deck to outlet), battery operated with electronic dual beam infra-red sensor, 0.5 gpm spray aerator, dual supply for hot and cold water service, integral user adjustable temperature control mixer, above deck hermetically sealed electronics module and solenoid with filter screen, 6 VDC lithium battery, low battery indicator, field adjustable modes and ranges, inlet supply check valves.

2.10.4.7.2 S-2 (JSN CS150)

Single bowl, counter-mounted, 22 x 19 x 10 inches, bowl 18 x 14 x 10 inches. Faucet shall be 4 inch centerset with two 4 inch wristblades and 5 inch diameter fixed gooseneck spout.

2.10.4.7.3 S-3 (JSN D0960)

Dental Workstation with integral sinks. Provide rough-in and final connections.

2.10.4.7.4 S-4 (JSN CS230)

Double bowl, counter-mounted, 22 x 33 x 10 inches, each bowl 16 x 14 x 10 inches. Faucet shall be 8 inch spread, chrome plated brass, concealed type mount with two 4 inch wristblades and 8 inch diameter swing gooseneck spout.

2.10.4.7.5 S-5 (JSN CS180)

Single bowl, counter-mounted, 22 x 19 x 10 inches, bowl 18 x 14 x 10 inches. Faucet shall be 4 inch centerset with two 4 inch wristblades and 5 inch diameter fixed gooseneck spout.

2.10.4.8 Sink, Surgeons Scrub

2.10.4.8.1 SS-1 (JSN P6990)

Two station, wall-mounted, gooseneck spouts, electronically timed with long (10 minute) and short (3, 4, 5 minute) cycles with digital time display. Construction shall be of seamless welded 16 gauge, Type 304, stainless



steel. Cabinet shall be sound-deadened with a fire-resistant material. Unit shall be wall mounted using a mounting carrier. Front panels shall be easily removed for access to the water control valves, waste connections, stops and strainers. Sink bottoms shall be sloping to minimize splashing and a 1 1/2 inch OD tailpiece with a 3 inch flat strainer drain. Provide each compartment (station) with a gooseneck assembly with a 1 1/2 inch sprayhead that can be removed for sterilization. Provide adjustable thermostatic mixing valve with anti-scald feature for each compartment and controlled from the top mounted control panel. Control shall be watertight and top mounted. Timing device shall be internal to reduce tampering. Plastic splash shield shall be provided between compartments. Provide foot-controlled soap dispensers at each compartment. Sink shall include 120 volt, 2 ampere power to an internal junction box. Provide chrome plated 3/8 inch OD soft-copper tube supplies with set-screw escutcheons, and loose key heavy duty brass body chrome plated angle stop valves. Provide chrome plated 1 1/2 inch heavy cast brass P-trap with cleanout with 17 gauge x 1 1/2 inch chrome plated copper tube trap arm with set-screw escutcheon. Provide fixture with integral stainless steel storage shelf above.

2.10.4.9 Urinals

Provide ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, white vitreous china, wall-mounted, wall outlet, urinals with integral trap, drain line connection, and extended side shields. The trap design shall comply with the IPC. Install urinal rim 24 inches above the floor at non-accessible locations. Urinals installed in compliance with ADA requirements shall be mounted with the rim 17 inches above the floor. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair carriers. Urinals equipped with flush valves shall have a flushing volume of the urinal and flush valve combination not exceeding the fixture design rating. Mount flush valves not less than 11 inches above the fixture.

2.10.4.9.1 UR-1 (JSN P8150)

High efficiency washout for solenoid valve. The maximum water use allowed shall be 0.125 gallon per flush at a flowing water pressure of 80 psi. Flushing cycle shall be activated by an electronic infrared sensor operated by proximity of individual. Provide wiring box, 120/24 volt solenoid, and transformer. Flush valve and transformer shall be provided by the same manufacturer.

2.10.4.9.2 UR-2 (JSN P8150)

Same as UR-1 except accessible mounting height per ICC A117.1.

2.10.4.10 Water Closets

Provide ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, white vitreous china, elongated bowl, floor mounted water closets. The trap design shall comply with the IPC. Install top of toilet seat 14 to 15 inches, above the floor at non-accessible locations. Water closets installed in compliance with ADA requirements shall be mounted with rim of seat 17 to 19 inches above the floor. Water closets equipped with flush valves shall have a flushing volume of the water closet and flush valve combination not exceeding the fixture design rating. Water flushing volume of the water closet and flush valve combination shall not exceed 1.6 gallons per flush. Provide white solid plastic elongated open-front seat without cover, with check hinge. Seat shall conform to IAPMO Z124.5. Mount flush valves not less than 11 inches above the fixture. Mounted height of flush valve shall not interfere with the hand rail in ADA stalls. Provide ASME A112.6.1M heavy



duty 750 pound capacity chair carriers.

2.10.4.10.1 WC-1 (JSN P9050)

Siphon-jet for direct flushometer valve. In public restrooms, flushing cycle shall be activated by an electronic infrared sensor operated by proximity of individual. Provide wiring box 120/24 volt solenoid and transformer. For all other restrooms, provide manual type flushometer valve.The maximum water use allowed shall be 1.28 gallons per flush. Flush valve and flush valve transformer shall be provided by the same manufacturer.

2.10.4.10.2 WC-2 (Similar to JSN P9050)

Same as WC-1 except accessible mounting height per ICC A117.1 Provide riser with grab bar offset as required.

2.10.4.11 Hose Bibbs and Hydrants

2.10.4.11.1 HB-1

Hose bibb with vacuum-breaker backflow preventer, brass construction with 3/4 inch male inlet threads, hexagon shoulder, and 3/4 inch hose connection. Handle shall be securely attached to stem.

2.10.4.11.2 WHY-1

Wall hydrant (freezeproof) ASSE 1019 with vacuum-breaker backflow preventer and shall have a nickel-brass or nickel-bronze wall plate or flange with nozzle and detachable key handle. Provide brass or bronze operating rod within a galvanized iron casing of sufficient length to extend through the wall so that the valve is inside the building, and the portion of the hydrant between the outlet and valve is self-draining. Provide brass or bronze valve with coupling and union elbow having metal-to-metal seat. Valve rod and seat washer shall be removable through the face of the hydrant. Provide hydrant with 3/4 inch exposed hose thread on spout and 3/4 inch male pipe thread on inlet.

2.11 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

Backflow preventers shall be approved and listed by the Foundation For Cross-Connection Control & Hydraulic Research. Reduced-pressure principle assemblies, double check valve assemblies, atmospheric (nonpressure) type vacuum breakers, and pressure type vacuum breakers shall be tested, approved, and listed in accordance with FCCCHR Manual. Backflow preventers with intermediate atmospheric vent shall conform to ASSE 1012. Reduced pressure principle backflow preventers shall conform to ASSE 1013. Hose connection vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE 1011. Pipe applied atmospheric type vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE 1001. Pressure vacuum breaker assembly shall conform to ASSE 1020. Air gaps in plumbing systems shall conform to ASME A112.1.2.

2.12 DRAINS

Drains installed in connection with waterproofed floors or shower pans shall be equipped with bolted-type device to securely clamp flashing.

2.12.1 Floor and Shower Drains

Provide floor and shower drains with coated cast iron bodies, double



drainage pattern for embedding in the floor construction, and seepage pan having weep holes or channels for drainage to the drainpipe. The grate/strainer shall be adjustable to floor thickness. Provide an integral clamping device for attaching flashing or waterproofing membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the flashing or waterproofing membrane when required. Provide with threaded outlet connection. Between the outlet and waste pipe, a neoprene rubber gasket conforming to ASTM C564 may be installed, provided that the drain is specifically designed for the rubber gasket compression type joint. Floor and shower drains shall conform to ASME A112.6.3. Grate/strainer weight loading classification is based on ASME A112.6.3. Dimensions are nominal. Provide drain with trap primer connection, trap primer, and connection piping where indicated.

2.12.1.1 FD-1

12 inch diameter flashing collar, 4 inch deep body and 8 inch diameter removable, non-tilt heavy-duty stainless steel grate with minimal free area of 1.5 times free area of outlet pipe size.

2.12.1.2 FD-2

10 inch diameter invertible flashing collar, 2 inch deep body, and minimum 6 inch square removable, secured, heavy-duty stainless steel strainer with minimum free area of 1.5 times free area of outlet pipe size.

2.12.2 Floor Sinks

Provide floor sinks with stainless steel and double drainage pattern for embedding in the floor construction, and seepage pan having weep holes or channels for drainage to the drainpipe. Provide an integral clamping device for attaching flashing or waterproofing membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the flashing or waterproofing membrane when required. Provide with threaded outlet connection. Between the outlet and waste pipe, a neoprene rubber gasket conforming to ASTM C564 may be installed, provided that the drain is specifically designed for the rubber gasket compression type joint. Floor sinks shall conform to ASME A112.6.3. Provide stainless steel sediment bucket. Grate/strainer weight loading classification is based on ASME A112.6.3. Dimensions are nominal. Full grate free area shall be a minimum of 1.5 times the free area of the outlet pipe size. Provide drain with trap primer connection, trap primer, and connection piping where indicated.

2.12.2.1 FS-1

12 inch square top, 6 inch deep with stainless steel rim and 1/2 stainless steel grate.

2.12.3 Roof Drains

Roof drains shall conform to ASME A112.6.4, with cast iron dome and integral flange, and shall have a device for making a watertight connection between roofing and flashing. Provide roof drains designated as secondary (emergency) overflow drains with 2 inch high dam. The whole assembly shall be heavy pattern cast iron including the dome strainer. Provide drain with a gravel stop. On roofs other than concrete construction, drains shall be complete with underdeck clamp, sump receiver, and an extension for the insulation thickness where applicable. Provide a clamping device for attaching flashing or waterproofing membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the flashing or membrane when present. Strainer openings shall



have a combined area equal to twice that of the drain outlet. The outlet shall be equipped to make a proper connection to threaded pipe of the same size as the rain leader. An expansion joint of proper size to receive the rain leader shall be provided. The expansion joint shall consist of a heavy cast-iron housing, brass or bronze sleeve, brass or bronze fastening bolts and nuts, and gaskets or packing. The sleeve shall have a nominal thickness of not less than 0.134 inch. Gaskets and packing shall be close-cell neoprene, O-ring packing shall be close-cell neoprene of 70 durometer. Packing shall be held in place by a packing gland secured with bolts.

2.12.3.1 RD-1

16 to 19 inch diameter flashing clamp, 11 to 14 inch diameter by 5 inch high dome strainer.

2.12.3.2 RD-2

16 to 19 inch diameter flashing clamp, 11 to 14 inch diameter by 5 inch high dome strainer. Provide minimum 2 inch high internal or external water dam.

2.13 CLEANOUTS

a. Provide cleanouts with coated cast-iron bodies (unless otherwise noted) with extra-heavy, threaded, tapered, brass plug with solid hexagonal nut American Standard pipe threads and stainless steel cover. Provide flashing collars and clamps for cleanout bodies being installed in floors with finishes installed over waterproofing. Cleanouts on piping completely accessible from within pipe chases do not require covers. Cleanouts in exposed piping in equipment rooms do not require covers.

b. Provide interior floor-mounted cleanouts with a two-piece, threaded, adjustable housing. Provide top and cover based on floor finish:

(1) Resilient tile and sheet finish: Round flange top with scoriated cover.

(2) Ceramic tile finish: Square flange top with scoriated cover.

(3) Poured finish: Round, wide-flange top with scoriated cover.

(4) Carpet finish: Round top with standard top tapped for carpet-marker bolt.

(5) Terrazzo finish: Round top with recessed-for-terrazzo cover.

(6) Quarry tile finish: Square, heavy-duty top with heavy-duty scoriated cover.

(7) Concrete finish (unfinished areas): Heavy, round frame; scoriated tractor top, ANSI heavy duty load class.

2.14 TRAPS

2.14.1 Fixture Traps

Unless otherwise specified, traps shall be copper-alloy adjustable tube type with slip joint inlet and swivel. Traps shall be without a cleanout.



Tubes shall be copper alloy with walls not less than 0.032 inch thick within commercial tolerances, except on the outside of bends where the thickness may be reduced slightly in manufacture by usual commercial methods. Inlets shall have rubber washer and copper alloy nuts for slip joints above the discharge level. Swivel joints shall be below the discharge level and shall be of metal-to-metal type as required for the application. Nuts shall have flats for wrench grip. Outlets shall have internal pipe thread, except that when required for the application, the outlets shall have sockets for solder-joint connections. The depth of the water seal shall be not less than 2 inches and not more than 4 inches. The interior diameter shall be not more than 1/8 inch over or under the nominal size, and interior surfaces shall be reasonably smooth throughout. A copper alloy "P" trap assembly consisting of an adjustable "P" trap and threaded trap wall nipple with cast brass wall flange shall be provided for lavatories. The assembly shall be a standard manufactured unit and may have a rubber-gasketed swivel joint.

2.14.2 Drain Traps

Unless otherwise specified, traps shall be cast iron, one piece pattern, deep seal with depth of water seal of 4 inches. The interior diameter shall be not more than 1/8 inch over or under the nominal size, and interior surfaces shall be reasonably smooth throughout. The trap assembly shall be a standard manufactured unit. Traps for drains located in fan and plenum housings shall maintain seal against the static pressure.

2.15 TRAP PRIMER ASSEMBLIES

Provide fully automatic trap primer assemblies, factory assembled and prepiped and including 3/4 inch NPT female inlet, bronze body 3/4 inch female NPT ball valve, 3/4 inch water hammer arrester, ASSE 1001 atmospheric vacuum breaker, and ASTM B88 3/4 inch Type L copper tubing distribution manifold. Distribution manifold shall be calibrated to provide equal water distribution to each trap. Provide minimum supply of 2 ounces of water to each trap. Provide manifold with 5/8 inch x 1/2 inch compression fitting outlets. All solder joints shall be made with lead free solder. Provide electronic assembly tested and certified per UL 73 and including circuit breaker, 5 second dwell function, manual override, 24 hour geared timer, and solenoid valve. Provide single point water supply and power supply connections. Components shall be installed in a NEMA 250 Type 1 surface mounted cabinet.

2.16 PUMPS

2.16.1 Sump Pumps

Provide sump pump and control system capable of pumping water while containing oil. The system shall function automatically and shall provide for an alarm in the event of high liquid in the sump, or high amps or a locked rotor condition. An alarm that sounds only in the event of a high liquid condition shall not be acceptable. Provide submersible type pump. Pump shall be approved to UL 778 standards and shall include thermal and overload protection. Provide motor capable of operating continuously or intermittently. Provide motor housing constructed of 304 stainless steel or cast-iron, and mechanical seals housed in a separate oil-filled compartment. Provide controls approved to UL 508 standards and housed in a NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosure with stainless steel hinged hardware. The controls shall include dual relays with variable sensitivity settings, magnetic contactor with separate over-current relay, self-cleaning



stainless steel sensor probe, high decibel warning horn with illuminated red light and alarm silencing switch, dual floats, clearly marked terminal board and remote monitoring contact. All cables between the pump and control unit shall be a minimum of 16 feet long and the cable and plug from the control unit shall be a minimum of 8 feet long. The control unit, pump, floats, and sensor probe shall be factory assembled as a complete, ready to use system and shall be tested and approved by a nationally recognized testing laboratory such as ENTELA.

2.17 DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE METER

Cold water meters smaller than 2 inches shall be positive displacement type conforming to AWWA C700. Cold water meters 2 inches and larger shall be compound type (positive displacement and turbine) conforming to AWWA C702. Meter register may be round or straight reading type, indicating gallons. Meter shall be provided with a pulse generator with dual outputs, remote readout register and all necessary wiring and accessories. One set of outputs shall be connected to the Facility DDC System for water usage logging.

2.18 WATER SOFTENER SYSTEM

Water softener system shall be central supply, fully automatic type and shall consist of two softener tanks and one brine tank, interconnecting piping, valves and controller. The softener shall operate in alternating arrangement with one softener on-line at all times. Water softener system shall reduce the total hardness to less than 10 ppm as determined by EDTA titration test AWWA 10084-2005. Softener components, valves, controller, piping between vessels and brine tank and other appurtenances shall be provided by a single manufacturer. The system shall be a fully piped and fully wired factory assembled and test skid mounted assembly. Install on concrete housekeeping pad.

Softener tanks shall be FRP design for a listed minimum working pressure of 150 psig and a temperature of 120 F. Piping shall be schedule 80 PVC. Skid piping shall be flanged construction. Grooved fittings are not acceptable. Each vessel shall be supplied with caution exchange resin having a capacity of 30,000 grains/ft3 when regenerated with 15 lb/ft3 of salt. The exchange resin shall be supported by a gravel bed. The internals shall be Schedule 80 PVC with a single point distributor upper distributor and hub and lateral lower distributor. Provide minimum 50 percent tank freeboard with cation resin (minimum 8 percent cross-linked) with two (2) quartz support bed layers.

The brine tank shall be high-density polyethylene with cover and is included with an eductor, a level controlled brine draw, and a refill valve. The brine tank shall be designed as a wet system. This means that the salt level in the tank shall always below the air check on the brine draw valve. The brine tank shall be sized for at least three consecutive regenerations before additional salt must be loaded. The brine tank shall be provided loose and located as shown. Provide a separate water connection with backflow preventer to the brine tank for brine dilution/re-fill. Field connect the brine tank to the softener with Schedule 80 PVC pipe with solvent joints. Provide salt for initial fill, testing, training and top off to full capacity at turn-over to the Government. Provide additional salt for a minimum of 10 complete system regeneration cycles (both tanks regenerated per cycle). System manufacturer shall include the required salt quantity in pounds for a complete two tank system regeneration in the water softener system



submittal. Stored salt quantity shall comply with the manufacturer's system requirements, per cycle. Install on concrete housekeeping pad.

Provide pneumatically actuated automated control valves for process and air vent (air to open, spring to close). Valves shall fail in the closed position in the event of loss of air pressure/power.

The water softeners shall operate in two modes: service and regeneration. Duplex alternating operation consists of two vessels that will run with one in Service mode and one in standby. Upon request of a regeneration cycle, the vessel in service mode will regenerate, while the vessel in standby mode will enter service mode. A totalizing meter shall initiate regeneration. The process shall be programmable to allow for off hour regenerations and have manual override capabilities to allow an operator to manually initiate the regeneration process at any time. The softener controls shall be housed in a single carbon steel NEMA 250, Type 4 control panel mounted on the skid. All skid wiring (for instrumentation, etc.) and pneumatic tubing (for automated valves) originate from the control panel. This single control panel shall provide control and monitoring. The control panel shall be provided with a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) and operator interface. A 6 inch Touch Screen, Human Machine Interface (HMI), shall act as the interface between the operator and the process. The controller shall be provided with dry contacts for remote annunciation of a general alarm (system fault) condition through the building automation system.

A complete water-testing set furnished by the manufacturer shall be provided with the water softener assembly, with complete instructions for conducting either the American Public Health Association test or other suitable test for hardness. Two Baume hydrometers, calibrated for the range necessary for testing saturated brine solution, and three glass cylinders of heat-resistant glass to hold sufficient brine for testing shall be provided.

Manufacturer shall provided factory trained and authorized representative for start-up and Owner training.

2.19 ELECTRICAL WORK

a. Provide electrical motor driven equipment specified complete with motors, motor starters, and controls as specified herein and in Section 26 20 00, INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment. Provide high efficiency type, single-phase, fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors, including motors that are part of a system, corresponding to the applications in accordance with NEMA MG 11. Provide motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and of sufficient size to drive the load at the specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor.

b. Motors shall be rated for continuous duty with the enclosure specified. Motor duty requirements shall allow for maximum frequency start-stop operation and minimum encountered interval between start and stop. Motor torque shall be capable of accelerating the connected load within 20 seconds with 80 percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals during one starting period. Motor bearings shall be fitted with grease supply fittings and grease relief to outside of the enclosure.



c. Controllers and contactors shall have auxiliary contacts for use with the controls provided. Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation specified and any control wiring required for controls and devices specified, but not shown, shall be provided. For packaged equipment, the manufacturer shall provide controllers, including the required monitors and timed restart.

d. Power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment shall be provided under and conform to the requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

2.20 FACTORY PAINTING

a. Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided subject to certification that the factory painting system applied will withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray fog test, except that equipment located outdoors shall withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test. Salt-spray fog test shall be in accordance with ASTM B117, and for that test the acceptance criteria shall be as follows: immediately after completion of the test, the paint shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no loss of adhesion; and the specimen shall show no signs of rust creepage beyond 1/8 inch on either side of the scratch mark.

b. The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment shall not be less than the film thickness used on the test specimen. If manufacturer's standard factory painting system is being proposed for use on surfaces subject to temperatures above 120 degrees F, the factory painting system shall be designed for the temperature service.

2.21 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS




a. Snap-On Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid snap-on, color-coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1.

b. Pressure-Sensitive Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, permanent adhesive, color-coded, pressure-sensitive vinyl pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1.

c. Application: For exterior diameters greater than 6 inch (including insulation if any), provide continuous directional flow arrow tape around pipe circumference; two places, before and after



pipe marker. Provide adhesive plastic pipe markers. For external diameters less than 2 inches (including insulation if any), provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the following methods:

(1) Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker.(2) Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap.(3) Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation).

2.21.2 Valve Tags

Provide 19-gage polished brass valve tags with stamp-engraved piping system abbreviation in 1/4 inch high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2 inch high, and with hole for fastener, or engraved plastic laminate valve tags, with piping system abbreviation in 1/4 inch high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2 inch high, and with hole for fastener. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose. Compile valve schedule for each service. For each page of valve schedule, provide laminated plastic coated cardboard stock sheets.

a. Provide 1-1/2 inch diameter tags, except as otherwise indicated.

b. Provide size and shape as specified or scheduled for each piping system.

c. Fill tag engraving with black enamel.

2.21.3 Engraved Plastic Laminate Signs

Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, in the sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the sizes and wording indicated, black with white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.


Provide manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, color coded equipment markers. Include terminology matching equipment schedules as closely as possible. Provide approximate 2 inch by 4 inch markers for control devices, and 4 inch by 6 inch for equipment. Identify equipment and electrical devices furnished under this section. Equipment markers shall include motor sizes and equipment capacity information.

2.21.5 Plasticized Tags

Provide pre-printed or partially pre-printed accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matt finish suitable for writing, approximately, 2 inch by 6 inch with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre-printed wording including large-size primary wording (as examples; DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT OPERATE).




Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in plumbing identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of plumbing systems and equipment. Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and specified, provide identification which indicates individual system number as well as service (as examples; Mixing Valve No. 2, Pump No. 1).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

After becoming familiar with details of the work, verify dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any work.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

a. The plumbing system shall be installed complete with necessary fixtures, fittings, traps, valves, and accessories. Piping shall be concealed wherever possible. Under no circumstances reduce pipe size on Contract Documents without written consent of Contracting Officer. Extend water and drainage piping 5 feet outside the building, unless otherwise indicated. A OS&Y valve and drain shall be installed on the water service line inside the building approximately 6 inches above the floor from point of entry. Piping shall be connected to the exterior service lines or capped or plugged if the exterior service is not in place. Sewer and water pipes shall be laid in separate trenches, except when otherwise shown. Exterior underground utilities shall be at least 36 inches below finish grade. If trenches are closed or the pipes are otherwise covered before being connected to the service lines, the location of the end of each plumbing utility shall be marked with a stake or other acceptable means. Valves shall be installed with control no lower than the valve body.

b. Provide piping to fixtures, outlets, and equipment requiring drainage, vent, and water utilities. The hot-water and cold-water piping system shall be arranged and installed to permit draining. The supply line to each item of equipment or fixture, except faucets, flush valves, or other control valves which are supplied with integral stops, shall be equipped with a shutoff valve to enable isolation of the item for repair and maintenance without interfering with operation of other equipment or fixtures. Supply piping to fixtures, faucets, hydrants, shower heads, and flushing devices shall be anchored to prevent movement.

c. The work shall be carefully laid out in advance, and unnecessary cutting of construction shall be avoided. Damage to building, piping, wiring, or equipment as a result of cutting shall be repaired by mechanics skilled in the trade involved.

d. Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. Fixtures and equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water, chemicals, and mechanical injury. Upon completion of the work, the fixtures, materials, and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned, adjusted, and operated. Safety guards shall be provided for



exposed rotating equipment.

e. Branch sizes to individual fixtures shall be as scheduled. Consult manufacturer's data, Architectural drawings, and/or Plumbing drawings of rooms containing equipment and plumbing fixtures prior to roughing in piping. Stub piping through wall directly behind equipment item, or fixture being served. Connect equipment furnished by Owner or other divisions of the specification in accordance with this section.

3.3 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEMS

3.3.1 General

Pipe shall be accurately cut and worked into place without springing or forcing. Structural portions of the building shall not be weakened. Aboveground piping shall run parallel with the lines of the building, unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from service lines may be taken from top, bottom, or side of main, using crossover fittings required by structural or installation conditions. Supply pipes, valves, and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and other services to permit not less than 1/2 inch between finished covering on the different services. Bare and insulated water lines shall not bear directly against building structural elements so as to transmit sound to the structure or to prevent flexible movement of the lines. Water pipe shall not be buried in or under floors unless specifically indicated or approved. Changes in pipe sizes shall be made with reducing fittings. Use of bushings will not be permitted except for use in situations in which standard factory fabricated components are furnished to accommodate specific accepted installation practice. Change in direction shall be made with fittings.

3.3.2 Service Entrance

Provide service entrance installation through below grade exterior wall with water-stop pipe sleeves.

3.3.3 Pipe Drains

Pipe drains shall consist of 3/4 inch hose bibb with renewable seat and full port ball valve ahead of hose bibb. At other low points, 3/4 inch brass plugs or caps shall be provided. Disconnection of the supply piping at the fixture is an acceptable drain.

3.3.4 Valves

Provide manual isolation valves at base of risers, on branch runouts from piping mains, on each branch serving a rest room, on each branch serving an equipment item, and on each branch to hose bibb or wall hydrant. Wire isolation valves on emergency fixture supply open and tag "Do Not Close". Balance hot water circulation system.

3.3.5 Expansion and Contraction of Piping

Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction of water pipe. Each hot-water and hot-water circulation riser shall have expansion loops or other provisions such as offsets, changes in direction, or manufactured expansion fittings. Risers shall be securely anchored to force expansion to loops. Branch connections from risers shall be made with ample swing or offset to avoid undue strain on fittings or short pipe lengths. Horizontal runs of pipe over 50 feet in length shall be anchored



to the wall or the supporting construction about midway on the run to force expansion, evenly divided, toward the ends. Sufficient flexibility shall be provided on branch runouts from mains and risers to provide for expansion and contraction of piping. Flexibility shall be provided by installing one or more turns in the line so that piping will spring enough to allow for expansion without straining.

3.3.6 Thrust Restraint

Plugs, caps, tees, valves and bends deflecting 11.25 degrees or more, either vertically or horizontally, in waterlines 4 inches in diameter or larger shall be provided with thrust blocks, to prevent movement. Thrust blocking shall be concrete of a mix not leaner than: 1 cement, 2.5 sand, 5 gravel; and having a compressive strength of not less than 2000 psi after 28 days. Blocking shall be placed between solid ground and the fitting to be anchored. Unless otherwise indicated or directed, the base and thrust bearing sides of the thrust block shall be poured against undisturbed earth. The side of the thrust block not subject to thrust shall be poured against forms. The area of bearing will be as shown. Blocking shall be placed so that the joints of the fitting are accessible for repair. Steel rods and clamps, protected by galvanizing or by coating with bituminous paint, shall be used to anchor vertical down bends into gravity thrust blocks.

3.3.7 Commercial-Type Water Hammer Arresters

Provide commercial-type water hammer arresters on hot- and cold-water supplies. Arresters shall be located as generally indicated, with precise location and sizing to be in accordance with PDI WH 201 Sizing and Placement Data. Water hammer arresters, where concealed, shall be accessible by means of access doors or removable panels. Commercial-type water hammer arresters shall conform to ASSE 1010. Vertical capped pipe columns (air chambers) shall not be permitted.

3.3.8 Water Meter Remote Readout Register

a. Provide true absolute remote readout encoder register providing direct electronic transfer of meter reading information from water meter to automatic meter reading device. The remote register shall be mounted at the location indicated, or as directed by the Contracting Officer. The meter shall be provided with dual pulse outputs for connection to building automation system and future point of presence panel.

b. Provide permanently sealed register to exclude dirt and/or moisture infiltration. Provide with a straight reading odometer-type display, and 360 degree test circle with center sweep hand and low flow (leak) detector. Provide tamperproof locking feature to resist tampering with the register. Provide factory potted moisture resistant wire assembly for pit applications.

c. Provide registers with full 6-wheel encoding, and a 6-wheel odometer assembly for direct manual reading. The register shall transmit data using open architecture variable length protocol in ASCII format (American Standard Code for Information Interchange). Provide with capacity of remote installation up to 300 feet to an outside wall mounted touch pad.

d. The register shall use an absolute encoder to directly read the actual position of the index odometer wheels, when interrogated by a reading



device. The reading device shall provide all necessary power. Pulse outputs and/or memory shall not require programming. The register shall not require battery power to operate. When a reading device interrogates the register, the translator encoder shall communicate to the device in ASCII computer language the absolute meter reading, and an eight-digit identification number. Any error or nonread shall be immediately indicated by the meter reading equipment.

3.3.9 Backflow Prevention Devices

Plumbing fixtures, equipment, and pipe connections shall not cross connect or interconnect between a potable water supply and any source of nonpotable water. Backflow preventers shall be installed where indicated and in accordance with ICC IPC at all other locations necessary to preclude a cross-connect or interconnect between a potable water supply and any nonpotable substance. In addition backflow preventers shall be installed at all locations where the potable water outlet is below the flood level of the equipment, or where the potable water outlet will be located below the level of the nonpotable substance. Backflow preventers shall be located so that no part of the device will be submerged. Backflow preventers shall be of sufficient size to allow unrestricted flow of water to the equipment, and preclude the backflow of any nonpotable substance into the potable water system. Bypass piping shall not be provided around backflow preventers. Access shall be provided for maintenance and testing. Each device shall be a standard commercial unit. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention devices shall be installed horizontally and located in an accessible location not more than 4 feet above finished floor. Pipe drain from reduced pressure principle backflow prevention devices to the exterior, or a floor drain of adequate capacity, or a mop sink.

3.4 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS

3.4.1 General

a. Provide wye fittings and eighth bends, or combination wye and eighth fittings at changes of direction and junctions. Sanitary tee fittings shall only be used in vertical pipe. Sanitary crosses are not permitted. Provide P-trap for each direct waste-pipe connection to equipment.

b. Install horizontal soil, waste, and storm piping with the following minimum slopes; 3 inch and smaller pipes shall be 1/4 inch per foot; 4 inch to 6 inch shall be 1/8 inch per foot; 8 inch and larger pipes: 1/16 inch per foot. Slopes indicated on plans override those indicated here.

c. Provide vent stacks parallel to soil and waste stacks to receive branch vents from fixtures. Each vent stack shall originate from a soil or waste stack at its base. To permit proper flashing, offset through-the-roof piping away from walls on roof before passing through roof. Carry vent stacks 4 inch and larger full size through roof. Install vent lines so they will drain and not trap water. Where possible combine soil, waste or vent stacks before passing through roof to minimize roof openings. Where minimum vent-through-roof size is larger than vent size, provide increaser a minimum of 12 inch below roof line.

d. Provide drip pans under drainage piping installed over critical areas to include but not limited to: operating rooms, recovery rooms,



delivery rooms, nurseries, food preparation areas, food serving areas, food storage areas, central service areas, and electronic data processing areas. Provide drain piping from drip pans. Discharge drain piping to drain in exposed area.

e. Installed piping shall not be insulated, concealed, or furred around until it has been tested to satisfaction of the Contracting Officer. If inspection or test indicates defects, replace such defective work or material and repeat inspection and tests. Repairs shall be made with new materials. Peening and chiseling of holes or screwed joints is not allowed.

3.4.2 Pipe Cleanouts

Pipe cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe except that cleanout plugs larger than 4 inches will not be required. A cleanout installed in connection with cast-iron soil pipe shall consist of a long-sweep 1/4 bend or one or two 1/8 bends extended to the location shown. An extra-heavy cast-brass or cast-iron ferrule with countersunk cast-brass head screw plug shall be caulked into the hub of the fitting and shall be flush with the floor. Cleanouts in connection with other pipe shall be T-pattern, 90-degree branch drainage fittings with cast-brass screw plugs. Plugs shall be the same size as the pipe up to and including 4 inches. Cleanout tee branches with screw plug shall be installed at the foot of soil and waste stacks, at the foot of interior downspouts, on each connection to building storm drain where interior downspouts are indicated, and on each building drain outside the building. Cleanout tee branches may be omitted on stacks in single story buildings with slab-on-grade construction or where less than 18 inches of crawl space is provided under the floor. Cleanouts on pipe concealed in partitions shall be provided with chromium plated bronze, nickel bronze, nickel brass or stainless steel flush type access cover plates. Round access covers shall be provided and secured to plugs with securing screw. Square access covers may be provided with matching frames, anchoring lugs and cover screws. Cleanouts in finished walls shall have access covers and frames installed flush with the finished wall. Cleanouts installed in finished floors subject to foot traffic shall be provided with a stainless steelcover secured to the plug or cover frame and set flush with the finished floor. Heads of fastening screws shall not project above the cover surface. Where cleanouts are provided with adjustable heads, the heads shall be cast iron. Provide cleanout extensions through floor above where cleanouts are required in piping above critical areas, or to an accessible location outside of critical area.

3.4.3 Sight Drains

Sight drains shall be installed so that the indirect waste will terminate 2 inches above the flood rim of the funnel to provide an acceptable air gap.

3.4.4 Traps

Each trap shall be placed as near the fixture as possible, and no fixture shall be double-trapped. Traps installed on cast-iron soil pipe shall be cast iron. Traps installed on steel pipe or copper tubing shall be recess-drainage pattern, or brass-tube type. Traps for acid-resisting waste shall be of the same material as the pipe.

3.5 JOINTS

Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the



manufacturer's recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Joints shall be made up with fittings of compatible material and made for the specific purpose intended.

3.5.1 Threaded

Threaded joints shall have American Standard taper pipe threads conforming to ASME B1.20.1. Only male pipe threads shall be coated with graphite or with an approved graphite compound, or with an inert filler and oil, or shall have a polytetrafluoroethylene tape applied.

3.5.2 Unions and Flanges

Unions, flanges and mechanical couplings shall not be concealed in walls, ceilings, or partitions. Unions shall be used on pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and smaller; flanges shall be used on pipe sizes 3 inches and larger.

3.5.3 Cast Iron Soil Pipe

Bell and spigot compression and hubless gasketed clamp joints for soil, waste and vent piping shall be installed per the manufacturer's recommendations.

3.5.4 Copper Tube and Pipe

3.5.4.1 Brazed Joint

In conformance with AWS B2.2/B2.2M and CDA A4015 with flux and are acceptable for all pipe sizes. Copper to copper joints shall include the use of copper-phosphorus or copper-phosphorus-silver brazing metal without flux. Brazing of dissimilar metals (copper to bronze or brass) shall include the use of flux with either a copper-phosphorus, copper-phosphorus-silver or a silver brazing filler metal.

3.5.4.2 Soldered Joint

Make with flux. Soldered joints shall conform to ASME B31.5 and CDA A4015.

3.5.5 Other Joint Methods

Connections between ferrous and non-ferrous copper water pipe shall be made with dielectric unions or flange waterways. Dielectric waterways shall have temperature and pressure rating equal to or greater than that specified for the connecting piping. Waterways shall have metal connections on both ends suited to match connecting piping. Dielectric waterways shall be internally lined with an insulator specifically designed to prevent current flow between dissimilar metals. Dielectric flanges shall meet the performance requirements described herein for dielectric waterways. Connecting joints between plastic and metallic pipe shall be made with transition fitting for the specific purpose.

3.6 CORROSION PROTECTION FOR BURIED PIPE AND FITTINGS

Ductile iron and cast iron pipe, fittings, and joints shall have a factory applied protective coating. Buried copper tubing and fittings shall be provided with tape type coating system. Coatings shall be selected, applied, and inspected in accordance with NACE SP0169 and as otherwise specified. The pipe shall be cleaned and the coating system applied prior



to pipe tightness testing. Joints and fittings shall be cleaned and the coating system applied after pipe tightness testing. For tape coating systems, the tape shall conform to AWWA C203 and shall be applied with a 50 percent overlap. Primer utilized with tape type coating systems shall be as recommended by the tape manufacturer.

3.7 BUILDING SURFACE PENETRATIONS

Unless otherwise indicated, provide pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, and concrete floors with pipe sleeves fitted into place at the time of construction. Sleeves shall be fabricated of black steel pipe; ASTM A53/A53M, Standard weight. Extend each sleeve through its respective wall or floor and cut flush with each surface, except in floors; extend sleeves above slab at least 2 inches. Unless indicated to be equipped with a modular mechanical sealing assembly, or otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings, provide sleeves large enough to provide a minimum clearance of 1/4 inch all around the pipe/insulation penetrating the sleeve or as required for compliance with the selected UL listed penetration assembly for penetrations through rated assemblies. For insulated piping, insulation shall be continuous through the sleeve. Do not install sleeves in structural members except where indicated or approved. Sleeves in interior gyp board partitions are generally not required unless specifically indicated on the Architectural Drawing partition details.

3.7.1 Fire-Rated/Smoke-Rated Penetrations

Details are indicated on the Architectural Drawings, AE810 series, indicating conditions for penetrations through fire and smoke rate assemblies. Provide sleeved or non-sleeved installation as indicated. Seal the annular space between the pipe and sleeve with fire-stopping material and sealant that meet the requirement of Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.

3.7.2 Waterproof Penetrations


3.8 FLASHING

3.8.1 Flashing Requirements

Pipes passing through roof shall be installed through a 16 ounce copper flashing, each within an integral skirt or flange. Flashing shall be suitably formed, and the skirt or flange shall extend not less than 8 inches



from the pipe and shall be set over the roof or floor membrane in a solid coating of bituminous cement. The flashing shall extend up the pipe a minimum of 10 inches. For cleanouts, the flashing shall be turned down into the hub and caulked after placing the ferrule. Pipes passing through pitched roofs shall be flashed, using lead or copper flashing, with an adjustable integral flange of adequate size to extend not less than 8 inches from the pipe in all directions and lapped into the roofing to provide a watertight seal. The annular space between the flashing and the bare pipe or between the flashing and the metal-jacket-covered insulation shall be sealed as indicated. Flashing for dry vents shall be turned down into the pipe to form a waterproof joint. Pipes, up to and including 10 inches in diameter, passing through roof or floor waterproofing membrane may be installed through a cast-iron sleeve with caulking recess, anchor lugs, flashing-clamp device, and pressure ring with brass bolts. Flashing shield shall be fitted into the sleeve clamping device. Pipes passing through wall waterproofing membrane shall be sleeved as described above. A waterproofing clamping flange shall be installed.

3.8.2 Optional Counterflashing

Instead of turning the flashing down into a dry vent pipe, or caulking and sealing the annular space between the pipe and flashing or metal-jacket-covered insulation and flashing, counterflashing may be accomplished by utilizing the following:

a. A standard roof coupling for threaded pipe up to 6 inches in diameter.

b. A tack-welded or banded-metal rain shield around the pipe.

3.8.3 Pipe Penetrations of Slab on Grade Floors

Where pipes, fixture drains, floor drains, cleanouts or similar items penetrate slab on grade floors, except at penetrations of floors with waterproofing membrane as specified in paragraphs Flashing Requirements and Waterproofing, a groove 1/4 to 1/2 inch wide by 1/4 to 3/8 inch deep shall be formed around the pipe, fitting or drain. The groove shall be filled with a sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.

3.8.4 Pipe Penetrations

Provide sealants for all pipe penetrations not provided with sealed firestop systems or modular link seals. All pipe penetrations shall be sealed to prevent infiltration of air, insects, and vermin.

3.9 PIPE HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS

Installation of pipe hangers, inserts and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, except as modified herein.

a. Type 1, provide with adjustable type steel support rods.

b. Types 5, 12, and 26 shall not be used.

c. Type 3 shall not be used on insulated pipe.

d. Type 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete is placed. Continuous inserts which allow more adjustment may be used if they otherwise meet the requirements for type 18 inserts.



e. Type 19 and 23 C-clamps shall be used for attachment to steel joists and shall be torqued per MSS SP-69. Provide both locknuts and retaining devices furnished by the manufacturer. Field-fabricated C-clamp bodies or retaining devices are not acceptable.

f. Type 20 attachments shall be used on steel angles and vertical web steel channels and shall be furnished with an added malleable-iron heel plate or adapter. Attach to horizontal web steel channel with drilled hole on centerline and double nut and washer.

g. Type 21, 28, 29, and 30 clamps shall be used for attachment to steel W or S beams.

h. Type 24 may be used only on trapeze hanger systems or on fabricated frames.

i. Type 39 saddles shall be used on insulated pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or higher. Type 39 saddles shall be welded to the pipe.

j. Type 40 shields shall:

(1) Be used on insulated pipe less than 4 inches.

(2) Be used on insulated pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or less.

(3) Have a high density insert for all pipe sizes. High density inserts shall have a density of 8 pcf or greater.

k. Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP-69 and a support shall be installed not over 1 foot from the pipe fitting joint at each change in direction of the piping. Pipe supports shall be spaced not over 5 feet apart at valves. Horizontal pipe runs shall include allowances for expansion and contraction.

l. Vertical pipe shall be supported at each floor, except at slab-on-grade, at intervals of not more than 15 feet nor more than 8 feet from end of risers, and at vent terminations. Vertical pipe risers shall include allowances for expansion and contraction.

m. Type 35 guides using steel, reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) or graphite slides shall be provided to allow longitudinal pipe movement. Slide materials shall be suitable for the system operating temperatures, atmospheric conditions, and bearing loads encountered. Lateral restraints shall be provided as needed. Where steel slides do not require provisions for lateral restraint the following may be used:

(10 On pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or higher, a Type 39 saddle, welded to the pipe, may freely rest on a steel plate.

(2) On pipe less than 4 inches a Type 40 shield, attached to the pipe or insulation, may freely rest on a steel plate.

(3) On pipe 4 inches and larger carrying medium less than 60 degrees F a Type 40 shield, attached to the pipe or insulation, may freely rest on a steel plate.



n. Pipe hangers on horizontal insulated pipe shall be the size of the outside diameter of the insulation. The insulation shall be continuous through the hanger on all pipe sizes and applications.

o. Where there are high system temperatures and welding to piping is not desirable, the type 35 guide shall include a pipe cradle, welded to the guide structure and strapped securely to the pipe. The pipe shall be separated from the slide material by at least 4 inches or by an amount adequate for the insulation, whichever is greater.

p. Hangers and supports for plastic pipe shall not compress, distort, cut or abrade the piping, and shall allow free movement of pipe except where otherwise required in the control of expansion/contraction.

q. Hangers used to support piping 2 inches and larger shall be fabricated to permit adequate adjustment after erection while still supporting the load. Pipe guides and anchors shall be installed to keep pipes in accurate alignment, to direct the expansion movement, and to prevent buckling, swaying, and undue strain. Piping subjected to vertical movement when operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures shall be supported by variable spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers. In the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member, a clip or clamp shall be used where each pipe crosses the base support member. Spacing of the base support members shall not exceed the hanger and support spacing required for an individual pipe in the multiple pipe run. Threaded sections of rods shall not be formed or bent.

3.9.1 Structural Attachments

Attachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast-in concrete inserts, built-in anchors, or masonry anchor devices. Inserts and anchors shall be applied with a safety factor not less than 5. Supports shall not be attached to metal decking. Supports shall not be attached to the underside of concrete filled floor or concrete roof decks unless approved by the Contracting Officer. Masonry anchors for overhead applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only.

3.10 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS

Polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and fittings shall be provided where exposed to view. Angle stops, straight stops, stops integral with the faucets, or concealed type of lock-shield, and loose-key pattern stops for supplies with threaded, sweat or solvent weld inlets shall be furnished and installed with fixtures. Where connections between copper tubing and faucets are made by rubber compression fittings, a beading tool shall be used to mechanically deform the tubing above the compression fitting. Exposed traps and supply pipes for fixtures and equipment shall be connected to the rough piping systems at the wall, unless otherwise specified under the item. Drain lines and hot water lines of fixtures for handicapped/accessible fixtures shall be insulated and do not require polished chrome finish. Plumbing fixtures and accessories shall be installed within the space shown.

3.10.1 Fixture Connections

Connections between earthenware fixtures and flanges on soil pipe shall be made gastight and watertight with a closet-setting compound or neoprene gasket and seal. Use of natural rubber gaskets or putty will not be



permitted. Fixtures with outlet flanges shall be set the proper distance from floor or wall to make a first-class joint with the closet-setting compound or gasket and fixture used.

3.10.2 Flushometer Valves

Flushometer valves shall be secured to prevent movement by anchoring the long finished top spud connecting tube to wall adjacent to valve with approved metal bracket. Flushometer valves for water closets shall be arranged to avoid interference with grab bars. In addition, for water closets intended for handicap use, the flush valve handle shall be installed on the wide side of the enclosure. Bumpers for water closet seats shall be installed on the wall.

3.10.3 Height of Fixture Rims Above Floor

Unless otherwise noted, mounting heights shall be as indicated. Installation of fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall be in accordance with ICC A117.1.

3.10.4 Shower Bath Outfits

The area around the water supply piping to the mixing valves and behind the escutcheon plate shall be made watertight by caulking or gasketing.

3.10.5 Fixture Supports

Fixture supports for off-the-floor lavatories, urinals, water closets, and other fixtures of similar size, design, and use, shall be of the chair-carrier type. The carrier shall provide the necessary means of mounting the fixture, with a foot or feet to anchor the assembly to the floor slab. Adjustability shall be provided to locate the fixture at the desired height and in proper relation to the wall. Support plates, in lieu of chair carrier, shall be fastened to the wall structure only where it is not possible to anchor a floor-mounted chair carrier to the floor slab.

3.10.5.1 Support for Steel Stud Frame Partitions

Chair carrier shall be used. The anchor feet and tubular uprights shall be of the heavy duty design; and feet (bases) shall be steel and welded to a square or rectangular steel tube upright.

3.10.6 Access Panels

Access panels shall be provided for concealed valves and controls, or any item requiring inspection or maintenance. Access panels shall be of sufficient size and located so that the concealed items may be serviced, maintained, or replaced. Access panels shall be as specified in Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.

3.10.7 Escutcheons

Escutcheons shall be provided at finished surfaces where bare or insulated piping, exposed to view, passes through floors, walls, or ceilings, except in boiler, utility, or equipment rooms. Escutcheons shall be fastened securely to pipe or pipe covering and shall be satin-finish, corrosion-resisting steel, polished chromium-plated zinc alloy, or polished chromium-plated copper alloy. Escutcheons shall be one-piece held in place by setscrew.



3.11 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING, EQUIPMENT AND PHYSICAL HAZARDS

Identify piping and physical hazards in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.144, ANSI A13.1, ANSI Z535.1. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment. Identify each piping system and item of equipment indicated on contract drawings.


Install plastic pipe markers on each system, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, crawl spaces) and exterior non-concealed locations.


b. Near each branch; mark each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern.


d. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping.


f. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50 feet along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 25 feet in congested areas of piping and equipment.

3.11.2 Valves

Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping system. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system. Turn valve schedules over to Contracting Officer. Provide 1/2 inch red adhesive identification dots on ceiling tiles located immediately below balancing valves and shutoff valves.

3.11.3 Plumbing Equipment

Install engraved plastic laminate sign or plastic equipment marker on or near each major item of plumbing equipment and each operational device. Provide minimum 1/4 inch high lettering for name of unit where viewing distance is less than 1/2 inch high for distances up to 6 feet, and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering of 2/3 to 3/4 of size of the principal lettering. In addition to name of identified unit, provide lettering to distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.



3.12 PAINTING

3.12.1 General

Painting of pipes, hangers, supports, and other iron work, either in concealed spaces or exposed spaces, is specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS. New equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied, and shall be as specified herein or in PART 2 paragraph FACTORY PAINTING, and provided under each individual section.

3.12.2 Shop Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces

a. Clean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces need not be painted. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except metal surfaces subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F shall be cleaned to bare metal.

b. Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after the preceding coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and retouch before applying the succeeding coat. Color of finish coat shall be aluminum or light gray.

(1) Temperatures Less Than 120 Degrees F: Immediately after cleaning, the metal surfaces shall receive one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.3 mil, one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil; and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil per coat.

(2) Temperatures Between 120 and 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces shall receive two coats of 400 degrees F heat-resisting enamel applied to a total minimum thickness of 2 mils.

(3) Temperatures Greater Than 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces shall receive two coats of 600 degrees F heat-resisting paint applied to a total minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.

3.13 VIBRATION-ABSORBING FEATURES

Mechanical equipment, including pumps, shall be isolated from the building structure by approved vibration-absorbing features, unless otherwise shown. Each foundation shall include an adequate number of standard isolation units. Each unit shall consist of machine and floor or foundation fastening, together with intermediate isolation material, and shall be a standard product with printed load rating. Piping connected to mechanical equipment shall be provided with flexible connectors.

3.14 TRAINING

a. Provide the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to the designated Government personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the specified equipment or system. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work.

b. Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the



equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section. When more than 4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately half of the time for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction with the equipment or system.

c. When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.

3.15 POSTED INSTRUCTIONS

Framed instructions under glass or in laminated plastic, including wiring and control diagrams showing the complete layout of the entire system, shall be posted where directed. Condensed operating instructions explaining preventive maintenance procedures, methods of checking the system for normal safe operation, and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system shall be prepared in typed form, framed as specified above for the wiring and control diagrams and posted beside the diagrams. The framed instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the systems.

3.16 TESTS, FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION

Submit test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria, completion and testing of the installed system. Each test report shall indicate the final position of controls.

3.16.1 Plumbing System

The following tests shall be performed on the plumbing system in accordance with ICC IPC, except that the drainage and vent system final test shall include the smoke test. The Contractor has the option to perform a peppermint test in lieu of the smoke test. If a peppermint test is chosen, submit a testing procedure to the Contracting Officer for approval.

a. Drainage and Vent Systems Test. The final test shall include a smoke test.

b. Building Sewers Tests.

c. Water Supply Systems Tests.

3.16.1.1 Test of Backflow Prevention Assemblies

Backflow prevention assembly shall be tested using gauges specifically designed for the testing of backflow prevention assemblies. Certification of proper operation shall be as accomplished in accordance with state regulations by an individual certified by the state to perform such tests. If no state requirement exists, have the manufacturer's representative test the device, to ensure the unit is properly installed and performing as intended. Submit written documentation of the tests performed and signed by the individual performing the tests. Gauges shall be tested annually for accuracy in accordance with the University of Southern California's Foundation of Cross Connection Control and Hydraulic Research or the



American Water Works Association Manual of Cross Connection (Manual M-14). Report form for each assembly shall include, as a minimum, the following:

Data on Device Data on Testing Firm

Type of Assembly Name

Manufacturer Address

Model Number Certified Tester

Serial Number Certified Tester No.

Size Date of Test

Location

Test Pressure Readings Serial Number and Test Data of Gauges

If the unit fails to meet specified requirements, the unit shall be repaired and retested.

3.16.1.2 Shower Pans

After installation of the pan and finished floor, the drain shall be temporarily plugged below the weep holes. The floor area shall be flooded with water to a minimum depth of 1 inch for a period of 24 hours. Any drop in the water level during test, except for evaporation, will be reason for rejection, repair, and retest.

3.16.2 Defective Work

If inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced or repaired as necessary and inspection and tests shall be repeated. Repairs to piping shall be made with new materials. Caulking of screwed joints or holes will not be acceptable.

3.16.3 System Flushing

3.16.3.1 During Flushing

Before operational tests or disinfection, potable water piping system shall be flushed with potable water. Sufficient water shall be used to produce a water velocity that is capable of entraining and removing debris in all portions of the piping system. This requires simultaneous operation of all fixtures on a common branch or main in order to produce a flushing velocity of approximately 4 fps through all portions of the piping system. In the event that this is impossible due to size of system, the Contracting Officer (or the designated representative) shall specify the number of fixtures to be operated during flushing. Provide adequate personnel to monitor the flushing operation and to ensure that drain lines are unobstructed in order to prevent flooding of the facility. Contractor is responsible for any flood damage resulting from flushing of the system. Flushing shall be continued until entrained dirt and other foreign materials have been removed and until discharge water shows no discoloration. All faucets and drinking water fountains, to include any



device considered as an end point device by NSF/ANSI 61, Section 9, shall be flushed a minimum of 0.25 gallons per 24 hour period, ten times over a 14 day period.

3.16.3.2 After Flushing

System shall be drained at low points. Strainer screens shall be removed, cleaned, and replaced. After flushing and cleaning, systems shall be prepared for testing by immediately filling water piping with clean, fresh potable water. Any stoppage, discoloration, or other damage to the finish, furnishings, or parts of the building due to the Contractor's failure to properly clean the piping system shall be repaired. When the system flushing is complete, the hot-water system shall be adjusted for uniform circulation. Flushing devices and automatic control systems shall be adjusted for proper operation according to manufacturer's instructions. Comply with ASHRAE 90.1 - IP for minimum efficiency requirements. Unless more stringent local requirements exist, lead levels shall not exceed limits established by 40 CFR 50.12 Part 141.80(c)(1). The water supply to the building shall be tested separately to ensure that any lead contamination found during potable water system testing is due to work being performed inside the building.

3.16.4 Operational Test

Upon completion of flushing and prior to disinfection procedures, subject the plumbing system to operating tests to demonstrate satisfactory installation, connections, adjustments, and functional and operational efficiency. Such operating tests shall cover a period of not less than 8 hours for each system and shall include the following information in a report with conclusion as to the adequacy of the system:

a. Time, date, and duration of test.

b. Water pressures at the most remote and the highest fixtures.

c. Operation of each fixture and fixture trim.

d. Operation of each valve, hydrant, and faucet.

e. Temperature of each domestic hot-water supply.

f. Operation of each floor and roof drain by flooding with water.

g. Operation of each vacuum breaker and backflow preventer.

h. Complete operation of each sump pump system.

3.16.5 Disinfection

After operational tests are complete, disinfect the entire domestic hot- and cold-water distribution system. Flush the system as specified, before introducing chlorinating material. The chlorinating material shall be hypochlorites or liquid chlorine. Except as herein specified, water chlorination procedure shall be in accordance with AWWA C651 and AWWA C652. The chlorinating material shall be fed into the water piping system at a constant rate at a concentration of at least 50 parts per million (ppm). Use a properly adjusted hypochlorite solution injected into the main with a hypochlorinator, or liquid chlorine injected into the main through a solution-feed chlorinator and booster pump. If after the 24 hour and 6



hour holding periods, the residual solution contains less than 25 ppm and 50 ppm chlorine respectively, flush the piping and tank with potable water, and repeat the above procedures until the required residual chlorine levels are satisfied. The system, including the tanks, shall then be flushed with clean water until the residual chlorine level is reduced to less than one part per million. During the flushing period each valve and faucet shall be opened and closed several times. Samples of water in disinfected containers shall be obtained from several locations selected by the Contracting Officer. The samples of water shall be tested for total coliform organisms (coliform bacteria, fecal coliform, streptococcal, and other bacteria) in accordance with AWWA 10084. The testing method used shall be either the multiple-tube fermentation technique or the membrane-filter technique. Disinfection shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of coliform organisms (zero mean coliform density per 100 milliliters) in the samples for at least 2 full days. The system will not be accepted until satisfactory bacteriological results have been obtained.

3.17 WASTE MANAGEMENT

Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers. Return solvent and oil soaked rags for contaminant recovery and laundering or for proper disposal. Close and seal tightly partly used sealant and adhesive containers and store in protected, well-ventilated, fire-safe area at moderate temperature. Place used sealant and adhesive tubes and containers in areas designated for hazardous waste. Separate copper and ferrous pipe waste in accordance with the Waste Management Plan and place in designated areas for reuse.




SECTION 22 08 00.00 50

COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS01/14

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)

LEED (V3/2009) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design(tm) Green Building Rating System for New Construction (LEED-NC)

1.2 SUMMARY

This project will have selected building systems commissioned. The commissioning process, which the Contractor is responsible to execute, is defined in Section 01 91 13.00 50 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS. A Commissioning Agent (CA) appointed by the Government will direct the commissioning process.

1.2.1 This Section Includes

Requirements for commissioning the plumbing systems, sub-systems and equipment. This Section supplements the general requirements specified in Section 01 91 13.00 50 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS.

1.2.2 Commissioning Activities

a. The commissioning activities have been developed to support the United States Green Building Council (USGBC) LEED™ rating program and to support delivery of project performance in accordance with the Contract Documents.

(1) Commissioning activities and documentation for the LEED™ section on "Energy and Atmosphere" prerequisite of "Fundamental Building Systems Commissioning".(2) Commissioning activities and documentation for the LEED™ section on "Energy and Atmosphere" requirements for the "Enhanced Building System Commissioning" credit. (3) Activities and documentation for the LEED™ section on "Measurement and Verification" requirements for the Measurement and Verification credit.

1.2.3 Related Sections

Refer to Section 01 91 13.00 50 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for more details regarding processes and procedures as well as roles and responsibilities for all Commissioning Team members.

SECTION 22 08 00.00 50 Page 1


1.3 DEFINITIONS

Refer to Section 01 91 13.00 50 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for definitions.

1.4 COMMISSIONED SYSTEMS

a. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in this Division 22 is part of the construction process. Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of User's Operation and Maintenance personnel, is required in cooperation with the Contracting Officer and the Commissioning Agent.

b. The following Plumbing systems will be commissioned:

(1) Domestic Hot Water systems (hot water balancing valves, backflow preventers, water meters).(2)Dental Air Systems (high vacuum pumps, dental air compressors, valves, oral evacuation vacuum pumps and accumulators, amalgam separators).(3) Sewage Ejection Pumps (sump level controls, pump alternator, alarms and alarm panel, pumps and motors).(4) Domestic Water Filtration and Softener Systems (Tanks and casings, gages and instruments, controls, pumps and motors - if applicable, packaged piping, alarms).(5) Emergency Plumbing Fixtures (showers, eye wash stations, water tempering valves, instruments and gages).

1.5 SUBMITTALS

a. The commissioning process requires review of selected Submittals. The Commissioning Agent will provide a list of submittals that will be reviewed by the Commissioning Agent. This list will be reviewed and approved by NAVFAC prior to forwarding to the Contractor. Refer to Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES for further details.

b. The commissioning process requires Submittal review simultaneously with engineering review. Specific submittal requirements related to the commissioning process are specified in Section 01 91 13.00 50 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SYSTEMS READINESS CHECKLISTS

The Contractor shall complete Systems Readiness Checklists to verify systems, sub-systems, and equipment installation is complete and systems are ready for Systems Functional Testing. The Commissioning Agent will prepare Systems Readiness Checklists to be used to document equipment installation. The Contractor shall complete the checklists. Completed checklists shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer and to the Commissioning Agent for review. The Commissioning Agent may spot-check a sample of completed checklists. If the Commissioning Agent determines that the information provided on the checklist is not accurate, the Commissioning Agent will return the marked-up checklist to the Contractor for correction and re-submission. If the Commissioning Agent determines

SECTION 22 08 00.00 50 Page 2


that a significant number of completed checklists for similar equipment are not accurate, the Commissioning Agent will select a broader sample of checklists for review. If the Commissioning Agent determines that a significant number of the broader sample of checklists is also inaccurate, all the checklists for the type of equipment will be returned to the Contractor for correction and re-submission. Refer to Section 01 91 13.00 50 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for submittal requirements for System Readiness Checklists, Equipment Startup Reports, and other commissioning documents.

3.2 CONTRACTOR'S TESTS

Contractor tests as required by other Sections of Division 22 shall be scheduled and documented. The Commissioning Agent will witness selected Contractor tests. Contractor tests shall be completed prior to scheduling Systems Functional Performance Testing.

3.3 SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING

The Commissioning Process includes Systems Functional Performance Testing that is intended to test systems functional performance under steady state conditions, to test system reaction to changes in operating conditions, and system performance under emergency conditions. The Commissioning Agent will prepare detailed Systems Functional Performance Test procedures for review and approval by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall review and comment on the tests prior to approval. The Contractor shall provide the required labor, materials, and test equipment identified in the test procedure to perform the tests. The Commissioning Agent will direct and document the testing. The Contractor shall sign the test reports to verify tests were performed. See Section 01 91 13.00 50 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS, for additional details.

3.4 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL

Training of User's operation and maintenance personnel is required in cooperation with the Contracting Officer and Commissioning Agent. Provide competent, factory authorized personnel to provide instruction to operation and maintenance personnel concerning the location, operation, and troubleshooting of the installed systems. The instruction shall be scheduled in coordination with Contracting Officer after submission and approval of formal training plans. Refer to Section 01 91 13.00 50 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS and Division 22 Sections for additional Contractor training requirements.


SECTION 22 08 00.00 50 Page 3


SECTION 22 60 70

GAS AND VACUUM SYSTEMS FOR HEALTHCARE FACILITIES05/09

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES





ASSE 6000 SERIES (2012) Professional Qualification Standard for Medical Gas Systems Installers, Inspectors and Verifiers




ASME B16.50 (2013) Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Braze-Joint Pressure Fittings


ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 (2010) BPVC Section VIII-Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels Division 1


ASTM B819 (2000; R 2011) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Medical Gas Systems


ASTM D1785 (2012) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC), Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120

ASTM D2564 (2012) Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems



ASTM D2665 (2012) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings

COMPRESSED GAS ASSOCIATION (CGA)

CGA G-4.1 (2009) Cleaning Equipment for Oxygen Service; 6th Edition

CGA M-1 (2013) Guide for Medical Gas Supply Systems at Consumer Sites; 2nd Edition

CGA V-5 (2008; R 2013) Diameter-Index Safety System (Non-Interchangeable Low Pressure Connections for Medical Gas Applications); 6th Edition

INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)

ICC IPC (2012) International Plumbing Code

INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO)

ISO 11143 (2008) Dentistry - Amalgam Separators




NFPA 55 (2013; TIA 12-1; TIA 13-2; Errata 2013) Compressed Gases and Cryogenic Fluids Codes

NFPA 99 (2012; TIA 11-1; TIA 11-2; Errata 12-1; TIA 12-3; TIA 13-4; TIA 13-5) Health Care Facilities Code




UL 508A (2001; Reprint Feb 2010) Industrial Control Panels


a. Provide the following gas, support, and vacuum systems conforming to NFPA 99 Category 3 criteria: dental compressed air (DA), laboratory compressed air (LA), process compressed air (PA), dental high vacuum (DHV) and oral evacuation (OE).



1.2.1 Design Requirements

1.2.1.1 Dental High Vacuum (DHV), and Waste Anesthesia Gas Disposal (WAGD)

Systems are dry vacuum systems and shall not be supplied to or used for any purpose other than patient care applications.

1.2.1.2 Oral Evacuation (OE)

System is a wet vacuum system and shall not be supplied to or used for any purpose other than patient care applications.

1.2.1.3 Support Utilities

Dental Compressed Air (DA), Laboratory Compressed Air (LA), and Process Compressed Air (PA) systems are support utilities and shall not be supplied to or used for patient respiration applications.

1.2.1.4 Laboratory Compressed Air (LA) and Process Compressed Air (PA)

Shall be configured as the following:

a. Combined with and powered by the Dental Compressed Air (DA) system, in which case the LA and/or PA system shall conform to NFPA 99 Category 3 criteria.

1.2.2 Sustainable Design Requirements

1.2.2.1 Local/Regional Materials

Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available from a minimum of three sources.


a. Provide all labor, equipment and services necessary for and incidental to the installation of piped dental gas, support, and vacuum systems. All systems shall be complete, started, tested and ready for use.

b. Provide system delivery pressure as follows:

Dental compressed air 90 psi

Laboratory compressed air 50-55 psi

Process compressed air 85 psi



d. Provide system vacuum as follows:

Dental high vacuum, medical-surgical vacuum

19 inches Hg vacuum

Dental oral evacuation 8 inches Hg vacuum

Waste anesthesia gas disposal 12 inches Hg vacuum

1.2.4 Accessibility of Equipment

Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance, and repair are readily accessible. Install concealed valves, and equipment requiring access, in locations freely accessible through access doors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals

Local/Regional Materials; GManufacturer qualifications; GInstaller qualifications; GInspector qualifications; GVerifier qualifications; GInspection, Testing, and Verification Agency; G

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Dental Gas, Support and Vacuum Systems; GDental Gas System Point-to-Point Wiring Diagrams for Alarm, Monitoring and Controls; G

Submit dimensioned shop drawings of piping showing both the accurately scaled piping and its relationship to space enclosure. Provide in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES and as modified by this section. Illustration shall be drawn to a minimum scale of 1/4 inch per foot. Drawings shall indicate actual plan dimensions and elevations above finished floor. Provide illustrations including sections to clarify elevations of equipment, equipment connections, piping, and piping accessories. Drawings shall conform to standard drafting industry procedures. Include contractors name, project title, date and phone number in title block. Include as a minimum the following:

a. Dental gas piping including: Oral Evacuation, Dental Air, Dental High Vacuum, Lab Air and Process Air.

b. Dental Equipment.c. Dental Equipment Intake and Exhaust Piping.d. Dental gas valves.e. Piping from relief valves.f. Dental Gas pipeline accessories such as Oral Evacuation

amalgam separators, Hi/Low pressure alarm switches, etc.



g. Medical alarm panels.h. Remote Oral Evacuation system stop/start panel.

SD-03 Product Data

Dental Compressed Air (DA) Source; GDental High Vacuum (DHV) Source; GDental Oral Evacuation (OE) Source; GPipe and Fittings; GValves and Assemblies; GHangers and Supports; GDental Gas and Support Systems Outlets and Vacuum Systems Inlets; GWarning Systems; GAmalgam Separators; G

Manufacturer's catalog data with highlighting to show model, size, options, etc., that are intended for consideration. Provide adequate data to demonstrate compliance with contract requirements.

Vibration-Absorbing Features; G

Details of vibration-absorbing features, including arrangement, foundation plan, dimensions and specifications.

SD-06 Test Reports

Test Reports; G

Test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria, upon completion and testing of the installed systems. Each test report shall indicate the final position of controls.

SD-07 Certificates

Station Outlets/Inlets

Proof that outlets/inlets as an assembly are listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., and are manufactured in accordance with applicable NFPA 99 and CGA standards.


Dental Gas, Support, and Vacuum Systems; G

Manuals in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and Section 01 78 24.00 20 FACILITY ELECTRONIC OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SUPPORT INFORMATION (eOMSI).


1.4.1 Manufacturer Qualifications

Manufacturers shall be regularly engaging in the manufacturing, supplying, and servicing of specified products and equipment, as well as, providing engineering services, for gas and vacuum systems for healthcare facilities. Provide evidence demonstrating compliance for a minimum of 5 years, and on 5 projects of similar complexity.



1.4.2 Installer Qualifications

a. Dental gas, support, and vacuum systems shall be installed only by Certified Medical Gas Installers. Installer ASSE 6000 SERIES (Standard #6010 Medical Gas System Installer) certification card shall have been issued within the previous 36 months and Installers certified through a recognized third party certification agency. Certification shall include the successful completion of a minimum 32-hour training course including a written and a practical examination covering all facets of ASSE 6000 SERIES Standard #6010, NFPA 99, and NFPA 55. Course instruction shall have been conducted by a Medical Gas Systems Instructor certified to ASSE 6000 SERIES (Standard #6050 Medical Gas Instructors). The installer shall have a minimum of four (4) years of documented practical experience in the installation of medical gas and vacuum piping systems. Detail drawings for the complete Dental Gas, Support and Vacuum Systems including piping layouts and location of connections; dimensions for roughing-in, foundation, and support points; schematic diagrams; and wiring diagrams or connection and interconnection diagrams; Dental Gas System Point-to-Point Wiring Diagrams for Alarm, Monitoring and Controls. Detail drawings shall indicate clearances required for maintenance and operation. Where piping and equipment are to be supported other than as indicated, include loadings and proposed support method. All plans, elevations, views, and details, shall be drawn to scale.

b. Dental oral evacuation systems shall be installed only by contractors/tradespersons who have at least 5 years experience installing central oral evacuation systems for dental operatories.

1.4.3 Agency Qualifications

Retained by the general contractor, but independent of the facility, installing contractor, and product manufacturer(s).

1.4.3.1 Inspector qualifications

Systems shall be inspected only by Certified Medical Gas System Inspectors. Inspector ASSE 6000 SERIES (Standard #6020 Medical Gas Systems Inspectors) certification card shall have been issued within the previous 36 months and Inspectors certified through a recognized third party certification agency. Certification shall include the successful completion of a minimum 24-hour training course including a written and a practical examination covering all facets of ASSE 6000 SERIES (Standard #6020), NFPA 99, NFPA 55. Course instruction shall be conducted by a Medical Gas Systems Instructor certified to ASSE 6000 SERIES (Standard #6050 Medical Gas Systems Instructors). Certification to ASSE 6000 SERIES (Standard # 6030 Medical Gas Systems Verifier) meets the requirements of this section. The inspector shall have a minimum of four (4) years of documented practical experience in the inspection of medical gas and vacuum systems.

1.4.3.2 Verifier qualifications

Systems shall be verified only by Certified Medical Gas System Verifiers. Verifier ASSE 6000 SERIES (Standard #6030 Medical Gas System Verifiers) certification card shall have been issued within the previous 36 months and verifiers certified through a recognized third party certification agency. Certification shall include the successful completion of a minimum 32-hour



training course including a written and a practical examination covering all facets of ASSE 6000 SERIES Standard #6030, NFPA 99, NFPA 55 and CGA M-1. Course instruction shall be conducted by a Medical Gas Systems Instructor certified to ASSE 6000 SERIES (Standard #6050 Medical Gas Systems Instructors). The verifier shall have a minimum of four (4) years of documented practical experience in the verification of medical gas and vacuum systems. The verifier shall have a current certificate of insurance, in the individual's name or employing verification company for general liability, and professional liability insurance.

1.4.4 Certifying Agency Qualifications

Agency shall be an American National Standards Institute accredited certifier. Agency is responsible for testing and certifying individuals in compliance with ASSE 6000 SERIES Standards. Provide installer, inspector, and verifier certifications by one of the following agencies or by an agency with comparable qualifications:

a. Medical Gas Professional Healthcare Organization (MGPHO).

b. National Inspection, Testing and Certification Corporation (NITC), Los Angeles, California.


1.4.5.1 Standards

The Standards for design, materials, installation, and testing of gas and vacuum systems for healthcare facilities:

a. National Fire Protection Association Standard for Health Care Facilities: NFPA 99.

c. The advisory provisions in NFPA 99 shall be considered mandatory, the word "should" shall be interpreted as "shall." Reference to the "Authority Having Jurisdiction" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For Navy owned property, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For leased facilities, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the "lessor." References to the "permit holder" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contractor."

d. The provisions of Chapter 1, "Administration" in NFPA 99 do not apply. These administrative requirements are covered by the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulations (FAR) included in this contract and by the authority granted to the Officer in Charge of Construction to administer the construction of this project.

1.4.5.2 Referenced Publications


1.4.5.3 Alternative Qualifications

Products having less than a three-year field service record will be



acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or laboratory tests, can be shown.

1.4.5.4 Service Support

Provide equipment items supported by service organizations. Submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications. These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract. Submit manuals in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and Section 01 78 24.00 20 FACILITY ELECTRONIC OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SUPPORT INFORMATION (eOMSI).


Deliver equipment and parts to site factory cleaned and processed in their original factory sealed package ready for installation. Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as approved by the Contracting Officer. Replace damaged or defective items.

1.6 COMMISSIONING

1.6.1 Inspection, Testing, and Verification Agency

Commissioning shall include retaining the Inspection, Testing, and Verification Agency prior to commencement of the installation of these systems. The Inspection, Testing, and Verification Agency shall coordinate their scope of work with that of the Project CxC, Commissioning Specialist and shall function in coordination with, not in lieu of, the Project CxC, Commissioning Specialist.

1.6.2 Responsibilities

The Inspection, Testing, and Verification Agencies responsibilities include:

a. Review of the project drawings and specifications and providing comments and additional clarification(s), as needed, to the Contracting Officer and the Designer of Record.

b. Witnessing by a certified inspector or certified verifier of the brazing of a minimum of two joints (one vertical and one horizontal) by each brazer assigned to the project. Evaluation of adequacy of the brazed joints shall be through observation of the brazing techniques, and by destructive methods (cutting the joints in half). This will be required of all brazers utilized throughout the duration of the project. Brazing of project materials shall not be permitted until the brazer qualifications, and the adequacy of their joints have been determined to be acceptable.

c. Review and comment on the compliance of the project submittals required under "SUBMITTALS" and the specified items. Review shall be concurrent with the review being performed by the designated representative of the Government.

d. Performing site observation visits prior to 1) backfilling exterior or



interior below grade piping, 2) concealing above ceiling piping, and 3) concealing in wall piping. Conduct site observation visits by a certified inspector or certified verifier. Provide for each visit a written report stating progress of installation and any deficiencies needing corrective action.

e. Review of revisions/substitutions relating to the Contract Documents and/or the Project Commissioning Plan.

f. Coordination with the Project CxC, Commissioning Specialist in establishing a commissioning plan for components specific to the systems specified herein.

g. Coordination with the Project CxC, Commissioning Specialist of the equipment start-up, and the system testing and verification procedures required by this specification.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Provide materials and equipment which are the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products, essentially duplicate equipment that has performed satisfactorily at least two years prior to bid opening, and have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 3 years prior to bid opening. The 3-year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 3 year period. Submit manufacturer's catalog data with highlighting to show model, size, options, etc., that are intended for consideration. Provide adequate data to demonstrate compliance with contract requirements.


Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

2.3 DENTAL COMPRESSED AIR (DA) SOURCE

a. Provide complete factory-packaged, factory-tested, continuous-duty source(s). Each source shall contain air compressors, receiver, dryers, filters, control panel, source shutoff, compressor isolation valves and other components required by NFPA 99, and necessary to provide complete performance. Each source shall require single-point connections to power wiring, warning system wiring, and piping system.

b. Tank-mounted air compressors shall be manufactured to comply with UL listing requirements. Air compressors shall have manufacturer's name and address, together with trade name and catalog number, on a nameplate securely attached to the equipment. Provide guards to shield exposed moving parts. Provide an intake air filter and silencer with each compressor. Provide aftercooler and moisture separator between compressors and air receivers, to remove moisture before the air enters the receiver. Aftercoolers shall be air cooled. The air shall pass through a sufficient number of tubes to affect cooling. Tubes shall be



sized to give maximum heat transfer. Cooling capacity of the aftercooler shall be sized for the total capacity of the compressors.

2.3.1 Air Compressors

Provide stack mounted scroll type compressors. Provide a pressure gauge calibrated to 300 psi, and equipped with a gauge cock and pulsation dampener for installation adjacent to the pressure switch. The motor and compressors shall be directly connected or operated by V-belt drive. Compressors shall be sequenced to start automatically when the pressure drops to a preset point. Compressors shall be air cooled. Provide each compressor chamber with a high-temperature sensor to activate a local alarm. Provide continuous duty NEMA rated, open dripproof motor with 1.15 service factor, and maximum of 3600 RPM.

2.3.2 Air Receiver

Provide air receiver delivering air to dental operatories designed for 150 psi working pressure, factory air tested to 1.5 times the working pressure, meeting ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1. Provide receiver equipped with safety relief valves and accessories, including but not limited to pressure gauge, sight glass, and automatic and manual drains. The outside of receiver shall be galvanized or supplied with factory applied commercial enamel finish. The interior of the receiver shall be a factory applied vinyl lining. Provide a display of the ASME seal on the receiver, or a certified test report from an approved independent testing laboratory indicating conformance to the ASME Code. Provide receiver(s) with a three (3) valve bypass for servicing.

2.3.3 Control Panel

Provide UL 508A listed and labeled control panel in a NEMA 250 Type 12 enclosure. Provide Hand-Off-Auto switch for each compressor for selection of normal operation (automatic alternation) or manual selection of lead and lag compressors. Provide automatic alternation of compressors based on a first-on/first-off principle with provisions for simultaneous operation. The lag compressor shall be able to start automatically if the lead compressor fails to operate. Provide manual reset for thermal malfunction shutdown. All control and alarm functions shall remain energized while any compressor in the system remains electrically online. Provide magnetic motor starters with integral overload and short circuit protection, with lockable disconnecting means. Provide running light and elapsed run-time meter for each compressor. Provide circuit breakers with single point power feed connection. Provide 120 VAC control circuit transformers with fused primary and secondary. Provide pressure control switches or pressure transducer. Provide integral PLC controller for automatically switching operating sequence of compressors. Provide back-up circuit in case of PLC failure. Provide digital display interface. User interface shall display all alarm conditions, pump maintenance intervals, compressor performance warnings, average system air demand, average dewpoint and CO levels on system, compressors on/off status, system model number and serial number, and phone number to call for service. Provide audible and visual local alarms with silence button, remote alarm connections, and safety devices as required by NFPA 99. Local alarms shall have contacts to allow indication of a fault condition at the master alarm panel if one or more local alarms are activated. Provide the following alarms:

a. Lag compressor In Use.



b. High discharge temperature.

c. High carbon monoxide levels.

d. High dew point level.

e. System malfunction (high temp shut down, monitor power loss, high water level in receiver, etc.)

2.3.3.1 General Alarm

Provide a set of general alarm contacts for system malfunction alarming through the facility Direct Digital Control (DDC) system. A single alarm output shall be provided for annunciation of an alarm or malfunction condition. Identification of the exact alarm through the DDC system is not required. All wiring shall be installed in conduit per Division 26 specifications. Provide required conduit and conductors for connection to DDC system. DDC programming and graphics shall be by the Division 23 contractor. Coordinate requirements with Division 23 contractor.

2.3.4 Desiccant Air Dryers

Provide two identical twin-tower heatless desiccant air dryers. Provide dryers to achieve a pressure dewpoint -40 degrees F at the maximum calculated NFPA system capacity. Provide lubricant free operation. Provide economizer cycle that reduces purge air requirements to match actual moisture loading. Provide solid-state cycle timer, OSHA purge exhaust mufflers, and a pressure gauge for each tower.

2.3.5 Filtration and Pressure Reducing Station

Provide two pre-filters rated 0.01 micron filtration with an efficiency of 99.9999 percent D.O.P. (Validated), two activated carbon filters, and two 1 micron final filters with an efficiency 99.9999 percent D.O.P. (Validated) installed downstream of the carbon filters. Provide all filters with a differential pressure gauge with color change indicator and automatic drain valve except the activated carbon filters. Provide downstream of the final filters a dual-line pressure regulating assembly consisting of two pressure regulators with pressure gauges, inlet and outlet isolation ball valves, and pressure relief valves. All filters/pressure regulators shall be arranged so that the isolation of one filter/ regulator will not affect the operation of the second filter/regulator.

2.3.6 Dew Point Monitor

Provide dew point monitor to continuously monitor the dew point of the dental compressed air. Provide ceramic type (aluminum oxide type is not acceptable) sensor with system accuracy of +/- 2 degrees F. The dew point alarm shall be factory set at 36 degrees F and be field adjustable. Provide activation of local alarm and all master alarms when the dew point at system pressure exceeds + 39 degrees F. Provide activation of monitor's signal at all master alarm panels if the monitor loses power. Monitor shall meet requirements of NFPA 99.

2.3.7 Carbon Monoxide Monitor

Provide carbon monoxide monitor to continuously monitor the dental compressed air for carbon monoxide and to actuate a local alarm if the carbon monoxide level is 10 ppm or higher. Provide activation of monitor's



signal at all master alarm panels if the monitor loses power. Monitor shall meet requirements of NFPA 99.

2.4 DENTAL HIGH VACUUM (DHV) SOURCE

Provide complete factory-packaged, factory-tested, continuous-duty source(s). Each source shall contain vacuum pumps, receiver, control panel, source shutoff, pump isolation valves and other components required by NFPA 99, and necessary to provide complete performance. Each source shall require single-point connections to power wiring, warning system wiring, and piping system.

2.4.1 Vacuum Pumps

Pumps and motors shall be frame mounted with vacuum pumps mounted above a vertical receiver. Provide shutoff valve on each pump inlet. Provide vacuum gauge at each pump inlet.

a. Provide non-contacting dry claw style rotary pumps. Internal construction shall be friction free and the rotors shall be non-contacting. The air end shall be oil free and require no sealants. Each pump shall be air cooled and continuous duty rated. Each pump shall be provided with a single lubricated gearbox requiring oil change not more often than 5,000 operating hours. Each pump shall be provided with an exhaust silencer. The pumps shall be equipped with high vacuum shutdown, high temperature shutdown and alarm. The lubricant supplied shall be inert with oxygen. Each pump shall be fitted with a 5 micron inlet filter and be equipped with a vacuum relief valve, check valve to prevent backflow through off-cycle units, flexible connector, isolation valve, and vibration isolators at each mounting location. Provide continuous duty NEMA rated, C-face, TEFC motor with 1.15 service factor, and maximum of 3500 RPM.

2.4.2 Vacuum Receiver

Provide receiver designed for 150 psi minimum working pressure, factory air tested to 1.5 times the working pressure, meeting ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1. Provide receiver equipped with safety relief valves and accessories, including but not limited to vacuum gauge, sight glass, and automatic and manual drains. The outside of receiver shall be galvanized or supplied with factory applied commercial enamel finish. The interior of the receiver shall be a factory applied vinyl lining. Provide a display of the ASME seal on the receiver or a certified test report from an approved independent testing laboratory indicating conformance to the ASME Code. Provide receiver(s) with a three (3) valve bypass for servicing.

2.4.3 Control Panel

Provide UL 508A listed and labeled control panel in a NEMA 250 Type 12 enclosure. Provide Hand-Off-Auto switch for each vacuum pump for selection of normal operation (automatic alternation) or manual selection of lead and lag vacuum pump. Provide automatic alternation of vacuum pumps based on a first-on/first-off principle with provisions for simultaneous operation. The lag vacuum pump shall be able to start automatically if the lead vacuum pump fails to operate. Provide manual reset for thermal malfunction shutdown. All control and alarm functions shall remain energized while any vacuum pump in the system remains electrically online. Provide magnetic motor starters with integral overload and short circuit protection, with lockable disconnecting means. Provide running light and elapsed run-time



meter for each vacuum pump. Provide circuit breakers with single point power feed connection. Provide 120 VAC control circuit transformers with fused primary and secondary. Provide vacuum control switches. Provide integral PLC controller for automatically switching operating sequence of vacuum pumps. Provide back-up circuit in case of PLC failure. Provide digital display interface. User interface shall display all alarm conditions, vacuum pump maintenance intervals, vacuum pump performance warnings, average system vacuum demand, vacuum pumps on/off status, system model number and serial number, and phone number to call for service. Provide audible and visual local alarms with silence button, remote alarm connections, and safety devices as required by NFPA 99. Local alarms shall have contacts to allow indication of a fault condition at the master alarm panel if one or more local alarms are activated. Provide the following alarms: Lag vacuum pump In Use.

2.5 DENTAL ORAL EVACUATION (OE) SOURCE

Provide complete factory-packaged, factory-tested, continuous-duty source(s). Each source shall contain vacuum pumps, separator(s), control panel, source shutoff, pump isolation valves and other components required by NFPA 99, and necessary to provide complete performance. Each source shall require single-point connections to power wiring, warning system wiring, and piping system.

2.5.1 Vacuum Pumps

Provide oil-lubricated rotary-vane vacuum pumps. The pumps shall be connected in parallel to the central wet separator tanks. Pumps shall be provided with 10 year manufacturer's warranty.

2.5.1.1 Rotary-Vane Vacuum Pump

Provide low speed, positive displacement, oil lubricated rotary-vane vacuum pumps with separate, standard NEMA frame size, high efficiency motors. Provide automatic lubrication of moving pump parts by an oiling system not dependent on moving parts and operated only by gravity and vacuum. Provide vacuum pump constructed to provide protection against ingesting particulates larger than 15 µ into pump, operating with insufficient lubrication, and water contamination of oil. Provide electrical overload by thermal sensors built into single phase motors or thermal sensors built into three phase motor starters; three phase motor starters additionally protected against single phasing. Provide continuous duty, NEMA rated, C-face, TEFC motor with 1.15 service factor, and maximum of 1800 RPM.

2.5.2 Pipe Isolators

Provide flexible, resilient band-sealed (clamped) sleeves furnished to isolate the vacuum pump from associated piping. Size sleeve couplings in accordance with the exhauster intake and output connections. Provide pipe isolators with steel coupling guards.

2.5.3 Valves

2.5.3.1 Volume Control Valve

Provide the input of each vacuum pump with an adjustable air volume control valve to prevent accidental vacuum pump overload and to provide a means of adjusting the upper design capacity limit. The volume control valve shall be built in or immediately adjacent to the first or input stage of the



vacuum pump and shall be preset by the manufacturer during certification procedure. The valve shall be a butterfly type with cast iron body with corrosive resistant internals.

2.5.3.2 Antisurge Valve

Provide the input of each vacuum pump with an antisurge valve that will operate proportionally and automatically throughout the vacuum pump's designed range. This valve shall continually sense the motor current and maintain a predetermined operational level of volume by proportionally bleeding air into the system. The valve shall be equipped with a silencer to attenuate air noise to 85 dBA or below. The valve shall be installed in, on, or near the first stage of the vacuum pump and can be mounted in conjunction with the directional flow valve.

2.5.3.3 Directional Flow Valve

Provide the input of each vacuum pump with a directional flow valve to prevent back flow of air through the shutdown. The directional flow valve shall be cast iron with corrosive resistant internals.

2.5.4 Exhaust Silencer

Provide each vacuum pump exhaust with a separate air discharge silencer of the open-bore expansion type. No interior baffling or shrouding will be permitted. The silencer shall satisfactorily attenuate air noise to a level below 85 dBA.

2.5.5 Control Panel

Provide UL 508A listed and labeled control panel in a NEMA 250 Type 12 enclosure. Provide Hand-Off-Auto switch for each vacuum pump for selection of normal operation (automatic alternation) or manual selection of lead and lag vacuum pump. Provide automatic alternation of vacuum pumps based on a first-on/first-off principle with provisions for simultaneous operation. The lag vacuum pump shall be able to start automatically if the lead vacuum pump fails to operate. Provide manual reset for thermal malfunction shutdown. All control and alarm functions shall remain energized while any vacuum pump in the system remains electrically online. Provide magnetic motor starters with integral overload and short circuit protection, with lockable disconnecting means. Provide running light and elapsed run-time meter for each vacuum pump. Provide circuit breakers with single point power feed connection. Provide 120 VAC control circuit transformers with fused primary and secondary. Provide vacuum control switches. Provide integral PLC controller for automatically switching operating sequence of vacuum pumps. Provide back-up circuit in case of PLC failure. Provide digital display interface. User interface shall display all alarm conditions, vacuum pump maintenance intervals, vacuum pump performance warnings, average system vacuum demand, vacuum pumps on/off status, system model number and serial number, and phone number to call for service. Provide audible and visual local alarms with silence button, remote alarm connections, and safety devices as required by NFPA 99. Local alarms shall have contacts to allow indication of a fault condition at the master alarm panel if one or more local alarms are activated. Provide the following alarms: Lag vacuum pump In Use, system malfunction.

2.5.5.1 General Alarm

Provide a set of general alarm contacts for system malfunction alarming



through the facility Direct Digital Control (DDC) system. A single alarm output shall be provided for annunciation of an alarm or malfunction condition. Identification of the exact alarm through the DDC system is not required. All wiring shall be installed in conduit per Division 26 specifications. Provide required conduit and conductors for connection to DDC system. DDC programming and graphics shall be by the Division 23 contractor. Coordinate requirements with Division 23 contractor.

2.5.6 Central Wet Separators

The OE system shall utilize a central wet separator. Provide separator tanks constructed of a nonmetallic, noncorrosive, inert material or composite such as glass-reinforced plastic (GRP). Tanks shall be of one-piece construction, with smooth, interior walls. Tanks shall be freestanding. Tanks shall be high-pressure vessels able to withstand a constant negative pressure of 15 inches Hg vacuum. The bottom of the tanks shall be convex with drain at the apex of convexity. Provide separator tanks equipped with mechanical overflow protection. Provide preplumbed with a 360 degree nozzle internal washdown system with timer. The washdown system shall include a 115 VAC automatic-flush clock-controlled mechanism which shall effect a complete washdown of the interior of the separator at any predetermined time of day or night. Washdown time shall be adjustable for up to at least 3 minutes. The timers shall be in the main electric control panel. The cold water supply to the automatic tank flush unit shall be equipped with an in-line filter with 40-mesh stainless steel screens. Filter shall be supplied as part of the OE system. Each separator tank shall be equipped with an electronic high-low liquid level sensor which shall perform as the primary overfill protector. In multiple-tank installations, one tank shall be adjusted to sense 90 percent of its capacity and the other tank 100 percent of its capacity via the liquid-level sensing devices. Each sensor shall control a 115 volt ac electrically operated output air solenoid valve located to control the outgoing air from the tank to the vacuum pump. Each tank shall be equipped with a gate and swing type check valve at the bottom drain. With negative pressure in the tank, the check valve shall remain closed to maintain vacuum. When negative pressure ceases, either by vacuum pump shutdown or by closure of the outgoing air solenoid control by the liquid level sensor, the check valve shall open and the tank shall undergo gravity drain.

2.5.7 Vacuum Relief Valve

Provide vacuum relief valve. The valve shall operate automatically. The valve shall be equipped with a silencer to attenuate air noise to 85 dBA.

2.5.7.1 2.6.9 Tank Level Sensing Devices

Tank level sensing devices shall be single level, horizontal, stainless steel, reed type float switches. Switches shall be low voltage and suitable for vacuum system installations. Switches shall be provided with stainless steel flange plates and gaskets compatible with the separator tank sensor installation flanges. Coordinate sensor selections and installation requirements with tank manufacturer.

2.5.7.2 2.6.9 Amalgam Separators

Provide amalgam separators consisting of a sedimentation collection chamber with two (2) or more replaceable filter cartridges. Separation process shall be sedimentation supplemented with filtration cartridges. Unit shall be compatible for use on wet and dry vacuum systems. Each separator



assembly shall be a high flow unit capable of serving a minimum of 20 dental chairs. Assemblies shall be wall mounted and constructed to allow visual confirmation of sediment buildup without disassembly of the unit or provided with an intervention warning alarm connected to the facility Master Alarm Panel and Direct Digital Control system for annunciation. Provide minimum 3 inlet and outlet connection. Unit shall be ISO 11143 Certified and have a minimum of 99 percent removal efficiency. Provide a set of additional replacement cartridges for each assembly.

2.6 PIPE AND FITTINGS

2.6.1 Positive pressure piping systems up to 200 psi

Hard-drawn seamless copper tubing (ASTM B819), Type K or L, bearing one of the following markings, OXY, MED, OXY/MED, and brazed solder-type wrought copper fittings (ASME B16.22), or brazed fittings (ASME B16.50) cleaned for oxygen service by the manufacturer in accordance with Pamphlet CGA G-4.1. Cast fittings shall not be used. Minimum size shall be 1/2 inch. Install branch piping full size to each terminal device, including vertical drops, and provide reducer fitting at the device pigtail. Type L tubing is not acceptable for installation below grade. Provide with NF nitrogen purge and capped/plugged ends until prepared for installation. Tubing joining material shall be ANSI/AWS-BCuP series filler material.

2.6.2 Dental High and WAGD vacuum piping systems up to 20 inches Hg vacuum

Hard-drawn seamless copper tubing (ASTM B819), Type K or L, and solder-type wrought copper fittings (ASME B16.22) or brazed fittings (ASME B16.50). Cast fittings shall not be used. Minimum size shall be 3/4 inch. Install branch piping full size to each terminal device, including vertical drops, and provide reducer fitting at the device pigtail. Tubing joining material shall be ANSI/AWS-BCuP series filler material. Nitrogen purge not required. Labeled or otherwise identified prior to installation in order to preclude inadvertent inclusion into the pressurized systems. Labeling is not required if installation meets all requirements for pressurized piping including prohibition of flux on copper-to-copper joints and the use of a NF nitrogen purge during brazing.

2.6.3 Dental Oral Evacuation System

Provide Schedule 40 solid wall polyvinyl chloride (PVC) drainage, waste and vent (DWV) pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM D1785 and ASTM D2665. Solvent cement for PVC pipe fittings shall conform to ASTM D2564. Fittings, supports, and joint assembly shall comply with ICC IPC. Fittings shall be the long-radius type for turns and the wye type for branches. The most distant end of each trunk line from the separators may terminate with a vacuum relief valve. Provide buried locator/warning tape for underground oral evacuation system piping. Underground warning tape shall be buried above each pipe during the trench backfilling and shall be buried approximately 12 inches deep. Tape shall be 0.004 inch thick polyethylene tape with metallic core. Tape shall be 6 inches wide and be printed with repetitive caution warnings along its length. Tapes shall be yellow in color with black letters. Tape color and lettering shall not be affected by moisture or other substances contained in the backfill material.

2.6.4 Compressed Air Intake and Vacuum Pump Exhaust Line(s)

Hard-drawn seamless copper tubing (ASTM B88 or ASTM B819), Type K or L, and solder-type wrought copper fittings (ASME B16.22). Cast fittings shall not



be used. Tubing joining material shall be ANSI/AWS-BCuP series filler material.

2.7 VALVES AND ASSEMBLIES

2.7.1 Valves

a. Positive pressure piping systems up to 200 psi: Bronze, full port, quarter-turn ball type, three piece construction, 600 psi WOG, blow-out proof stem, in-line repairable. Cleaned for oxygen service by manufacturer in accordance with Pamphlet CGA G-4.1. All sizes: 316 stainless steel ball and stem, glass reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene (RPTFE) seat seals and packings. Clean, cap and deliver to site in sealed package bearing manufacturer's identifying tag or stamp. Keep sealed until prepared for installation. Provide with valve manufacturer installed brazed Type K copper tube extensions a minimum of6 inch long on the inlet and outlet side of the valve for making connection to the pipeline(s). A purge port shall be provided on both the inlet and outlet tube extensions. Valves in locations other than zone valve boxes shall be lockable.

b. Vacuum piping systems up to 20 inches Hg vacuum: Bronze full port, quarter-turn ball type, three piece construction, 29 inches Hg vacuum, blow out proof stem, in-line repairable. All sizes: 316 stainless steel ball and stem, glass reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene (RPTFE) seat seals and packings. Provide with valve manufacturer installed brazed Type K copper tube extensions a minimum of 6 inch long on the inlet and outlet side of the valve for making connection to the pipeline(s). A purge port shall be provided on both the inlet and outlet tube extensions. Valves in locations other than zone valve boxes shall be lockable.

2.7.2 Zone Valve Assemblies

a. Recessed wall box, minimum 18 GA sheet steel, baked enamel finish. Stainless steel or chrome front trim. Transparent plastic door with pull handle or ring for emergency access to valves. Service access to valves shall be by removal and replacement of door, which shall neither cause damage nor require special tools. Opaque plastic is not acceptable. Openings to box interior shall be dust-tight. Provide each shutoff valve with pressure gauge and integral extension tubes for joining to piping system outside of box. Provide gauge port on each tubing extension. Valves shall not be lockable.

b. Up to 5 shutoff valves of 1 inch size or smaller may be installed in one box. Use single-valve boxes for 1-1/4 inch valves and larger. Front trim with interlocking edges where single-valve boxes are jointed together for multiple valve installations. Provide custom-made boxes as specified above for those valves that are too large for pre-manufactured boxes.

c. Dental Oral Evacuation Separator Tank Output Air Valve: 115 V ac electric actuated 2-way ball valve, 2 piece full port brass body, suitable for vacuum service up to 29 inches Hg, low torque design with Teflon ball seats energized with Viton O-rings, leak free stem seal design with double Viton O-rings and dual Teflon auxiliary seals and chrome plated brass ball. Provide direct mount IP65 weatherproof actuator designed for 75% duty cycle, with electronic torque limiter, manual override with visual valve position indicator, anti-condensation



heater, anti-corrosive enclosure and dry-contact auxiliary end switches for valve position confirmation. Coordinate valve actuation cycle time with separator tank liquid level control panel manufacturer for sequence programming.

d. Arrange shutoff valves in following order from top to bottom: dental compressed air, and WAGD, dental high vacuum. If 2 or more valves for same service are located in common box, larger of valves shall be lower.

2.8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

Pipe hangers and supports shall be copper plated when in direct contact with copper tubing. Tubing installed on trapeze hanger shall be secured in place with appropriately sized clamp and be fully isolated from dissimilar metals.

2.9 GAUGES

a. Provide for line pressure use adjacent to source equipment, ASME B40.100 pressure gauges, 4 1/2 inches in diameter with metal case for dental compressed air, laboratory compressed air, and process compressed air, accurate to within two percent. Range shall be two times operating pressure. Dial graduations and figures shall be black on a white background, or white on a black background. Gauges shall be expressly made for and cleaned for oxygen use, labeled for appropriate service, and marked "USE NO OIL". Provide bourdon tube and brass movement. Install with gauge cock. Gauges for all services downstream of main shutoff valve shall be same as those adjacent to source equipment except diameter may be reduced to 1-1/2 inches. Dial ranges shall be 0 to 300 psi for pressurized gases and compressed air services.

b. Provide for vacuum line use adjacent to source equipment, ASME B40.100 vacuum compound gauges, 4 1/2 inches in diameter with metal case for dental surgical vacuum, medical-surgical vacuum, dental oral evacuation, WAGD, and laboratory dust evacuation, accurate to within two percent. Dial graduations and figures shall be black on a white background, or white on a black background. Label for vacuum service. Provide with bourdon tube and brass movement. Install with gauge cock. Gauges for all services upstream of main shutoff valve shall be same as those adjacent to source except diameter may be reduced to 1 1/2 inches. Dial range shall be 0 to 30 inches Hg vacuum.

2.10 DENTAL GAS AND SUPPORT SYSTEMS OUTLETS AND VACUUM SYSTEMS INLETS

2.10.1 Station Outlets/Inlets

Submit proof that outlets/inlets, as an assembly, are listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., and are manufactured in accordance with applicable NFPA 99 and CGA standards. Provide station outlets/inlets (Dental High Vacuum, WAGD) conforming to NFPA 99. Provide station outlets/inlets for concealed piping made of brass and having an adjustable valve mechanism to compensate for variation in wall thickness. Each unit shall be securely mounted and self-sealing. Each unit as an assembly shall conform to the requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; submit proof of such conformance. The label or listing of the specified agency will be acceptable evidence. In lieu of the label or listing, the Contractor may submit a written certificate from any approved nationally recognized testing organization adequately equipped and competent to perform such services, including the follow-up service, stating that the



item has been tested and conforms to the requirements, including method of testing, of the specified agency. Station outlets/inlets shall be equipped with threaded DISS connector per CGA standards noninterchangeable quick disconnect coupler, except that inlets for the WAGD system shall be 7/8 inchnonthreaded connections. DISS outlets shall be used for all dental vacuum and ceiling mount applications. Provide recessed wall type outlets/inlets unless specified otherwise. Station outlets shall be cleaned for oxygen service in accordance with Pamphlet CGA G-4.1 and the assembly shall be capped and the finished assembly poly bagged for shipment.

2.10.1.1 Couplers

Where quick-disconnect couplers are furnished they shall be of the noninterchangeable type. Connector shall lock firmly into position and shall have a finger-type quick release.

2.10.1.2 Faceplates

Faceplates shall be polished chromium-plated metal or satin-finish stainless steel secured with chromium-plated countersunk screws. Provide service identification either cast into, or permanently etched by the manufacturer into each faceplate.

2.10.1.3 Rough-In Assembly

The rough in assembly shall be of modular design and include a gas specific 16 gauge steel mounting plate designed to permit on-site ganging of multiple outlets, on 5 inch center line spacing. A machined brass outlet block shall be permanently attached to the mounting bracket to permit the 1/2 inch OD, type-K copper inlet to swivel 360 degrees for attachment to the piping system. The rough in assembly shall contain a double seal to prevent gas leakage between the rough in and latch-valve assemblies after the wall is finished. A single o-ring seal shall not be acceptable. The latch-valve assembly shall telescope up to 3/4 inches to allow for variation in finished wall thickness from 1/2 to 1-1/4 inches.

2.10.1.4 Vacuum Slides

Provide one vacuum slide of the same manufacturer of the vacuum inlet for each vacuum inlet. Coordinate location with room elevations.

2.10.2 Dental Compressed Air Outlets

Provide dental compressed air outlets as follows:

a. Provide dental treatment rooms (DTR) with a 1/2 inch service pipe terminated with a 1/2 x 3/8 inch compression angle stop valve. Coordinate exact location and installation with dental chair utility box.

b. Prothodontics Lab, Room 148. Provide each of the following, and coordinate locations with the casework supplier.

(1) 1/2 inch service pipe connection to air hose assembly in plaster bench (D0960). Air hose assembly and pressure reducing valve to be provided with casework.

(2) 1/2 inch service pipe terminated with a quick disconnect brass body coupler and sleeve, 3/8 inch NPT, 300 psi maximum pressure rating,



Buna-N seals, and complying with the dimensional requirements of military specification MIL-C-4109 to be provided at sandblaster (D0942). Service line lateral to D0942 shall be provided with a separate pressure reducing valve with pressure gauge with air pressure set to sandblaster manufacturer's required operating pressure (45 - 85 PSI). Verify exact pressure requirement with purchased equipment.

(3) Two (2) 1/2 inch service pipes terminated with 1/2 inch brass ball valves and quick disconnect brass body couplers and sleeves, 3/8 inch NPT, 300 psi maximum pressure rating, Buna-N seals, and complying with the dimensional requirements of military specification MIL-C-4109 to be provided at D0930 workstation. One outlet terminal shall be located above the counter top, the second outlet terminal shall be located below the counter top. See Equipment drawing elevations for locations.

(4) Provide 1/2 inch service pipe connection to lab workstation outlets (D0915). Outlets to be provided with casework.

c. Decon 133. Provide 1/2 inch service line down in wall to 1/2 inch sweat x 1/2 inch FPT elbow with 1/2 inch MPT x 1/8 inch FPT brass bushing, chrome metal escutcheon for 1/2 MPT, chrome plated metal quick disconnect adapter, 1/4 inch I.D. female x 1/8 inch MPT quick disconnect with shut-off and 1/4 inch O.D. male x 1/4 inch poly quick disconnect without shut-off.

2.10.2.1 Dental Oral Evacuation Inlets (Dental Treatment Room)

Provide dental treatment rooms (DTR) with a 3/4 inch service pipe terminated2 inches above floor as shown. Cover pipe end to prevent entrance of debris. Prepare end for continuation of service by another Division. Coordinate exact location and installation with dental chair utility box.

2.22 LABORATORY COMPRESSED AIR OUTLETS

Provide Laboratory compressed air outlets as follows:

a. Prost DTR's 141, 142, 143, and 144. Provide 1/2 inch service pipe connection to deck mounted polished chrome solid brass angle needle valve with 2-1/2 inch metal cross handle color coded and indexed with "Air", 3/8 inch NPT female threaded inlet, 3/8 inch NPT male threaded inlet shank, deck flange.

c. Prosthodontics Lab, Room 148. Provide 1/2 inch service pipe connection to lab workstation outlets (D0915). Outlets to be provided with casework. Coordinate locations with the laboratory casework supplier.

2.11 WARNING SYSTEMS

Alarm panels for gas and vacuum systems shall be located as specified and indicated. Each signal and gauge shall be appropriately labeled "OPERATING" and "EMERGENCY." Each gauge and device shall be clearly identified by means of engraved plastic nameplates. Alarms and pressure gauges shall be provided for each pressurized system. Alarms and vacuum gauges shall be provided for each vacuum, WAGD, and oral evacuation system. Signal systems shall be energized by the normal and emergency power systems.



2.11.1 Master Alarm Panels

a. Master alarm panel features:

(1) Provide recessed panel, complete with all necessary displays, factory wiring, transformers, and circuitry requiring only 115 VAC 60 Hz primary power connected to the Life Safety branch. Provide with metallic back (rough-in) box. Provide panel that is compliant with NFPA 99 and UL Listed as an assembly.

(2) Provide one green Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicating that the panel is powered and operating normally, and one red LED indicating a fault in the panel power and/or microprocessor has been detected. The red LED shall not be able to be reset until the fault has been repaired, and then the red LED shall automatically reset to green. Muting of the audible alarm in "Abnormal" status shall not cancel illumination of the red LED. Only correction of the abnormal condition shall allow resetting of the LED to green.

(3) Provide each individual signal with one green and one red LED. Provide illuminated green LED for "Normal" status. Provide illuminated red LED for "Abnormal" status. Muting of the audible alarm in "Abnormal" status shall not cancel illumination of the red LED. Only correction of the abnormal condition shall allow resetting of the LED to green.

(4) Provide audible alarm upon actuation of any abnormal condition. Provide audible signal producing a minimum sound pressure level of 80 dBA measured at a distance of 3 feet. The audible alarm shall be provided with a reset relay to shut off only the audible alarm and not affect the illuminated "Abnormal" LED, until the condition is corrected. The audible alarm shall sound again upon actuation of any additional abnormal condition.

(5) Provide back (rough-in) box factory configured for internal sensor mounting. Provide gas specific sensors for periodic testing without interrupting pipeline pressures or vacuum. External sensors, when applicable, shall be designed to function up to 5,000 feet from the alarm panel.

(6) Provide front panel TEST button to initiate a self-test function to test the LED indicators, visual displays, audible alarm, and to view alarm set points.

(7) Provide contacts for connecting to BAS (UFGS 23 09 23.13 20). Alarms requiring installation of additional circuit boards for PC-based monitoring are not acceptable. All master alarm signals shall also annunciate as a medical gas general alarm through the building automation system.

b. Provide alarm points based on installed systems:

(1) WAGD Main Line Vacuum Low

(2) Dental Compressed Air Main Line Pressure High/Low

(3) Dental High Vacuum Main Line Vacuum Low



(4) Dental Oral Evacuation Vacuum Low

(5) Dental Compressed Air Compressor(s) Local Alarm

(6) Dental High Vacuum Pump(s) Local Alarm

(7) Dental oral evacuation system local alarm.

2.11.2 Area Alarm Panels

a. Area alarm panel features:

(1) Provide recessed panel, complete with all necessary displays, factory wiring, transformers, and circuitry requiring only 115 VAC 60 Hz primary power connected to the Life Safety branch. Provide with metallic back (rough-in) box. Provide panel that is compliant with NFPA 99 and UL Listed as an assembly.

(2) Provide one green Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicating that the panel is powered and operating normally.

(3) Provide each individual signal with one green and one red LED. Provide illuminated green LED for "Normal" status. Provide illuminated red LED for "Abnormal" status. Muting of the audible alarm in "Abnormal" status shall not cancel illumination of the red LED. Only correction of the abnormal condition shall allow resetting of the LED to green.

(4) Provide audible alarm upon actuation of any abnormal condition. Provide audible signal producing a minimum sound pressure level of 80 dBA measured at a distance of 3 feet. The audible alarm shall be provided with a reset relay to shut off only the audible alarm and not affect the illuminated "Abnormal" LED, until the condition is corrected. The audible alarm shall sound again upon actuation of any additional abnormal condition.

(5) Provide back (rough-in) box factory configured for internal sensor mounting. Provide gas specific sensors for periodic testing without interrupting pipeline pressures or vacuum. External sensors are not permitted.

(6) Provide front panel TEST button to initiate a self-test function to test the LED indicators, visual displays, audible alarm, and to view alarm set points.

(7) Alarm panels shall be provided as indicated.

b. Provide alarm points based on installed systems:

(1) High/Low Line Pressure (for each positive pressure system piped to the area). Actuation when the pressure in the line being monitored reaches approximately 20 percent above or below normal operating pressure.

(2) Low Line Vacuum (for each vacuum system piped to the area). Dental high alarm shall be actuated when the vacuum in the line being monitored reaches 12 inches Hg vacuum. WAGD and oral evacuation alarms shall be actuated when the vacuum in the line being monitored reaches 6 inches Hg vacuum.



2.11.3 Local Alarm Panels

a. Provide alarm points based on installed systems:

(1) Dental Compressed Air Source Backup (Lag) Compressor Operating

(2) Dental Compressed Air Source Carbon Monoxide High

(3) Dental Compressed Air Source High Discharge Air Temperature

(4) Dental Compressed Air Source High Water in Receiver

(5) Dental Compressed Air Source Dew Point High

(6) Dental High Vacuum Source Backup (Lag) Vacuum Pump Operating


General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application. Where more than single type is specified for application, selection shall be at Installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category.

2.12.1 Pipe Markers

Provide adhesive type pipe markers with nomenclature that closely matches contract drawings. Comply with designations indicated on contract drawings for piping system nomenclature and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length. Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as a separate unit of plastic. Identify compressed air systems individually (e.g. Dental Air, Process Air, Laboratory Air).

a. Pressure-Sensitive Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, permanent adhesive, color-coded, pressure-sensitive vinyl pipe markers, complying with ASME A13.1.

b. Application: For exterior diameters greater than 2 inches (including insulation if any), provide continuous directional flow arrow tape around pipe circumference; two places, before and after pipe marker. Provide adhesive plastic pipe markers. For external diameters less than 2 inches (including insulation if any), provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the following methods:

1. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap.2. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe.

2.12.2 Color Coding

Color code marking shall be of the color listed in Table I and the side listed in Table II. The arrows shall be installed adjacent to each band to indicate the direction of flow in the pipe. The legends shall be printed in upper-case black letters as listed in Table I. Letter sizes shall be as listed in Table II. Marking shall be painted or applied using colored, pressure-sensitive adhesive markers of standard manufacturer.



TABLE I. COLOR CODES FOR MARKING PIPE Legend (Text) Text Color Background Color

Dental High Vacuum Black White Oral Evacuation Black Boxed White and Black Diagonal Stripe Dental Air Black Yellow and White Diagonal Stripe Laboratory Air Black Yellow and White Checkerboard Process Air Black Red and White Checkerboard

WAGD White Purple TABLE II. COLOR CODE MARKING SIZES

Outside Diameter Min. Width of Arrow Size of Legend of Pipe Covering Color Band Length X Width Letters and Numerals (in) (in) (in) (in)

Less than 1-1/2 8 8 x 2 1/2 1-1/2 to 2 8 8 x 2 3/4 2 to 6 12 8 x 2 1-1/4

2.12.3 Valve Tags

Provide 19-gage polished brass valve tags with stamp-engraved piping system abbreviation in 1/4 inch high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2 inch high, and with hole for fastener, or engraved plastic laminate valve tags, with piping system abbreviation in 1/4 inch high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2 inch high, and with hole for fastener. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose. Compile valve schedule for each service. For each page of valve schedule, provide laminated plastic coated cardboard stock sheets. This requirement is not applicable to valves located in zone valve boxes. Those shall be identified and labeled per 3.8 VALVES AND ASSEMBLIES.









Provide manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, color coded equipment markers. Include terminology matching equipment schedules as closely as possible. Provide approximate 2 inch x 4 inches markers for control devices, and 4 inch x 6 inches for equipment. Identify equipment and electrical devices furnished under this section. Equipment markers shall include motor sizes and equipment capacity information.


Provide pre-printed or partially pre-printed accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matt finish suitable for writing, approximately 3 inch x 6 inch with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre- printed wording including large-size primary wording (as examples; DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT OPERATE).


Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment. Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and specified, provide identification which indicates individual system number as well as service (as examples; Boiler No. 2, Unit Heater No. 1H).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

After becoming familiar with details of the work, verify dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any work.

3.2 COMPRESSED AIR AND VACUUM SOURCES

Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Align compressor and vacuum pump couplings in accordance with manufacturers' specifications. Provide factory service representative to supervise installation and to set pressure and vacuum switches. System start-up shall be performed by factory trained personnel and documented.

3.2.1 Amalgam Separators for Dental Oral Evacuation

Amalgam separators shall be installed between the treatment rooms and the central wet separator in a location that is accessible from a standing position adjacent to the separators.

3.3 PIPING SYSTEMS

a. Piping shall be cleaned, tested, and installed as specified in NFPA 99.

b. Provide Nitrogen NF gas purge to prevent oxide formation inside the copper tubing when brazing joints. Joints shall be made with BCuP series brazing alloy, except as permitted otherwise by NFPA 99. Brazing alloy shall fully penetrate joints.



c. Make up threaded joints, as permitted by NFPA 99, with polytetrafluoroethylene tape, or other thread sealant approved for oxygen service. Thread sealant shall be applied to male threads only.

d. Install pipe lines where they will not be subject to physical damage.

e. Install branch piping full size to each outlet/inlet, including vertical drops. Provide reducer at the outlet/inlet pigtail connection.

f. Piping shall be connected near the top of receivers.

g. Compressed air intake pipe, and vacuum pump exhaust pipe shall be extended to the outside of the building and their end turned down and screened against insects.

h. Provide vibration-absorbing couplings between the compressed air and vacuum source(s) and the system pipeline, and the compressed air and vacuum sources and the intake air/vacuum pump exhaust piping.

i. Provide laboratory and process air piping system(s) separate from the dental compressed air system(s) as indicated.

j. Dental oral evacuation system piping shall be installed with a minimum slope of 1/4 inch per 10 feet from the DTR utility box to the separator tanks.

m. Provide pipelines with appropriate system labeling conforming to NFPA 99.

3.4 STATION OUTLETS/INLETS

3.4.1 Wall Outlets/Inlets

Wall outlets/inlets shall be located 60 inches from finished floor or as indicated. Back boxes shall be permanently stamped with the gas or vacuum service identification and shall be safety-keyed to accept only the appropriate gas or vacuum faceplate.

3.4.2 DISS Connections

Where threaded connections are furnished, DISS connections as described in CGA V-5 shall be used to provide noninterchangeable connections. In order to facilitate connection making, the threads of the connection shall engage before the check valve is depressed and pressure is allowed to enter the attached fitting. No leakage shall occur when threads are fingertight.

3.4.3 Height of Hose-reel Type Outlets/Inlets

Termination shall be a minimum of 80 inches above the finished floor.

3.5 VALVES AND ASSEMBLIES

Valve cabinets shall be recess mounted on the corridor side of the partition. Cabinets shall house alarm system sensors and zone control valves. The valves shall be installed in the cabinet 5 feet above the floor at the center line of the box and shall provide complete shutoff of each of the piped services. Provide valves and exposed piping connecting the valves with appropriate system labeling conforming to NFPA 99. Valves and exposed piping connecting the valves shall be labeled or identified in an approved manner with colors as follows:



System Color

Compressed Air Yellow

Vacuum White

Each valve shall be securely mounted in a fixed position by means of brackets. Position of each valve shall allow for a firm grip to facilitate easy closing and opening. Each valve or valve box shall be labeled in substance as follows:

"Caution - (Name of applicable system) Valves. Do not close except in emergency. This valve controls (Name of applicable system) to insert room name/number."

3.6 GAUGES

a. Calibrate and zero gauges at job site.

b. Permanently label gauges with system name.

3.7 VIBRATION-ABSORBING FEATURES

Mechanical equipment, including compressors and pumps, shall be isolated from the building structure by approved vibration-absorbing features unless otherwise shown. Each foundation shall include standard isolation units as indicated. Each unit shall consist of machine and floor or foundation fastening, together with intermediate isolation material, and shall be a standard product with printed loading rating. Piping connected to mechanical equipment shall be provided with flexible connectors.

3.7.1 Tank or Skid Mounted Compressors and Vacuum Pumps

Floor attachment shall be as recommended by compressor and/or vacuum pumpmanufacturer. Compressors and/or vacuum pumps shall be mounted to resist seismic loads as specified in Section 23 05 48.00 20 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC AND PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.

3.7.2 Foundation Mounted Compressors and Vacuum Pumps

Foundation attachment shall be as recommended by the compressor and/or vacuum pump manufacturer. Compressors and/or vacuum pumps shall be mounted to resist seismic loads as specified in Section 23 05 48.00 20 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC AND PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.

3.8 TRAINING

a. Provide the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to the designated Government personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the specified equipment or system. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work.

b. Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section.



When more than 4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately half of the time for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction with the equipment or system.

c. When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.

3.9 GAS, SUPPORT, AND VACUUM SYSTEMS TESTING

3.9.1 Test Reports

a. Certified installers, inspectors, and verifiers shall conduct, document tests in accordance with NFPA 99, furnish their own test equipment and supplies (including gases) for their respective tests. Reports shall be certified with the signature of an officer of the company responsible for conducting the test.

b. Submit reports in booklet form, within two weeks of test date with separate copies of each report for Contractor Quality Control, and Contracting Officer. Submit reports of both failed and passed tests. Except as indicated under specific test description, reports may be subdivided by tested area to allow timely submission. Submit test reports showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria, upon completion and testing of the installed systems. Each test report shall indicate the final position of controls.

c. Document each report separately in an easy-to-follow manner, organized by areas and systems tested. (An area is typically a group of outlets downstream of a zone valve assembly.)

d. At the beginning of each report, document the following information:

(1) Name of project.

(2) Date of report.

(3) Name of company responsible for performing test.

(4) Name of person conducting test.

(5) Date of test.

(6) Area(s) tested.

(7) Name and address of facility.

e. Pressure readings shall be made with calibrated gauges that have accuracies of +/- 1 psi.

f. Temperature readings shall be made with calibrated thermometers that have accuracies of +/- 1 degrees F.

3.9.2 Report Status

Project is acceptable only after systems have passed tests performed by the



Inspection, Testing, and Verification Agency. Failure of test requires corrective action and retesting. Corrective actions taken to pass test and subsequent retesting shall be provided at no extra cost.

3.9.3 Level 3 Systems Testing

3.9.3.1 General

a. Inspection and testing shall be performed on all new piped systems, additions, renovations, temporary installations, or repaired systems, to ensure by a documented procedure, that all applicable provisions of NFPA 99 and the Contract Documents have been adhered to and system integrity has been achieved or maintained.

b. Inspection and testing shall include all components of the system or portions thereof, including, but not limited to, medical gas source(s), compressed air sources (e.g., compressors, dryers, filters, regulators), alarms and monitoring safeguards, pipelines, isolation valves, and station inlets (vacuum) and outlets (positive pressure gases).

c. All systems that are breached and components that are subject to additions, renovations, or replacement (e.g., new medical gas sources, compressors, dryers, alarms) shall be inspected and tested. Systems shall be deemed breached at the point of pipeline intrusion by physical separation or by system component removal, replacement, or addition. Breached portions of the systems subject to inspection and testing shall be confined to only the specific altered zone and components in the immediate zone or area that is located upstream (inlet side) for vacuum systems and downstream (outlet side) for positive pressure gases at the point or area of intrusion.

d. Provide inspection, testing and verifier reports containing detailed findings and results directly to the Contracting Officer. All inspection, testing, and verification records shall be maintained on-site within the facility. The Contracting Officer shall review the records prior to the use of all systems.

e. The Contracting Officer will accept the Verifier's Report as determining that the gas/vacuum delivered to the outlet/inlet is that shown on the outlet/inlet label and the proper connecting fittings are installed for the specific gas/vacuum service.

3.9.3.2 Initial Tests and Reports - All Level 3 Systems

The installing Contractor, a representative of the system supplier, or a representative of the system manufacturer is responsible for conducting and documenting these tests. Test gas shall be oil-free, dry Nitrogen NF. Provide all necessary materials and test apparatus to satisfactorily perform tests.

a. Initial Blow Down Test.

b. Initial Pressure Test for Positive Pressure Gas Systems and Copper Vacuum Piping.

c. Initial Leak Test for PVC Vacuum Piping. Subject piping to a vacuum of not less than 12 inches Hg vacuum.



d. Initial Cross-Connection Test. Conduct this test only after completion of every system within test area.

e. Initial Piping Purge Test.

f. Initial Standing Pressure Test for Positive-Pressure Gas Piping.

g. Initial Standing Vacuum Test for Copper and PVC Vacuum Systems. Subject PVC piping to a vacuum of not less than 12 inches Hg which shall not reduce to less than 8 inches Hg vacuum at the end of the 24 hour test period.

3.9.3.3 I,T&V Agency Tests and Reports

The Inspection, Testing and Verification Agency is responsible for conducting and documenting gas and Nitrogen tests. Test gas shall be oil-free, dry Nitrogen NF. Provide all necessary materials and test apparatus to satisfactorily perform tests.

a. Verifier Standing Pressure Test.

b. Verifier Cross-Connection Test.

c. Verifier Warning System Test.

d. Verifier Piping Purge Test.

e. Verifier Piping Particulate Test.

f. Verifier Piping Purity Test.

g. Verifier Operational Pressure Test.

h. Verifier Gas Concentration Test.

i. Labeling.

3.9.3.4 Final Tests and Reports - All Level 3

The installing Contractor, a representative of the system supplier, a representative of the system manufacturer, or a certified system verifier is responsible for conducting and documenting Gas, Support, and Vacuum Systems (except Oxygen and Nitrous Oxide) tests. Test gas shall be oil-free, dry Nitrogen NF. Provide all necessary materials and test apparatus to satisfactorily perform tests.

a. Final Standing Pressure Test.

b. Final Standing Vacuum Test.

c. Final Cross-Connection Test.

d. Final Piping Purge Test.

e. Labeling.

f. Gas, Support Systems Source Equipment Operational Test.

g. Vacuum Systems Source Equipment Operational Test.



h. Dental Oral Evacuation (OE) System Test

Materials needed: Two vacuum gauges, accuracy of at least ±0.5" Hg at 6-8" Hg. Flow restrictors (quantity = 70 percent x number of dental treatment rooms). Flow restrictor components:

(1) Part A Hose, smooth bore OE tubing, 5/8 inch ID x 4 inch long.

Part B Hose adaptor, brass, 1/2 inch male pipe thread x 3/8 inch hose barb.

Part C Tubing, vinyl, 1/2 inch ID x 1-3/8 inch long.

Part D Tubing, vinyl, 1/2 inch OD, 3/16 inch ID x 1 inch long.

Part E Tubing, soft copper, 5/16 inch x 2 inch long.

(2) Clear burrs on cut ends with 15/16 inch drill bit.

Flow restrictor assembly:

a. Insert threaded end of the hose barb (Part B) completely into the 5/8 inch OE hose (Part A).

b. Slip the 1/2 inch ID tubing (Part C) completely over the hose barb (Part B).

c. Slip 1/2 inch OD tubing (Part D) into the 1/2 inch ID tubing (Part C) to butt against the hose barb (Part B).

d. Slip the copper tubing (Part E) into the 1/2 inch OD tubing (Part D) approximately 3/4 inch.

e. Flow restrictors as designed allow a flow of 7.4 SCFM when attached to plumbing under 6 inches Hg vacuum pressure.

(1) Install vacuum gauge No. 1 on a pipe common to the power units close to the separating tanks. Install this gauge in a manner that will have minimal effect on airflow through the pipe.

(2) Install vacuum gauge No. 2 on the OE inlet in the floor box of the dental treatment room (DTR) farthest from the vacuum power units. Note that this inlet will be closed, with no flow passing through it.

(3) Place a flow restrictor over one OE inlet in 70 percent of the facility DTRs. DTRs fitted with flow restrictors should include a mix of DTRs most distant and DTRs nearest the vacuum source.

(4) Block off all other OE inlets and any other openings in the fixed pipe system.

(5) Operate the vacuum system with one pump inoperable and note the readings on the two vacuum pressure gauges. Next, operate the vacuum system with a different pump inoperable and note the reading on both vacuum pressure gauges. Continue this process until a vacuum reading has been obtained with each of the system



pumps taking a turn as the inoperable pump.

(6) An acceptable OE system shall be able to maintain a minimum of 6 inches Hg vacuum as measured on the vacuum gauge on the furthest DTR inlet (gauge No. 2) under the conditions outlined above. The system piping pressure drop between the vacuum gauge near the power units (gauge No. 1) and the vacuum gauge at the farthest DTR (gauge No. 2) should be no more than 1 inch Hg vacuum.

3.10 WARNING SYSTEM

Provide wiring required for warning system except for power source at each alarm panel, which is provided by Electrical Specification Division contractor. Install wiring in conduit .

a. Label each alarm position on each alarm panel. Coordinate designations with using facility. Coordinate area designations with associated zone valve assembly designations.

b. Master alarm panels shall not be daisy-chained. Provide panel dedicated sensors and wiring from the alarm points to each installed master alarm panel.

c. Provide master alarm panelsin Reception, Room 167.

d. Provide master alarm connection to BAS (UFGS 23 09 23.13 20).

e. Area alarm panels shall not be daisy-chained.


Identify piping and physical hazards in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.144, ASME A13.1, ANSI Z535.1and as modified herein. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment. Identify each gas piping system indicated on contract drawings.


Install plastic pipe markers on each system, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, mechanical rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts) and exterior non-concealed locations.


b. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for terminal units; mark each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern.



e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and



termination.


g. Entire length of below ground piping; warning tape.

3.11.2 Valves

Provide valve tag on every shutoff, unless noted otherwise. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system. Turn valve schedules over to Contracting Officer.




SECTION 23 00 00

AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS08/10

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL (AMCA)

AMCA 201 (2002; R 2011) Fans and Systems

AMCA 210 (2007) Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating

AMCA 300 (2008) Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans

AMCA 301 (1990; INT 2007) Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data

AIR-CONDITIONING, HEATING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (AHRI)

AHRI 410 (2001; Addendum 1 2002; Addendum 2 2005; Addendum 3 2011) Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils

AHRI 880 I-P (2011) Performance Rating of Air Terminals

AHRI Guideline D (1996) Application and Installation of Central Station Air-Handling Units


ASHRAE 52.2 (2012; Errata 2013) Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size

ASHRAE 62.1 (2010; Errata 2011; INT 3 2012; INT 4 2012; INT 5 2013) Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality

ASHRAE 70 (2006; R 2011) Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets






ASTM A123/A123M (2012) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

ASTM A167 (1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip

ASTM A924/A924M (2013) Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process


ASTM B766 (1986; R 2008) Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Cadmium

ASTM C1071 (2012) Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material)

ASTM C553 (2011) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications

ASTM D1654 (2008) Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments

ASTM D3359 (2009; E 2010; R 2010) Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test

ASTM D520 (2000; R 2011) Zinc Dust Pigment

ASTM E2016 (2011) Standard Specification for Industrial Woven Wire Cloth




NEMA MG 10 (2001; R 2007) Energy Management Guide for Selection and Use of Fixed Frequency Medium AC Squirrel-Cage Polyphase Induction Motors



NFPA 70 (2014) National Electrical Code



NFPA 90A (2012) Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL ASSOCIATION (SMACNA)

SMACNA 1966 (2005) HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible, 3rd Edition



40 CFR 82 Protection of Stratospheric Ozone


UL 181 (2013) Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors

UL 214 (1997; Rev thru Aug 2001) Tests for Flame-Propagation of Fabrics and Films

UL 586 (2009) Standard for High-Efficiency Particulate, Air Filter Units

UL 6 (2007; reprint Nov 2010) Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel

UL 900 (2004; Reprint Feb 2012) Standard for Air Filter Units

UL Bld Mat Dir (2012) Building Materials Directory


Furnish ductwork, piping offsets, fittings, and accessories to provide a complete installation. Coordinate the work of the different trades to avoid interference between piping, equipment, structural, and electrical work. Provide complete, in place, all necessary offsets, and all fittings, and other components, required to install the work as indicated and specified.

Provide air handling units, fans, air terminal valves, air outlets and inlets, canopy hoods, sound attenuators and accessories related to each system.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Detail Drawings; G



Coordination Drawings; G

SD-03 Product Data

Test ProceduresFor equipment, product data shall include factory certified illustrations of equipment plan layouts, elevations, and include assembly and installation details. Data shall include information required to demonstrate compliance with the performance characteristics, electrical characteristics and dimensional allowances indicated on the Contract Drawings. The submitted equipment shall be coordinated with the design intent to enable proper function. Product data shall include:

a. Equipment layouts which identify assembly and installation details.b. Physical separation seams to enable sectional unit disassembly. c. Electrical motor connection diagrams.d. Plans and elevations to indicate clearances required for operation and maintenance.e. For units with factory-wired electrical components, provide a detailed wiring diagram for each unit indicating all system accessories and point to point wiring connections. f. Foundation drawings, bolt-setting information, and foundation bolts prior to concrete foundation construction for all equipment indicated or required to have concrete foundations.g. Details, if equipment is to be supported other than as indicated; include loadings and type of frames, brackets, stanchions, or other supports.h. Fan curve for each fan with operating point clearly identified.i. Capacity of UVC lights; kw and lamp quantity for each AHU.

Standard Products: Manufacturer's catalog data included with the detail drawings for the following items. Highlight the data to show model, size, options, etc., that are intended for consideration. Provide adequate data to demonstrate compliance with contract requirements for the following:

Flexible Duct Connectors; GFlexible Duct Joints; GDuct Access Doors; GManual Balancing Dampers; GDiffusers, Registers and Grilles; GAir Vents and Goosenecks; GVibration Isolators; GCentrifugal Type Power Roof Ventilators; GAir Handling Units; GTerminal Units; GFilters; GMechanical Identification Materials; GRoof Curbs; GTest Procedures; GSound attenuators; G

SD-06 Test Reports

Performance Tests; G



SD-07 Certificates

BoltsCertification

SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions

Manufacturer's Installation InstructionsOperation and Maintenance TrainingStart-up and Testing Procedures


Operation and Maintenance Manuals; G

Manual Balancing Dampers; GCentrifugal Type Power Roof Ventilators; GAir Handling Units; GTerminal Units; G


Except as otherwise specified, approval of materials and equipment is based on manufacturer's published data.

a. Where materials and equipment are specified to conform to the standards of the Underwriters Laboratories, the label of or listing with reexamination in UL Bld Mat Dir, and UL 6 is acceptable as sufficient evidence that the items conform to Underwriters Laboratories requirements. In lieu of such label or listing, submit a written certificate from any nationally recognized testing agency, adequately equipped and competent to perform such services, stating that the items have been tested and that the units conform to the specified requirements. Outline methods of testing used by the specified agencies.

b. Where materials or equipment are specified to be constructed or tested, or both, in accordance with the standards of the ASTM International (ASTM), the ASME International (ASME), or other standards, a manufacturer's certification of compliance of each item is acceptable as proof of compliance.

c. Conformance to such agency requirements does not relieve the item from compliance with other requirements of these specifications.

d. Conduct a pre-installation meeting and subsequent meetings to coordinate the work of this section with the metal stud installation for partitions indicated in Section 09 22 00 METAL SUPPORT FRAMING ASSEMBLIES. Verify that framed openings are provided for duct penetrations through partitions constructed with metal studs.

1.4.1 Prevention of Corrosion

Protect metallic materials against corrosion. Manufacturer shall provide rust-inhibiting treatment and standard finish for the equipment enclosures. Do not use aluminum in contact with earth, and where connected to dissimilar metal. Protect aluminum by approved fittings, barrier material, or treatment. Ferrous parts such as anchors, bolts, braces, boxes, bodies, clamps, fittings, guards, nuts, pins, rods, shims, thimbles,



washers, and miscellaneous parts not of corrosion-resistant steel or nonferrous materials shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M for exterior locations and cadmium-plated in conformance with ASTM B766 for interior locations. Provide written certification from the bolt manufacturer that the bolts furnished comply with the requirements of this specification. Include illustrations of product markings, and the number of each type of bolt to be furnished in the certification.

1.4.2 Asbestos Prohibition

Do not use asbestos and asbestos-containing products.

1.4.3 Use of Ozone Depleting Substances, Other than Refrigerants

The use of Class I or Class II ODS's listed as nonessential in 40 CFR 82 Part 82.66 Subpart C is prohibited. These prohibited materials and uses include:

a. Any plastic party spray streamer or noise horn which is propelled by a chlorofluorocarbon

b. Any cleaning fluid for electronic and photographic equipment which contains a chlorofluorocarbon; including liquid packaging, solvent wipes, solvent sprays, and gas sprays.

c. Any plastic flexible or packaging foam product which is manufactured with or contains a chlorofluorocarbon, including, open cell foam, open cell rigid polyurethane poured foam, closed cell extruded polystyrene sheet foam, closed cell polyethylene foam and closed cell polypropylene foam except for flexible or packaging foam used in coaxial cabling.

d. Any aerosol product or other pressurized dispenser which contains a chlorofluorocarbon, except for those listed in 40 CFR 82 Part 82.66 Subpart C.

Request a waiver if a facility requirement dictates that a prohibited material is necessary to achieve project goals. Submit the waiver request in writing to the Contracting Officer. The waiver will be evaluated and dispositioned.

1.4.4 Detail Drawings

Drawings illustrating ductwork hanger details, gauge reinforcement, reinforcement spacing rigidity classification, and static pressure and seal classifications. Provide a duct material and reinforcement schedule indicating each ductwork system; schedule shall indicate pressure class, duct reinforcement methodology proposed, reinforcement spacing interval and material gages. Drawings shall include information required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a unit and shall show equipment relationship to other parts of the work, including clearances required for operation and maintenance. Drawings shall consist of:

a. Equipment layouts which identify ductwork connections.b. Ductwork layouts which identify all dampers and fittings.c. Plans and elevations which identify clearances required for maintenance and operation.d. Details, if ductwork and equipment are to be supported other than as indicated, which include loadings and type of frames,



brackets, stanchions, or other supports.

Submit dimensioned shop drawings indicating ductwork and equipment showing both the accurately scaled elements and relationship to space enclosure. The drawings shall utilize the building floor plans. Provide in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, and as modified by this section. Submitted ductwork shop drawings shall indicate ductwork which has been coordinated with, or adequate space allowance made for work of trades adjacent to ductwork. Illustration shall be drawn to a minimum scale of 1/4 inch equals one foot. Drawings shall indicate dimensions to ductwork from building structural elements and elevations above finished floor. Provide illustrations including sections to clarify elevations of equipment, equipment connections, space allowance for piping, and piping accessories. Drawings shall conform to standard drafting industry procedures. Include Contractors name, project title, date and phone number in title block. Coordinate ductwork and equipment layout with work of other trades. Include as a minimum the following:

a. Ductwork systems.b. Air handling units.c. Sound Attenuators.d. Filter sections.e. Terminal units.f. Hoods/canopies.g. Fans.h. Diffusers / registers / grilles.i. Louvers.j. Dampers.

1.4.5 Test Procedures

Submit proposed test procedures and test schedules for the ductwork leak test, and performance tests of systems, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of related testing.

1.4.6 Sustainable Design Certification

Product shall be third party certified by GEI Greenguard Indoor Air Quality Certified, SCS Scientific Certification Systems Indoor Advantage or equal. Certification shall be performed annually and shall be current.


Protect stored equipment at the jobsite from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Additionally, cap or seal all duct pipe ends until installed.

Equipment and ductwork shall be delivered and stored with protective crating and weatherproof wrapping to provide protection from the weather, humidity, temperature variations, dirt and dust or other contaminants.

1.6 COORDINATION OF TRADES

Furnish ductwork, offsets, fittings, and accessories as required to provide a complete installation and to eliminate interference with other construction. Coordinate duct locations with space required for trades in the adjacent installation area.



1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

1.7.1 Verification of Dimensions

The Contractor shall become familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any work.

1.7.2 Contract Drawings

Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories that may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the plumbing, fire protection, electrical, structural and finish conditions that would affect the work to be performed and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing required offsets, fittings, and accessories to meet such conditions.

1.8 Coordination Drawings

Prior to installation, prepare coordination drawings in twoseparate categories, to ensure field coordination prior toinstallation. The first category shall include items required foran above ceiling coordination effort; including the ceilings. Thesecond category shall include building surface penetrations,sleeves, framed studwork opening, openings in masonry and concretewalls and penetrations through floors. Drawings shall be drawn toa minimum scale of 1/4 inch equals one foot or larger, and includethe floor plan and building structural elements in thebackgrounds. The drawings shall demonstrate a pre-installationcoordination effort.

Provide in accordance with Section 23 03 00.00 20BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Except for the fabricated duct, plenums and casings specified in paragraphs"Metal Ductwork" and "Plenums and Casings for Field-Fabricated Units",provide components and equipment that are standard products ofmanufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacturing of products that areof a similar material, design and workmanship. This requirement applies toall equipment, including diffusers, registers, and balancingdampers.

a. Standard products are defined as components and equipment that havebeen in satisfactory commercial or industrial use in similarapplications of similar size for at least two years before bid opening.

b. Prior to this two year period, these standard products shall have beensold on the commercial market using advertisements in manufacturers'catalogs or brochures. These manufacturers' catalogs, or brochuresshall have been copyrighted documents or have been identified with amanufacturer's document number.

c. Provide equipment items that are supported by a service organization.Where applicable, provide equipment that is an ENERGY STAR Qualifiedproduct or a Federal Energy Management Program (FEMP) designated



product.

2.2 EQUIPMENT GUARDS AND ACCESS

Fully enclose or guard belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting setscrews, keys, and other rotating parts exposed to personnel contact according to OSHA requirements. Properly guard or cover with insulation of a type specified, high temperature equipment and piping exposed to contact by personnel or where it creates a potential fire hazard. The requirements for catwalks, operating platforms, ladders, and guardrails are specified in Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.

2.3 ELECTRICAL WORK

a. Provide motors, controllers, integral disconnects, contactors, and controls with their respective pieces of equipment, except controllers indicated as part of motor control centers. Provide electrical equipment, including motors and wiring, as specified in Section 26 20 00INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation specified and control wiring required for controls and devices specified, but not shown. For packaged equipment, include manufacturer provided controllers with the required monitors and timed restart.

b. For single-phase motors, provide high-efficiency type, fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors, including motors that are part of a system, in accordance with NEMA MG 11. Integral size motors shall be the premium efficiency type in accordance with NEMA MG 1.

c. For polyphase motors, provide squirrel-cage medium induction motors, including motors that are part of a system , and that meet the efficiency ratings for premium efficiency motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1. Select premium efficiency polyphase motors in accordance with NEMA MG 10. Motors indicated for operation with variable frequency drive motor starters shall additionally be certified for inverter duty.

d. Provide motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and of sufficient size to drive the load at the specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor. Provide motors rated for continuous duty with the enclosure specified. Provide motor duty that allows for maximum frequency start-stop operation and minimum encountered interval between start and stop. Provide motor torque capable of accelerating the connected load within 20 seconds with 80 percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals during one starting period. Provide motor starters complete with thermal overload protection and other necessary appurtenances. Fit motor bearings with grease supply fittings and grease relief to outside of the enclosure.

e. Provide variable frequency drives for motors as specified in Section 26 29 23 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEMS UNDER 600 VOLTS.

2.4 ANCHOR BOLTS

Provide anchor bolts for equipment placed on concrete equipment pads or on concrete slabs. Bolts to be of the size and number recommended by the equipment manufacturer and located by means of suitable templates. Installation of anchor bolts shall not degrade the surrounding concrete.



2.5 PAINTING

Paint equipment units in accordance with approved equipment manufacturer's standards unless specified otherwise. Field retouch only if approved. Otherwise, return equipment to the factory for refinishing.

2.6 INDOOR AIR QUALITY

Provide equipment and components that comply with the requirements of ASHRAE 62.1 unless more stringent requirements are specified herein.

2.7 DUCT SYSTEMS

2.7.1 Ducts of Pressure Classes Greater than 2 inches W.G.

Unless noted otherwise, provide galvanized sheet steel, lock forming quality, coating designation G90 for general ductwork applications. Provide stainless sheet steel materials, lock forming quality, type 304 ASTM A167 for duct systems indicated to be constructed of stainless steel. Duct construction, metal gages, and hangers and support reinforcements shall conform with the SMACNA DCS; and as modified herein. Ducts shall not pulsate or vibrate when in operation. Pressure sensitive tape shall not be used as a primary sealant on ductwork. Air leakage shall be as specified for duct air leakage testing (DALT) but no less than one percent of the system capacity. Curved elbows shall have a centerline radius not less than 1 1/2 times the width of ducts. For circular and flat oval duct shapes indicated, provide steel factory fabricated circular and flat-oval ductwork with spiral or lockseam construction or welded longitudinal seam construction with all joints and connections sealed. Construct ductwork with reinforcement at maximum 5 feet center to center.

2.7.1.1 Round and Flat Oval Ducts

SMACNA DCS, Section 3 and as modified by this section. Factory fabricated construction. Duct for stainless steel duct systems shall be constructed of type 304 ASTM A167 stainless steel. Provide continuous longitudinal welded or spiral lockseam construction. Make joints between sections of duct and fittings with mating angle rings, beaded sleeve joints or slide-on gasketed flange connections. Slide-on gasketed flange joints shall consist of two mating flange rings. The flanges shall be fabricated with an integral mastic to make them self-sealing. The flanges shall be joined to the duct with spot-welds or self-tapping screws. A neoprene gasket shall be used between the flanges. Final joining of the slide-on flange connection shall be made with four bolts for flat-oval ducts. A single-bolt closure ring shall be used to complete the round slide-on flange connection. Select duct gage for size and pressure class as recommended in SMACNA DCS, Section 3. Note that longitudinal snap-lock ductwork is not acceptable.

2.7.2 Duct of Pressure Classes 2 inches w.g. or Less

Unless noted otherwise, provide galvanized sheet steel, lock forming quality, coating designation G90 for general ductwork applications. Provide stainless steel materials, lock forming quality, type 304, ASTM A167 for duct systems indicated to be constructed of stainless steel. Construction, metal gage, hangers and supports, and reinforcements shall conform with SMACNA DCS; and as modified herein. Ductwork shall be airtight and shall not vibrate or pulsate when system is in operation. Pressure sensitive tape shall not be used as a primary sealant on



ductwork. Construct ductwork of galvanized steel with all joints and seams sealed. Construct ductwork with reinforcement at 5 feet center to center.

2.7.3 Fitting

Square elbows, round elbows, fittings, branch take-offs, turning vanes, transitions, splitters, duct volume dampers, flexible connections, and access doors shall conform as a minimum with the SMACNA DCS, Section 2, but shall also comply with details indicated on Contract Drawings. Duct fittings and accessories for stainless steel duct systems shall be constructed of type 304 ASTM A167 stainless steel. Note that turning vanes are not acceptable for use in duct systems where radiused elbows are indicated.

2.7.3.1 Test Holes

Provide airtight and noncorrosive test holes with nipple to clear insulation, screw cap and gasket. Test holes for stainless steel duct systems shall be constructed of type 304 ASTM A167 stainless steel.

2.7.3.2 Curved Elbows

Make a centerline radius not less than 1 1/2 times the width or diameter of the duct. Duct elbows and accessories for stainless steel duct systems shall be constructed of type 304 ASTM A167 stainless steel.

2.7.3.3 Laps

Make laps at joints in the direction of air flow. Space bolt-connection in standing seams at fixed centers not greater than 6 inches.

2.7.4 Flexible Duct Connectors

Provide flexible duct runouts only where indicated. Runout length is indicated on the drawings, and is not to exceed 5 feet. Provide flexible duct joints at connections to equipment and elsewhere as indicated.

2.7.4.1 Insulated Nonmetallic Flexible Duct Connectors

Provide runouts that are preinsulated, factory fabricated, and that comply with NFPA 90A and UL 181. Connectors shall be constructed of helical metallic zinc coated steel ribbing with mylar jacketing adhered to the ribbing. Provide mineral fiber blanket type flexible insulation on connector exterior; minimum of one inch thick. Provide insulation covered on exterior with manufacturer's standard fire retardant vapor barrier jacket for flexible round duct.

2.7.4.2 Flexible Duct Joints

Provide a flexible duct connector approximately 6 inches in length where sheet metal connections are made to fans or where ducts of dissimilar metals are connected. For round/oval ducts, secure the flexible material by stainless steel or zinc-coated, iron clinch-type draw bands. For rectangular ducts, install the flexible material locked to metal collars using normal duct construction methods. Provide a composite connector system that complies with UL 214 and is classified as "flame-retarded fabrics" in UL Bld Mat Dir.



2.7.5 Duct Access Doors

Provide hinged access doors conforming to SMACNA 1966 in ductwork and plenums where indicated and at all air flow measuring stations, motor activated dampers, coils, thermostats, sensors and other apparatus requiring service and inspection in the duct system. Provide access doors upstream and downstream of air flow measuring stations and heating and cooling coils. Provide doors that are a minimum 15 by 18 inches, unless otherwise shown. Where duct size does not accommodate this size door, make the doors as large as practicable. Equip doors 24 by 24 inches or larger with fasteners operable from inside and outside the duct. Use insulated type doors in insulated ducts.

Provide doors with continuous hinge on on side. Where hinged operation is impeded by work of other trades or adjacent ducts, provide cam-lock hardware with removable doors and metal chain secured to door frame and door. Access door in systems designed for pressures greater than 2 inches w.g. shall be two piece, double-wall insulated, oval configuration with spring compression twist-lock latching. Access doors shall be constructed of materials typical of the related duct system.

2.7.6 Manual Balancing Dampers

Furnish manual balancing dampers with accessible operating mechanisms. Use chromium plated operators (with all exposed edges rounded) in finished portions of the building. Provide manual volume control dampers that are operated by locking-type quadrant operators.

a. Multiple Blade Type: Provide dampers with opposed blade configuration. Construct blades of 16 gauge galvanized steel. Provide heavy duty molded self-lubricating nylon bearings and 1/2 inch diameter steel axles. Construct frame of 5 inches x 1 inch steel channel. Furnish with locking linkage handle assembly to secure damper in required position.

b. Single Blade Type: Provide dampers with center pivot blade configuration. Construct blade of 18 gauge galvanized steel. Provide nylon end bearings and 1/4 inch diameter round steel axle. Construct frame of 16 gauge galvanized steel. Furnish with locking linkage handle assembly to secure damper in required position. Notch all damper rod ends. Maximum face size: 12 inches x 12 inches. Provide nylon or brass damper sealing type rod end bushings. Bearing systems which enable air leakage are not acceptable.

c. Stainless Steel Duct Systems: Provide dampers with opposed blade configuration. Construct blades of 16 gauge, type 316 stainless steel. Provide heavy duty molded self-lubricating nylon bearings and 1/2 inch stainless steel axles. Construct frame of 5 inches x 5 inches, type 316 stainless steel channel. Furnish with locking linkage handle assembly to secure damper in required position.

d. Remote operators: Where indicated, equip manual dampers with remote mechanical actuators. The actuator assembly shall include a concealed damper actuator; galvanized steel housing with internal wrench nut, cover plate with color and finish to match adjacent construction, secured with recessed stainless steel screws, configured for recessed ceiling mounting. The operator shall connect to the damper linkage through a remote cable;



external helically wound galvanized steel with inner stainless steel wire. Furnish for actuator a worm gear control plate with integral cable clamp. Furnish for the damper axle a stand-off bracket with cable casing nuts and damper shaft hub with integral wire stop.

2.7.7 Air Deflectors and Branch Connections

Provide air deflectors at all duct mounted supply outlets, at takeoff or extension collars to supply outlets, at duct branch takeoff connections, and at 90 degree elbows, as well as at locations as indicated on the drawings or otherwise specified. Conical branch connections or 45 degree entry connections are allowed in lieu of deflectors for branch connections. Furnish all air deflectors, except those installed in 90 degree elbows, with an approved means of adjustment. Provide easily accessible means for adjustment inside the duct or from an adjustment with sturdy lock on the face of the duct. When installed on ducts to be thermally insulated, provide external adjustments with stand-off mounting brackets, integral with the adjustment device, to provide clearance between the duct surface and the adjustment device not less than the thickness of the thermal insulation. Provide factory-fabricated air deflectors consisting of curved turning vanes or louver blades designed to provide uniform air distribution and change of direction with minimum turbulence or pressure loss. Provide factory or field assembled air deflectors. Make adjustment from the face of the diffuser or by position adjustment and lock external to the duct. Provide stand-off brackets on insulated ducts as described herein. Provide fixed air deflectors, also called turning vanes, in 90 degree elbows. Air deflectors shall be constructed of materials typical of the related duct system.

2.7.8 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles

Provide factory-fabricated units of steel, stainless steel or aluminum as indicated that distribute the specified quantity of air evenly over space intended without causing noticeable drafts, air movement faster than 50 fpm in occupied zone, or dead spots anywhere in the conditioned area. Provide outlets for diffusion, spread, throw, and noise level as required for specified performance. Certify performance according to ASHRAE 70. Provide sound rated and certified inlets and outlets according to ASHRAE 70. Provide sound power level as indicated. Provide diffusers and registers with integral volume damper with accessible operator, unless otherwise indicated; or if standard with the manufacturer, an automatically controlled device is acceptable. Provide opposed blade type volume dampers for all diffusers and registers, except linear slot diffusers. Provide linear slot diffusers with round or elliptical balancing dampers. Where the inlet and outlet openings are located less than 7 feet above the floor, protect them by a grille or screen according to NFPA 90A. Units indicated to be constructed of stainless steel shall be fabricated completely of stainless steel including dampers, fasteners and accessories.

2.7.8.1 Ceiling Diffusers

Provide diffuser types indicated. Furnish ceiling mounted units with anti-smudge devices, unless the diffuser unit minimizes ceiling smudging through design features. Provide diffusers with air straightener vanes in throat. Diffuser cores shall consist of four or more concentric elements in the face, designed to deliver air in a generally radial pattern, evenly from the center of the face. Furnish with integral opposed blade manual damper in diffuser throat. Install ceiling mounted units with rims tight



against ceiling. Provide sponge rubber gaskets between ceiling and surface mounted diffusers for air leakage control. Provide suitable trim for flush mounted diffusers. For connecting the duct to diffuser, provide duct collar that is airtight and does not interfere with volume controller. Provide return or exhaust units that are similar to supply diffusers.

2.7.9 Ceiling Return Registers

Provide factory fabricated perforated face registers with single key opposed blade volume damper in throat. Faceplate shall not sag or deflect when operating under design conditions. Provide frames for lay-in (acoustic tile) or gypsum board (hard) ceilings as indicated. Coordinate frames with reflective ceiling plans. Provide sponge rubber gasket between flange and ceiling for surface mounted types. Provide registers with neck sizes the same as the register face size for use with the indicated and scheduled register plenum unless noted otherwise.

2.7.10 Ceiling Exhaust Registers

Provide factory fabricated perforated face registers with single key opposed blade volume damper in throat. Faceplate shall not sag or deflect when operating under design conditions. Provide frames for lay-in (acoustic tile) or gypsum board (hard) ceilings as indicated. Coordinate frames with reflective ceiling plans. Provide sponge rubber gasket between flange and ceiling for surface mounted types. Provide registers with neck sizes the same as the register face size for use with the indicated and scheduled register plenum unless noted otherwise.

2.7.11 Sidewall Registers

Provide double deflection blade pattern; front blades parallel with register height, rear blades parallel with register width. Provide single key operated opposed blade manual volume damper in throat. Provide similar registers for return, exhaust, and transfer air as specified for supply, except that return, exhaust and transfer registers shall have a single set of blades parallel with register width. Provide sponge rubber gasket between flanges and wall. Where indicated, provide units constructed of type 304 stainless steel.

2.7.12 Grilles

Construct and finish as specified above for registers, except that volume dampers shall be omitted.

2.7.13 Air Vents and Goosenecks

Fabricate air vents, and goosenecks from galvanized steel sheets with galvanized structural shapes. Provide sheet metal thickness, reinforcement, and fabrication that conform to SMACNA 1966. Accurately fit and secure louver blades to frames. Fold or bead edges of louver blades for rigidity and baffle these edges to exclude driving rain. Provide air vents, penthouses, and goosenecks with bird screen.

2.7.14 Bird Screens and Frames

Provide bird screens that conform to ASTM E2016, No. 2 mesh, aluminum or stainless steel. Provide "medium-light" rated aluminum screens. Provide "light" rated stainless steel screens. Provide removable type frames fabricated from either stainless steel or extruded aluminum.



2.7.15 Sound Attenuators

Sound attenuators shall be factory fabricated and certified trough testing by an independent laboratory for the sound and performance reduction characteristics. Attenuators shall be double wall type G90 galvanized steel construction; solid exterior casing, perforated interior casing, configured with single or multiple venturi passages; each filled with mineral fiber insulation. Surfaces of mineral fiber exposed to airstream shall be covered with an impervious mylar coating. Attenuators shall be constructed to be airtight. Air-side surfaces shall be capable of withstanding air velocity of 10,000 fpm. Mineral fiber material shall conform to ASTM C1071, Type I or II and shall meet the fire hazard and smoke developed ratings for insulation specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. Provide sizes and operating characteristics indicated on contract drawings.

2.7.16 Miscellaneous Sheet Metal

Provide Type G-90 galvanized sheet steel for louver plenums and auxiliary drain pans.

2.8 AIR SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT

2.8.1 Fans

Test and rate fans according to AMCA 210. The sound power level of the fans shall not exceed the scheduled values when tested according to AMCA 300 and rated in accordance with AMCA 301. Provide all fans with an AMCA seal. Connect fans to the motors either directly or indirectly with V-belt drive. Use V-belt drives designed for not less than 150 percent of the connected driving capacity. Provide variable pitch motor sheaves for 15 hp and below, and fixed pitch as defined by AHRI Guideline D (A fixed-pitch sheave is provided on both the fan shaft and the motor shaft. This is a non-adjustable speed drive.). Select variable pitch sheaves to drive the fan at a speed which can produce the specified capacity when set at the approximate midpoint of the sheave adjustment. When fixed pitch sheaves are furnished, provide a replaceable sheave when needed to achieve system air balance, size as determined by TABs. Provide motors for V-belt drives with adjustable rails or bases. Provide removable metal guards for all exposed V-belt drives, and provide speed-test openings at the center of all rotating shafts. Provide fans with personnel screens or guards on both suction and supply ends, except that the screens need not be provided, unless otherwise indicated, where ducts are connected to the fan. Provide fan and motor assemblies with vibration-isolation supports or mountings as indicated. Use vibration-isolation units that are standard products with published loading ratings. Select each fan to produce the capacity required at the fan static pressure indicated. Provide standard AMCA arrangement, rotation, and discharge as indicated. Where installed duct connections to fans differ from that indicated on the Contract Drawings, include additional motor horsepower to acquire the air delivery to devices indicated on Contract Drawings. Calculate system effect in accordance with AMCA 201. Fans and housings shall be factory painted.

2.8.1.1 Centrifugal Type Power Roof Ventilators

Provide centrifugal type fans with backward inclined, non-overloading wheel. Provide hinged or removable and weatherproof motor compartment housing, constructed of heavy gauge aluminum. Provide fans with birdscreen,



disconnect switch, motorized dampers, roof curb, and extended base. Provide dripproof type motor enclosure.

2.8.2 Coils

Provide fin-and-tube type coils constructed of seamless copper tubes and aluminum or copper fins mechanically bonded or soldered to the tubes. Provide copper tube wall thickness that is a minimum of 0.016 inches. Provide red brass tube wall thickness that is a minimum of 0.035 inches. Provide aluminum fins that are 0.0055 inch minimum thickness. Provide copper fins that are 0.0045 inch minimum thickness. Provide casing and tube support sheets that are not lighter than 16 gauge galvanized steel, or stainless steel as indicated, formed to provide structural strength. When required, provide multiple tube supports to prevent tube sag. Test each coil at the factory under water at not less than 400 psi air pressure and make suitable for 200 psi working pressure and 300 degrees F operating temperature unless otherwise stated. Mount coils for counterflow service. Rate and certify coils to meet the requirements of AHRI 410.

2.8.2.1 Water Coils

Install water coils with a pitch of not less than 1/8 inch/foot of the tube length toward the drain end. Use headers constructed of cast iron, welded steel or copper. Furnish each coil with a plugged vent and drain connection extending through the unit casing. Provide chilled water coils with drain pans.

2.8.3 Air Filters

List air filters according to requirements of UL 900, except list high efficiency particulate air filters of 99.97 percent efficiency by the DOP Test method under the Label Service to meet the requirements of UL 586. Provide physical size of filters and gross area of filter media as scheduled.

2.8.3.1 Extended Surface Pleated Panel Filters

Provide 2 inch or 4 inch depth as indicated sectional, disposable type filters of the size indicated with a MERV of 8 when tested according to ASHRAE 52.2. Provide UL Class 2 filters, and nonwoven cotton and synthetic fiber mat media. Attach a wire support grid bonded to the media to a moisture resistant fiberboard frame. Bond all four edges of the filter media to the inside of the frame to prevent air bypass and increase rigidity. Install filters in a factory pre-assembled side access housing, or an air handling unit sectional frame bank as indicated.

2.8.3.2 Cartridge Type Filters

Provide 12 inch depth, sectional, replaceable dry media type filters of the size indicated with a MERV of 14 when tested according to ASHRAE 52.2. Provide UL class 1 filters, and pleated microglass paper media with corrugated aluminum separators, sealed inside the filter cell to form a totally rigid filter assembly. Fluctuations in filter face velocity or turbulent airflow have no effect on filter integrity or performance. Install each filter in a factory preassembled side access housing, or a front loading air handling unit sectional frame bank, as indicated.



2.8.3.3 Filter Gauges

Provide dial type filter gauges, diaphragm actuated draft for all filter stations, including those filters which are furnished as integral parts of factory fabricated air handling units. Gauges shall be at least 4 inches in diameter, shall have white dials with black figures, shall be graduated in 0.01 inch of water, and shall have a minimum range of 1 inch of water beyond the specified final resistance for the filter bank on which each gauge is applied. Each gauge shall incorporate a screw operated zero adjustment and shall be furnished with two static pressure tips with integral compression fittings, two molded plastic vent valves, two 5 foot minimum lengths of 1/4 inch diameter aluminum tubing, and all hardware and accessories for gauge mounting.

2.8.3.4 Replacement Media

Provide three sets of filter media for each air handling unit and filter section; one for use during construction, a second for use during commissioning, and the third for use by Owner. Store third filter set at location directed by Contracting Officer after commissioning process is complete.

2.9 AIR HANDLING UNITS

2.9.1 Factory Custom Air Handling Units

ARI 430 with single-zone type, sound power level, and static pressure, as indicated. Include intake and discharge sections, cooling and heating coil sections; where indicated, supply fan section, air blender section, humidifier section, filter sections and access sections. Filters, filter rack, coils, fans and drip pans must be completely removable from the unit without having to dismantle the unit or adjacent equipment; components shall not provide casing structural support. Provide units with component configuration indicated with dimensions not to exceed those indicated on contract drawings. Provide duct openings and access doors in unit at locations and of sizes indicated on contract drawings.

2.9.1.1 Casings

a. Provide continuous arc welded structural tube steel base frame or channel steel base frame. Provide additional base members (all welded) at heavy components such as fans, coils, etc.. Internal unit structure shall consist of welded tubular steel members or galvanized upright and cross channels. Cross channels shall be minimum 14 gage. Provide minimum 12 gage embossed tread plate floor in all sections.

b. Outer walls shall be double die formed panels assembled to create inward standing seams which are attached to the structural steel frame. Panels shall be fabricated of minimum G-90 galvanized steel secured to frame with heavy duty gasketed cad-plated industrial screw fastener on centers. Screws shall be capable of being removed multiple times without stripping or leaking. Total thickness of wall panels shall not be less than 4 inches.

c. Unit base, casing and framework shall be primed with zinc chromate primer and painted with two coats Epoxy or high build alkyd enamel inside and out prior to panel attachment.



d. The entire unit casing from the cooling coil and downstream shall be insulated with 3 inch thick, 3 lbs. per cu. Ft. density fiberglass insulation. Insulation shall conform to UL 181. All components including frame members shall be insulated, and a specially designed vapor barrier provided to completely eliminate condensation from forming with supply air temperatures down to 50 degrees F and the ambient air at the unit exterior is 79 degrees F WB or below. The manufacturer shall certify that these conditions will be met under the scheduled operating conditions. The entire unit casing shall be double wall construction with 20 gauge solid galvanized steel liner fastened to the steel frame of the unit casing.

e. The entire unit casing upstream of the cooling coil section shall be insulated with 3 inch thick, 6 lbs. cu. ft. density, fiberglass board with an acoustical limp vinyl mass barrier and one inch thick, 1.5 lbs. cu. Ft. density, fiberglass duct liner for a total thickness of 3 inches. The entire unit casing shall be double wall construction with 20 gauge galvanized steel interior liner fastened to the steel frame of the unit casing.

f. The drain pan shall extend under the complete cooling coil and humidifier section, and shall be of the double pan type with 3 inchthick high density fiberglass or 2 inch thick urethane foam between pans. The rigid inner and outer pans shall be constructed of minimum 16 gauge stainless steel. The water tight inner pan shall be coated with corrosion resistant elastomeric material, flame spread not exceeding 25 feet, smoke developed not exceeding 50 feet, and fitted with side pipe drain connections. Condensate pans shall be one piece with fully welded corners and pitched toward condensate drain connection for positive drainage.

g. Access doors shall be 16 gauge double wall, flush mounting, hinged and fitted with cast aluminum cam-action handles which shall be operable from either side of the door. Access doors shall be size indicated or if not indicated otherwise, provide a minimum of 24 inches wide and 60 inches high, arranged for normal equipment inspection, maintenance and removal. All doors shall open against air pressure. Provide reinforced vision glass in access doors where indicated. Vision glass at cooling coil/UV light section shall be tempered for UV lights.

h. Access door frames shall be heavy duty extruded aluminum fitted with hollow bulb synthetic rubber seals. The bulb seals shall include a base leg which slides into a mating groove in the aluminum extrusion for ease of replacement. The entire access door and frame assembly shall be insulated, and a specially designed vapor barrier provided, to completely eliminate condensation from forming with supply air temperatures down to 50 degrees F and the ambient air is 79 degrees F WB or below.

i. Provide dead-man electrical disconnect switch on each access door to each fan section.

j. Assembled exterior panels attachment points to steel frame shall be sealed with closed cell neoprene gasket sandwiched between frame and panel. All joints shall be externally sealed with silicone sealant. Exterior panels shall be completely removable without compromising the structural integrity of the unit. Roof



structure shall not deflect when more than one panel is removed. Unless noted otherwise, unit floor shall be standard double wall construction with 12 gauge interior floor and 18 gauge subfloor with minimum 3 inch insulation between.

2.9.1.2 Supply Fans

a. Supply fans shall be plug type, minimum Class II. Fans shall deliver performance specified in the air handling unit schedule and shall be AMCA certified type. Fan wheels shall operate to pressurize an acoustical plenum to provide uniform discharge velocity profiles and to allow even face velocities across and through the AHU casing. At rated capacity, the unit shall not exceed sound power levels and surrounding space NC levels as indicated. Fans shall be direct drive.

b. Fan wheel diameters shall be in accordance with the standard sizes adopted by AMCA. Inlets shall be fully streamlined. Blades shall be welded to backplate and welded to wheel cone. Wheels shall be statically balanced prior to assembly and dynamically balanced as an assembly at the factory at design RPM prior to shipment. Fans shall be balanced at design RPM to a total displacement of less than 1 mil measured at each bearing pad prior to shipment.

c. Fan shafts shall be solid steel machined to standard diameters and tolerances for turned, ground and polished shafts. Center shall be provided at one end of shaft for tachometer reading. Fan shaft shall be designed to be a minimum of 29% below critical speed at design RPM. Fan wheels and drive sheaves shall be key-seated to fan shaft.

d. Supply fans shall be direct driven. Furnish TEFC, premium efficiency motor for each fan. Shaft and bearings for direct-drive supply fans shall be configured and sized to accommodate the fan impeller. Positive locking to shaft shall be provided by means of a keyed hub.

f. The fan assembly, complete with motor and drive, shall be mounted on a heavy steel type base. Open spring type vibration isolators 2 inch deflection shall be provided which support the fan assembly and isolate all rotating parts. All spring isolators shall be capable of 30 percent overtravel before becoming solid and shall be designed stable for a minimum KX/KY (horizontal to vertical spring rate) of 1.0.

2.9.1.3 Coils

a. Provide water coils as scheduled. Coils shall be plate fin type with 5/8 inch O.D. seamless wall copper tubing mechanically expanded into aluminum fins. Headers shall be heavy wall copper fitted with standard MPT copper connections.

b. Coil casings shall be die formed 16 gauge #304 stainless steel with stainless steel tube sheet supports not exceeding 48 inches on center. Provide #304 stainless steel intermediate drain pan on all coil banks higher than 48 inches. Coil frames shall not be used as structural members of the coil section and can be removed without affecting the structural integrity of the air handling unit.



c. Coils shall be ARI 410 certified and tested at a minimum 325 psig air pressure under water and suitable for minimum 200 psig working pressure, 300 degrees F temperature. Coils shall be gravity drainable and contain no internal turbulence promoting devices.

2.9.1.4 Interior Lighting

Provide marine type vapor proof fluorescent lights with metal guard where indicated. Provide switches mounted on unit exterior for lighting control in each section independently; both sides of unit where indicated. Furnish unit with factory installed wiring to light switches and a duplex 120 volt electrical receptacle; where indicated, terminating at a single point power connection.

2.9.1.5 Leak Testing

a. For the air handling unit product line submitted, provide factory certification that the entire unit casing has been rated for a pressure of 11 inches w.g.; positive or negative depending upon operating characteristics of each section, with a leakage rate not to exceed 1 percent of the scheduled total airflow.

b. Leak test shall be performed by measuring the air flow into the air handling unit at the designed operating static pressures. Submit evidence of leak test criteria. A chambered nozzle with a variable supply system, as described in AMCA Standard 210-85, shall be used as the air flow measurement system. All supply and return air openings shall be sealed with the seal at the supply fan to isolate the high and low side of the unit. The air flow measurement system shall be ducted to the unit. The air flow pumped into the unit shall be measured at the appropriate operating pressures. The pressure drop across the chambered nozzle shall be measured with a manometer. The air flow shall then be calculated using AMCA Standard 210, Equation 9.3.2.8 flow rate for chamber nozzles.

2.9.1.6 Vibration Isolation

The entire fan and motor assembly shall be installed on a structural steel channel support frame. Provide supplemental galvanized steel channel spring isolated, 6 inch deep inertia base frame including minimum 4 inch diameter, 2 inch nominal deflection spring vibration isolators, internally mounted at the factory together with fan suction flexible connection and thrust restraint springs. Inertia base frame shall be welded; configured for field furnished reinforced concrete infill. Inertia base shall include steel frame, welded isolator clips and spring compression isolators at a minimum of four points around frame perimeter.

2.9.1.7 Dampers

Unless noted otherwise, AHU outdoor air, return and relief air dampers shall be furnished as work of Section 23 09 23.13 20, BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC.

2.9.1.8 Filter Sections

Provide front loading filter sections. Protect permanent holding frames with rust inhibitor coating. Provide visible identification on media



frames showing model number and air-flow direction. Where filter bank is indicated, provide means of sealing to prevent bypass of unfiltered air. Provide access doors to filter sections where indicated. Filters efficiencies and media area shall comply with schedules on Contract Drawings. Provide filter gage on each filter section as indicated in paragraph "Air Systems Equipment".

2.9.1.9 Access Sections, Filter Sections and Plenum Sections

Access sections shall be provided where indicated and shall be furnished with access doors as shown. All sections shall be constructed in a manner identical to the remainder of the unit casing and shall be equipped with access doors.

2.9.1.10 UVC Emitters

a. Provide bank of UVC emitting lamps at the downstream side of each cooling coil face. Lamp banks shall be factory pre-wired in rigid conduit to a single point connection; control panel with system pilot light, failure pilot light, "lamp-out" relay and disconnect switch at unit exterior.

b. Irradiation - Emitters and fixtures are to be installed in sufficient quantity and in such an arrangement so as to provide an equal distribution of UVC energy on the coil and in the drain pan. To maintain energy efficiency, the UVC energy produced shall be of the lowest possible reflected and shadowed losses. Provide array with multiple rows of lamps; number defined by coil height. A single row of lamps will not be acceptable.

c. Intensity - The minimal UVC energy striking the leading edge of all coil fins shall not be less than 1500 mW/cm2 at the closest point and through placement, not less than 70% of that value at the farthest point. This therefore sets the minimum quantity of fixtures to be installed and their placement. Additionally, equal amounts are to strike the drain, either directly or indirectly through reflection.

d. Installation - Emitters and fixtures shall be installed at right angles to the conforming lines of the coil fins, such that through incident angle reflection, UVC energy bathes all surfaces of the coil and drain pan as well as all of the line of sight airstream.

e. Units shall be very high output, HVAC-type, germicidal UVC light sources, factory assembled and tested. Components shall include a housing, reflector, high efficiency electronic power source, Emitter sockets and Emitter tube, all constructed to withstand inner HVAC environments. Total output per inch arc length shall not be less than 10mw/cm2, at one meter, in a 400 fpm airstream at 50 degrees F.

f. Supports shall be type 304 stainless steel with wiring devices ad raceways.

g. Reflectors shall be constructed of high spectral finished aluminum alloy with a minimum 85 percent reflectance of 254 nm UVC radiance.

h. UVC lamp banks shall operate at 115V nominal, unless noted otherwise. They shall be UL class P2 type capable of igniting



each Emitter at temperatures from 32- 165 degrees F in airflow velocities to 1000 fpm. Their conversion efficiency shall not be less than 70 percent and they shall be designed so as to enhance plasma vapor pressure for maximum photon production in cold airstreams. They shall be equipped with RF and line noise suppression.

i. Emitter tubes shall be of the high output, hot cathode, T5 (15mm) diameter, medium bi-pin type. They shall produce 95% of their energy at 254 nm and be capable of producing the specified output at airflow velocities to 1000 fpm at temperatures of 32- 165 degrees F. They shall produce no ozone or other secondary contamination.

j. Provide multi-purpose UVC Radiometric monitor at each unit to display lamp run-time hours and to monitor UV lamp performance from initial installation to lamp change-out. Monitor shall interface with direct digital control for monitoring and alarming as indicated on Contract Drawings.

2.9.1.11 Electronic Airflow Measuring Stations

Where indicated, provide airflow measuring stations factory installed in units. Each station shall contain an array of velocity sensing elements equally spaced along multiple insertion probes for duct mounted units, or an array of velocity sensing elements designed in a frame for insertion to a fan vortex inlet for fan inlet types. The velocity sensing elements shall be of the RTD or thermistor type, with linearizing means. Pitot type air flow measuring stations will not be acceptable. The sensing elements shall be distributed across the duct or opening cross section in the quantity and pattern set forth for measurements and instruments of ASHRAE-03 and SMACNA-07 for the traversing of ducted air flows. Station construction shall be suitable for operation at airflows of up to 5000 feet per minute over a temperature range of -20 to 160 degrees F, and accuracy shall be plus or minus 3 percent over a range of 0 to 5000 feet per minute; scaled to volume. Equip airflow measurement stations with transmitters compatible with control system specified in Section BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC.

2.9.1.12 Electrical Work

Provide factory installed and wired electrical components interior to unit. Factory installed and field installed components shall comply with Division 26 Section, 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide all motors, motor starters, disconnect switches, lighting, switches, and service receptacles. Furnish factory installed wiring and raceways for all factory installed electrical components at AHU interior. Terminate power wiring for AHU lighting, UVC emitters, and supply fan (each separate) at junction boxes on AHU exterior.

2.10 TERMINAL UNITS

2.10.1 Variable Air Volume (VAV) Air Terminal Valves

AHRI 880 I-P; capacities, static pressures, and other operating conditions as indicated. Include variable-volume dampers, and other items for system operation. Furnish units with hot water heating coil in discharge where indicated. Equip units with integral electric motor actuated air-volume control dampers. Maximum air-leak rate of casing shall be less than one



percent at one inch water gage. Heating coils shall conform to paragraph "Air Systems Equipment".

2.10.1.1 Casing

Minimum 26 gage galvanized steel or equivalent thickness aluminum. Provide removable access panels for inspection, adjustment, and maintenance without disconnecting ducts. Provide minimum one inch thick double wall steel housings with insulation between; internal surfaces of air stream shall be galvanized steel. Provide double wall insulated access door into air terminal valve casing. Door shall permit access to damper, linkage, and coils. Furnish access doors with gasketing and latches to meet casing leakage criteria. Note that tape products applied to casing exterior are not an acceptable casing sealing methodology.

2.10.1.2 Insulation

NFPA 90A and UL Classified for 2 hour fire-rated classification with minimum 1 inch thick 1 1/2 lb. glass fiber per cubic foot density. Provide thermal break construction of casing to prevent condensation on exterior of casing when ambient conditions are 80 degree F WB with 50 degrees F supply air.

2.10.1.3 Controls

Provide factory installed direct digital controller in accordance with Section, 23 09 23.13 20 BACNET DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC.

2.10.1.4 Flow Sensors

Sensor shall be ring or cross type with minimum of one pitot port per one and one-half lineal inches of ring/cross length, which average the velocity across the inlet. Flow measurement shall be within plus or minus 5 percent of rated airflow with 1.5 diameters of straight duct upstream of unit and inlet static variation of 0.5 to 5.0 inches W.G. Flow measuring taps and calibration flow chart shall be supplied with each unit for field balancing airflows. Furnish flow sensor at each unit inlet.

2.10.1.5 VAV Damper or Valve

Galvanized steel butterfly style damper blade shall close against gasket inside unit. Connect damper to operating shaft with a positive mechanical connection. Provide nylon bearings for damper shaft. Damper or valve leakage at shutoff shall not exceed 1 percent of capacity at 4 inch W.G. pressure.

2.11 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

Comply with Section 23 05 48.00 40 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC AND PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.

2.12 ROOF CURBS

Factory-fabricated sheet-steel structural members. Provide minimum 2 inches x 4 inches factory-installed wood nailers, and fully mitered end sections. Provide welded 18 gage galvanized steel shell, 2 inch thick rigid fiberglass insulation interior liner, base plate, and counterflashing and provide stiffness required to eliminating deflection. Furnish to suit roof slopes so that supported equipment installed rests dead level.



Provide curbs in configurations indicated. Furnish curbs with integral double wall galvanized steel insulated sound absorbing baffles in curb throat where indicated to be sound curbs.

2.12.1 Roof Equipment Supports

Factory fabricated construction typical of roof curb except insulation is not required. Furnish lengths, sizes and configurations indicated.

2.13 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS


2.13.1 Painted Identification Materials

Stencils: Standard fiberboard stencils, prepared for required applications with letter sizes generally complying with recommendations of ASME A13.1 for piping and similar applications, but not less than 1-1/4 inch high letters for ductwork and not less than 3/4 inch high letters for access door signs and similar operational instructions.

a. Stencil Paint: standard exterior type stenciling enamel; black, except as otherwise indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray-can form and grade.

b. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated complying with ASME A13.1.


Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS L-P-387, in the sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the sizes and wording indicated, black and white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate.Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.


Provide manufacturer's standard laminate plastic, color coded equipment markers. Include terminology matching equipment schedules as closely as possible. Provide approximately 2 inches x 4 inches markers for control devices, and 4 inches x 6 inches for equipment.


Provide pre-printed or partially pre-printed accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matt finish suitable for writing, approximately 3 x 6 inches, with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre-printed wording including large-size primary wording (as examples; DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT OPERATE).


Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical



identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment. Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and specified, provide identification which indicates individual system number as well as service (as examples; AHU No. 3, EF No.2).

2.14 FACTORY PAINTING

Factory paint new equipment, which are not of galvanized construction. Paint with a corrosion resisting paint finish according to ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A924/A924M. Clean, phosphatize and coat internal and external ferrous metal surfaces with a paint finish which has been tested according to ASTM B117, ASTM D1654, and ASTM D3359. Submit evidence of satisfactory paint performance for a minimum of 125 hours for units to be installed indoors and 3000 hours for units to be installed outdoors. Provide rating of failure at the scribe mark that is not less than 6, average creepage not greater than 1/8 inch. Provide rating of the inscribed area that is not less than 10, no failure. On units constructed of galvanized steel that have been welded, provide a final shop docket of zinc-rich protective paint on exterior surfaces of welds or welds that have burned through from the interior according to ASTM D520 Type I.

Factory painting that has been damaged prior to acceptance by the Contracting Officer shall be field painted in compliance with the requirements of paragraph FIELD PAINTING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT.

2.15 SUPPLEMENTAL COMPONENTS/SERVICES

2.15.1 Chilled or Hot Water Piping

The requirements for chilled, or hot water piping and accessories are specified in Section 23 64 26 CHILLED AND HOT WATER PIPING SYSTEMS

2.15.2 Refrigerant Piping

The requirements for refrigerant piping are specified in Section 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING.

2.15.3 Condensate Drain Lines

Provide and install condensate drainage for each item of equipment that generates condensate in accordance with Section 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES.

2.15.4 Insulation

The requirements for shop and field applied insulation are specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.

2.15.5 Controls

The requirements for controls are specified in 23 09 23.13 20 BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing the work.

3.2 INSTALLATION

3.2.1 Ductwork Installation

Provide duct sizes and configurations (rectangular, flat oval, round) indicated on Contract Drawings. Conform to NFPA 90A, SMACNA DCS. Provide mounting and supporting of ductwork and accessories including, but not limited to, structural supports, hangers, vibration isolators, stands, clamps and brackets, access doors, and dampers. Provide dielectric isolation between dissimilar metals. Electrical isolation may be fluorinated elastomers or sponge-rubber gaskets. Install ductwork accessories as indicated and as recommended by manufacturer's printed instruction. Allow clearance for inspection, repair, replacement, and service. Seal all ductwork joints with mastic sealant; airtight.

3.2.2 Ductwork

Air distribution systems shall operate with no chatter or vibration.

3.2.2.1 3.2.2.1 Field Changes to Ductwork

Those required to suit the sizes of factory-fabricated equipment actually furnished, shall be designed to minimize expansion and contraction. Use gradual transitions in field changes as well as modifications to connecting ducts. Provide duct configurations, types and sizes indicated on Contract Drawings. If field coordination requires the changing of duct sizes or types, written approval shall be obtained from the Contracting Officer.

3.2.2.2 Dampers

When installed on ducts to be thermally insulated, equip each damper operator with stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters to provide clearance between the duct and operator not less than the thickness of insulation. Stand-off mounting items shall be integral with the operator or standard accessory of damper manufacturer.

3.2.2.3 Turning Vanes

Provide in square elbows.

3.2.2.4 Access Doors

Provide where indicated on contract drawings, and elsewhere required for automatic dampers, volume dampers, smoke detectors, coils, thermostats, temperature controllers, valves, filters, humidifiers and other concealed apparatus requiring service and inspection in the duct systems.

3.2.3 Duct Hangers and Supports

SMACNA DCS, Section 4. Attach supports only to structural framing members and concrete slabs. Do not anchor supports to metal decking unless a means



is provided and approved for preventing the anchors from puncturing the metal decking. Where supports are required between structural framing member, provide suitable intermediate metal framing. Provide retainer clips where C clamps are used.

3.2.4 Flexible Duct Connections

Support ducts by hangers every 3 feet, unless supported by ceiling construction. Stretch flexible air ducts to smooth out corrugations and long radius elbows. Provide minimum length to make connections. Provide stainless steel clamps and insulation spacers at connections to branch ducts and diffusers, registers and grilles. Do not exceed maximum flexible duct length indicated.

3.2.5 Inspection Test Holes

Provide, where required, in ductwork and casings for all balance measurements. If possible, test holes should be located at least 7.5 times diameters downstream from a disturbance. Extend cap through insulation. Provide plastic closure cap at each hole.

3.2.6 Metal Ductwork

Install according to SMACNA 1966 unless otherwise indicated. Install duct supports for sheet metal ductwork according to SMACNA 1966, unless otherwise specified. Do not use friction beam clamps indicated in SMACNA 1966. Anchor risers in the center of the vertical run to allow ends of riser to move due to thermal expansion. Erect supports on the risers that allow free vertical movement of the duct. Attach supports only to structural framing members and concrete slabs. Do not anchor supports to metal decking unless a means is provided and approved for preventing the anchor from puncturing the metal decking. Where supports are required between structural framing members, provide suitable intermediate metal framing. Where C-clamps are used, provide retainer clips.

3.2.7 Canopy Exhaust Ductwork

3.2.7 Exposed Ductwork at Canopy Hoods

Exposed ductwork shall be fabricated from minimum 18 gauge, Type 304L, stainless steel with continuously welded joints and seams. Ducts shall be pitched to drain at hoods and low points indicated. Surface finish shall match hoods.

3.2.8 Concealed Ducts at Canopy Hoods

Ducts conveying moisture laden air shall be fabricated from minimum 18 gauge, Type 304 series, stainless steel. Joints shall be continuously welded, brazed, or soldered to be liquid tight. Duct shall be pitched to drain at points indicated. Transitions to other metals shall be liquid tight, companion angle bolted and gasketed.

3.2.9 Dust Control

Clean ductwork as installation progresses. Cap all open duct ends with 6 mil plastic sheeting and tape at end of each work day. Remove all debris and dirt from ducts and wipe clean. Before installing air outlets, vacuum the duct interior with a fine brush attachment to remove accumulated dust.



3.2.9.1 System Operation During Construction

Air handling units and fans may be operated during building construction only when approved by the Contracting Officer. Exhaust fans are not permitted to be operated. If air handling units are operated to "dry-out" the facility during construction, they shall be used with the return air ductwork disconnected to avoid AHU and ductwork fouling from the building construction conditions. If it is elected and approved that the units may be used, each air handling unit shall be equipped with the specified construction filters in the permanent AHU filter frames. The AHU inlet connection shall be blanked off with sheet metal and sealed, the suction-side access door(s) shall be opened and configured with a temporary, galvanized steel framing rack, to enable the securing of low efficiency blanket type filter media to the rack. The rack dimensions and configuration shall allow the resulting blanket filer media coverage to not exceed a 500 feet per minute face velocity through the blanket filter media at the scheduled AHU air quantity; the media shall be sealed with temporary metal clips to prevent bypass air. The AHU's shall receive air to the suction side through the louvers to the space. The AHU's shall not be operated when outdoor ambient temperature conditions are at 35 degrees F or less. If the AHU's in the temporary-use state are shut down at the end of the day, the louver shall be blanked off to create a barrier between the mechanical space and the facility exterior. In addition to the suction side temporary filter rack, temporary low efficiency blanket filter media shall be secured with metal clips to the inlet face side of each AHU filter bank. The temporary filter media shall be observed daily; at a minimum changed weekly, to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer. When conditions on the construction site are acceptable to the Contracting Officer, the temporary AHU access door filter rack may be removed and the permanent inlet-side AHU duct condition installed. For the initial two weeks of AHU operation to the permanent duct systems; supply and return air, provide temporary low efficiency replaceable filter media over all return registers and continue to use low efficiency blanket filter media over the permanent AHU filter racks as described above. Secure in place with tape at filter perimeter; seal. Change each register filter when visibly soiled or at a minimum; weekly. The installer of this Section shall schedule observation of the temporary filter media with the Contracting Officer. The Government expects to acquire clean AHU's and ductwork when the installation is completed. If ductwork and AHU is soiled with dust during construction, charges for cleaning the duct system and AHU, to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer; including coils, prior to building occupancy, will be borne by this section.

3.2.10 Insulation

Provide thickness and application of insulation materials for ductwork, piping, and equipment according to Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. Externally insulate outdoor air intake ducts and plenums up to the point where the outdoor air mixes with the return air stream.

3.2.11 Duct Test Holes

Provide holes with closures or threaded holes with plugs in ducts and plenums as indicated or where necessary for the use of pitot tube in balancing the air system. Plug insulated duct at the duct surface, patched over with insulation and then marked to indicate location of test hole if needed for future use.



3.3 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION PREPARATION

Provide storage for equipment and materials at the project site. Parts shall be readily accessible for inspection, repair, and renewal. Protect materials and equipment from weather and construction debris.

3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

Install air distribution equipment as indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Provide clearance for inspection, repair, replacement, and service. Electrical work shall conform with NFPA 70 and Division 26, "Electrical." Provide overload protection in the operating disconnect switches and motor starters sized for the operating load. Locate air intake of air handling equipment at a minimum of 30 feet from industrial stacks, bathroom vents, and sanitary risers. Prevailing wind direction shall not be used as justification for placing air intake closer than 30 feet of exhaust stacks.

3.4.1 Air Handling Units and Fans

Install assembled units on vibration isolators. Bolt sections together. Pipe drain pan to the nearest floor drain. Start-up air handling units in the presence of a factory authorized representative.

a. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.

b. Examine rough-in for hydronic and condensate drainage piping and electrical to verify actual locations of connections prior to installation. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

c. Install equipment level and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

d. Support floor-mounted units with vibration isolation devices indicated on concrete foundation. Secure units with anchor bolts. Adjust vibration isolation device to allow equipment to float freely. Replace improperly loaded vibration isolator spring units which result in metal and vibration conductance. Provide reinforced concrete infill of air handling spring isolated inertia base frames.

e. Support suspended units with threaded rods and vibration isolation devices.

f. Assemble knocked-down (disassembled) air handling units where required for rigging into confined spaces. Assembly shall be conducted as recommended by AHU factory authorized representatives. All AHU casing and component seams shall be sealed airtight with materials recommended by AHU representatives. Failed or damaged components shall be placed with original factory components by the installer.

3.4.1.1 Piping Installation Requirements

Specified in other Division 23 sections. The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, valves, fittings, and specialties. The following are



specific connection requirements:

a. Arrange piping installations adjacent to units to allow unit servicing and maintenance.

b. Connection piping to air-handling units with flexible connectors.

c. Connect condensate drain pans; extend to the nearest equipment or floor drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in direction.

3.4.2 Power Transmission Components Adjustment

V-belts and sheaves shall be tested for proper alignment and tension prior to operation and after 72 hours of operation at final adjusted speed. Belts on drive side shall be uniformly loaded, not bouncing. Alignment of direct driven couplings shall be to within manufacturer's maximum allowable range of misalignment. Provide one set of replacement sheaves (fan and motor) for each v-belt drive on equipment. Provide size of sheaves/belts as determined on TABS contractor. After final adjustments have been made, provide one spare set of drive belts for each v-belt drive to Contracting Officer for use by Owner.


Identify equipment, system accessories and physical hazards in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.144, ASME A13.1, ANSI Z535.1 and as modified herein. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment. Identify each piping system and item of equipment indicated on contract drawings. HVAC air outlets and inlets do not require identification. HVAC fan coil units do not require identification.

3.5.1 Mechanical Equipment

Install engraved plastic laminate sign or plastic equipment marker on or near each major item of mechanical equipment and each operational device. Provide minimum 1/4 inch high lettering for name of unit where viewing distance is less than 36 inches, 1/2 inch high for distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering of 2/3 to 3/4 of size of the principal lettering. In addition to name of identified unit, provide lettering to distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.

3.5.1.1 Access Doors

Provide painted stencil identification of all ductwork access doors to motor operated control dampers. Label "control damper access," etc.

3.5.2 Color Coding Scheme for Locating Hidden Utility Components

For areas where dampers, access doors and air terminal valves are located above ceilings, provide color coding scheme that identifies points of access for maintenance and operation of components and equipment that are not visible from the finished space and are accessible from the ceiling



grid or access panels, consisting of a color code identification table and colored metal disks. Make each colored metal disk approximately 3/8 inch diameter and secure to removable ceiling panels with fasteners. Insert each fastener into the ceiling panel or access door so as to be concealed from view. Provide fasteners that are manually removable without the use of tools and that do not separate from the ceiling panels when the panels are dropped from ceiling height. Make installation of colored metal disks follow completion of the finished surface on which the disks are to be fastened. Provide colored identification code table to correspond to the colored discs. Make the table of hard card stock; laminated in plastic, for mounting in the facility managers area. Make the color code symbols approximately 3/4 inch in diameter and the related lettering in 1/2 inch high capital letters.

3.6 DUCTWORK LEAK TEST

Ductwork leak test shall be performed for the ductwork systems as scheduled on contract drawings. Test procedure, apparatus, and report shall conform to SMACNA Leakage Test Mnl. Ductwork leak test shall be completed with satisfactory results prior to applying insulation to ductwork exterior. Provide temporary duct caps, blank off plates and sealing materials to facilitate leak testing of duct systems individually. Refer to Section 23 05 93, TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS, FOR PROCEDURES.

3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING

Install work in such a manner and at such time that a minimum of cutting and patching of the building structure is required. Make holes in exposed locations, in or through existing floors, by drilling and smooth by sanding. Use of a jackhammer is permitted only where specifically approved. Make holes through masonry walls to accommodate sleeves with an iron pipe masonry core saw.

3.8 PENETRATIONS

For ductwork that is exposed to view, where ductwork passes through metal stud partitions or masonry walls, provide closure collars for each duct penetration. Coordinate the provision of framed openings in building studwork with work of Section 09 22 00, METAL SUPPORT FRAMING ASSEMBLIES; locate each duct penetration though metal stud partitions including dimensions from columns and other fixed points, including elevations so that each penetration may be anticipated and framed prior to stud partition erection. Provide similar coordination for ductwork passing through masonry walls. Provide one inch clearance between penetrating and penetrated surfaces except at grilles, registers, and diffusers. Pack spaces between opening and duct or duct insulation with mineral fiber conforming with ASTM C553, Type 1, Class B-2.

a. Closure Collars: For ductwork exposed to view, provide closure collars of a minimum 4 inches wide, unless otherwise indicated, for exposed ducts and items on each side of penetrated surface, except where equipment is installed. Install collar tight against the surface and fit snugly around the duct or insulation. Grind sharp edges smooth to prevent damage to penetrating surface. Fabricate collars for round ducts 15 inches in diameter or less from 20 gauge galvanized steel. Fabricate collars for square and rectangular ducts, or round ducts with minimum dimension over 15 inches from 18 gauge galvanized steel. Fabricate collars for square and rectangular ducts with a maximum side of 15 inches or less from 20 gauge galvanized steel. Install collars



with fasteners a maximum of 6 inches on center. Attach to collars a minimum of 4 fasteners where the opening is 12 inches in diameter or less, and a minimum of 8 fasteners where the opening is 20 inches in diameter or less.

b. Firestopping: Where ducts pass through fire-rated walls, fire partitions, smoke barriers, and smoke-tight partitions, seal the penetration with fire stopping materials as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING, and as indicated in details on Contract Drawings.

3.9 FIELD PAINTING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

Clean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces need not be painted. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except clean to bare metal on metal surfaces subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F. Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after the preceding coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and retouch before applying the succeeding coat. Provide aluminum or light gray finish coat.

a. Temperatures less than 120 degrees F: Immediately after cleaning, apply one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.3 mil, one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil; and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil per coat to metal surfaces subject to temperatures less than 120 degrees F.

b. Temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F: Apply two coats of 400 degrees F heat-resisting enamel applied to a total minimum thickness of two mils to metal surfaces subject to temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F.

3.9.1 Finish Painting

The requirements for finish painting of items only primed at the factory, and surfaces not specifically noted otherwise, are specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.10 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

Testing, adjusting, and balancing shall be as specified in Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS. Testing, adjusting, and balancing shall begin only when the air supply and distribution, including controls, has been completed. Tuning of HVAC system controllers shall be performed prior to or simultaneous with HVAC system balancing. The contractor shall tune the HVAC control system after all air system and hydronic system balancing has been completed, minimum damper positions set and a report has been issued.

a. Meet with the TAB contractor prior to beginning TAB and review the TAB plan to determine the capabilities of the control system toward completing TAB. Provide the TAB any needed unique instruments for setting terminal unit boxes and instruct TAB in their use (handheld control system interface for use around the building during TAB, etc.).

b. Provide a qualified technician to operate the controls to assist



the TAB contractor in performing TAB, or provide sufficient training for TAB to operate the system without assistance.

3.10.1 System Calibration and Adjustments

System calibration shall be performed for each air handling system. The Contractor shall provide all personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies necessary to perform calibration and testing of the HVAC control system with Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS CONTRACTOR. All instrumentation and controls shall be calibrated and the specified accuracy shall be verified using test equipment with calibration traceable to NIST standards. Wiring shall be tested for continuity and for ground, open, and short circuits. Mechanical control devices shall be adjusted to operate as specified. Controllers shall be pretested off-site as a functioning assembly ready for field connections, calibration and adjustment of the operational system. Control parameters and logic (virtual) points including control loop setpoints, gain constants, and integral constraints, shall be adjusted before the system is placed on line. Communications requirements shall be as indicated.

Written notification of any planned calibration and testing of the systems shall be given to the Government at least 14 calendar days in advance. Prepare a written plan indicating in a step-by-step manner, the procedures that will be followed to test, checkout and adjust the air handling systems prior to the commissioning work specified in Section 23 08 00.00 10, according to the process specified. At minimum, the plan shall include for type of equipment specified in this section:

a. System name.

b. List of devices.

c. Step-by-step procedures for testing each component after installation, including:

(1) Process of verifying proper hardware and wiring installation.(2) Process of performing operational checks of each component.

d. A copy of the log and field checkout sheets that will document the process. This log must include a place for initial and clearly indicate when the equipment has "passed" and is operating within the contract parameters.

e. A description of the instrumentation required for testing.

f. Indicate what tests on what systems should be completed prior to TAB using the control system for TAB work. Coordinate with the TAB contractor for this determination.

3.11 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

Inside of room fan-coil units, air terminal valves, ducts, plenums, and AHU's shall be thoroughly cleaned of debris and blown free of small particles of rubbish and dust and then shall be vacuum cleaned. Ducts shall be cleaned before installing diffusers, registers and grilles. Equipment shall be wiped clean, with traces of oil, dust, dirt, or paint spots removed. Temporary filters shall be provided prior to startup of all fans that are operated during construction, and new filters shall be installed after all construction dirt has been removed from the building,



and the ducts, plenums, casings, and other items specified have been vacuum cleaned. System shall be maintained in this clean condition until final acceptance. Bearings shall be properly lubricated with oil or grease as recommended by the manufacturer. Belts shall be tightened to proper tension. Control valves and other miscellaneous equipment requiring adjustment shall be adjusted to setting indicated or directed. Fans shall be mechanically changed to the speed required to provide proper performance.

3.12 COMMISSIONING

Provide the services of a supervisory level technician in responsible charge of the work in this section, and factory authorized start-up and testing procedures and service technicians; for each major component or system in this section, to participate in the work specified in Section 23 08 00.00 10 COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. Refer to Section 23 08 00.00 10 for description of work. Refer to Section 01 45 00.00 20, QUALITY CONTROL, for additional commissioning requirements.

3.13 PERFORMANCE TESTS

After testing, adjusting, and balancing is complete as specified, test each system as a whole to see that all items perform as integral parts of the system and temperatures and conditions are evenly controlled throughout the building. Record the testing during the applicable season. Make corrections and adjustments as necessary to produce the conditions indicated or specified. Conduct capacity tests and general operating tests by an experienced engineer. Provide tests that cover a period of not less than 2 days for each system and demonstrate that each system is functioning according to the specifications. Make coincidental chart recordings at points indicated on the drawings for the duration of the time period and record the temperature at space thermostats or space sensors, the humidity at space humidistats or space sensors and the ambient temperature and humidity in a shaded and weather protected area.

Submit test reports for the ductwork leak test, and performance tests in booklet form, upon completion of testing. Document phases of tests performed including initial test summary, repairs/adjustments made, and final test results in the reports.

3.14 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

3.14.1 Operation and Maintenance Manuals

Submit manuals at least 2 weeks prior to field training. Submit data complying with the requirements specified in Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. Submit Data Package 3 for the items/units listed under SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data.

3.14.2 Operation And Maintenance Training

Conduct a training course for the members of the operating staff as designated by the Contracting Officer. Make the training period consist of a total of 24 hours of normal working time and start it after all work specified herein is functionally completed and the Performance Tests have been approved. Conduct field instruction that covers all of the items contained in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations. Submit the proposed On-site Training schedule concurrently with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals and at least 14 days prior to conducting the training course.






SECTION 23 03 00.00 20

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS08/10

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES





LEED (2002; R 2005) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design(tm) Green Building Rating System for New Construction (LEED-NC)

LEED NC (2009) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design(tm) New Construction Rating System

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

This section applies to all sections of Divisions: 21, FIRE SUPPRESSION; 22, PLUMBING; and 23, HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING of this project specification, unless specified otherwise in the individual section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;submittals not having a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G"designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. Submit thefollowing in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Coordination drawings; G


Waste Management; (LEED NC)

LEED documentation relative to waste management credit in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED Documentation Notebook.

Separate waste materials for reuse or recycling in accordance with

SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 1


the Waste Management Plan. See Section 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT for reuse and recycling of waste material requirements.


1.4.1 Material and Equipment Qualifications

Unless otherwise noted, provide materials and equipment that are standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship. Standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2 year period.


Unless otherwise noted, products having less than a two-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or laboratory tests, can be shown.

1.4.3 Service Support

The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. Submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications. These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract. Reasonably convenient is defined as being able to provide a service technician to the site to correct the deficiency within 24 hours of the call.



1.4.5 Modification of References


1.4.5.1 Definitions

For the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract documents, advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory, the word "should" shall be interpreted as "shall." Reference to the "code official" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For Navy owned property, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the

SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 2


"Contracting Officer." For leased facilities, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the "lessor." References to the "permit holder" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contractor."

1.4.5.2 Administrative Interpretations

For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of Chapter 1, "Administrator," do not apply. These administrative requirements are covered by the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulations (FAR) included in this contract and by the authority granted to the Officer in Charge of Construction to administer the construction of this project. References in the ICC Codes to sections of Chapter 1, shall be applied appropriately by the Contracting Officer as authorized by his administrative cognizance and the FAR.


Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as approved by the Contracting Officer. Replace damaged or defective items.

a. Protect stored equipment at the jobsite from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Pipe and tubing shipped to the site shall be equipped with factory applied plastic end-caps. During pipe and duct installation, temporarily cap or plug all pipes and ducts to eliminate the intrusion of construction dust and debris until installation is complete.

b. Equipment shall be delivered and stored with protective crating and weatherproof wrapping to enable protection from the weather, humidity, temperature variations, dirt and dust or other contaminants.

c. Ductwork, if stored one day past delivery shall be protected with secure tarpaulins and shall have ends sealed with plastic wrapping. Maintain all materials in-storage on dunnage above grade and/or slab level.

1.6 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

Furnish motors, controllers, disconnects and contactors with their respective pieces of equipment. Motors, controllers, disconnects and contactors shall conform to and have electrical connections provided under Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Furnish internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment. Extended voltage range motors will not be permitted. Controllers and contactors shall have a maximum of 120 volt control circuits, and shall have auxiliary contacts for use with the controls furnished. When motors and equipment furnished are larger than sizes indicated, the cost of additional electrical service and related work shall be included under the section that specified that motor or equipment. Power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment shall be provided under and conform to the requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 3


1.7 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL

When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to the designated Government personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the specified equipment or system. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work.

Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section. When more than 4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately half of the time for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction with the equipment or system.

When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.

1.8 ACCESSIBILITY

Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance, and repair are readily accessible. Install concealed valves, expansion joints, controls, dampers, and equipment requiring access, in locations freely accessible through access doors.

1.9 Coordination Drawings

Prior to installation, prepare coordination drawings in twoseparate categories, to ensure field coordination prior toinstallation. The first category shall include items required foran above ceiling coordination effort; including the ceilings. Thesecond category shall include building surface penetrations,sleeves, framed studwork opening, openings in masonry and concretewalls and penetrations through floors. Drawings shall be drawn toa minimum scale of 1/4 inch equals one foot or larger, and includethe floor plan and building structural elements in thebackgrounds. The drawings shall demonstrate a pre-installationcoordination effort.

Category 1 Submittal: Drawings shall define building surfacepenetrations; locations of piping floor penetrations, pipingmasonry and concrete wall penetrations including pre-cast panels,ductwork floor penetrations, ductwork masonry and concrete wallpenetrations including structural lintels, ductwork partitionpenetrations including framed openings in studwork. Penetrationshall be dimensioned from fixed building elements such asstructural columns and be provided with elevations above finishedfloor slabs and roof decks.

Category 2 Submittal: Drawings shall define the proposedlocations of ductwork, fire protection piping, plumbing piping,medical gas piping, HVAC piping, mechanical equipment, electricalraceway paths, electrical pull boxes, auxiliary structures tosupport ceiling mounted items such as exam/surgery lights, andsystem accessories in relationship with the building structure andreflected ceiling plan. Illustration shall be plotted in colors

SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 4


which enable the clear differentiation of each type of element onthe drawing. Indicate space for equipment maintenance access;distance to access equipment control panels and electricaldevices, HVAC coil connection spaces, and items of plumbing accesssuch as cleanouts.

Include the following:

a. Clearances necessary for installing and maintaining insulation.

b. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including coil removal, tube removal, filter removal, valve trains at equipment and space necessary for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance.

c. Suspended equipment support details.

d. Sleeves with waterstops.

e. Fire-rated and smoke rated wall and floor penetrations.

f. Valve stem movement space.

Provide additional drawings and text descriptions to define movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction.

Category 2 submittal shall include the reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate air outlets and inlets, light fixtures, communication systems components, sprinkler heads, fire alarm system devices, and other ceiling-mounted items.

Coordinate ductwork, piping and equipment with pathways necessary to accommodate electrical conduit/raceways, cable trays, and pull boxes. Ensure clearances have been anticipated and will be maintained during installation to provide the required clearance in front of and above electrical distribution equipment/panels.

Shop drawing submittals specified in Divisions 21, 22 and 23 may be used to initiate the Coordination Drawing effort.

Conduct a pre-installation meeting at a minimum of four weeks prior to the installation of components; respectively for both the Category 1 and Category 2 submittal. Coordination drawings shall be modified as construction progresses to suit field changes. Periodic meetings; during installation, at a minimum of two week intervals shall follow the initial meeting. The periodic meetings shall include representatives from each respective installation discipline with progressed and/or completed coordination drawings. The purpose of the meetings is to facilitate the correct installation of components, facilitate the shop-fabrication of components prior to materials being fabricated and shipped to the site, and to facilitate field changes required enable the installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 5


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PAINTING OF NEW EQUIPMENT

New equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied, and shall be as specified herein, and provided under each individual section.

3.1.1 Factory Painting Systems

Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided subject to certification that the factory painting system applied will withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray fog test, except that equipment located outdoors shall withstand 3000 hours in a salt-spray fog test. Salt-spray fog test shall be in accordance with ASTM B117, and for that test the acceptance criteria shall be as follows: immediately after completion of the test, the paint shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no loss of adhesion; and the specimen shall show no signs of rust creepage beyond 0.125 inch on either side of the scratch mark.

The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment shall not be less than the film thickness used on the test specimen. If manufacturer's standard factory painting system is being proposed for use on surfaces subject to temperatures above 120 degrees F, the factory painting system shall be designed for the temperature service.


Clean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces need not be painted. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except metal surfaces subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F shall be cleaned to bare metal.

Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after the preceding coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and retouch before applying the succeeding coat. Color of finish coat shall be the equipment manufacturer's standard color or or light gray.

a. Temperatures Less Than 120 Degrees F: Immediately after cleaning, the metal surfaces subject to temperatures less than 120 degrees F shall receive one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.3 mil, one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil; and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil per coat.

b. Temperatures Between 120 and 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of 400 degrees F heat-resisting enamel applied to a total minimum thickness of 2 mils.

3.1.3 WASTE MANAGEMENT

Separate offcuts and waste materials and reuse or recycle in accordance with the Waste Management Plan. Identify manufacturer's policy for collection or return of construction scrap, unused material, demolition scrap, and/or packaging material.

SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 6


3.1.4 COMMISSIONING

Divisions 21, 22, and 23 will be responsible to carry out the commissioning requirements specified in Section 01 91 13.00 50, GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS. The general contractor and sub-contractors shall become thoroughly knowledgeable of the requirements of the Commissioning Plan, all project specifications, and the project drawings, and shall coordinate the work of all trades in the provision of the commissioning services.


SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 7


SECTION 23 05 48.00 40

VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC AND PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT02/11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


ACOUSTICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA (ASA)

ASA S2.71 (1983; R 2006) Guide to the Evaluation of Human Exposure to Vibration in Buildings


ASHRAE HVAC APP IP HDBK (2011) HVAC Applications Handbook, I-P Edition

NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU (NEBB)

NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS (2005) Procedural Standards for TAB (Testing, Adjusting and Balancing) Environmental Systems

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

This Section applies to Division 22, PLUMBING and Division 23, HEATING VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING of this project specification, unless specified otherwise in the individual section.

All vibration-control apparatus must be the product of a single manufacturing source, where possible. Human exposure levels should be considered using ASA S2.71 and NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS.

Scheduled isolation mounting is in inches and is a minimum static deflection.

Spans referred to in Part 2, "Vibration-Isolation Systems Application," means longest bay dimension.

Determine exact mounting sizes and number of isolators by the isolator manufacturer based on equipment that will be installed. Check equipment revolutions per minute (rpm) and spring deflections to verify that resonance cannot occur.

Installation drawings for vibration isolator systems must include equipment and performance requirements.

Indicate within outline drawings for vibration isolator systems, overall physical features, dimensions, ratings, service requirements, and weights of equipment.

SECTION 23 05 48.00 40 Page 1


Equipment and performance data for vibration isolator systems shall include equipment base design; inertia-block mass relative to support equipment weight; spring loads and free, operating, and solid heights of spring; spring diameters; nonmetallic isolator loading and deflection; disturbing frequency; natural frequency of mounts; deflection of working member; and anticipated amount of physical movement at the reference points.

Coordinate mountings, bases, isolators and anchorages for equipment, piping and ductwork with details indicated on Contract Drawings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are or information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Submit installation drawings and outline drawings in accordance with paragraph titled "General Requirements" of this Section.

SD-03 Product Data

Submit product data for the following:

Mountings; G

Bases; G

Isolation; G

Submit equipment and performance data in accordance with paragraph entitled "General Requirements" of this Section.

SD-06 Test Reports

Type of Isolator

Type of Base

Allowable Deflection

Measured Deflection

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TYPE OF VIBRATION-ISOLATION PROVISIONS

Unless indicated otherwise design for vibration isolation using ASHRAE HVAC APP IP HDBK, Chapter 37, as applicable to the following sections, but no less than the quantities and types scheduled on the Contract Drawings.

Submit test reports for testing vibration isolation for each type of isolator and each type of base, and meet referenced standards contained within this section. Include in test reports allowable deflection and measured deflection also meeting referenced standards within this section.

SECTION 23 05 48.00 40 Page 2


2.1.1 Materials

Rubber must be natural rubber. Elastomer must be chloroprene. Shore A durometer measurement of both materials and range between 40 and 60.

Inorganic materials such as precompressed, high-density, fibrous glass encased in a resilient moisture-impervious membrane may be used in lieu of specified natural rubber and elastomers. Where this substitution is made, ensure specified deflections are modified by the manufacturing source to accommodate physical characteristics of inorganic materials and to provide equal or better vibration isolation.

Ensure weather-exposed metal vibration-isolator parts are corrosion protected. Chloroprene coat springs.

2.1.2 Mountings

Provide the following mountings:

Type A: Composite pad, with 0.25-inch thick elastomer top and bottom layers, molded to contain a pattern with nonslip characteristics in all horizontal directions. Elastomer loading is not to exceed 40 pounds per square inch (psi). Minimum overall thickness is 1 inch. Maximum deflections up to 0.25-inch are allowed.

Type B: Double rubber-in-shear with molded-in steel reinforcement in top and bottom. Maximum deflections up to 0.50 inch are allowed.

Type C: Free-standing laterally stable open-spring type for deflections over 0.50 inch, with built-in bearing and leveling provisions, 0.25-inch thick Type A base elastomer pads, and accessories. Ensure outside diameter of each spring is equal to or greater than 0.9 times the operating height of the spring under rated load.

Type D: Partially housed type, containing one or more vertically restrained springs with at least 0.50 inch clearance maintained around springs, with adjustable limit stops, 0.25-inch thick Type A base elastomer pads, and accessories.

Type E: Pendulum-suspension configuration with free-standing stable spring with resilient horizontal and vertical restraints to allow maximum movements of 0.25 inch in each direction, 0.25-inch thick Type A base elastomer pads.

Type F: Combination spring and rubber-in-shearsteel framed for hanger-rod mounting, with minimum total static deflection of 1 inch.

2.1.3 Bases

Provide the following bases:

Type U: Unit isolators without rails, structural-steel bases, or inertia blocks.

Type R: Rails, connected mill-rolled structural steel, of sufficient dimension to preclude deflection at midpoint of unsupported span in excess of 1/1,440th of the span between isolators, power transmission, component misalignment, and any overhung weight. Where Type R bases are specified and the equipment proposed requires additional base

SECTION 23 05 48.00 40 Page 3


support, use a Type S base.

Type S: Structural-steel bases common to a supported assembly, made from welded-joint mill-rolled structural steel with closed-perimeter configuration, isolators attached to outrigger supports.

Height of steel members must be sufficient to provide stiffness required to maintain equipment manufacturer's recommended alignment and duty efficiency of power-transmission components. Height of steel member must not result in member deflection at midpoint of unsupported span of more than 1/1,440th of the span between isolators. Minimum height is 5 inches.

Type CIB: Concrete inertia blocks must be common to the entire assembly, with welded-joint construction, mill-rolled structural-steel perimeters, welded-in No. 4 reinforcing bars 8 inches on center each way near the bottom of the block, outrigger-isolator mounting provisions, anchor bolts, and be filled with 3,000 psi cured-strength concrete.

Configuration of inertia bases must be rectangular to accommodate equipment supported.

Minimum thickness of inertia base, in addition to providing suitable mass, must be sufficient to provide stiffness to maintain equipment manufacturer's recommended alignment and duty efficiency of power-transmission components. Minimum thickness must be sufficient to result in base deflection at midpoint of unsupported span of not more than 1/1,440th of the span between isolators. Minimum thickness, the preceding requirements not withstanding, must be 8 percent of the longest base dimension.

Pumps with flexible couplings must not have inertia bases less than 8 inches thick. Minimum mass of concrete inertia block must be equal in weight to supported equipment.

2.2 VIBRATION-ISOLATION SYSTEMS APPLICATION

VUnless indicated otherwise, vibration isolation design per ASHRAE HVAC APP IP HDBK, Chapter 37,but no less than the scheduled requirements on the Contract Documents..

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

Rails, structural steel bases, and concrete inertia blocks must be raised not less than 1 inch above the reinforced concrete housekeeping pad or structure and must be level when equipment supported is under operating load.

3.2 TESTS AND REPORTS

Ensure vibration-isolation devices are deflection tested. Submit test reports in accordance with paragraph entitled, "Submittal Procedures,"

SECTION 23 05 48.00 40 Page 4


substantiating that all equipment has been isolated as specified and that minimum specified deflections have been met. Make all measurements in the presence of the Contracting Officer.


SECTION 23 05 48.00 40 Page 5


SECTION 23 05 93

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC08/09

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASA S1.11 (2004; Errata 2005; R 2009) Specification for Octave- Band and Fractional-Octave-Band Analog and Digital Filters (ASA 65)

ASA S1.4 (1983; Amendment 1985; R 2006) Specification for Sound Level Meters (ASA 47)


AMCA 203 (1990; R 2011) Field Performance Measurements of Fan Systems



ASHRAE HVAC APP IP HDBK (2011) HVAC Applications Handbook, I-P Edition

ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE COUNCIL (AABC)

AABC MN-1 (2002; 6th ed) National Standards for Total System Balance

AABC MN-4 (1996) Test and Balance Procedures

NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU (NEBB)

NEBB MASV (2006) Procedural Standards for Measurements and Assessment of Sound and Vibration

NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS (2005) Procedural Standards for TAB (Testing, Adjusting and Balancing) Environmental Systems




SMACNA 016-2012 (2012) HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, 2nd Edition

SMACNA 1780 (2002) HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing, 3rd Edition

SMACNA 1972 CD (2012) HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual - 2nd Edition

SMACNA HVACADLTM (1985) HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual


40 CFR 82 Protection of Stratospheric Ozone

1.2 DEFINITIONS

a. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

b. COTR: Contracting Officer's Technical Representative.

c. DALT: Duct air leakage test

d. DALT'd: Duct air leakage tested

e. HVAC: Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning; or heating, ventilating, and cooling.

f. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau

g. Out-of-tolerance data: Pertains only to field acceptance testing of Final DALT or TAB report. When applied to DALT work, this phase means "a leakage rate measured during DALT field acceptance testing which exceeds the leakage rate allowed by duct leakage testing scheduled on the Contract Drawings." When applied to TAB work this phase means "a measurement taken during TAB field acceptance testing which does not fall within the range of plus 5 to minus 5 percent of the original measurement reported on the TAB Report for a specific parameter."

h. Season of maximum heating load: The time of year when the outdoor temperature at the project site remains within plus or minus 30 degrees Fahrenheit of the project site's winter outdoor design temperature, throughout the period of TAB data recording.

i. Season of maximum cooling load: The time of year when the outdoor temperature at the project site remains within plus or minus 5 degrees Fahrenheit of the project site's summer outdoor design temperature, throughout the period of TAB data recording.

j. Season 1, Season 2: Depending upon when the project HVAC is completed and ready for TAB, Season 1 is defined, thereby defining Season 2. Season 1 could be the season of maximum heating load, or the season of maximum cooling load.

k. Sound measurements terminology: Defined in AABC MN-1 or NEBB MASV.



l. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing (of HVAC systems).

m. TAB'd: HVAC Testing/Adjusting/Balancing procedures performed.

n. TAB Agency: TAB Firm

o. TAB team field leader: TAB team field leader

p. TAB team supervisor: TAB team engineer.

q. TAB team technicians: TAB team assistants.

1.2.1 Similar Terms

In some instances, terminology differs between the Contract and the TAB Standard primarily because the intent of this Section is to use the industry standards specified, along with additional requirements listed herein to produce optimal results.

The following table of similar terms is provided for clarification only. Contract requirements take precedent over the corresponding AABC or NEBB requirements where differences exist.

SIMILAR TERMS

Contract Term AABC Term NEBB Term

TAB Standard National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems

Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems

TAB Specialist TAB Engineer TAB Supervisor

Systems Readiness Check Construction Phase Inspection

Field Readiness Check & Preliminary Field Procedures

1.3 WORK DESCRIPTION

The work includes duct air leakage testing (DALT) and testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) of new heating, ventilating, and cooling (HVAC) air and water distribution systems and plumbing potable water systems, including equipment and performance data, ducts, and piping which are located within, on, under, between, and adjacent to buildings.

Perform TAB in accordance with the requirements of the TAB procedural standard recommended by the TAB trade association that approved the TAB Firm's qualifications. Comply with requirements of AABC MN-1, NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS as supplemented and modified by this specification section. All recommendations and suggested practices contained in the TAB procedural standards are considered mandatory.



Conduct DALT testing in compliance with the requirements specified in SMACNA 1972 CD, except as supplemented and modified by this section. Conduct DALT and TAB work in accordance with the requirements of this section.

1.3.1 Air Distribution Systems

Test, adjust, and balance systems (TAB) in compliance with this section. Obtain Contracting Officer's written approval before applying insulation to exterior of air distribution systems as specified under Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.

1.3.2 Water Distribution Systems

TAB systems in compliance with this section. Obtain Contracting Officer's written approval before applying insulation to water distribution systems as specified under Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. At Contractor's option and with Contracting Officer's written approval, the piping systems may be insulated before systems are TAB'd.

Terminate piping insulation immediately adjacent to each flow control valve, automatic control valve, or device. Seal the ends of pipe insulation and the space between ends of pipe insulation and piping, with waterproof vapor barrier coating.

After completion of work under this section, insulate the flow control valves and devices as specified under Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.

1.3.3 TAB SCHEMATIC DRAWINGS

Show the following information on TAB Schematic Drawings:

1. A unique number or mark for each piece of equipment or terminal.

2. Air quantities at air terminal valves, air diffusers, registers and grilles.

3. Air quantities and temperatures for air handling units.

4. Air quantities for supply, return and exhaust fans.

5. Water quantities and temperatures in thermal energy transfer equipment schedules.

6. Water quantities and heads for pumps.

7. Water quantities and levels for water chillers and boilers.

8. Water flow measurement fittings and balancing fittings.

9. Ductwork Construction and Leakage Testing Table that defines the DALT test requirements, including each applicable HVAC duct system ID or mark, duct pressure class, duct seal class, and duct leakage test pressure.

The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Specialist must review the Contract Plans and Specifications and advise the Contracting Officer of any



deficiencies that would prevent the effective and accurate TAB of the system, and systems readiness check. The TAB Specialist must provide a Design Review Report individually listing each deficiency and the corresponding proposed corrective action necessary for proper system operation.

Submit three copies of the TAB Schematic Drawings and Report Forms to the Contracting Officer, no later than 21 days prior to the start of TAB field measurements.

1.3.4 Related Requirements

Specific requirements relating to Reliability Centered Maintenance (RCM) principals and Predictive Testing and Inspection (PTI), by the construction contractor to detect latent manufacturing and installation defects must be followed as part of the Contractor's Quality Control program. Refer to the paragraph titled "Sustainability" for detailed requirements.

Requirements for price breakdown of HVAC TAB work are specified in Section 01 20 00.00 20 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES.

Requirements for construction scheduling related to HVAC TAB work are specified in Section 01 32 17.00 20 NETWORK ANALYSIS SCHEDULES (NAS).

1.4 SUBMITTALS



TAB Agency; G

Designation of TAB team assistants; G

Designation of TAB team engineer; G

Designation of TAB team field leader; G

SD-02 Shop Drawings

TAB Schematic Drawings and Report Forms; G

SD-03 Product Data

Equipment and Performance Data; G

TAB Related HVAC Submittals; G

A list of the TAB Related HVAC Submittals, no later than 7 days after the approval of the TAB team engineer and assistant.

TAB Procedures; G

Proposed procedures for TAB, submitted with the TAB Schematic Drawings and Report Forms.



Calibration; G

Systems Readiness Check; G

TAB Execution; G

TAB Verification; G

SD-06 Test Reports

DALT and TAB Work Execution Schedule; G

DALT and TAB Procedures Summary; G

Design review report; G

Pre-Final DALT report; G

Final DALT report; G

TAB report for Season 1; G

TAB report for Season 2; G

SD-07 Certificates

Independent TAB agency and personnel qualifications; G

Advance notice of Pre-Final DALT field work; G

Completed Pre-Final DALT Work Checklist; G

Advance Notice of Season 1 TAB Field Work; G

Completed Season 1 Pre-TAB Work Checklist

Advance Notice of Season 2 TAB Field Work; G

Completed Season 2 Pre-TAB Work Checklist

TAB Agency; G

DALT and TAB Submittal and Work Schedule; G

Design review report; G

Pre-field DALT preliminary notification; G

Pre-field TAB engineering report; G

Advanced notice for Season 1 TAB field work; G

Advanced notice for Season 2 TAB field work; G

Prerequisite HVAC Work Check Out List For Season 1; G

Prerequisite HVAC Work Check Out List for Season 2; G




1.5.1 Independent TAB Agency and Personnel Qualifications

To secure approval for the proposed agency, submit information certifying that the TAB agency is a first tier subcontractor who is not affiliated with any other company participating in work on this contract, including design, furnishing equipment, or construction. Further, submit the following, for the agency, to Contracting Officer for approval:

a. Independent AABC or NEBB TAB agency:

TAB agency: AABC registration number and expiration date of current certification; or NEBB certification number and expiration date of current certification.

TAB team supervisor: Name and copy of AABC or NEBB TAB supervisor certificate and expiration date of current certification.

TAB team field leader: Name and documented evidence that the team field leader has satisfactorily performed full-time supervision of TAB work in the field for not less than 3 years immediately preceding this contract's bid opening date.

TAB team field technicians: Names and documented evidence that each field technician has satisfactorily assisted a TAB team field leader in performance of TAB work in the field for not less than one year immediately preceding this contract's bid opening date.

Current certificates: Registrations and certifications are current, and valid for the duration of this contract. Renew Certifications which expire prior to completion of the TAB work, in a timely manner so that there is no lapse in registration or certification. TAB agency or TAB team personnel without a current registration or current certification are not to perform TAB work on this contract.

b. TAB Team Members: TAB team approved to accomplish work on this contract are full-time employees of the TAB agency. No other personnel is allowed to do TAB work on this contract.

c. Replacement of TAB team members: Replacement of members may occur if each new member complies with the applicable personnel qualifications and each is approved by the Contracting Officer.

1.6 Tab Standard

Perform TAB in accordance with the requirements of the standard under which the TAB Firm's qualifications are approved, i.e., AABC MN-1, NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS, unless otherwise specified herein. All recommendations and suggested practices contained in the TAB Standard are considered mandatory. Use the provisions of the TAB Standard, including checklists, report forms, etc., as nearly as practical, to satisfy the Contract requirements. Use the TAB Standard for all aspects of TAB, including qualifications for the TAB agency and Specialist and calibration of TAB instruments. Where the instrument manufacturer calibration recommendations are more stringent than those listed in the TAB Standard, adhere to the manufacturer's recommendations.



All quality assurance provisions of the TAB Standard such as performance guarantees are part of this contract. For systems or system components not covered in the TAB Standard, TAB procedures must be developed by the TAB Specialist. Where new procedures, requirements, etc., applicable to the Contract requirements have been published or adopted by the body responsible for the TAB Standard used (AABC or NEBB), the requirements and recommendations contained in these procedures and requirements are considered mandatory, including the latest requirements of ASHRAE 62.1.

1.7 Sustainability

Contractor must submit the following as part of the Quality Control Plan for acceptance testing:

a. List all test equipment to be used, including its manufacturer,model number, calibration date, and serial number.

b. Certificates of test personnel qualifications and certifications. Provide certification of compliance with 40 CFR 82.

c. Proof of equivalency if the contractor desires to substitute a test requirement.

1.8 Qualifications

1.8.1 TAB Agency

The TAB Agency must be either a member of AABC or certified by the NEBB and certified in all categories and functions where measurements or performance are specified on the plans and specifications, including TAB of environmental systems, building systems commissioning and the measuring of sound and vibration in environmental systems.

Certification must be maintained for the entire duration of duties specified herein. If, for any reason, the agency loses subject certification during this period, the Contractor must immediately notify the Contracting Officer and submit another TAB Agency for approval. Any agency that has been the subject of disciplinary action by either the AABC or the NEBB within the five years preceding Contract Award is not be eligible to perform any duties related to the HVAC systems, including TAB. All work specified in this Section and in other related Sections to be performed by the TAB Agency will be considered invalid if the TAB Agency loses its certification prior to Contract completion and must be performed by an approved successor.

These TAB services are to assist the prime Contractor in performing the quality oversight for which it is responsible. The TAB Agency must be a prime subcontractor of the Contractor and be financially and corporately independent of the mechanical subcontractor, reporting directly to and paid by the Contractor. The TAB Agency shall not be affiliated with any company participating in any other phase of this contract including design, furnishing equipment, construction or commissioning.

1.8.2 TAB Specialist

The TAB Specialist must be either a member of AABC or an experienced technician of the Agency certified by the NEBB. The certification must be maintained for the entire duration of duties specified herein. If, for any reason, the Specialist loses subject certification during this period,



immediately notify the Contracting Officer and submit another TAB Specialist for approval. Any individual that has been the subject of disciplinary action by either the AABC or the NEBB within the five years preceding Contract Award is not eligible to perform any duties related to the HVAC systems, including TAB. All work specified in this Section and in other related Sections performed by the TAB Specialist will be considered invalid if the TAB Specialist loses its certification prior to Contract completion and must be performed by the approved successor.

1.8.3 TAB Specialist Responsibilities

TAB Specialist responsibilities include all TAB work specified herein and in related sections under his direct guidance. The TAB specialist is required to be onsite on a daily basis to direct TAB efforts. The TAB Specialist must participate in the commissioning process specified in Section 23 08 00.00 50 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC.

1.8.4 Tab Related HVAC Submittals

The TAB Specialist must prepare a list of the submittals from the Contract Submittal Register that relate to the successful accomplishment of all HVAC TAB. Accompany the submittals identified on this list with a letter of approval signed and dated by the TAB Specialist when submitted to the Government. Ensure that the location and details of ports, terminals, connections, etc., necessary to perform TAB are identified on the submittals.

1.9 Responsibilities

The Contractor is responsible for ensuring compliance with the requirements of this section. The following delineation of specific work responsibilities is specified to facilitate TAB execution of the various work efforts by personnel from separate organizations. This breakdown of specific duties is specified to facilitate adherence to the schedule listed in paragraph entitled "TAB Submittal and Work Schedule."

1.9.1 Contractor

a. TAB personnel: Ensure that the DALT work and the TAB work is accomplished by a group meeting the requirements specified in paragraph entitled "TAB Personnel Qualification Requirements."

b. Pre-DALT/TAB meeting: Attend the meeting with the TAB Supervisor, and ensure that a representative is present for the sheetmetal contractor, mechanical contractor, electrical contractor, and automatic temperature controls contractor.

c. HVAC documentation: Furnish one complete set of the following HVAC-related documentation to the TAB agency:

(1) Contract drawings and specifications.

(2) Approved submittal data for equipment.

(3) Construction work schedule.

(4) Up-to-date revisions and change orders for the previously listed items.



d. Submittal and work schedules: Ensure that the schedule for submittals and work required by this section and specified in paragraph entitled "TAB Submittal and Work Schedule," is met.

e. Coordination of supporting personnel:

Provide the technical personnel, such as factory representatives or HVAC controls installer required by the TAB field team to support the DALT and the TAB field measurement work.

Provide equipment mechanics to operate HVAC equipment and ductwork mechanics to provide the field designated test ports to enable TAB field team to accomplish the DALT and the TAB field measurement work. Ensure these support personnel are present at the times required by the TAB team, and cause no delay in the DALT and the TAB field work.

Conversely, ensure that the HVAC controls installer has required support from the TAB team field leader to complete the controls check out.

f. Deficiencies: Ensure that the TAB Agency supervisor submits all Design/Construction deficiency notifications directly to the Contracting officer within 3 days after the deficiency is encountered. Further, ensure that all such notification submittals are complete with explanation, including documentation, detailing deficiencies.

g. Prerequisite HVAC work: Complete check out and debugging of HVAC equipment, ducts, and controls prior to the TAB engineer arriving at the project site to begin the TAB work. Debugging includes searching for and eliminating malfunctioning elements in the HVAC system installations, and verifying all adjustable devices are functioning as designed. Include as prerequisite work items, the deficiencies pointed out by the TAB team supervisor in the design review report.

h. Prior to the TAB field team's arrival, ensure completion of the applicable inspections and work items listed in the TAB team supervisor's pre-field engineering report. Do not allow the TAB team to commence TAB field work until all of the following are completed.

(1) HVAC system installations are fully complete.

(2) HVAC prerequisite checkout work lists specified in the paragraph "Pre-Field TAB Engineering Report" are completed, submitted, and approved. Ensure that the TAB Agency gets a copy of the approved prerequisite HVAC work checklist.

(3) DALT field checks for all systems are completed.

(4) HVAC system filters are clean for both Season 1 and Season 2 TAB field work.

i. Advance notice: Furnish to the Contracting Officer with advance written notice for the commencement of the DALT field work and for the commencement of the TAB field work.

j. Insulation work: For required DALT work , ensure that insulation is not installed on ducts to be DALT'd until DALT work on the subject ducts is complete. Later, ensure that openings in duct and machinery insulation coverings for TAB test ports are marked, closed and sealed.



1.9.2 TAB Agency

Provide the services of a TAB team which complies with the requirements of paragraph entitled "Independent TAB Agency Personnel Qualifications". The work to be performed by the TAB agency is limited to testing, adjusting, and balancing of HVAC air and water systems to satisfy the requirements of this specification section.

1.9.3 TAB Team Supervisor

a. Overall management: Supervise and manage the overall TAB team work effort, including preliminary and technical DALT and TAB procedures and TAB team field work.

b. Pre-DALT/TAB meeting: Attend meeting with Contractor.

c. Design review report: Review project specifications and accompanying drawings to verify that the air systems and water systems are designed in such a way that the TAB engineer can accomplish the work in compliance with the requirements of this section. Verify the presence and location of permanently installed test ports and other devices needed, including gauge cocks, thermometer wells, flow control devices, circuit setters, balancing valves, and manual volume dampers.

d. Support required: Specify the technical support personnel required from the Contractor other than the TAB agency; such as factory representatives for temperature controls or for complex equipment. Inform the Contractor in writing of the support personnel needed and when they are needed. Furnish the notice as soon as the need is anticipated, either with the design review report, or the pre-field engineering report, the during the DALT or TAB field work.

e. Pre-field DALT preliminary notification: Monitor the completion of the duct installation of each system and provide the necessary written notification to the Contracting Officer.

f. Pre-field engineering report: Utilizing the following HVAC-related documentation; contract drawings and specifications, approved submittal data for equipment, up-to-date revisions and change orders; prepare this report.

g. Prerequisite HVAC work checklist: Ensure the Contractor gets a copy of this checklist at the same time as the pre-field engineering report is submitted.

h. Technical assistance for DALT work.

(1) Technical assistance: Provide immediate technical assistance to TAB field team.

(2) DALT field visit: Near the end of each DALT field work effort, visit the contract site to inspect the HVAC installation and the progress of the DALT field work. Conduct a site visit to the extent necessary to verify correct procedures are being implemented and to confirm the accuracy of the Pre-final DALT Report data which has been reported. Also, perform sufficient evaluation to allow the TAB supervisor to issue certification of the final report. Conduct the site visit full-time for the



quantity of DALT intervals conducted.

i. Final DALT report: Certify the DALT report. This certification includes the following work:

(1) Review: Review the Pre-final DALT report data. From these field reports, prepare the Certified Final DALT report.

(2) TAB Verification: Verify adherence, by the TAB field team, to the procedures specified in this section.

j. Technical Assistance for TAB Work: Provide immediate technical assistance to the TAB field team for the TAB work.

(1) TAB field visit: At the midpoint of the Season 1 and Season 2 TAB field work effort, visit the contract site to inspect the HVAC installation and the progress of the TAB field work. Conduct site visit full-time for a minimum of one 8 hour workday duration.

(2) TAB field visit: Near the end of the TAB field work effort, visit the contract site to inspect the HVAC installation and the progress of the TAB field work. Conduct site visit full-time for a minimum of one 8 hour workday duration. Review the TAB final report data and certify the TAB final report.

k. Certified TAB report: Certify the TAB report. This certification includes the following work:

(1) Review: Review the TAB field data report. From this field report, prepare the certified TAB report.

(2) Verification: Verify adherence, by the TAB field team, to the TAB plan prescribed by the pre-field engineering report and verify adherence to the procedures specified in this section.

l. Design/Construction deficiencies: Within 3 working days after the TAB Agency has encountered any design or construction deficiencies, the TAB Supervisor must submit written notification directly to the Contracting Officer, with a separate copy to the Contractor, of all such deficiencies. Provide in this submittal a complete explanation, including supporting documentation, detailing deficiencies. Where deficiencies are encountered that are believed to adversely impact successful completion of TAB, the TAB Agency must issue notice and request direction in the notification submittal.

m. TAB Field Check: The TAB team supervisor must attend and supervise Season 1 and Season 2 TAB field check.

1.9.4 TAB Team Field Leader

a. Field manager: Manage, in the field, the accomplishment of the work specified in Part 3, "Execution."

b. Full time: Be present at the contract site when DALT field work or TAB field work is being performed by the TAB team; ensure day-to-day TAB team work accomplishments are in compliance with this section.

c. Prerequisite HVAC work: Do not bring the TAB team to the contract site until a copy of the prerequisite HVAC Checklist, with all work items



certified by the Contractor to be working as designed, reaches the office of the TAB Agency.

1.10 Test Reports

1.10.1 Data from DALT Field Work

Report the data for the Pre-final DALT Report and Certified Final DALT Report in compliance the following requirements:

a. Report format: Submit report data on Air Duct Leakage Test Summary Report Forms as shown on Page 6-2 of SMACNA 016-2012. In addition, submit in the report, a marked duct shop drawing which identifies each section of duct tested with assigned node numbers for each section. Include node numbers in the completed report forms to identify each duct section. The TAB supervisor must review and certify the report.

b. The TAB supervisor must include a copy of all calculations prepared in determining the duct surface area of each duct test section. In addition,provide the ductwork air leak testing (DALT) reports with a copy(s) of the calibration curve for each of the DALT test orifices used for testing.

c. Instruments: List the types of instruments actually used to measure the data. Include in the listing each instrument's unique identification number, calibration date, and calibration expiration date. Instruments must have been calibrated within one year of the date of use in the field. Instrument calibration must be traceable to the measuring standards of the National Institute of Standards and Technology.

d. Certification: Include the typed name of the TAB supervisor and the dated signature of the TAB supervisor.

1.10.2 Certified TAB Reports

Submit: TAB Report for Season 1 and TAB Report for Season 2 in the following manner:

a. Report format: Submit the completed pre-field data forms approved in the pre-field TAB Engineering Report completed by TAB field team, reviewed and certified by the TAB supervisor. Bind the report with a waterproof front and back cover. Include a table of contents identifying by page number the location of each report. Report forms and report data must be typewritten. Handwritten report forms or report data are not acceptable.

b. Temperatures: On each TAB report form reporting TAB work accomplished on HVAC thermal energy transfer equipment, include the indoor and outdoor dry bulb temperature range and indoor and outdoor wet bulb temperature range within which the TAB data was recorded. Include in the TAB report continuous time versus temperature recording data of wet and dry bulb temperatures for the rooms, or zones, as designated in the following list:

(1) In each dental treatment room equipped with a room sensor and the sterilizer and x-ray room, measure and compile data on a continuous basis for the period in which TAB work affecting those rooms is being done.



(2) Measure and record data only after the HVAC systems installations are complete, the systems fully balanced and the HVAC systems controls operating in fully automatic mode.

(3) Data may be compiled using direct digital controls trend logging where available. Otherwise, temporarily install calibrated time versus temperature/humidity recorders for this purpose. The HVAC systems and controls must be fully operational a minimum of 24 hours in advance of commencing data compilation. Include the specified data in the Season I and Season 2 TAB Report.

c. System Diagrams: Provide updated diagrams with final installed locations of all terminals and devices, any numbering changes, and actual test locations. Use a key numbering system on the diagram which identifies each outlet contained in the outlet airflow report sheets.

d. Static Pressure Profiles: Report static pressure profiles for air duct systems including: each AHU supply and return duct system and each exhaust fan duct system. Report static pressure data for all supply, return, relief, exhaust and outside air ducts for the systems listed. Include the following in the static pressure report data, in addition to AABC/NEBB required data:

(1) Report supply fan, return fan, and exhaust fan inlet and discharge static pressures.

(2) Report static pressure drop across chilled water coils and hot water coils installed in AHU's or the system ductwork.

(3) Report static pressure drop across outside air, return air, relief air and supply air automatic control dampers, both proportional and two-position.

(4) Report static pressure drop across air filters, air blenders or other pressure drop producing specialty items installed in unit cabinetry, or in the system ductwork. Examples of these specialty items are smoke detectors, and sound attenuators.

Do not report static pressure drop across duct fittings provided for the sole purpose of conveying air, such as elbows, transitions, offsets, plenums, manual dampers, and branch takes-offs.

(5) Report static pressure drop across outside air and relief/exhaust air louvers.

(6) Report static pressure readings of supply air, return air, exhaust/relief air, and outside air in duct at the point where these ducts connect to each air moving unit and also at the following locations:

Main Duct: Take readings at four locations along the full length of the main duct, 25 percent, 50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent of the total duct length.

Air Terminal Valves: Take readings at inlet static pressure at airterminal valves primary air branch ducts.



e. Duct Traverses: Report duct traverses for main supply, return, exhaust, relief and outside air ducts. This includes all ducts, including those which lack 7 1/2 duct diameters upstream and 2 1/2 duct diameters downstream of straight duct unobstructed by duct fittings/offsets/elbows. The TAB Agency must evaluate and report findings on the duct traverses taken. Evaluate the suitability of the duct traverse measurement based on satisfying the qualifications for a pilot traverse plane as defined by AMCA 203, "Field Measurements", Section 8, paragraph 8.3, "Location of Traverse Plane."

f. Instruments: List the types of instruments actually used to measure the tab data. Include in the listing each instrument's unique identification number, calibration date, and calibration expiration date.

Instrumentation, used for taking wet bulb temperature readings must provide accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent at the measured face velocities. Submit instrument manufacturer's literature to document instrument accuracy performance is in compliance with that specified.

g. Certification: Include the typed name of the TAB supervisor and the dated signature of the TAB supervisor.

h. Performance Curves: The TAB Supervisor must include, in the TAB Reports, factory pump curves and fan curves for pumps and fans TAB'd on the job. Identify the prime mover impeller diameter for each.

i. Calibration Curves: The TAB Supervisor must include, in the TAB Reports, a factory calibration curve for installed flow control balancing valves, flow venturi's and flow orifices TAB'd on the job.

SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

1.11 DALT and TAB Submittal and Work Schedule

Comply with additional requirements specified in Appendix C: DALT AND TAB SUBMITTAL AND WORK SCHEDULE included at the end of this section.

1.12 Projects with Phased Construction

1.12.1 Phasing of Work

This specification section is structured as though the HVAC construction, and thereby the TAB work, is going to be completed in a single phase in spite of the fact that there will be two seasons. All elements of the TAB work are addressed on this premise. At the completion of each seasonal testing event, compile all approved reports and submit as one document.

1.13 DALT and TAB Submittal and Work Schedule

Submit this schedule and TAB Schematic Drawings, adapted for this particular contract, to the Contracting Officer (CO) for review and approval. Include with the submittal the planned calendar dates for each submittal or work item. Resubmit an updated version for CO approval every 90 calendar days days. Compliance with the following schedule is the Contractor's responsibility.

Qualify TAB Personnel: Within 45 calendar days after date of contract award, submit TAB agency and personnel qualifications.



Pre-DALT/TAB Meeting: Within 30 calendar days after the date of approval of the TAB agency and personnel, meet with the COTR.

Design Review Report: Within 60 calendar days after the date of the TAB agency personnel qualifications approval, submit design review report.

Pre-Field DALT Preliminary Notification: On completion of the duct installation for each system, notify the Contracting Officer in writing within 5 days after completion.

Ductwork Selected for DALT: Within 7 calendar days of Pre-Field DALT Preliminary Notification, the COTR will select which of the project ductwork must be DALT'd.

DALT Field Work: Within 48 hours of COTR's selection, complete DALT field work on selected.

Submit Pre-final DALT Report: Within one working day after completion of DALT field work, submit Pre-final DALT Report. Separate Pre-final DALT reports may be submitted to allow phased testing from system to system.

DALT Work Field Check: Upon approval of the Pre-final DALT Report, schedule the COTR's DALT field check work with the Contracting Officer.

Submit Final DALT Report: Within 15 calendar days after completion of successful DALT Work Field Check, submit Season 1 TAB report.

Pre-Field TAB Engineering Report: Within 15 calendar days after approval of the TAB agency Personnel Qualifications, submit the Pre-Field TAB Engineering Report.

Prerequisite HVAC Work Check Out List For Season 1 and Advanced Notice For Season 1 TAB Field Work: At a minimum of 115 calendar days prior to CCD, submit Season 1 prerequisite HVAC work check out list certified as complete, and submit advance notice of commencement of Season 1 TAB field work.

Season 1 TAB Field Work: At a minimum of 90 calendar days prior to CCD, and when the ambient temperature is within Season 1 limits, accomplish Season 1 TAB field work.

Submit Season 1 TAB Report: Within 15 calendar days after completion of Season 1 TAB field work, submit Season 1 TAB report.

Season 1 TAB Field Check: 30 calendar days after Season 1 TAB report is approved by the Contracting Officer, conduct Season 1 field check.

Complete Season 1 TAB Work: Prior to CCD, complete all TAB work except Season 2 TAB work.

Prerequisite HVAC Work Check Out List For Season 2 and Advanced Notice For Season 2 TAB Field Work: Within 150 calendar days after date of the commencement of the Season 1 TAB field work,



submit the Season 2 prerequisite HVAC work check out list certified as complete and submit advance notice of commencement of Season 2 TAB field work.

Season 2 TAB Field Work: Within 180 calendar days after date of commencement of the Season 1 TAB field work and when the ambient temperature is within Season 2 limits, accomplish Season 2 TAB field work.


Season 2 TAB Field Check: 30 calendar days after the Season 2 TAB report is approved by the Contracting Officer, conduct Season 2 field check.

Complete Season 2 TAB Work: Within 15 calendar days after the completion of Season 2 TAB field data check, complete all TAB work.

1.13.1 Design Review Report

Submit typed report describing deficiencies in the HVAC system's indicated on the Contract Drawings that would preclude the TAB team from accomplishing the duct leakage testing work and the TAB work requirements of this section. Provide a complete explanation including supporting documentation detailing the deficiency. State that no deficiencies are evident if that is the case.

1.13.2 Pre-Field DALT Preliminary Notification

Notification: On completion of the installation of each duct system indicated to be DALT'd, notify the Contracting Officer in writing within 7 calendar days after completion.

1.13.3 Pre-Field TAB Engineering Report

Submit report containing the following information:

a. Step-by-step TAB procedure:

(1) Strategy: Describe the method of approach to the TAB field work from start to finish. Include in this description a complete methodology for accomplishing each seasonal TAB field work session.

(2) Air System Diagrams: Use the duct shop drawings to provide air system diagrams in the report showing the location of all terminal outlet supply, return, exhaust and transfer registers, grilles and diffusers. Use a key numbering system on the diagrams which identifies each outlet contained in the outlet airflow report sheets. Show intended locations of all traverses and static pressure readings.

(3) Hydronic System Diagrams: Use the piping shop drawings to provide hydronic system diagrams in the report showing the location of all balancing devices and flow meters. Use a key numbering system on the diagrams which identifies each balancing device contained in the waterflow report sheets.

(4) Procedural steps: Delineate fully the intended procedural steps



to be taken by the TAB field team to accomplish the required TAB work of each air distribution system and each water distribution system. Include intended procedural steps for TAB work for subsystems and system components.

b. Pre-field data: Submit AABC or NEBB or SMACNA 1780 data report forms with the following pre-field information filled in:

(1) Design data obtained from system drawings, specifications, and approved submittals.

(2) Notations detailing additional data to be obtained from the contract site by the TAB field team.

(3) Designate the actual data to be measured in the TAB field work.

(4) Provide a list of the types of instruments, and the measuring range of each, which are anticipated to be used for measuring in the TAB field work. By means of a keying scheme, specify on each TAB data report form submitted, which instruments will be used for measuring each item of TAB data. If the selection of which instrument to use, is to be made in the field, specify from which instruments the choice will be made. Place the instrument key number in the blank space where the measured data would be entered.

c. Prerequisite HVAC work checkout list: Provide a list of inspections and work items which are to be completed by the Contractor. This list must be acted upon and completed by the Contractor and then submitted and approved by the Contracting Officer prior to the TAB team coming to the contract site.

At a minimum, a list of the applicable inspections and work items listed in the NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS, Section III, "Preliminary TAB Procedures" under paragraphs titled, "Air Distribution System Inspection" and "Hydronic Distribution System Inspection" must be provided for each separate system to be TAB'd.

1.14 SUBCONTRACTOR SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

Perform all work in this section in accordance with the paragraph entitled "Subcontractor Special Requirements" in Section 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS, stating that all contract requirements of this section must be accomplished directly by a first tier subcontractor. No work may be performed by a second tier subcontractor.

1.15 WARRANTY

Furnish workmanship and performance warranty for the DALT and TAB system work performed for a period not less than 2 years from the date of Government acceptance of the work; issued directly to the Government. Include provisions that if within the warranty period the system shows evidence of major performance deterioration, or is significantly out of tolerance, resulting from defective TAB or DALT workmanship, the corrective repair or replacement of the defective materials and correction of the defective workmanship is the responsibility of the TAB firm. Perform corrective action that becomes necessary because of defective materials and workmanship while system TAB and DALT is under warranty 7 days after notification, unless additional time is approved by the Contracting Officer. Failure to perform repairs within the specified period of time



constitutes grounds for having the corrective action and repairs performed by others and the cost billed to the TAB agency. The Contractor must also provide a 2 year contractor installation warranty.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 WORK DESCRIPTIONS OF PARTICIPANTS

Comply with requirements of this section as specified in Appendix A WORK DESCRIPTIONS OF PARTICIPANTS.

3.2 PRE-DALT/TAB MEETING

Meet with the Contracting Officer's technical representative (COTR) to develop a mutual understanding relative to the details of the DALT work and TAB work requirements. Ensure that the TAB supervisor is present at this meeting. Requirements to be discussed include required submittals, work schedule, and field quality control.

3.3 DALT PROCEDURES

3.3.1 Instruments, Consumables and Personnel

Provide instruments, consumables and personnel required to accomplish the DALT field work. Follow the same basic procedure specified below for TAB Field Work, including maintenance and calibration of instruments, accuracy of measurements, preliminary procedures, field work, workmanship and treatment of deficiencies. Calibrate and maintain instruments in accordance with manufacturer's written procedures.

3.3.2 Advance Notice of Pre-Final DALT Field Work

On completion of the installation of each duct system indicated to be DALT'd, notify the Contracting Officer in writing prior to the COTR's duct selection field visit.

3.3.3 Ductwork To Be DALT'd

Leak test the HVAC air ducts and sections of each system as scheduled on the contract drawings. Accomplish leak tests in accordance with SMACNA HVACADLTM, except as modified by this section. Use the duct class, seal class, leakage class and the leak test pressure data indicated, to comply with the procedures specified in SMACNA HVACADLTM. Provide fan, flow meter, instruments and consumables required to accomplish the DALT field work. Follow the same basic, procedure specified below in paragraph "TAB Field Work," including maintenance of and calibration of instruments, accuracy of measurements, preliminary procedures, field work, workmanship and treatment of deficiencies. DALT field work shall be monitored by the Contractor QC representative and the TAB team supervisor. If any of the duct sections exceed the leakage class during testing repairs shall be conducted. Provide retesting of ductwork until leakage rate is brought into compliance. Charges for retesting and observation of retesting shall be borne by the ductwork installer.



3.3.4 DALT Testing

Use the duct class, seal class, leakage class and the leak test pressure data indicated on the drawings, to comply with the procedures specified in SMACNA 1972 CD.

In spite of specifications of SMACNA 1972 CD to the contrary, DALT ductwork of construction class of 3-inch water gauge static pressure and below is required if scheduled on Contract Drawings to be DALT'd..

3.3.5 Pre-final DALT Report

After completion of the DALT work, prepare a Pre-final DALT Report meeting the additional requirements specified in Appendix B REPORTS - DALT and TAB. Data required by those data report forms shall be furnished by the TAB team. Prepare the report neatly and legibly; the Pre-final DALT report shall provide the basis for the Final DALT Report.

TAB supervisor shall review, approve and sign the Pre-Final DALT Report and submit this report within one day of completion of DALT field work. Verbally notify the COTR that the field check of the Pre-Final DALT Report data can commence.

After completion of the DALT work, prepare a Pre-final DALT Report using the reporting forms specified. TAB team to furnish data required by those data report forms. Prepare the report neatly and legibly; the Pre-final DALT report is the basis for the Final DALT Report. TAB supervisor must review and certify the Pre-final DALT Report and submit this report within one day of completion of DALT field work. Verbally notify the COTR that the field check of the Pre-final DALT Report data can commence.

3.3.6 Quality Assurance - COTR DALT Field Acceptance Testing

In the presence of the COTR and TAB team field leader, verify for accuracy Pre-final DALT Report data selected by the COTR. For each duct system, this acceptance testing shall be conducted on a maximum of 50 percent of the duct sections DALT'd.

Further, if any data on the Pre-final DALT report form for a given duct section is out-of-tolerance, then field acceptance testing shall be conducted on data for one additional duct section, preferably in the same duct system, in the presence of the COTR.

3.3.7 Additional COTR Field Acceptance Testing

If any of the duct sections checked for a given system are determined to have a leakage rate measured that exceeds the leakage rate allowed by SMACNA Leak Test Manual for an indicated duct construction class and sealant class, terminate data checking for that section. The associated Pre-final DALT Report data for the given duct system will be disapproved. Make the necessary corrections and prepare a revised Pre-final DALT Report. Reschedule a field check of the revised report data with the COTR.

3.3.8 Certified Final DALT Report

On successful completion of all field checks of the Pre-Final DALT Report data for all systems, the TAB Supervisor shall assemble, review, approve, sign and submit the Final DALT Report in compliance with Appendix B



REPORTS - DALT and TAB to the Contracting Officer for approval.

3.3.9 Prerequisite for TAB Field Work

Do not commence TAB field work prior to the completion and approval, for all systems, of the Final DALT Report.

3.4 TAB PROCEDURES

3.4.1 TAB Field Work

Test, adjust, and balance the HVAC systems until measured flow rates (air and water flow) are within plus or minus 5 percent of the design flow rates as specified or indicated on the contract documents.

That is, comply with the the requirements of AABC MN-1 and AABC MN-4, NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS or NEBB MASV, except as supplemented and modified by this section.

Provide instruments and consumables required to accomplish the TAB work. Calibrate and maintain instruments in accordance with manufacturer's written procedures.

Test, adjust, and balance the HVAC systems until measured flow rates (air and water flow) are within plus or minus 5 percent of the design flow rates as specified or indicated on the contract documents. TAB air system sub-main, branch duct dampers and runout dampers, in addition to adjusting prime movers and air terminal valves to acquire airflows indicated. Use dampers at diffusers and registers only if performance cannot be detained by means described above. Balance prime movers through sheave and belt adjustment unless prime mover is equipped with direct drive. Conduct TAB work, including measurement accuracy, and sound measurement work in conformance with the AABC MN-1 and AABC MN-4, or NEBB TABES and NEBB MASV, sound measurement procedures, except as supplemented and modified by this section. The only water flow and air flow reporting which can be deferred until the Season 2 is that data which would be affected in terms of accuracy due to outside ambient conditions.

3.4.2 Preliminary Procedures

Use the approved pre-field engineering report as instructions and procedures for accomplishing TAB field work. TAB engineer is to locate, in the field, test ports required for testing. It is the responsibility of the sheet metal contractor to provide and install test ports as required by the TAB engineer.

3.4.3 TAB Air Distribution Systems

3.4.3.1 Units With Coils

Report heating and cooling performance capacity tests for hot water, chilled water and DX coils for the purpose of verifying that the coils meet the indicated design capacity. Submit the following data and calculations with the coil test reports:

a. For air handlers conduct capacity tests in accordance with AABC MN-4, procedure 3.5, "Coil Capacity Testing."

Do not determine entering and leaving wet and dry bulb temperatures by



single point measurement, but by the average of multiple readings in compliance with paragraph 3.5-5, "Procedures", (in subparagraph d.) of AABC MN-4, Procedure 3.5, "Coil Capacity Testing."

Submit part-load coil performance data from the coil manufacturer converting test conditions to design conditions; use the data for the purpose of verifying that the coils meet the indicated design capacity in compliance with AABC MN-4, Procedure 3.5, "Coil Capacity Testing," paragraph 3.5.7, "Actual Capacity Vs. Design Capacity" (in subparagraph c.).

b. For fan coil units, duct mounted reheat coils associated with VAV air valves, and unitary units, such as through-the-wall heat pumps:

Determine the apparent coil capacity by calculations using single point measurement of entering and leaving wet and dry bulb temperatures; submit the calculations with the coil reports.

3.4.3.2 Air Handling Units

Air handling unit systems including fans (air handling unit fans, exhaust fans, coils, ducts, plenums,terminal units, variable air volume boxes, and air distribution devices for supply air, return air and outside air.

For refrigeration compressors/condensers/condensing units/evaporators, report data as required by NEBB, AABC, and TABB standard procedures, including refrigeration operational data.

3.4.3.3 Exhaust Fans

Exhaust fan systems including fans, ducts, plenums, registers, dampers, and hoods for exhaust air.

3.4.3.4 Unit Heaters

Unit heaters including coils and air distribution devices for supply and return air.

3.4.4 TAB Water Distribution Systems

3.4.4.1 Chilled Water

Chilled water systems including chillers, condensers, cooling towers, pumps, coils, system balance valves and flow measuring devices.

For water chillers, report data as required by AABC and NEBB and standard procedures, including refrigeration operational data.

3.4.4.2 Heating Hot Water

Heating hot water systems including boilers, hot water converters (e.g., heat exchangers), pumps, coils, system balancing valves and flow measuring devices.

3.4.4.3 Potable Water Heating Systems

Potable hot water recirculation systems including pumps and system balancing valves.



3.4.5 Sound Measurement Work

3.4.5.1 Areas To Be Sound Measured

In the following spaces with equipment operating at the scheduled conditions, measure and record the sound power level for each octave band listed in ASHRAE HVAC APP IP HDBK Noise Criteria:

a. All HVAC mechanical rooms, including machinery spaces and other spaces containing HVAC power drivers and power driven equipment.

b. All spaces sharing a common barrier with each mechanical room, including rooms overhead, rooms on the other side of side walls, and rooms beneath the mechanical room floor.

3.4.5.2 Procedure

Measure sound levels in each room, when unoccupied except for the TAB team, with all HVAC systems that would cause sound readings in the room operating in their noisiest mode. Record the sound level in each octave band. Attempt to mitigate the sound level and bring the level to within the specified ASHRAE HVAC APP IP HDBK noise criteria goals, if such mitigation is within the TAB team's control. State in the report the ASHRAE HVAC APP IP HDBK noise criteria goals. If sound level cannot be brought into compliance, provide written notice of the deficiency to the Contractor for resolution or correction.

3.4.5.3 Timing

Measure sound levels at times prescribed by AABC or NEBB or TABB.

3.4.5.4 Meters

Measure sound levels with a sound meter complying with ASA S1.4, Type 1 or 2, and an octave band filter set complying with ASA S1.11. Use measurement methods for overall sound levels and for octave band sound levels as prescribed by NEBB.

3.4.5.5 Calibration

Calibrate sound levels as prescribed by AABC or NEBB or TABB, except that calibrators emitting a sound pressure level tone of 94 dB at 1000 hertz (Hz) are also acceptable.

3.4.5.6 Background Noise Correction

Determine background noise component of room sound (noise) levels for each (of eight) octave bands as prescribed by AABC or NEBB or TABB.

3.4.6 TAB Work on Performance Tests With Seasonal Limitations

3.4.6.1 Performance Tests

Accomplish proportionate balancing TAB work on the air distribution systems and water distribution systems, in other words, accomplish adjusting and balancing of the air flows and water flows, any time during the duration of this contract, subject to the limitations specified elsewhere in this section. However, accomplish, within the following seasonal limitations, TAB work on HVAC systems which directly transfer thermal energy.



3.4.6.2 Season Of Maximum Load

Visit the contract site for at least two TAB work sessions for TAB field measurements. Visit the contract site during the season of maximum heating load and visit the contract site during the season of maximum cooling load, the goal being to TAB the operational performance of the heating systems and cooling systems under their respective maximum outdoor environment-caused loading. During the seasonal limitations, TAB the operational performance of the heating systems and cooling systems.

3.4.6.3 Ambient Temperatures

On each tab report form used for recording data, record the outdoor and indoor ambient dry bulb temperature range and the outdoor and indoor ambient wet bulb temperature range within which the report form's data was recorded. Record these temperatures at beginning and at the end of data taking.

3.4.6.4 Sound Measurements

Comply with paragraph entitled "Sound Measurement Work," specifically, the requirement that a room must be operating in its noisiest mode at the time of sound measurements in the room. The maximum noise level measurements could depend on seasonally related heat or cooling transfer equipment.

3.4.6.5 Water Chillers

Water chillers: For water chillers,report data as required by NEBB Form TAB 15-83, NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS, including refrigeration operational data.

3.4.6.6 Refrigeration Units

For refrigeration compressors/condensers/condensing units,report data as required by NEBB Form TAB 15-83, NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS, including refrigeration operational data.

3.4.6.7 Coils

Report heating and cooling performance capacity tests for hot water and chilled water coils for the purpose of verifying that the coils meet the indicated design capacity. Submit the following data and calculations with the coil test reports:

a. For Central station air handlers conduct capacity tests in accordance with AABC MN-4, procedure 3.5, "Coil Capacity Testing."

Entering and leaving wet and dry bulb temperatures are not determined by single point measurement, but by the average of multiple readings in compliance with paragraph 3.5-5, "Procedures", (in subparagraph d.) of AABC MN-4, Procedure 3.5, "Coil Capacity Testing."

Submit part-load coil performance data from the coil manufacturer converting test conditions to design conditions; use the data for the purpose of verifying that the coils meet the indicated design capacity in compliance with AABC MN-4, Procedure 3.5, "Coil Capacity Testing," paragraph 3.5.7, "Actual Capacity Vs. Design Capacity" (in subparagraph c.).



b. For fan coil units, air terminal valve reheat coils, fan coil units and unit heaters:

Determine the apparent coil capacity by calculations using single point measurement of entering and leaving wet and dry bulb temperatures; submit the calculations with the coil reports.

3.4.7 Workmanship

Conduct TAB work on the HVAC systems until measured flow rates are within plus or minus 5 percent of the design flow rates as specified or indicated on the contract documents. This TAB work includes adjustment of balancing valves, balancing dampers, and sheaves. Further, this TAB work includes changing out fan sheaves and pump impellers if required to obtain air and water flow rates specified or indicated. If, with these adjustments and equipment changes, the specified or indicated design flow rates cannot be attained, contact the Contracting Officer for direction.

3.4.8 Deficiencies

Strive to meet the intent of this section to maximize the performance of the equipment as designed and installed. However, if deficiencies in equipment design or installation prevent TAB work from being accomplished within the range of design values specified in the paragraph entitled "Workmanship," provide written notice as soon as possible to the Contractor and the Contracting Officer describing the deficiency and recommended correction.

Responsibility for correction of installation deficiencies is the Contractor's. If a deficiency is in equipment design, call the TAB team supervisor for technical assistance. Responsibility for reporting design deficiencies to Contractor is the TAB team supervisor's.

3.4.9 TAB Reports

Additional requirements for TAB Reports are specified in Appendix B REPORTS - DALT and TABAfter completion of the TAB field work, prepare the TAB field data for TAB supervisor's review and certification, using the reporting forms approved in the pre-field engineering report. Data required by those approved data report forms is to be furnished by the TAB team. Except as approved otherwise in writing by the Contracting Officer, the TAB work and thereby the TAB report is considered incomplete until the TAB work is accomplished to within the accuracy range specified in the paragraph entitled "Workmanship."

3.4.10 Quality Assurance - COTR TAB Field Acceptance Testing

3.4.10.1 TAB Field Acceptance Testing

During the field acceptance testing, verify, in the presence of the COTR, random selections of data (water, air quantities, air motion, sound level readings) recorded in the TAB Report. Points and areas for field acceptance testing are to be selected by the COTR. Measurement and test procedures are the same as approved for TAB work for the TAB Report.

Field acceptance testing includes verification of TAB Report data recorded for the following equipment groups:



Group 1: All chillers, boilers, and air handling units.

Group 2: 25 percent of the air terminal valves and associated diffusers.

Group 3: 25 percent of the supply diffusers, return registers, and exhaust registers.

Group 4: 25 percent of the return grilles, return registers, exhaust grilles and exhaust registers.

Group 5: 25 percent of the exhaust fans, and pumps.

Further, if any data on the TAB Report for Groups 2 through 5 is found not to fall within the range of plus 5 to minus 5 percent of the TAB Report data, additional group data verification is required in the presence of the COTR. Verify TAB Report data for one additional piece of equipment in that group. Continue this additional group data verification until out-of-tolerance data ceases to be found.

3.4.10.2 Additional COTR TAB Field Acceptance Testing

If any of the acceptance testing measurements for a given equipment group is found not to fall within the range of plus 5 to minus 5 percent of the TAB Report data, terminate data verification for all affected data for that group. The affected data for the given group will be disapproved. Make the necessary corrections and prepare a revised TAB Report. Reschedule acceptance testing of the revised report data with the COTR.

Further, if any data on the TAB Report for a given field acceptance test group is out-of-tolerance, then field test data for one additional field test group as specified herein. Continue this increase field test work until out-of-tolerance data ceases to to be found. This additional field testing is up and above the original 25 percent of the of reported data entries to be field tested.

If there are no more similar field test groups from which to choose, additional field testing from another, but different, type of field testing group must be tested.

3.4.10.3 Prerequisite for Approval

Compliance with the field acceptance testing requirements of this section is a prerequisite for the final Contracting Officer approval of the TAB Report submitted.

3.5 MARKING OF SETTINGS

Upon the final TAB work approval, permanently mark the settings of HVAC adjustment devices including valves, gauges, splitters, and dampers so that adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time. Provide permanent markings clearly indicating the settings on the adjustment devices which result in the data reported on the submitted TAB report.

3.6 MARKING OF TEST PORTS

The TAB team is to permanently and legibly mark and identify the location points of the duct test ports. If the ducts have exterior insulation, make these markings on the exterior side of the duct insulation. Show the



location of test ports on the as-built mechanical drawings with dimensions given where the test port is covered by exterior insulation.

3.7 APPENDICES

Appendix A WORK DESCRIPTIONS OF PARTICIPANTSAppendix B REPORTS - DALT and TABAppendix C DALT AND TAB SUBMITTAL AND WORK SCHEDULE



Appendix A

WORK DESCRIPTIONS OF PARTICIPANTS

The Contractor is responsible for ensuring compliance with all requirements of this specification section. However, the following delineation of specific work items is provided to facilitate and co-ordinate execution of the various work efforts by personnel from separate organizations.

1. Contractor

a. HVAC documentation: Provide pertinent contract documentation to the TAB Firm, to include the following: the contract drawings and specifications; copies of the approved submittal data for all HVAC equipment, air distribution devices, and air/water measuring/balancing devices; the construction work schedule; and other applicable documents requested by the TAB Firm. Provide the TAB Firm copies of contract revisions and modifications as they occur.

b. Schedules: Ensure the requirements specified under the paragraph "DALT and TAB Schedule" are met.

c. Pre-DALT and TAB meeting: Arrange and conduct the Pre-DALT and TAB meeting. Ensure that a representative is present for the sheet metal contractor, the mechanical contractor, the electrical contractor, and the automatic temperature controls contractor.

d. Coordinate Support: Provide and coordinate support personnel required by the TAB Firm in order to accomplish the DALT and TAB field work. Support personnel may include factory representatives, HVAC controls installers, HVAC equipment mechanics, sheet metal workers, pipe fitters, and insulators. Ensure support personnel are present at the work site at the times required.

e. Correct Deficiencies: Ensure the notifications of Construction Deficiencies are provided as specified herein. Refer to the paragraph entitled "Construction Deficiencies." Correct each deficiency as soon as practical with the Contracting Officer, and submit revised schedules and other required documentation.

f. Pre-TAB Work Checklists: Complete check out and debugging of HVAC equipment, ducts, and controls prior to the TAB engineer arriving at the project site to begin the TAB work. Debugging includes searching for and eliminating malfunctioning elements in the HVAC system installations, and verifying all adjustable devices are functioning as designed. Include as pre-TAB work checklist items, the deficiencies pointed out by the TAB team supervisor in the design review report.

Prior to the TAB field team's arrival, ensure completion of the applicable inspections and work items listed in the TAB team supervisor's DALT and TAB Work Procedures Summary. Do not allow the TAB team to commence TAB field work until all of the following are completed.

g. Give Notice of Testing: Submit advance notice of TAB field work accompanied by completed prerequisite HVAC Work List

h. Insulation work: Ensure that no insulation shall be installed on ducts



to be DALT'd until DALT work on the subject ducts is complete.

Ensure the duct and piping systems are properly insulated and vapor sealed upon the successful completion and acceptance of the DALT and TAB work.

2. TAB Team Supervisor

a. Overall management: Supervise and manage the overall TAB team work effort, including preliminary and technical DALT and TAB procedures and TAB team field work.

b. Schedule: Ensure the requirements specified under the paragraph "DALT and TAB Schedule" are met.

c. Submittals: Provide the submittals specified herein.

d. Pre-DALT/TAB meeting: Attend meeting with Contractor. Ensure TAB personnel that will be involved in the TAB work under this contract attend the meeting.

e. Design Review Report: Submit typed report describing omissions and deficiencies in the HVAC system's design that would preclude the TAB team from accomplishing the duct leakage testing work and the TAB work requirements of this section. Provide a complete explanation including supporting documentation detailing the design deficiency. State that no deficiencies are evident if that is the case.

f. Support required: Specify the technical support personnel required from the Contractor other than the TAB agency; such as factory representatives for temperature controls or for complex equipment. Inform the Contractor in writing of the support personnel needed and when they are needed. Furnish the notice as soon as the need is anticipated, either with the design review report, or the DALT and TAB Procedures Summary, the during the DALT or TAB field work.

Ensure the Contractor is properly notified and aware of all support personnel needed to perform the TAB work. Maintain communication with the Contractor regarding support personnel throughout the duration of the TAB field work, including the TAB field acceptance testing checking.

Ensure all inspections and verifications for the Pre-Final DALT and Pre-TAB Checklists are completely and successfully conducted before DALT and TAB field work is performed.

g. Advance Notice: Monitor the completion of the duct system installations and provide the Advance Notice for Pre-Final DALT field work as specified herein.

h. Technical Assistance: Provide technical assistance to the DALT and TAB field work.

i. Deficiencies Notification: Ensure the notifications of Construction Deficiencies are provided as specified herein. Comply with requirements of the paragraph entitled "Construction Deficiencies." Resolve each deficiency as soon as practical and submit revised schedules and other required documentation.

j. Procedures: Develop the required TAB procedures for systems or system



components not covered in the TAB Standard.

3. TAB Team Field Leader

a. Field manager: Manage, in the field, the accomplishment of the work specified in Part 3, "Execution."

b. Full time: Be present at the contract site when DALT field work or TAB field work is being performed by the TAB team; ensure day-to-day TAB team work accomplishments are in compliance with this section.

c. Prerequisite HVAC work: Do not bring the TAB team to the contract site until a copy of the prerequisite HVAC work list, with all work items certified by the Contractor to be working as designed, reaches the office of the TAB Agency.



Appendix B

REPORTS - DALT and TAB

All submitted documentation must be typed, neat, and organized. All reports must have a waterproof front and back cover, a title page, a certification page, sequentially numbered pages throughout, and a table of contents. Tables, lists, and diagrams must be titled. Generate and submit for approval the following documentation:

1. DALT and TAB Work Execution Schedule

Submit a detailed schedule indicating the anticipated calendar date for each submittal and each portion of work required under this section. For each work entry, indicate the support personnel (such as controls provider, HVAC mechanic, etc.) that are needed to accomplish the work. Arrange schedule entries chronologically.

2. DALT and TAB Procedures Summary

Submit a detailed narrative describing all aspects of the DALT and TAB field work to be performed. Clearly distinguish between DALT information and TAB information. Include the following:

a. A list of the intended procedural steps for the DALT and TAB field work from start to finish. Indicate how each type of data measurement will be obtained. Include what Contractor support personnel are required for each step, and the tasks they need to perform.

b. A list of the project's submittals that are needed by the TAB Firm in order to meet this Contract's requirements.

c. The schematic drawings to be used in the required reports, which may include building floor plans, mechanical room plans, duct system plans, and equipment elevations. Indicate intended TAB measurement locations, including where test ports need to be provided by the Contractor.

d. The data presentation forms to be used in the report, with the preliminary information and initial design values filled in.

e. A list of DALT and TAB instruments to be used, edited for this project, to include the instrument name and description, manufacturer, model number, scale range, published accuracy, most recent calibration date, and what the instrument will be used for on this project.

f. A thorough checklist of the work items and inspections that need to be accomplished before DALT field work can be performed. The Contractor must complete, submit, and receive approval of the Completed Pre-Final DALT Work Checklist before DALT field work can be accomplished.

g. A thorough checklist of the work items and inspections that need to be accomplished before the Season 1 TAB field work can be performed. The Contractor must complete, submit, and receive approval of the Completed Season 1 Pre-TAB Work Checklist before the Season 1 TAB field work can be accomplished.

h. A thorough checklist of the work items and inspections that need to be



accomplished before the Season 2 TAB field work can be performed. The Contractor must complete, submit, and receive approval of the Completed Season 2 Pre-TAB Work Checklist before the Season 2 TAB field work can be accomplished.

i. The checklists specified above shall be individually developed and tailored specifically for the work under this contract. Refer to NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS, Section III, "Preliminary TAB Procedures" under the paragraphs titled, "Air Distribution System Inspection" and "Hydronic Distribution System Inspection" for examples of items to include in the checklists.

3. Design Review Report

Submit report containing the following information:

a. Review the contract specifications and drawings to verify that the TAB work can be successfully accomplished in compliance with the requirements of this section. Verify the presence and location of permanently installed test ports and other devices needed, including gauge cocks, thermometer wells, flow control devices, circuit setters, balancing valves, and manual volume dampers.

b. Submit a typed report describing omissions and deficiencies in the HVAC system's design that would preclude the TAB team from accomplishing the DALT work and the TAB work requirements of this section. Provide a complete explanation including supporting documentation detailing the design deficiency. If no deficiencies are evident, state so in the report.

4. Pre-Final DALT Report for COTR DALT Field Checks

Report the data for the Pre-Final DALT Report meeting the following requirements:

a. Submit a copy of the approved DALT and TAB Procedures Summary: Provide notations describing how actual field procedures differed from the procedures listed.

b. Report format: Submit a comprehensive report for the DALT field work data using data presentation forms equivalent to the "Air Duct Leakage Test Summary Report Forms" located in the SMACNA 1972 CD. In addition, submit in the report, a marked duct shop drawing which identifies each section of duct tested with assigned node numbers for each section. Node numbers shall be included in the completed report forms to identify each duct section.

c. Calculations: Include a copy of all calculations prepared in determining the duct surface area of each duct test section. Include in the DALT reports copy(s) of the calibration curve for each of the DALT test orifices used for testing.

d. Instruments: List the types of instruments actually used to measure the data. Include in the listing each instrument's unique identification number, calibration date, and calibration expiration date. Instruments are to be calibrated within one year of the date of use in the field; instrument calibration is to be traceable to the measuring standards of the National Institute of Standards and Technology.



e. TAB Supervisor Approval: Include on the submitted report the typed name of the TAB supervisor and the dated signature of the TAB supervisor.

5. Final DALT Report

On successful completion of all COTR field checks of the Pre-final DALT Report data for all systems, the TABS Supervisor shall assemble, review, sign and submit the Final DALT Report to the Contracting Officer for approval.

6. TAB Reports: Submit TAB Report for Season 1 and TAB Report for Season 2 in the following manner:

a. Procedure Summary: Submit a copy of the approved DALT and TAB Procedures Summary. When applicable, provide notations describing how actual field procedures differed from the procedures listed.

b. Report format: Submit the completed data forms approved in the pre-field TAB Engineering Report completed by TAB field team, reviewed, approved and signed by the TAB supervisor. Bind the report with a waterproof front and back cover. Include a table of contents identifying by page number the location of each report. Report forms and report data shall be typewritten. Handwritten report forms or report data are not acceptable.

c. Temperatures: On each TAB report form reporting TAB work accomplished on HVAC thermal energy transfer equipment, include the indoor and outdoor dry bulb temperature range and indoor and outdoor wet bulb temperature range within which the TAB data was recorded. Include in the TAB report continuous time versus temperature recording data of wet and dry bulb temperatures for the rooms, or zones, as designated in the following list:

Each dental treatment room with a thermostat and the central sterile room.

(1) Data shall be measured and compiled on a continuous basis for the period in which TAB work affecting those rooms is being done.

(2) Data shall be measured/recorded only after the HVAC systems installations are complete, the systems fully balanced and the HVAC systems controls operating in fully automatic mode. Provide a detailed explanation wherever a final measurement did not achieve the required value.

(3) Data may be compiled using direct digital controls trend logging where available. Otherwise, the Contractor shall temporarily install calibrated time versus temperature/humidity recorders for this purpose. The HVAC systems and controls shall have been fully operational a minimum of 24 hours in advance of commencing data compilation. The specified data shall be included in the Season I and Season 2 TAB Report.

d. Air System Diagrams: Provided updated diagrams with final installed locations of all terminals and devices, any numbering changes, and actual test locations.

e. Air Static Pressure Profiles: Report static pressure profiles for air



duct systems including: Each supply and return duct system, each air handling unit, each exhaust fan duct system and each return fan system.. Report static pressure data for all supply, return, relief, exhaust and outside air ducts for the systems listed. The static pressure report data shall include, in addition to AABC or NEBB or TABB required data, the following:

(1) Report supply fan,and exhaust fan inlet and discharge static pressures.

(2) Report static pressure drop across chilled water coils, DX coils and hot water coils.

(3) Report static pressure drop across outside air, return air, and supply air automatic control dampers, both proportional and two-position.

(4) Report static pressure drop across air filters, sound attenuators air flow straighteners, air flow measuring stations or other pressure drop producing specialty items installed in unit cabinetry, or in the system ductwork. Examples of these specialty items are smoke detectors.

Do not report static pressure drop across duct fittings provided for the sole purpose of conveying air, such as elbows, transitions, offsets, plenums, manual dampers, and branch takes-offs.

(5) Report static pressure drop across outside air and relief/exhaust air louvers.

(6) Report static pressure readings of supply air, return air, exhaust/relief air, and outside air in duct at the point where these ducts connect to each air moving unit.

f. Duct Transverses: Report duct traverses for main supply, return, exhaust, and outside air ducts. This shall include all ducts, including those which lack 7 1/2 duct diameters upstream and 2 1/2 duct diameters downstream of straight duct unobstructed by duct fittings/offsets/elbows. The TAB Agency shall evaluate and report findings on the duct traverses taken. Evaluate the suitability of the duct traverse measurement based on satisfying the qualifications for a pitot traverse plane as defined by AMCA 203, "Field Measurements", Section 8, paragraph 8.3, "Location of Traverse Plane".

g. Instruments: List the types of instruments actually used to measure the tab data. Include in the listing each instrument's unique identification number, calibration date, and calibration expiration date.

Instrumentation, used for taking wet bulb temperature readings shall provide accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent at the measured face velocities. Submit instrument manufacturer's literature to document instrument accuracy performance is in compliance with that specified.

h. Performance Curves: The TAB Supervisor shall include, in the TAB Reports, factory pump curves and fan curves for pumps and fans TAB'd on the job.

i. Calibration Curves: The TAB Supervisor shall include, in the TAB



Reports, a factory calibration curve for installed flow control balancing valves, flow venturis and flow orifices TAB'd on the job.

j. Data From TAB Field Work: After completion of the TAB field work, prepare the TAB field data for TAB supervisor's review and approval signature, using the reporting forms approved in the pre-field engineering report. Data required by those approved data report forms shall be furnished by the TAB team. Except as approved otherwise in writing by the Contracting Officer, the TAB work and thereby the TAB report shall be considered incomplete until the TAB work is accomplished to within the accuracy range specified in the paragraph entitled "Workmanship."



Appendix C

DALT AND TAB SUBMITTAL AND WORK SCHEDULE

Perform the following items of work in the order listed adhering to the dates schedule specified below. Include the major items listed in this schedule in the project network analysis schedule required by Section 01 32 17.00 20 NETWORK ANALYSIS SCHEDULES (NAS).

Submit TAB Agency and TAB Personnel Qualifications: Within 42 calendar days after date of contract award.

Submit the DALT and TAB Work Execution Schedule: within 14 days after receipt of the TAB agency and TAB personnel qualifications approval. Revise and re-submit this schedule 28 days prior to commencement of DALT work and 28 days prior to the commencement of TAB Season 1 work and TAB Season 2 work.

Submit the DALT and TAB Work Procedures Summary: within 14 days after receipt of the initial approved DALT and TAB Work Execution Schedule.

Meet with the COTR at the Pre-DALT/TAB Meeting: Within 28 calendar days after receipt of the approved initial DALT/TAB Execution Schedule.

Submit Design Review Report: Within 56 calendar days after the receipt of the approved initial DALT and TAB Work Execution Schedule.

Conduct measurements and submit the Record of Existing Facility Conditions: within 28 days after receipt of approved DALT and TAB Work Procedures Summary.

Advance Notice of Pre-Final DALT Field Work: After the completed installation of the HVAC duct system to be DALT'd, submit to the Contracting Officer an Advance Notice of Pre-Final DALT Field Work accompanied by the completed Pre-Final DALT Work Checklist for the subject duct system.

Ductwork Selected for DALT: Within 14 calendar days after receiving an acceptable completed Pre-Final DALT Work Checklist, the Contracting Officer's technical representative (COTR) will select the project ductwork sections to be DALT'd.

DALT Field Work: Within 48 hours of COTR's selection, complete DALT field work on selected project ductwork.

Submit Pre-Final DALT Report: Within two working days after completion of DALT field work, submit Pre-final DALT Report. Separate Pre-final DALT reports may be submitted to allow phased testing from system to system.

Quality Assurance - COTR DALT Field Checks: Upon approval of the Pre-final DALT Report, the COTR's DALT field check work shall be scheduled with the Contracting Officer.

Submit Final DALT Report: Within 14 calendar days after completion of successful DALT Work Field Check, submit Season 1 TAB report.

Advance Notice of Season 1 TAB Field Work: At a minimum of 14 calendar days prior to Season 1 TAB Field Work, submit advance notice of TAB



field work accompanied by completed Season 1 Pre-TAB Work Checklist.

Season 1 TAB Field Work: At a minimum of 84 calendar days prior to CCD, and when the ambient temperature is within Season 1 limits, accomplish Season 1 TAB field work.

Submit Season 1 TAB Report: Within 14 calendar days after completion of Season 1 TAB field work, submit initial Season 1 TAB report.

Season 1 Quality Assurance - COTR TAB Field Check: 30 calendar days after initial Season 1 TAB report is approved by the Contracting Officer, conduct Season 1 field check.

Complete Season 1 TAB Work: Prior to CCD, complete all TAB work except Season 2 TAB work and submit final.

Receive the approved TAB report: Within 21 calendar days, receive the report from Contracting Officer approved TAB report.

Advance Notice of Season 2 TAB Field Work: At a minimum of 126 calendar days after CCD, submit advance notice of Season 2 TAB field work accompanied by completed Season 2 Pre-TAB Work Checklist.

Season 2 TAB Field Work: Within 14 calendar days after date of advance notice of Season 2 TAB field work and when the ambient temperature is within Season 2 limits, accomplish Season 2 TAB field work.


Season 2 Quality Assurance - COTR TAB Field Checks: 28 calendar days after the Season 2 TAB report is approved by the Contracting Officer, conduct Season 2 field check.

Complete Season 2 TAB Work: Within 14 calendar days after the completion of Season 2 TAB field data check, complete all TAB work.

Receive the approved TAB report: Within calendar 21 days, receive the report from Contracting Officer.




SECTION 23 07 00

THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS02/13

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. At the discretion of the Government, the manufacturer of any material supplied will be required to furnish test reports pertaining to any of the tests necessary to assure compliance with the standard or standards referenced in this specification.


ASHRAE 90.1 - IP (2010; Errata 1-4 2011; INT 1-12 2011; Addenda A, B, C, G, H, J, K, O, P, S, Y, Z, BZ, CG, CI and DS 2012; Errata 5-9 2012; INT 13-16 2012; Errata 10-12 2013; INT 17-18 2013) Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings



ASTM A580/A580M (2013a) Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire

ASTM B209 (2010) Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

ASTM C1136 (2012) Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation

ASTM C1710 (2011) Standard Guide for Installation of Flexible Closed Cell Preformed Insulation in Tube and Sheet Form

ASTM C195 (2007; R 2013) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement

ASTM C450 (2008) Standard Practice for Fabrication of Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers for NPS Piping, and Vessel Lagging

ASTM C534/C534M (2013) Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular



Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form

ASTM C547 (2012) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation

ASTM C552 (2012b) Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation

ASTM C612 (2010) Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation

ASTM C647 (2008) Properties and Tests of Mastics and Coating Finishes for Thermal Insulation

ASTM C795 (2008; R 2013) Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel

ASTM C916 (1985; R 2007) Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation

ASTM C920 (2011) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants

ASTM C921 (2010) Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation

ASTM D2863 (2012) Measuring the Minimum Oxygen Concentration to Support Candle-Like Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index)

ASTM E2231 (2009) Specimen Preparation and Mounting of Pipe and Duct Insulation Materials to Assess Surface Burning Characteristics

ASTM E84 (2013a) Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

ASTM E96/E96M (2012) Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

FM GLOBAL (FM)




MIDWEST INSULATION CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (MICA)

MICA Insulation Stds (1999) National Commercial & Industrial



Insulation Standards


NFPA 255 (2006) Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials


NFPA 90B (2012) Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems

TECHNICAL ASSOCIATION OF THE PULP AND PAPER INDUSTRY (TAPPI)

TAPPI T403 OM (2010) Bursting Strength of Paper

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)

MIL-A-3316 (1987; Rev C; Am 2 1990) Adhesives, Fire-Resistant, Thermal Insulation


UL 723 (2008; Reprint Aug 2013) Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

UL 94 (2013) Standard for Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances


1.2.1 General

Provide field-applied insulation and accessories on mechanical systems as specified herein; factory-applied insulation is specified under the piping, duct or equipment to be insulated. Insulation of chilled water systems exterior to the facility shall be as specified in Section 33 61 00 PREFABRICATED UNDERGROUND HEATING/COOLING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Field applied insulation materials required for use on Government-furnished items as listed in the SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor.

1.2.2 Surface Burning Characteristics

Unless otherwise specified, insulation shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Flame spread, and smoke developed indexes, shall be determined by ASTM E84, NFPA 255 or UL 723. Insulation shall be tested in the same density and installed thickness as the material to be used in the actual construction. Test specimens shall be prepared and mounted according to ASTM E2231. Insulation materials located exterior to the building perimeter are not required to be fire rated.



1.2.3 Recycled Materials

Provide thermal insulation containing recycled materials to the extent practicable, provided that the materials meet all other requirements of this section. The minimum recycled material content of the following insulation are:

Rock Wool 75 percent slag of weight

Fiberglass 20-25 percent glass cullet by weight

Rigid Foam 9 percent recovered material

1.3 SUBMITTALS


Submit all SD types, SD-02 Shop Drawings, SD-03 Product Data, and SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions at the same time for each system.

SD-03 Product Data

MICA PlatesPipe Insulation Systems; GDuct Insulation Systems; GEquipment Insulation Systems; G

A complete list of materials for each piping, duct and equipment installation requiring insulation, including manufacturer's descriptive technical literature, performance data, catalog cuts, and installation instructions. Submit a schedule indicating the insulation application, manufacturer's product number, k-value, thickness and furnished accessories including adhesives, sealants and jackets for each type of pipe, duct and equipment insulation. The product data must be copyrighted, have an identifying or publication number, and shall have been published prior to the issuance date of this solicitation. Materials furnished under this section of the specification shall be submitted together in a booklet. Annotate the product data to indicate which MICA plate is applicable.


Pipe Insulation Systems; GDuct Insulation Systems; GEquipment Insulation Systems; G

Submit a booklet containing manufacturer's published installation instructions for the insulation systems in coordination with the submitted MICA Insulation Stds plates booklet. Annotate their installation instructions to indicate which product data and which MICA plate are applicable. The instructions must be copywrited, have an identifying or publication number, and shall have been published prior to the issuance date of this solicitation.




1.4.1 Installer Qualification

Qualified installers shall have successfully completed three or more similar type jobs within the last 5 years.


Materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer's unopened containers. Materials delivered and placed in storage shall be provided with protection from weather, humidity, dirt, dust and other contaminants. The Contracting Officer may reject insulation material and supplies that become dirty, dusty, wet, or contaminated by some other means. Packages or standard containers of insulation, jacket material, cements, adhesives, and coatings delivered for use, and samples required for approval shall have manufacturer's stamp or label attached giving the name of the manufacturer and brand, and a description of the material, date codes, and approximate shelf life (if applicable). Insulation packages and containers shall be asbestos free.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Provide materials which are the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening. Provide insulation systems in accordance with the approved MICA National Insulation Standards plates as supplemented by this specification. Provide field-applied insulation for heating, ventilating, and cooling (HVAC) air distribution systems and piping systems which are located within, on, under, and adjacent to buildings; and for plumbing systems.

2.2 MATERIALS

Provide insulation that meets or exceed the requirements indicated and as a minimum ASHRAE 90.1 - IP. Insulation exterior shall be cleanable, grease resistant, non-flaking and non-peeling. Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to corrosion, soften, or otherwise attack surfaces to which applied in either wet or dry state. Materials to be used on stainless steel surfaces shall meet ASTM C795 requirements. Calcium silicate shall not be used on chilled or cold water systems. Materials shall be asbestos free. Provide product recognized under UL 94 (if containing plastic) and listed in FM APP GUIDE.

2.2.1 Adhesives

2.2.1.1 Acoustical Lining Insulation Adhesive

Adhesive shall be a nonflammable, fire-resistant adhesive conforming to ASTM C916, Type I.

2.2.1.2 Mineral Fiber Insulation Cement

Cement shall be in accordance with ASTM C195.



2.2.1.3 Lagging Adhesive

Lagging is the material used for thermal insulation, especially around a cylindrical object. This may include the insulation as well as the cloth/material covering the insulation. Lagging adhesives shall be nonflammable and fire-resistant and shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Adhesive shall be MIL-A-3316, Class 1, pigmented white and be suitable for bonding fibrous glass cloth to faced and unfaced fibrous glass insulation board; for bonding cotton brattice cloth to faced and unfaced fibrous glass insulation board; for sealing edges of and bonding glass tape to joints of fibrous glass board; for bonding lagging cloth to thermal insulation; or Class 2 for attaching fibrous glass insulation to metal surfaces. Lagging adhesives shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for pipe and duct insulation.

2.2.1.4 Contact Adhesive

Adhesives may be any of, but not limited to, the neoprene based, rubber based, or elastomeric type that have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. The adhesive shall not adversely affect, initially or in service, the insulation to which it is applied, nor shall it cause any corrosive effect on metal to which it is applied. Any solvent dispersing medium or volatile component of the adhesive shall have no objectionable odor and shall not contain any benzene or carbon tetrachloride. The dried adhesive shall not emit nauseous, irritating, or toxic volatile matters or aerosols when the adhesive is heated to any temperature up to 212 degrees F. The dried adhesive shall be nonflammable and fire resistant. Natural cross-ventilation, local (mechanical) pickup, and/or general area (mechanical) ventilation shall be used to prevent an accumulation of solvent vapors, keeping in mind the ventilation pattern must remove any heavier-than-air solvent vapors from lower levels of the workspaces. Gloves and spectacle-type safety glasses are recommended in accordance with safe installation practices.

2.2.2 Caulking

ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use A.

2.2.3 Corner Angles

Nominal 0.016 inch aluminum 1 by 1 inch with factory applied kraft backing. Aluminum shall be ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3105, or 5005.

2.2.4 Fittings

Fabricated Fittings are the prefabricated fittings for flexible elastomeric pipe insulation systems in accordance with ASTM C1710. Together with the flexible elastomeric tubes, they provide complete system integrity for retarding heat gain and controlling condensation drip from chilled-water and refrigeration systems. Flexible elastomeric, fabricated fittings provide thermal protection (0.25 k) and condensation resistance (0.05 Water Vapor Transmission factor). For satisfactory performance, properly installed protective vapor retarder/barriers and vapor stops shall be used on high relative humidity and below ambient temperature applications to reduce movement of moisture through or around the insulation to the colder interior surface.



2.2.5 Finishing Cement

ASTM C450: Mineral fiber hydraulic-setting thermal insulating and finishing cement. All cements that may come in contact with Austenitic stainless steel must comply with ASTM C795.

2.2.6 Fibrous Glass Cloth and Glass Tape

Fibrous glass cloth, with 20X20 maximum mesh size, shall have maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Tape shall be 4 inch wide rolls. Cloth shall be 4.5 ounces/square yard. Note that tape products are not an acceptable substitute for imbedded cloth products where cloth product installations are indicated.

2.2.7 Staples

Outward clinching type monel ASTM A167, Type 304 or 316 stainless steel.

2.2.8 Jackets

2.2.8.1 Aluminum Jackets

Aluminum jackets shall be smooth sheet, 0.016 inch nominal thickness; ASTM B209, Temper H14, Temper H16, Alloy 3003, 5005, or 3105. Aluminum jacket securing bands shall be Type 304 stainless steel, 0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide for pipe under 12 inch diameter and 3/4 inch wide for pipe over 12 inch and larger diameter. Aluminum jacket circumferential seam bands shall be 2 by 0.016 inch aluminum matching jacket material. Bands for insulation below ground shall be 3/4 by 0.020 inch thick stainless steel, or fiberglass reinforced tape. The jacket may, at the option of the Contractor, be provided with a factory fabricated Pittsburgh or "Z" type longitudinal joint. When the "Z" joint is used, the bands at the circumferential joints shall be designed by the manufacturer to seal the joints and hold the jacket in place. Note that jacket materials with corrugated or stippled (non-smooth) surfaces are not acceptable.

2.2.8.2 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Jackets

Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) fitting covers shall have high impact strength, ultraviolet (UV) resistant rating or treatment and moderate chemical resistance with minimum thickness 0.030 inch.

2.2.9 Vapor Retarder Required

ASTM C921, Type I, minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all surfaces except concealed ductwork, where a minimum puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is acceptable. Minimum tensile strength, 35 pounds/inch width. ASTM C921, Type II, minimum puncture resistance 25 Beach units, tensile strength minimum 20 pounds/inch width. Jackets used on insulation exposed in finished areas shall have white finish suitable for painting without sizing. Based on the application, insulation materials that require manufacturer applied pipe insulation jackets are cellular glass, and mineral fiber. All non-metallic jackets shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.



2.2.9.1 White Vapor Retarder All Service Jacket (ASJ)

ASJ is for use on hot/cold pipes, ducts, or equipment indoors or outdoors if covered by a suitable protective jacket. The product shall meet all physical property and performance requirements of ASTM C1136, Type I, except the burst strength shall be a minimum of 85 psi. ASTM D2863 Limited Oxygen Index (LOI) shall be a minimum of 31.

In addition, neither the outer exposed surface nor the inner-most surface contacting the insulation shall be paper or other moisture-sensitive material. The outer exposed surface shall be white and have an emittance of not less than 0.80. The outer exposed surface shall be paintable.

2.2.9.2 Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier Mastic Coatings

2.2.9.2.1 Vapor Barrier

The vapor barrier shall be self adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) greater than 3 plies standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed white jacket for use on hot/cold pipes. Permeability shall be less than 0.02 when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. Products shall meet UL 723 or ASTM E84 flame and smoke requirements and shall be UV resistant.

2.2.9.2.2 Vapor Retarder

The vapor retarder coating shall be fire and water resistant and appropriately selected for either outdoor or indoor service. Color shall be white. The water vapor permeance of the compound shall be 0.013 perms or less at 43 mils dry film thickness as determined according to procedure B of ASTM E96/E96M utilizing apparatus described in ASTM E96/E96M. The coating shall be nonflammable, fire resistant type. All other application and service properties shall be in accordance with ASTM C647.

2.2.9.3 Laminated Film Vapor Retarder

ASTM C1136, Type I, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.02 perms, minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all surfaces except concealed ductwork; where Type II, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.02 perms, a minimum puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is acceptable. Vapor retarder shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2.2.9.4 Polyvinylidene Chloride Vapor Retarder Adhesive Tape

Requirements must meet the same as specified for Laminated Film Vapor Retarder above.

2.2.9.5 Vapor Barrier

The vapor barrier shall be greater than 3 ply self adhesive laminate -white vapor barrier jacket- superior performance (less than 0.0000 permeability when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M). Vapor barrier shall meet UL 723 or ASTM E84 25 flame and 50 smoke requirements; and UV resistant. Minimum burst strength 185 psi in accordance with TAPPI T403 OM. Tensile strength 68 lb/inch width (PSTC-1000). Tape shall be as specified for laminated film vapor barrier above.



2.2.10 Vapor Retarder Not Required

ASTM C921, Type II, Class D, minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all surfaces except ductwork, where Type IV, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.10, a minimum puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is acceptable. Jacket shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2.2.11 Wire

Soft annealed ASTM A580/A580M Type 302, 304 or 316 stainless steel, 16 or 18 gauge.

2.2.12 Insulation Bands

Insulation bands shall be 1/2 inch wide; 26 gauge stainless steel.

2.2.13 Sealants

Sealants shall be chosen from the butyl polymer type, the styrene-butadiene rubber type, or the butyl type of sealants. Sealants shall have a maximum permeance of 0.02 perms based on Procedure B for ASTM E96/E96M, and a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2.3 PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS

Insulation materials shall conform to Table 1. Insulation thickness shall be as listed in Table 2. Comply with EPA requirements in accordance with Section 01 62 35 RECYCLED/RECOVERED/BIOBASED MATERIALS. Pipe insulation materials shall be limited to those listed herein and shall meet the following requirements:

2.3.1 Aboveground Cold Pipeline ( -30 to 60 deg. F)

Insulation for outdoor, indoor, exposed or concealed applications, shall be as follows:

2.3.1.1 Cellular Glass

ASTM C552, Type II, and Type III. Supply the insulation with the manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.

2.3.1.2 Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation

Comply with ASTM C534/C534M, Grade 1, Type I or II. Type I, Grade 1 for tubular materials. Type II, Grade 1, for sheet materials. Type II shall have vapor retarder/vapor barrier skin on one or both sides of the insulation. Insulation with pre-applied adhesive shall not be used.

2.3.1.3 Mineral Fiber Insulation with Integral Wicking Material (MFIWM)

ASTM C547. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2.3.2 Aboveground Hot Pipeline (Above 60 deg. F)

Insulation for outdoor, indoor, exposed or concealed applications shall meet the following requirements. Supply the insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.



2.3.2.1 Mineral Fiber

ASTM C547, Types I, II or III, supply the insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket.

2.3.2.2 Cellular Glass

ASTM C552, Type II and Type III. Supply the insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket.

2.3.3 Below-ground Pipeline Insulation

For below-ground pipeline insulation, use cellular glass, ASTM C552, type II.

2.4 DUCT INSULATION SYSTEMS

2.4.1 Duct Insulation

Provide insulation according to manufacturer's recommendations for insulation with insulation manufacturer's standard reinforced with insulation manufacturer's standard reinforced fire-retardant vapor barrier, with identification of installed thermal resistance (R) value and out-of-package R value.

2.4.1.1 Rigid Insulation

Rigid mineral fiber in accordance with ASTM C612, Class 2 (maximum surface temperature 400 degrees F), 3 pcf average, 1-1/2 inch thick, Type IA, IB, II, III, and IV.

2.4.2 Duct Insulation Jackets

2.4.2.1 All-Purpose Jacket

Provide insulation with insulation manufacturer's standard reinforced fire-retardant jacket with or without integral vapor barrier as required by the service. In exposed locations, provide jacket with a white surface suitable for field painting.

2.5 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SYSTEMS

Insulate equipment and accessories as specified in Tables 4 and 5. In outside locations and indoor rooms ventilated with unconditioned outside air, provide insulation 1/2 inch thicker than specified. Increase the specified insulation thickness for equipment where necessary to equal the thickness of angles or other structural members to make a smooth, exterior surface.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION - GENERAL

Insulation shall only be applied to unheated and uncooled ductwork, piping, and equipment. Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall not be compressed at joists, studs, columns, ducts, hangers, etc. The insulation shall not pull apart after a one hour period; any insulation found to pull apart after one hour, shall be replaced. Insulation shall be terminated beveled at a 45 degree angle at items not to be insulated such as



nameplates, manholes, handholes, insulated access doors, factory insulated equipment, pipe terminations at equipment, and similar terminations. Cover all fan insulation with white sealer and jacket material.

3.1.1 Installation

Except as otherwise specified, material shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Insulation materials shall not be applied until tests and heat tracing specified in other sections of this specification are completed. Material such as rust, scale, dirt and moisture shall be removed from surfaces to receive insulation. Insulation shall be kept clean and dry. Insulation shall not be removed from its shipping containers until the day it is ready to use and shall be returned to like containers or equally protected from dirt and moisture at the end of each workday. Insulation that becomes dirty shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to use. If insulation becomes wet or if cleaning does not restore the surfaces to like new condition, the insulation will be rejected, and shall be immediately removed from the jobsite. Joints shall be staggered on multi layer insulation. Mineral fiber thermal insulating cement shall be mixed with demineralized water when used on stainless steel surfaces. Insulation, jacketing and accessories shall be installed in accordance with MICA Insulation Stds plates except where modified herein or on the drawings.

3.1.2 Firestopping

Where pipes and ducts pass through fire walls, fire partitions, above grade floors, and fire rated chase walls, the penetration shall be sealed with fire stopping materials as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING. The protection of ducts at point of passage through firewalls must be in accordance with NFPA 90A and/or NFPA 90B. All other penetrations, such as piping, conduit, and wiring, through firewalls must be protected with a material or system of the same hourly rating that is listed by UL, FM, or a NRTL.

3.1.3 Painting and Finishing

Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.1.4 Installation of Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation

Install flexible elastomeric cellular insulation with seams and joints sealed with rubberized contact adhesive. Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall not be used on surfaces greater than 100 degrees F. Seams shall be staggered when applying multiple layers of insulation. Protect insulation exposed to weather with two coats of UV resistant finish or PVC or metal jacketing as recommended by the manufacturer after the adhesive is dry and cured.

3.1.4.1 Adhesive Application

Apply a brush coating of adhesive to both butt ends to be joined and to both slit surfaces to be sealed. Allow the adhesive to set until dry to touch but tacky under slight pressure before joining the surfaces. Insulation seals at seams and joints shall not be capable of being pulled apart one hour after application. Insulation that can be pulled apart one hour after installation shall be replaced.



3.1.4.2 Adhesive Safety Precautions

Use natural cross-ventilation, local (mechanical) pickup, and/or general area (mechanical) ventilation to prevent an accumulation of solvent vapors, keeping in mind the ventilation pattern must remove any heavier-than-air solvent vapors from lower levels of the workspaces. Gloves and spectacle-type safety glasses are recommended in accordance with safe installation practices.

3.1.5 Welding

No welding shall be done on piping, duct or equipment without written approval of the Contracting Officer. The capacitor discharge welding process may be used for securing metal fasteners to duct.

3.1.6 Pipes/Ducts/Equipment Which Require Insulation

Insulation is required on all pipes, ducts, or equipment, except for omitted items as specified.

3.2 PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION

3.2.1 Pipe Insulation

3.2.1.1 General

Pipe insulation shall be installed on aboveground hot and cold pipeline systems as specified below to form a continuous thermal retarder/barrier, including straight runs, fittings and appurtenances unless specified otherwise. Installation shall be with full length units of insulation and using a single cut piece to complete a run. Unless noted otherwise, material used for installation shall be consistent on each piping service throughout the entire project. Cut pieces or scraps abutting each other shall not be used. Pipe insulation shall be omitted on the following:

a. Pipe used solely for fire protection.

b. Chromium plated pipe to plumbing fixtures. However, fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall have the hot water supply and drain, including the trap, insulated where exposed. Refer to Section 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES, for materials and installation at these locations.

c. Sanitary drain lines.

d. Air chambers.

e. Adjacent insulation.

f. ASME stamps.

g. Access plates of fan housings.

h. Cleanouts or handholes.

i. Components within factory preinsulated HVAC equipment.

j. Factory preinsulated flexible ductwork.



k. Factory preinsulated HVAC equipment.

l. Manufacturer's nameplates.

m. Vibration isolating connections, except pipeline vibration isolators.

3.2.1.2 Pipes Passing Through Walls, Roof Curbs, and Floors

a. Where sleeves are indicated, pipe insulation shall be continuous through the sleeve/penetration.

b. Where penetrating roof curb caps, insulation shall be continuous through the roof curb and cap. Provide metal jacketing material, starting at a minimum of 10 inches below the curb cap, and extending continuously to the exterior. All piping insulation exterior to the facility shall be equipped with metal jacketing.

c. For hot water pipes supplying plumbing fixtures, except medical equipment and appliances, the insulation shall be terminated on the backside of the finished wall. The insulation termination shall be protected with two coats of vapor barrier coating with a minimum total thickness of 1/16 inch applied with glass cloth embedded between coats (if applicable). The coating shall extend out onto the insulation 2 inches and shall seal the end of the insulation. Glass cloth seams shall overlap 1 inch. The annular space between the pipe and wall penetration shall be caulked with approved fire stop material. The pipe and wall penetration shall be covered with a properly sized (well fitting) escutcheon plate. The escutcheon plate shall overlap the wall penetration at least 3/8 inches.

d. For domestic cold water pipes supplying plumbing fixtures, except for drinking fountains and except medical equipment and appliances, the insulation shall be terminated on the finished side of the wall (i.e., insulation must cover the pipe throughout the wall penetration). The insulation shall be protected with two coats of vapor barrier coating with a minimum total thickness of 1/16 inch. The coating shall extend out onto the insulation 2 inches and shall seal the end of the insulation. The annular space between the outer surface of the pipe insulation and the wall penetration shall be caulked with an approved fire stop material having vapor retarder properties. The pipe and wall penetration shall be covered with a properly sized (well fitting) escutcheon plate. The escutcheon plate shall overlap the wall penetration by at least 3/8 inches.

3.2.1.3 Pipes Passing Through Hangers

a. Insulation, whether hot or cold application, shall be continuous through hangers. All horizontal pipes 2 inches and smaller shall be supported on hangers with the addition of a Type 40 protection shield to protect the insulation in accordance with MSS SP-69. Whenever insulation shows signs of being compressed, or when the insulation or jacket shows visible signs of distortion at or near the support shield, insulation inserts as specified below for piping larger than 2 inches shall be installed, or factory insulated hangers (designed with a load bearing core) can be used.

b. Horizontal pipes larger than 2 inches and below 60 degrees F shall be supported on hangers with the addition of a Type 40 protection



shield in accordance with MSS SP-69 if insulation material is specified to be other than cellular glass, an insulation insert of cellular glass, shall be installed above each shield. The insert shall cover not less than the bottom 180-degree arc of the pipe. Inserts shall be the same thickness as the insulation, and shall extend 2 inches on each end beyond the protection shield. When insulation inserts are required in accordance with the above, and the insulation thickness is less than 1 inch, wooden or cork dowels or blocks may be installed between the pipe and the shield to prevent the weight of the pipe from crushing the insulation, as an option to installing insulation inserts. The insulation jacket shall be continuous over the insulation insert. Horizontal piping larger than 2 inches and above 60 degrees F shall be equipped with a Type 39 protection saddle in accordance with MSS SP-69. Provide steel saddles for steel piping systems tack welded to piping. Provide copper saddles for copper piping systems brazed to pipe. Fill voids of the saddles with uniformly shaped strips if the specified piping insulation.

c. Vertical pipes shall be supported with either Type 8 or Type 42 riser clamps with the addition of two Type 40 protection shields in accordance with MSS SP-69 covering the 360-degree arc of the insulation. An insulation insert of cellular glass shall be installed between each shield and the pipe. The insert shall cover the 360-degree arc of the pipe. Inserts shall be the same thickness as the insulation, and shall extend 2 inches on each end beyond the protection shield. When insulation inserts are required in accordance with the above, and the insulation thickness is less than 1 inch, wooden or cork dowels or blocks may be installed between the pipe and the shield to prevent the hanger from crushing the insulation, as an option instead of installing insulation inserts. The insulation jacket shall be continuous over the cork dowel, or insulation insert. The vertical weight of the pipe shall be supported with hangers located in a horizontal section of the pipe. When additional riser clamps are indicated at intermediate locations in the riser; directly clamped to the pipe, penetrating the pipe insulation. They shall be insulated and the insulation jacket sealed as indicated herein for anchors in a similar service.

d. Inserts shall be covered with a jacket material of the same appearance and quality as the adjoining pipe insulation jacket, shall overlap the adjoining pipe jacket 1-1/2 inches, and shall be sealed as required for the pipe jacket. The jacket material used to cover inserts in flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall conform to ASTM C1136, Type 1, and is allowed to be of a different material than the adjoining insulation material.

3.2.1.4 Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Pipe Insulation

Flexible elastomeric cellular pipe insulation shall be tubular form for pipe sizes 6 inches and less. Grade 1, Type II sheet insulation used on pipes larger than 6 inches shall not be stretched around the pipe. On pipes larger than 12 inches, the insulation shall be adhered directly to the pipe on the lower 1/3 of the pipe. Seams shall be staggered when applying multiple layers of insulation. Sweat fittings shall be insulated with miter-cut pieces the same size as on adjacent piping. Screwed fittings shall be insulated with sleeved fitting covers fabricated from miter-cut pieces and shall be overlapped and sealed to the adjacent pipe insulation.



3.2.1.5 Pipes in high abuse areas.

In high abuse areas such as janitor closets, decontamination, and mechanical rooms, aluminum jackets shall be utilized. Pipe insulation to the 6 foot level shall be protected. All insulated piping exterior to the building shall be equipped with metal jackets.

3.2.1.6 Pipe Insulation Material and Thickness

TABLE 1Insulation Material For Piping (°F)

__________________________________________________________________________ Service Material Spec. Type Class Vapor Retarder Required ___________________________________________________________________________

Chilled Water Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 II 2 No (Supply & Return, Piping, 40°F nominal) ___________________________________________________________________________ Heating Hot Mineral Fiber ASTM C 547 I 1 No Water Supply & Return, (Max 250°F) ___________________________________________________________________________ Cold Domestic Mineral Fiber ASTM C 597 I 1 No Water Piping, w/Integral Makeup Water Wicking Piping ___________________________________________________________________________ Hot Domestic Mineral Fiber ASTM C 547 I 1 No Water Supply & Recirculating Piping (Max. 200°F) ___________________________________________________________________________ Refrigerant Flex Elast ASTM C 534 I No Suction Piping Cell'r (35°F nominal) Drinking Fountain Drain Piping ___________________________________________________________________________ Compressed Air Mineral ASTM C 547 I 1 No Discharge, Fiber Vac Pump Discharge (200 to 250°F) ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ Horizontal Roof Flex Elast ASTM C 534 I No Drain Leaders Cell'r (Including Underside of Roof Drain Fittings) ___________________________________________________________________________



TABLE 1Insulation Material For Piping (°F)

__________________________________________________________________________ Service Material Spec. Type Class Vapor Retarder Required ___________________________________________________________________________ A/C condensate, Flex Elast ASTM C 534 I No Ice Machine and Cell'r Drinking Fountain Drain, Including All Hub Drain Bodies, Located Inside Bldg. and Crawl Space___________________________________________________________________________

TABLE 2Piping Insulation Thickness (inch and °F)

___________________________________________________________________________ Tube And Pipe Size (Inches)

Service Material <1 1- <1.5 2- <4 6- <8 >or = to 8 ___________________________________________________________________________

Chilled Water Cellular Glass 1.5 2 2 2.5 3 (Supply & Return, Piping) (40°F Nominal) ___________________________________________________________________________ Heating Hot Water Mineral Fiber 1.5 1.5 2 2 2 Supply & Return, Heated Oil (Max. 250°F) ___________________________________________________________________________ Cold Domestic Mineral Fiber 1 1 1 1 1 Water Piping, w/internal Makeup Water, wicking Piping ___________________________________________________________________________ Hot Domestic Mineral Fiber 1 1 1.5 1.5 1.5 Water Supply and Recirculating Piping (Max 200°F) ___________________________________________________________________________ Refrigerant Flex Elas Cell'r 0.5 0.5 1 N/A N/A Suction Piping (35°F nominal) Drinking Fountain Drain Piping ___________________________________________________________________________ Compressed Air Mineral Fiber 1.5 1.5 2 2 2 Discharge, Vac Pump Discharge

(200 to 250oF ___________________________________________________________________________



TABLE 2Piping Insulation Thickness (inch and °F)

___________________________________________________________________________ Tube And Pipe Size (Inches)

Service Material <1 1- <1.5 2- <4 6- <8 >or = to 8 ___________________________________________________________________________

Exposed Lavatory Flex Elas Cell'r 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Drains, Exposed Domestic Water Piping & Drains to Areas for Handicap Personnel ___________________________________________________________________________ Horizontal Roof Flex Elas Cell'r 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 Drain Leaders (including Underside of Roof Drain Fitting)_____________________________________________________________________________ A/C condensate, Ice Machine and Drinking Fountain Drain Including All Hub Drain Bodies located Inside Building and Crawl Space Flex Elas Cell'r 0.75 0.75 1 N/A N/A______________________________________________________________________

3.2.2 Aboveground Cold Pipelines

The following cold pipelines for minus 30 to plus 60 degrees F, shall be insulated in accordance with Table 2 except those piping listed in subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3 as to be omitted. This includes but is not limited to the following:

a. Make-up water.

b. Horizontal and vertical portions of interior roof drains, including roof drain and fittings.

c. Refrigerant suction lines.

d. Chilled water.

e. Domestic cold water.

f. Air conditioner condensate drains, including hub drain body..

g. Ice machine and drinking fountain drains to the point indicated on the plumbing Contract Drawings.

h. Horizontal and vertical portions of floor drain piping serving air handling units and fan coil unit condensate drainage; including floor



drain body. Floor drains and associated piping which do not receive air conditioning condensate do not require insulation.

3.2.2.1 Insulation Material and Thickness

Insulation thickness for cold pipelines shall be determined using Table 2.

3.2.2.2 Factory or Field applied Jacket

Insulation shall be covered with a factory applied vapor retarder jacket/vapor barrier used with the specific insulation material. Insulation inside the building, to be protected with an aluminum jacket shall have the insulation and vapor retarder jacket installed as specified herein. The aluminum jacket shell be installed as specified for piping exposed to weather, except sealing of the laps of he aluminum jacket is not required. In high abuse areas such as janitor closets and mechanical rooms, aluminum jackets shall be provided for pipe insulation to the 6 ft level. Provide aluminum jackets on all pipe insulation exterior to the building.

3.2.2.3 Installing Insulation for Straight Runs Hot and Cold Pipe

a. Insulation shall be applied to the pipe with joints tightly butted. All butted joints and ends shall be sealed with joint sealant and sealed with a vapor retarder coating.

b. Longitudinal laps of the jacket material shall overlap not less than1-1/2 inches. Butt strips 3 inches wide shall be provided for circumferential joints.

c. Laps and butt strips shall be secured with adhesive and stapled on 4 inch centers if not factory self-sealing. If staples are used, they shall be sealed in accordance with item "e." below. Note that staples are not required with cellular glass systems.

d. Factory self-sealing lap systems may be used when the ambient temperature is between 40 and 120 degrees F during installation. The lap system shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Stapler shall be used only if specifically recommended by the manufacturer. Where gaps occur, the section shall be replaced or the gap repaired by applying adhesive under the lap and then stapling.

e. All Staples, including those used to repair factory self-seal lap systems, shall be coated with a vapor retarder/vapor barrier mastic coating. All seams, except those on factory self-seal systems shall be coated with vapor retarder/vapor barrier mastic coating.

f. Breaks and punctures in the jacket material shall be patched by wrapping a strip of jacket material around the pipe and securing it with adhesive, stapling, and coating with vapor retarder/vapor barrier mastic coating. The patch shall extend not less than 1-1/2 inches past the break.

g. At penetrations such as thermometers, the voids in the insulation shall be filled and sealed with vapor retarder/vapor barrier mastic coating.

h. Installation of flexible elastomeric cellular pipe insulation shall be by slitting the tubular sections and applying them onto the piping



or tubing. Alternately, whenever possible slide un-slit sections over the open ends of piping or tubing. All seams and butt joints shall be secured and sealed with field applied contact adhesive. Insulation shall be pushed on the pipe, never pulled. Stretching of insulation may result in open seams and joints. All edges shall be clean cut. Rough or jagged edges of the insulation shall not be permitted. Proper tools such as sharp knives shall be used. Grade 1, Type II sheet insulation when used on pipe larger than 6 inches shall not be stretched around the pipe. On pipes larger than 12 inches, adhere sheet insulation directly to the pipe on the lower 1/3 of the pipe. All joints in sheet insulation shall be adhered with field applied contact adhesive. Joints with open seams shall be re-fit, or sections of insulation replaced to fully butt seams.

3.2.2.4 Insulation for Fittings and Accessories

a. Pipe insulation shall be tightly butted to the insulation of the fittings and accessories. The butted joints and ends shall be sealed with joint sealant and sealed with a vapor retarder vapor barrier mastic coating.

b. Precut or preformed insulation shall be placed around all fittings and accessories and shall conform to MICA Plates except as modified herein: 5 for anchors; 10, 11, and 13 for fittings; 14 for valves; and 17 for flanges and unions. Insulation shall be the same insulation as the pipe insulation, including same density, thickness, and thermal conductivity. Where precut/preformed is unavailable, rigid preformed pipe insulation sections may be segmented into the shape required. Insulation of the same thickness and conductivity as the adjoining pipe insulation shall be used. If nesting size insulation is used, the insulation shall be overlapped 2 inches or one pipe diameter. Pipeline strainers, in line sizes 2 1/2 inches and larger, and roof drain bodies may be insulated with flexible elastomeric sheet material, cut and shaped to strainer body, with all butt and strainer contact surfaces coated with contact adhesive. Elbows insulated using segments shall conform to MICA Tables 12.20 "Mitered Insulation Elbow". Valves shall be insulated u to the underside of handwheels/actuators.

c. Upon completion of insulation installation on flanges, unions, valves, anchors, fittings and accessories, terminations, seams, joints and insulation not protected by factory vapor retarder jackets or PVC fitting covers shall be protected two coats of vapor retarder/vapor barrier mastic coating with a minimum total thickness of 1/16 inch, applied with glass tape embedded between coats. Cloth seams shall overlap 1 inch. The coating shall extend out onto the adjoining pipe insulation 2 inches. Fabricated insulation with a factory vapor retarder jacket shall be protected two coats of vapor retarder /vapor barrier mastic coating with a minimum thickness of 1/16 inch and with a 2 inch wide glass cloth embedded between coats. Where fitting insulation butts to pipe insulation, the joints shall be sealed with a vapor retarder/vapor barrier mastic coating and a 4 inch wide ASJ tape which matches the jacket of the pipe insulation.

d. Anchors attached directly to the pipe shall be insulated for a sufficient distance to prevent condensation but not less than 6 inches from the insulation surface.

e. Exterior surface of insulation shall include adhesive label identification showing the location of unions, strainers, and check



valves concealed under insulation.

3.2.2.5 Optional PVC Fitting Covers

At the option of the Contractor, for insulated piping without metal jacketing, premolded, one or two piece PVC fitting covers may be used. Factory precut or premolded insulation segments shall be used under the fitting covers for elbows. Insulation segments shall be the same insulation as the pipe insulation including same density, thickness, and thermal conductivity. Seams and joints below the covers shall be protected with vapor retarder/vapor barrier mastic coating with a minimum total thickness of 1/16 inch. The covers shall be secured by PVC vapor retarder tape or adhesive. Seams in the cover and laps to adjoining pipe insulation jacket, shall be sealed with vapor retarder tape to ensure that the assembly has a continuous vapor seal.

3.2.3 Aboveground Hot Pipelines

3.2.3.1 General Requirements

All hot pipe lines above 60 degrees F, except those piping listed in subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3 as to be omitted, shall be insulated in accordance with Table 2. This includes but is not limited to the following:

a. Domestic hot water supply & re-circulating system.

b. Compressed air discharge.

c. Hot water heating.

d. Compressed air discharge, dental hi and low vac discharge, medical vac and wage discharge.

Insulation shall be covered, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, with a factory applied Type I jacket or field applied aluminum where required.

3.2.3.2 Insulation for Fittings and Accessories

Pipe insulation shall be tightly butted to the insulation of the fittings and accessories. The butted joints and ends shall be sealed with joint sealant. Insulation shall be marked showing the location of unions, strainers, check valves and other components that would otherwise be hidden from view by the insulation. Valves shall be insulated up to the underside of handwheels/actuators. Threaded unions do not require insulation.

3.2.3.2.1 Precut or Preformed

Precut or preformed insulation shall be placed around all fittings and accessories. Insulation shall be the same insulation as the pipe insulation, including same density, thickness, and thermal conductivity.

3.2.3.2.2 Rigid Preformed

Where precut/preformed is unavailable, rigid preformed pipe insulation sections may be segmented into the shape required. Insulation of the same thickness and conductivity as the adjoining pipe insulation shall be used. If nesting size insulation is used, the insulation shall be overlapped 2



inches or one pipe diameter. Elbows insulated using segments shall conform to MICA Tables 12.20 "Mitered Insulation Elbow".

3.2.4 Piping Exposed to Weather

Piping exposed to weather shall be insulated and jacketed as specified for the applicable service inside the building. After this procedure, a laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket - less than 0.0000 permeability (greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed aluminum jacket or PVC jacket shall be applied. Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation exposed to weather shall be treated in accordance with paragraph INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION in PART 3.

3.2.4.1 Aluminum Jacket

The jacket for hot piping may be factory applied. The jacket shall overlap not less than 2 inches at longitudinal and circumferential joints and shall be secured with bands at not more than 12 inch centers. Longitudinal joints shall be overlapped down to shed water and located at 4 or 8 o'clock positions. Joints on piping 60 degrees F and below shall be sealed with caulking while overlapping to prevent moisture penetration. Where jacketing on piping 60 degrees F and below abuts an un-insulated surface, joints shall be caulked to prevent moisture penetration. Joints on piping above 60 degrees F shall be sealed with a vapor retarder/vapor barrier mastic coating; clear coat.

3.2.4.2 Insulation for Fittings

Flanges, unions, valves, fittings, and accessories shall be insulated and finished as specified for the applicable service. Two coats of breather emulsion type weatherproof mastic (impermeable to water, permeable to air) recommended by the insulation manufacturer shall be applied with glass tape embedded between coats. Cloth overlaps shall be not less than 1 inch and the adjoining aluminum jacket not less than 2 inches. Factory preformed aluminum jackets may be used in lieu of the above.

3.2.5 Below Ground Pipe Insulation

Below ground pipe shall be insulated with Cellular Glass insulation, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for application with thickness as determined from Table 2.

3.2.5.1 Type of Insulation

Below ground pipe shall be insulated with Cellular Glass insulation, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for application with thickness as determined from Table 2.

3.3 DUCT INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION

Provide insulation on ductwork, ductwork system components and accessories including sheet metal plenums, and louver blank-off plates at interior sides of louvers.

Install duct insulation systems in accordance with the approved MICA Insulation Stds plates as supplemented by the manufacturer's published installation instructions and as indicated in this Section.



Corner angles shall be installed on external corners of insulation on ductwork which is not concealed above ceilings, before covering with jacket.

3.3.1 Duct Insulation Thickness

Duct insulation thickness shall be in accordance with Table 4.

Table 4 - Minimum Duct Insulation (inches)

Cold Air Ducts (Supply and Return

2.0

Relief Ducts 1.5

Outside Air Intake Ducts/plenums

1.5

Blank off plates at louvers 1.5

Louver Plenums 1.5

3.3.2 Insulation and Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier for Cold Air Duct

Insulation and vapor retarder/vapor barrier shall be provided for the following cold air ducts and associated equipment.

a. Supply ducts.

b. Return air ducts.

c. Blank off plates at louvers.

d. Sheet metal plenums.

e. Outside air intake ducts.

Insulation for rectangular ducts shall be flexible type where concealed, minimum density 3/4 pcf, and rigid type where exposed, minimum density 3 pcf. Insulation for concealed round/oval ducts shall be flexible type, minimum density 3/4 pcf. Insulation for exposed round/oval ducts shall be rigid or semi-rigid board; scored and shaped to the fading, minimum density 3 pcf, formed or fabricated to a tight fit, edges beveled and joints tightly butted and staggered. Insulation for all exposed ducts shall be provided with either a white, paint-able, factory-applied Type I jacket or a field applied vapor retarder/vapor barrier jacket coating finish as specified, the total field applied dry film thickness shall be approximately1/16 inch. Insulation on all concealed duct shall be provided with a factory-applied Type I or II vapor retarder/vapor barrier jacket. Unless noted otherwise, duct insulation shall be continuous through sleeves and prepared openings except firewall and smokewall penetrations. Duct insulation terminating at fire dampers and fire/smoke dampers, shall be continuous over the damper collar and retaining angle of dampers, which are exposed to unconditioned air and which may be prone to condensate formation. Duct insulation and vapor retarder/vapor barrier shall cover the collar, neck, and any un-insulated surfaces of diffusers, registers and grills. Vapor retarder/vapor barrier materials shall be applied to form a complete unbroken vapor seal over the insulation. Note that glass cloth and mastic jacket sealing is required without exception. Tape sealing products without glass cloth and mastic top-coating are not acceptable. Ductwork located above ceilings and in crawl space is considered to be concealed. All other ductwork locations are considered to be exposed.



3.3.2.1 Installation on Concealed Duct

a. For rectangular, oval or round ducts, flexible insulation shall be attached by applying adhesive around the entire perimeter of the duct in 6 inch wide strips on 12 inch centers.

b. For rectangular and oval ducts, 24 inches and larger insulation shall be additionally secured to bottom of ducts by the use of mechanical fasteners. Fasteners shall be spaced on 16 inch centers and not more than 16 inches from duct corners.

c. For rectangular, oval and round ducts, mechanical fasteners shall be provided on sides of duct risers for all duct sizes. Fasteners shall be spaced on 16 inch centers and not more than 16 inches from duct corners.

d. Insulation shall be impaled on the mechanical fasteners (self stick pins) where used and shall be pressed thoroughly into the adhesive. Care shall be taken to ensure vapor retarder/vapor barrier jacket joints overlap 2 inches. The insulation shall not be compressed to a thickness less than that specified. Insulation shall be carried over standing seams and trapeze-type duct hangers.

e. Where mechanical fasteners are used, self-locking washers shall be installed and the pin trimmed and bent over.

f. Jacket overlaps shall be secured with staples and glass cloth to ensure a secure seal. Staples, glass cloth and seams shall be coated with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating.

g. Breaks in the jacket material shall be covered with patches of the same material as the vapor retarder jacket. The patches shall extend not less than 2 inches beyond the break or penetration in all directions and shall be secured with glass cloth and staples. Staples and glass cloth joints shall be sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating.

h. At jacket penetrations such as hangers, thermometers, and damper operating rods, voids in the insulation shall be filled and the penetration sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating.

i. Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed and flashed with a reinforced vapor retarder coating finish or glass cloth with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating. The coating shall overlap the adjoining insulation and un-insulated surface 2 inches. Pin puncture coatings shall extend 2 inches from the puncture in all directions.

j. Where insulation standoff brackets occur, insulation shall be extended under the bracket and the jacket terminated at the bracket.

3.3.2.2 Installation on Exposed Duct Work

a. For rectangular ducts, round/oval ducts rigid insulation shall be secured to the duct by mechanical fasteners on all four sides of the duct, spaced not more than 12 inches apart and not more than 3 inches from the edges of the insulation joints. A minimum of two rows of fasteners shall be provided for each side of duct 12 inches and larger. One row shall be provided for each side of duct less than 12 inches. Mechanical fasteners shall be as corrosion resistant as G90



coated galvanized steel, and shall indefinitely sustain a 50 lb tensile dead load test perpendicular to the duct wall.

b. Duct insulation shall be formed with minimum jacket seams. Rigid insulation shall be scored and shaped to fix duct radius. each piece of rigid insulation shall be fastened to the duct using mechanical fasteners. When the height of projections is less than the insulation thickness, insulation shall be brought up to standing seams, reinforcing, and other vertical projections and shall not be carried over. Vapor retarder/barrier jacket shall be continuous across seams, reinforcing, and projections. When height of projections is greater than the insulation thickness, insulation and jacket shall be carried over. Apply insulation with joints tightly butted. Neatly bevel insulation around name plates and access plates and doors.

c. Insulation shall be impaledon the fasteners; self-locking washers shall be installed and the pin trimmed and bent over.

d. Joints in the insulation jacket shall be sealed with a 4 inch wide strip of glass cloth. Glass cloth seams shall be sealed with an embedded coat of vapor retarder mastic; brushed smooth.

e. Breaks and ribs or standing seam penetrations in the jacket material shall be covered with a patch of the same material as the jacket. Patches shall extend not less than 2 inches beyond the break or penetration and shall be secured with glass cloth and mastic. Staples and joints shall be sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating.

f. At jacket penetrations such as hangers, thermometers, and damper operating rods, the voids in the insulation shall be filled and the penetrations sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating.

g. Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed and flashed with a reinforced vapor retarder coating finish. The coating shall overlap the adjoining insulation and un-insulated surface 2 inches. Pin puncture coatings shall extend 2 inches from the puncture in all directions.

h. Oval and round ducts, flexible type, shall be insulated with factory Type I jacket insulation with minimum density of 3/4 pcf, attached as in accordance with MICA standards. Provide mechanical fasteners noted above spaced not more than 12 inches apart and not more than 3 inches from the edges for all duct surfaces exceeding 24 inches.

3.3.3 Ducts Handling Air for Dual Purpose

For air handling ducts for dual purpose below and above 60 degrees F, ducts shall be insulated as specified for cold air duct.

3.3.4 Duct Test Holes

After duct systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced, breaks in the insulation and jacket shall be repaired in accordance with the applicable section of this specification for the type of duct insulation to be repaired.

3.3.5 Insulation of Intake and Discharge Air Plenums

Insulate entire plenum to the louver connection, including any or exhaust



discharge ducts from the point of the duct-installed motor actuated damper, back to the plenum.

3.4 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION

Install equipment insulation systems in accordance with the approved MICA Insulation Stds plates as supplemented by the manufacturer's published installation instructions.

3.4.1 General

Removable insulation sections shall be provided to cover parts of equipment that must be opened periodically for maintenance including vessel covers, fasteners, flanges and accessories. Equipment insulation shall be omitted on the following:

a. Hand-holes.

b. Cleanouts.

c. ASME stamps.

d. Manufacturer's nameplates.

e. Duct Test/Balance Test Holes.

3.4.2 Insulation for Cold Equipment

Cold equipment below 60 degrees F: Insulation shall be furnished on equipment handling media below 60 degrees F including the following:

a. Pumps.

a. Floor drain and hub drain bodies (serving air handling unit and fan coil unit condensate).

b. Water chiller parts subject to condensation that are not factory insulated.

c. Domestic pressure booster system.

d. Water softeners.

e. Chilled water pumps.

f. Backflow preventers and water meters.

g. Roof drain bodies.

h. Air handling equipment parts that are not factory insulated.

i. Expansion tanks.

j. Chilled water air separators.

k. Chilled water filters.



3.4.2.1 Insulation Type

Insulation shall be suitable for the temperature encountered. Material and thicknesses shall be as shown in Table 5:

Legend

CG: Cellular GlassFC: Flexible Elastomeric Cellular

TABLE 5Insulation Thickness for Cold Equipment (Inches and °F)

Equipment handling media Material Thicknessat indicated temperature:_________________________________________________________________________

35 to 60 CG 1.5 inchesdegrees F(except water chillers) FC 1.0 inches __ 1 to 34degrees F FC 1.5 inches CG 3.0 inches

_________________________________________________________________________Minus 30 to 0degrees F FC 1.75 inches CG 3.5 inches_________________________________________________________________________

Water Chillers FC 2.0 inches_________________________________________________________________________

3.4.2.2 Pump Insulation

a. Insulate pumps with cellular glass material by forming a box around the pump housing. The box shall be constructed by forming the bottom and sides using joints that do not leave raw ends of insulation exposed. All joints shall be made with all contact surfaces fully covered with insulation adhesive to form a vapor-tight seal. Joints between top cover and sides shall fit tightly forming a female shiplap joint on the side pieces and a male joint on the top cover, thus making the top cover removable, including separate jacketing on the removable section.

b. Exposed insulation corners shall be protected with corner angles.

c. Upon completion of installation of the insulation, including removable sections, two coats of vapor retarder coating shall be applied with a layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats. The total dry thickness of the finish shall be 1/16 inch. A parting line shall be provided between the box and the removable sections allowing the removable sections to be removed without disturbing the insulation coating. Caulking shall be applied to parting line, between equipment and removable section insulation, and at all penetrations.



3.4.2.3 Other Equipment

a. Insulation shall be formed or fabricated to fit the equipment. To ensure a tight fit on round equipment, edges shall be beveled and joints shall be tightly butted and staggered.

b. Insulation shall be secured in place with bands or wires at intervals as recommended by the manufacturer but not more than 12 inch centers except flexible elastomeric cellular which shall be adhered with contact adhesive. Insulation corners shall be protected under wires and bands with suitable corner angles.

c. Insulation on mechanically accessible flanged openings on equipment shall be removable. Removable section joints shall be fabricated using a male-female shiplap type joint. The entire surface of the removable section shall be finished by applying two coats of vapor retarder coating with a layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats. The total dry thickness of the finish shall be 1/16 inch.

d. Exposed insulation corners shall be protected with corner angles.

e. Insulation on equipment with ribs shall be applied over 6 by 6 inches by 12 gauge welded wire fabric which has been cinched in place, or if approved by the Contracting Officer, spot welded to the equipment over the ribs. Insulation shall be secured to the fabric with J-hooks and 2 by 2 inches washers or shall be securely banded or wired in place on 12 inch centers.

3.4.2.4 Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier

For cellular glass insulation,upon completion of installation of insulation, penetrations shall be caulked. Two coats of vapor retarder coating or vapor barrier jacket shall be applied over insulation, including removable sections, with a layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats. The total dry thickness of the finish shall be 1/16 inch. Caulking shall be applied to parting line between equipment and removable section insulation.

3.4.3 Equipment Handling Dual Temperature Media

Below and above 60 degrees F: equipment handling dual temperature media shall be insulated as specified for cold equipment.




SECTION 23 08 00.00 50

COMMISSIONING OF HVAC01/14

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



LEED (V3/2009) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design(tm) Green Building Rating System for New Construction (LEED-NC), Version 2009

1.2 SUMMARY




1.3 DEFINITIONS



a. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in this Division 23 section is part of the construction process and shall support delivery of project performance in accordance with the Contract Documents and in compliance with project credits pursued under United States Green Building Council's (USGBC) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED)TM rating program. . Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of User's Operation and Maintenance personnel, is required in cooperation with the Contracting Officer and the Commissioning Agent.

b. Refer to Section 01 91 13.00 50 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS, for description of plumbing and mechanical (HVAC) systems to be commissioned.

SECTION 23 08 00.00 50 Page 1


1.5 SUBMITTALS

a. The commissioning process requires review of selected Submittals. The Commissioning Agent will provide a list of submittals that will be reviewed by the Commissioning Agent. This list will be reviewed and approved by the Contracting Officer prior to forwarding to the Contractor. Refer to Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES for further details.



PART 3 EXECUTION


The Contractor shall complete Systems Readiness Checklists to verify systems, sub-systems, and equipment installation is complete and systems are ready for Systems Functional Testing. The Commissioning Agent will prepare Systems Readiness Checklists to be used to document equipment installation. The Contractor shall complete the checklists. Completed checklists shall be submitted to Contracting Officer and to the Commissioning Agent for review. The Commissioning Agent may spot-check a sample of completed checklists. If the Commissioning Agent determines that the information provided on the checklist is not accurate, the Commissioning Agent will return the marked-up checklist to the Contractor for correction and re-submission. If the Commissioning Agent determines that a significant number of completed checklists for similar equipment are not accurate, the Commissioning Agent will select a broader sample of checklists for review. If the Commissioning Agent determines that a significant number of the broader sample of checklists is also inaccurate, all the checklists for the type of equipment will be returned to the Contractor for correction and re-submission. Refer to Section 01 91 13.00 50 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for submittal requirements for System Readiness Checklists, Equipment Startup Reports, and other commissioning documents.


Contractor tests as required by other sections of Division 23 shall be scheduled and documented. The Commissioning Agent will witness selected Contractor tests. Contractor tests shall be completed prior to scheduling Systems Functional Performance Testing.


The Commissioning Process includes Systems Functional Performance Testing that is intended to test systems functional performance under steady state conditions, to test system reaction to changes in operating conditions, and to test system performance under emergency conditions. The Commissioning Agent will prepare detailed Systems Functional Performance Test procedures for review and approval by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall review and comment on the tests prior to approval. The Contractor shall provide the required labor, materials, and test equipment identified in the test procedure to perform the tests. The Commissioning Agent will direct

SECTION 23 08 00.00 50 Page 2


and document the testing. The Contractor shall sign the test reports to verify tests were performed. See Section 01 91 13.00 50 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS, for additional details.


Training of User's operation and maintenance personnel is required in cooperation with the Contracting Officer and Commissioning Agent. Provide competent, factory authorized personnel to provide instruction to operation and maintenance personnel concerning the location, operation, and troubleshooting of the installed systems. The instruction shall be scheduled in coordination with Contracting Officer after submission and approval of formal training plans. Refer to Section 01 91 13.00 50 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS and Division 23 Sections for additional Contractor training requirements.


SECTION 23 08 00.00 50 Page 3


SECTION 23 09 23.13 20

BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC08/09

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.


AMCA 500-D (2012) Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating


ASHRAE 135 (2012; Errata 2013) BACnet—A Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and Control Networks

ARCNET TRADE ASSOCIATION (ATA)

ATA 878.1 (1999) Local Area Network: Token Bus




ASME B40.100 (2005; R 2010) Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments


ASTM A126 (2004; R 2009) Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings


CONSUMER ELECTRONICS ASSOCIATION (CEA)

CEA-709.1-C (2010) Control Network Protocol Specification

INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)

IEEE C62.41.1 (2002; R 2008) Guide on the Surges

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 1


Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits

IEEE C62.41.2 (2002) Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits

IEEE C62.45 (2002; R 2008) Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage (1000v and less)AC Power Circuits


ISO 8802-3 (2000) Information Technology - Telecommunications and Information Exchange Between Systems - Local and Metropolitan Area Networks - Specific Requirements - Part 3: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD)Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications


NEMA ST 1 (1988; R 1994; R 1997) Specialty Transformers (Except General Purpose Type)





SMACNA 1966 (2005) HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible, 3rd Edition


UL 1449 (2006; Reprint Jul 2012) Surge Protective Devices

UL 508 (1999; Reprint Oct 2013) Industrial Control Equipment

UL 508A (2001; Reprint Feb 2010) Industrial Control Panels

UL 916 (2007; Reprint Jul 2013) Standard for Energy Management Equipment

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 2


1.2 DEFINITIONS

1.2.1 ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135

ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135: BACnet - A Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and Control Networks, referred to as "BACnet". ASHRAE developed BACnet to provide a method for diverse building automation devices to communicate and share data over a network.

1.2.2 ARCNET

ATA 878.1 - Attached Resource Computer Network. ARCNET is a deterministic LAN technology; meaning it's possible to determine the maximum delay before a device is able to transmit a message.

1.2.3 BACnet

Building Automation and Control Network; the common name for the communication standard ASHRAE 135. The standard defines methods and protocol for cooperating building automation devices to communicate over a variety of LAN technologies.

1.2.4 BACnet/IP

An extension of BACnet, Annex J, defines this mechanism using a reserved UDP socket to transmit BACnet messages over IP networks. A BACnet/IP network is a collection of one or more IP subnetworks that share the same BACnet network number. See also "BACnet Broadcast Management Device".

1.2.5 BACnet Internetwork

Two or more BACnet networks, possibly using different LAN technologies, connected with routers. In a BACnet internetwork, there exists only one message path between devices.

1.2.6 BACnet Network

One or more BACnet segments that have the same network address and are interconnected by bridges at the physical and data link layers.

1.2.7 BACnet Segment

One or more physical segments of BACnet devices on a BACnet network, connected at the physical layer by repeaters.

1.2.8 BBMD

BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD). A communications device, typically combined with a BACnet router. A BBMD forwards BACnet broadcast messages to BACnet/IP devices and other BBMDs connected to the same BACnet/IP network. Every IP subnetwork that is part of a BACnet/IP network must have only one BBMD. See also "BACnet/IP".

1.2.9 BAS

Building Automation Systems, including DDC (Direct Digital Controls) used for facility automation and energy management.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 3


1.2.10 BAS Manufacturer

The regional or local user responsible for managing all aspects of the BAS operation, including: network connections, workstation management, submittal review, technical support, control parameters, and daily operation. The BAS manufacturers for this project is Johnson Controls.

1.2.11 BIBBs

BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks. A collection of BACnet services used to describe supported tasks. BIBBs are often described in terms of "A" (client) and "B" (server) devices. The “A” device uses data provided by the "B" device, or requests an action from the “B” device.

1.2.12 BI

BACnet International, formerly two organizations: the BACnet Manufacturers Association (BMA) and the BACnet Interest Group - North America (BIG-NA).

1.2.13 BI/BTL

BACnet International/BACnet Testing Laboratories (Formerly BMA/BTL). The organization responsible for testing products for compliance with the BACnet standard, operated under the direction of BACnet International.

1.2.14 Bridge

Network hardware that connects two or more network (or BACnet internetwork) segments at the physical and data link layers. A bridge may also filter messages.

1.2.15 Broadcast

A message sent to all devices on a network segment.

1.2.16 Device

Any control system component, usually a digital controller, that contains a BACnet Device Object and uses BACnet to communicate with other devices. See also "Digital Controller".

1.2.17 Device Object

Every BACnet device requires one Device Object, whose properties represent the network visible properties of that device. Every Device Object requires a unique Object Identifier number on the BACnet internetwork. This number is often referred to as the device instance.

1.2.18 Device Profile

A collection of BIBBs determining minimum BACnet capabilities of a device, defined in ASHRAE Standard 135-2004, Annex L. Standard device profiles include BACnet Operator Workstations (B-OWS), BACnet Building Controllers (B-BC), BACnet Advanced Application Controllers (B-AAC), BACnet Application Specific Controllers (B-ASC), BACnet Smart Actuator (B-SA), andBACnet Smart Sensor (B-SS). Each device used in new construction is required to have a PICS statement listing BIBBs supported.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 4


1.2.19 Digital Controller

An electronic controller, usually with internal programming logic and digital and analog input/output capability, which performs control functions. In most cases, synonymous with a BACnet device described in this specification. See also "Device".

1.2.20 Direct Digital Control (DDC)

Digital controllers performing control logic. Usually the controller directly senses physical values, makes control decisions with internal programs, and outputs control signals to directly operate switches, valves, dampers, and motor controllers.

1.2.21 DDC System

A network of digital controllers, communication architecture, and user interfaces. A DDC system may include programming, sensors, actuators, switches, relays, factory controls, operator workstations, and various other devices, components, and attributes.

1.2.22 Ethernet

A family of local-area-network technologies providing high-speed networking features over various media.

1.2.23 Firmware

Software programmed into read only memory (ROM), flash memory, electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM), or erasable programmable read only memory (EPROM) chips.

1.2.24 Gateway

Communication hardware connecting two or more different protocols, similar to human language translators. The Gateway translates one protocol into equivalent concepts for the other protocol. In BACnet applications, a gateway has BACnet on one side and non-BACnet (usually proprietary) protocols on the other side.

1.2.25 Half Router

A device that participates as one partner in a BACnet point-to-point (PTP) connection. Two half-routers in an active PTP connection combine to form a single router.

1.2.26 Hub

A common connection point for devices on a network.

1.2.27 Internet Protocol (IP, TCP/IP, UDP/IP)

A communication method, the most common use is the World Wide Web. At the lowest level, it is based on Internet Protocol (IP), a method for conveying and routing packets of information over various LAN media. Two common protocols using IP are User Datagram Protocol (UDP) and Transmission Control Protocol (TCP). UDP conveys information to well-known "sockets" without confirmation of receipt. TCP establishes "sessions", which have end-to-end confirmation and guaranteed sequence of delivery.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 5


1.2.28 Input/Output (I/O)

Physical inputs and outputs to and from a device, although the term sometimes describes software, or "virtual" I/O. See also "Points".

1.2.29 I/O Expansion Unit

An I/O expansion unit provides additional point capacity to a digital controller.

1.2.30 IP subnet

Internet protocol (IP) identifies individual devices with a 32-bit number divided into four groups from 0 to 255. Devices are often grouped and share some portion of this number. For example, one device has IP address 209.185.47.68 and another device has IP address 209.185.47.82. These two devices share Class C subnet 209.185.47.00

1.2.31 Local-Area Network (LAN)

A communication network that spans a limited geographic area and uses the same basic communication technology throughout.

1.2.32 LonTalk

CEA-709.1-C. A communication protocol developed by Echelon Corp. LonTalk is an optional physical and data link layer for BACnet.

1.2.33 MAC Address

Media Access Control address. The physical node address that identifies a device on a Local Area Network.

1.2.34 Master-Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP)

ISO 8802-3. One of the LAN options for BACnet. MSTP uses twisted-pair wiring for relatively low speed and low cost communication (up to 4,000 ft at 76.8K bps).

1.2.35 Native BACnet Device

A device that uses BACnet as its primary, if not only, method of communication with other BACnet devices without intermediary gateways. A system that uses native BACnet devices at all levels is a native BACnet system.

1.2.36 Network

Communication technology for data communications. BACnet approved network types are BACnet over Internet Protocol (IP), Point to Point (PTP) Ethernet, ARCNET, MS/TP, and LonTalk®.

1.2.37 Network Number

A site-specific number assigned to each network segment to identify for routing. This network number must be unique throughout the BACnet internetwork.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 6


1.2.38 Object

The concept of organizing BACnet information into standard components with various associated properties. Examples include analog input objects and binary output objects.

1.2.39 Object Identifier

An object property used to identify the object, including object type and instance. Object Identifiers must be unique within a device.

1.2.40 Object Properties

Attributes of an object. Examples include present value and high limit properties of an analog input object. Properties are defined in ASHRAE 135; some are optional and some are required. Objects are controlled by reading from and writing to object properties.

1.2.41 Peer-to-Peer

Peer-to-peer refers to devices where any device can initiate and respond to communication with other devices.

1.2.42 Performance Verification Test (PVT)

The procedure for determining if the installed BAS meets design criteria prior to final acceptance. The PVT is performed after installation, testing, and balancing of mechanical systems. Typically the PVT is performed by the Contractor in the presence of the Government.

1.2.43 PID

Proportional, integral, and derivative control; three parameters used to control modulating equipment to maintain a setpoint. Derivative control is often not required for HVAC systems (leaving "PI" control).

1.2.44 PICS

Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS), describing the BACnet capabilities of a device. See BACnet, Annex A for the standard format and content of a PICS statement.

1.2.45 Points

Physical and virtual inputs and outputs. See also "Input/Output".

1.2.46 PTP

Point-to-Point protocol connects individual BACnet devices or networks using serial connections like modem-to-modem links.

1.2.47 Repeater

A network component that connects two or more physical segments at the physical layer.

1.2.48 Router

A BACnet router is a component that joins together two or more networks

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 7


using different LAN technologies. Examples include joining a BACnet Ethernet LAN to a BACnet MS/TP LAN.

1.2.49 Stand-Alone Control

Refers to devices performing equipment-specific and small system control without communication to other devices or computers for physical I/O, excluding outside air and other common shared conditions. Devices are located near controlled equipment, with physical input and output points limited to 64 or less per device, except for complex individual equipment or systems. Failure of any single device will not cause other network devices to fail. BACnet "Smart" actuators (B-SA profile) and sensors (B-SS profile) communicating on a network with a parent device are exempt from stand-alone requirements.

1.3 SUBCONTRACTOR SPECIAL REQUIREMENTSPerform all work in this section in accordance with the paragraph entitled "Subcontractor Special Requirements" in Section 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS. The paragraph specifies that all contract requirements of this section shall be accomplished directly by a first tier subcontractor. No work required shall be accomplished by a second tier subcontractor.

1.3.1 Criteria

The direct digital control subcontractor shall be a primary equipment manufacturer-owned branch office that is regularly engaged in the engineering, programming, installation and service of total integrated BAS of similar size, scope and complexity to the system indicated in this Contract. Distributors, manufacturer's representatives and wholesalers will not be acceptable.

1.3.2 Single Source Responsibility of Subcontractor

The controls subcontractor shall be responsible for the complete design, installation, and participating in the commissioning of the system. The controls subcontractor shall be in the business of design, installation and service of such building automation control systems similar in size and complexity.

1.3.3 Equipment and Materials

Equipment and materials shall be cataloged products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production and installation of HVAC control systems. Products shall be manufacturer's latest standard design and have been tested and proven in actual use.

1.3.4 Previous Experience

The controls subcontractor shall provide a list of no less than five similar projects which have building control systems as specified in this Section. These projects must be on-line and successfully functional such that the Department of Defense representative would observe the control systems in full operation. The controls subcontractor shall have (minimum of three years) experience in design and installation of building automation systems similar in performance to those specified in this Section. Provide evidence of experience by submitting resumes of the project manager, the local branch manager, project engineer, the application engineering staff, and the electronic technicians who would be involved with the supervision, the engineering, and the installation of the

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 8


control systems. Training and experience of these personnel shall not be less than three years. Failure to disclose this information will be a ground for disqualification of the supplier.

1.3.5 Local Representation

The controls subcontractor shall have in-place facility within 50 miles with technical staff, spare parts inventory, and necessary test and diagnostic equipment to support the control systems for this project.

1.3.6 Project Manager

Provide a competent and experienced Project Manager employed by the Controls Contractor. The Project Manager shall be supported as necessary by other Contractor employees in order to provide professional engineering, technical and management service for the work. The Project Manager shall attend scheduled Project Meetings as required and shall be empowered to make technical, scheduling and related decisions on behalf of the subcontractor.

1.4 BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC DESCRIPTION

a. Remove existing and provide new BACnet DDC systems including associated equipment and accessories. All new devices are accessible using a Web browser interface and communicate using ASHRAE 135 BACnet communications without the use of gateways, unless gateways are shown on the design drawings and specifically requested by the Government. Where gateways are allowed, they must support ASHRAE 135, including all object properties and read-write services shown on Government approved interoperability schedules. Manufacturer's products, including design, materials, fabrication, assembly, inspection, and testing shall be in accordance with ASHRAE 135, ASME B31.1, and NFPA 70, except where indicated otherwise.

1.4.1 Design Requirements

1.4.1.1 Control System Drawings Title Sheet

Provide a title sheet for the control system drawing set. Include the project title, project location, contract number, the controls contractor preparing the drawings, an index of the control drawings in the set, and a legend of the symbols and abbreviations used throughout the control system drawings.

1.4.1.2 List of I/O Points

Also known as a Point Schedule, provide for each input and output point physically connected to a digital controller: point name, point description, point type (Analog Output (AO), Analog Input (AI), Binary Output (BO), Binary Input (BI)), point sensor range, point actuator range, point address, BACnet object, associated BIBBS (where applicable), and point connection terminal number. Provide individual points list for each item of central station equipment such as the air handling unit and water chiller system. Typical schedules are acceptable for terminal equipment such as air values, except where terminal units are providing control beyond a typical application.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 9


1.4.1.3 Control System Components List

Provide a complete list of control system components proposed for installation on this project. Include for each controller and device: control system schematic name, control system schematic designation, device description, manufacturer, and manufacturer part number. For sensors, include point name, sensor range, and operating limits. For valves, include body style, Cv, design flow rate, pressure drop, valve characteristic (linear or equal percentage), and pipe connection size. For actuators, include point name, spring or non-spring return, modulating or two-position action, normal (power fail) position, nominal control signal operating range (0-10 volts DC or 4-20 milliamps), and operating limits.

1.4.1.4 Control System Schematics

Provide control system schematics. Typical schematics for multiple identical equipment are allowed unless otherwise requested in design or contract criteria. Include the following:

a. Location of each input and output device

b. Flow diagram for each piece of HVAC equipment

c. Name or symbol for each control system component, such as V-1 for a valve

d. Setpoints, with differential or proportional band values

e. Written sequence of operation for the HVAC equipment

f. Valve and Damper Schedules, with normal (power fail) position

1.4.1.5 HVAC Equipment Electrical Ladder Diagrams

Provide HVAC equipment electrical ladder diagrams. Indicate required electrical interlocks.

1.4.1.6 Component Wiring Diagrams

Provide a wiring diagram for each type of input device and output device. Indicate how each device is wired and powered; showing typical connections at the digital controller and power supply. Show for all field connected devices such as control relays, motor starters, actuators, sensors, and transmitters.

1.4.1.7 Terminal Strip Diagrams

Provide a diagram of each terminal strip. Indicate the terminal strip location, termination numbers, and associated point names.

1.4.1.8 BACnet Communication Architecture Schematic

Provide a schematic showing the project's entire BACnet communication network, including addressing used for LANs, LAN devices including routers and bridges, gateways, controllers, workstations, and field interface devices. If applicable, show connection to existing networks.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 10


1.5 SUBMITTALS

Submit detailed and annotated manufacturer's data, drawings, and specification sheets for each item listed, that clearly show compliance with the project specifications.

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. Submit the following according to 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Include the following in the project's control system drawing set:

Control system drawings title sheet; G

List of I/O Points; G

Control System Components List; G

Control system schematics; G

HVAC Equipment Electrical Ladder diagrams; G

Component wiring diagrams; G

Terminal strip diagrams; G

BACnet communication architecture schematic; G

SD-03 Product Data

Direct Digital Controllers; G

Include BACnet PICS for each controller/device type, including smart sensors (B-SS) and smart actuators (B-SA).

BACnet Gateways; G

Include BACnet and workstation display information; bi-directional communication ability; compliance with interoperability schedule; expansion capacity; handling of alarms, events, scheduling and trend data; and single device capability (not depending on multiple devices for exchanging information from either side of the gateway).

BACnet Protocol Analyzer; G

Include capability to store and report data traffic on BACnet networks, measure bandwidth usage, filter information, and identify BACnet devices.

DDC Software; G

BACnet Operator Workstation; G

BACnet Operator Workstation DDC Software; G

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 11


Include BACnet PICS for Operator Workstation software.

Notebook Computer; G

Sensors and Input Hardware; G

Output Hardware; G

Surge and transient protection; G

Indicators; G

Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS); G

Submit manufacturers' specification sheets for each sensor and input hardware, output hardware, digital controller, workstation computer, and system accessory to show compliance with the project specification. For each type of equipment, highlight each compliance item and reference each item to the relevant specification paragraph number. Submit sufficient manufacturer's information to allow verification of compliance by the reviewing authority.

SD-05 Design Data

Performance Verification Testing Plan; G

Pre-Performance Verification Testing Checklist; G

Performance Verification Test Procedures; G

Six copies of the HVAC Control System Performance Verification Test Procedures, in booklet form and indexed, 60 days before the Contractor's scheduled test dates. The performance verification test procedures shall refer to the devices by their unique identifiers as shown, shall explain, step-by-step, the actions and expected results that will demonstrate that the HVAC control system performs in accordance with the sequences of operation, and other contract documents. An HVAC control system performance verification test equipment list shall be included that lists the equipment to be used during performance verification testing. The list shall include manufacturer name, model number, equipment function, the date of the latest calibration, and the results of the latest calibration.

SD-06 Test Reports

Performance Verification Testing Report; G

SD-07 Certificates

Contractor's Qualifications; G

SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports

Pre-PVT Checklist; G


SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 12


Comply with requirements for data packages in Section 01 78 23OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA, except as supplemented and modified in this specification.

BACnet Direct Digital Control Systems, Data Package 4; G

Controls System Operators Manuals, Data Package 4; G


Training documentation; G


1.6.1 Standard Products

Provide material and equipment that are standard manufacturer's products currently in production and supported by a local service organization.

1.6.2 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during installation according to manufacturer's recommendations, and as approved by the Contracting Officer. Replace damaged or defective items.

1.6.3 Operating Environment

Protect components from humidity and temperature variation, dust, and contaminants. If components are stored before installation, keep them within the manufacturer's limits.

1.6.4 Finish of New Equipment

New equipment finishing shall be factory provided. Manufacturer's standard factory finishing shall be proven to withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray fog test. Equipment located outdoors shall be proven to withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test.

Salt-spray fog test shall be according to ASTM B117, with acceptance criteria as follows: immediately after completion of the test, the finish shall show no signs of degradation or loss of adhesion beyond 0.125 inch on either side of the scratch mark.


The contractor shall verify all dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing work.

1.6.6 Contractor's Qualifications

Submit documentation certifying the controls Contractor performing the work has completed at least three DDC systems installations of a similar design to this project, and programmed similar sequences of operation for at least two years.


The advisory provisions in ASME B31.1 and NFPA 70 are mandatory. Substitute "shall" for "should" wherever it appears and interpret all

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 13


references to the "authority having jurisdiction" and "owner" to mean the Contracting Officer.

1.6.8 Project Sequence

The control system work for this project shall proceed in the following order:

a. Submit and receive approval on the Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Certificates specified under the paragraph entitled "SUBMITTALS."

b. Perform the control system installation work, including all field check-outs and tuning.

c. Provide support to TAB personnel as specified under the paragraph "TEST AND BALANCE SUPPORT."

d. Submit and receive approval of the Controls System Operators Manual specified under the paragraph "CONTROLS SYSTEM OPERATORS MANUALS."

e. Submit and receive approval of the Performance Verification Testing Plan and the Pre-PVT Checklist specified under the paragraph "PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION TESTING."

f. Perform the Performance Verification Testing.

g. Submit and receive approval on the PVT Report.

h. Submit and receive approval on the Training Documentation specified under the paragraph "INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL". Submit at least 30 days before training.

i. Deliver the final Controls System Operators Manuals.

j. Conduct the Phase I Training.

k. Conduct the Phase II Training.

l. Submit and receive approval of Closeout Submittals.


All products shall be rated for continuous operation under the following conditions:

a. Pressure: Pressure conditions normally encountered in the installed location.

b. Vibration: Vibration conditions normally encountered in the installed location.

c. Temperature:

1. Products installed indoors: Ambient temperatures in the range of 32 to 112 degrees F and temperature conditions outside this range normally encountered at the installed location.

2. Products installed outdoors or in unconditioned indoor spaces: Ambient temperatures in the range of -35 to plus 151 degrees F and

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 14


temperature conditions outside this range normally encountered at the installed location.

d. Humidity: 10 to 95 percent relative humidity, noncondensing and humidity conditions outside this range normally encountered at the installed location.

1.8 MAINTENANCE

1.8.1 General

The HVAC control System Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Instructions shall include:

a. "Manufacturer Data Package 3" as specified in Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA for each piece of control equipment.

b. HVAC control system sequences of operation formatted as submitted; corrected to field installed conditions.

c. Procedures for the HVAC system start-up, operation and shut-down including the manufacturer's supplied procedures for each piece of equipment, and procedures for the overall HVAC system.

d. As-built HVAC control system detail drawings formatted as specified.

e. Printouts of configuration settings for all devices.

f. Routine maintenance checklist. The routine maintenance checklist shall be arranged in a columnar format. The first column shall list all installed devices, the second column shall state the maintenance activity or state no maintenance required, the third column shall state the frequency of the maintenance activity, and the fourth column for additional comments or reference.

g. Qualified service organization list.

h. Start-Up and Start-Up Testing Report.

i. Performance Verification Test (PVT) Procedures and Report.

1.8.2 Maintenance Service

Provide services, materials and equipment as necessary to maintain the entire system in an operational state as specified for a period of one year after successful completion and acceptance of the Performance Verification Test. Minimize impacts on facility operations.

1.8.2.1 Description of Work

The adjustment and repair of the system shall include the manufacturer's required sensor and actuator (including transducer) calibration, span and range adjustment.

1.8.2.2 Personnel

Use qualified service personnel to accomplish work promptly and satisfactorily. Advise the Government in writing of the name of the designated service representative, and of any changes in personnel.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 15


1.8.2.3 Scheduled Inspections

Perform two inspections at six-month intervals, and all work required shall be performed. Inspections shall be scheduled in July and January. These inspections shall include:

a. Visual checks and operational tests of equipment.

b. Fan, pump, chiller, boiler system, air terminal valve, room pressure monitor, checks and air handling unit filter changes including all control system equipment.

c. Clean control system equipment including interior and exterior surfaces.

d. Check and calibrate each field device. Check and calibrate 50 percent of the total analog inputs and outputs during the first inspection. Check and calibrate the remaining 50 percent of the analog inputs and outputs during the second major inspection. Certify analog test instrumentation accuracy to be twice the specified accuracy of the device being calibrated. Randomly check at least 25 percent of all digital inputs and outputs for proper operation during the first inspection. Randomly check at least 25 percent of the remaining digital inputs and outputs during the second inspection.

e. Run system software diagnostics and correct diagnosed problems.

f. Resolve any previous outstanding problems.

1.8.2.4 Scheduled Work

This work shall be performed during regular working hours, Monday through Friday, excluding Federal holidays.

1.8.2.5 Emergency Service

The Government will initiate service calls when the system is not functioning properly. Qualified personnel in the direct employ of the control system manufacturer shall be available to provide service to the system. A telephone number where the service supervisor can be reached at all times shall be provided. Service personnel shall be at the site within 24 hours after receiving a request for service. The control system shall be restored to proper operating condition as required in accordance with Section 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.

1.8.2.6 Operation

Scheduled adjustments and repairs shall include verification of the control system operation as demonstrated by the applicable tests of the performance verification test.

1.8.2.7 Records and Logs

Keep dated records and logs of each task, with cumulative records for each major component, and for the complete system chronologically. A continuous log shall be maintained for all devices. The log shall contain initial analog span and zero calibration values and digital points. Complete logs shall be kept and shall be available for inspection onsite, demonstrating that planned and systematic adjustments and repairs have been accomplished

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 16


for the control system.

1.8.2.8 Work Requests

Record each service call request as received and include its location, date and time the call was received, nature of trouble, names of the service personnel assigned to the task, instructions describing what has to be done, the amount and nature of the materials to be used, the time and date work started, and the time and date of completion. Submit a record of the work performed within 5 days after work is accomplished.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DDC SYSTEM

a. Provide a networked DDC system for stand-alone control in compliance with the latest revision of the ASHRAE 135 BACnet standard. Include all programming, objects, and services required to meet the sequence of control. Provide BACnet communications between the DDC system and devices furnished with HVAC equipment and plant equipment including boilers, chillers, and variable frequency drives.

b. Provide an operator workstation with complete interface software capable of programming, configuring, and monitoring the digital controllers. The workstation shall be located where indicated on the Contract Drawings.

2.1.1 Direct Digital Controllers

Direct digital controllers shall be UL 916 rated.

2.1.1.1 I/O Point Limitation

The total number of I/O hardware points used by a single stand-alone digital controller, including I/O expansion units, shall not exceed 64, except for complex individual equipment or systems. Place I/O expansion units in the same cabinet as the digital controller.

2.1.1.2 Environmental Limits

Controllers shall be suitable for, or placed in protective enclosures suitable for the environment (temperature, humidity, dust, and vibration) where they are located.

2.1.1.3 Stand-Alone Control

Provide stand-alone digital controllers.

2.1.1.4 Internal Clock

Provide internal clocks for all BACnet Building Controllers (B-BC) and BACnet Advanced Application Controllers (B-AAC) using BACnet time synchronization services. Automatically synchronize system clocks daily from an operator-designated controller. The system shall automatically adjust for daylight saving time.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 17


2.1.1.5 Memory

Provide sufficient memory for each controller to support the required control, communication, trends, alarms, and messages. Protect programs residing in memory with EEPROM, flash memory, or by an uninterruptible power source (battery or uninterruptible power supply). The backup power source shall have capacity to maintain the memory during a 72-hour continuous power outage. Rechargeable power sources shall be constantly charged while the controller is operating under normal line power. Batteries shall be replaceable without soldering. Trend and alarm history collected during normal operation shall not be lost during power outages less than 72 hours long.

2.1.1.6 Immunity to Power Fluctuations

Controllers shall operate at 90 percent to 110 percent nominal voltage rating.

2.1.1.7 Transformer

The controller power supply shall be fused or current limiting and rated at 125 percent power consumption.

2.1.1.8 Wiring Terminations

Use screw terminal wiring terminations for all field-installed controllers. Provide field-removable modular terminal strip or a termination card connected by a ribbon cable for all controllers other than terminal units.

2.1.1.9 Input and Output Interface

Provide hard-wired input and output interface for all controllers as follows:

a. Protection: Shorting an input or output point to itself, to another point, or to ground shall cause no controller damage. Input or output point contact with sources up to 24 volts AC or DC for any duration shall cause no controller damage.

b. Binary Inputs: Binary inputs shall have a toggle switch and monitor on and off contacts from a "dry" remote device without external power, and external 5-24 VDC voltage inputs.

c. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Pulse accumulation inputs shall conform to binary input requirements and accumulate pulses at a resolution suitable to the application.

d. Analog Inputs: Analog inputs shall monitor low-voltage (0-10 VDC), current (4-20 mA), or resistance (thermistor or RTD) signals.

e. Binary Outputs: Binary outputs shall have a toggle switch and send a pulsed 24 VDC low-voltage signal for modulation control, or provide a maintained open-closed position for on-off control. For HVAC equipment and plant controllers, provide for manual overrides, either with three-position (on-off-auto) override switches and status lights, or with an adjacent operator display and interface. Where appropriate, provide a method to select normally open or normally closed operation.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 18


f. Analog Outputs: Analog outputs shall send modulating 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA signals to control output devices.

g. Tri-State Outputs: Tri-State outputs shall provide three-point floating control of terminal unit electronic actuators.

2.1.1.10 Digital Controller BACnet Internetwork

Provide a BACnet internetwork with control products, multiple peer buss network cables as indicated, communication media, connectors, repeaters, hubs, and routers. Provide intermediate gateways, only when requested by the Government and shown on the contract drawings. Controller and operator interface communication shall conform to ASHRAE 135, BACnet. If a controller becomes non-responsive, the remaining controllers shall continue operating and not be affected by the failed controller. Network cables shall be provided as work of this Section. The use of facility communication cables in lieu of network cables dedicated to the work of this section is prohibited.

2.1.1.11 Communications Ports

a. Direct-Connect Interface Ports: Provide at least one extra communication port at each local BACnet network for direct connecting a notebook computer or BACnet hand-held terminal so all network BACnet objects and properties may be viewed and edited by the operator.

b. Telecommunications Interface Port: Provide one telecommunication port per building, permitting remote communication via point-to-point (PTP) protocol over telephone lines.

2.1.1.12 Modems

Provide v.92 or DSL modems where required for communication between the BACnet Operator Workstation (B-OWS) and the DDC system.

2.1.1.13 BACnet Gateways

Provide BACnet communication ports, whenever available as a plant equipment OEM standard option, for DDC integration via a single communication cable. Typical BACnet controlled plant equipment includes, but is not limited to, boilers, chillers, and variable frequency motor drives.

Provide gateways to connect BACnet to legacy systems, existing non-BACnet devices, and existing non-BACnet DDC controlled plant equipment, only when specifically requested and approved by the Government, and shown on the Government approved BACnet Communication Architecture Schematic. Provide with each gateway an interoperability schedule, showing each point or event on the legacy side that the BACnet "client" will read, and each parameter that the BACnet network will write to. Describe this interoperability in terms of BACnet services, or Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBBS), defined in ASHRAE 135 Annex K. Provide two-year minimum warranty for each gateway, including parts and labor.

The following minimum capabilities are required:

a. Gateways shall be able to read and view all readable object properties

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 19


listed in the interoperability schedule on the non-BACnet network to the BACnet network and vice versa where applicable.

b. Gateways shall be able to write to all writeable object properties listed in the interoperability schedule on the non-BACnet network from the BACnet network and vice versa where applicable.

c. Gateways shall provide single-pass (only one protocol to BACnet without intermediary protocols) translation from the non-BACnet protocol to BACnet and vice versa.

d. Gateways shall meet the requirements of Data Sharing Read Property (DS-RP-B), Data Sharing Write Property (DS-WP-B), Device Management Dynamic Device Binding-B (DM-DDB-B), and Device Management Communication Control (DM-DCC-B) BIBBs, in accordance with ASHRAE 135.

e. Gateways shall include all hardware, software, software licenses, and configuration tools for operator-to-gateway communications. Provide backup programming and parameters on CD media and the ability to modify, download, backup, and restore gateway configuration.

2.1.1.14 Digital Controller Cabinet

Provide each digital controller in a factory fabricated cabinet enclosure. Cabinets located indoors shall protect against dust and have a minimum NEMA 1 rating, except where indicated otherwise. Cabinets located outdoors or in damp environments shall protect against all outdoor conditions and have a minimum NEMA 4 rating. Outdoor control panels and controllers must be able to withstand extreme ambient conditions, without malfunction or failure, whether or not the controlled equipment is running. If necessary, provide a thermostatically controlled panel heater in freezing locations, and an internal ventilating fan in locations exposed to direct sunlight. Cabinets shall have a hinged lockable door and an offset removable metal back plate, except controllers integral with terminal units, like those mounted on VAV boxes. Provide like-keyed locks for all hinged panels provided and a set of two keys at each panel, with one key inserted in the lock. Each enclosure shall be sized to accommodate the number of controllers; I/O functions required for each enclosure, including installed spares, plus 10% expansion for each type of I/O function provided, control voltage transformers, fuses, terminal strips, relays, contactors, control enclosure incoming power disconnect switch, receptacle, wiring troughs, and system accessories. Controller wiring terminals shall clearly be divided into analog input and output groups and digital input and output groups. The controllers and terminal strips shall be equipped with double sided screw type terminals. One side of the terminal strip shall be used for termination of field wiring from instrumentation and controls. The other side shall be used to connect the controller and system accessories to the network. Terminal strips shall have individual terminal identification numbers.

2.1.1.15 Main Power Switch, Receptacle and Auxiliary Transformers

Provide each control cabinet with a main external power on/off switch located inside the cabinet. Also provide each cabinet with a separate 120 VAC duplex receptacle. Provide central voltage transformer(s) interior to cabinet to enable power to associated controllers, input and output devices.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 20


2.1.2 DDC Software

Provide software to execute the sequence of operation and indicated on the drawings.

2.1.2.1 ProgrammingProvide programming to execute the sequence of operation indicated on the drawings. Provide all programming and tools to configure and program all controllers. Provide programming routines in simple, easy-to-follow logic with detailed text comments describing what the logic does and how it corresponds to the project's written sequence of operation.

a. Graphic-based programming shall use a library of function blocks made from pre-programmed code designed for BAS control. Function blocks shall be assembled with interconnecting lines, depicting the control sequence in a flowchart. If providing a computer with device programming tools as part of the project, graphic programs shall be viewable in real time showing present values and logical results from each function block.

b. Menu-based programming shall be done by entering parameters, definitions, conditions, requirements, and constraints.

c. For line-by-line and text-based programming, declare variable types (local, global, real, integer, etc.) at the beginning of the program. Use descriptive comments frequently to describe the programming.

d. If providing a computer with device programming tools as part of the project, provide a means for detecting program errors and testing software strategies with a simulation tool. Simulation may be inherent within the programming software suite, or provided by physical controllers mounted in a NEMA 1 test enclosure. The test enclosure shall contain one dedicated controller of each type provided under this contract, complete with power supply and relevant accessories.

2.1.2.2 Parameter Modification

All writeable object properties, and all other programming parameters needed to comply with the project specification shall be adjustable for devices at any network level, including those accessible with web-browser communication, and regardless of programming methods used to create the applications.

2.1.2.3 Short Cycling Prevention

Provide setpoint differentials and minimum on/off times to prevent equipment short cycling.

2.1.2.4 Equipment Status Delay

Provide an adjustable delay from when equipment is commanded on or off and when the control program looks to the status input for confirmation.

2.1.2.5 Run Time Accumulation

Use the Elapsed Time Property to provide re-settable run time accumulation for each Binary Output Object connected to mechanical loads greater than 1 HP, electrical loads greater than 10 KW, or wherever else specified.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 21


2.1.2.6 Timed Local Override

Provide an adjustable override time for each push of a timed local override button.

2.1.2.7 Time Synchronization

Provide time synchronization, including adjustments for leap years, daylight saving time, and operator time adjustments.

2.1.2.8 Scheduling

Provide operating schedules as indicated, with equipment assigned to groups. Changing the schedule of a group shall change the operating schedule of all equipment in the group. Groups shall be capable of operator creation, modification, and deletion. Provide capability to view and modify schedules in a seven-day week format. Provide capability to enter holiday and override schedules one full year at a time.

2.1.2.9 Object Property Override

Allow writeable object property values to accept overrides to any valid value. Where specified or required for the sequence of control, the Out-Of-Service property of Objects shall be modifiable using BACnet's write property service. When documented, exceptions to these requirement are allowed for life, machine, and process safeties.

2.1.2.10 Alarms and Events

Alarms and events shall be capable of having programmed time delays and high-low limits. When a computer workstation or web server is connected to the BACnet internetwork, alarms/events shall report to the computer, printer, alphanumeric pager, e-mail, or cell phone, as defined by an authorized operator. Otherwise alarms/events shall be stored within a device on the BACnet network until connected to a user interface device and retrieved. Provide alarms/events in agreement with the point schedule, sequence of operation, and the BAS Owner. At a minimum, provide programming to initiate alarms/events any time a piece of equipment fails to operate, a control point is outside normal range or condition shown on schedules, communication to a device is lost, a device has failed, or a controller has lost its memory.

2.1.2.11 Trending

Provide BACnet trend services capable of trending all object present values set points, and other parameters indicated for trending on project schedules. Trends may be associated into groups, and a trend report may be set up for each group. Trends are stored within a device on the BACnet network, with operator selectable trend intervals from 10 seconds up to 60 minutes. The minimum number of consecutive trend values stored at one time shall be 100 per variable. When trend memory is full, the most recent data shall overwrite the oldest data.

The operator workstation shall upload trends automatically upon reaching 3/4 of the device buffer limit (via Notification_Threshold property), by operator request, or by time schedule for archiving. Archived and real-time trend data shall be available for viewing numerically and graphically for at the workstation and connected notebook computers.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 22


2.1.2.12 Device Diagnostics

Each controller shall have diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and device fault condition. The DDC system shall recognize and report a non-responsive controller.

2.1.2.13 Power Loss

Upon restoration of power, the DDC system shall perform an orderly restart and restoration of control.

2.1.2.14 Energy Data Recording

Provide a resettable signal accumulation for each flow meter and electric meter. Program monthly usage reports for the following:

a. Calculate hot water thermal energy in MBTUH using hot water supply temperature and flow and hot water return temperature signals.

b. Calculate chilled water thermal energy in MBTUH using chilled water supply temperature and flow and chilled water return temperature signals.

c. Record electrical energy in KWH and electrical demand in KW.

d. Record water usage in K gallons.

e. Record natural gas usage in ft3 and therms.

2.1.3 BACnet Operator Workstation

The workstation shall be capable of accessing all DDC system devices and communicate using the BACnet protocol. The workstation shall be capable of displaying, modifying, creating, archiving, and deleting (as applicable): all points, objects, object properties, programming, alarms, trends, messages, schedules, and reports.

2.1.3.1 BACnet Operator Workstation Hardware

Configure according to system manufacturer's specifications and conforming to BACnet Operator Workstation (B-OWS) device standards found in ASHRAE 135, Annex L. Install to permit complete monitoring and troubleshooting of the DDC system.

At a minimum the workstation hardware shall include: a desktop personal computer with Microsoft Windows 7 operating system or equal, processor and RAM exceeding capability and speed required by operating system and application software, hard drive capacity exceeding software and yearly archive requirements, 16X internal DVD+/-R/RW/CD-RW drive with archive creator software, 4 USB 2.0 ports, 10/100 network interface card, 19-inch LCD monitor, internal V.92 modem, sound card with speakers, 101 character keyboard, optical mouse, USB Hub with four USB 2.0 ports and connecting cable, 120-volt 800 VA uninterruptible power supply with automatic voltage regulation and 4 minimum battery back-up outlets and 2 surge protected outlets, Microsoft Office bundled software, Adobe Acrobat Writer, Anti-Virus Software and Symantec Ghost disk imaging software or equal. Provide all original licenses, installation media, documentation, and recovery CDs capable of restoring the original configuration. Provide a manufacturer's 3-year next business day on-site warranty with the

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 23


Government listed as the warranty owner.

2.1.3.2 Password Protection

Provide at least five levels of password protection for operator interfaces. The lowest level only allow viewing graphics. The second level allows viewing graphics and changing space temperature setpoints. The third level allows the previous level's capability, plus changing operating schedules. The fourth level allows access to all functions except passwords. The highest level provides all administrator rights and allows full access to all programming, including setting new passwords and access levels. Provide the BAS Owner with the highest level password access. Provide automatic log out if no keyboard or mouse activity is detected after a user-defined time delay.

2.1.3.3 BACnet Operator Workstation DDC Software

Provide the workstation software with the manufacturer's installation CDs and licenses. Configure the software according to the DDC system manufacturer's specifications and in agreement with BACnet Operator Workstation (B-OWS) device standards found in ASHRAE 135, Annex L.

The workstation software shall permit complete monitoring, modification, and troubleshooting interface with the DDC system. The operator interface with the software shall be menu-driven with appropriate displays and menu commands to manipulate the DDC system's objects, point data, operating schedules, control routines, system configuration, trends, alarms, messages, graphics, and reports. Trends shall be capable of graphic display in real time, with variables plotted as functions of time. Each alarmed point shall be capable of displaying its alarm history, showing when it went into alarm, if and when it was acknowledged, and when it went out of alarm. The modification of DDC system parameters and object properties shall be accomplished with "fill in the blank" and/or "point and drag" methods. Modifications shall download to the appropriate controllers at the operator's request.

2.1.3.4 Graphics Software

Provide web-based system graphics viewable on browsers compatible with MS Internet Explorer 6.X or greater using an industry-standard file format such as HTML, BMP, JPEG, or GIF. Graphics shall replicate the indicated HVAC system design and include building plans with equipment locations, and schematic plans of each item of mechanical equipment, with all control variable clearly identified and capable of real-time display.

Graphic displays shall have full-screen resolution when viewed on the workstation and notebook computers. Dynamic data on graphics pages shall refresh within 10 seconds using an Internet connection, or 30 seconds using a dial-up modem connection. Graphics viewing shall not require additional "plug-in" software like Java, Shockwave and Flash applications unless the software is readily available for free over the Internet, and certified for use with Navy Marine Corps Internet (NMCI) personal computers.

The graphics shall show the present value and object name for each of the project's I/O points on at least one graphic page. Arrange point values and names on the graphic displays in their appropriate physical locations with respect to the floor plan or equipment graphic displayed. Graphics shall allow the operator to monitor current status, view zone and equipment summaries, use point-and-click navigation between graphic pages, and edit

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 24


setpoints and parameters directly from the screens. Items in alarm shall be displayed using a different color or other obvious visual indicator.Provide graphics with the following:

a. Graphic Types: Provide at least one graphic display for each piece of HVAC equipment, building floor, and controlled zone. Indicate dynamic point values, operating statuses, alarm conditions, and control setpoints on each display. Provide summary pages where appropriate.

(1) Building Elevation: For buildings more than one story, provide an elevation view of the building with links to each of the building's floor plans. Simulate the building's architecture and include the building number and floor numbers. If possible, use an actual photograph of the building.

(2) Building Floor Plans: Provide a floor plan graphic for each of the building's floors with dynamic display of space temperature and other important data. If used, indicate and provide links to sub-plan areas. If possible, use the project's electronic drawing files for the graphic backgrounds. Provide clear names for important areas, such as "Main Conference Room." Include room names and numbers where applicable. Include features such as stairwells, elevators, and main entrances. Where applicable, include the mechanical room, HVAC equipment, and control component locations, with corresponding links to the equipment graphics.

(3) Sub-plan Areas: Where a building's floor plan is too large to adequately display on the screen, sub-divide the plan into distinct areas, and provide a separate graphic display for each area. Provide same level of detail requested in building floor plan section above.

(4) HVAC Equipment: Provide a graphic display for each piece of HVAC equipment, such as the water chiller system, VAV terminal, or air handling unit. Equipment shall be represented by a two or three-dimensional drawing. Where multiple pieces of equipment combine to form a system, such as a central chiller plant or central heating plant, provide one graphic to depict the entire plant. Indicate the equipment, piping, ductwork, dampers, and control valves in the installed location. Include labels for equipment, piping, ductwork, dampers, and control valves. Show the direction of air and water flow. Include dynamic display of applicable object data with clear names in appropriate locations.

(5) Sequence of Operation: Provide a graphic screen displaying the written out full sequence of operation; submitted by the installer, based on the sequence of operation indicated on Contract Drawings for each piece of HVAC equipment. Provide a link to the sequence of operation displays on their respective equipment graphics. Include dynamic real-time data within the text for setpoints and variables.

b. Graphic Title: Provide a prominent, descriptive title on each graphic page.

c. Dynamic Update: When the workstation is on-line, all graphic I/O object values shall update with change-of-value services, or by operator selected discrete intervals.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 25


d. Graphic Linking: Provide forward and backward linking between floor plans, sub-plans, and equipment.

e. Graphic Editing: Provide installed software to create, modify, and delete the DDC graphics. Include the ability to store graphic symbols in a symbol directory and import these symbols into the graphics.

f. Dynamic Point Editing: Provide full editing capability for deleting, adding, and modifying dynamic points on the graphics.

2.1.4 Notebook Computer

Provide a notebook computer, complete with the project's installed DDC software, applications database, and graphics to fully troubleshoot and program the project's devices. Notebook computers for web-based systems do not require this installed software if they have the ability to connect locally in real time, view all graphics, and fully troubleshoot, modify, and program all project devices. Provide the notebook computer with ballistic nylon carrying case with shoulder strap with all necessary cables and interface hardware needed for setup and communication with the controllers and control system components.

At a minimum the notebook computer shall include: a Microsoft Windows 7 operating system, processor with capability and speed required by application software, 40 giga-byte hard drive, 512 mega-byte RAM, 2 USB 2.0 ports, 10/100 network interface card, internal V.92 modem, 15-inch display, keyboard, 3-hour battery with charger, 52X internal CD-RW drive with CD creator software, and Microsoft Office bundled software. Provide all original licenses, installation media, documentation, and recovery CDs capable of restoring the original configuration. Provide the manufacturer's 3-year next business day on-site warranty with the Government listed as the warranty owner.

2.1.5 BACnet Protocol Analyzer

Provide a BACnet protocol analyzer and required cables and fittings for connection to the BACnet network. The analyzer shall include the following minimum capabilities:

a. Capture and store to a file data traffic on all network levels.

b. Measure bandwidth usage.

c. Filtering options with ability to ignore select traffic.

2.2 SENSORS AND INPUT HARDWARE

Coordinate sensor types with the BAS Owner to keep them consistent with existing installations.

2.2.1 Field-Installed Temperature Sensors

Where feasible, provide the same sensor type throughout the project. Avoid using transmitters unless absolutely necessary.

2.2.1.1 Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs)

Provide RTD sensors with platinum elements compatible with the digital controllers. Encapsulate sensors in epoxy, series 300 stainless steel,

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 26


anodized aluminum, or copper. Temperature sensor accuracy shall be 0.1 percent (1 ohm) of expected ohms (1000 ohms) at 32 degrees F. Temperature sensor stability error over five years shall not exceed 0.25 degrees F cumulative. Direct connection of RTDs to digital controllers without transmitters is preferred. When RTDs are connected directly, lead resistance error shall be less than 0.25 degrees F. The total error for a RTD circuit shall not exceed 0.5 degrees F.

2.2.1.2 Temperature Sensor Details

a. Room Type: Provide the sensing element components within a decorative protective cover suitable for surrounding decor. Provide room temperature sensors with integral relative humidity sensor timed override button, setpoint adjustment lever, digital temperature and humidity display. Provide a communication port or 802.11x wireless support for a portable operator interface like a notebook computer or PDA.

b. Duct Probe Type: Ensure the probe is long enough to properly sense the air stream temperature.

c. Duct Averaging Type: Continuous averaging sensors shall be one foot in length for each 4 square feet of duct cross-sectional area, and a minimum length of 6 feet.

d. Pipe Immersion Type: Provide minimum three-inch immersion. Provide each sensor with a corresponding pipe-mounted sensor well, unless indicated otherwise. Sensor wells shall be stainless steel when used in steel piping, and brass when used in copper piping. Provide the sensor well with a heat-sensitive transfer agent between the sensor and the well interior.

e. Outside Air Type: Provide the sensing element on the building's north side with a protective weather shade that positions the sensor approximately 3 inches off the wall surface, does not inhibit free air flow across the sensing element, and protects the sensor from snow, ice, and rain.

2.2.1.3 Sensor Ranges and Accuracy

Temperature sensors may be provided without transmitters. Temperature sensors, including transmitter if used, shall have minimum operating ranges, minimum accuracy and maximum drift as specified below for the application:

a. Conditioned Space Temperature.

1. Operating Range: 50 to 86 degrees F.

2. Accuracy: +/- 1 degree F over the operating range.

3. Drift: Maximum 1 degree F per year.

b. Unconditioned Space Temperature


2. Accuracy: +/- 1 degree F over the range of 30 to 131 degrees F and +/- 4 degrees F over the rest of the operating range.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 27



c. Duct Temperature


2. Accuracy: +/- 2 degrees F.

3. Drift: Maximum 2 degrees F per year.

d. Outside Air Temperature

1. Operating Range: -30 to +130 degrees F.

2. Accuracy:

(a) +/- 2 degrees F over the range of -30 to plus 130 degrees F.

(b) +/- 1 degree F over the range of 30 to 100 degrees F.


e. Chilled Water and Potable Cold Water


2. Accuracy: +/- 0.8 degrees F over the range of 35 to 65 degrees F and +/- 2 degrees F over the rest of the operating range.

3. Drift: Maximum 0.8 degrees F per year.

f. Heating Hot Water and Potable Hot Water


2. Accuracy: +/- 2 degrees F.

3. Drift: Maximum 2 degrees F per year.

2.2.2 Transmitters

Provide transmitters with 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC linear output scaled to the sensed input. Transmitters shall be matched to the respective sensor, factory calibrated, and sealed. Size transmitters for an output near 50 percent of its full-scale range at normal operating conditions. The total transmitter error shall not exceed 0.1 percent at any point across the measured span. Supply voltage shall be 12 to 24 volts AC or DC. Transmitters shall have non-interactive offset and span adjustments. For temperature sensing, transmitter drift shall not exceed 0.03 degrees F a year.

2.2.2.1 Relative Humidity Transmitters

Provide transmitters with an accuracy equal to plus or minus 2 percent from 0 to 90 percent scale, and less than one percent drift per year. Sensing elements shall be the polymer type.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 28


2.2.2.2 Pressure Transmitters

Provide transmitters integral with the pressure transducer.

2.2.3 Air Quality Sensors

Provide power supply for each sensor.

2.2.3.1 CO2 Sensors

Provide photo-acoustic type CO2 sensors with integral transducers and linear output. The devices shall read CO2 concentrations between 0 and 2000 ppm with full scale accuracy of at least plus or minus 100 ppm.

2.2.3.2 Air Quality Sensors

Provide full spectrum air quality sensors using a hot wire element based on the Taguchi principle. The sensor shall monitor a wide range of gaseous volatile organic components common in indoor air contaminants like paint fumes, solvents, cigarette smoke, and vehicle exhaust. The sensor shall automatically compensate for temperature and humidity, have span and calibration potentiometers, operate on 24 VDC power with output of 0-10 VDC, and have a service rating of 32 to 140 degrees F and 5 to 95 percent relative humidity.

2.2.4 Input Switches

2.2.4.1 Timed Local Overrides

Provide buttons or switches to override the DDC occupancy schedule programming for each major building zone during unoccupied periods, and to return HVAC equipment to the occupied mode. This requirement is waived for zones clearly intended for 24 hour continuous operation.

2.2.5 Freeze Protection Thermostats

Provide special purpose thermostats with flexible capillary elements 20 feet minimum length for coil face areas up to 40 square feet. Provide longer elements for larger coils at 1-foot of element for every 4 square feet of coil face area, or provide additional thermostats. Provide switch contacts rated for the respective motor starter's control circuit voltage. Include auxiliary contacts for the switch's status condition. A freezing condition at any 18-inch increment along the sensing element's length shall activate the switch. The thermostat shall be equipped with a manual push-button reset switch so that when tripped, the thermostat requires manual resetting before the HVAC equipment can restart.

2.2.6 Electronic Air Flow Measurement Stations

Air flow measurement stations shall have an array of velocity sensing elements or fan vortex array design as indicated. The velocity sensing elements shall be the RTD type, traversing the ducted air in at least two directions. The air flow pressure drop across the station shall not exceed 0.08 inch water gage at a velocity of 2,000 fpm. The station shall be suitable for air flows up to 5,000 fpm, and a temperature range of 40 to 120 degrees F. The station's measurement accuracy over the range of 125 to 2,500 fpm shall be plus or minus 3 percent of the measured velocity. Station transmitters shall provide a linear, temperature-compensated 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC output. The output shall be capable of being

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 29


accurately converted to a corresponding air flow rate in cubic feet per minute. Transmitters shall be a 2-wire, loop powered device. The output error of the transmitter shall not exceed 0.5 percent of the measurement. Products similar to Ebtron Gold Series will meet the requirement.

2.2.7 Energy Metering

2.2.7.1 Electric Meters

Provide contacts for kilowatt (kw) pulse accumulation. Integrate electric meter signal into DDC system; meter signal output must be compatible with DDC input. DDC shall measure both instantaneous and accumulated electrical usage.

2.2.8 Chilled Water and Heating Water Flow Sensors

Provide magnetic mass principle insertion type flow meters equal to an Onicon F-3500. Wiring installed by the contractor between the control system and the meters shall be Belden 9320, two wire, shielded twisted cable, and shall not be included in conduit containing AC circuit wiring. Each meter shall have dual electrode design, each with its own sensing system, and an averaging circuit to reduce measurement errors due to swirl in undeveloped flow locations caused by short straight pipe runs. Sensing shall be accomplished electromagnetically; not through mechanical or photoelectric means. Paddle type rotors will not be acceptable. The sensor shall have a maximum operating pressure of 400 PSI, maximum operating temperature of 250 deg F and a pressure drop of less than 0.1 PSI at 12 feet per second flow velocity. Flow sensor shall have 200:1 turndown ratio. Accuracy shall be within +-1.0% of actual reading at a liquid velocity of 2 to 20 feet/second. Each sensor shall be individually wet-calibrated in a flow laboratory against a primary volumetric standard accurate to within 0.1% and directly traceable to the U.S. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). Provide certificate of calibration with each flow meter. The sensor shall have integral analog outputs of 0-10 VDC and 4-20 mA linear to within +-0.1% of calibrated span for connection to the control system. The sensor shall also include three internal frequency outputs, (top sensor, bottom sensor, average frequency) for commissioning and diagnostic purposes. All outputs shall be linear with flow rate. The meter shall be constructed of type 316 stainless steel for all wetted parts, electronics enclosure shall be NEMA 4 aluminum. The sensor head shall be constructed of polypropylene. The unit shall be installed with hot tap installation, in order to be both insertable and removable through a ball valve when the pipe is under pressure. Operating power shall be nominal 24 VDC. Local instantaneous flow indicator shall be LED type in NEMA 4 enclosure with 3-1/2 inch digit display for wall or panel mounting. Provide 4-20 ma analog output signal for use by the facility DDC system. Furnish with flow meter manufacturer BTU meter and temperature sensors where indicated on contract drawings.

2.2.9 Water Flow Meter (Make-up Water)

Sensor shall be a vane displacement device rated for liquid service as shown. A counter shall be mounted on top of the meter, and shall consist of a non-resettable mechanical totalizer for local reading, and a pulse transmitter for remote reading. The totalizer shall have a six digit register to indicate the volume passed through the meter in gallons, and a sweep-hand dial to indicate down to 1 liter 0.25 gallons. Output signal shall be pulse type. Body shall be Class 125, bronze or carbon steel, threaded or flanged connections. Accuracy shall be +/- 2% of the flow

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 30


range. Maximum pressure drop at full flow: 1 psig.

2.2.10 Current Transducers

Current transducers shall accept an AC current input and shall have an accuracy of +/- 0.5 percent of full scale. An integral power supply shall be provided if required for the analog output signal. The device shall have a means for calibration.

2.2.11 Current Sensing Relays (CSRs)

Current sensing relays (CSRs) shall provide a normally-open contact with a voltage and amperage rating greater than its connected load. Current sensing relays shall be of split-core design. The CSR shall be rated for operation at 200 percent of the connected load. Voltage isolation shall be a minimum of 600 volts. The CSR shall auto-calibrate to the connected load.

2.2.12 Voltage Transducers

Voltage transducers shall accept an AC voltage input and have an accuracy of +/- 0.25 percent of full scale. An integral power supply shall be provided if required for the analog output signal. The device shall have a means for calibration. Line side fuses for transducer protection shall be provided.

2.2.13 Pipe Mount Temperature Limit Switch (Aquastat)

Pipe mount temperature limit switches (aquastats) shall have a field adjustable setpoint between 60 and 90 degrees F, an accuracy of +/- 3.6 degrees F and a 10 degrees F fixed deadband. The switch shall have two sets of contacts, and each contact shall have a rating greater than its connected load. Contacts shall open or close upon change of temperature above or below setpoint as shown.

2.2.14 Damper and Valve End Switches

Each end switch shall be a hermetically sealed switch with a trip lever and over-travel mechanism. The switch enclosure shall be suitable for mounting on the duct or valve exterior and shall permit setting the position of the trip lever that actuates the switch. The trip lever shall be aligned with the actuator linkage. End switches factory packaged to valve and damper actuators are not acceptable.

2.3 OUTPUT HARDWARE

2.3.1 Control Dampers

Provide factory manufactured stainless steel dampers whereindicated. Control dampers shall comply with SMACNA 1966 except as modified or supplemented by this specification. Published damper leakage rates and respective pressure drops shall have been verified by tests in compliance with AMCA 500-D requirements. Outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers shall be provided where shown and shall include the blade type indicated. Opposed blade dampers shall include an airfoil blade design. Blades shall have neoprene rubber compressible seals at points of contact.

Provide damper assembly frames constructed of 0.064 inch minimumthickness stainless steel channels with mitered and welded corners. Damper

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 31


axles shall be 0.5 inches minimum diameter plated steel rods supported in the damper frame by stainless steel or bronze bearings. Blades mounted vertically shall be supported by thrust bearings.

Dampers shall be rated for not less than 2000 fpm air velocity. The pressure drop through each damper when full-open shall not exceed 0.04 inches water gage at 1000 fpm face velocity. Damper assemblies in ductwork subject to above 3-inch water gauge static air pressure shall be constructed to meet SMACNA Seal Class "A" construction requirements.

Provide the damper operating linkages outside of the air stream, including crank arms, connecting rods, and other hardware that transmits motion from the damper actuators to the dampers, shall be adjustable. Additionally, operating linkages shall be designed and constructed to have a 2 to 1 safety factor when loaded with the maximum required damper operating force. Linkages shall be brass, bronze, galvanized steel, or stainless steel.

Provide access doors or panels in hard ceilings and walls for access to all concealed damper operators and damper locking setscrews.

For field-installed control dampers, a single damper section shall have blades no longer than 48 inches and no higher than 72 inches. The maximum damper blade width shall be 12 inches. Larger sized dampers shall be built using a combination of sections.

Frames shall be at least 2 inches wide. Flat blades shall have edges folded for rigidity. Blades shall be provided with compressible gasket seals along the full length of the blades to prevent air leakage when closed.

The damper frames shall be provided with jamb seals to minimize air leakage. Seals shall be suitable for an operating temperature range of minus 40 degrees F to 200 degrees F.

The leakage rate of each damper when full-closed shall be no morethan 3 cfm per sq. foot of damper face area at 1.0 inches water gage static pressure.

2.3.2 Control Valves

2.3.2.1 Valve Assembly

Valve bodies shall be designed for 125 psig minimum working pressure or 150 percent of the operating pressure, whichever is greater. Valve stems shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Valve leakage ratings shall be 0.01 percent of rated Cv value. Class 125 copper alloy valve bodies and Class 150 steel or stainless steel valves shall meet the requirements of ASME B16.5. Cast iron valve components shall meet the requirements of ASTM A126 Class B or C.

2.3.2.2 Butterfly Valves

Butterfly valves shall be the threaded lug type suitable for dead-end service and for modulation to the fully-closed position, with stainless steel shafts supported by bearings, non-corrosive discs geometrically interlocked with or bolted to the shaft (no pins), and EPDM seats suitable for temperatures from minus 20 degrees F to plus 250 degrees F. Valves shall have a means of manual operation independent of the actuator.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 32


2.3.2.3 Two-Way Valves

Two-way modulating valves shall have an equal percentage characteristic.

2.3.2.4 Valves for Chilled Water, Condenser Water, and Glycol Fluid Service

a. Bodies for valves 1-1/2 inches and smaller shall be brass or bronze, with threaded or union ends. Bodies for valves from 2 inches to 3 inches inclusive shall be of brass, bronze, or iron. Bodies for 2 inch valves shall have threaded connections. Bodies for valves from 2-1/2 to 3 inches shall have flanged connections.

b. Internal valve trim shall be brass or bronze, except that valve stems shall be stainless steel.

c. Unless indicated otherwise, provide modulating valves sized for 2 psi minimum and 4 psi maximum differential across the valve at the design flow rate.

d. Valves 4 inches and larger shall be butterfly valves, unless indicated otherwise.

2.3.2.5 Valves for Hot Water Service

Valves for hot water service below 250 Degrees F:

a. Bodies for valves 1-1/2 inches and smaller shall be brass or bronze, with threaded or union ends. Bodies for valves from 2 inches to 3 inches inclusive shall be of brass, bronze, or iron. Bodies for 2 inch valves shall have threaded connections. Bodies for valves from 2-1/2 to 3 inches shall have flanged connections.

b. Internal trim (including seats, seat rings, modulation plugs, valve stems, and springs) of valves controlling water above 210 degrees F shall be Type 316 stainless steel.

c. Internal trim for valves controlling water 210 degrees F or less shall be brass or bronze. Valve stems shall be Type 316 stainless steel.

d. Non-metallic parts of hot water control valves shall be suitable for a minimum continuous operating temperature of 250 degrees F.

e. Unless indicated otherwise, provide modulating valves sized for 2 psi minimum and 4 psi maximum differential across the valve at the design flow rate.

f. Valves 4 inches and larger shall be butterfly valves, unless indicated otherwise.

2.3.2.6 Coil Valves

Automatic control valves for chilled water and hot water heat transfer coils at air handling units, fan coil units, air terminal valves (VAV Boxes) duct mounted heating coils, ceiling radiant panels, and baseboard radiators shall be combination balancing and control valves, each consisting of an automatic motor actuated control valve element and a separate pressure compensating flow balancing valve element housed in a single valve body casting.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 33


a. Valve bodies shall be fabricated from cast brass, bronze, or ductile iron; Class 150.

b. The flow balancing mechanism shall be spring loaded; compensating for the pressure changes in the system and maintaining a constant pressure drop across the valve for differential pressure changes up to 230 psig.

c. Valve sizes exceeding 2 inches shall be equipped with an externally

adjustable flow spring tension nut. Valves 2 inches and smaller shall be capable of adjustment through the removal and insertion of various tensioned springs.

d. The motor actuated portion of the valve shall be equipped with an extension stem and mounting adaptable to the motor actuators required as work of this Section.

e. Equip valve body with two factory installed temperature/pressure test ports, one located at the valve inlet and the other located downstream of the flow balancing portion of the assembly.

f. Valves up to and including 2 inches shall be equipped with threaded ends and a conventional port ball control valve element. Valves exceeding 2 inches shall be equipped with flanges and a globe style control valve element.

g. Internal flow balancing springs, control valve stem and seats shall be constructed of stainless steel.

h. Valves shall be factory set for each heat transfer device; flow and corresponding temperature difference.

i. Control valve portion of the assembly shall provide the close-off rating indicated.

2.3.3 Actuators

Provide direct-drive electric actuators for all control applications, except where indicated otherwise.

2.3.3.1 Electric Actuators

Each actuator shall deliver the torque required for continuous uniform motion and shall have internal end switches to limit the travel, or be capable of withstanding continuous stalling without damage. Actuators shall function properly within 85 to 110 percent of rated line voltage. Provide actuators with hardened steel running shafts and gears of steel or copper alloy. Fiber or reinforced nylon gears may be used for torques less than 16 inch-pounds. Provide two-position actuators of single direction, spring return, or reversing type. Provide modulating actuators capable of stopping at any point in the cycle, and starting in either direction from any point. Actuators shall be equipped with a switch for reversing direction, and a button to disengage the clutch to allow manual adjustments. Provide the actuator with a hand crank for manual adjustments, as applicable. Thermal type actuators may only be used on terminal fan coil units, terminal VAV units, convectors, and unit heaters. Spring return actuators shall be provided on all control dampers and all control valves except terminal fan coil units, terminal VAV units, convectors, and unit heaters; unless indicated otherwise. Each actuator

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 34


shall have distinct markings indicating the full-open and full-closed position, and the points in-between.

2.3.4 Output Switches

2.3.4.1 Control Relays

Field installed and DDC panel relays shall be double pole, double throw, UL listed, with contacts rated for the intended application, indicator light, and dust proof enclosure. The indicator light shall be lit when the coil is energized and off when coil is not energized. Relays shall be the socket type, plug into a fixed base, and replaceable without tools or removing wiring. Encapsulated "PAM" type relays may be used for terminal control applications.

2.4 ELECTRICAL POWER AND DISTRIBUTION

2.4.1 Transformers

Step down transformers shall be utilized where control equipment operates at lower than line circuit voltage. Transformers, other than transformers in bridge circuits, shall have primaries wound for the voltage available and secondaries wound for the correct control circuit voltage. Transformer shall be sized so that the connected load is 80 percent of the rated capacity or less. Transformers shall conform to UL 508 and NEMA ST 1. Provide transformers at DDC AHU controller cabinets of capacity to accommodate power required by lower level DDC controllers and associated devices. Terminal equipment (VAV air terminal valves, fan coil units) controllers shall obtain power from the transformer(s) at the AHU DDC controller cabinet in the relative floor area. Where auxiliary transformers are required below the penthouse level, they shall be installed above ceilings; where accessible in NEMA 1 enclosures similar to controller cabinets.

2.4.2 Surge and Transient Protection

Provide each digital controller with surge and transient power protection. Surge and transient protection shall consist of the following devices, installed externally to the controllers.

2.4.2.1 Power Line Surge Protection

Provide surge suppressors on the incoming power at each controller or grouped terminal controllers. Surge suppressors shall be rated in accordance with UL 1449, have a fault indicating light, and conform to the following:

a. The device shall be a transient voltage surge suppressor, hard-wire type individual equipment protector for 120 VAC/1 phase/2 wire plus ground.

b. The device shall react within 5 nanoseconds and automatically reset.

c. The voltage protection threshold, line to neutral, shall be no more than 211 volts.

d. The device shall have an independent secondary stage equal to or greater than the primary stage joule rating.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 35


e. The primary suppression system components shall be pure silicon avalanche diodes.

f. The secondary suppression system components shall be silicon avalanche diodes or metal oxide varistors.

g. The device shall have an indication light to indicate the protection components are functioning.

h. All system functions of the transient suppression system shall be individually fused and not short circuit the AC power line at any time.

i. The device shall have an EMI/RFI noise filter with a minimum attenuation of 13 dB at 10 kHz to 300 MHz.

j. The device shall comply with IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Class "B" requirements and be tested according to IEEE C62.45.

k. The device shall be capable of operating between minus 20 degrees F and plus 122 degrees F.

2.4.2.2 Communication Line Surge Protection

Provide surge and transient protection for DDC controllers and DDC network related devices connected to network communication lines, in accordance with the following:

a. The device shall provide continuous, non-interrupting protection, and shall automatically reset after safely eliminating transient surges.

b. The protection shall react within 5 nanoseconds using only solid-state silicon avalanche technology.

c. The device shall be installed at the distance recommended by its manufacturer.

2.4.2.3 Controller Input/Output Protection

Provide controller inputs and outputs with surge protection via optical isolation, metal oxide varistors (MOV), or silicon avalanche devices. Fuses are not permitted for surge protection.

2.4.3 Wiring

Provide complete electrical wiring for the DDC System, including wiring to transformer primaries. Unless indicated otherwise, provide all wiring in electric metallic tubing. Control circuit wiring shall not run in the same conduit as power wiring over 100 volts. Circuits operating at more than 100 volts shall be in accordance with Section 26 20 00, INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Run all circuits in metallic tubing or covered metal raceways with the exception that raceways with wiring to room sensors on stud walls may terminate immediately interior to the studwork space. All conduit used as work of this Section shall be furnished factory coated with blue exterior color.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 36


2.4.3.1 Power Wiring

The following requirements are for field-installed wiring:

a. Wiring for 24 V circuits shall be insulated copper 18 AWG minimum and rated for 300 VAC service.

b. Wiring for 120 V circuits shall be insulated copper 14 AWG minimum and rated for 600 VAC service.

2.4.3.2 Analog Signal Wiring

Field-installed analog signal wiring shall be 18 AWG single or multiple twisted pair. Each cable shall be 100 percent shielded and have a 20 AWG drain wire. Each wire shall have insulation rated for 300 VAC service. Cables shall have an overall aluminum-polyester or tinned-copper cable-shield tape.

2.5 INDICATORS

2.5.1 Thermometers

Provide bi-metal type thermometers at locations shown. Thermometers shall have either 9 inch long scales or 3.5 inch diameter dials, with insertion, immersion, or averaging elements. Provide matching thermowells for pipe-mounted installations. Select scale ranges suitable for the intended service, with the normal operating temperature near the scale's midpoint. The thermometer's accuracy shall be plus or minus 2 percent of the scale range.

2.5.2 Pressure Gauges for Piping Systems

Provide pipe-mounted pressure gauges at the locations shown. Gauges shall conform to ASME B40.100 and have a 4-inch diameter dial and shutoff cock. Select scale ranges suitable for the intended service, with the normal operating pressure near the scale's midpoint. The gauge's accuracy shall be plus or minus 2 percent of the scale range.

2.6 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)

The Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) shall be a self contained device suitable for installation and operation at the location of Server and Workstation hardware and shall be sized to provide a minimum of 20 minutes of operation of the connected hardware. Equipment connected to the UPS shall not be affected in any manner by a power outage of a duration less than the rated capacity of the UPS. UPS shall be complete with all necessary power supplies, transformers, batteries, and accessories and shall include visual indication of normal power operation, UPS operation, abnormal operation and visual and audible indication of AC input loss and low battery power. The UPS shall be UL 1778 approved. UPS powering Server Hardware shall support notification to the server via serial interface of impending battery failure.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Perform the installation through competent technicians in the direct employ of the DDC systems manufacturer. System wiring however, may be installed

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 37


through sub-contract from the work in this Section. The HVAC control system shall be completely installed, tested and ready for operation. Provide dielectric isolation where dissimilar metals are used for connection and support. Penetrations through and mounting holes in the building exterior shall be made watertight. The control system installation shall provide clearance for control system maintenance by maintaining access space required to calibrate, remove, repair, or replace control system devices. The control system installation shall not interfere with the clearance requirements for mechanical and electrical system maintenance.

3.1.1 BACnet Naming and Addressing

Coordinate with the BAS Owner and provide unique naming and addressing for BACnet networks and devices.

a. MAC Address

Every BACnet device shall have an assigned and documented MAC Address unique to its network. For Ethernet networks, document the MAC Address assigned at its creation. For ARCNET or MS/TP, assign from 00 to 64.

b. Network Numbering

Assign unique numbers to each new network installed on the BACnet internetwork. Provide ability for changing the network number; either by device switches, network computer, or field operator interface. The BACnet internetwork (all possible connected networks) can contain up to 65,534 possible unique networks.

c. Device Object Identifier Property Number

Assign unique Device "Object_Identifier" property numbers or device instances for each device on the BACnet internetwork. Provide for future modification of the device instance number; either by device switches, network computer, or field interface. BACnet allows up to 4,194,302 possible unique devices per internetwork.

d. Device Object Name Property Text

The Device Object Name property field shall support 32 minimum printable characters. Assign unique Device "Object_Name" property names with plain-English descriptive names for each device.For example, the Device Object Name for the device controlling the chiller plant at Building 3408 would be:

Device Object_Name = CW System B3408

A Device Object Name for a VAV box controller might be:

Device Object_Name = VAV BOX25

e. Object Name Property Text (Other than Device Objects)

The Object Name property field shall support 32 minimum printable characters. Assign Object Name properties with plain-English names descriptive of the application. Examples include "Zone 1 Temperature" and "Fan Start/Stop".

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 38


f. Object Identifier Property Number (Other than Device Objects)

Assign Object Identifier property numbers according to design drawings or tables if provided. If not provided, Object Identifier property numbers may be assigned at the Contractor's discretion but must be approved by the Government. In this case they must be documented and unique for like object types within the device.

3.1.2 Minimum BACnet Object Requirements

a. Use of Standard BACnet Objects

For the following points and parameters, use standard BACnet objects, where all relevant object properties can be read using BACnet's Read Property Service, and all relevant object properties can be modified using BACnet's Write Property Service:all device physical inputs and outputs, all set points, all PID tuning parameters, all calculated pressures, flow rates, and consumption values, all alarms, all trends, all schedules, and all equipment and lighting circuit operating status.

b. BACnet Object Description Property

The Object Description property shall support 32 minimum printable characters. For each object, complete the description property field using a brief, narrative, plain English description specific to the object and project application. For example: "HW Pump 1 Proof." Document compliance, length restrictions, and whether the description is writeable in the device PICS.

c. Analog Input, Output, and Value Objects

Support and provide Description and/or Device_Type text strings matching signal type and engineering units shown on the points list.

d. Binary Input, Output, and Value Objects

Support and provide Inactive_Text and Active_Text property descriptions matching conditions shown on the points list.

e. Calendar Object

For devices with scheduling capability, provide at least one Calendar Object with ten-entry capacity. All operators may view Calendar Objects; authorized operators may make modifications from a workstation. Enable the writeable Date List property and support all calendar entry data types.

f. Schedule Object

Use Schedule Objects for all building system scheduling. All operators may view schedule entries; authorized operators may modify schedules from a workstation.

g. Loop Object or Equal

Use Loop Objects or equivalent BACnet objects in each applicable field device for PID control. Regardless of program method or object used, allow authorized operators to adjust the Update Interval, Setpoint,

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 39


Proportional Constant, Integral Constant, and Derivative Constant using BACnet read/write services.

3.1.3 Minimum BACnet Service Requirements

a. Command Priorities

Use commandable BACnet objects to control machinery and systems, providing the priority levels listed below. If the sequence of operation requires a different priority, obtain approval from the Contracting Officer.

Priority Level Application

1 Manual-Life Safety

2 Automatic-Life Safety

3 (User Defined)

4 (User Defined)

5 Critical Equipment Control

6 Minimum On/Off

7 (User Defined)

8 Manual Operator

9 (User Defined)

10 (User Defined)

11 Load Shedding

12 (User Defined)

13 (User Defined)

14 (User Defined)

15 (User Defined)

16 (User Defined)

b. Alarming

(1) Alarm Priorities - Coordinate alarm and event notification with the BAS Owner.

(2) Notification Class - Enable writeable Priority, Ack Required, and Recipient List properties of Notification Class objects.

(3) Event Notification Message Texts - Use condition specific

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 40


narrative text and numerical references for alarm and event notification.

c. Updating Displayed Property Values

Allow workstations to display property values at discrete polled intervals, or based on receipt of confirmed and unconfirmed Change of Value notifications. The COV increment shall be adjustable by an operator using BACnet services, and polled intervals shall be adjustable at the operator workstation.

3.1.4 Local Area Networks

Obtain Government approval before connecting new networks with existing networks exterior to building. Network numbers and device instance numbers shall remain unique when joining networks. Do not change existing network addressing without Government approval. See also "BACnet Naming and Addressing".

3.1.5 BACnet Routers, Bridges, and Switches

Provide the quantity of BACnet routers, bridges, and switches necessary for communications shown on the BACnet Communication Architecture schematic. Provide BACnet routers with BACnet Broadcast Message Device (BBMD) capability on each BACnet internetwork communicating across an IP network. Configure each BACnet device and bridge, router, or switch to communicate on its network segment.

3.1.6 Wiring Criteria

a. Run circuits in metallic tubing or covered metal raceways.

b. Do not run binary control circuit wiring in the same conduit as power wiring over 100 volts. Where analog signal wiring requires conduit, do not run in the same conduit with AC power circuits or control circuits operating at more than 100 volts.

c. Provide circuit and wiring protection required by NFPA 70.

d. Run all wiring located inside mechanical rooms in conduit.

e. Do not bury aluminum-sheathed cable or aluminum conduit in concrete.

f. Input/output identification: Permanently label each field-installed wire, cable, and pneumatic tube at each end with descriptive text using a commercial wire marking system that fully encircles the wire, cable, or tube. Locate the markers within 2 inches of each termination. Match the names and I/O number to the project's point list. Similarly label all power wiring serving control devices, including the word "power" in the label. Label all terminal blocks with alpha/numeric labels. All wiring and the wiring methods shall be in accordance with UL 508A.

g. For controller power, provide new 120 VAC circuits, with ground. Provide each circuit with a dedicated breaker, and run wiring in its own conduit, separate from any control wiring. Connect the controller's ground wire to the electrical panel ground; conduit grounds are not acceptable. For control panels and workstation computers indicated to be equipped with uninterruptible power supply

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 41


systems provide control panel and workstation computer power wiring configured for use with the UPS.

h. Surge Protection: Install surge protection according to manufacturer's instructions. Multiple controllers fed from a common power supply may be protected by a common surge protector, properly sized for the total connected devices.

i. Grounding: Ground controllers and cabinets to a good earth ground as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Conduit grounding is not acceptable; all grounding shall have a direct path to the building earth ground. Ground sensor drain wire shields at the controller end.

j. The Contractor shall be responsible for correcting all associated ground loop problems.

k. Run wiring in panel enclosures in covered wire track.

3.1.6.1 Wiring Interlocks

Provide wiring interlocks and DDC communication points as indicated and necessary to accomplish sequences of operation. It is the work of this Section to coordinate the interface type; gateway, direct low-voltage interlock wiring, terminal connections and communication platform with the additional sub-control systems furnished under this Contract such as but not limited to the water chillers, medical gas systems and heat trace cable systems.

3.1.7 Accessibility

Install all equipment so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance, and repair are readily accessible. Install digital controllers, data ports, and concealed actuators, valves, dampers, and like equipment in locations freely accessible through access doors.

3.1.8 Digital Controllers

a. Install as stand alone control devices (see definitions).

b. Locate control cabinets at the locations shown on the drawings. If not shown on the drawings, install in the most accessible space, close to the controlled equipment.

3.1.9 Hand-Off-Auto Switches

Wire safety controls such as smoke detectors and freeze protection thermostats to protect the equipment during both hand and auto operation.

3.1.10 Temperature/Humidity Sensors

Install temperature/humidity sensors in locations that are accessible and provide a good representation of sensed media. Installations in dead spaces are not acceptable. Calibrate sensors according to manufacturer's instructions. Do not use sensors designed for one application in a different application.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 42


3.1.10.1 Room Temperature Sensors

Mount the sensors on interior walls to sense the average room temperature at the locations indicated. Avoid locations near heat sources such as copy machines or locations by supply air outlet drafts. Mount the center of the sensor approximately 5 feet above the finished floor.

3.1.10.2 Duct Temperature Sensors

a. Probe Type: Provide a gasket between the sensor housing and the duct wall. Seal the duct penetration air tight. Seal the duct insulation penetration vapor tight.

b. Averaging Type (and coil freeze protection thermostats): Weave the capillary tube sensing element in a serpentine fashion perpendicular to the flow, across the duct or air handler cross-section, using durable non-metal supports. Prevent contact between the capillary and the duct or air handler internals. Provide a duct access door at the sensor location. The access door shall be hinged on the side, factory insulated, have cam type locks, and be as large as the duct will permit, maximum 18 by 18 inches. For sensors inside air handlers, the sensors shall be fully accessible through the air handler's access doors without removing any of the air handler's internals.

3.1.10.3 Immersion Temperature Sensors

Provide thermowells for sensors measuring piping, tank, or pressure vessel temperatures. Locate wells to sense continuous flow conditions. Do not install wells using extension couplings. Where piping diameters are smaller than the length of the wells, provide wells in piping at elbows to sense flow across entire area of well. Wells shall not restrict flow area to less than 70 percent of pipe area. Increase piping size as required to avoid restriction. Provide thermal conductivity material within the well to fully coat the inserted sensor.

3.1.10.4 Outside Air Temperature Sensors

Provide outside air temperature sensors in weatherproof enclosures on the north side of the building, away from exhaust hoods and other areas that may affect the reading. Provide a shield to shade the sensor from direct sunlight.

3.1.11 Energy Meters

Locate energy meters as indicated. Connect each meter output to the DDC system, to measure both instantaneous and accumulated energy usage.

3.1.12 Damper Actuators

Where possible, mount actuators outside the air stream in accessible areas.

3.1.13 Thermometers and Gages

Mount devices to allow reading while standing on the floor or ground, as applicable.

3.1.14 Pressure Sensors

Locate pressure sensors as indicated.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 43


3.1.15 Component Identification Labeling

Using an electronic hand-held label maker with white tape and bold black block lettering, provide an identification label on the exterior of each new control panel, control device, actuator, and sensor. Also provide labels on the exterior of each new control actuator indicating the (full) open and (full) closed positions. For labels located outdoors, use exterior grade label tape, and provide labels on both the inside and outside of the panel door or device cover. Acceptable alternatives are white plastic labels with engraved bold black block lettering permanently attached to the control panel, control device, actuator, and sensor. Have the labels and wording approved by the BAS Owner prior to installation.

3.1.16 Network and Telephone Communication Lines

When telephone lines or network connections by the Government are required, provide the Contracting Officer at least 60 days advance notice of need.

3.1.17 Device Mounting Criteria

Install all devices in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as specified and shown. Provide control devices, to be installed in piping and ductwork, with required gaskets, flanges, thermal compounds, insulation, piping, fittings, and manual valves for shutoff, equalization, purging, and calibration. Strap-on temperature sensing elements shall not be used except as specified. Install spare thermowells adjacent to each thermowell containing a sensor and as shown. Devices located outdoors shall have a weathershield.

3.1.18 Labels and Tags

Key labels and tags to the unique identifiers shown on the As-Built drawings. Label all enclosures and DDC hardware. All sensors and actuators in mechanical rooms shall be tagged. Tag airflow measurement arrays to show flow rate range for signal output range, and duct size. Duct static pressure taps shall be tagged at the location of the pressure tap. Tags shall be plastic or metal and shall be mechanically attached directly to each device or attached by a metal chain or wire. Labels, outside of protective enclosures, shall be engraved plastic and mechanically attached to the enclosure or DDC Hardware. Labels inside protective enclosures may attached using adhesive, but shall not be hand written.

3.1.19 DDC Hardware

Install DDC hardware in enclosures. Provide local control bus cables indicated.

3.1.20 Gateways

Provide gateways for sub-control interfaces indicated and elsewhere as required to accomplish sequences of operation on Contract Drawings.

3.1.21 Network Interface Jack

A standard network interface jack shall be provided for each controller on the control network. For terminal unit controllers with hardwired sensors this network interface jack shall be located at the sensor or within 10 feet

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 44


of the controller. Locating the interface jack at the sensor is preferred. For all other nodes the network interface jack shall be located within 10 feet of the node. If the network interface jack is other than a 1/8 inch phone jack, provide an interface cable with a standard 1/8 inch phone jack on one end and a connector suitable for mating with installed network interface jack on the other. No more than one type of interface cable shall be required to access all network interface jacks. Furnish two interface cable(s).

3.1.22 Temperature Limit Switch

A temperature limit switch (freezestat) shall be provided to sense the temperature at the location shown. A sufficient number of temperature limit switches (freezestats) shall be installed to provide complete coverage of the duct section. Manual reset limit switches shall be installed in approved, accessible locations where they can be reset easily. The temperature limit switch (freezestat) sensing element shall be installed in a serpentine pattern and in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.

3.1.23 Averaging Temperature Sensing Elements

Sensing elements shall be installed in a serpentine pattern located where shown.

3.1.24 Air Flow Measurement Stations (AFMS)

Locate where indicated on Contract Drawings.

3.1.25 Duct Static Pressure Sensors

The duct static pressure sensing tap shall be located where indicated but not beyond 75 percent of the distance from the AHU outlet. If the transmitter is wired in a homerun configuration to an AHU controller, the transmitter shall be located in the same enclosure as the air handling unit (AHU) controller(s) for the AHU serving the air terminal valves.

3.1.26 Relative Humidity Sensors

Relative humidity sensors in supply air ducts shall be installed at least 10 feet downstream of humidity injection elements.

3.1.27 Flowmeters

The minimum straight unobstructed piping for the flowmeter installation shall be a minimum of 10 pipe diameters upstream and at least 5 pipe diameters downstream and in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.

3.1.28 Dampers

3.1.28.1 Damper Actuators

Actuators shall not be mounted in the air stream. Multiple actuators shall not be connected to a common drive shaft. Actuators shall be installed so that their action shall seal the damper to the extent required to maintain leakage at or below the specified rate and shall move the blades smoothly. Coordinate and provide control and operation of damper and valve actuators which are factory supplied as an integral part of assembly such as

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 45


fire/smoke dampers and internal face/bypass heating coils to enable sequence of operation.

3.1.28.2 Damper Installation

Dampers shall be installed straight and true, level in all planes, and square in all dimensions. Dampers shall move freely without undue stress due to twisting, racking (parallelogramming), bowing, or other installation error. Blades shall close completely and leakage shall not exceed that specified at the rated static pressure. Provide structural support for multi-section dampers and multiple damper arrays. Acceptable methods include but are not limited to U-channel, angle iron, corner angles and bolts, bent galvanized steel stiffeners, sleeve attachments, braces, and building structure. Where multi-section dampers and multiple damper arrays are installed in ducts or sleeves, they shall not sag due to lack of support. Jackshafts shall not be used to link more than three damper sections. Blade to blade linkages shall not be used. Outside and return air dampers shall be installed such that their blades direct their respective air streams towards each other to provide for maximum mixing of air streams.

3.1.29 Valves

3.1.29.1 Ball Valves

Where indicated through the sequence of operation two-position (open/closed) ball valves may be used on chilled water, or hot water. Modulating ball valves may only be used for chilled water applications (modulating ball valves shall not be used on steam or hot water applications). In modulating applications a characterizing equal-percentage bore shall be used.

3.1.29.2 Butterfly Valves

In two-way modulating control applications, valve travel shall be limited to 70 percent (60 degrees) open position.

3.2 TEST AND BALANCE SUPPORT

The controls contractor shall coordinate with and provide on-site support to the test and balance (TAB) personnel specified under Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING. This support shall include:

a. On-site operation and manipulation of control systems during the testing and balancing.

b. Control setpoint adjustments for balancing all relevant mechanical systems, including VAV boxes.

c. Tuning control loops with setpoints and adjustments determined by TAB personnel.

3.3 CONTROLS SYSTEM OPERATORS MANUALS

Provide two electronic and printed copies of a Controls System Operators Manual. The manual shall be specific to the project, written to actual project conditions, and provide a complete and concise depiction of the installed work. Provide information in detail to clearly explain all operation requirements for the control system.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 46


Provide with each manual: CDs of the project's control system drawings, control programs, data bases, graphics, and all items listed below. Include gateway back-up data and configuration tools where applicable. Provide CDs in jewel case with printed and dated project-specific labels on both the CD and the case. For text and drawings, use Adobe Acrobat or MS Office file types. When approved by the Government, AutoCAD and Visio files are allowed. Give files descriptive English names and organize in folders.

Provide printed manuals in sturdy 3-ring binders with a title sheet on the outside of each binder indicating the project title, project location, contract number, and the controls contractor name, address, and telephone number. Each binder shall include a table of contents and tabbed dividers, with all material neatly organized. Manuals shall include the following:

a. A copy of the as-built control system (shop) drawings set, with all items specified under the paragraph "Submittals." Indicate all field changes and modifications.

b. A copy of the project's mechanical design drawings, including any official modifications and revisions.

c. A copy of the project's approved Product Data submittals provided under the paragraph "Submittals."

d. A copy of the project's approved Performance Verification Testing Plan and Report.

e. A copy of the project's approved final TAB Report.

f. Printouts of all control system programs, including controller setup pages if used. Include plain-English narratives of application programs, flowcharts, and source code.

g. Printouts of all physical input and output object properties, including tuning values, alarm limits, calibration factors, and set points.

h. A table entitled "AC Power Table" listing the electrical power source for each controller. Include the building electrical panel number, panel location, and circuit breaker number.

i. The DDC manufacturer's hardware and software manuals in both print and CD format with printed project-specific labels. Include installation and technical manuals for all controller hardware, operator manuals for all controllers, programming manuals for all controllers, operator manuals for all workstation software, installation and technical manuals for the workstation and notebook, and programming manuals for the workstation and notebook software.

j. A list of qualified control system service organizations for the work provided under this contract. Include their addresses and telephone numbers.

k. A written statement entitled "Technical Support" stating the control system manufacturer or authorized representative will provide toll-free telephone technical support at no additional cost to the Government for a minimum of two years from project acceptance, will be furnished by experienced service technicians, and will be available during normal

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 47


weekday working hours. Include the toll-free technical support telephone number.

l. A written statement entitled "Software Upgrades" stating software and firmware patches and updates will be provided upon request at no additional cost to the Government for a minimum of two years from contract acceptance. Include a table of all DDC system software and firmware provided under this contract, listing the original release dates, version numbers, part numbers, and serial numbers.

3.3.1 Storage Cabinets

In each project mechanical room, provide a wall-mounted metal storage cabinet with hinged doors. In addition to the number of manuals specified above, provide an additional copy of the manuals in each of these mechanical room storage cabinets. Provide cabinets large enough to hold the entire set of Controls System Operators Manuals, and the HVAC operation and maintenance manuals. Locate cabinets adjacent to DDC control panels where applicable. Have each cabinet's proposed installation site approved in advance by the Contracting Officer and the BAS Owner. Prominently label each cabinet with the wording "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS." Prominently label each binder with the wording "MECHANICAL ROOM COPY - DO NOT REMOVE."

3.4 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION TESTING (PVT)

3.4.1 General

The PVT shall demonstrate compliance of the control system work with the contract requirements. The PVT shall be performed by the Contractor and witnessed and approved by the Government. If the project is phased, provide separate testing for each phase. A Pre-PVT meeting to review the Pre-PVT Checklist is required to coordinate all aspects of the PVT and shall include the Contractor's QA representative, the Contractor's PVT administrator, the Contracting Officer's representative.

3.4.2 Performance Verification Testing Plan

Submit a detailed PVT Plan of the proposed testing for Government approval. Develop the PVT Plan specifically for the control system in this contract. The PVT Plan shall be an clear list of test items arranged in a logical sequence. Include the intended test procedure, the expected response, and the pass/fail criteria for every component tested.

The plan shall clearly describe how each item is tested, indicate where assisting personnel are required (like the mechanical contractor), and include what procedures are used to simulate conditions. Include a separate column for each checked item and extra space for comments. Where sequences of operations are checked, insert each corresponding routine from the project’s sequence of operation. For each test area, include signature and date lines for the Contractor's PVT administrator, the Contractor's QA representative, the Contracting Officer's representative, to acknowledge successful completion.

3.4.3 PVT Sample Size

Test all central plant equipment and primary air handling unit controllers unless otherwise directed. Twenty percent sample testing is allowed for identical controllers typical of terminal control like VAV boxes and fan

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 48


coil units. The Government may require testing of like controllers beyond a statistical sample if sample controllers require retesting or do not have consistent results.

The Government may witness all testing, or random samples of PVT items. When only random samples are witnessed, the Government may choose which ones.

3.4.4 Pre-Performance Verification Testing Checklist

Submit the following as a list with items checked off once verified. Provide a detailed explanation for any items that are not completed or verified.

a. Verify all required mechanical installation work is successfully completed, and all HVAC equipment is working correctly (or will be by the time the PVT is conducted).

b. Verify HVAC motors operate below full-load amperage ratings.

c. Verify all required control system components, wiring, and accessories are installed.

d. Verify the installed control system architecture matches approved drawings.

e. Verify all control circuits operate at the proper voltage and are free from grounds or faults.

f. Verify all required surge protection is installed.

g. Verify the A/C Power Table specified in "CONTROLS SYSTEM OPERATORS MANUALS" is accurate.

h. Verify all DDC network communications function properly, including uploading and downloading programming changes.

i. Using the BACnet protocol analyzer (if provided or required in this specification), verify communications are error free.

j. Verify each digital controller’s programming is backed up.

k. Verify all wiring, components, and panels are properly labeled.

l. Verify all required points are programmed into devices.

m. Verify all TAB work affecting controls is complete.

n. Verify all valve and actuator zero and span adjustments are set properly.

o. Verify all sensor readings are accurate and calibrated.

p. Verify each control valve and actuator goes to normal position upon loss of power.

q. Verify all control loops are tuned for smooth and stable operation. View trend data where applicable.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 49


r. Verify each controller works properly in stand-alone mode.

s. Verify all safety controls and devices function properly, including freeze protection and interfaces with building fire alarm systems.

t. Verify all electrical interlocks work properly.

u. Verify all workstations, notebooks and maintenance personnel interface tools are delivered, all system and database software is installed, and graphic pages are created for each workstation and notebook.

v. Verify the as-built (shop) control drawings are completed.

3.4.5 Conducting Performance Verification Testing

a. Conduct Government-witnessed PVT after approval of the PVT Plan and the completed Pre-PVT Checklist. Notify the Contracting Officer of the planned PVT at least 15 days prior to testing. Provide an estimated time table required to perform the testing. Furnish personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies necessary to perform all aspects of the PVT. Ensure that testing personnel are regularly employed in the testing and calibration of DDC systems. Using the project's as-built control system (shop) drawings, the project's mechanical design drawings, the approved Pre-PVT Checklist, and the approved PVT Plan, conduct the PVT.

b. During testing, identify any items that do not meet the contract requirements and if time permits, conduct immediate repairs and re-test. Otherwise, deficiencies shall be investigated, corrected, and re-tested later. Document each deficiency and corrective action taken.

c. If re-testing is required, follow the procedures for the initial PVT. The Government may require re-testing of any control system components affected by the original failed test.

3.4.6 Controller Capability and Labeling

Test the following for each controller:

a. Memory: Demonstrate that programmed data, parameters, and trend/ alarm history collected during normal operation is not lost during power failure.

b. Direct Connect Interface: Demonstrate the ability to connect directly to each type of digital controller with a portable electronic device like a notebook computer or PDA. Show that maintenance personnel interface tools perform as specified in the manufacturer's technical literature.

c. Stand Alone Ability: Demonstrate controllers provide stable and reliable stand-alone operation using default values or other method for values normally read over the network.

d. Wiring and AC Power: Demonstrate the ability to disconnect any controller safely from its power source using the AC Power Table. Demonstrate the ability to match wiring labels easily with the control drawings. Demonstrate the ability to locate a controller's location using the BACnet Communication Architecture Schematic and floor plans.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 50


e. Nameplates and Tags: Show the nameplates and tags are accurate and permanently attached to control panel doors, devices, sensors, and actuators.

3.4.7 Workstation and Software Operation

For every user workstation or notebook provided:

a. Show points lists agree with naming conventions.

b. Show that graphics are complete.

c. Show the UPS operates as specified.

3.4.8 BACnet Communications and Interoperability Areas

Demonstrate proper interoperability of data sharing, alarm and event management, trending, scheduling, and device and network management. If available or required in this specification, use a BACnet protocol analyzer to assist with identifying devices, viewing network traffic, and verifying interoperability. These requirements must be met even if there is only one manufacturer of equipment installed. Testing includes the following:

a. Data Presentation: On each BACnet Operator Workstation, demonstrate graphic display capabilities.

b. Reading of Any Property: Demonstrate the ability to read and display any used readable object property of any device on the network.

c. Setpoint and Parameter Modifications: Show the ability to modify all setpoints and tuning parameters in the sequence of control or listed on project schedules. Modifications are made with BACnet messages and write services initiated by an operator using workstation graphics, or by completing a field in a menu with instructional text.

d. Peer-to-Peer Data Exchange: Show all BACnet devices are installed and configured to perform BACnet read/write services directly (without the need for operator or workstation intervention), to implement the project sequence of operation, and to share global data.

e. Alarm and Event Management: Show that alarms/events are installed and prioritized according to the BAS Owner. Demonstrate time delays and other logic is set up to avoid nuisance tripping, e.g., no status alarms during unoccupied times or high supply air during cold morning start-up. Show that operators with sufficient privilege can read and write alarm/event parameters for all standard BACnet event types. Show that operators with sufficient privilege can change routing (BACnet notification classes) for each alarm/event including the destination, priority, day of week, time of day, and the type of transition involved (TO-OFF NORMAL, TO-NORMAL, etc.).

f. Schedule Lists: Show that schedules are configured for start/stop, mode change, occupant overrides, and night setback as defined in the sequence of operations.

g. Schedule Display and Modification: Show the ability to display any schedule with start and stop times for the calendar year. Show that all calendar entries and schedules are modifiable from any connected workstation by an operator with sufficient privilege.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 51


h. Archival Storage of Data: Show that data archiving is handled by the operator workstation/server, and local trend archiving and display is accomplished with BACnet Trend Log objects.

i. Modification of Trend Log Object Parameters: Show that an operator with sufficient privilege can change the logged data points, sampling rate, and trend duration.

j. Device and Network Management: Show the following capabilities:

(1) Display of Device Status Information

(2) Display of BACnet Object Information

(3) Silencing Devices that are Transmitting Erroneous Data

(4) Time Synchronization

(5) Remote Device Reinitialization

(6) Backup and Restore Device Programming and Master Database(s)

(7) Configuration Management of Half-Routers, Routers and BBMDs

3.4.9 Execution of Sequence of Operation

Demonstrate that the HVAC system operates properly through the complete sequence of operation. Use read/write property services to globally read and modify parameters over the internetwork.

3.4.10 Control Loop Stability and Accuracy

For all control loops tested, give the Government trend graphs of the control variable over time, demonstrating that the control loop responds to a 20 percent sudden change of the control variable set point without excessive overshoot and undershoot. If the process does not allow a 20 percent set point change, use the largest change possible. Show that once the new set point is reached, it is stable and maintained. Control loop trend data shall be in real-time with the time between data points 30 seconds or less.

3.4.11 Performance Verification Testing Report

Upon successful completion of the PVT, submit a PVT Report to the Government and prior to the Government taking use and possession of the facility. Do not submit the report until all problems are corrected and successfully re-tested. The report shall include the annotated PVT Plan used during the PVT. Where problems were identified, explain each problem and the corrective action taken. Include a written certification that the installation and testing of the control system is complete and meets all of the contract's requirements.

3.5 CONTROLLER TUNING

Calibrate each controller. Tuning shall consist of adjustment of the proportional, integral, and where applicable, the derivative (PID) settings to provide stable closed-loop control. Each loop shall be tuned while the system or plant is operating at a high gain (worst case) condition, where

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 52


high gain can generally be defined as a low-flow or low-load condition. Upon final adjustment of the PID settings, in response to a change in controller setpoint, the controlled variable shall settle out at the new setpoint with no more than two (2) oscillations above and below setpoint. Upon settling out at the new setpoint the controller output shall be steady. With the exception of naturally slow processes such as zone temperature control, the controller shall settle out at the new setpoint within five (5) minutes. Return the controller to its original setpoint and shall record and submit the final PID configuration settings with the O&M Instructions and on the associated Points Schedule.

3.6 START-UP AND START-UP TEST

Perform the following startup tests for each control system to ensure that the described control system components are installed and functioning in accordance with this specification.

a. General: Adjust, calibrate, measure, program, configure, set the time schedules, set alarms, and otherwise perform all necessary actions to ensure that the systems function as specified and shown in the sequence of operation and other contract documents.

b. Systems Check: An item-by-item check shall be performed for each HVAC system;

(1) Step 1 - System Inspection: With the system shut down, it shall be verified that power and main air are available where required and that all output devices are in their failsafe and normal positions. Each local display panel shall be inspected to verify that all displays indicate shutdown conditions.

(2) Step 2 - Calibration Accuracy Check: A two-point accuracy check of the calibration of each HVAC control system sensing element and transmitter shall be performed by comparing the output from the DDC Hardware the sensor is connected to the actual value of the variable measured at the sensing element. Digital indicating test instruments shall be used, such as digital thermometers, motor-driven psychrometers, and tachometers. The test instruments shall be at least twice as accurate as the specified sensor accuracy. The calibration of the test instruments shall be traceable to National Institute Of Standards And Technology standards. The first check point shall be with the HVAC system in the shutdown condition, and the second check point shall be with the HVAC system in an operational condition. Calibration checks shall verify that the sensing element-to-DDC system readout accuracies at two points are within the specified product accuracy tolerances. If not, the device shall be recalibrated or replaced and the calibration check repeated.

(3) Step 3 - Actuator Range Check: With the system running, a signal shall be applied to each actuator through the DDC Hardware controller. Proper operation of the actuators and positioners for all actuated devices shall be verified and the signal levels shall be recorded for the extreme positions of each device. The signal shall be varied from live zero to full range, and it shall be verified that the actuators travel from zero stroke to full stroke within the signal range. Where applicable, it shall be verified that all sequenced actuators move from zero stroke to full stroke in the proper direction, and move the connected device in the proper direction from one extreme position to the other.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 53


c. Weather Dependent Test: Weather dependent test procedures that cannot be performed by simulation shall be performed in the appropriate climatic season. When simulation is used, the actual results shall be verified in the appropriate season.

d. Test Report: Upon completion of the Start-Up Test, prepare and submit a Start-Up and Start-Up Testing Report documenting the results of the tests performed and certifying that the system is installed and functioning in accordance with this specification, and is ready for the Performance Verification Test (PVT).

3.7 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS

Provide a qualified instructor (or instructors) with two years minimum field experience with the installation and programming of similar BACnet DDC systems. Orient training to the specific systems installed. Coordinate training times with the Contracting Officer and BAS Owner after receiving approval of the training course documentation. Training shall take place at the job site and/or a nearby Government-furnished location. A training day shall occur during normal working hours, last no longer than 8 hours and include a one-hour break for lunch and two additional 15-minute breaks. The project's approved Controls System Operators Manual shall be used as the training text. The Contractor shall ensure the manuals are submitted, approved, and available to hand out to the trainees before the start of training.

3.7.1 Training Documentation

Submit training documentation for review 30 days minimum before training. Documentation shall include an agenda for each training day, objectives, a synopses of each lesson, and the instructor's background and qualifications. The training documentation can be submitted at the same time as the project's Controls System Operators Manual.

3.7.2 Phase I Training - Fundamentals

The Phase I training session shall last two consecutive days and be conducted in a classroom environment with complete audio-visual aids provided by the contractor. Provide each trainee a printed 8.5 by 11 inch hard-copy of all visual aids used. Upon completion of the Phase I Training, each trainee should fully understand the project's DDC system fundamentals. The training session shall include the following:

a. BACnet fundamentals (objects, services, addressing) and how/where they are used on this project

b. This project's list of control system components

c. This project's list of points and objects

d. This project's device and network communication architecture

e. This project's sequences of control, and:

f. Alarm capabilities

g. Trending capabilities

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 54


h. Troubleshooting communication errors

i. Troubleshooting hardware errors

3.7.3 Phase II Training - Operation

Provide Phase II Training shortly after completing Phase I Training. The Phase II training session shall last two consecutive days and be conducted at the DDC system workstation, at a notebook computer connected to the DDC system in the field, and at other site locations as necessary. Upon completion of the Phase II Training, each trainee should fully understand the project's DDC system operation. The training session shall include the following:

a. A walk-through tour of the mechanical system and the installed DDC components (controllers, valves, dampers, surge protection, switches, thermostats, sensors, etc.)

b. A discussion of the components and functions at each DDC panel

c. Logging-in and navigating at each operator interface type

d. Using each operator interface to find, read, and write to specific controllers and objects

e. Modifying and downloading control program changes

f. Modifying setpoints

g. Creating, editing, and viewing trends

h. Creating, editing, and viewing alarms

i. Creating, editing, and viewing operating schedules and schedule objects

j. Backing-up and restoring programming and data bases

k. Modifying graphic text, backgrounds, dynamic data displays, and links to other graphics

l. Creating new graphics and adding new dynamic data displays and links

m. Alarm and Event management

n. Adding and removing network devices

3.8 COMMISSIONING

Provide the services of a supervisory level technician, in responsible charge of the work in this section, and factory authorized start-up and service technicians; for each major component or system in this section, to participate in the work specified in Section 23 08 00.00 50 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS. Coordinate PVT work with the requirements of Section 23 08 00.00 50 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS. Where a test is indicated as part of functional performance testing in Section 23 08 00.00 50 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS, it shall be provided as work of Section 23 08 00.00 50 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS or this section as deemed practicable by the Cx. For each of these items, the PVT report required by

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 55


this section or the commissioning report required by Section 23 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS shall be annotated to indicate where the test results are recorded.


SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 56

No. Nomenclature Description

1 AHU Air Handling Unit2 B Heating Water Boiler3 B Steam Boiler4 C Chiller5 CCC Closed Circuit Cooler6 CCT Closed Circuit Tower7 COM RM Communication Room8 CP Condenser Water Pump9 CRAC Computer Room Air Conditioner

10 CT Cooling Tower11 CTP Cooling Tower Pump12 CTRL PNL Control Panel13 CU Air Cooled Condensing Unit14 CWP Chilled Water Supply Pump15 DECAHP Defense Commissary Agency HP16 DHW Domestic Hot Water17 DPR Damper18 DTS Dual Temperature System19 DWP Domestic Hot Water Pump20 ECT Evaporative Cooling Tower21 EF Exhaust Fan22 EST Elevated Storage Tank23 FCU Fan Coil Unit24 FLTR Filter25 GLBT Ground Level Booster Tank26 HP Heat Pump (On Ground)27 HWP Hot Water Pump28 HWT Hot Water Tank29 HV Heating and Ventilating Unit30 HX Steam to Hot Water Converter31 LS Lift Station32 LP-PMP Loop Pump33 MAD Mixed Air Damper34 MAU Make-up Air Unit35 MZ Multizone Unit36 OA Outside Air37 OAT Outside Air Temperature38 PACU Package Unit39 PHP Packaged Heat Pump (On Ground)40 PX Plate Exchanger41 RA Return Air42 RAF Return Air Fan43 RTHP (RTU) Packaged Rooftop Heat Pump Unit44 RTMZ Rooftop Multizone Unit45 RTU Rooftop Unit (Packaged DX)46 RVS-VLV Reversing Valve47 SA Supply Air

EMCS Equipment and Points Nomenclature for Camp Lejeune

EQUIPMENT



EQUIPMENT

48 STP Secondary Treatment Plant49 SV Solenoid Valve/Steam Valve50 TS Temperature Sensor51 TWAC Thru-Wall Air Conditioner52 TWHP Thru-Wall Heat Pump53 UH Unit Heater54 VAV Variable Air Volume55 WAC Window Air Conditioner56 WS Work Station57 WSHP Water Source Heat Pump58 WTP Water Treatment Plant59 WP Well Pump60 ZD Zone Mixing Damper


61 AHU-DHUM Air Handling Unit Dehumidifier62 AHU-OVRRD Air Handling Unit Override63 ALM-CMD Alarm Command64 ALM-HORN Alarm Horn65 ALM-RST Alarm Reset66 ALM-SIL Alarm Silence67 BLR-A Boiler Alarm68 BLR-C Boiler Command69 BLR-S Boiler Start70 BOILER-EN Boiler Enable71 BYPD-C Bypass Damper Command72 C-? Chiller Status73 CD-T Cold Deck Temperature74 CH-CMD Chiller Command75 CH-OVR Chiller Override76 CH-ALM Chiller Alarm77 CH-DP Chiller Differential Pressure78 CH-FLO-S Chiller Flow Switch79 CHILLER-EN Chiller Enable80 CHS-T Chiller Supply Temperature81 CHW-DP Chilled Water Differential Pressure82 CHW-FLOW Chilled Water Flow83 CHW-SYS ENABLE Chilled Water System Enable84 CLG-C Cooling Command85 CLGMAX Cooling Maximum86 CLG-NITE Cooling Night Set Point87 CLG-SP Cooling Set Point88 CLG-VLV Chilled Water Valve Status89 CLG-VLV Chilled Water Valve Operation90 COND1-S Condenser 1 Status91 COND2-S Condenser 2 Status92 COOL1-C Cooling Stage 1 Command93 COOL2-C Cooling Stage 2 Command94 CTFAN-C Cooling Tower Fan Command95 CTFAN-S Cooling Tower Fan Status96 CWR-T Chilled Water Return Temperature97 CWS-GPM Chilled Water Supply GPM98 CWS-T Chilled Water Supply Temperature99 DHW-SET Domestic Hot Water Set Point100 DHWS-T Domestic Hot Water Supply Temperature101 DHW-TANK Domestic Hot Water Tank Temperature102 DHW-VLV Domestic Hot Water Steam Valve103 ELEC-HEAT Electric Heat104 FLTR-DP Filter Differential Pressure105 FLTR-S Air Filter Differential106 HD-T Hot Deck Temperature107 HTG1-C Heating Stage 1 Command

POINTS



POINTS


108 HTG2-C Heating Stage 2 Command109 HTGMAX Heating Maximum Set Point110 HTG-NITE Heating Night Set Point111 HTG-SP Heating Set Point112 HTGV-CMD Heating Command113 HTG-VLV Heating Valve114 HUM-SPT Humidity Set Point115 HW-ENA Hot Water Enable116 HWP-1-C Hot Water Pump 1 Command117 HWP-SPT Hot Water Pump Set Point118 HWP-SS Hot Water Pump Status119 HWR-T Hot Water Return Temperature120 HW-SET Hot Water Reset Set Point121 HWS-FL Hot Water Supply Flow122 HWS-P Hot Water Supply Pressure123 HWS-SPT Hot Water Supply Set Point124 HWS-T Hot Water Supply Temperature125 HW-SYS ENABLE Hot Water System Enable126 HWVLV-C Hot Water Valve Command127 HX-VLV Heat Exchanger Valve128 IA-H Indoor Humidity Sensor129 INST-DMD Instantaneous Demand130 INTV-DMD Interval Demand131 LOOPR-T Loop Return Temperature132 LOOPS-T Loop Supply Temperature133 LPMP-1-C Loop Pump 1 Command134 MAD-CMD Mixed Air Damper Command135 MA-T Mixed Air Temperature136 MAX-CLG Maximum Cooling Set Point137 MAX-HTG Maximum Heating Set Point138 MIN-HTG Minimum Heating Set Point139 MIN-OAD Minimum Outside Air Damper140 OA-CFM Outside Air Cubic Feet Per Minute141 OAD-C Outside Air Damper Position142 OAD-SET Outside Air Damper Set Point143 OAF-C Outside Air Fan Command144 OAF-S Outside Air Fan Status145 OA-H Outside Humidity Sensor146 OA-RH Outside Air Relative Humidity147 OA-T Outside Air Temperature148 OCC-CLG Occupied Cooling149 OCC-HTG Occupied Heating150 OCCTIME Occupied Time (Schedule)151 OCCTIMER Occupied Timer (Schedule)152 OCLG-SP Occupied Cooling Set Point153 OHTG-SP] Occupied Heating Set Point154 OHWP-SPT Occupied Hot Water Sump Set Point


POINTS


155 PH-LEV PH Level156 PH-SET PH Set Point157 PWR-FAIL Power Fail158 PWR-MTR Power Meter159 RAD-C Return Air Damper Position160 RAF-C Return Air Fan Command161 RAF-S Return Air Fan Status162 RA-T Return Air Temperature163 REV-VLV Reversing Valve164 RM-T Room Temperature165 SA-SMKD-C Smoke Detector Command166 SA-SMK-S Smoke Detector Status167 SA-SP Supply Air Set Point168 SA-T Supply Air Temperature169 SETPNT1 Set Point 1170 SETPNT2 Set Point 2171 SF-C Supply Fan Command172 SF-S Supply Fan Status173 SF-VFD Supply Fan Variable Frequency Drive174 SHDN-CMD Shutdown Command175 SMK-S Duct Smoke Detector176 STM-C Steam Command177 STM-S Steam Pressure178 STM-T Steam Temperature179 STM-VLV Steam Valve Operation180 STM-VLV Steam Valve Status181 SUMMER Summer Mode182 SUMWIN-C Summer/Winter Command183 TANK-L-A Tank Level184 TOTAL-KW Total Kilowatt (kW)185 TOTLFLOW Total Flow186 TRIPLOCK Trip Lock Out187 TWR-CMD Tower Command188 UH-ENA Unit Heater Enable189 UH-SPT Unit Heater Set Point190 UNOCC-CLG Unoccupied Cooling191 UNOCC-HTG Unoccupied Heating192 VFD-S Variable Frequency Drive Status193 WINDO-AC Window Air Conditioner194 WINTER Winter Mode195 WSHP-SPT Water Source Heat Pump Set Point196 ZNHTG-SP Zone Heating Set Point197 ZN-T Space/Zone Temperature


SECTION 23 11 25

FACILITY GAS PIPING11/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN GAS ASSOCIATION (AGA)

AGA XR0603 (2006; 8th Ed) AGA Plastic Pipe Manual for Gas Service

AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE (API)

API RP 2009 (2002; R 2007; 7th Ed) Safe Welding, Cutting, and Hot Work Practices in Refineries, Gasoline Plants, and Petrochemical Plants

API Std 598 (2009) Valve Inspecting and Testing

API Std 607 (2010) Testing of Valves: Fire Test for Soft-Seated Quarter-Turn Valves



ASME B1.1 (2003; R 2008) Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN and UNR Thread Form)


ASME B16.11 (2011) Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded


ASME B16.3 (2011) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300

ASME B16.33 (2012) Manually Operated Metallic Gas Valves for Use in Gas Piping Systems Up to 125 psi, Sizes NPS 1/2 - NPS 2

ASME B16.39 (2009) Standard for Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions; Classes 150, 250, and 300




ASME B16.9 (2012) Standard for Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings

ASME B18.2.1 (2012) Square and Hex Bolts and Screws (Inch Series)

ASME B18.2.2 (2010) Nuts for General Applications: Machine Screw Nuts, Hex, Square, Hex Flange, and Coupling Nuts (Inch Series)

ASME B31.9 (2011) Building Services Piping

ASME BPVC SEC IX (2010) BPVC Section IX-Welding and Brazing Qualifications

ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 (2010) BPVC Section VIII-Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels Division 1


ASTM A193/A193M (2012a) Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service and Other Special Purpose Applications

ASTM A194/A194M (2012a) Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure or High-Temperature Service, or Both


ASTM D2513 (2013) Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings

ASTM D2683 (2010; E 2013) Standard Specification for Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing

CSA AMERICA, INC (CSA/AM)

CSA/AM CSA/ANSI LC 1 (2005; Addenda 1B 2011) Fuel Gas Piping Systems Using Corrugated Stainless Steel Tubing (CSST)

CSA STANDARDS (CSA)

CGA 9.2-M88 (1988; R 2009) Manually Operated Shut-Off Valves for Gas Piping Systems










NFPA 54 (2012) National Fuel Gas Code





UL FLAMMABLE & COMBUSTIBLE (2012) Flammable and Combustible Liquids and Gases Equipment Directory


The gas piping system includes natural gas and piping and appurtenances from point of connection with supply system, as indicated, to gas operated equipment within the facility. Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and Section 01 78 24.00 20 FACILITY ELECTRONIC OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SUPPORT INFORMATION (eOMSI), in three separate packages. Section 23 03 00.00 20 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS applies to this section, with additions and modifications specified herein.

1.2.1 Gas Facility System and Equipment Operation

Include shop drawings showing piping layout, locations of system valves, gas line markers and cathodic protection system; step-by-step procedures for system start up, operation and shutdown (index system components and equipment to the system drawings); isolation procedures including valve operation to shutdown or isolate each section of the system (index valves to the system maps and provide separate procedures for normal operation and emergency shutdown if required to be different). Submit Data package No. 4.

1.2.2 Gas Facility System Maintenance

Include maintenance procedures and frequency for system and equipment;



identification of pipe materials and manufacturer by locations, pipe repair procedures, and jointing procedures at transitions to other piping material or material from a different manufacturer. Submit Data Package No.4.

1.2.3 Gas Facility Equipment Maintenance

Include identification of valves, shut-offs, disconnects, and other equipment by materials, manufacturer, vendor identification and location; maintenance procedures and recommended tool kits for valves and equipment; recommended repair methods (i.e., field repair, factory repair, or replacement) for each valve and piece of equipment; and preventive maintenance procedures, possible failure modes and troubleshooting guide. Submit Data Package No. 3.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Gas Piping System; G

SD-03 Product Data

Pipe and Fittings; GGas equipment connectors; GGas Piping System; GPipe Coating Materials; GPressure regulators; GRisers; GTransition fittings; GValves; GWarning and identification tape; G

SD-06 Test Reports

Testing; GPressure Tests; G

Test With Gas; G

SD-07 Certificates

Welders procedures and qualifications; GAssigned number, letter, or symbol; G


PE pipe and fittings; GPipe coating materials; G


Gas facility system and equipment operation; G




Submit manufacturer's descriptive data and installation instructions for approval for compression-type mechanical joints used in joining dissimilar materials and for insulating joints. Mark all valves, flanges and fittings in accordance with MSS SP-25.

1.4.1 Welding Qualifications

a. Weld piping in accordance with qualified procedures using performance qualified welders and welding operators in accordance with API RP 2009, ASME BPVC SEC IX, and ASME B31.9. Welding procedures qualified by others, and welders and welding operators qualified by another employer may be accepted as permitted by ASME B31.9. Notify the Contracting Officer at least 24 hours in advance of tests, and perform at the work site if practicable.

b. Submit a certified copy of welders procedures and qualifications metal and PE in conformance with ASME B31.9 for each welder and welding operator. Submit the assigned number, letter, or symbol that will be used in identifying the work of each welder to the Contracting Officer.

1.4.2 Jointing Thermoplastic and Fiberglass Piping

Perform all jointing of piping using qualified joiners and qualified procedures in accordance with AGA XR0603. Furnish the Contracting Officer with a copy of qualified procedures and list of and identification symbols of qualified joiners. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's visual joint appearance chart, including all PE pipe and fittings.

1.4.3 Shop Drawings

Submit drawings for complete Gas Piping System, within 30 days of contract award, showing location, size and all branches of pipeline; location of all required shutoff valves; and instructions necessary for the installation of gas equipment connectors and supports.


Equipment shall be delivered and stored with protective crating and weatherproof wrapping to provide protection from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Proper protection and care of all material both before and during installation shall be the Contractor's responsibility. Any materials found to be damaged shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. During installation, cap piping and similar openings to keep out dirt and other foreign matter. Any porous materials found to be contaminated with mold or mildew will be replaced at the Contractor's expense. Non-porous materials found to be contaminated with mold or mildew will be disinfected and cleaned prior to installation.

1.5.1 Pipe and Fittings

Handle, transport and store pipe and fittings carefully. Plug or cap pipe and fitting ends during transportation or storage to minimize dirt and moisture entry. Do not subject plastic and wrapped pipe to abrasion. Maintain plastic pipe free of concentrated loads. Discard PE pipe sections and fittings that have been damaged.






1.6.2 Drawings


PART 2 PRODUCTS


Provide materials and equipment which are the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening. Asbestos or products containing asbestos are not allowed. Submit catalog data and installation instructions for pipe, valves, all related system components, pipe coating materials and application procedures. Conform to NFPA 54 and with requirements specified herein. Provide supply piping to appliances or equipment at least as large as the inlets thereof.

2.2 GAS PIPING SYSTEM AND FITTINGS

2.2.1 Above Ground and Within Buildings

a. Pipe: Black carbon steel in accordance with ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, threaded ends for sizes 2 inches and smaller; otherwise, plain end beveled for butt welding.

b. Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, black malleable iron.

c. Socket-Welding Fittings: ASME B16.11, forged steel.

d. Butt-Welding Fittings: ASME B16.9, with backing rings of compatible material.

e. Unions: ASME B16.39, black malleable iron.

f. Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5 steel flanges or convoluted steel flanges conforming to ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1, with flange faces having integral grooves of rectangular cross sections which afford containment for self-energizing gasket material.

2.2.2 Underground Polyethylene (PE)

PE pipe and fittings are as follows:

a. Pipe: ASTM D2513, 100 psig working pressure, Standard Dimension Ratio



(SDR), the ratio of pipe diameter to wall thickness, 11.5 maximum.

b. Socket Fittings: ASTM D2683.

c. Butt-Fusion Fittings: ASTM D2513, molded.

2.2.3 Sealants for Steel Pipe Threaded Joints

Provide joint sealing compound as listed in UL FLAMMABLE & COMBUSTIBLE, Class 20 or less. For taping, use tetrafluoroethylene tape conforming to UL FLAMMABLE & COMBUSTIBLE.

2.2.4 Warning and Identification

Provide pipe flow markings, warning and identification tape, and metal tags as required.

2.2.5 Flange Gaskets

Provide gaskets of nonasbestos compressed material in accordance with ASME B16.21, 1/16 inch thickness, full face or self-centering flat ring type, containing aramid fibers bonded with styrene butadiene rubber (SBR) or nitrile butadiene rubber (NBR) suitable for a maximum 600 degree F service, to be used for hydrocarbon service.

2.2.6 Pipe Threads

Provide pipe threads conforming to ASME B1.20.1.

2.2.7 Escutcheons

Provide chromium-plated steel or chromium-plated brass escutcheons, either one piece or split pattern, held in place by internal spring tension or set screw.

2.2.8 Gas Transition Fittings

a. Provide steel to plastic (PE) designed for steel-to-plastic with tapping tee or sleeve conforming to AGA XR0603 requirements for transitions fittings.. Coat or wrap exposed steel pipe with heavy plastic coating.

c. Provide manually operated shut-off valve conforming to CGA 9.2-M88.

2.2.9 Insulating Pipe Joints

2.2.9.1 Insulating Joint Material

Provide insulating joint material between flanged or threaded metallic pipe systems where shown to control galvanic or electrical action.

2.2.9.2 Threaded Pipe Joints

Provide threaded pipe joints of steel body nut type dielectric unions with insulating gaskets.

2.2.9.3 Flanged Pipe Joints

Provide joints for flanged pipe consisting of full face sandwich-type



flange insulating gasket of the dielectric type, insulating sleeves for flange bolts, and insulating washers for flange nuts.

2.3 VALVES

Provide lockable shutoff or service isolation valves conforming to the following:

2.3.1 Valves 2 Inches and Smaller

Provide valves 2 inches and smaller conforming to ASME B16.33 of materials and manufacture compatible with system materials used.

2.4 RISERS

Provide manufacturer's standard riser, transition from plastic to steel pipe with 7 to 12 mil thick epoxy coating. Use swaged gas-tight construction with O-ring seals, metal insert, and protective sleeve. Provide remote bolt-on or bracket or wall-mounted riser supports.

2.5 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

Provide pipe hangers and supports conforming to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.

2.6 REGULATORS AND SHUTOFF VALVES

2.6.1 PRESSURE REGULATORS

Where indicated on Contract Drawings, provide ferrous bodied regulators with backflow protection, designed to meet the pressure, load and other service conditions.

2.6.1.1 Gas Main Regulators

Equip pressure regulators for main distribution lines, supplied from a source of gas which is at a higher pressure than the maximum allowable operating pressure for the system, with pressure regulating devices of adequate capacity. In addition to the pressure regulating devices, provide a protective method to prevent overpressuring of the system in accordance with ASME B31.8. Suitable protective devices are as follows:

a. Spring-loaded relief valve meeting the provisions of ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1.

b. Pilot-loaded back pressure regulator used as relief valve, so designed that failure of the pilot system will cause the regulator to open.

c. Weight-loaded relief valves conforming to ASME PTC 25.

d. Monitoring regulator installed in series with the primary pressure regulator.

e. Series regulator installed upstream from the primary regulator, set to limit the pressure on the inlet of the primary regulator continuously to the maximum allowable operating pressure of the system, or less.

f. Automatic shutoff device installed in series with the primary



regulator, set to shut off when the pressure on the distribution system reaches the maximum allowable operating pressure of the system, or less, which remains closed until manually reset.

g. Spring-loaded, diaphragm type relief valves.

2.6.1.2 Service Line Regulators

Provide ferrous bodied pressure regulators for individual service lines, capable of reducing distribution line pressure to pressures indicated. Provide regulators where indicated with flow rate and pressure regulation characteristics as scheduled.

Provide regulator(s) with external concealed adjustment having a single port with orifice diameter no greater than that recommended by the manufacturer for the maximum gas pressure at the regulator inlet. Provide regulator valve vent of resilient materials designed to withstand flow conditions when pressed against the valve port, capable of regulating downstream pressure within limits of accuracy and limiting the buildup of pressure under no-flow conditions to 50 percent or less of the discharge pressure maintained under flow conditions. Provide a self contained service regulator, sized to meet to required demand.

2.7 BOLTING (BOLTS AND NUTS)

Stainless steel bolting; ASTM A193/A193M, Grade B8M or B8MA, Type 316, for bolts; and ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 8M, Type 316, for nuts. Dimensions of bolts, studs, and nuts shall conform with ASME B18.2.1 and ASME B18.2.2 with coarse threads conforming to ASME B1.1, with Class 2A fit for bolts and studs and Class 2B fit for nuts. Bolts or bolt-studs shall extend through the nuts and may have reduced shanks of a diameter not less than the diameter at root of threads. Bolts shall have American Standard regular square or heavy hexagon heads; nuts shall be American Standard heavy semifinished hexagonal.

2.8 GASKETS

Fluorinated elastomer, compatible with flange faces.


General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application. Where more than single type is specified for application, selection shall be at Installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category.

2.9.1 Pipe Markers

Provide adhesive type pipe markers with nomenclature that closely matches contract drawings. Comply with designations indicated on contract drawings for piping system nomenclature and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length. Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as a separate unit of plastic.

a. Pressure-Sensitive Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, permanent adhesive, color-coded, pressure-sensitive vinyl pipe markers, complying with ASME A13.1.



b. Application: For exterior diameters greater than 2 inches (including insulation if any), provide continuous directional flow arrow tape around pipe circumference; two places, before and after pipe marker. Provide adhesive plastic pipe markers. For external diameters less than 2 inches (including insulation if any), provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the following methods:

1. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap.2. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation).

c. Underground Warning Tape shall be 0.004 inch thick, 6 inches wide, yellow polyethylene with a ferrous metallic core, acid and alkali-resistant and shall have a minimum strength of 1750 psi lengthwise and 1500 psi crosswise with an elongation factor of 350 percent. Provide bold black letters on the tape identifying the type of system. Tape color and lettering shall be unaffected by moisture and other substances contained in the backfill material.

2.9.2 Color Coding

Color code marking shall be of the color listed in Table I and the side listed in Table II. The arrows shall be installed adjacent to each band to indicate the direction of flow in the pipe. The legends shall be printed in upper-case black letters as listed in Table I. Letter sizes shall be as listed in Table II. Marking shall be painted or applied using colored, pressure-sensitive adhesive markers of standard manufacturer. Paint shall be as specified for insulated and uninsulated piping.


Natural Gas Yellow Black Natural Gas Propane Yellow Black Propane



Less than 1-1/2 8 8 x 2 1/2 1-1/2 to 2 8 8 x 2 3/4 2 to 6 12 8 x 2 1-1/4 8 to 10 24 12 x 3 2-1/2

2.9.3 Valve Tags

Provide 19-gage polished brass valve tags with stamp-engraved piping system abbreviation in 1/4 inch high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2 inch high, and with hole for fastener, or engraved plastic laminate valve tags, with piping system abbreviation in 1/4 inch high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2 inch high, and with hole for fastener. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to



valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose. Compile valve schedule for each service. For each page of valve schedule, provide laminated plastic coated cardboard stock sheets.







Provide manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, color coded equipment markers. Include terminology matching equipment schedules as closely as possible. Provide approximate 2 inch x 4 inches markers for control devices, and 4 inch x 6 inches for equipment. Identify equipment and electrical devices furnished under this section.


Provide pre-printed or partially pre-printed accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matt finish suitable for writing, approximately 3 inch x 6 inch with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre-printed wording including large-size primary wording (as examples; DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT OPERATE).


Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment. Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and specified, provide identification which indicates individual system number as well as service (as examples; Boiler No. 2, Unit Heater No. 1H,).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy or areas of conflict before performing the work.

3.2 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING

Provide required excavation, backfilling, and compaction as specified in Section 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL.



3.3 GAS PIPING SYSTEM

Provide a gas piping system from the point of delivery, to the connection to each gas utilization device.

3.3.1 Protection and Cleaning of Materials and Components

Protect equipment, pipe, and tube openings by closing with caps or plugs during installation. At the completion of all work, thoroughly clean the entire system.

3.3.2 Workmanship and Defects

Piping, tubing and fittings shall be clear and free of cutting burrs and defects in structure or threading and shall be thoroughly brushed and chip-and scale-blown. Repair of defects in piping, tubing or fittings is not allowed; replace defective items when found.

3.3.3 Buried Plastic Lines

Provide totally PE piping. Prior to installation, obtain printed instructions and technical assistance in proper installation techniques from pipe manufacturer. When joining new PE pipe to existing pipe line, ascertain what procedural changes in the fusion process is necessary to attain optimum bonding.

a. PE Piping: Prior to installation, Contractor shall have supervising and installing personnel, certified in accordance with paragraph entitled "Welder's Qualifications." Provide fusion-welded joints except where transitions have been specified. Use electrically heated tools, thermostatically controlled and equipped with temperature indication. (Where connection must be made to existing plastic pipe, contractor shall be responsible for determination of compatibility of materials and procedural changes in fusion process necessary to attain maximum integrity of bond.)

b. Laying PE Pipe: Bury pipe 24 inches below finish grade or deeper when indicated. Lay in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

3.3.4 Connections to Existing Pipeline

When making connections to live gas mains, use pressure tight installation equipment operated by workmen trained and experienced in making hot taps. For connections to existing underground pipeline or service branch, use transition fittings for dissimilar materials.

3.3.5 Wrapping

Where connection to existing steel line is made underground, tape wrap new steel transition fittings and exposed existing pipe having damaged coating. Clean pipe to bare metal. Initially stretch first layer of tape to conform to the surface while spirally half-lapping. Apply a second layer, half-lapped and spiraled as the first layer, but with spirals perpendicular to first wrapping. Use 10 mil minimum thick polyethylene tape. In lieu of tape wrap, heat shrinkable 10 mil minimum thick polyethylene sleeve may be used.



3.4 INSTALLATION

Install the gas system in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations and applicable provisions of NFPA 54 and AGA XR0603, and as indicated. Perform all pipe cutting without damage to the pipe, with an approved type of mechanical cutter, unless otherwise authorized. Use wheel cutters where practicable. On steel pipe 6 inches and larger, an approved gas cutting and beveling machine may be used. Cut thermoplastic and fiberglass pipe in accordance with AGA XR0603.

3.4.1 Metallic Piping Installation

Bury underground piping a minimum of 18 inches below grade. Make changes in direction of piping with fittings only; mitering or notching pipe to form elbows and tees or other similar type construction is not permitted. Branch connection may be made with either tees or forged branch outlet fittings. Provide branch outlet fittings which are forged, flared for improvement of flow where attached to the run, and reinforced against external strains. Do not use aluminum alloy pipe in exterior locations or underground.

3.4.2 Connections Between Metallic and Plastic Piping

Connections between metallic and plastic piping are only allowed outside, underground, and with approved transition fittings.

3.4.3 Concealed Piping in Buildings

Do not use combinations of fittings (unions, tubing fittings, running threads, right- and left-hand couplings, bushings, and swing joints) to conceal piping within buildings.

3.4.3.1 Piping in Partitions

Locate concealed piping and tubing in hollow, rather than solid, partitions. Protect tubing passing through walls or partitions against physical damage both during and after construction, and provide appropriate safety markings and labels. Provide protection of concealed pipe in accordance with CSA/AM CSA/ANSI LC 1.

3.4.4 Aboveground Piping

Run aboveground piping as straight as practicable along the alignment and elevation indicated, with a minimum of joints, and separately supported from other piping system and equipment. Install exposed horizontal piping no farther than 6 inches from nearest parallel wall and at an elevation which prevents standing, sitting, or placement of objects on the piping.

3.4.5 Final Gas Connections

Unless otherwise specified, make final connections with rigid metallic pipe and fittings. Provide accessible gas shutoff valve and coupling for each gas equipment item.

3.5 PIPE JOINTS

Design and install pipe joints to effectively sustain the longitudinal pull-out forces caused by contraction of the piping or superimposed loads.



3.5.1 Threaded Metallic Joints

Provide threaded joints in metallic pipe with tapered threads evenly cut and made with UL approved graphite joint sealing compound for gas service or tetrafluoroethylene tape applied to the male threads only. Threaded joints up to 1-1/2 inches in diameter may be made with approved tetrafluoroethylene tape. Threaded joints up to 2 inches in diameter may be made with approved joint sealing compound. After cutting and before threading, ream pipe and remove all burrs. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks is not permitted.

3.5.2 Welded Metallic Joints

Conform beveling, alignment, heat treatment, and inspection of welds to NFPA 54. Remove weld defects and make repairs to the weld, or remove the weld joints entirely and reweld. After filler metal has been removed from its original package, protect and store so that its characteristics or welding properties are not affected adversely. Do not use electrodes that have been wetted or have lost any of their coating.

3.5.3 PE Fusion Welding Inspection

Visually inspect butt joints by comparing with, manufacturer's visual joint appearance chart. Inspect fusion joints for proper fused connection. Replace defective joints by cutting out defective joints or replacing fittings. Inspect 100 percent of all joints and reinspect all corrections. Arrange with the pipe manufacturer's representative in the presence of the Contracting Officer to make first time inspection.

3.6 JOINING PE TO METALLIC PIPING OR TUBING

When compression type mechanical joints are used, provide gasket material in the fittings compatible with the plastic piping and with the gas in the system. Use an internal tubular rigid stiffener in conjunction with the fitting, flush with end of the pipe or tubing, extending at least to the outside end of the compression fitting when installed. Remove all rough or sharp edges from stiffener. Do not force fit stiffener in the plastic. Split tubular stiffeners are not allowed.

3.7 BUILDING SURFACE PENETRATIONS

Unless otherwise indicated, provide pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, and concrete floors with pipe sleeves fitted into place at the time of construction. Sleeves shall be fabricated of black steel pipe; ASTM A53/A53M, Standard weight. Extend each sleeve through its respective wall or floor and cut flush with each surface, except in floors; extend sleeves above slab at least 2 inches. Unless indicated to be equipped with a modular mechanical sealing assembly, or otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings, provide sleeves large enough to provide a minimum clearance of 1/4 inch all around the pipe/insulation penetrating the sleeve. For insulated piping, insulation shall be continuous through the sleeve. Do not install sleeves in structural members except where indicated or approved. Sleeves in interior gypboard partitions are generally not required unless specifically indicated on the Architectural Drawing partition details.

3.7.1 Fire-Rated/Smoke-Rated Penetrations

Details are indicated on the Architectural Drawings indicating conditions



for penetrations through fire and smoke rate assemblies. Provide sleeved or non-sleeved installation as indicated. Seal the annular space between the pipe and sleeve with fire-stopping material and sealant that meet the requirement of Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.

3.7.2 Waterproof Penetrations


3.8 ESCUTCHEONS

Provide escutcheons for all finished surfaces where gas piping passes through floors, walls, or ceilings except in boiler, utility, or equipment rooms.

3.9 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

Provide drips, grading of the lines, freeze protection, and branch outlet locations as shown and conforming to the requirements of NFPA 54.

3.10 BUILDING STRUCTURE

Do not weaken any building structure by the installation of any gas piping. Do not cut or notch beams, joists or columns. Attach piping supports to metal decking. Do not attach supports to the underside of concrete filled floors or concrete roof decks unless approved by the Contracting Officer.

3.11 PIPING SYSTEM SUPPORTS

Support gas piping systems in buildings with pipe hooks, metal pipe straps, bands or hangers suitable for the size of piping or tubing. Do not support any gas piping system by other piping. Conform spacing of supports in gas piping and tubing installations to the requirements of NFPA 54. Conform the selection and application of supports in gas piping and tubing installations to the requirements of MSS SP-69. In the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member, use a clip or clamp where each pipe crosses the base support member. Spacing of the base support members is not to exceed the hanger and support spacing required for any of the individual pipes in the multiple pipe run. Rigidly connect the clips or clamps to the common base member. Provide a clearance of 1/8 inch between the pipe and clip or clamp for all piping which may be subjected to thermal expansion.



3.12 ELECTRICAL BONDING AND GROUNDING

Provide a gas piping system within the building which is electrically continuous and bonded to a grounding electrode as required by NFPA 70.

3.13 SHUTOFF VALVE

Install the main gas shutoff valve controlling the gas piping system to be easily accessible for operation, as indicated, protected from physical damage, and marked with a metal tag to clearly identify the piping system controlled. Install valves approximately at locations indicated. Orient stems vertically, with operators on top, or horizontally. Provide stop valve on service branch at connection to main and shut-off valve on riser outside of building.

3.14 PRESSURE REGULATOR

Provide ball valve ahead of regulator. Install regulator outside of building and 18 inches aboveground on riser. On outlet side of regulator, provide a union and a 3/8 inch gage tap with plug.

3.15 TESTING

Submit test procedures and reports in booklet form tabulating test and measurements performed; dated after award of this contract, and stating the Contractor's name and address, the project name and location, and a list of the specific requirements which are being certified. Test entire gas piping system to ensure that it is gastight prior to putting into service. Prior to testing, purge the system, clean, and clear all foreign material. Test each joint with an approved gas detector, soap and water, or an equivalent nonflammable solution. Inspect and test each valve in conformance with API Std 598 and API Std 607. Complete testing before any work is covered, enclosed, or concealed, and perform with due regard for the safety of employees and the public during the test. Install bulkheads, anchorage and bracing suitably designed to resist test pressures if necessary, and as directed and or approved by the Contracting Officer. Do not use oxygen as a testing medium.

3.15.1 Pressure Tests

Submit test procedures and reports in booklet form tabulating test and measurements performed; dated after award of this contract, and stating the Contractor's name and address, the project name and location, and a list of the specific requirements which are being certified. Before appliances are connected, test by filling the piping systems with air or an inert gas to withstand a minimum pressure of 3 pounds gauge for a period of not less than 10 minutes as specified in NFPA 54 without showing any drop in pressure. Do not use Oxygen for test. Measure pressure with a mercury manometer, slope gauge, or an equivalent device calibrated to be read in increments of not greater than 0.1 pound. Isolate the source of pressure before the pressure tests are made.

3.15.2 Test With Gas

Before turning on gas under pressure into any piping, close all openings from which gas can escape. Immediately after turning on the gas, check the piping system for leakage by using a laboratory-certified gas meter, an appliance orifice, a manometer, or equivalent device. Conform all testing to the requirements of NFPA 54. If leakage is recorded, shut off the gas



supply, repair the leak , and repeat the tests until all leaks have been stopped.

3.15.3 Purging

After testing is completed, and before connecting any appliances, fully purge all gas piping. Do not purge piping into the combustion chamber of an appliance. Do not purge the open end of piping systems into confined spaces or areas where there are ignition sources unless the safety precautions recommended in NFPA 54 are followed.

3.15.4 Labor, Materials and Equipment

Furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for conducting the testing and purging.


Identify piping, main shutoff valve and physical hazards in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.144, ASME A13.1, ANSI Z535.1 and as modified herein. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment. Identify each gas piping system indicated on contract drawings.




b. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for terminal units; mark each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern.


d. At access doors, valve boxes and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping.



g. Entire length of below ground piping; warning tape.

3.16.2 Valves

Provide valve tag on every shutoff valve and facility main motor actuated shutoff valve. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system. Turn valve schedules over to Contracting Officer.






SECTION 23 23 00

REFRIGERANT PIPING10/07

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AHRI 710 I-P (2009) Performance Rating of Liquid-Line Driers

AHRI 720 (2002) Refrigerant Access Valves and Hose Connectors

ANSI/AHRI 760 (2007) Performance Rating of Solenoid Valves for Use With Volatile Refrigerants


ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34 (2010; Addenda A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, N and O; Errata 2011; INT 1 2012; Errata 2012; Addenda AD, SD, AE and AF 2013) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15-Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems and ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 34-Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants


AWS A5.8/A5.8M (2011; Amendment 2012) Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding

AWS BRH (2007; 5th Ed) Brazing Handbook

AWS Z49.1 (2012) Safety in Welding and Cutting and Allied Processes





ASME B31.5 (2013) Refrigeration Piping and Heat



Transfer Components



ASTM B280 (2013) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service

ASTM B32 (2008) Standard Specification for Solder Metal

ASTM B75/B75M (2011) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube

ASTM B813 (2010) Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube

ASTM D3308 (2012) PTFE Resin Skived Tape






1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Refrigerant Piping System; G

Drawings for each ductless split system, at least 5 weeks prior to beginning construction, shall provide adequate detail to demonstrate compliance with contract requirements. At the minimum, drawings shall consist of:

a. Equipment layouts which identify assembly and installation details.



b. Piping layouts which identify locations and sizes of piping, all valves and fittings.

c. Plans and elevations which identify installation heights, clearances required for maintenance and operation of associate equipment.

d. Foundation drawings, bolt-setting information, and foundation bolts prior to concrete foundation construction or roof equipment support installation for all connected equipment.

e. Installation details, if piping and equipment are to be supported other than as indicated, which include loadings and type of frames, brackets, stanchions, or other supports.

Submit dimensioned shop drawings indicating piping and equipment showing both the accurately scaled piping and its relationship to space enclosure. The drawings shall utilize the building floor plans and roof plans. Provide in accordance with Section 01 33 00, "Submittal Procedures," and as modified by this section. Illustration shall be drawn to a minimum scale of 1/4 inch = 1 foot. Drawings shall indicate actual plan dimensions and elevations above finished floor and/or grade. Provide illustrations including sections to clarify elevations of equipment, equipment connections, piping, and piping accessories. Drawings shall conform to standard drafting industry procedures. Replication of the Contract Drawings; marked up or otherwise, as a substitute to the requirements of this Section will not be acceptable. Include Contractors name, project title, date and phone number in title block. Coordinate piping and equipment with work of all other trades. This pre-installation planning effort shall consider and include the submitted and approved equipment manufacturer recommendations relating to pipe sizing, lift, oil return, maximum pipe lengths and pipe slopes. Include as a minimum the following:

a. Refrigerant piping; plan and vertical sections.

b. Terminal equipment.

c. Pipeline accessories and specialties; valves strainers, access points, oil traps, branch connection details, etc.

d. Air cooled condensing units.

e. Pipe penetrations through walls and floors including details for penetrations.

f. Location of concrete foundations.

SD-03 Product Data

Refrigerant Piping System; G

Manufacturer's standard catalog data, at least 5 weeks prior to the purchase or installation of a particular component, highlighted to show material, size, options, performance charts and curves, etc. in adequate detail to demonstrate compliance with contract requirements. Include in the data manufacturer's



recommended installation instructions and procedures. Provide data for the following components as a minimum:

a. Piping and Fittings.

b. Valves.

c. Piping Accessories.

d. Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports.

Refrigerant Piping Tests; G

A schedule, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of related testing, for each test. Identify the proposed date, time, and location for each test.

Demonstrations; G

A schedule, at least 2 weeks prior to the date of the proposed training course, which identifies the date, time, and location for the training.

Verification of Dimensions

A letter, at least 2 weeks prior to beginning construction, including the date the site was visited, conformation of existing conditions, and any discrepancies found.

SD-06 Test Reports

Refrigerant Piping Tests

Six copies of the report in bound 8 1/2 by 11 inch booklets documenting all phases of the tests performed. The report shall include initial test summaries, all repairs/adjustments made, and the final test results.

SD-07 Certificates

Service Organization; G

A certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications. The service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and be able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.


MaintenanceOperation and Maintenance Manuals; G

Six complete copies of an operation manual in bound 8 1/2 by 11 inch booklets listing step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, abnormal shutdown, emergency shutdown, and normal shutdown at least 4 weeks prior to the first training course. The booklets shall include the manufacturer's name, model



number, and parts list. The manuals shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, and a brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features.

Six complete copies of maintenance manual in bound 8 1/2 x 11 inch booklets listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and a trouble shooting guide. The manuals shall include piping layouts and simplified wiring and control diagrams of the system as installed.


Equipment shall be delivered and stored with protective crating and weatherproof wrapping to provide protection from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Proper protection and care of all material both before and during installation shall be the Contractor's responsibility. Any materials found to be damaged shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. During installation, cap piping and similar openings to keep out dirt and other foreign matter. Any porous materials found to be contaminated with mold or mildew will be replaced at the Contractor's expense. Non-porous materials found to be contaminated with mold or mildew will be disinfected and cleaned prior to installation.



The Contractor shall become familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions in the field, and shall advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing the work.

1.4.2 Contract Drawings

Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories that may be required. Carefully investigate the plumbing, fire protection, electrical, structural and finish conditions that would affect the work to be performed and arrange such work accordingly, furnishing required offsets, fittings, and accessories to meet such conditions.

1.5 MAINTENANCE

1.5.1 General

Operation and maintenance data shall comply with the requirements of Section 01 78 24.05 20 FACILITY OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SUPPORT INFORMATION and as specified herein.

1.5.2 Extra Materials

Submit spare parts data for each different item of equipment specified, after approval of detail drawings and not later than 2 months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. The data shall include a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply, a recommended spare parts list for 1 year of operation, and a list of the parts recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced on a routine basis.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

a. Provide materials and equipment which are standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such products, that are of a similar material, design and workmanship and that have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening.

b. The 2 year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The 2 years experience shall be satisfactorily completed by a product which has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures. Products having less than a 2 year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation, for not less than 6000 hours exclusive of the manufacturer's factory tests, can be shown.

c. Products shall be supported by a service organization. System components shall be environmentally suitable for the indicated locations.

d. Exposed equipment moving parts, parts that produce high operating temperature, parts which may be electrically energized, and parts that may be a hazard to operating personnel shall be insulated, fully enclosed, guarded, or fitted with other types of safety devices. Install safety devices so that proper operation of equipment is not impaired. Welding and cutting safety requirements shall be in accordance with AWS Z49.1.

2.2 ELECTRICAL WORK

Electrical equipment and wiring shall be in accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Field wiring shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation specified and any control wiring required for controls and devices specified, but not shown, shall be provided.

2.3 REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM

Refrigerant piping, valves, fittings, and accessories shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34 and ASME B31.5, except as specified herein. Refrigerant piping, valves, fittings, and accessories shall be compatible with the fluids used and capable of withstanding the pressures and temperatures of the service. Refrigerant piping, valves, and accessories used for refrigerant service shall be cleaned, dehydrated, and sealed (capped or plugged) prior to shipment from the manufacturer's plant.

2.4 PIPE, FITTINGS AND END CONNECTIONS (JOINTS)

2.4.1 Copper Tubing

Copper tubing shall conform to ASTM B280 annealed or hard drawn as required. Unless otherwise noted copper tubing shall be soft annealed where bending is required and hard drawn where no bending is required. Soft annealed copper tubing shall not be used in sizes larger than 1-3/8 inches. Joints shall be brazed. Wrought copper and bronze solder-joint



pressure fittings shall conform to ASME B16.22 and ASTM B75/B75M. Joints and fittings for brazed joint shall be wrought-copper or forged-brass sweat fittings. Cast sweat-type joints and fittings shall not be allowed for brazed joints. Brass or bronze adapters for brazed tubing may be used for connecting tubing to flanges and to threaded ends of valves and equipment. Final connections to equipment shall be soldered or threaded.

2.4.2 Solder

Solder shall conform to ASTM B32, grade Sb5, tin-antimony alloy for service pressures up to 150 psig. Solder flux shall be liquid or paste form, non-corrosive and conform to ASTM B813.

2.4.3 Brazing Filler Metal

Filler metal shall conform to AWS A5.8/A5.8M, Type BAg-5 with AWS Type 3 flux, except Type BCuP-5 or BCuP-6 may be used for brazing copper-to-copper joints.

2.5 VALVES

Valves shall be designed, manufactured, and tested specifically for refrigerant service. Valve bodies shall be brass. Valves 1 inch and smaller shall have brazed or socket welded connections. Threaded end connections shall not be used, except in gauge or accessory lines where maintenance disassembly is required and soldered connections cannot be used. Internal parts shall be removable for inspection or replacement without applying heat or breaking pipe connections. Valve stems exposed to the atmosphere shall be stainless steel or corrosion resistant metal plated carbon steel. Direction of flow shall be legibly and permanently indicated on the valve body. Purge, charge and receiver valves shall be of manufacturer's standard configuration.

2.5.1 Refrigerant Stop Valves

Valve shall be the globe or full-port ball type with a back-seating stem especially packed for refrigerant service. Valve packing shall be replaceable under line pressure. Valve shall be provided with a wrench operator and a seal cap. Valve shall be the straight or angle pattern design as indicated.

2.5.2 Check Valves

Valve shall be the swing or lift type as required to provide positive shutoff at the differential pressure indicated. Valve shall be provided with resilient seat.

2.5.3 Liquid Solenoid Valves

Valves shall comply with ANSI/AHRI 760 and be suitable for continuous duty with applied voltages 15 percent under and 5 percent over nominal rated voltage at maximum and minimum encountered pressure and temperature service conditions. Valves shall be direct-acting type, packless, except that packed stem, seal capped, manual lifting provisions shall be furnished. Solenoid coils shall be moisture-proof, UL approved, totally encapsulated or encapsulated and metal jacketed as required. Valves shall have safe working pressure of 400 psi and a maximum operating pressure differential of at least 200 psi at 85 percent rated voltage. Valves shall have an operating pressure differential suitable for the refrigerant used.



2.5.4 Refrigerant Access Valves

Refrigerant access valves and hose connections shall be in accordance with AHRI 720.

2.6 PIPING ACCESSORIES

2.6.1 Filter Driers

Driers shall conform to AHRI 710 I-P and as modified by this section. Sizes 5/8 inch and larger shall be the full flow, replaceable core type. Sizes 1/2 inch and smaller shall be the sealed type. Cores shall be of suitable desiccant that will not plug, cake, dust, channel, or break down, and shall remove water, acid, and foreign material from the refrigerant. Filter driers shall be constructed so that none of the desiccant will pass into the refrigerant lines. Minimum bursting pressure shall be 1,500 psi. Provide valved bypass piping around each filter dryer with dryer shutoff valves to enable replacement.

2.6.2 Sight Glass

2.6.2.1 Assembly and Components

Assembly shall be pressure- and temperature-rated and constructed of materials suitable for the service. Glass shall be borosilicate type. Ferrous components subject to condensation shall be electro-galvanized.

2.6.2.2 Bull's-Eye and Inline Sight Glass Reflex Lens

Bull's-eye and inline sight glass reflex lens shall be provided where indicated for dead-end liquid service. For pipe line mounting, two plain lenses in one body suitable for backlighted viewing shall be provided. Body shall be forged brass or bronze.

2.6.2.3 Moisture Indicator

Indicator shall be a self-reversible action, moisture reactive, color changing media. Indicator shall be furnished with full-color-printing tag containing color, moisture and temperature criteria. Unless otherwise indicated, the moisture indicator shall be an integral part of each corresponding sight glass.

2.6.3 Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports

Pipe hangers, inserts, guides, and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69. Hangers for copper piping shall be copper clad or include felt-lined steel compression bushings.

2.6.4 Escutcheons

Escutcheons shall be chromium-plated iron or chromium-plated brass, either one piece or split pattern, held in place by internal spring tension or set screws.


General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application. Where more than single type is specified



for application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category.



a. Snap-On Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid snap-on, color-coded pipe markers, complying with ASME A13.1.

b. Pressure-Sensitive Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, permanent adhesive, color-coded, pressure-sensitive vinyl pipe markers, complying with ASME A13.1.

c. Application: For exterior diameters greater than 2 inch (including insulation if any), provide continuous directional flow arrow tape around pipe circumference; two places, before and after pipe marker. Provide adhesive plastic pipe markers. For external diameters less than 2 inch(including insulation if any), provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the following methods:

(1) Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker.(2) Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap.(3) Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation).

2.7.2 Color Coding


TABLE I COLOR CODES FOR MARKING PIPE

Letters andMaterials

Band Arrow Legend

Refrigerant suction

Yellow Black RS

Refrigerant liquid Yellow Black RL

Refrigerant hot gas

Yellow Black HG

Refrigerant vent Yellow Black Vent

TABLE II COLOR CODES FOR MARKING PIPE



Outside Diameterof Pipe Covering (in)

Width of Color Band (in)

ArrowLength x Width (in)

Size of LegendLetters and Numerals (in)

Less than 38 8 8 x 2 1/2

2.7.3 Valve Tags

Provide 19-gage polished brass valve tags with stamp-engraved piping system abbreviation in 1/4 inch high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2 inch high, and with hole for fastener, or engraved plastic laminate valve tags, with piping system abbreviation in 1/4 inch high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2 inch high, and with hole for fastener. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose. Compile valve schedule for each service. For each page of valve schedule, provide laminated plastic coated cardboard stock sheets.

a. Provide 1-1/2 inch diameter tags, except as otherwise indicated.b. Provide size and shape as specified or scheduled for each piping

system.c. Fill tag engraving with black enamel.




Provide manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, color coded equipment markers. Include terminology matching equipment schedules as closely as possible. Provide approximate 2 inch x 4 inch markers for control devices, and 4 inch x 6 inch for equipment. Identify equipment and electrical devices furnished under this section.


Provide pre-printed or partially pre-printed accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matt finish suitable for writing, approximately 3 inch x 6 inch with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre-printed wording including large-size primary wording (as examples; DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT OPERATE).


Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not



otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment. Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and specified, provide identification which indicates individual system number as well as service (as examples; Condensing Unit No. 2, Fan Coil Unit No. 1, Evaporator 3.1.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

After becoming familiar with all details of the work, perform a verification of dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancies before performing any work.

3.2 INSTALLATION

Pipe and fitting installation shall conform to the requirements of ASME B31.1. Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the jobsite, and worked into place without springing or forcing, completely clearing all windows, doors, and other openings. Cutting or other weakening of the building structure to facilitate piping installation will not be permitted without written approval. Pipe or tubing shall be cut square, shall have burrs removed by reaming, and shall permit free expansion and contraction without causing damage to the building structure, pipe, joints, or hangers. Provide pipe and fittings for each split-refrigeration system.

3.2.1 Directional Changes

Changes in direction shall be made with fittings, except that bending of pipe 4 inches and smaller will be permitted and wide weep bends are formed. Changes in direction for hard drawn copper tubing shall be made with fittings. Mitering or notching pipe or other similar construction to form elbows or tees will not be permitted. The centerline radius of bends shall not be less than 6 diameters of the pipe. Bent pipe showing kinks, wrinkles, flattening, or other malformations will not be accepted.

3.2.2 Functional Requirements

Piping shall be installed 1/2 inch/10 feet of pipe in the direction of flow to ensure adequate oil drainage. Open ends of refrigerant lines or equipment shall be properly capped or plugged during installation to keep moisture, dirt, or other foreign material out of the system. Piping shall remain capped until installation. Equipment piping shall be in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations and the contract drawings. Equipment and piping arrangements shall fit into space allotted and allow adequate acceptable clearances for installation, replacement, entry, servicing, and maintenance.

3.2.3 Fittings and End Connections

3.2.3.1 Threaded Connections

Threaded connections shall be made with tapered threads and made tight with PTFE tape complying with ASTM D3308 or equivalent thread-joint compound applied to the male threads only. Not more than three threads shall show after the joint is made.



3.2.3.2 Brazed Connections

Brazing shall be performed in accordance with AWS BRH, except as modified herein. During brazing, the pipe and fittings shall be filled with a pressure regulated inert gas, such as nitrogen, to prevent the formation of scale. Before brazing copper joints, both the outside of the tube and the inside of the fitting shall be cleaned with a wire fitting brush until the entire joint surface is bright and clean. Brazing flux shall not be used. Surplus brazing material shall be removed at all joints. Tubing shall be protected against oxidation during brazing by continuous purging of the inside of the piping using nitrogen. Piping shall be supported prior to brazing and not be sprung or forced.

3.2.4 Valves

3.2.4.1 General

Refrigerant stop valves shall be installed on each side of each piece of equipment such as compressors condensers, evaporators, receivers, and other similar items, to provide partial system isolation as required for maintenance or repair. Stop valves shall be installed with stems horizontal unless otherwise indicated. Ball valves shall be installed with stems positioned to facilitate operation and maintenance. Isolating valves for pressure gauges and switches shall be external to thermal insulation. Safety switches shall not be fitted with isolation valves. Filter dryers having access ports may be considered a point of isolation. Purge valves shall be provided at all points of systems where accumulated noncondensable gases would prevent proper system operation. Valves shall be furnished to match line size, unless otherwise indicated or approved.

3.2.5 Filter Dryer

A liquid line filter dryer shall be provided on each refrigerant circuit located such that all liquid refrigerant passes through a filter dryer. Dryers shall be full refrigerant liquid line size. Dryers shall be installed with valved bypass piping such that it can be isolated from the system, the isolated portion of the system evacuated, and the filter dryer replaced. Dryers shall be installed in the horizontal position except replaceable core filter dryers may be installed in the vertical position with the access flange on the bottom.

3.2.6 Sight Glass

A moisture indicating sight glass shall be installed in all refrigerant circuits down stream of all filter dryers and where indicated. Site glasses shall be full line size.

3.2.7 Access Fittings

Provide Schraeder access fittings at locations indicated.


Pipe hangers, inserts, and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, except as modified herein. Pipe hanger types 5, 12, and 26 shall not be used. Hangers used to support piping 2 inches and larger shall be fabricated to permit adequate adjustment after erection while still supporting the load. Piping subjected to vertical movement, when operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures, shall be supported by variable



spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers. Provide dielectric isolation between ferrous and copper materials at each support and hanger location consisting of either copper clad hanger and support materials or factory fabricated felt-lined galvanized steel mechanical compression bushings.

3.2.8.1 Hangers

Type 3 shall not be used on insulated piping.

3.2.8.2 Inserts

Type 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete is placed. Continuous inserts which allow more adjustments may be used if they otherwise meet the requirements for Type 18 inserts.

3.2.8.3 C-Clamps

Type 19 and 23 C-clamps shall be torqued in accordance with MSS SP-69 and have both locknuts and retaining devices, furnished by the manufacturer. Field-fabricated C-clamp bodies or retaining devices are not acceptable.

3.2.8.4 Angle Attachments

Type 20 attachments used on angles and channels shall be furnished with an added malleable-iron heel plate or adapter.

3.2.8.5 Horizontal Pipe Supports

Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP-69 and a support shall be installed not over 1 foot from the pipe fitting joint at each change in direction of the piping. Pipe supports shall be spaced not over 5 feet apart at valves. Pipe hanger loads suspended from steel joist with hanger loads between panel points in excess of 50 pounds shall have the excess hanger loads suspended from panel points.

3.2.8.6 Vertical Pipe Supports

Vertical pipe shall be supported at each floor, except at slab-on-grade, and at intervals of not more than 15 feet not more than 8 feet from end of risers, and at vent terminations.

3.2.8.7 Multiple Pipe Runs

In the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member, a clip or clamp shall be used where each pipe crosses the base support member. Spacing of the base support members shall not exceed the hanger and support spacing required for an individual pipe in the multiple pipe run.

3.2.8.8 Structural Attachments

Attachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast-in concrete inserts, built-in anchors, or masonry anchor devices. Inserts and anchors shall be applied with a safety factor not less than 5. Supports shall not be attached to metal decking. Masonry anchors for overhead applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only. Structural steel brackets required to support piping, headers, and equipment, but not shown, shall be provided under this section. Material used for support shall be as specified under Section 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL.




Unless otherwise indicated, provide pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, and concrete floors with pipe sleeves fitted into place at the time of construction. Sleeves shall be fabricated of black steel pipe; ASTM A53/A53M, Standard weight. Extend each sleeve through its respective wall or floor and cut flush with each surface, except in floors; extend sleeves above slab at least 2 inches. Unless indicated to be equipped with a modular mechanical sealing assembly, or otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings, provide sleeves large enough to provide a minimum clearance of 1/4 inch all around the pipe/insulation penetrating the sleeve. For insulated piping, insulation shall be continuous through the sleeve and penetration. Do not install sleeves in structural members except where indicated or approved. Sleeves in interior gypboard partitions are generally not required unless specifically indicated on the Architectural Drawing partition details.

3.2.9.1 Fire-Rated/Smoke-Rated Penetrations

Details are indicated on the Architectural Drawings indicating conditions for penetrations through fire and smoke rate assemblies. Provide sleeved or non-sleeved installation as indicated. Seal the annular space between the pipe and sleeve with fire-stopping material and sealant that meet the requirement of Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.



3.2.9.3 Escutcheons

Finished surfaces where exposed piping, bare or insulated, pass through floors, walls, or ceilings, except in boiler, utility, or equipment rooms, shall be provided with escutcheons. Where sleeves project slightly from floors, special deep-type escutcheons shall be used. Escutcheon shall be secured to pipe or pipe covering.


Access panels shall be provided for all concealed valves, vents, controls, and items requiring inspection or maintenance. Access panels shall be of sufficient size and located so that the concealed items may be serviced and



maintained or completely removed and replaced. Access panels shall be as specified in Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.


Identify piping and physical hazards in accordance with CFR 29 CFR 1910.144, ASME A13.1, ANSI Z535.1 and as modified herein. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment. Identify each piping system and item of equipment indicated on contract drawings. HVAC fan coil units do not require identification.



a. Near each valve and control device.b. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for terminal units;

mark each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern.





3.3.2 Valves

Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping system; exclude check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, HVAC terminal devices and similar rough-in connections of end-use units. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system. Turn valve schedules over to Contracting Officer.


Install engraved plastic laminate sign or plastic equipment marker on or near each major item of mechanical equipment and each operational device. Provide minimum 1/4 inch high lettering for name of unit where viewing distance is less than 3 feet, 1/2 inch high for distances up to 6 feet, and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering of 2/3 to 3/4 of size of the principal lettering. In addition to name of identified unit, provide lettering to distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.


Clean uncontaminated system(s) by evacuation and purging procedures



currently recommended by refrigerant and refrigerant equipment manufacturers, and as specified herein, to remove small amounts of air and moisture. Systems containing moderate amounts of air, moisture, contaminated refrigerant, or any foreign matter shall be considered contaminated systems. Restoring contaminated systems to clean condition including disassembly, component replacement, evacuation, flushing, purging, and re-charging, shall be performed using currently approved refrigerant and refrigeration manufacturer's procedures. Restoring contaminated systems shall be at no additional cost to the Government as determined by the Contracting Officer. Water shall not be used in any procedure or test.

3.5 TRAINING COURSE

Conduct a training course for 4 members of the operating staff as designated by the Contracting Officer. The training period shall consist of a total 4 hours of normal working time and start after the system is functionally completed but prior to final acceptance tests. The field posted instructions shall cover all of the items contained in the approved operation and maintenance manuals as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations.

3.6 REFRIGERANT PIPING TESTS

After all components of the refrigerant system have been installed and connected, subject the entire refrigeration system to pneumatic, evacuation, and startup tests as described herein. Conduct tests in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Water and electricity required for the tests will be furnished by the Government. Provide all material, equipment, instruments, and personnel required for the test. Provide the services of a qualified technician, as required, to perform all tests and procedures indicated herein. Field tests shall be coordinated with Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS.

3.6.1 Preliminary Procedures

Prior to pneumatic testing, equipment which has been factory tested and refrigerant charged as well as equipment which could be damaged or cause personnel injury by imposed test pressure, positive or negative, shall be isolated from the test pressure or removed from the system. Safety relief valves and rupture discs, where not part of factory sealed systems, shall be removed and openings capped or plugged.

3.6.2 Pneumatic Test

Pressure control and excess pressure protection shall be provided at the source of test pressure. Valves shall be wide open, except those leading to the atmosphere. Test gas shall be dry nitrogen, with minus 70 degree F dewpoint and less than 5 ppm oil. Test pressure shall be applied in two stages before any refrigerant pipe is insulated or covered. First stage test shall be at 10 psi with every joint being tested with a thick soap or color indicating solution. Second stage tests shall raise the system to the minimum refrigerant leakage test pressure specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34 with a maximum test pressure 25 percent greater. Pressure above 100 psig shall be raised in 10 percent increments with a pressure acclimatizing period between increments. The initial test pressure shall be recorded along with the ambient temperature to which the system is exposed. Final test pressures of the second stage shall be maintained on the system for a minimum of 24 hours. At the end of the 24



hour period, the system pressure will be recorded along with the ambient temperature to which the system is exposed. A correction factor of 0.3 psi will be allowed for each degree F change between test space initial and final ambient temperature, plus for increase and minus for a decrease. If the corrected system pressure is not exactly equal to the initial system test pressure, then the system shall be investigated for leaking joints. To repair leaks, the joint shall be taken apart, thoroughly cleaned, and reconstructed as a new joint. Joints repaired by caulking, remelting, or back-welding/brazing shall not be acceptable. Following repair, the entire system shall be retested using the pneumatic tests described above. The entire system shall be reassembled once the pneumatic tests are satisfactorily completed.

3.6.3 Evacuation Test

Following satisfactory completion of the pneumatic tests, the pressure shall be relieved and the entire system shall be evacuated to an absolute pressure of 300 micrometers. During evacuation of the system, the ambient temperature shall be higher than 35 degrees F. No more than one system shall be evacuated at one time by one vacuum pump. Once the desired vacuum has been reached, the vacuum line shall be closed and the system shall stand for 1 hour. If the pressure rises over 500 micrometers after the 1 hour period, then the system shall be evacuated again down to 300 micrometers and let set for another 1 hour period. The system shall not be charged until a vacuum of at least 500 micrometers is maintained for a period of 1 hour without the assistance of a vacuum line. If during the testing the pressure continues to rise, check the system for leaks, repair as required, and repeat the evacuation procedure. During evacuation, pressures shall be recorded by a thermocouple-type, electronic-type, or a calibrated-micrometer type gauge.

3.6.4 System Charging and Startup Test

Following satisfactory completion of the evacuation tests, the system shall be charged with the required amount of refrigerant by raising pressure to normal operating pressure and in accordance with manufacturer's procedures. Following charging, the system shall operate with high-side and low-side pressures and corresponding refrigerant temperatures, at design or improved values. The entire system shall be tested for leaks. Fluorocarbon systems shall be tested with halide torch or electronic leak detectors.

3.6.5 Refrigerant Leakage

If a refrigerant leak is discovered after the system has been charged, the leaking portion of the system shall immediately be isolated from the remainder of the system and the refrigerant pumped into the system receiver or other suitable container. Under no circumstances shall the refrigerant be discharged into the atmosphere.

3.6.6 Contractor's Responsibility

At all times during the installation and testing of the refrigeration system, take steps to prevent the release of refrigerants into the atmosphere. The steps shall include, but not be limited to, procedures which will minimize the release of refrigerants to the atmosphere and the use of refrigerant recovery devices to remove refrigerant from the system and store the refrigerant for reuse or reclaim. At no time shall more than 3 ounces of refrigerant be released to the atmosphere in any one



occurrence. Any system leaks within the first year shall be repaired in accordance with the requirements herein at no cost to the Government including material, labor, and refrigerant if the leak is the result of defective equipment, material, or installation.

3.7 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

Except as specified herein, testing, adjusting, and balancing shall be in accordance with Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, and BALANCING for HVAC.

a. Meet with the TAB contractor prior to beginning TAB and review the TAB plan to determine the capabilities of the system toward completing TAB. Provide the TAB any needed unique instruments for setting valves and instruct TAB in their use.

b. Provide a qualified technician to operate the systems to assist the TAB contractor in performing TAB, or provide sufficient training for TAB to operate the system without assistance.

3.7.1 System Calibration and Adjustments

System calibration shall be performed for each refrigeration system; condensing units and evaporators. The Contractor shall provide all personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies necessary to perform calibration and testing of the HVAC control system with Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING and BALANCING for HVAC Contractor. All instrumentation and controls shall be calibrated and the specified accuracy shall be verified using test equipment with calibration traceable to NIST standards. Mechanical control devices shall be adjusted to operate as specified. Controllers shall be pretested off-site as a functioning assembly ready for field connections, calibration and adjustment of the operational systems. Control parameters and logic (virtual) points including control loop setpoints, gain constants, and integral constraints, shall be adjusted before the system is placed on line. Written notification of any planned calibration and testing of the systems shall be given to the Government at least 14 calendar days in advance.

3.8 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES

Provide the services of a manufacturer's representatives who are experienced in the installation, adjustment, and operation of refrigeration systems related to the refrigerated and frozen food storage equipment. The representative shall supervise the installation, start-up adjustment, and testing of the equipment.

3.9 COMMISSIONING

Provide the services of the supervisory level technicians in responsible charge of the work in this section to participate in the work specified in Section 23 08 00.00 50, COMMISSIONING OF HVAC. Refer to Section 23 08 00.00 50, COMMISSIONING OF HVAC for description of work.




SECTION 23 64 11.00 50

WATER CHILLERS, AIR COOLED TYPE01/14

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AHRI 550/590 (2003) Performance Rating of Water-Chilling Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle

AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

ANSI A13.1 (2007) Identification of Piping Systems

ANSI Z53.1 (1979) Marking Physical Hazards - Safety Color Code


ASHRAE 15 & 34 (2007; Std 15 Errata 2007, 2009, & Addenda a-e; Std 34 Errata 2007, 2008, Addenda a-y, aa-ae) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15-Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems and ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 34-Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants




ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 (2007; Addenda 2008; Addenda 2009) BPVC Section VIII-Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels Division 1


ASTM B 117 (2009) Standing Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus

ASTM D 520 (2000; R 2005) Zinc Dust Pigment


NEMA ICS 1 (2000; R 2005; R 2008) Standard for Industrial Control and Systems: General

SECTION 23 64 11.00 50 Page 1


Requirements

NEMA ICS 2 (2000; R 2005; Errata 2008) Standard for Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays Rated 600 V

NEMA MG 1 (2009) Motors and Generators


NEMA 4 Intended for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and rain, splashing water, and hose directed water; undamage by ice which forms on the enclosure.





1.2 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-03 Product Data

Water Chiller; G

Manufacturer's standard catalog data, at least highlighted to show material, size, options, performance charts and curves, etc. in adequate detail to demonstrate compliance with contract requirements. Data shall include manufacturer's recommended installation instructions and procedures. Data shall be adequate to demonstrate compliance with contract requirements as specified within the paragraphs:

a. Water Chiller.

b. Chiller Components.

Verification of Dimensions

A letter including the date the site was visited, conformation of existing conditions, and any discrepancies found.

Manufacturer's Multi-Year Compressor Warranty

Manufacturer's multi-year warranty for compressor(s) in air-cooled water chillers as specified.

SECTION 23 64 11.00 50 Page 2


System Performance Tests

A schedule, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of related testing, for the system performance tests. The schedules shall identify the proposed date, time, and location for each test.

Demonstrations

A schedule, at least 2 weeks prior to the date of the proposed training course, which identifies the date, time, and location for the training.

Water Chiller - field acceptance test plan

SD-06 Test Reports

Salt Spray Tests

Field Acceptance Testing

Water Chiller - field acceptance test report; G

Factory Tests

Six copies of the report shall be provided in bound 8 1/2 x 11 inch booklets. Reports shall certify the compliance with performance requirements and follow the format of the required testing standard for both the Chiller Performance Tests and the Chiller Sound Tests. Test report shall include certified calibration report of all test instrumentation. Calibration report shall include certification that all test instrumentation has been calibrated within 6 months prior to the test date, identification of all instrumentation, and certification that all instrumentation complies with requirements of the test standard. Test report shall be submitted 1 week after completion of the factory test.

System Performance Tests

Six copies of the report shall be provided in bound 8 1/2 x 11 inch booklets.

SD-07 Certificates

Water Chiller; G

Where the system, components, or equipment are specified to comply with requirements of NFPA, ARI, ASHRAE, ASME, or UL, 1 copy of proof of such compliance shall be provided. The label or listing of the specified agency shall be acceptable evidence. In lieu of the label or listing, a written certificate from an approved, nationally recognized testing organization equipped to perform such services, stating that the items have been tested and conform to the requirements and testing methods of the specified agency may be submitted. When performance requirements of this project's drawings and specifications vary from standard ARI rating conditions, computer printouts, catalog, or other application data certified by ARI or a nationally recognized laboratory as described above shall be included. If ARI does not

SECTION 23 64 11.00 50 Page 3


have a current certification program that encompasses such application data, the manufacturer may self certify that his application data complies with project performance requirements in accordance with the specified test standards.


Water Chiller - Installation Instruction; G


Operation and Maintenance Manuals; G

Six complete copies of an operation manual in bound 8 1/2 x 11 inch booklets listing step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, abnormal shutdown, emergency shutdown, and normal shutdown at least 4 weeks prior to the first training course. The booklets shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, and parts list. The manuals shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, and a brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features. Six complete copies of maintenance manual in bound 8 1/2 x 11 inch booklets listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and a trouble shooting guide. The manuals shall include piping and equipment layouts and simplified wiring and control diagrams of the system as installed.

1.3 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

Exposed moving parts, parts that produce high operating temperature, parts which may be electrically energized, and parts that may be a hazard to operating personnel shall be insulated, fully enclosed, guarded, or fitted with other types of safety devices. Safety devices shall be installed so that proper operation of equipment is not impaired. Welding and cutting safety requirements shall be in accordance with AWS Z49.1.


Stored items shall be protected from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Proper protection and care of all material both before and during installation shall be the Contractor's responsibility. Any materials found to be damaged shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. During installation, piping and similar openings shall be capped to keep out dirt and other foreign matter.

1.5 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS



1.5.2 Drawings

Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories that may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the plumbing, fire protection, electrical, structural and finish conditions that would affect the work to

SECTION 23 64 11.00 50 Page 4


be performed and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing required offsets, fittings, and accessories to meet such conditions.

1.6 Warranty

In addition to the warranty requirements specification in Division 00, Contract Requirements, the following major components of the chiller shall be covered by a warranty of a duration period of five years: compressor, and refrigerant.

1.7 MANUFACTURER'S MULTI-YEAR COMPRESSOR WARRANTY

The Contractor shall provide a 5 year parts and labor (includes refrigerant) manufacturer's warranty on the chiller compressor(s). This warranty shall be directly from the chiller manufacturer to the Government and shall be in addition to the standard one-year warranty of construction. The manufacturer's warranty shall provide for the repair or replacement of the chiller compressor(s) that become inoperative as a result of defects in material or workmanship within 5 years after the date of final acceptance. When the manufacturer determines that a compressor requires replacement, the manufacturer shall furnish new compressor(s) at no additional cost to the Government. Upon notification that a chiller compressor has failed under the terms of the warranty, the manufacturer shall respond in no more than 24 hours. Response shall mean having a manufacturer-qualified technician onsite to evaluate the extent of the needed repairs. The warranty period shall begin on the same date as final acceptance and shall continue for the full product warranty period.

1.7.1 Indexed Notebook

The Contractor shall furnish to the Contracting Officer a bound and indexed notebook containing a complete listing of all water chillers covered by a manufacturer's multi-year warranty. The chiller list shall state the duration of the warranty thereof, start date of the warranty, ending date of the warranty, location of the warranted equipment, and the point of contact for fulfillment of the warranty. This information shall be provided for each chiller and the recorded chiller serial numbers shall identify each chiller. Point of contact shall include the name of the service representative along with the day, night, weekend, and holiday phone numbers for a service call. The completed bound and indexed notebook shall be delivered to the Contracting Office prior to final acceptance of the facility.The Contractor shall furnish with each manufacturer's multi-year warranty the name, address, and telephone number (day, night, weekend, and holiday) of the service representative nearest to the location where the equipment is installed. Upon a request for service under the multi-year warranty, the service representative shall honor the warranty during the warranty period, and shall provide the services prescribed by the terms of the warranty.

1.7.2 Equipment Warranty Tags

At the time of installation, each item of manufacturer's multi-year warranted equipment shall be tagged with a durable, oil- and water-resistant tag, suitable for interior and exterior locations, resistant to solvents, abrasion, and fading due to sunlight. The tag shall be attached with copper wire or a permanent, pressure-sensitive, adhesive backing. The tag shall be installed in an easily noticed location attached to the warrantied equipment. The tag for this equipment shall be similar to the following in format, and shall contain all of the listed information:

SECTION 23 64 11.00 50 Page 5


MANUFACTURER'S MULTI-YEAR WARRANTY EQUIPMENT TAGEquipment/Product Covered: ____________________Manufacturer:_______Model No.:_____Serial No.:__Warranty Period: From _________to _____________Contract No.: _________________________________Warranty Contact: _____________________________Name: _________________________________________Address: ______________________________________Telephone: ____________________________________ STATION PERSONNEL SHALL PERFORM PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Materials and equipment shall be standard Commercial cataloged products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship.

These products shall have a two year record of satisfactory field service prior to bid opening. The two year record of service shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size.

Products having a two year record of satisfactory field service shall be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field service for not less than 6000 hours can be shown. The 6000 hour service record shall not include any manufacturer's prototype or factory tests.

Satisfactory field service shall have been completed by a product that has been, and presently is being sold or offered for sale on the commercial market through the following copyrighted means: advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures.

2.2 MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD NAMEPLATES

Major equipment including chillers, compressors, compressor drivers, condensers, water coolers, receivers, fans, and motors shall have the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number on a plate secured to the item of equipment. Plates shall be durable and legible throughout equipment life. Plates shall be fixed in prominent locations with nonferrous screws or bolts.

2.3 ELECTRICAL WORK

a. Provide motors, controllers, integral disconnects, contactors, and controls with their respective pieces of equipment, except controllers indicated as part of motor control centers. Provide electrical equipment, including motors and wiring, as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for controls and devices specified, but not shown, shall be provided. For packaged equipment, the manufacturer shall provide controllers including the required monitors and timed restart.

b. For single-phase motors, provide high-efficiency type, fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors, including motors that

SECTION 23 64 11.00 50 Page 6


are part of a system, in accordance with NEMA MG 11.

c. For polyphase motors, provide squirrel-cage medium induction motors, including motors that are part of a system, and that meet the efficiency ratings for premium efficiency motors in accordance with NEMA MG 11.

d. Provide motors in accordance with NEMA MG 11 and of sufficient size to drive the load at the specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor. Motors shall be rated for continuous duty with the enclosure specified. Motor duty requirements shall allow for maximum frequency start-stop operation and minimum encountered interval between start and stop. Motor torque shall be capable of accelerating the connected load within 20 seconds with 80 percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals during one starting period. Provide motor starters complete with thermal overload protection and other necessary appurtenances.

2.4 SELF-CONTAINED WATER CHILLERS, VAPOR COMPRESSION TYPE

Units shall be assembled, leak-tested, charged (refrigerant), and adjusted at the factory. Unit shall be factory evacuated and charged with nitrogen for shipping. Unit components delivered separately shall each be sealed and charged with a nitrogen holding charge. Parts weighing 50 pounds or more which must be removed for inspection, cleaning, or repair, such as motors, shall have lifting eyes or lugs. Chiller shall be provided with a single point wiring connection for incoming power supply. Chiller's water cooler shall be provided with standard water boxes with flanged mechanical connections. Chiller may be equipped with either hermetic scroll compressors or hermetic screw compressors.

2.4.1 Helical Rotary, Scroll, Air-Cooled

AHRI 550/590. Base capacity and power ratings, at the conditions indicated and specified, on the test requirements of AHRI 550/590. Power input shall not exceed kW/ton load indicated at full load capacity. For multicompressor units, not less than two independent refrigerant circuits shall be provided. Chillers shall be capable of operating at partial-load conditions without increased vibration over normal vibration at full load operation, and shall be capable of continuous operation down to minimum capacity.

2.4.2 Rate of Change

Chiller shall be able to withstand a chilled-water flow rate change of twenty five percent (25%) per minute while maintaining plus or minus one degree Fahrenheit (± 1°F) of design supply chilled water temperature, and fifty percent (50%) per minute at any load above the compressor minimum without cycling "off" on low load (low leaving water temperature) or evaporator refrigerant temperature limit.

2.4.3 Demonstration

The chiller manufacturer shall demonstrate chiller operational stability to the Contracting Officer with flows varying up to 25 percent per minute as described above during chiller system commissioning. The chiller manufacturer shall have a factory trained technician present along with the Contracting Officer representative and the Package Pump System representative; work of Section 23 64 26 CHILLED HEATING HOT WATER PIPING

SECTION 23 64 11.00 50 Page 7


SYSTEMS, during this on-site testing. If the chiller does not pass the validation it shall be the responsibility of the mechanical contractor and chiller manufacturer to modify the chiller and/or chiller system to provide reliable operation with system flow rates-of-change of up to 25 percent per minute.

2.5 CHILLER COMPONENTS

2.5.1 Refrigerant

Refrigerants shall be one of the fluorocarbon gases. Refrigerants shall have number designations and safety classifications in accordance with ASHRAE 15 & 34. Refrigerants shall have an Ozone Depletion Potential (ODP) of 0.055 or less. Refrigerants classified by the EPA as Class 2 shall not be allowed. The ODP shall be in accordance with the "Montreal Protocol On Substances That Deplete The Ozone Layer," September 1987, as amended through 2000, sponsored by the United Nations Environment Programme.

2.5.2 Structural Base and Casing

Chiller and individual chiller components shall be provided with a factory-mounted structural steel base (welded or bolted) frame. Chiller and individual chiller components shall be isolated from the Base by means of molded neoprene isolation pads. Vibration isolators shall have isolation characteristics as recommended by the manufacturer for the unit supplied and the service intended. All chiller components shall be enclosed in a furniture grade steel enclosure with additional open mesh panels, suitable for exterior use, painted with a factory applied powder-coat finish. Portions of the unit enclosure required for airflow shall be equipped with removable heavy gage steel mesh panels. Except for the piping and power connections, the entire unit shall be either enclosed with steel panel or wire mesh construction.

2.5.3 Chiller Refrigerant Circuit

Chiller refrigerant circuit shall be completely piped and factory leak tested. For multicompressor units, not less than 2 independent refrigerant circuits shall be provided. Circuit shall include as a minimum a combination sight glass and moisture indicator, charging ports, and compressor service valves.

2.5.4 Controls Package

Chiller shall be provided with a complete factory-mounted, prewired microprocessor based operating and safety control system. Controls package shall contain as a minimum a digital display, an on-auto-off switch, motor starters, power wiring, and control wiring. Controls package shall provide operating controls, monitoring capabilities, programmable setpoints, safety controls, and Direct Digital Control (DDC) System interfaces as defined below.

2.5.4.1 Operating Controls

Unit shall include a factory wired control system consisting of an industrial grade programmable logic controller (PLC), LCD interface screen for system interrogation, and operating software. The system shall provide essential capacity control, supervision of safety devices and parameters, and automatically rotate compressor operation every 24 hour period. The control system shall display a discharge pressure fault, suction pressure

SECTION 23 64 11.00 50 Page 8


fault, compressor winding temperatures and evaporator leaving chilled water temperature. Out of tolerance conditions shall result in a fault indication and compressor shutdown. A pumpdown cycle of the nonrecycling start type shall be provided for each compressor 20 tons or larger. Provide system capacity control to adjust chiller output to a minimum of 25 percent of full load capacity without cycling operating compressor and to automatically recycle system on power interruption. Provide start-up and head pressure controls to allow for system operation at all ambient temperatures down to 40 degrees F. The control system shall be configured for integration trough a BacNet communication platform. Chiller shall be provided with the following adjustable operating controls as a minimum.

a. Leaving chilled water temperature control.

b. Adjustable timer or automated controls to prevent a compressor from short cycling.

c. Automatic lead/lag controls (adjustable) for multi-compressor units.

d. Load limiting.

e. System capacity control to adjust the unit capacity in accordance with the system load and the programmable setpoints. Controls shall automatically re-cycle the chiller on power interruption.

f. Startup and head pressure controls to allow system operation at all ambient temperatures down to 40 degrees F.

g. Fan sequencing for air-cooled condenser.

2.5.4.2 Monitoring Capabilities

During normal operations, the control system shall be capable of monitoring and displaying the following operating parameters. Access and operation of display shall not require opening or removing any panels or doors.

a. Entering and leaving chilled water temperatures.

b. Self diagnostic.

c. Operation status.

d. Operating hours.

e. Number of starts.

f. Compressor status (on or off).

g. Refrigerant discharge and suction pressures.

2.5.4.3 Programmable Setpoints

The control system shall be capable of being reprogrammed directly at the unit. No parameters shall be capable of being changed without first entering a security access code. The programmable setpoints shall include the following as a minimum.

a. Leaving Chilled Water Temperature.

SECTION 23 64 11.00 50 Page 9


2.5.4.4 Safety Controls with Manual Reset

Chiller shall be provided with the following safety controls which automatically shutdown the chiller and which require manual reset.

a. Low chilled water temperature protection.

b. High condenser refrigerant discharge pressure protection.

c. Low evaporator pressure protection.

d. Chilled water flow detection.

e. High motor winding temperature protection.

2.5.4.5 Safety Controls with Automatic Reset

Chiller shall be provided with the following safety controls which automatically shutdown the chiller and which provide automatic reset.

a. Over/under voltage protection.

b. Chilled water flow interlock.

c. Phase reversal protection.

2.5.4.6 Remote Alarm

During the initiation of a safety shutdown, a chiller's control system shall be capable of activating a remote alarm bell. In coordination with the chiller, the Contractor shall provide an alarm circuit (including transformer if applicable) and a minimum 4 inch diameter alarm bell. Alarm circuit shall activate bell in the event of machine shutdown due to the chiller's monitoring of safety controls.

2.5.4.7 Energy Management Control System (EMCS) Interface

The control system shall be capable of communicating all data to a remote integrated DDC processor through a single shielded cable. The data shall include as a minimum all system operating conditions, capacity controls, and safety shutdown conditions. The control system shall also be capable of receiving at a minimum the following operating commands.

a. Remote Unit Start/Stop.

b. Remote Chilled Water Reset.

c. Demand limiting.

d. Unload limiting.

e. Evaporator pressure/temperature.

f. Condenser pressure/temperature.

g. Current draw.

h. Chiller fault.

SECTION 23 64 11.00 50 Page 10


2.5.5 Compressor(s)

2.5.5.1 Scroll Compressors

Three-dimensional, compliant, hermetically sealed design. Compressors shall be mounted on vibration isolators. Rotating parts shall be factory balanced. Main bearings shall be rolling-element type. Lubrication systems shall be centrifugal pump type including oil level sight glass and oil charging valve. Include manufacturer removable sound attenuating blanket on each compressor.

2.5.5.2 Helical Rotary Compressors

Positive displacement, oil injected type, and driven by an electric motor. Rotors shall be solid steel, Society of Automotive Engineers Grade 1141 or 1144. Shaft main bearings shall be either sleeve-design type with leaded bronze or steel-backed babbit; or frictionless bearing design, ball or roller type. Housings and covers shall be high-grade cast-iron pressure castings. Lubrication systems shall lubricate rotors, bearings, shaft seal as well as rotor sealing and cooling. Provide an oil safety cutout interlocked with the compressor starter to allow compressor to operate only when oil management system is operational. Provide for lubrication of bearings and shaft seals on shutdown with or without electric power supply.

2.5.6 Liquid Coolers (Evaporators)

Shell and tube configuration consisting of welded carbon steel shell with removable head and internal seamless copper tubes. Refrigerant side design pressure shall comply with ASHRAE 15 & 34. Water side design pressure shall not be less than 150 psig. On direct-expansion units, each refrigerant circuit shall be complete with liquid solenoid valve and expansion device capable of modulating to minimum capacity. For the water side of liquid cooler, the performance shall be based on a water velocity ranging from 3 to 12 fps with a fouling factor of 0.00025. Cooler shall be provided with an electrical heating cable for freeze-up protection to 30 degrees F ambient.

2.5.7 Air-Cooled Condenser Coil

Condenser coil shall be of the extended-surface fin-and-tube type and shall be constructed of seamless aluminum tubes with compatible aluminum fins. Fins shall be soldered or mechanically bonded to the tubes and installed in a metal casing. Coils shall be circuited and sized for a minimum of 5 degrees F subcooling and full pumpdown capacity. Coil shall be factory leak and pressure tested after assembly in accordance with ASHRAE 15 & 34. Provide coil with a uniformly applied epoxy electro deposition, phenolic, or vinyl type coating to all coil surface areas without material bridging between fins. Submit product data on the type coating selected, the coating thickness, the application process used, the estimated heat transfer loss of the coil, and verification of conformance with the salt spray test requirement. Coating shall be applied at either the coil or coating manufacturer's factory. Coating process shall ensure complete coil encapsulation. Coating shall be capable of withstanding a minimum 1,000 hours exposure to the salt spray test specified in ASTM B117 using a 5 percent sodium chloride solution.

2.5.8 Receivers

Receiver shall bear a stamp certifying compliance with ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1

SECTION 23 64 11.00 50 Page 11


and shall meet the requirements of ASHRAE 15 & 34. Inner surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned by sandblasting or other approved means. Each receiver shall have a storage capacity not less than 20 percent in excess of that required for the fully-charged system. Each receiver shall be equipped with inlet, outlet drop pipe, drain plug, purging valve, relief valves of capacity and setting required by ASHRAE 15 & 34, and two bull's eye liquid-level sight glasses. Sight glasses shall be in the same vertical plane, 90 degrees apart, perpendicular to the axis of the receiver, and not over 3 inches horizontally from the drop pipe measured along the axis of the receiver. In lieu of bull's eye sight glass, external gauge glass with metal glass guard and automatic closing stop valves may be provided.

2.5.9 Electric Motors and Starters

Provide induction electrical motors conforming to NEMA MG 1. Fan motor bearings shall be permanently lubricated. Compressor starters shall be across-the-line magnetic type conforming with NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2. Provide phase failure, over voltage and low voltage protection.

2.5.10 Differential Pressure Switches

Chiller manufacturer shall furnish a switch for each evaporator and verify field-mounting location before installation. Pressure Differential Switches:

a. Construction: Wetted parts of body and trim constructed of Type 316 stainless steel.

b. Performance: Switch shall withstand, without damage, the full-pressure rating of the heat exchanger applied to either port and exhibit zero set-point shift due to variation in working pressure.

c. Set Point: Screw type, field adjustable. Furnish switch range with mid-adjustment point equivalent to respective evaporator/condenser pressure drop.

d. Electrical Connections: Internally mounted screw-type terminal blocks.

e. Switch Enclosure: Epoxy coated to meet NEMA 4.

f. Switch Action: Double-pole, double-throw switch with one pole field wired to the chiller control panel and the other pole field wired to the Direct Digital Control System.

g. Subject to compliance with requirements, pressure switches manufactured by United Electric Controls; 400 Series will meet requirements.

2.6 FABRICATION

2.6.1 Salt Spray Tests

Unless otherwise specified, equipment and component items, when fabricated from ferrous metal, shall be factory finished with the manufacturer's standard finish, except that items located outside of buildings shall have weather resistant finishes that will withstand 500 hours exposure to the salt spray test specified in ASTM B 117 using a 5 percent sodium chloride

SECTION 23 64 11.00 50 Page 12


solution. Immediately after completion of the test, the specimen shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, cracking, or loss of adhesion and no sign of rust creepage beyond 1/8 inch on either side of the scratch mark. Cut edges of galvanized surfaces where hot-dip galvanized sheet steel is used shall be coated with a zinc-rich coating conforming to ASTM D 520, Type I.

2.6.2 Field Applied Insulation

Chiller shall be provided with field installed insulation on surfaces subject to sweating including the water cooler, suction line piping, economizer, and cooling lines. Insulation on heads of coolers shall be installed to provide easy removal and replacement of heads without damage to the insulation. Where motors are the gas-cooled type, factory installed insulation shall be provided on the cold-gas inlet connection to the motor per manufacturer's standard practice. On all surfaces to be insulated, provide minimum two inch thick flexible cellular foam insulation with integral jacket. All insulation shall be coated with a UV inhibitor. Insulation shall comply with Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. Provide insulation after the installation of heat trace cable.

2.7 SUPPLEMENTAL COMPONENTS/SERVICES

2.7.1 Chilled Water Piping and Accessories

Chilled water piping and accessories shall be provided and installed in accordance with Section 23 64 26 CHILLED AND HEATING HOT WATER PIPING SYSTEMS.

2.7.2 Temperature Controls

Chiller control packages shall be fully coordinated with and integrated into the temperature control system specified in Section 23 09 23.13 20 BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC.




Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, in the sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the sizes and wording indicated, black with white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate. Thickness: 1/16 inch for units up to 40 sq. in. or 8 inch length; 1/4 inch for larger units. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.


Provide manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, color coded equipment markers. Include terminology matching equipment schedules as closely as

SECTION 23 64 11.00 50 Page 13


possible. Provide approximate 2-1/2 x 4 inch markers for control devices, and 4-1/2 x 6 inch for equipment. Identify equipment and electrical devices furnished under this section.


Provide pre-printed or partially pre-printed accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matt finish suitable for writing, approximately 3 inch x 6 inch, with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre-printed wording including large-size primary wording (as examples; DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT OPERATE).


Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment. Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and specified, provide identification which indicates individual system number as well as service (as examples; Chiller CH/1).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION PREPARATION

Provide storage for chiller at the project site. Chiller shall be shipped with weatherproof wrapping and palletized crating to prevent pre-installation damage.


Install air cooled chiller as indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Provide clearance for inspection, repair, replacement, and service. Electrical work shall conform to NFPA 70 and Division 26, "Electrical." Coordinate installed chiller height with installers of any Architectural screen wall elements surrounding the chiller to enable the chiller topmost discharge element heights to exceed the height of the surrounding screen wall elements.

3.2.1 Air Cooled Chillers

Install unit on reinforced concrete pad with anchor bolts; quantity, size and location as recommended by the chiller manufacturer. Start-up chiller in the presence of a factory authorized representative. In addition to the factory start-up checklist, the manufacturer representative shall advise on the following:

a. Examine areas and conditions, with chiller Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.

b. Examine rough-in for hydronic piping and electrical to verify actual locations of connections prior to installation. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

c. Install equipment level and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

SECTION 23 64 11.00 50 Page 14


d. Support unit on concrete foundation. Secure units with anchor bolts.

3.2.2 Piping Installation Requirements

Specified in other Division 23 sections. The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, valves, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:

a. Arrange piping installations adjacent to units to allow unit servicing and maintenance. Verify that adequate piping supports are in place so that piping loads do not bear on chiller connections.

3.2.3 Refrigeration System

3.2.3.1 Equipment

Refrigeration equipment and the installation thereof shall conform to ASHRAE 15 & 34. Necessary supports shall be provided for all equipment, appurtenances, and pipe as required, including frames or supports for chillers and similar items. Equipment shall be properly leveled, aligned, and secured in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.2.3.2 Field Refrigerant Charging

a. Initial Charge: Upon completion of all the refrigerant pipe tests, the vacuum on the system shall be broken by adding the required charge of dry refrigerant for which the system is designed, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Contractor shall provide the complete charge of refrigerant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Upon satisfactory completion of the system performance tests, any refrigerant that has been lost from the system shall be replaced. After the system is fully operational, service valve seal caps and blanks over gauge points shall be installed and tightened.

b. Refrigerant Leakage: If a refrigerant leak is discovered after the system has been charged, the leaking portion of the system shall immediately be isolated from the remainder of the system and the refrigerant shall be pumped into the system receiver or other suitable container. The refrigerant shall not be discharged into the atmosphere. The leak shall be repaired, the chiller evacuated and re-charged in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

c. Contractor's Responsibility: The Contractor shall, at all times during the installation and testing of the refrigeration system, take steps to prevent the release of refrigerants into the atmosphere. The steps shall include, but not be limited to, procedures which will minimize the release of refrigerants to the atmosphere and the use of refrigerant recovery devices to remove refrigerant from the system and store the refrigerant for reuse or reclaim. At no time shall more than 3 ounces of refrigerant be released to the atmosphere in any one occurrence. Any system leaks within the first year shall be repaired in accordance with the specified requirements including material, labor, and refrigerant if the leak is the result of defective equipment,

SECTION 23 64 11.00 50 Page 15


material, or installation.

3.2.4 Field Painting

Painting required for surfaces not otherwise specified, and finish painting of items only primed at the factory are specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.


Identify equipment and physical hazards in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.144, ANSI A13.1, ANSI Z53.1 and as required by this specification. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment. Identify each piping system and item of equipment indicated on contract drawings.


Install engraved plastic laminate sign or plastic equipment marker on or near each major item of mechanical equipment and each operational device. Provide minimum 1/4 inch high lettering for name of unit where viewing distance is less than 36 inches, 1/2 inch high for distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering of 2/3 to 3/4 of size of the principal lettering. In addition to name of identified unit, provide lettering to distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.

3.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICE

The services of a factory-trained representative shall be provided for a minimum of two days at two different travel intervals to site during installation and start-up, plus additional site visits for commissioning as determined by the Commissioning Agent. The representative shall supervise the installation, adjustment, testing and commissioning of the equipment. The representative shall advise on the following:

a. Hermetic machines:

(1) Testing hermetic water-chilling unit under pressure for refrigerant leaks; evacuation and dehydration of machine to an absolute pressure of not over 300 microns.

(2) Charging the machine with refrigerant.

(3) Starting the machine.

(4) Troubleshooting chiller operational failures.

(5) Verifying chiller operation with the variable-primary chilled water pumping system.

The chiller manufacturer shall maintain service capabilities no more than 50 miles from the job site. The manufacturer shall furnish complete submittal wiring diagrams of the chiller starter(s) and associated

SECTION 23 64 11.00 50 Page 16


components like cooling towers, pumps, interlocks, etc. as applicable for field maintenance and service. Provide the services of factory trained and authorized technicians to cooperatively work with the TAB's Contractor and the DDC representatives to enable operation of the chillers with the variable-primary chilled water system. Provide personnel at times and intervals necessary to calibrate all chilled water system setpoints, trouble-shoot (if necessary) issues resulting after start-up, and make any additional software/hardware modifications to enable the chiller to operate in accordance with the sequence of operation indicated on the Contract Drawings. Note that as a minimum the representative shall be available for three separate 8-hour workdays; interval and time determined by the Contracting Officer and Installing Contractor.


Equipment shall be wiped clean, with all traces of oil, dust, dirt, or paint spots removed. System shall be maintained in this clean condition until final acceptance. Miscellaneous equipment requiring adjustment shall be adjusted to setting indicated or directed. At least one week before the official equipment warranty start date, all condenser coils on air-cooled water chillers shall be cleaned in accordance with the chiller manufacturer's instructions. This work covers two coil cleanings. The condenser coils shall be cleaned with an approved coil cleaner by a service technician, factory trained by the chiller manufacturer. The condenser coil cleaner shall not have any detrimental affect on the materials or protective coatings on the condenser coils. Testing, adjusting, and balancing shall be as specified in Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING.

3.6 FIELD ACCEPTANCE TESTING

3.6.1 Test Plans

a. Manufacturer's Test Plans: Within 120 calendar days after contract award, submit the following plans:

(1) Water chiller - field acceptance test plan.

Field acceptance test plans shall be developed by the chiller manufacturer detailing recommended field test procedures for that particular type and size of equipment. Field acceptance test plans developed by the installing Contractor, or the equipment sales agency furnishing the equipment, will not be acceptable.

The Contracting Officer will review and approve the field acceptance test plan for each of the listed equipment prior to commencement of field testing of the equipment. The approved field acceptance tests of the absorption chiller and subsequent test reporting.

b. Coordinated testing: Indicate in each field acceptance test plan when work required by this section requires coordination with test work required by other specification sections. Furnish test procedures for the simultaneous or integrated testing of tower system controls which interlock and interface with controls factory prewired or external controls for the equipment provided under Section 23 09 23.13 20, BACNET DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC.

SECTION 23 64 11.00 50 Page 17


c. Prerequisite testing: Chillers for which performance testing is dependent upon the completion of the work covered by Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING must have that work completed as a prerequisite to testing work under this section. Indicate in each field acceptance test plan when such prerequisite work is required.

d. Test procedure: Indicate in each field acceptance test plan each equipment manufacturers published installation, start-up, and field acceptance test procedures. Include in each test plan a detailed step-by-step procedure for testing automatic controls provided by the manufacturer.

Each test plan shall include the required test reporting forms to be completed by the Contractor's testing representatives. Procedures shall be structured to test the chiller controls and variable-primary pumping controls through all modes of control to confirm that the controls are performing with the intended sequence of operation.

Controllers shall be verified to be properly calibrated and have the proper set point to provide stable control of their respective equipment.

e. Performance variables: Each test plan shall list performance variables that are required to be measured or tested as part of the field test.

Include in the listed variables performance requirements indicated on the equipment schedules on the design drawings. Chiller manufacturer shall furnish with each test procedure a description of acceptable results that have been verified.

Chiller manufacturer shall identify the acceptable limits or tolerance within which each tested performance variable shall acceptably operate.

f. Job specific: Test plans shall be job specific and shall address the particular cooling towers and particular conditions which exist in this contract. Generic or general preprinted test procedures are not acceptable.

g. Specialized components: Test plans shall include procedures for field testing and field adjusting specialized components, such as control valves, or differential pressure transducers.

3.6.2 Testing

a. Each water chiller system shall be field acceptance tested in compliance with its approved field acceptance test plan and the resulting following field acceptance test report submitted for approval:

1. Water chiller - field acceptance test report

b. Manufacturer's recommended testing: Conduct the manufacturer's recommended field testing in compliance with the approved test plan. Furnish a factory trained field representative authorized by and to represent the equipment manufacturer at the complete

SECTION 23 64 11.00 50 Page 18


execution of the field acceptance testing.

c. Operational test: Conduct a continuous 48 hour operational test for each chiller. Equipment shutdown before the test period is completed shall result in the test period being started again and run for the required duration. For the duration of the test period, compile an operational log of each item of equipment. Log required entries every two hours. Use the test report forms for logging the operational variables.

d. Notice of tests: Conduct the manufacturer's recommended tests and the operational tests; record the required data using the approved reporting forms. Notify the Contracting Officer in writing at least 15 calendar days prior to the testing. Within 30 calendar days after acceptable completion of testing, submit each test report for review and approval.

e. Report forms: Type data entries and writing on the test report forms. Completed test report forms for each item of equipment shall be reviewed, approved, and signed by the Contractor's test director. The manufacturer's field test representative shall review, approve, and sign the report of the manufacturer's recommended test. Signatures shall be accompanied by the person's name typed.

f. Deficiency resolution: The test requirements acceptably met; deficiencies identified during the tests shall be corrected in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations and corrections retested in order to verify compliance.

3.7 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TESTS

3.7.1 General Requirements

Before each chilled water system is accepted, tests to demonstrate the general operating characteristics of the chiller and associated pumping system shall be conducted by a registered professional engineer or an approved manufacturer's start-up representative experienced in system start-up and testing, at such times as directed. Water chiller testing shall be observed by the Commissioning Agency. Tests shall cover a period of not less than 48 hours for each system and shall demonstrate that the entire system is functioning in accordance with the drawings and specifications. Corrections and adjustments shall be made as necessary and tests shall be re-conducted to demonstrate that the water chiller system is functioning as specified. Prior to acceptance, service valve seal caps and blanks over gauge points shall be installed and tightened. Any refrigerant lost during the system startup shall be replaced. If tests do not demonstrate satisfactory system performance, deficiencies shall be corrected and the system shall be retested. Tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Water and electricity required for the tests will be furnished by the Government. Any material, equipment, instruments, and personnel required for the test shall be provided by the Contractor. Field tests shall be coordinated with Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING.

3.7.2 Test Report

The report shall document compliance with the specified performance criteria upon completion and testing of the system. The report shall

SECTION 23 64 11.00 50 Page 19


indicate the number of days covered by the tests and any conclusions as to the adequacy of the system. The report shall also include the following information and shall be taken at least three different times at outside dry-bulb temperatures that are at least 5 degrees F apart:

a. Date and outside weather conditions.

b. The load on the system based on the following:

(1) The refrigerant used in the system. (2) Condensing temperature and pressure. (3) Suction temperature and pressure. (4) Running current, voltage and proper phase sequence for each phase of all motors. (5) The actual on-site setting of all operating and safety controls. (6) Chilled water pressure, flow and temperature in and out of the chiller.

3.8 COMMISSIONING

Provide the services of a supervisory level technician, in responsible charge of the work in this section, and factory authorized start-up and service technicians; for each major component or system in this section, to participate in the work specified in Section 23 08 00.00 50 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS. Refer to Section 23 08 00.00 50, COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS for description of work.

3.9 DEMONSTRATIONS

Contractor shall conduct a training course for the operating staff as designated by the Contracting Officer. The training period shall consist of a total 4 hours of normal working time and start after the system is functionally completed but prior to final acceptance tests. The field posted instructions shall cover all of the items contained in the approved operation and maintenance manuals as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations.


SECTION 23 64 11.00 50 Page 20


SECTION 23 64 26

CHILLED, AND HEATING HOT WATER PIPING SYSTEMS08/09

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASSE 1003 (2009) Performance Requirements for Water Pressure Reducing Valves for Domestic Water Distribution Systems - (ANSI approved 2010)


AWS BRH (2007; 5th Ed) Brazing Handbook

AWS D1.1/D1.1M (2010; Errata 2011) Structural Welding Code - Steel




ASME B16.1 (2010) Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Classes 25, 125, and 250

ASME B16.18 (2012) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings



ASME B16.3 (2011) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300

ASME B16.39 (2009) Standard for Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions; Classes 150, 250, and 300

ASME B31.9 (2011) Building Services Piping

ASME B40.100 (2005; R 2010) Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments




ASME BPVC SEC VIII (2010) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes: Section VIII Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessel


ASTM A106/A106M (2013) Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service

ASTM A126 (2004; R 2009) Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings



ASTM A733 (2003; E 2009; R 2009) Standard Specification for Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel and Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe Nipples


ASTM B42 (2010) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes

ASTM B75/B75M (2011) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube


ASTM D3308 (2012) PTFE Resin Skived Tape

ASTM D520 (2000; R 2011) Zinc Dust Pigment

ASTM D596 (2001; R 2011) Reporting Results of Analysis of Water

ASTM F1199 (1988; R 2010) Cast (All Temperatures and Pressures) and Welded Pipe Line Strainers (150 psig and 150 degrees F Maximum)

HYDRAULIC INSTITUTE (HI)

HI 1.1-1.2 (2008) Rotodynamic (Centrifugal) Pump for Nomenclature and Definitions




MSS SP-110 (2010) Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends




MSS SP-70 (2011) Gray Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends

MSS SP-71 (2011; Errata 2013) Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends

MSS SP-72 (2010a) Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for General Service

MSS SP-78 (2011) Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends


MSS SP-85 (2011) Gray Iron Globe & Angle Valves Flanged and Threaded Ends








ANSI A13.1 (2007; R 2013) Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems






Provide the water systems having the minimum service (design) temperature-pressure rating indicated. Provision of the piping systems, including materials, installation, workmanship, fabrication, assembly, erection, examination, inspection, and testing shall be in accordance with the required and advisory provisions of ASME B31.9 except as modified or supplemented by this specification section or design drawings. This specification section covers the water systems piping which is located within, on, and adjacent to building(s) as indicated on Contract Drawings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. Submit the following submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Piping systems; G

Submit dimensioned shop drawings of piping showing both the accurately scaled piping and its relationship to space enclosure. Provide in accordance with Section 01300, "Submittal Procedures" and as modified by this section. Illustration shall be drawn to a minimum scale of 1/4 inch per foot. Drawings shall indicate actual plan dimensions and elevations above finished floor. Provide illustrations including sections to clarify elevations of equipment, equipment connections, piping, and piping accessories. Drawings shall conform to standard drafting industry procedures. Include contractors name, project title, date and phone number in title block. Include as a minimum the following:

a. Chilled water piping.

b. Hot water piping (heating).

c. Valves.

d. Floor drains.

e. Relief piping.

f. Piping roof and wall penetrations.

g. Expansion tanks.

h. Air separators.

i. Pumps.

j. Air handling units.



k. Equipment supports; floor and roof type.

l. Fans.

m. Electrical panels, starters and disconnect switches.

SD-03 Product Data

Valves; G

Gaskets; G

Soldering metals; G

Pump motors; G

Pumps; G

Motor starters; G

Tanks; G

Air vent valves; G

For valves, submit valve manufacturer's published ratings and maximum operating pressure differential. For relief valves, also submit manufacturer's published discharge capacity ratings. For pumps, include pump speed and characteristic curves for performance of impeller selected for each pump. Curves shall indicate capacity versus head, efficiency, and brake horsepower for full range, from shutoff to free delivery. Provide family of curves for each pump submitted indicating multiple impeller sizes with operating point noted. Computer generated curves indicating a single impeller size are not acceptable. For air separator tanks include efficiency curves.

SD-06 Test Reports

Water analysis; G

Piping welds NDE report

Pressure tests reports; G

Report shall be provided in bound 8-1/2 by 11 inch booklets. In the reports, document all phases of the tests performed. Include initial test summaries, all repairs/adjustments made, and the final test results.

SD-07 Certificates

Employer's Record Documents (For Welding)

Welding Procedures and Qualifications

Bolts




Lesson plan for the Instruction Course; G


Requirements for data packages are specified Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA, except as supplemented and modified by this specification section.

Submit spare parts data for each different item of equipment specified, with operation and maintenance data packages. Include a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply, a recommended spare parts list for 1 year of operation, and a list of the parts recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced on a routine basis.

Submit a list of qualified permanent service organizations with operation and maintenance data packages. Include service organization addresses and service area or expertise. The service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and be able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

Water Treatment Systems; G

An operation manual in bound 8-1/2 by 11 inch booklets listing step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, abnormal shutdown, emergency shutdown, and normal shutdown. Include testing procedures used in determining water quality.

A maintenance manual in bound 8-1/2 by 11 inch booklets listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and a trouble shooting guide.

Flow Balancing Valves, Data Package 3; G

Water Pressure Reducing Valve, Data Package 3; G

Pressure Relief Valve, Data Package 2; G

Pumps, Data Package 3; G

Expansion Tanks, Data Package 2; G

Air Separator Tanks, Data Package 2; G

1.4 MODIFICATIONS TO REFERENCES


1.4.1 Definitions

For the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract documents, advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory, the word "should" shall be interpreted as "shall." Reference to the "code official"



shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For Navy owned property, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For leased facilities, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the "lessor." References to the "permit holder" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contractor."

1.4.2 Administrative Interpretations

For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of Chapter 1, "Administrator," do not apply. These administrative requirements are covered by the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulations (FAR) included in this contract and by the authority granted to the Officer in Charge of Construction to administer the construction of this project. References in the ICC Codes to sections of Chapter 1, shall be applied appropriately by the Contracting Officer as authorized by his administrative cognizance and the FAR.

1.5 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

Exposed moving parts, parts that produce high operating temperature, parts which may be electrically energized, and parts that may be a hazard to operating personnel shall be insulated, fully enclosed, guarded, or fitted with other types of safety devices. Safety devices shall be installed so that proper operation of equipment is not impaired.


Equipment and components shall be delivered and stored with protective crating and weatherproof wrapping to provide protection from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Proper protection and care of all material both before and during installation shall be the Contractor's responsibility. Any materials found to be damaged shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. During installation, cap piping and similar openings to keep out dirt and other foreign matter. Any porous materials found to be contaminated with mold or mildew will be replaced at the Contractor's expense. Non-porous materials found to be contaminated with mold or mildew will be disinfected and cleaned prior to installation.




1.7.2 Drawings


1.7.3 Accessibility

Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation,



maintenance, and repair are readily accessible. Install concealed valves, expansion joints, controls, dampers, and equipment requiring access, in locations freely accessible through access doors.


Submit a list of service organizations to support the installed pumps.

1.8.1 Pump Design Criteria

Pumps design and manufacturer shall conform to Hydraulic Institute Standards. Pump sizes, capacities, pressures, operating characteristics and efficiency shall be as scheduled. Head capacity curves shall slope up to maximum head at shut off. Select pumps near the midrange of the curve, so the design capacity falls to the left of the best efficiency point, to allow a cushion for the usual drift to the right in operation, without approaching the pump curve end point and possible cavitation and unstable operation. Select pumps for open systems so that required net positive suction head (NPSHR) does not exceed the net positive head available (NPSHA). The head for pumps submitted for pumping through chillers and through chilled water coils shall be increased, if necessary, to match the equipment approved for the project. Pumps shall be non overloading at any point on the head capacity curve including one pump operation in a parallel or series pumping installation. Provide pumps with motors, impellers, drive assemblies, bearings, coupling guard and other accessories specified. Statically and dynamically balance all rotating parts. Furnish each pump and motor with a nameplate giving the manufacturers name, serial number of pump, capacity in GPM and head in feet at design condition, horsepower, voltage, frequency, speed and full load current and motor efficiency. Factory test all pumps before shipment. The manufacturer shall certify all pump ratings. After completion of balancing, provide replacement of impellers or trim impellers to provide specified flow at actual pumping head, as installed. Furnish one spare seal and casing gasket for each pump to the Contracting Officer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship. The standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening.

The two year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The 2 years experience shall be satisfactorily completed by a product which has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures.

Products having less than a 2 year field service record shall be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation, for not less than 6000 hours exclusive of the manufacturer's factory tests, can be shown. System components shall be environmentally suitable for the indicated locations.

The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment



installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

2.2 STEEL PIPING

Except where noted otherwise, water piping shall be black steel pipe. Provide steel piping with a ANSI/ASME Class 125 service rating, which for 150 degrees F, the pressure rating is 175 psig. Steel piping shall conform to ASTM A53/A53M and ASTM A106/A106M, Grade B, Schedule 40.

2.2.1 Fittings and End Connections (Joints)

Piping and fittings 1 inch and smaller shall have threaded connections. Piping and fittings larger than 1 inch and smaller than 2 1/2 inches shall have either threaded, or welded connections. Piping and fittings 2 1/2 inches and larger shall have welded, or flanged connections. The manufacturer of each fitting shall be permanently identified on the body of the fitting in accordance with MSS SP-25.


Use threaded valves and pipe connections conforming to ASME B1.20.1. Used threaded fitting conforming to ASME B16.3. Use threaded unions conforming to ASME B16.39. Use threaded pipe nipples conforming to ASTM A733.

2.2.1.2 Flanged Connections

Flanges shall conform to ASME B16.1, Class 150. Gaskets shall be nonasbestos compressed material in accordance with ASME B16.21, 1/16 inch thickness, full face or self-centering flat ring type. These gaskets shall contain aramid fibers bonded with styrene butadeine rubber (SBR) or nitrile butadeine rubber (NBR). Bolts, nuts, and bolt patterns shall conform to ASME B16.1.

2.3 COPPER TUBING

Provide copper tubing and fittings with a ANSI/ASME Class 125 service rating, which for 150 degrees F., the pressure rating is 175 psig. Copper tubing may be used in lieu of steel for line sizes 2 inches and smaller.

2.3.1 Tube

Use copper tube conforming to ASTM B88, Type L for aboveground tubing, and Type K for buried tubing.

2.3.2 Fittings and End Connections (Solder and Flared Joints)

Wrought copper and bronze solder joint pressure fittings, including unions ands flanges, shall conform to ASME B16.22 and ASTM B75/B75M. Provide adapters as required. Cast copper alloy solder-joint pressure fittings , including unions and flanges, shall conform to ASME B16.18. ASTM B42 copper pipe nipples with threaded end connections shall conform to ASTM B42.

2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

Provide dielectric waterways with a water impervious insulation barrier capable of limiting galvanic current to 1 percent of short circuit current in a corresponding bimetallic joint. When dry, insulation barrier shall be able to withstand a 600-volt breakdown test. Provide dielectric waterways



constructed of galvanized steel and have threaded end connections to match connecting piping. Dielectric waterways shall be suitable for the required operating pressures and temperatures. Provide dielectric flanges with the same pressure ratings as standard flanges and provide complete electrical isolation between connecting pipe and/or equipment as described herein for dielectric waterways. Furnish isolating flange kits with nylon bolt bushings and washers. Note that threaded dielectric pipe unions are not acceptable.

2.5 VALVES

Provide valves with a ANSI/ASME Class 125 service rating, which for 150 degrees F, the pressure rating is 175 psig.

2.5.1 Valves and Related Equipment

End connections shall conform to paragraph entitled "End Connections." Valves shall have rising stems and shall open when turned counterclockwise.

2.5.2 Gate Valve

Gate valves 2 inches and smaller shall conform to MSS SP-80 Class 125 and shall be bronze with wedge disc, rising stem and threaded, soldered, or flanged ends. Gate valves 2-1/2 inches and larger shall conform to MSS SP-70, Class 125, cast iron with bronze trim, outside screw and yoke, and flanged or threaded ends.

2.5.3 Globe and Angle Valve

Globe and angle valves 2 inches and smaller shall conform to MSS SP-80, Class 125. Globe and angle valves 2-1/2 inches and larger shall conform to MSS SP-85, Class 125.

2.5.4 Check Valve

Check valves 2 inches and smaller shall conform to MSS SP-80 and shall be bronze with threaded, soldered, or flanged ends. Unless otherwise noted, check valves 2-1/2 inches and larger shall conform to MSS SP-71, Type I, II, III, or IV, Class 125 or 150 and shall be cast iron with bronze trim and flanged or threaded ends. Furnish swing check valves in horizontal piping and spring loaded check valves in vertical piping, and at pump discharge locations. Spring loaded check valves shall be Class 150, cast steel with flanged connections, single disc, Type 316 stainless steel disc material, Type 316 stainless steel trim including center guiding rod, with Buna N seat seals.

2.5.5 Butterfly Valve

Butterfly valves shall be 2-flange type or lug wafer type, and shall be bubble-tight at 150 psig. Valve bodies shall be cast iron, malleable iron, or steel. ASTM A167, Type 404 or Type 316, stainless steel stems, Type 316 stainless steel discs and synthetic EPDM rubber seats vulcanized into valve body shall be provided. Valves smaller than 8 inches shall each have a throttling handle including a minimum of seven locking positions. Valves 8 inches and larger shall have totally enclosed manual gear operators with adjustable balance return stops and position indicators. Valves in insulated lines shall have extended neck to accommodate insulation thickness. Valves with aluminum or other metallic seat backer rings or bushings are not acceptable.



2.5.6 Plug Valve

Plug valves 2 inches and larger shall conform to MSS SP-78, have flanged or threaded ends, and have cast iron bodies with bronze trim. Valves 2 inches and smaller shall be bronze with NPT connections for black steel pipe and brazed connections for copper tubing. Valve shall be lubricated, non-lubricated, or tetrafluoroethylene resin-coated type. Valve shall be resilient, double seated, trunnion mounted with tapered lift plug capable of 2-way shutoff. Valve shall operate from fully open to fully closed by rotation of the handwheel to lift and turn the plug. Valves 8 inches or larger shall be ball-eccentric type with handwheel and manual gear operators with position indicators.

2.5.7 Ball Valve

Full port design. Ball valves 1/2 inch and larger shall conform to MSS SP-72 or MSS SP-110 and shall be cast iron or bronze with threaded, soldered, or flanged ends. Valves 8 inches or larger shall be provided with handwheel and manual gear operators with position indicators. Ball valves may be provided in lieu of gate valves. Provide ball valves with 3/4 inch hose end connection where indicated. Provide ball valves with extended stems or insulated tee handles for insulated piping systems.

2.5.8 Manual Flow Balancing Valves

Sizes 2 inches and below: Globe Style body design; actuator and valve seat, threaded connections. All metal parts shall be of nonferrous, pressure die cast copper alloy. Valves shall be capable of being installed in any direction without affecting flow measurement and shall provide four (4) functions: (1) Precise flow measurement, (2) precision flow balancing, (3) positive shut off with no drip seat and teflon disc, (4) drain connection with protective cap.

a. Valves shall have handwheel with hidden memory feature to program the valve with precision tamperproof balancing setting.

b. Valve shall be shipped in a 4.5R factor polyurethane container that doubles as insulation after valve is installed.

Sizes 2-1/2 inches and above: Globe style body design; actuator and valve seat. All metal parts shall be of nonferrous copper alloy. Each valve shall provide three functions: (1) Precise flow measurement, (2) precision flow balancing, (3) positive shut off with no drip seat and teflon disc.

a. Valves shall have handwheel with hidden memory feature to program the valve with precision tamperproof balancing setting.

2.5.8.1 Flow Meter Gauge

Furnish to the Contracting Officer one new and unused portable differential flow meter complete with carrying case, differential pressure meter, and 5 feet length of hoses. Flow meter shall be furnished by the same manufacturer as the manual flow balancing valves and have all adapters and conversion charts required to record flow measurements.



2.5.9 Air Vents

2.5.9.1 Manual Air Vents

Manual air vents shall be 1/4 inch brass or bronze ball valve suitable for the pressure rating of the piping system and furnished with threaded plugs or caps.

2.5.9.2 Automatic Air Vents

Automatic air vents shall be 3/4 inch body size, Class 150 brass/bronze or brass body, Type 304 stainless steel float and linkage and removable seat of hardened Type 304 stainless steel. Each air vent valve shall have a large port permitting the expulsion of the air without developing excessive back pressure, a non-collapsible metal float which will close the valve and prevent the loss of water from the system. The name of the manufacturer shall be clearly stamped on the outside of each valve. The air vent valve shall be suitable for the pressure rating of the piping system.

2.5.10 Drain Valves

Ball valves conforming to MSS SP-110, manually operated 3/4 inch pipe size and above, with threaded ends. Provide hose nipple adapters for connecting a hose to lead to a convenient floor drain.

2.5.11 Safety Relief Valves

Provide cast iron bodies conforming to ASTM A126, Grade B with corrosion resistant internal working parts.

2.5.12 Water Pressure Reducing Valve

Valve, ASSE 1003 for water service, copper alloy body, automatic re-seating, with test lever.

2.6 PIPING ACCESSORIES

2.6.1 Strainer

Strainer, ASTM F1199, except as modified and supplemented in this specification. Strainer shall be the cleanable, basket or "Y" type, the same size as the pipeline. Strainer bodies shall be fabricated of cast iron with bottoms drilled, and tapped. Strainers of sizes 2 inches and smaller may be bronze body. Provide blowoff outlet with pipe nipple, ball valve, and discharge pipe nipple for stainless steel 2 inches and larger. The bodies shall have arrows clearly cast on the sides indicating the direction of flow.

Provide strainer with removable cover and sediment screen. The screen shall be made of minimum 22 gauge monel, or corrosion-resistant steel, with small perforations numbering not less than 400 per square inch to provide a net free area through the basket of at least 3.30 times that of the entering pipe. The flow shall be into the screen and out through the perforations.

2.6.2 Flexible Pipe Connectors

Provide nylon reinforced, synthetic spherical configuration connectors with dual spheres. Equip flanged assemblies with limit bolts to restrict



maximum travel to the manufacturer's standard limits. Unless otherwise indicated, the length of the flexible connectors shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the service intended. Internal sleeves or liners, compatible with circulating medium, shall be provided when recommended by the manufacturer. Provide covers to protect the bellows where indicated.

2.6.3 Pressure and Vacuum Gauges

Gauges, ASME B40.100 with throttling type needle valve or a pulsation dampener and shut-off valve. Provide gauges with 4.5 inch dial, brass or aluminum case, bronze tube, and siphon. Gauge shall have a range from 0 psig to approximately 1.5 times the maximum system working pressure. Each gauge range shall be selected so that at normal operating pressure, the needle is within the middle-third of the range. Furnish Simplex or compound types as indicated.

2.6.4 Temperature Gauges

Temperature gauges, shall be the industrial duty type and be provided for the required temperature range. Provide gauges with fixed thread connection, and an accuracy within 2 percent of scale range. Gauges shall have Fahrenheit scale in 2 degree graduations scale (black numbers) on a white face. Rigid stem type temperature gauges shall be provided in thermal wells.

2.6.4.1 Stem Cased-Glass

Stem cased-glass case shall be polished stainless steel or cast aluminum, 9 inches long, with clear acrylic lens, and non-mercury filled glass tube with indicating-fluid column.

2.6.4.2 Pressure/Temperature Test Ports

Pressure/Temperature Test ports shall have brass body and EPDM and/or Neoprene valve seals. Ports shall be rated for service between 35 and 275 degrees F and up to 500 psig. Ports shall be provided in lengths appropriate for the insulation thickness specified in Section 23 07 00, THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS, and installed to allow a minimum of 12 inches of access for probe insertion. Provide with screw-on cap attached with a strap or chain to prevent loss when removed. Ports shall be dia. 1/2 inch NPT and accept 1/8 inch diameter probes.

2.6.5 Thermal Well

Provide thermal wells for pipeline sensors in Section 23 09 23.13 20, BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC. Thermal wells shall be type 304 stainless steel and be of length required for each sensor. Locate where directed by controls installer.


Pipe hangers, inserts, guides, and supports: to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.

2.6.7 Escutcheons

Provide one piece or split hinge metal plates for piping entering floors, walls, and ceilings in exposed spaces. Secure plates in place by internal spring tension or set screws. Provide polished stainless steel plates or chromium-plated finish on copper alloy plates in finished spaces. Provide



paint finish on metal plates in unfinished spaces.

2.7 PUMPS

Pumps shall be the electrically driven, non-overloading, centrifugal type which conform to HI 1.1-1.2. Pumps shall be selected at head and flow indicated. Pump curve shall rise continuously from maximum capacity to shutoff. Pump motor shall conform to NEMA MG 1, be totally enclosed, and have sufficient horsepower for the service required. Pump motor shall have the required capacity to prevent overloading with pump operating at any point on its characteristic curve. Pump speed shall not exceed 1,750 rpm. Furnish pump motors 2 horsepower and greater with premium efficiency motors. Provide motors indicated for use with variable frequency drive motor starters with listing for inverter duty.

2.7.1 Base Mounted End-Suction Pumps

Each pump casing shall be designed to withstand the discharge head specified plus the static head on system plus 50 percent of the total, but not less than 125 psig. Pump casing and bearing housing shall be close grained cast iron. High points in the casing shall be provided with manual air vents; low points shall be provided with drain plugs. Provide threaded suction and discharge pressure gage tapping with square-head plugs.

Impeller shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Impeller, impeller wearing rings, glands, casing wear rings, and shaft sleeve shall be bronze. Shaft shall be carbon or alloy steel, turned and ground. Bearings shall be ball-bearings, roller-bearings, or oil-lubricated bronze-sleeve type bearings, and be efficiently sealed or isolated to prevent loss of oil or entrance of dirt or water.

Pump and motor shall be mounted on a common cast iron base having lipped edges and tapped drainage openings or structural steel base with lipped edges or drain pan and tapped drainage openings.Pump shall be provided with steel shaft coupling guard. Base-mounted pump, coupling guard, and motor shall each be bolted to a fabricated steel base which shall have bolt holes for securing base to supporting surface. Pump shall be accessible for servicing without disturbing piping connections. Shaft seals shall be mechanical-seals or stuffing-box type.

2.7.2 Mechanical Shaft Seals

Seals shall be single, inside mounted, end-face-elastomer bellows type with stainless steel spring, brass or stainless steel seal head, carbon rotating face, and tungsten carbide or ceramic sealing face. Glands shall be bronze and of the water-flush design to provide lubrication flush across the face of the seal. Bypass line from pump discharge to flush connection in gland shall be provided, with filter or cyclone particle separator in line.

2.8 EXPANSION TANKS

Tank shall be welded steel, constructed for, and tested to pressure-temperature rating of 125 psi at 150 degrees F. Provide tanks precharged to the minimum operating pressure. Tank shall have a replaceable polypropylene or butyl lined diaphragm which keeps the air charge separated from the water; shall be the captive air type.

Tanks shall accommodate expanded water of the system generated within the normal operating temperature range, limiting this pressure increase at all



components in the system to the maximum allowable pressure at those components. Each tank air chamber shall be fitted with a drain, fill, an air charging valve, and system connections. Tank shall be supported by steel legs or bases for vertical installation or steel saddles for horizontal installations. The only air in the system shall be the permanent sealed-in air cushion contained within the expansion tank.

2.9 AIR SEPARATOR TANKS

External air separation tank shall have an internal steel baffling and strainer element design, creating the required vortex and subsequent air and particulate separation. Tank shall be steel, constructed, tested, and stamped in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC VIII for a working pressure of 125 psig. Air separator shall provide a minimum 97% efficiency level with a maximum velocity of 4 feet/second and a maximum pressure drop of 1 ft H20. Tank shall have tangential inlets and outlets connections, threaded for 2 inches and smaller and flanged for sizes 2 1/2 inches and larger. Air released from a tank shall be vented as indicated. Tank shall be provided with a blow-down connection. Tank products without internal baffling and strainer devices are not acceptable.

2.10 WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS

When water treatment is specified, the use of chemical-treatment products containing equivalent chromium (CPR) is prohibited.

2.10.1 Water Analysis

Conditions of make-up water to be supplied to the condenser and chilled water systems were reported in accordance with ASTM D596 and are as follows:

Date of Sample _____

Temperature _____ degrees F

Silica (Sino 2) _____ pp (mg/1)

Insoluble _____ pp (mg/1)

Iron and Aluminum Oxides _____ pp (mg/1)

Calcium (Ca) _____ pp (mg/1)

Magnesium (Mg) _____ pp (mg/1)

Sodium and Potassium (Nan and AK)

_____ pp (mg/1)

Carbonate (HO 3) _____ pp (mg/1)

Sulfate (SO 4) _____ pp (mg/1)

Chloride (JCL) _____ pp (mg/1)

Nitrate (NO 3 _____ pp (mg/1)



Turbidity _____ unit

pH

Residual Chlorine pp (mg/1)

Total Alkalinity PM (me/1

Non-Carbonate Hardness PM (me/1

Total Hardness PM (me/1

Dissolved Solids pp (mg/1)

Fluorine pp (mg/1)

Conductivity McMahon/cm

2.10.2 Chilled and Heating Hot Water

Provide cleaning and treatment of installed piping systems. Water to beused in the chilled and heating hot water systems shall be treated withcorrosion inhibitor chemical, and as recommended by the manufacturers ofthe connected equipment. Chemicals shall meet all required federal, state, and local environmental regulations for the treatment of closed loop hydronic systems and direct discharge to the sanitary sewer.

2.10.3 Water Treatment Services

The services of a company regularly engaged in the treatment of chilled and heating hot water systems shall be used to determine the correct chemicals required, the concentrations required, and the water treatment equipment sizes and flow rates required. The company shall maintain the chemical treatment and provide all chemicals required for the chilled and heating hot water systems for a period of 1 year from the date of occupancy. The chemical treatment and services provided over the 1 year period shall meet the requirements of this specification as well as the recommendations from the manufacturers of the connected equipment. Acid treatment and proprietary chemicals shall not be used.

2.10.4 Chilled and Heating Hot Water Systems

A shot feeder shall be provided on both the chilled water and heating hot water piping as indicated. Size and capacity of feeder shall be based on local requirements and water analysis. The feeder shall be furnished with an air vent, gauge glass, funnel, valves, fittings, and piping. Furnish pipe-mounted shot feeder or floor mounted shot feeder with support legs as indicated.

2.11 ELECTRICAL WORK

Provide motors, controllers, integral disconnects, contactors, and controls with their respective pieces of equipment, except controllers indicated as part of motor control centers. Provide electrical equipment, including motors and wiring, as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation specified and control wiring required for



controls and devices specified, but not shown, shall be provided. For packaged equipment, the manufacturer shall provide controllers including the required monitors and timed restart.

Provide high efficiency type, single-phase, fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors, including motors that are part of a system, in accordance with NEMA MG 11.

Provide polyphase, squirrel-cage medium induction motors, including motors that are part of a system, that meet the efficiency ratings for premium efficiency motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1. Provide motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and of sufficient size to drive the load at the specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor.

Motors shall be rated for continuous duty with the enclosure specified. Motor duty requirements shall allow for maximum frequency start-stop operation and minimum encountered interval between start and stop. Motor torque shall be capable of accelerating the connected load within 20 seconds with 80 percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals during one starting period. Provide motor starters complete with thermal overload protection and other necessary appurtenances. Motor bearings shall be fitted with grease supply fittings and grease relief to outside of the enclosure.

2.12 PAINTING OF NEW EQUIPMENT

New equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied, and shall be as specified herein, and provided under each individual section.

2.12.1 Factory Painting Systems

Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided. The factory painting system applied will withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray fog test, except that equipment located outdoors shall withstand 3000 hours in a salt-spray fog test.

Salt-spray fog test shall be in accordance with ASTM B117, and for that test, the acceptance criteria shall be as follows: immediately after completion of the test, the paint shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no loss of 0.125 inch on either side of the scratch mark. The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment shall not be less than the film thickness used on the test specimen.

If manufacturer's standard factory painting system is being proposed for use on surfaces subject to temperatures above 120 degrees F, the factory painting system shall be designed for the temperature service.


Clean, retreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces need not be painted. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except metal surfaces subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F shall be cleaned to bare metal.

Where hot-dip galvanized steel has been cut, resulting surfaces with no galvanizing shall be coated with a zinc-rich coating conforming to ASTM D520,



Type I.

Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after the preceding coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and retouch before applying the succeeding coat. Color of finish coat shall be aluminum or light gray.

a. Temperatures Less Than 120 Degrees F: Immediately after cleaning, the metal surfaces subject to temperatures less than 120 degrees F shall receive one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.3 mil, one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil; and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil per coat.

b. Temperatures Between 120 and 400 degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of 400 degrees F heat-resisting enamel applied to a total minimum thickness of 2 mils.

c. Temperatures Greater Than 400 degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to temperatures greater than 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of 600 degrees F heat-resisting paint applied to a total minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.

2.13 NAMEPLATES

Major equipment including pumps, pump motors, expansion tanks, and air separator tanks shall have the manufacturer's name, type or style, model or serial number on a plate secured to the item of equipment. The nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable. Plates shall be durable and legible throughout equipment life and made of anodized aluminum or stainless steel. Plates shall be fixed in prominent locations with nonferrous screws or bolts.

2.14 RELATED COMPONENTS/SERVICES


Requirements for field applied insulation is specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.


Requirements for field installed insulation is specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS, except as supplemented and modified by this specification section.

2.14.3 Field Painting

Requirements for painting of surfaces not otherwise specified, and finish painting of items only primed at the factory, are specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

2.14.3.1 Mechanical Identification Materials




2.14.3.1.1 Plastic Pipe Markers


a. Snap-On Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid snap-on, color-coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1.

b. Pressure-Sensitive Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, permanent adhesive, color-coded, pressure-sensitive vinyl pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1.

c. Application: For exterior diameters greater than 6 inch (including insulation if any), provide continuous directional flow arrow tape around pipe circumference; two places, before and after pipe marker. Provide adhesive plastic pipe markers. For external diameters less than 6 inch (including insulation if any), provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the following methods:

(1) Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plasticpipemarker.

(2) Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap.

(3) Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (orinsulation).

2.14.3.1.2 Color Coding



Chilled water supply Green White CHWS Chilled water return Green White CHWR Heating water supply Yellow Black HWS Heating water return Yellow Black HWR Chemical feed Yellow Black CF Make-up water Green White CW Drain Green White DR





Less than 1-1/2 8 8 x 2 1/2 1-1/2 to 2 8 8 x 2 3/4 2 to 6 12 8 x 2 1-1/4 8 to 10 24 12 x 3 2-1/2 Over 10 32 12 x 3 3

2.14.3.1.3 Valve Tags

Provide 19-gage polished brass valve tags with stamp-engraved piping system abbreviation in 3/8 inch high letters and sequenced valve numbers 15 mm high, and with 1/8 inch hole for fastener, or 1/16 inch thick engraved plastic laminate valve tags, with piping system abbreviation in 3/8 inch high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2 inch high, and with 1/8 inch hole for fastener. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose. Compile valve schedule for each service. For each page of valve schedule, provide laminated plastic coated cardboard stock sheets.




2.14.3.1.4 Engraved Plastic Laminate Signs

Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, in the sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the sizes and wording indicated, black with white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate. Thickness: 1/16 inch for units up to 40 sq. in. or 8 inch length; 1/4 inch for larger units. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.

2.14.3.1.5 Plastic Equipment Markers


2.14.3.1.6 Plasticized Tags

Provide pre-printed or partially pre- printed accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matt finish suitable for writing, approximately 3 inch x 6 inch, with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre-printed wording including large-size primary wording (as examples; DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT OPERATE).



2.14.3.1.7 Lettering and Graphics

Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment. Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and specified, provide identification which indicates individual system number as well as service (as examples; Pump No. 3, Unit Heater No. 1H, Expansion Tank F12).

2.14.3.2 HEAT TRACE CABLE

Provide a UL Listed, and FM Approved heat tracing system for freeze protection of the exterior aboveground chilled water piping consisting of self-regulating heating cable, connection kits and electronic controller. Cable, sensors connection accessories and controller shall be furnished from a single manufacturer. The heating cable shall consist of a continuous core of conductive polymer that is extruded between two (2) 16 AWG nickel-plated copper bus wires; varies power output in response to pipe temperature changes. Furnish cable with a modified polyolefin inner jacket, tinned-copper braid and polyolefin outer jacket. The heating cable shall have a self-regulating factor of at least 90 percent, defined as the percent reduction of the heating cable power output going from a 40 degrees F pipe temperature to 150 degrees F pipe temperature. Furnish cable and system components to operate with the voltage indicated.

2.14.3.2.1 Connection Kits

Provide power connection, piping brackets, splice/tee and end seal kits compatible with selected heating cable. Use the factory furnished connection kits to eliminate the need for the installing contractor to cut into the heating-cable core to expose the bus wires. Connection kits shall be rated NEMA 4X to prevent water ingress and corrosion.

2.14.3.2.2 Cable Controller

Heating cable manufacturer shall provide a local digital controller for system control with built-in ground fault protection device (10-200mA). Digital controller shall be capable of supporting up to two (2) RTD temperature sensors; locate one on the chilled water piping and one on the chiller evaporator. Controller enclosure type shall be NEMA 4X. Digital control system shall be configured for line-sensing. Digital controller shall have a built-in self-test feature to verify proper functionality of heating cable system. Digital controller shall be able to communicate with the facility Direct Digital Control System by a direct BACnet interlocks. Digital controller shall be furnished with a dry contact relay for alarm annunciation back to the DDC system. The following variables will be monitored by the digital controller and reported back to the DDC:

a. Current draw.

b. Fault alarm.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Cut pipe accurately to measurements established at the jobsite, and work into place without springing or forcing, completely clearing all windows, doors, and other openings. Cutting or other weakening of the building structure to facilitate piping installation is not permitted without written approval. Cut pipe or tubing square, remove burrs by reaming, and fashion to permit free expansion and contraction without causing damage to the building structure, pipe, joints, or hangers. Coordinate final locations of piping and system components with work of all trades adjacent to installation. Connections between ferrous and copper piping materials shall be made with isolating dielectric waterway fittings and isolating flange kits.

Notify the Contracting Officer in writing at least 15 calendar days prior to the date the connections are required. Obtain approval before interrupting service. Furnish materials required to make connections into existing systems and perform excavating, backfilling, compacting, and other incidental labor as required. Furnish labor and tools for making actual connections to existing systems.

3.1.1 Welding

Provide welding work specified in this section for piping systems in conformance with ASME B31.9, as modified and supplemented by this specification section and the accompanying drawings. The welding work includes: qualification of welding procedures, welders, welding operators, brazers, brazing operators, and nondestructive examination personnel; maintenance of welding records, and examination methods for welds.

3.1.1.1 Employer's Record Documents (For Welding)

Submit for review and approval the following documentation. This documentation and the subject qualifications shall be in compliance with ASME B31.9.

a. List of qualified welding procedures that is proposed to be used to provide the work specified in this specification section.

b. List of qualified welders, brazers, welding operators, and brazing operators that are proposed to be used to provide the work specified in this specification section.

c. List of qualified weld examination personnel that are proposed to be used to provide the work specified in this specification section.

3.1.1.2 Welding Procedures and Qualifications

a. Specifications and Test Results: Submit copies of the welding procedures specifications and procedure qualification test results for each type of welding required. Approval of any procedure does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for producing acceptable welds. Submit this information on the forms printed in ASME BPVC SEC IX or their equivalent.

b. Certification: Before assigning welders or welding operators to the work, submit a list of qualified welders, together with data and



certification that each individual is performance qualified as specified. Do not start welding work prior to submitting welder, and welding operator qualifications. The certification shall state the type of welding and positions for which each is qualified, the code and procedure under which each is qualified, date qualified, and the firm and individual certifying the qualification tests.

3.1.1.3 Examination of Piping Welds

Conduct non-destructive examinations (NDE) on piping welds and brazing and verify the work meets the acceptance criteria specified in ASME B31.9. NDE on piping welds covered by ASME B31.9 is visual inspection only. Submit a piping welds NDE report meeting the requirements specified in ASME B31.9.

3.1.1.4 Welding Safety

Welding and cutting safety requirements shall be in accordance with AWS Z49.1.

3.1.2 Directional Changes

Make changes in direction with factory-fabricated threaded, solder joint or forged steel welded fittings. Mitering or notching pipe or other similar construction to form elbows or tees is not permitted. Forged steel branch outlet fittings are acceptable in lieu of forged steel welding tee fittings provided that the branch pipe size is a minimum of one size smaller than the main pipe. Unless noted otherwise, use long radius elbows. The centerline radius of bends shall not be less than 6 diameters of the pipe. Bent pipe showing kinks, wrinkles, flattening, or other malformations is not acceptable.

3.1.3 Functional Requirements

Pitch horizontal supply mains down in the direction of flow as indicated. The grade shall not be less than 1 inch in 40 feet. Reducing fittings shall be used for changes in pipe sizes. Cap or plug open ends of pipelines and equipment during installation to keep dirt or other foreign materials out of the system.

Pipe not otherwise specified shall be uncoated. Connections to appliances shall be made with malleable iron unions for steel pipe 2 inches or less in diameter, and with flanges for pipe 2-1/2 inches and above in diameter. Connections between ferrous and copper piping shall be electrically isolated from each other with dielectric waterways or flanges.

Piping located in air plenums shall conform to NFPA 90A requirements. Pipe and fittings installed in inaccessible conduits or trenches under concrete floor slabs shall be welded. Equipment and piping arrangements shall fit into space allotted and allow adequate acceptable clearances for installation, replacement, entry, servicing, and maintenance. Electric isolation fittings and isolating flange kits shall be provided between dissimilar metals.

3.1.4 Fabrication and Assembly of Piping and Components

Welding, heating, and soldering metals shall conform to ASME B31.9 and as specified herein. Provide sufficient pitch to assure adequate drainage and venting. Drain valves at low points of piping system, and automatic air vent valves at high points where air pockets would occur. Piping shall



follow general arrangement shown, cut accurately to measurements established for the work by the Contractor, and worked into place without springing or forcing, except where cold-springing is indicated. Piping and equipment within buildings shall be entirely out of the way of electrical conduit, lighting fixtures, equipment and doors, windows, and other openings. Run overhead piping in buildings in the most inconspicuous positions. Provide adequate clearance from walls, ceilings, and floors to permit welding of joints; at least 6 inches for pipe sizes 4 inches and less, 10 inches for pipe sizes over 4 inches, and in corners provide sufficient clearance to permit the welder to work between pipe and one wall. Provide for expansion and contraction of pipe lines. Make changes in size of water lines with reducing fittings. Eccentric reducer fittings shall have flat side on top. Do not conceal, or insulate piping until inspected, tested, and approved. Protect materials and equipment from weather. Run pipe to be insulated as shown and as required with sufficient clearance to permit application of insulation. Do not miter pipe to form elbows, or notch straight runs to form full-sized tees, or utilize any similar construction. Except where shown otherwise, run vertical piping plumb and straight and parallel to walls. Thoroughly clean each section of pipe, fittings, and valves to be free of foreign matter before erection. Prior to erection, hold each piece of pipe in an inclined position and thoroughly tap to loosen sand, mill scale, and foreign matter. Before final connections are made to apparatus, wash interior of piping thoroughly with water. Blow out piping with high pressure steam or compressed air to remove rust scale, oil, and debris. Plug or cap open ends of mains during shutdown periods. Do not leave lines open at any place where foreign matter might accidentally enter.

3.1.4.1 Insulation of Copper Tubing

Insulate copper tubing placed in cinder fill or run through cinder block foundation from cinder material to prevent sulphur corrosion by wrapping complete continuous tubing surface with protective tape.

3.1.4.2 Strainers

Provide strainers to protect orifices, automatic valves, pump and compressor from foreign materials. Locate strainers close to equipment to be protected. Install strainers with screen drum and in direction of flow, as marked on strainer body. Strainers shall have isolating service valves to permit servicing strainer with minimum loss of fluid. Install strainers with basket side down. Provide clearance for removal and replacing of strainer screens. Strainers shall have screens of ample net free area and be composed of materials which shall be compatible with fluid being used. Provide reducer fittings for changes in pipeline sizes and strainer connection sizes. Provide a pressure gage with valved connection to inlet and outlet sides of strainer for determining pressure drop through strainer, for indicating need for cleaning strainer screen. For strainers 2 inches and larger, provide 3/4 inch blowdown piping with shutoff valve and union at strainer. Extend blowdown piping and terminate above nearest floor drain.

3.1.4.3 Equipment Clearance

Provide shutoff valves in water lines to vessels to permit servicing without draining system. Locate valves so as not to interfere with coil and internal component removal. Where water boxes are provided, water piping connections may be made directly to covers. Provide piping with mechanical piping connections adjacent to covers, and water shutoff valves



located so as not to interfere with tube cleaning or pulling operations after pipe sections have been removed. Maintain working space for removal of heads, and on one end of vessel provide a clear space at least equal to overall length, breadth, and depth of the tube bundle for tube removal. A door opening, window, or wall opening, may be utilized for this purpose.

3.1.4.4 Piping, Chilled Water and Heating Hot Water Coils

Provide coils with a counterflow piping arrangement. Connect supply piping at bottom of coil and connect return piping at top of coil. Provide supply piping to coil connection valves and accessories indicated. Provide return piping from coil connection with valves and accessories indicated. Provide unions and flanges as necessary to permit removal of coil and automatic control valves. Piping and fittings shall not interfere with access to equipment.

3.1.4.5 Pumps

Support, anchor, and guide so that no strains are imposed on pump by weight or thermal movement of piping. Provide air vent valve on pump casing. Pipe drain outlets on pump bases to nearest floor or other acceptable drains, with necessary clean-out tees. Provide rigid pipe or tubing with fittings for pressure gages on suction and discharge and control accessories at pumps.

3.1.4.6 Make-Up Water and Expansion Tanks

Provide chilled and heating water systems with automatic water makeup, and relief valves to drain with air gap between relief outlets and drains. Pneumatically pressurize tanks during charging of water, so that system is fully charged with water and with level in expansion tanks at normal level at normal operating conditions.

3.1.5 Fittings and End Connections


Threaded connections shall be made with tapered threads and made tight with PTFE tape complying with ASTM D3308 or equivalent thread-joint compound applied to the male threads only. Not more than three threads shall show after the joint is made.

3.1.5.2 Brazed Connections

Brazing, AWS BRH, except as modified herein. During brazing, the pipe and fittings shall be filled with a pressure regulated inert gas, such as nitrogen, to prevent the formation of scale. Before brazing copper joints, both the outside of the tube and the inside of the fitting shall be cleaned with a wire fitting brush until the entire joint surface is bright and clean. Do not use brazing flux. Surplus brazing material shall be removed at all joints. Steel tubing joints shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Piping shall be supported prior to brazing and not be sprung or forced.

3.1.5.3 Welded Connections

Branch connections shall be made with welding tees or forged welding branch outlets. Pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned of all scale and foreign matter before the piping is assembled. During welding, the pipe and fittings



shall be filled with an inert gas, such as nitrogen, to prevent the formation of scale. Beveling, alignment, heat treatment, and inspection of weld shall conform to ASME B31.9. Weld defects shall be removed and rewelded at no additional cost to the Government. Electrodes shall be stored and dried in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M or as recommended by the manufacturer. Electrodes that have been wetted or that have lost any of their coating shall not be used.

3.1.5.4 Flared Connections

When flared connections are used, a suitable lubricant shall be used between the back of the flare and the nut in order to avoid tearing the flare while tightening the nut.

3.1.5.5 Flanges and Unions

Except where copper tubing is used, union or flanged joints shall be provided in each line immediately preceding the connection to each piece of equipment or material requiring maintenance such as coils, pumps, control valves, and other similar items. Flanged joints shall be assembled square end tight with matched flanges, gaskets, and bolts. Gaskets shall be suitable for the intended application.

3.1.6 Valves

Isolation gate butterfly or ball valves as indicatedshall be installed on each side of each piece of equipment, at the midpoint of all looped mains, and at any other point indicated or required for draining, isolating, or sectionalizing purpose. Isolation valves may be omitted where balancing cocks are installed to provide both balancing and isolation functions. Each valve except check valves shall be identified. Valves in horizontal lines shall be installed with stems horizontal or above. For line sizes 2 inches and smaller, provide ball valves for shutoff duty.

3.1.7 Air Vents

Air vents shall be provided at all high points, on all water coils, and where indicated to ensure adequate venting of the piping system.

3.1.8 Drains

Drains shall be provided at all low points and where indicated to ensure complete drainage of the piping. Drains shall be accessible, and shall consist of ball valve with 3/4 inch hose outlet connection unless otherwise indicated.

3.1.9 Flexible Pipe Connectors

Connectors shall be attached to components in strict accordance with the latest printed instructions of the manufacturer to ensure a vapor tight joint. Hangers, when required to suspend the connectors, shall be of the type recommended by the flexible pipe connector manufacturer and shall be provided at the intervals recommended.

3.1.10 Temperature Gauges and Test Ports

Temperature gauges shall be located on coolant supply and return piping at each chiller, at each automatic temperature control device without an integral thermometer, and where indicated or required for proper operation



of equipment. Pressure/temperature test reports for insertion thermometers shall extend beyond thermal insulation surface not less than 1 inch.


Pipe hangers, inserts, and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, except as supplemented and modified in this specification section. Pipe hanger types 5, 12, and 26 shall not be used. Hangers used to support piping 2 inches and larger shall be fabricated to permit adequate adjustment after erection while still supporting the load. Piping subjected to vertical movement, when operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures, shall be supported by variable spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers. Provide dielectric isolation between ferrous and copper materials at all pipe hanger and support locations. For copper piping with ferrous hangers, provide felt lined galvanized steel compression bushings.

3.1.11.1 Hangers

Type 3 shall not be used.

3.1.11.2 Inserts

Type 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete is placed. Continuous inserts which allow more adjustments may be used if they otherwise meet the requirements for Type 18 inserts.

3.1.11.3 C-Clamps

Type 19 and 23 C-clamps shall be torqued per MSS SP-69 and have both locknuts and retaining devices, furnished by the manufacturer. Field-fabricated C-clamp bodies or retaining devices are not acceptable.

3.1.11.4 Angle Attachments

Type 20 attachments used on angles and channels shall be furnished with an added malleable-iron heel plate or adapter.

3.1.11.5 Saddles and Shields

Where Type 39 saddle or Type 40 shield are permitted for a particular pipe attachment application, the Type 39 saddle, connected to the pipe, shall be used on all pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or higher. Type 40 shields shall be used on all piping less than 4 inches and all piping 4 inches and larger carrying medium less than 60 degrees F. A high density insulation insert of cellular glass shall be used under the Type 40 shield for piping 2 inches and larger.

3.1.11.6 Horizontal Pipe Supports

Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP-69 and a support shall be installed not over 1 foot from the pipe fitting joint at each change in direction of the piping. Pipe supports shall be spaced not over 5 feet apart at valves. Pipe hanger loads suspended from steel joist with hanger loads between panel points in excess of 50 pounds shall have the excess hanger loads suspended from panel points.



3.1.11.7 Vertical Pipe Supports

Vertical pipe shall be supported at each floor, except at slab-on-grade, and at intervals of not more than 15 feet, not more than 8 feet from end of risers, and at vent terminations.

3.1.11.8 Multiple Pipe Runs

In the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member, a clip or clamp shall be used where each pipe crosses the base support member. Spacing of the base support members shall not exceed the hanger and support spacing required for an individual pipe in the multiple pipe run.

3.1.11.9 Structural Attachments

Attachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast-in concrete inserts, built-in anchors, or masonry anchor devices. Inserts and anchors shall be applied with a safety factor not less than 5. Supports shall not be attached to metal decking. Supports shall not be attached to the underside of concrete filled floors or concrete roof decks unless approved by the Contracting Officer. Masonry anchors for overhead applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only. Structural steel brackets required to support piping, headers, and equipment, but not shown, shall be provided under this section. Material used for support shall be as specified under Section 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL.

3.1.12 Pipe Alignment Guides

Pipe alignment guides shall be provided where indicated for expansion loops, offsets, and bends and as recommended by the manufacturer for expansion joints, not to exceed 5 feet on each side of each expansion joint, and in lines 4 inches or smaller not more than 2 feet on each side of the joint.

3.1.13 Pipe Anchors

Anchors shall be provided where indicated. Unless indicated otherwise, anchors shall comply with the requirements specified. Anchors shall consist of heavy steel collars with lugs and bolts for clamping and attaching anchor braces, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor braces shall be installed in the most effective manner to secure the desired results using turnbuckles where required.

Supports, anchors, or stays shall not be attached where they will injure the structure or adjacent construction during installation or by the weight of expansion of the pipeline. Where pipe and conduit penetrations of vapor barrier sealed surfaces occur, these items shall be anchored immediately adjacent to each penetrated surface, to provide essentially zero movement within penetration seal.


Unless otherwise indicated, provide pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, and concrete floors with pipe sleeves fitted into place at the time of construction. Sleeves shall be fabricated of black steel pipe; ASTM A53/A53M, Standard weight. Extend each sleeve through its respective wall or floor and cut flush with each surface, except in floors; extend sleeves above slab at least 2 inches. Unless indicated to be equipped with a modular mechanical sealing assembly, or otherwise indicated on Contract



Drawings, provide sleeves large enough to provide a minimum clearance of 1/4 inch all around the pipe/insulation penetrating the sleeve. For insulated piping, insulation shall be continuous through the sleeve. Do not install sleeves in structural members except where indicated or approved. Sleeves in interior gypboard partitions are generally not required unless specifically indicated on the Architectural Drawing partition details.

3.1.14.1 General Service Areas

Each sleeve shall extend through its respective wall, floor, or roof, and shall be cut flush with each surface. Pipes passing through concrete or masonry wall or concrete floors or roofs shall be provided with pipe sleeves fitted into place at the time of construction. Sleeves shall be of such size as to provide a minimum of 1/4 inch all-around clearance between bare pipe and sleeves or between jacketed-insulation and sleeves. Except in pipe chases or interior walls, the annular space between pipe and sleeve or between jacket over-insulation and sleeve shall be sealed in accordance with Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.


Sleeves in exterior below grade masonry walls, below grade concrete walls and slab-on-grade floors shall be equipped with an integral steel plate waterstop welded perpendicular to sleeve. Waterstop shall be positioned at the centerline of the substrate. Sleeves in exterior masonry and concrete walls below and above grade, and slab-on-grade floors shall be with a modular mechanical type sealing assembly. Seal shall consist of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe/conduit and sleeve with corrosion protected carbon steel bolts, nuts, and pressure plates. Links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and each nut. After the seal assembly is properly positioned in the sleeve, tightening of the bolt shall cause the rubber sealing elements to expand and provide a watertight seal between the pipe/conduit and the sleeve. Each seal assembly shall be sized as recommended by the manufacturer to fit the pipe and sleeve involved.

3.1.14.3 Fire-Rated Penetrations

Details are indicated on the Architectural Drawings indicating conditions for penetrations through fire and smoke rate assemblies. Provide sleeved or non-sleeved installation as indicated. Seal the annular space between the pipe and sleeve with fire-stopping material and sealant that meet the requirement of Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.

3.1.14.4 Escutcheons

Finished surfaces where exposed piping, bare or insulated, pass through floors, walls, or ceilings, except in boiler, utility, or equipment rooms, shall be provided with escutcheons. Where sleeves project slightly from floors, special deep-type escutcheons shall be used. Escutcheon shall be secured to pipe or pipe covering.


Access panels shall be provided in non-accessible general construction substrates for all concealed valves, vents, controls, and additionally for items requiring inspection or maintenance. Access panels shall be of



sufficient size and located so that the concealed items may be serviced and maintained or completely removed and replaced. Access panels shall be as specified in Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.

3.1.16 Heat Trace Cable

Apply heating cable linearly on the pipe after piping has successfully completed pressure tests. Secure the heating cable to piping with fiberglass tape. Heating cable and accessories shall be installed in accordance with the Contract Drawings and manufacturer's instructions. Start-up of cable system shall be performed by factory authorized technician or factory representative.

3.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

Install electrical equipment in accordance with NFPA 70 and manufacturers instructions. Provide thermal overload heaters in motor starters, sized for actual summer ambient temperature, and equipment operating conditions.


a. Install temporary piping loops and temporary circulating pump. Temporary circulating pump shall be sized to deliver a volume of water that will result in a minimum fluid velocity of six feet per second. Use of the permanent pumps is prohibited. Close all shutoff valves to equipment coils. Fill system with potable water. Circulate water for minimum 24 hour period. Drain and flush system until solids are not present.

b. Fill system with potable water; vent air from system. Introduce cleaning chemical at solution volume recommended by chemical manufacturer. Circulate solution for 24 hours. Drain and flush system until drain water is clear.

c. Fill system with potable water; vent air from system. Introduce cleaning chemical at solution volume recommended by chemical manufacturer. Open all shutoff valves to heat transfer coils and equipment. Circulate solution for period recommended by chemical manufacturer. Drain and flush system until drain water is clear. Clean all strainer baskets.

d. Fill system with potable water; vent air from system. Provide permanent chemical treatment. Coordinate testing of water in system with chemical treatment representative. Obtain written confirmation of acceptable water quality from treatment representative. Submit confirmation; include in maintenance manuals.


Locate equipment foundations where indicated on Contract Drawings. Install equipment on foundations in accordance with equipment manufacturer recommendations. Anchor equipment on concrete foundations before installing piping connections. Install piping in such a manner as to not impose a strain on the connected equipment. Do not bolt flanged joints tight unless the bolt-hole centerlines match.



3.4.1 General

Examine areas and conditions, with piping Installers present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting the performance of equipment. Examine rough-in locations for piping systems to verify actual connection locations prior to installation. Arrange piping adjacent to equipment to allow for servicing and maintenance.

3.4.2 Pump Installation

Install pumps level and plumb, in accordance with manufacturers written instructions. Anchor units to concrete foundations. Extend volute pan drain piping to floor drains. Provide piping system accessories indicated on Contract Drawings.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

Identify piping and physical hazards in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.144, ANSI A13.1, ANSI Z535.1. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment. Identify each piping system and item of equipment indicated on contract drawings. HVAC air outlets and inlets do not require identification. HVAC fan coil units do not require identification.


Install plastic pipe markers on each system, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, plenums) and exterior non-concealed locations.


b. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern.





3.5.2 Valves

Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping system; exclude check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, HVAC terminal devices and similar rough-in connections of end-use



units. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system. Turn valve schedules over to Contracting Officer.



3.5.4 Color Coding Scheme for Locating Hidden Utility Components

For areas where main, sub-main and sectional valves are located above ceilings, provide color coding scheme that identifies points of access for maintenance and operation of components and equipment that are not visible from the finished space and are accessible from the ceiling grid or access panels, consisting of a color code identification table and colored metal disks. Make each colored metal disk approximately 3/8 inch diameter and secure to removable ceiling panels with fasteners. Insert each fastener into the ceiling panel or access door so as to be concealed from view. Provide fasteners that are manually removable without the use of tools and that do not separate from the ceiling panels when the panels are dropped from ceiling height. Make installation of colored metal disks follow completion of the finished surface on which the disks are to be fastened. Provide colored identification code table to correspond to the colored discs. Make the table of hard card stock; laminated in plastic, for mounting in the facility managers area. Make the color code symbols approximately 3/4 inch in diameter and the related lettering in 1/2 inch high capital letters.

3.6 FIELD TESTS

Field tests and pipe cleaning shall be conducted in the presence of the QC Manager or his designated representative to verify systems compliance with specifications. Any material, equipment, instruments, and personnel required for the test shall be provided by the Contractor.

3.6.1 Equipment and Component Isolation

Prior to testing, equipment and components that cannot withstand the tests shall be properly isolated.

3.6.2 Pressure Tests

Each piping system shall be hydrostatically tested at a pressure not less than 150 psig for period of time sufficient to inspect every joint in the system and in no case less than 2 hours. Test pressure shall be monitored by a currently calibrated test pressure gauge. Leaks shall be repaired and piping retested until test requirements are met. No leakage or reduction in gage pressure shall be allowed.

Leaks shall be repaired by rewelding or replacing pipe or fittings. Caulking of joints will not be permitted. Concealed and insulated piping shall be tested in place before concealing.



Submit for approval pressure tests reports covering the above specified piping pressure tests; describe the systems tested, test results, defects found and repaired, and signature of the pressure tests' director. Obtain approval from the QC Manager before concealing piping or applying insulation to tested and accepted piping.

3.6.3 Test of Backflow Prevention Assemblies

Backflow prevention assemblies shall be tested in accordance with Section 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES.

3.6.4 Water Quality Test Reports

The chilled and heating hot water system shall be analyzed by the water treatment company a minimum of once a month for a period of one year after system acceptance. Submit for approval the following water quality test reports. The analysis and resulting reports shall include the following information recorded in accordance with ASTM D596.

Date of Sample _____Temperature _____ degrees F.Silica (SiO2) _____ ppm (mg/1)Insoluble _____ ppm (mg/1)Iron and Aluminum Oxides _____ ppm (mg/1)Calcium (Ca) _____ ppm (mg/1)Magnesium (Mg) _____ ppm (mg/1)Sodium and Potassium (Na and K) _____ ppm (mg/1)Carbonate (HCO3) _____ ppm (mg/1)Sulfate (SO4) _____ ppm (mg/1)Chloride (Cl) _____ ppm (mg/1)Nitrate (NO3) _____ ppm (mg/1)Turbidity _____ unitpH _____Residual Chlorine _____ ppm (mg/1)Total Alkalinity _____ epm (meq/1)Non-Carbonate Hardness _____ epm (meq/1)Total Hardness _____ epm (meq/1)Dissolved Solids _____ ppm (mg/1)Fluorine _____ ppm (mg/1)Conductivity _____ micrmho/cm

3.6.5 Related Field Inspections and Testing

3.6.5.1 HVAC TAB

Requirements for testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) of HVAC water piping, and associated equipment is specified in Section 23 05 93 TESTING,ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC. Coordinate with the TAB team, and provide support personnel and equipment as specified in Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC to assist TAB team to meet the TAB work requirements.

3.7 COMMISSIONING

Provide the services of a supervisory level technician, in responsible charge of the work in this section, and factory authorized start-up and service technicians; for each major component or system in this section, to participate in the work specified in Section 23 08 00.00 50 COMMISSIONING



OF HVAC. Refer to Section 23 08 00.00 50, COMMISSIONING OF HVAC for description of work.


Furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to the designated Government personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the chilled and heating hot water piping systems. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be instructed in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work. Submit a lesson plan for the instruction course for approval. The lesson plan and instruction course shall be based on the approved operation and maintenance data and maintenance manuals.

Conduct a training course for the operating staff and maintenance staff selected by the Contracting Officer. Give the instruction during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction furnished shall be one man-day.. Use approximately half of the time for classroom instruction and the other time for instruction at the location of equipment or system.

When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.




SECTION 23 81 00.00 20

UNITARY AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT11/09

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ANSI/AHRI 210/240 (2008) Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning & Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment

AHRI 460 (2005) Performance Rating of Remote Mechanical-Draft Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condensers


ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34 (2010; Addenda A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, N and O; Errata 2011; INT 1 2012; Errata 2012; Addenda AD, SD, AE and AF 2013) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15-Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems and ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 34-Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants

ASHRAE 52.2 (2012; Errata 2013) Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size

ASHRAE 55 (2010; Errata 2011; Addenda A 2011; Addenda B, C, D, E and F 2012; Errata 2012; Addenda G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q and R 2013) Thermal Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy



ASME A13.1 (2007) Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems



SECTION 23 81 00.00 20 Page 1






NEMA ICS 6 (1993; R 2011) Enclosures


NFPA 70 (2011; Errata 2 2012) National Electrical Code


Energy Star (1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy Efficiency Labeling System


LEED NC (2009) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design(tm) New Construction Rating System




UL 1995 (2011) Heating and Cooling Equipment


Section 23 03 00.00 20 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS, applies to this section with the additions and modifications specified herein.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Point-to-point system wiring diagrams; G

SD-03 Product Data

SECTION 23 81 00.00 20 Page 2


Heat pumps, air to air; G

Submit documentation for Energy Star qualifications or meeting FEMP requirements. Indicate Energy Efficiency Rating.

Filters; (LEED NC)

Submit documentation indicating type of biobased material in product and biobased content. Indicate relative dollar value of biobased content products to total dollar value of products included in project. Submit documentation indicating relative dollar value of rapidly renewable materials to total dollar value of products included in project.

System control devices

Local/Regional Materials

Submit documentation indicating distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. Indicate distance of raw material origin from the project site. Indicate relative dollar value of local/regional materials to total dollar value of products included in project.

SD-06 Test Reports

Salt-spray tests

Start-up and initial operational tests


Heat pumps, air to air; G

System control devices

Filters


Heat pumps, air to air, Data Package 3

Filters, Data Package 2

System control devices, Data Package 2

Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.



Accomplish work in accordance with the referenced publications, except as modified by this section. Consider the advisory or recommended provisions to be mandatory, as though the word "shall" had been substituted for the words "should" or "could" or "may," wherever they appear. Interpret reference to "the Authority having jurisdiction," "the Administrative Authority," "the Owner," or "the Design Engineer" to mean the Contracting

SECTION 23 81 00.00 20 Page 3


Officer.

1.4.2 Detail Drawing

For refrigerant piping SYSTEMS, submit piping, including pipe sizes. Submit system wiring diagrams.

1.4.3 Safety

Design, manufacture, and installation of unitary air conditioning equipment shall conform to ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34.

1.5 REFRIGERANTS

Refrigerants shall have an Ozone Depletion Factor (ODF) of 0.05 or less. The ODF shall be in accordance with the "Montreal Protocol On Substances That Deplete The Ozone Layer," September 1987, sponsored by the United Nations Environment Programme. CFCs, HCFCs and Halons shall not be permitted. Refrigerant shall be an approved alternative refrigerant per EPA's Significant New Alternative Policy (SNAP) listing.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

For proper Indoor Environmental Quality, maintain positive pressure within the building. Ventilation shall meet or exceed ASHRAE 62.1 and all published addenda. Meet or exceed filter media efficiency as tested in accordance with ASHRAE 52.2. Thermal comfort shall meet or exceed ASHRAE 55.

1.7 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

1.7.1 Local/Regional Materials

Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available from a minimum of three sources.

1.7.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

a. Protect stored equipment at the jobsite from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Additionally, cap or plug all pipes until installed.

b. Equipment shall be delivered and stored with protective crating and weatherproof wrapping to provide protection from the weather, humidity, temperature variations, dirt and dust or other contaminants.

1.7.3 COORDINATION OF TRADES

Furnish piping offsets, fittings, and accessories as required to provide a complete installation and to eliminate interference with other construction. Coordinate pie and equipment locations with space required for trades in the adjacent installation area and with seismic bracing.

1.7.4 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

1.7.4.1 1.10.1 Verification of Dimensions

The Contractor shall become familiar with all details of the work, verify

SECTION 23 81 00.00 20 Page 4


all dimensions in the field, and shall advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing the work.

1.7.4.2 Drawings


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 HEAT PUMPS, AIR TO AIR

Unit shall be an air-cooled, split system heat pump which employs an exterior mounted condensing unit, a separate ductless-split indoor unit, and interconnecting refrigerant piping. Unit shall be the heat pump type conforming to applicable Underwriters Laboratories (UL) standards including UL 1995. Unit shall be rated in accordance with ANSI/AHRI 210/240. Evaporator or supply fans shall be double-width, double inlet, forward curved, backward inclined, or airfoil blade, centrifugal DWDI type. Condenser or outdoor fans shall be the manufacturer's standard for the unit specified and may be either propeller or centrifugal scroll type. Fan and condenser motors shall have dripproof or totally enclosed enclosures. Both indoor and outdoor units shall be from a single manufacturer. System shall be a ductless (fan coil unit type) design with wall mounted indoor unit and exterior mounted condensing unit.

2.1.1 Air-to-Refrigerant Coil

Coils shall have copper or aluminum tubes of 3/8 inch minimum diameter with copper or aluminum fins that are mechanically bonded or soldered to the tubes. Casing shall be galvanized steel or aluminum. Contact of dissimilar metals shall be avoided. Coils shall be tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34 at the factory and be suitable for the working pressure of the installed system. Evaporator coil shall be dehydrated and sealed after testing and prior to evaluation and charging. Outdoor unit shall be provided with a factory operating charge of refrigerant and oil or a holding charge. Unit shipped with a holding charge shall be field charged. Separate expansion devices shall be provided for each compressor circuit.

2.1.2 Refrigeration Circuit

Refrigerant-containing components shall comply with ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34 and be factory tested, cleaned, dehydrated, charged, and sealed. Refrigerant charging valves and connections, and pumpdown valves shall be provided for each circuit. Filter-drier shall be provided in liquid line and be reversible-flow type. Refrigerant flow system control devices shall be an adjustable superheat thermostatic expansion valve with external equalizer matched to coil, capillary or thermostatic control, and a pilot solenoid controlled, leak-tight, four-way refrigerant flow reversing valve. A refrigerant suction line thermostatic control shall be provided to prevent freeze-up in event of loss of water flow during heating cycle.

SECTION 23 81 00.00 20 Page 5


2.1.3 Unit Controls

Provide integral microprocessor control system with wireless remote (hand-held) operator. Operator shall contain LCD readout and operating pushbuttons. Controller shall provide 24 hour/day, 7 day/week programming capability with multiple event action each day and automatic heating/cooling changeover. Unit shall be internally prewired with a 24 volt control circuit powered by an internal transformer. Terminal blocks shall be provided for power wiring and external control wiring. Unit shall have cutoffs for high and low pressure. Head pressure controls shall sustain unit operation with ambient temperature of 10 degrees F. Adjustable cycle timers shall prevent short cycling. Multiple compressors shall be staged by means of a time delay. Unit shall be internally protected by fuses or a circuit breaker in accordance with UL 1995.

2.1.4 Indoor Air Handling Section

Furnish casing constructed of heavy gage impact resistant plastic with integral inlet and discharge grilles. Front of enclosure shall be removable for access to integral components. Filter shall be accessed through an individual access door located in the cabinet front. Evaporator fan scroll shall consist of multiple fans or a single fan wheel extending the full width of the cabinet. Furnish with evaporator coil and insulated drain pan.

2.2 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND ACCESSORIES

Refer to Section 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING.

2.3 REMOTE CONDENSING UNIT

Each remote condenser coil shall be fitted with a manual isolation valve and an access valve on the coil side. Saturated refrigerant condensing temperature shall not exceed 120 degrees F at 95 degrees F ambient. Unit shall be provided with low ambient condenser controls to ensure proper operation in an ambient temperature of 10 degrees F. Fan and cabinet construction shall be provided as specified in paragraph "Unitary Equipment Components". Fan and condenser motors shall have dripproof or totally enclosed enclosures.

2.3.1 Air-Cooled Heat Pump Condensing Unit

Unit shall be rated in accordance with AHRI 460 and conform to the requirements of UL 1995. Unit shall be factory fabricated, tested, packaged, and self-contained. Unit shall be complete with casing, compressor, propeller or centrifugal type fans, heat rejection coils, connecting piping, contactors and wiring, and all necessary appurtenances.

2.3.1.1 Connections

Interconnecting refrigeration piping, electrical power, and control wiring between the condensing unit and the indoor unit shall be provided as required and as indicated. Electrical and refrigeration piping terminal connections between condensing unit and evaporator units shall be provided.

2.3.1.2 Condensing Coil

Coils shall have aluminum tubes of 3/8 inch minimum diameter with copper or aluminum fins that are mechanically bonded or soldered to the tubes.

SECTION 23 81 00.00 20 Page 6


Casing shall be galvanized steel or aluminum. Contact of dissimilar metals shall be avoided. Coils shall be tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34 at the factory and be suitable for the working pressure of the installed system. Each coil shall be dehydrated and sealed after testing and prior to evaluation and charging. Each unit shall be provided with a factory operating charge of refrigerant and oil or a holding charge. Unit shipped with a holding charge shall be field charged. Separate expansion devices shall be provided for each compressor circuit.

2.3.1.3 Unit Controls

Unit mounted control panels or enclosures shall be constructed in accordance with applicable requirements of NFPA 70 and housed in NEMA ICS 6, Class 1A or 3A enclosures. Controls shall include control transformer, fan motor starters, time delay start-up, overload protective devices, interface with local and remote components, and intercomponent wiring to terminal block points.

2.4 FINISHES

Provide steel surfaces of equipment including, heat pumps, that do not have a zinc coating conforming to ASTM A123/A123M, or a duplex coating of zinc and paint, with a factory applied coating or paint system. Provide a coating or paint system on actual equipment identical to that on salt-spray test specimens with respect to materials, conditions of application, and dry-film thickness.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

2.5.1 Salt-Spray Tests

Salt-spray test the factory-applied coating or paint system of equipment including packaged terminal units, heat pumps, and air conditioners in accordance with ASTM B117. Conduct test for 3000 hours for equipment installed outdoors, or 125 hours for equipment installed indoors. Test specimens shall have a standard scribe mark as defined in ASTM D1654. Upon completion of exposure, evaluate and rate the coating or paint system in accordance with procedures A and B of ASTM D1654. Rating of failure at the scribe mark shall not be less than six, average creepage not greater than 1/8 inch. Rating of the unscribed area shall not be less than 10, no failure.




Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, in the sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the sizes and wording indicated, black with white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate. Thickness: 1/16 inch for units up to 40 sq. in. or 8 inch length; 1/4 inch for larger units. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate

SECTION 23 81 00.00 20 Page 7


the substrate.




Provide pre-printed or partially pre-printed accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matt finish suitable for writing, approximately 3 inch x 6 inch, with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre-printed wording including large-size primary wording (as examples; DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT OPERATE).


Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment. Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and specified, provide identification which indicates individual system number as well as service (as examples; Heat Pump condensing unit No. 3, Air Supply No. 1H.

PART 3 EXECUTION


Install equipment and components in a manner to ensure proper and sequential operation of equipment and equipment controls. Install equipment not covered in this section, or in manufacturer's instructions, as recommended by manufacturer's representative. Provide proper foundations for mounting of equipment, accessories, appurtenances, piping and controls including, but not limited to, supports, concrete pads and pipe hangers. Foundations for equipment shall conform to equipment manufacturer's recommendation, unless otherwise indicated. Set anchor bolts using templates. Provide anchor bolts of adequate length, embedded in the concrete for concrete pad mounting equipment.. Level equipment bases, using steel shim plates. Locate equipment to allow working space for servicing including internal component removal, access to water heads and valves of shell and tube equipment, tube cleaning or replacement, access to automatic controls, refrigerant charging, lubrication, oil draining and working clearance under overhead lines. Provide electric isolation between dissimilar metals for the purpose of minimizing galvanic corrosion.

3.1.1 Indoor Units

Install as indicated, in accordance with requirements of ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34, and the manufacturer's installation and operational instructions. Install units plumb and level. Anchor units to partitions or walls where located.

SECTION 23 81 00.00 20 Page 8


3.2 PIPING

Refer to Section 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING.

3.3 DRAIN CONNECTIONS, AND DRAIN LINES

Trap drain pans from the bottom to ensure complete pan drainage. Provide drain lines full size of drain opening. Traps and piping to drainage disposal points shall conform to Section 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES.

3.4 ACCESS PANELS

Provide access panels for concealed valves, controls, dampers, and other fittings requiring inspection and maintenance.

3.5 AIR FILTERS

Allow access space for servicing filters. Install filters with suitable sealing to prevent bypassing of air.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

Identify equipment and physical hazards in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.144, ASME A13.1, ANSI Z535.1. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment. Identify items of equipment indicated on contract drawings. For indoor portions of heat pumps, reduce tag size and install in an inconspicuous location.



3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

3.7.1 Leak Testing

Upon completion of installation of air conditioning equipment, test factory- and field-installed refrigerant piping with an electronic-type leak detector. Use same type of refrigerant to be provided in the system for leak testing. When nitrogen is used to boost system pressure for testing, ensure that it is eliminated from the system before charging. Minimum refrigerant leak field test pressure shall be as specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34, except that test pressure shall not exceed 150 psig on hermetic compressors unless otherwise specified as a low side test pressure on the equipment nameplate. If leaks are detected at time of installation or during warranty period, remove the entire refrigerant charge from the

SECTION 23 81 00.00 20 Page 9


system, correct leaks, and retest system.

3.7.2 Evacuation, Dehydration, and Charging

After field charged refrigerant system is found to be without leaks or after leaks have been repaired on field-charged and factory-charged systems, evacuate the system using a reliable gage and a vacuum pump capable of pulling a vacuum of at least one mm Hg absolute. Evacuate system in accordance with the triple-evacuation and blotter method or in accordance with equipment manufacturer's printed instructions and recharge system.

3.7.3 Start-Up and Initial Operational Tests

Test the air conditioning systems and systems components for proper operation. Adjust safety and automatic control instruments as necessary to ensure proper operation and sequence. Conduct operational tests for not less than 8 hours.

3.7.4 Performance Tests

Upon completion of evacuation, charging, startup, final leak testing, and proper adjustment of controls, test the systems to demonstrate compliance with performance and capacity requirements. Test systems for not less than 8 hours, record readings hourly. At the end of the test period, average the readings, and the average shall be considered to be the system performance. Record the following readings:

Suction pressureCondensing pressureAmbient temperatureIndoor room temperatureIndoor unit discharge temperature

3.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT

Separate waste in accordance with the Waste Management Plan, placing copper materials in designated areas for reuse. Close and seal tightly all partly used adhesives and solvents; store protected in a well-ventilated, fire-safe area at moderate temperature.

3.9 COMMISSIONING

Provide the services of a supervisory level technician, in responsible charge of the work in this section, and factory authorized start-up and service technicians; for each major component or system in this section, to participate in the work specified in Section 23 08 00.00 50 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC. Refer to Section 23 08 00.00 50 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC for description of work.


SECTION 23 81 00.00 20 Page 10


SECTION 23 82 00.00 20

TERMINAL HEATING AND COOLING UNITS11/08

PART 1 GENERAL


Section 23 03 00.00 20 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS, applies to this section with additions and modifications specified herein.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Unit heaters; G


Unit heaters, Data Package 2

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 UNIT HEATERS

Heaters shall be as specified below, and shall have a heating capacity not in excess of 125 percent of the capacity indicated. Noise level of each unit heater for areas noted shall not exceed the criteria indicated.

2.1.1 Propeller Fan Heaters

Heaters shall be designed for suspension and arranged for horizontal discharge of air as indicated. Casings shall be not less than 20 gauge black steel and finished with lacquer or enamel. Suitable adjustable stationary deflectors shall be provided to assure proper air and heat penetration capacity at floor level based on established design temperature. Suspension from heating pipes will not be permitted. Horizontal discharge type unit heaters shall have discharge or face velocities not in excess of the following:

Unit Capacity, cfm Face Velocity, fpm

Up to 1,000 800

1,001 to 3,000 900

3,001 and over 1,000

2.1.2 Cabinet Unit Heaters

Provide unit factory assembled, designed and tested. Units shall include

SECTION 23 82 00.00 20 Page 1


single heating hot water coil, direct drive metallic centrifugal fans, three-speed split capacitor motors with integral thermal overload protection and filters. Provide minimum 20 gage furniture grade steel cabinet with baked enamel finish; color as selected by Contracting Officer. Provide integral motor contactors and unit mounted four position fan speed switch; off-low-medium-high.

a. Filters: Provide UL listed throwaway fiberglass filters, standard dust-holding capacity.

b. Heating coils shall be of copper tubes and aluminum fins with threaded fittings one each end for connecting to external piping. The heating elements shall be free to expand or contract without developing leaks and shall be properly pitched for drainage. Heating coils shall be as specified in Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEM under paragraph "Air Systems Equipment".

c. Controls shall be provided as specified in Section 23 09 23.13 20, BACNET DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC.

d. Vertical Units: Provide recessed and cabinet units where indicated. Provide unit levelers, subbases and removable front cover for access to filters and fan motors. Provide outside air intake boxes with manual dampers and weatherproof anodized aluminum louvers.

(1) Recessed Unit: Provide removable front cover for access to entire unit. Provide discharge air and return air grilles in front cover.

2.2 HOT WATER PIPING SYSTEM

Section 23 64 26 CHILLED AND HEATING HOT WATER PIPING.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Install equipment where indicated and as recommended by manufacturer's recommendations.

3.1.1 Suspensions of Equipment

Provide equipment supports including beam clamps, turnbuckles and twist links or weld-wire chains, wire ropes with rope clips and rope thimbles, threaded-eye rod hangers with lock nuts and heat-duct hangers, threaded-eye bolts with expansion screws, brackets, platform and mounting frame, and vibration isolators. Locate equipment in such a manner that working space is available for servicing, such as vacuum pump and burner removal, access to automatic controls, and lubrication. Provide electrical isolation of dissimilar metals. Clean interior of casings or cabinets before and after completion of installation.

3.1.2 General

Examine areas and conditions, with piping Installers present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting the performance of radiators, radiant panels and unit heaters.

SECTION 23 82 00.00 20 Page 2


Examine rough-in locations for piping systems to verify actual connection locations prior to installation. Arrange piping adjacent to equipment to allow for servicing and maintenance.

3.2 COMMISSIONING

Provide the services of a supervisory level technician, in responsible charge of the work in this section, and factory authorized start-up and service technicians; for the unit heaters in this section, to participate in the work specified in Section 23 08 00.00 50 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC. Refer to Section 23 08 00.00 50 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC for description of work.


SECTION 23 82 00.00 20 Page 3


SECTION 26 00 00.00 20

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS07/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES





IEEE 100 (2000; Archived) The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms

IEEE C2 (2012; Errata 2012; INT 1-4 2012; INT 5 2013) National Electrical Safety Code

IEEE C57.12.28 (2005; INT 3 2011) Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment - Enclosure Integrity

IEEE C57.12.29 (2005) Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment - Enclosure Integrity for Coastal Environments






This section applies to certain sections of Division 11, EQUIPMENT, Divisions 22 and 23, PLUMBING and HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING. This section applies to all sections of Division 26 and 33, ELECTRICAL and UTILITIES, of this project specification unless specified otherwise in the individual sections. This section has been incorporated into, and thus, does not apply to, and is not referenced in the following sections.

Section 26 12 19.10 THREE-PHASE PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMERSSection 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMSection 26 23 00 SWITCHBOARDS AND SWITCHGEAR Section 26 51 00.00 22 INTERIOR LIGHTING Section 27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEMSection 33 71 02.00 20 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION

SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 1


1.3 DEFINITIONS

a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in IEEE 100.

b. The technical sections referred to herein are those specification sections that describe products, installation procedures, and equipment operations and that refer to this section for detailed description of submittal types.

c. The technical paragraphs referred to herein are those paragraphs in PART 2 - PRODUCTS and PART 3 - EXECUTION of the technical sections that describe products, systems, installation procedures, equipment, and test methods.

1.4 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Electrical characteristics for this project shall be 12.47 kV primary, three phase, four wire, 60 Hz, and 208Y/120V volts secondary, three phase, four wire. Final connections to the power distribution system at the existing pole shall be made by the Contractor as directed by the Contracting Officer .

1.5 ADDITIONAL SUBMITTALS INFORMATION

Submittals required in other sections that refer to this section must conform to the following additional requirements as applicable.

1.5.1 Shop Drawings (SD-02)

Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices.

1.5.2 Product Data (SD-03)

Submittal shall include performance and characteristic curves.



In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.


Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers

SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 2


regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in the technical section.


Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is furnished.

1.6.2.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date

Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.

1.7 WARRANTY

The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

1.8 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Provide for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in the technical sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel. The operating instructions shall include the following:

a. Wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each principal system and item of equipment.

b. Start up, proper adjustment, operating, lubrication, and shutdown procedures.

c. Safety precautions.

d. The procedure in the event of equipment failure.

e. Other items of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer of each system or item of equipment.

Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic. Post instructions where directed. For operating instructions exposed to the weather, provide weather-resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures. Operating instructions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal or peeling.


Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's

SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 3


name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

1.10 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES

ASTM D709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified in the technical sections or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style.

1.11 WARNING SIGNS

Provide warning signs for the enclosures of electrical equipment including substations, pad-mounted transformers, pad-mounted switches, generators, and switchgear having a nominal rating exceeding 600 volts.

a. When the enclosure integrity of such equipment is specified to be in accordance with IEEE C57.12.28 or IEEE C57.12.29, such as for pad-mounted transformers, provide self-adhesive warning signs on the outside of the high voltage compartment door(s). Sign shall be a decal and shall have nominal dimensions of 7 by 10 inches with the legend "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE" printed in two lines of nominal 2 inch high letters. The word "DANGER" shall be in white letters on a red background and the words "HIGH VOLTAGE" shall be in black letters on a white background. Decal shall be Panduit No. PPSO710D72 or approved equal.

1.12 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and requirements specified herein.


Where specified in the technical sections, furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to designated Government personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance of the specified systems and equipment, including pertinent safety requirements as required. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work. Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH

Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test and the additional requirements specified in the technical sections.

SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 4


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING

Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS .

3.2 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING

Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two sheet-metal screws or two rivets.

3.3 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING

Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible side, but space the signs a maximum of 30 feet apart.


SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 5


SECTION 26 08 00

APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING08/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA)

NETA ATS (2013) Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems


Section 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS applies to this section with additions and modifications specified herein.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-06 Test Reports

Acceptance tests and inspections; G

SD-07 Certificates

Qualifications of organization, and lead engineering technician; G

Acceptance test and inspections procedure; G



Contractor shall engage the services of a qualified testing organization to provide inspection, testing, calibration, and adjustment of the electrical distribution system and generation equipment listed in paragraph entitled "Acceptance Tests and Inspections" herein. Organization shall be independent of the supplier, manufacturer, and installer of the equipment. The organization shall be a first tier subcontractor. No work required by this section of the specification shall be performed by a second tier subcontractor.

a. Submit name and qualifications of organization. Organization shall have been regularly engaged in the testing of electrical materials, devices, installations, and systems for a minimum of 5 years. The organization shall have a calibration program, and test instruments



used shall be calibrated in accordance with NETA ATS.

b. Submit name and qualifications of the lead engineering technician performing the required testing services. Include a list of three comparable jobs performed by the technician with specific names and telephone numbers for reference. Testing, inspection, calibration, and adjustments shall be performed by an engineering technician, certified by NETA or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) with a minimum of 5 years' experience inspecting, testing, and calibrating electrical distribution and generation equipment, systems, and devices.

1.4.2 Acceptance Tests and Inspections Reports

Submit certified copies of inspection reports and test reports. Reports shall include certification of compliance with specified requirements, identify deficiencies, and recommend corrective action when appropriate. Type and neatly bind test reports to form a part of the final record. Submit test reports documenting the results of each test not more than 10 days after test is completed.

1.4.3 Acceptance Test and Inspections Procedure

Submit test procedure reports for each item of equipment to be field tested at least 45 days prior to planned testing date. Do not perform testing until after test procedure has been approved.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 ACCEPTANCE TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

Testing organization shall perform acceptance tests and inspections. Test methods, procedures, and test values shall be performed and evaluated in accordance with NETA ATS, the manufacturer's recommendations, and paragraph entitled "Field Quality Control" of each applicable specification section. Tests identified as optional in NETA ATS are not required unless otherwise specified. Equipment shall be placed in service only after completion of required tests and evaluation of the test results have been completed. Contractor shall supply to the testing organization complete sets of shop drawings, settings of adjustable devices, and other information necessary for an accurate test and inspection of the system prior to the performance of any final testing. Contracting Officer shall be notified at least 14 days in advance of when tests will be conducted by the testing organization. Perform acceptance tests and inspections on applicable equipment and systems specified in the following sections:

b. Section 26 12 19.10 THREE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS

3.2 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE

Final acceptance of the system is contingent upon satisfactory completion



of acceptance tests and inspections.

3.3 PLACING EQUIPMENT IN SERVICE

A representative of the approved testing organization shall be present when equipment tested by the organization is initially energized and placed in service.




SECTION 26 08 01.00 50

COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS01/14

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY



Requirements for commissioning the Electrical systems, sub-systems and equipment. This Section supplements the general requirements specified in Section 01 91 13.00 50 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS.



1.2 DEFINITIONS



a. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in this Division 26 is part of the construction process. Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of User's Operation and Maintenance personnel, is required in cooperation with and the Commissioning Agent.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



SECTION 26 08 01.00 50 Page 1



PART 3 EXECUTION


The Contractor shall complete Systems Readiness Checklists to verify systems, sub-systems, and equipment installation is complete and systems are ready for Systems Functional Testing. The Commissioning Agent will prepare Systems Readiness Checklists to be used to document equipment installation. The Contractor shall complete the checklists. Completed checklists shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer and to the Commissioning Agent for review. The Commissioning Agent may spot-check a sample of completed checklists. If the Commissioning Agent determines that the information provided on the checklist is not accurate, the Commissioning Agent will return the marked-up checklist to the Contractor for correction and re-submission. If the Commissioning Agent determines that a significant number of completed checklists for similar equipment are not accurate, the Commissioning Agent will select a broader sample of checklists for review. If the Commissioning Agent determines that a significant number of the broader sample of checklists is also inaccurate, all the checklists for the type of equipment will be returned to the Contractor for correction and re-submission. Refer to Section 01 91 13.00 50 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for submittal requirements for System Readiness Checklists, Equipment Startup Reports, and other commissioning documents.




The Commissioning Process includes Systems Functional Performance Testing that is intended to test systems functional performance under steady state conditions, to test system reaction to changes in operating conditions, and system performance under emergency conditions. The Commissioning Agent will prepare detailed Systems Functional Performance Test procedures for review and approval by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall review and comment on the tests prior to approval. The Contractor shall provide the required labor, materials, and test equipment identified in the test procedure to perform the tests. The Commissioning Agent will direct and document the testing. The Contractor shall sign the test reports to verify tests were performed. See Section 01 91 13.00 50 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS, for additional details.


Training of User's operation and maintenance personnel is required in cooperation with the Contracting Officer and Commissioning Agent. Provide competent, factory authorized personnel to provide instruction to operation and maintenance personnel concerning the location, operation, and troubleshooting of the installed systems. The instruction shall be scheduled in coordination with Contracting Officer after submission and approval of formal training plans. Refer to Section 01 91 13.00 50 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS and Division 26 Sections for additional

SECTION 26 08 01.00 50 Page 2


Contractor training requirements.


SECTION 26 08 01.00 50 Page 3


SECTION 26 12 19.10

THREE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS02/12

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM A240/A240M (2013c) Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications

ASTM D1535 (2013) Specifying Color by the Munsell System

ASTM D877 (2002; R 2007) Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating Liquids Using Disk Electrodes

ASTM D92 (2012b) Standard Test Method for Flash and Fire Points by Cleveland Open Cup Tester

ASTM D97 (2012) Pour Point of Petroleum Products

FM GLOBAL (FM)




IEEE 386 (2006; INT 1 2011) Standard for Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power Distribution Systems Above 600V

IEEE C2 (2012; Errata 2012; INT 1-4 2012; INT 5-6 2013) National Electrical Safety Code

IEEE C37.47 (2011) Standard for High Voltage Current-Limiting Type Distribution Class Fuses and Fuse Disconnecting Switches

IEEE C57.12.00 (2010) Standard General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers

IEEE C57.12.28 (2005; INT 3 2011) Standard for

SECTION 26 12 19.10 Page 1


Pad-Mounted Equipment - Enclosure Integrity

IEEE C57.12.29 (2005) Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment - Enclosure Integrity for Coastal Environments

IEEE C57.12.34 (2009) Standard for Requirements for Pad-Mounted, Compartmental-Type, Self-Cooled, Three-Phase Distribution Transformers, 5 MVA and Smaller; High Voltage, 34.5 kV Nominal System Voltage and Below; Low Voltage, 15 kV Nominal System Voltage and Below

IEEE C57.12.90 (2010) Standard Test Code for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers

IEEE C57.98 (2011) Guide for Transformer Impulse Tests

IEEE C62.11 (2012) Standard for Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters for Alternating Current Power Circuits (>1kV)




NFPA 70 (2014; AMD 1 2013; Errata 2013; AMD 2 2013) National Electrical Code

ORGANISATION FOR ECONOMIC CO-OPERATION AND DEVELOPMENT (OECD)

OECD Test 203 (1992) Fish Acute Toxicity Test


EPA 712-C-98-075 (1998) Fate, Transport and Transformation Test Guidelines - OPPTS 835.3100- "Aerobic Aquatic Biodegradation"

EPA 821-R-02-012 (2002) Methods for Measuring the Acute Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters to Freshwater and Marine Organisms


10 CFR 431 Energy Efficiency Program for Certain Commercial and Industrial Equipment


UL 467 (2007) Grounding and Bonding Equipment




Section 26 08 00 APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING applies to this section, with the additions and modifications specified herein.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in IEEE 100.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Pad-mounted transformer drawings; G

SD-03 Product Data

Pad-mounted transformers; G

Submittal shall include manufacturer's information for each component, device, insulating fluid, and accessory provided with the transformer.

SD-06 Test Reports

Acceptance checks and tests; G

Submittal shall include acceptance criteria and limits for each test in accordance with NETA ATS "Test Values".

SD-07 Certificates

Transformer Efficiencies; G

Submit certification, including supporting calculations, from the manufacturer indicating conformance with the paragraph entitled "Specified Transformer Efficiencies."


Pad-mounted transformer design tests; G

Pad-mounted transformerroutine and other tests; G


Transformer(s), Data Package 5; G

Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein.




Transformer test schedule; G

Submit report of test results as specified by paragraph entitled "Field Quality Control."

1.4.1 Reduced Submittal Requirements

Transformers designed and manufactured by ABB in Jefferson City, MO; by Cooper Power Systems in Waukesha, WI; by ERMCO in Dyersburg, TN; or by Howard Industries in Laurel, MS need not submit the entire submittal package requirements of this contract. Instead, the following items shall be submitted:

a. A certification, signed by the manufacturer, stating that the technical requirements of this specification shall be met.

b. An outline drawing of the transformer with devices identified (paragraph entitled "Pad-Mounted Transformer Drawings", item a).

c. ANSI nameplate data of the transformer (paragraph entitled "Pad-Mounted Transformer Drawings", item b).

d. Routine and other tests (in PART 2, see paragraph entitled "Source Quality Control", subparagraph entitled "Routine and Other Tests"), shall be conducted by the manufacturer and may be witnessed by the government. Provide transformer test schedule required by submittal item "SD-11 Closeout Submittals". Provide certified copies of the tests.

e. Provide acceptance test reports required by submittal item "SD-06 Test Reports".

f. Provide operation and maintenance manuals required by submittal item "SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data".


1.5.1 Pad-Mounted Transformer Drawings

Drawings shall indicate, but not be limited to the following:

a. An outline drawing, with front, top, and side views.

b. ANSI nameplate data.

c. Elementary diagrams and wiring diagrams .

d. One-line diagram, including switch(es).

e. Manufacturer's published time-current curves (on full size logarithmic paper) of the transformer high side fuses.


In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of



similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.


Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.





1.6 MAINTENANCE

1.6.1 Additions to Operation and Maintenance Data

In addition to requirements of Data Package 5, include the following on the actual transformer(s) provided:

a. An instruction manual with pertinent items and information highlighted

b. An outline drawing, front, top, and side views

c. Prices for spare parts and supply list

d. Routine and field acceptance test reports

e. Fuse curves for primary fuses

f. Actual nameplate diagram

g. Date of purchase

1.7 WARRANTY




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT COORDINATION

Products and materials not considered to be pad-mounted transformers and related accessories are specified in Section 33 71 01 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION, Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, and Section 33 71 02.00 20 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.

2.2 THREE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS

IEEE C57.12.34, IEEE C57.12.28 and as specified herein.

2.2.1 Compartments

The high- and low-voltage compartments shall be separated by steel isolating barriers extending the full height and depth of the compartments. Compartment doors: hinged lift-off type with stop in open position and three-point latching.

2.2.1.1 High Voltage, Dead-Front

High-voltage compartment shall contain the incoming line, insulated high-voltage load-break connectors, bushing well inserts, six high-voltage bushing wells configured for loop feed application, load-break switch handle(s), access to oil-immersed bayonet fuses, dead-front surge arresters, tap changer handle, connector parking stands, and ground pad.

a. Insulated high-voltage load-break connectors: IEEE 386, rated 15 kV, 95 kV BIL. Current rating: 200 amperes rms continuous. Short time rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for a time duration of 0.17 seconds. Connector shall have a steel reinforced hook-stick eye, grounding eye, test point, and arc-quenching contact material.

b. Bushing well inserts: IEEE 386, 200 amperes, 15 kV Class. Provide a bushing well insert for each bushing well unless indicated otherwise.

c. Load-break switch

Loop feed sectionalizer switches: Provide three, two-position, oil-immersed type switches to permit closed transition loop feed and sectionalizing. Each switch shall be rated at 15 kV, 95 kV BIL, with a continuous current rating and load-break rating of 200 amperes, and a make-and-latch rating of 12,000 rms amperes symmetrical. Locate the switch handles in the high-voltage compartment. Operation of switches shall be as follows:

ARRANGEMENT NO.

DESCRIPTION OF SWITCH ARRANGEMENT

SWITCH POSITION

LINE A SW. LINE B SW XFMR. SW

OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE

1 Line A connected to Line B and both lines connected to transformer

X X X



ARRANGEMENT NO.

DESCRIPTION OF SWITCH ARRANGEMENT

SWITCH POSITION

LINE A SW. LINE B SW XFMR. SW

OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE

2 Transformer connected to Line A only

X X X

3 Transformer connected to Line Bonly

X X X

4 Transformer open and loop closed

X X X

5 Transformer open and loop open

X X X

d. Provide bayonet type, oil-immersed, expulsion fuses in series with oil-immersed, partial-range, current-limiting fuses. Bayonet fuse links shall sense both high currents and high oil temperature in order to provide thermal protection to the transformer. Coordinate transformer protection with expulsion fuse clearing low-current faults and current-limiting fuse clearing high-current faults beyond the interrupting rating of the expulsion fuse. In order to eliminate or minimize oil spills, the bayonet fuse assembly shall include an oil retention valve inside the housing which closes when the fuse holder is removed and an external drip shield. Warning shall be conspicuously displayed within the high-voltage compartment cautioning against removing or inserting fuses unless the load-break switch is in the open position and the tank pressure has been released.

Bayonet fuse assembly: 150 kV BIL.

Oil-immersed current-limiting fuses: IEEE C37.47; 50,000 rms amperes symmetrical interrupting rating at the system voltage specified.

e. Provide oil-immersed, weak link expulsion fuses in series with oil-immersed, partial-range, current-limiting fuses. Coordinate transformer protection with expulsion fuse clearing low-current faults and current-limiting fuse clearing high-current faults beyond the interrupting rating of the expulsion fuse.

Oil-immersed current-limiting fuses: IEEE C37.47; 50,000 rms amperes symmetrical interrupting rating at the system voltage specified.

f. Surge arresters: IEEE C62.11, rated 9 kV, fully shielded, dead-front, metal-oxide-varistor, elbow type with resistance-graded gap. Provide three arresters for loop feed circuits.

g. Parking stands: Provide a parking stand near each bushing.

2.2.1.2 Low Voltage

Low-voltage compartment shall contain low-voltage bushings with NEMA spade



terminals, accessories, metering, stainless steel or laser-etched anodized aluminum diagrammatic transformer nameplate, and ground pad.

a. Accessories shall include drain valve with sampler device, fill plug, pressure relief device, liquid level gage, pressure-vacuum gage, and dial type thermometer with maximum temperature indicator.

b. Metering: Provide as specified in Section 26 27 14.00 20 ELECTRICITY METERING.

2.2.2 Transformer

a. Less-flammable liquid-insulated, two winding, 60 hertz, 65 degrees C rise above a 30 degrees C average ambient, self-cooled type.

b. Transformer shall be rated 500 kVA.

c. Transformer voltage ratings: 12470 V Delta - 480Y/277 V .

d. Tap changer shall be externally operated, manual type for changing tap setting when the transformer is de-energized. Provide four 2.5 percent full capacity taps, two above and two below rated primary voltage. Tap changers shall clearly indicate which tap setting is in use.

e. Minimum tested percent impedance at 85 degrees C shall not be less than the following values:

2.50 for units rated 75kVA and below2.87 for units rated 112.5kVA to 300kVA4.03 for 500kVA rated units5.32 for units rated 750kVA and above

f. Audible sound levels shall comply with the following:

kVA DECIBELS(MAX

75 51

112.5 55

150 55

225 55

300 55

500 56

750 57

1000 58

1500 60



2000 61

2500 62

g. Transformer shall include lifting lugs and provisions for jacking under base. The transformer base construction shall be suitable for using rollers or skidding in any direction. Provide transformer top with an access handhole. The transformer shall have an insulated low-voltage neutral bushing with NEMA spade terminal, and with removable ground strap.

2.2.2.1 Specified Transformer Efficiencies

Provide transformer efficiency calculations utilizing the actual no-load and load loss values obtained during the routine tests performed on the actual transformer(s) prepared for this project. No-load losses (NLL) shall be referenced at 20 degrees C. Load losses (LL) shall be referenced at 55 degrees C and at 50 percent of the nameplate load. The transformer is not acceptable if the calculated transformer efficiency is less than the efficiency indicated in the "KVA / Efficiency" table below. That table is based on requirements contained within 10 CFR 431, Subpart K.

kVA EFFICIENCY (percent)

15 98.36

30 98.62

45 98.76

75 98.91

112.5 99.01

150 99.08

225 99.17

300 99.23

500 99.25

750 99.32

1000 99.36

1500 99.42

2000 99.46

2500 99.49

above 2500 99.50



2.2.3 Insulating Liquid

a. Less-flammable transformer liquids: NFPA 70 and FM APP GUIDE for less-flammable liquids having a fire point not less than 300 degrees C tested per ASTM D92 and a dielectric strength not less than 33 kV tested per ASTM D877. Provide identification of transformer as "non-PCB" and "manufacturer's name and type of fluid" on the nameplate.

The fluid shall be a biodegradable electrical insulating and cooling liquid classified by UL and approved by FM as "less flammable" fluids. The fluid shall meet the following fluid properties:

1. Pour point: ASTM D97, less than -15 degree C

2. Aquatic biodegradation: EPA 712-C-98-075, 100 percent

3. Trout toxicity: OECD Test 203, zero mortality of EPA 821-R-02-012, pass

2.2.3.1 Liquid-Filled Transformer Nameplates

Distribution transformers shall be provided with nameplate information in accordance with IEEE C57.12.00 and as modified or supplemented by this section.

2.2.4 Corrosion Protection

Entire transformer assembly, including tank and radiator, base, enclosure, and metering enclosure shall be fabricated of stainless steel conforming to ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 or 304L. Form enclosure of stainless steel sheets. The optional use of aluminum is permitted for the metering enclosure.

Paint entire transformer assembly Munsell 7GY3.29/1.5 green. Paint coating system shall comply with IEEE C57.12.28 and IEEE C57.12.29 regardless of base, cabinet, and tank material. The Munsell color notation is specified in ASTM D1535.

2.3 WARNING SIGNS

Provide warning signs for the enclosures of pad-mounted transformers having a nominal rating exceeding 600 volts.

a. When the enclosure integrity of such equipment is specified to be in accordance with IEEE C57.12.28, such as for pad-mounted transformers, provide self-adhesive warning signs on the outside of the high voltage compartment door(s). Sign shall be a decal and shall have nominal dimensions of 7 by 10 inches with the legend "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE" printed in two lines of nominal 2 inch high letters. The word "DANGER" shall be in white letters on a red background and the words "HIGH VOLTAGE" shall be in black letters on a white background. Decal shall be Panduit No. PPSO710D72 or approved equal.

2.4 Arc Flash Warning Label

Provide warning label for the enclosure of pad-mounted transformers. Locate this self-adhesive warning label on the outside of the high voltage compartment door warning of potential electrical arc flash hazards and appropriate PPE required. The label format shall be as indicated.



2.5 GROUNDING AND BONDING

UL 467. Provide grounding and bonding as specified in Section 33 71 02.00 20 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.

2.6 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

Concrete associated with electrical work for other than encasement of underground ducts shall be 4000 psi minimum 28-day compressive strength unless specified otherwise. All concrete shall conform to the requirements of Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.


2.7.1 Transformer Test Schedule

The Government reserves the right to witness tests. Provide transformer test schedule for tests to be performed at the manufacturer's test facility. Submit required test schedule and location, and notify the Contracting Officer 30 calendar days before scheduled test date. Notify Contracting Officer 15 calendar days in advance of changes to scheduled date.

a. Test Instrument Calibration

1. The manufacturer shall have a calibration program which assures that all applicable test instruments are maintained within rated accuracy.

2. The accuracy shall be directly traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology.

3. Instrument calibration frequency schedule shall not exceed 12 months for both test floor instruments and leased specialty equipment.

4. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment.

5. Calibrating standard shall be of higher accuracy than that of the instrument tested.

6. Keep up-to-date records that indicate dates and test results of instruments calibrated or tested. For instruments calibrated by the manufacturer on a routine basis, in lieu of third party calibration, include the following:

(a) Maintain up-to-date instrument calibration instructions and procedures for each test instrument.

(b) Identify the third party/laboratory calibrated instrument to verify that calibrating standard is met.

2.7.2 Design Tests

IEEE C57.12.00 states that "design tests are made only on representative apparatus to substantiate the ratings assigned to all other apparatus of basically the same design." Submit design test reports (complete with test data, explanations, formulas, and results), in the same submittal package



as the catalog data and drawings for the specified transformer. Design tests shall have been performed in accordance with IEEE C57.12.90 prior to the award of this contract.

a. Tests shall be certified and signed by a registered professional engineer.

b. Temperature rise: "Basically the same design" for the temperature rise test means a pad-mounted transformer with the same coil construction (such as wire wound primary and sheet wound secondary), the same kVA, the same cooling type (ONAN), the same temperature rise rating, and the same insulating liquid as the transformer specified.

c. Lightning impulse: "Basically the same design" for the lightning impulse dielectric test means a pad-mounted transformer with the same BIL, the same coil construction (such as wire wound primary and sheet wound secondary), and a tap changer, if specified. Design lightning impulse tests shall include the primary windings only of that transformer.

1. IEEE C57.12.90, paragraph 10.3 entitled "Lightning Impulse Test Procedures," and IEEE C57.98.

2. State test voltage levels.

3. Provide photographs of oscilloscope display waveforms or plots of digitized waveforms with test report.

d. Lifting and moving devices: "Basically the same design" requirement for the lifting and moving devices test means a test report confirming that the lifting device being used is capable of handling the weight of the specified transformer in accordance with IEEE C57.12.34.

e. Pressure: "Basically the same design" for the pressure test means a pad-mounted transformer with a tank volume within 30 percent of the tank volume of the transformer specified.

f. Short circuit: "Basically the same design" for the short circuit test means a pad-mounted transformer with the same kVA as the transformer specified.

2.7.3 Routine and Other Tests

IEEE C57.12.00. Routine and other tests shall be performed in accordance with IEEE C57.12.90 by the manufacturer on the actual transformer prepared for this project to ensure that the design performance is maintained in production. Submit test reports, by serial number and receive approval before delivery of equipment to the project site. Required tests and testing sequence shall be as follows:

a. Phase relation

b. Ratio

c. No-load losses (NLL) and excitation current

d. Load losses (LL) and impedance voltage

e. Dielectric



1. Impulse

2. Applied voltage

3. Induced voltage

f. Leak

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and to the requirements specified herein. Provide new equipment and materials unless indicated or specified otherwise.

3.2 GROUNDING

NFPA 70 and IEEE C2, except that grounding systems shall have a resistance to solid earth ground not exceeding 5 ohms.

3.2.1 Grounding Electrodes

Provide driven ground rods as specified in Section 33 71 02.00 20 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION. Connect ground conductors to the upper end of ground rods by exothermic weld or compression connector. Provide compression connectors at equipment end of ground conductors.

3.2.2 Pad-Mounted Transformer Grounding

Provide separate copper grounding conductors and connect them to the ground loop as indicated. When work in addition to that indicated or specified is required to obtain the specified ground resistance, the provision of the contract covering "Changes" shall apply.

3.2.3 Connections

Make joints in grounding conductors and loops by exothermic weld or compression connector. Exothermic welds and compression connectors shall be installed as specified in Section 33 71 02.00 20 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.

3.2.4 Grounding and Bonding Equipment

UL 467, except as indicated or specified otherwise.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES

Install and connect pad-mounted transformers furnished under this section as indicated on project drawings, the approved shop drawings, and as specified herein.


Where field painting of enclosures is required to correct damage to the manufacturer's factory applied coatings, provide manufacturer's recommended coatings and apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.



3.5 FOUNDATION FOR EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES

Mount transformer on concrete slab. Unless otherwise indicated, the slab shall be at least 8 inches thick, reinforced with a 6 by 6 - W2.9 by W2.9 mesh, placed uniformly 4 inches from the top of the slab. Slab shall be placed on a 6 inch thick, well-compacted gravel base. Top of concrete slab shall be approximately 4 inches above finished grade with gradual slope for drainage. Edges above grade shall have 1/2 inch chamfer. Slab shall be of adequate size to project at least 8 inches beyond the equipment.

Stub up conduits, with bushings, 2 inches into cable wells in the concrete pad. Coordinate dimensions of cable wells with transformer cable training areas.

3.5.1 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Cast-in-place concrete work shall conform to the requirements of Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.


3.6.1 Performance of Acceptance Checks and Tests

Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and include the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests, performed in accordance with NETA ATS.

3.6.1.1 Pad-Mounted Transformers

a. Visual and mechanical inspection

1. Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved shop drawings.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Check for damaged or cracked insulators and leaks.

3. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.

4. Verify the presence of PCB content labeling.

5. Verify the bushings and transformer interiors are clean.

6. Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance using low-resistance ohmmeter, verifying tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method, or performing thermographic survey.

7. Verify correct liquid level in tanks and bushings.

8. Verify that positive pressure is maintained on gas-blanketed transformers.

9. Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests as recommended by manufacturer.

10. Verify de-energized tap changer position is left as specified.

11. Verify the presence of transformer surge arresters.



b. Electrical tests

1. Perform resistance measurements through all bolted connections with low-resistance ohmmeter.

2. Verify proper secondary voltage phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral after energization and prior to loading.

3.6.1.2 Grounding System


1. Inspect ground system for compliance with contract plans and specifications.

b. Electrical tests

1. Perform ground-impedance measurements utilizing the fall-of-potential method. On systems consisting of interconnected ground rods, perform tests after interconnections are complete. On systems consisting of a single ground rod perform tests before any wire is connected. Take measurements in normally dry weather, not less than 48 hours after rainfall. Use a portable ground testing megger in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to test each ground or group of grounds. The instrument shall be equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions thereof to indicate the ground value of the ground rod or grounding systems under test.

2. Submit the measured ground resistance of each ground rod and grounding system, indicating the location of the rod and grounding system. Include the test method and test setup (i.e., pin location) used to determine ground resistance and soil conditions at the time the measurements were made.

3.6.1.3 Surge Arresters, Medium- and High-Voltage


1. Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved shop drawings.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

3. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.

4. Verify the arresters are clean.

5. Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance using low-resistance ohmmeter, verifying tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method, or performing thermographic survey.

6. Verify that the ground lead on each device is individually attached to a ground bus or ground electrode.

b. Electrical tests



1. Perform resistance measurements through all bolted connections with low-resistance ohmmeter, if applicable.

2. Perform an insulation-resistance test on each arrester, phase terminal-to-ground.

3. Test grounding connection.

3.6.2 Follow-Up Verification

Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests, the Contractor shall show by demonstration in service that circuits and devices are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function. As an exception to requirements stated elsewhere in the contract, the Contracting Officer shall be given 5 working days advance notice of the dates and times of checking and testing.




SECTION 26 20 00

INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM02/14

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM B1 (2013) Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire

ASTM B8 (2011) Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft

ASTM D709 (2013) Laminated Thermosetting Materials



IEEE 81 (2012) Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System



ANSI C80.1 (2005) American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC)

ANSI C80.3 (2005) American National Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)


NEMA ICS 1 (2000; R 2008; E 2010) Standard for Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements


NEMA ICS 4 (2010) Terminal Blocks




NEMA KS 1 (2001; R 2006) Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 V Maximum)


NEMA MG 10 (2001; R 2007) Energy Management Guide for Selection and Use of Fixed Frequency Medium AC Squirrel-Cage Polyphase Induction Motors


NEMA RN 1 (2005; R 2013) Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit

NEMA ST 20 (1992; R 1997) Standard for Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications

NEMA TC 2 (2013) Standard for Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit

NEMA TC 3 (2013) Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use With Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing

NEMA TP 1 (2002) Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution Transformers

NEMA VE 1 (2009) Standard for Metal Cable Tray Systems

NEMA WD 1 (1999; R 2005; R 2010) Standard for General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices

NEMA WD 6 (2012) Wiring Devices Dimensions Specifications

NEMA Z535.4 (2011) American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels



NFPA 70E (2012; Errata 2012) Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace

NFPA 780 (2014) Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems

TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA)

TIA-569 (2012c; Addendum 1 2013; Errata 2013)



Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

TIA-607 (2011b) Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises


29 CFR 1910.147 Control of Hazardous Energy (Lock Out/Tag Out)


UL 1 (2005; Reprint Jul 2012) Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit

UL 1063 (2006; Reprint Jul 2012) Machine-Tool Wires and Cables

UL 1242 (2006; Reprint Jul 2012) Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit -- Steel

UL 1449 (2006; Reprint Sep 2013) Surge Protective Devices

UL 1660 (2004; Reprint Apr 2013) Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit

UL 20 (2010; Reprint Feb 2012) General-Use Snap Switches

UL 360 (2013; Reprint May 2013) Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit

UL 44 (2010) Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables


UL 486A-486B (2013) Wire Connectors

UL 486C (2013) Splicing Wire Connectors

UL 489 (2013) Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures

UL 498 (2012; Reprint Aug 2013) Attachment Plugs and Receptacles

UL 50 (2007; Reprint Apr 2012) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-environmental Considerations

UL 506 (2008; Reprint Oct 2013) Specialty Transformers

UL 508 (1999; Reprint Oct 2013) Industrial



Control Equipment

UL 510 (2005; Reprint Jul 2013) Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape

UL 514A (2013) Metallic Outlet Boxes

UL 514B (2012) Conduit, Tubing and Cable Fittings

UL 514C (1996; Reprint Nov 2011) Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers


UL 651 (2011; Reprint Mar 2012) Standard for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings

UL 67 (2009; Reprint Jan 2013) Standard for Panelboards

UL 797 (2007; Reprint Dec 2012) Electrical Metallic Tubing -- Steel

UL 83 (2008) Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables

UL 869A (2006) Reference Standard for Service Equipment

UL 943 (2006; Reprint Jun 2012) Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters

UL 984 (1996; Reprint Sep 2005) Hermetic Refrigerant Motor-Compressors

1.2 DEFINITIONS

Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, are as defined in IEEE 100.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Panelboards; G

Transformers; G

Cable trays; G



Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Identify circuit terminals on wiring diagrams and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Indicate on the drawings adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices.

Marking strips drawings; G

SD-03 Product Data

Receptacles; G

Circuit breakers; G

Switches; G

Transformers; G

Enclosed circuit breakers; G

Motor controllers; G

CATV outlets; G

Telecommunications Grounding Busbar; G

Surge protective devices; G

Include performance and characteristic curves.

SD-06 Test Reports

600-volt wiring test; G

Grounding system test; G

Transformer tests; G

Ground-fault receptacle test; G


Transformer factory tests



In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" or "must" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Provide equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are



specified or indicated.


Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship and:

a. Have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening including applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size.

b. Have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period.

c. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, provide products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.




Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site are not acceptable.

1.5 MAINTENANCE

1.6 WARRANTY

Provide equipment items supported by service organizations that are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


As a minimum, meet requirements of UL, where UL standards are established for those items, and requirements of NFPA 70 for all materials, equipment, and devices.

2.2 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

Conform to the following:

2.2.1 Rigid Metallic Conduit

2.2.1.1 Rigid, Threaded Zinc-Coated Steel Conduit

ANSI C80.1, UL 6.



2.2.2 Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit

PVC Type EPC-40, and EPC-80 in accordance with NEMA TC 2,UL 651.

2.2.3 Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC)

UL 1242, zinc-coated steel only.

2.2.4 Electrical, Zinc-Coated Steel Metallic Tubing (EMT)

UL 797, ANSI C80.3.

2.2.5 Plastic-Coated Rigid Steel and IMC Conduit

NEMA RN 1, Type 40( 40 mils thick).

2.2.6 Flexible Metal Conduit

UL 1.

2.2.6.1 Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit, Steel

UL 360.

2.2.7 Fittings for Metal Conduit, EMT, and Flexible Metal Conduit

UL 514B. Ferrous fittings: cadmium- or zinc-coated in accordance with UL 514B.

2.2.7.1 Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and IMC

Threaded-type. Split couplings unacceptable.

2.2.7.2 Fittings for EMT

Steelcompression type.

2.2.8 Fittings for Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit

NEMA TC 3 for PVC, and UL 514B.

2.2.9 Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit

UL 1660.

2.3 CABLE TRAYS

NEMA VE 1. Provide the following:

a. Cable trays: form a wireway system, with a nominal 4 inch depth.

b. Cable trays: constructed of steel that has been zinc-coated after fabrication.

c. Cable trays: include splice and end plates, dropouts, and miscellaneous hardware.

d. Edges, fittings, and hardware: finished free from burrs and sharp edges.



e. Fittings: ensure not less than load-carrying ability of straight tray sections and have manufacturer's minimum standard radius.

Radius of bends: as recommended by the manufacturer..

2.3.1 Basket-Type Cable Trays

Provide size as indicated with maximum wire mesh spacing of 2 by 4 inch.

2.3.2 Communications Room Ladder Rack

a. Horizontal 90° turns shall be manufactured from 3/8" wide by 1-1/2" high tubular steel with .065" wall thickness.

b. Finish shall be black epoxy-polyester hybrid powder coat.

2.3.2.1 Horizontal 90° Turns

a. Ladder rack shall be manufactured from 3/8" wide by 1-1/2" high tubular steel stringers with .065" wall thickness and cross members welded in between each stringer at 9" on center. Overall width of ladder rack shall be 24".

b. Stringers (sides) will be formed in a 90° arc. Cross members will be welded in between stringers on approximate 23° increments so that there are 5 cross members per turn. The welded assembly will have a 15" inside radius and will create a smooth horizontal 90° turn.

c. Finish shall be black epoxy-polyester hybrid powder coat.

2.3.2.2 Ladder Rack Splices

a. Splice kits will provide a method of mechanically connecting ladder rack sections and turns together end-to-end or side-to-end to form a continuous pathway for cables.

b. Grounding kits will provide a method of bonding ladder rack sections and turns together that is independent of the pathway splices. The grounding kit should be constructed of UL Listed components.

c. Splices (splice plates) will be manufactured from steel. Splice, grounding and insulator bar kits will include installation hardware.

d. Finish (of splice plates and hardware) shall be zinc plate in the color(s) specified below. Colors are applied as a chem. film over the zinc plate.

2.3.2.3 Ladder Rack Supports

a. Supports will be sized to match the width of the ladder rack that is supported. Some supports will work with all widths of ladder rack.

b. Each support will include a means of securing ladder rack to the support.

c. Supports will be manufactured from steel or aluminum.

d. Finish shall be epoxy-polyester hybrid powder coat (paint) in the



color(s) specified below or zinc plate with a gold chem. finish specified gold. Included hardware shall be zinc plated with a gold chem. finish.

2.3.2.4 Ladder Rack Accessories

a. Provide cable straps used for attaching cable bundles to the ladder rack cross members must be reusable with a hook and loop-style closure, at least ¾" wide, and sized for cable bundles that are 2", 3" or 4" in diameter.

b. Provide cable retaining posts used to keep cable from falling off of the side of the ladder rack shall be manufactured from 1" by ½" tubular steel with .065" wall thickness. Cable retaining posts will be 8" high and will attach to the side stringer of the ladder rack with included hardware. The top of the cable retaining posts will be fitted with a rubberized end cap to protect cables.

c. Provide radius drops used to create a radius to form cables over as the cables exit or enter the ladder rack will be manufactured from aluminum extrusion. The extrusion will be formed in a 90° arc with a minimum bend radius of 3". Radius drops will attach to either the side stringer or the cross member of the ladder rack using a clevis pin. Radius drops will include 1-1/2" high cable spools that attach to the top of the radius drop to guide cables.

2.4 OUTLET BOXES AND COVERS

UL 514A, cadmium- or zinc-coated, if ferrous metal. UL 514C, if nonmetallic.

2.4.1 Floor Outlet Boxes

Provide the following:

a. Boxes: As indicated on the drawings.

2.5 CABINETS, JUNCTION BOXES, AND PULL BOXES

Volume greater than 100 cubic inches, UL 50, hot-dip, zinc-coated, if sheet steel.

2.6 WIRES AND CABLES

Provide wires and cables in accordance applicable requirements of NFPA 70 and UL for type of insulation, jacket, and conductor specified or indicated. Do not use wires and cables manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to site.

2.6.1 Conductors


a. Conductor sizes and capacities shown are based on copper, unless indicated otherwise.

b. Conductors No. 8 AWG and larger diameter: stranded.

c. Conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter: solid.



d. Conductors for remote control, alarm, and signal circuits, classes 1, 2, and 3: stranded unless specifically indicated otherwise.

e. All conductors: copper.2.6.1.1 Minimum Conductor Sizes

Provide minimum conductor size in accordance with the following:

a. Branch circuits: No. 12 AWG.

b. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits: No. 14 AWG.

c. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control and signal circuits: No. 16 AWG.

d. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm and signal circuits: No. 22 AWG.

2.6.2 Color Coding

Provide color coding for service, feeder, branch, control, and signaling circuit conductors.

2.6.2.1 Ground and Neutral Conductors

Provide color coding of ground and neutral conductors as follows:

a. Grounding conductors: Green.

b. Neutral conductors: White.

c. Exception, where neutrals of more than one system are installed in same raceway or box, other neutrals color coding: white with a different colored (not green) stripe for each.

2.6.2.2 Ungrounded Conductors

Provide color coding of ungrounded conductors in different voltage systems as follows:

a. 208/120 volt, three-phase

(1) Phase A - black

(2) Phase B - red

(3) Phase C - blue

2.6.3 Insulation

Unless specified or indicated otherwise or required by NFPA 70, provide power and lighting wires rated for 600-volts, Type THWN/THHN conforming to UL 83 or Type XHHW or RHW conforming to UL 44, except that grounding wire may be type TW conforming to UL 83; remote-control and signal circuits: Type TW or TF, conforming to UL 83. Where lighting fixtures require 90-degree Centigrade (C) conductors, provide only conductors with 90-degree C insulation or better.



2.6.4 Bonding Conductors

ASTM B1, solid bare copper wire for sizes No. 8 AWG and smaller diameter; ASTM B8, Class B, stranded bare copper wire for sizes No. 6 AWG and larger diameter.

2.7 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS

UL 486A-486B for wire connectors and UL 510 for insulating tapes. Connectors for No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter wires: insulated, pressure-type in accordance with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C (twist-on splicing connector). Provide solderless terminal lugs on stranded conductors.

2.8 DEVICE PLATES


a. UL listed, one-piece device plates for outlets to suit the devices installed.

b. For metal outlet boxes, plates on unfinished walls: zinc-coated sheet steel or cast metal having round or beveled edges.

c. For nonmetallic boxes and fittings, other suitable plates may be provided.

d. Plates on finished walls: nylon or lexan, minimum 0.03 inch wall thickness and same color as receptacle or toggle switch with which they are mounted.

e. Screws: machine-type with countersunk heads in color to match finish of plate.

f. Sectional type device plates are not be permitted.

g. Plates installed in wet locations: gasketed and UL listed for "wet locations."

2.9 SWITCHES

2.9.1 Toggle Switches

NEMA WD 1, UL 20, single pole, double pole, three-way, totally enclosed with bodies of thermoplastic or thermoset plastic and mounting strap with grounding screw. Include the following:

a. Handles: ivory thermoplastic.

b. Wiring terminals: screw-type, side-wired or of the solderless pressure type having suitable conductor-release arrangement.

c. Contacts: silver-cadmium and contact arm - one-piece copper alloy.

d. Switches: rated quiet-type ac only, 120/277 volts, with current rating and number of poles indicated.

2.9.2 Switch with Red Pilot Handle

NEMA WD 1. Provide the following:



a. Pilot lights that are integrally constructed as a part of the switch's handle.

b. Pilot light color: red and illuminate whenever the switch is closed or "on".

c. Pilot lighted switch: rated 20 amps and 120 volts or 277 volts as indicated.

d. The circuit's neutral conductor to each switch with a pilot light.

2.9.3 Disconnect Switches

NEMA KS 1. Provide heavy duty-type switches where indicated, where switches are rated higher than 240 volts, and for double-throw switches. Utilize Class R fuseholders and fuses for fused switches, unless indicated otherwise. Provide horsepower rated for switches serving as the motor-disconnect means. Provide switches in NEMA , enclosure as indicated per NEMA ICS 6.

2.10 RECEPTACLES


a. UL 498, hard use (also designated heavy-duty), UL 498, hospital grade, grounding-type.

b. Ratings and configurations: as indicated.

c. Bodies: ivory as per NEMA WD 1.

d. Face and body: thermoplastic supported on a metal mounting strap.

e. Dimensional requirements: per NEMA WD 6.

f. Screw-type, side-wired wiring terminals or of the solderless pressure type having suitable conductor-release arrangement.

g. Grounding pole connected to mounting strap.

h. The receptacle: containing triple-wipe power contacts and double or triple-wipe ground contacts.

2.10.1 Weatherproof Receptacles

Provide receptacles, UL listed for use in "wet locations". Include cast metal box with gasketed, hinged, lockable and weatherproof while-in-use, polycarbonate, UV resistant/stabilized cover plate.

2.10.2 Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles

UL 943, duplex type for mounting in standard outlet box. Provide device capable of detecting current leak of 6 milliamperes or greater and tripping per requirements of UL 943 for Class A ground-fault circuit interrupter devices. Provide screw-type, side-wired wiring terminals or pre-wired (pigtail) leads.



2.10.3 Special Purpose Receptacles

Receptacles indicated are special purpose. Provide in ratings indicated. Furnish one matching plug with each receptacle.

2.10.4 Plugs

Provide heavy-duty, rubber-covered three-, four-, or five-wire cord of required size, install plugs thereon, and attach to equipment. Provide UL listed plugs with receptacles, complete with grounding blades. Where equipment is not available, turn over plugs and cord assemblies to the Government.

2.10.5 Tamper-Resistant Receptacles

Provide duplex receptacle with mechanical sliding shutters that prevent the insertion of small objects into its contact slots.

2.11 PANELBOARDS

Provide panelboards in accordance with the following:

a. UL 67 and UL 50 having a short-circuit current rating as indicated.

b. Panelboards for use as service disconnecting means: additionally conform to UL 869A.

c. Panelboards: circuit breaker-equipped.

d. Designed such that individual breakers can be removed without disturbing adjacent units or without loosening or removing supplemental insulation supplied as means of obtaining clearances as required by UL.

e. "Specific breaker placement" is required in panelboards to match the breaker placement indicated in the panelboard schedule on the drawings.

f. Use of "Subfeed Breakers" is not acceptable unless specifically indicated otherwise.

g. Main breaker: "separately" mounted "above" or "below" branch breakers.

h. Where "space only" is indicated, make provisions for future installation of breakers.

i. Directories: indicate load served by each circuit in panelboard.

j. Directories: indicate source of service to panelboard (e.g., Panel PA served from Panel MDP).

k. Type directories and mount in holder behind transparent protective covering.

l. Panelboards: listed and labeled for their intended use.

m. Panelboard nameplates: provided in accordance with paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES.



2.11.1 Enclosure

Provide panelboard enclosure in accordance with the following:

a. UL 50.

b. Cabinets mounted outdoors or flush-mounted: hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication.

c. Cabinets: painted in accordance with paragraph PAINTING.

d. Outdoor cabinets: NEMA 3R raintight.

e. Front edges of cabinets: form-flanged or fitted with structural shapes welded or riveted to the sheet steel, for supporting the panelboard front.

f. All cabinets: fabricated such that no part of any surface on the finished cabinet deviates from a true plane by more than 1/8 inch.

g. Holes: provided in the back of indoor surface-mounted cabinets, with outside spacers and inside stiffeners, for mounting the cabinets with a 1/2 inch clear space between the back of the cabinet and the wall surface.

h. Flush doors: mounted on hinges that expose only the hinge roll to view when the door is closed.

i. Each door: fitted with a combined catch and lock, except that doors over 24 inches long provided with a three-point latch having a knob with a T-handle, and a cylinder lock.

j. Keys: two provided with each lock, with all locks keyed alike.

k. Finished-head cap screws: provided for mounting the panelboard fronts on the cabinets.

2.11.2 Panelboard Buses

Support bus bars on bases independent of circuit breakers. Design main buses and back pans so that breakers may be changed without machining, drilling, or tapping. Provide isolated neutral bus in each panel for connection of circuit neutral conductors. Provide separate ground bus identified as equipment grounding bus per UL 67 for connecting grounding conductors; bond to steel cabinet.

2.11.3 Circuit Breakers

UL 489, thermal magnetic-type having a minimum short-circuit current rating equal to the short-circuit current rating of the panelboard in which the circuit breaker will be mounted. Breaker terminals: UL listed as suitable for type of conductor provided. Series rated circuit breakers and plug-in circuit breakers are unacceptable.

2.11.3.1 Multipole Breakers

Provide common trip-type with single operating handle. Design breaker such that overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open. Maintain phase sequence throughout each panel so that any three adjacent breaker



poles are connected to Phases A, B, and C, respectively.

2.11.3.2 Electronic Trip Units

Equip main and distribution breakers as indicated with a solid-state tripping system consisting of three current sensors and a microprocessor-based trip unit that will provide true rms sensing adjustable time-current circuit protection. The ampere rating of the current sensors are to be the same as the breaker frame rating. The trip unit ampere rating shall be as indicated. The electronic trip units shall have the following features.

a. Main breakers shall have short delay pick-up and time settings and instantaneous settings.

b. Distribution breakers indicated shall have short delay pick-up and time settings, and instantaneous settings.

2.11.3.3 Circuit Breakers for HVAC Equipment

Provide circuit breakers for HVAC equipment having motors (group or individual) marked for use with HACR type and UL listed as HACR type.

2.12 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS

UL 489. Individual molded case circuit breakers with voltage and continuous current ratings, number of poles, overload trip setting, and short circuit current interrupting rating as indicated. Enclosure type as indicated.

2.13 MOTOR SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTOR (MSCP)

Motor short-circuit protectors, also called motor circuit protectors (MCPs): UL 508 and UL 489, and provided as shown. Provide MSCPs that consist of an adjustable instantaneous trip circuit breaker used only in conjunction with a combination motor controller which provides coordinated motor branch-circuit overload and short-circuit protection. Rate MSCPs in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70.

2.14 TRANSFORMERS

Provide transformers in accordance with the following:

a. NEMA ST 20, general purpose, dry-type, self-cooled, ventilated.

b. Provide transformers in NEMA 1 enclosure.

c. Transformer insulation system:

(1) 220 degrees C insulation system for transformers 15 kVA and greater, with temperature rise not exceeding 115 degrees C under full-rated load in maximum ambient of 40 degrees C.

d. Transformer of 115 degrees C temperature rise: capable of carrying continuously 115 percent of nameplate kVA without exceeding insulation rating.



2.14.1 Specified Transformer Efficiency

Transformers, indicated and specified with: 480V primary, 80 degrees C or 115 degrees C temperature rise, kVA ratings of 37.5 to 100 for single phase or 30 to 500 for three phase, energy efficient type. Minimum efficiency, based on factory test results: not be less than NEMA Class 1 efficiency as defined by NEMA TP 1.

2.15 MOTORS

Provide motors in accordance with the following:

a. NEMA MG 1 FIRE PUMPS.

b. Hermetic-type sealed motor compressors: Also comply with UL 984.

c. Provide the size in terms of HP, or kVA, or full-load current, or a combination of these characteristics, and other characteristics, of each motor as indicated or specified.

d. Determine specific motor characteristics to ensure provision of correctly sized starters and overload heaters.

e. Rate motors for operation on 208-volt, 3-phase circuits with a terminal voltage rating of 200 volts, and those for operation on 480-volt, 3-phase circuits with a terminal voltage rating of 460 volts.

f. Use motors designed to operate at full capacity with voltage variation of plus or minus 10 percent of motor voltage rating.

g. Unless otherwise indicated, use continuous duty type motors if rated 1 HP and above.

h. Where fuse protection is specifically recommended by the equipment manufacturer, provide fused switches in lieu of non-fused switches indicated.

2.15.1 High Efficiency Single-Phase Motors

Single-phase fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors: high efficiency types corresponding to the applications listed in NEMA MG 11. In exception, for motor-driven equipment with a minimum seasonal or overall efficiency rating, such as a SEER rating, provide equipment with motor to meet the overall system rating indicated.

2.15.2 Premium Efficiency Polyphase Motors

Select polyphase motors based on high efficiency characteristics relative to typical characteristics and applications as listed in NEMA MG 10. In addition, continuous rated, polyphase squirrel-cage medium induction motors must meet the requirements for premium efficiency electric motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1, including the NEMA full load efficiency ratings. In exception, for motor-driven equipment with a minimum seasonal or overall efficiency rating, such as a SEER rating, provide equipment with motor to meet the overall system rating indicated.

2.15.3 Motor Sizes

Provide size for duty to be performed, not exceeding the full-load



nameplate current rating when driven equipment is operated at specified capacity under most severe conditions likely to be encountered. When motor size or characteristics provided differs from size or characteristics indicated or specified, make adjustments to wiring, disconnect devices, and branch circuit protection to accommodate equipment actually provided. Provide controllers for motors rated 1-hp and above with electronic phase-voltage monitors designed to protect motors from phase-loss, undervoltage, and overvoltage. Provide protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay.

2.15.4 Wiring and Conduit

Provide internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment. Provide power wiring and conduit for field-installed equipment as specified herein. Power wiring and conduit: conform to the requirements specified herein. Control wiring: provided under, and conform to, the requirements of the section specifying the associated equipment.

2.16 MOTOR CONTROLLERS

Provide motor controllers in accordance with the following:

a. UL 508, NEMA ICS 1, and NEMA ICS 2,.

b. Provide controllers with thermal overload protection in each phase, and one spare normally open auxiliary contact, and one spare normally closed auxiliary contact.

c. Provide controllers for motors rated 1-hp and above with electronic phase-voltage monitors designed to protect motors from phase-loss, undervoltage, and overvoltage.

d. Provide protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay.

e. When used with pressure, float, or similar automatic-type or maintained-contact switch, provide a hand/off/automatic selector switch with the controller.

f. Connections to selector switch: wired such that only normal automatic regulatory control devices are bypassed when switch is in "hand" position.

g. Safety control devices, such as low and high pressure cutouts, high temperature cutouts, and motor overload protective devices: connected in motor control circuit in "hand" and "automatic" positions.

h. Control circuit connections to hand/off/automatic selector switch or to more than one automatic regulatory control device: made in accordance with indicated or manufacturer's approved wiring diagram.

i. Provide selector switch with the means for locking in any position.

j. Provide a disconnecting means, capable of being locked in the open position, for the motor that is located in sight from the motor location and the driven machinery location. As an alternative, provide a motor controller disconnect, capable of being locked in the open position, to serve as the disconnecting means for the motor if it is in



sight from the motor location and the driven machinery location.

k. Overload protective devices: provide adequate protection to motor windings; be thermal inverse-time-limit type; and include manual reset-type pushbutton on outside of motor controller case.

l. Cover of combination motor controller and manual switch or circuit breaker: interlocked with operating handle of switch or circuit breaker so that cover cannot be opened unless handle of switch or circuit breaker is in "off" position.

m. Minimum short circuit withstand rating of combination motor controller: 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes unless otherwise indicated.

2.16.1 Control Wiring

Provide control wiring in accordance with the following:

a. All control wire: stranded tinned copper switchboard wire with 600-volt flame-retardant insulation Type SIS meeting UL 44, or Type MTW meeting UL 1063, and passing the VW-1 flame tests included in those standards.

b. Hinge wire: Class K stranding.

c. Current transformer secondary leads: not smaller than No. 10 AWG.

d. Control wire minimum size: No. 14 AWG.

e. Power wiring for 480-volt circuits and below: the same type as control wiring with No. 12 AWG minimum size.

f. Provide wiring and terminal arrangement on the terminal blocks to permit the individual conductors of each external cable to be terminated on adjacent terminal points.

2.16.2 Control Circuit Terminal Blocks

Provide control circuit terminal blocks in accordance with the following:

a. NEMA ICS 4.

b. Control circuit terminal blocks for control wiring: molded or fabricated type with barriers, rated not less than 600 volts.

c. Provide terminals with removable binding, fillister or washer head screw type, or of the stud type with contact and locking nuts.

d. Terminals: not less than No. 10 in size with sufficient length and space for connecting at least two indented terminals for 10 AWG conductors to each terminal.

e. Terminal arrangement: subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer with not less than four (4) spare terminals or 10 percent, whichever is greater, provided on each block or group of blocks.

f. Modular, pull apart, terminal blocks are acceptable provided they are of the channel or rail-mounted type.



g. Submit data showing that any proposed alternate will accommodate the specified number of wires, are of adequate current-carrying capacity, and are constructed to assure positive contact between current-carrying parts.

2.16.2.1 Types of Terminal Blocks

a. Short-Circuiting Type: Short-circuiting type terminal blocks: furnished for all current transformer secondary leads with provision for shorting together all leads from each current transformer without first opening any circuit. Terminal blocks: comply with the requirements of paragraph CONTROL CIRCUIT TERMINAL BLOCKS above.

b. Load Type: Load terminal blocks rated not less than 600 volts and of adequate capacity: provided for the conductors for NEMA Size 3 and smaller motor controllers and for other power circuits, except those for feeder tap units. Provide terminals of either the stud type with contact nuts and locking nuts or of the removable screw type, having length and space for at least two indented terminals of the size required on the conductors to be terminated. For conductors rated more than 50 amperes, provide screws with hexagonal heads. Conducting parts between connected terminals must have adequate contact surface and cross-section to operate without overheating. Provide eEach connected terminal with the circuit designation or wire number placed on or near the terminal in permanent contrasting color.

2.16.3 Control Circuits

Control circuits: maximum voltage of 120 volts derived from control transformer in same enclosure. Transformers: conform to UL 506, as applicable. Transformers, other than transformers in bridge circuits: provide primaries wound for voltage available and secondaries wound for correct control circuit voltage. Size transformers so that 80 percent of rated capacity equals connected load. Provide disconnect switch on primary side. Provide fuses in each ungrounded primary feeder. Provide one fused secondary lead with the other lead grounded.

2.16.4 Enclosures for Motor Controllers

NEMA ICS 6.

2.16.5 Pilot and Indicating Lights

Provide LED cluster lamps.

2.17 LOCKOUT REQUIREMENTS

Provide disconnecting means capable of being locked out for machines and other equipment to prevent unexpected startup or release of stored energy in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.147. Comply with requirements of Division 23, "Mechanical" for mechanical isolation of machines and other equipment.

2.18 COMMUNITY ANTENNA TELEVISION (CATV) SYSTEM

Additional CATV requirements are specified in Section 27 54 00.00 20, COMMUNITY ANTENNA TELEVISION (CATV) SYSTEMS.



2.18.1 CATV Outlets

Provide flush mounted, 75-ohm, F-type connector outlet rated from 5 to 1000 MHz in standard electrical outlet boxes with isolation barrier with mounting frame.

2.18.2 CATV Faceplates

Provide modular faceplates for mounting of CATV Outlets. Faceplate: include designation labels and label covers for circuit identification. Faceplate color: match outlet and switch coverplates.

2.18.3 Backboards

Coordinate CATV backboard requirements with telecommunications backboard requirements as specified in Section 27 10 00, BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING.

2.19 GROUNDING AND BONDING EQUIPMENT

2.19.1 Ground Rods

UL 467. Ground rods: copper-clad steel, with minimum diameter of 3/4 inch and minimum length 10 feet. Sectional ground rods are permitted.

2.19.2 Telecommunications and CATV Grounding Busbar

Provide corrosion-resistant grounding busbar suitable for indoor installation in accordance with TIA-607. Busbars: plated for reduced contact resistance. If not plated, clean the busbar prior to fastening the conductors to the busbar and apply an anti-oxidant to the contact area to control corrosion and reduce contact resistance. Provide a telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) in the telecommunications entrance facility. The telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB): sized in accordance with the immediate application requirements and with consideration of future growth. Provide telecommunications grounding busbars with the following:

a. Predrilled copper busbar provided with holes for use with standard sized lugs,

b. Minimum dimensions of 0.25 in thick by 4 in wide for the TMGB with length as indicated;

c. Listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.


Provide on each item of equipment a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.


Provide field fabricated nameplates in accordance with the following:

a. ASTM D709.



b. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified or as indicated on the drawings.

c. Each nameplate inscription: identify the function and, when applicable, the position.

d. Nameplates: melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core.

e. Surface: matte finish. Corners: square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core.

f. Minimum size of nameplates: one by 2.5 inches.

g. Lettering size and style: a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style.

2.22 WARNING SIGNS

Provide warning signs for flash protection in accordance with NFPA 70E and NEMA Z535.4 for switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, and motor control centers that are in other than dwelling occupancies and are likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized. Provide field installed signs to warn qualified persons of potential electric arc flash hazards when warning signs are not provided by the manufacturer. Provide marking that is clearly visible to qualified persons before examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance of the equipment.

2.23 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS

Provide firestopping around electrical penetrations in accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING .

2.24 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

Provide parallel type surge protective devices (SPD) which comply with UL 1449 at the service entrance , panelboards . Provide surge protectors in a NEMA 1 enclosure per NEMA ICS 6. Use Type 1 or Type 2 SPD and connect on the load side of a dedicated circuit breaker.

Provide the following modes of protection:

FOR THREE PHASE WYE CONNECTED SYSTEMS- Phase to phase ( L-L ) Each phase to neutral ( L-N ) Neutral to ground ( N-G ) Phase to ground ( L-G )

SPDs at the service entrance: provide with a minimum surge current rating of 80,000 amperes for L-L mode minimum and 40,000 amperes for other modes (L-N, L-G, and N-G).

Provide SPDs per NFPA 780 for the lightning protection system.

Maximum L-N, L-G, and N-G Voltage Protection Rating: 600V for 208Y/120V, three phase system



Maximum L-L Voltage Protection Rating: 1,200V for 208Y/120V, three phase system The minimum MCOV (Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage) rating for L-N and L-G modes of operation: 120% of nominal voltage for 240 volts and below; 115% of nominal voltage above 240 volts to 480 volts.


Provide factory-applied finish on electrical equipment in accordance with the following:

a. NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test and the additional requirements as specified herein.

b. Interior and exterior steel surfaces of equipment enclosures: thoroughly cleaned followed by a rust-inhibitive phosphatizing or equivalent treatment prior to painting.

c. Exterior surfaces: free from holes, seams, dents, weld marks, loose scale or other imperfections.

d. Interior surfaces: receive not less than one coat of corrosion-resisting paint in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice.

e. Exterior surfaces: primed, filled where necessary, and given not less than two coats baked enamel with semigloss finish.

f. Equipment located indoors: ANSI Light Gray, and equipment located outdoors: ANSI Light Gray.

g. Provide manufacturer's coatings for touch-up work and as specified in paragraph FIELD APPLIED PAINTING.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Electrical installations, including weatherproof and hazardous locations and ducts, plenums and other air-handling spaces: conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 and to requirements specified herein.

3.1.1 Underground Service

Underground service conductors and associated conduit: continuous from service entrance equipment to outdoor power system connection.

3.1.2 Service Entrance Identification

Service entrance disconnect devices, switches, and enclosures: labeled and identified as such.

3.1.2.1 Labels

Wherever work results in service entrance disconnect devices in more than



one enclosure, as permitted by NFPA 70, label each enclosure, new and existing, as one of several enclosures containing service entrance disconnect devices. Label, at minimum: indicate number of service disconnect devices housed by enclosure and indicate total number of enclosures that contain service disconnect devices. Provide laminated plastic labels conforming to paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES. Use lettering of at least 0.25 inch in height, and engrave on black-on-white matte finish. Service entrance disconnect devices in more than one enclosure: provided only as permitted by NFPA 70.

3.1.3 Wiring Methods

Provide insulated conductors installed in rigid steel conduit, IMC, or EMT, except where specifically indicated or specified otherwise or required by NFPA 70 to be installed otherwise. Grounding conductor: separate from electrical system neutral conductor. Provide insulated green equipment grounding conductor for circuit(s) installed in conduit and raceways. Minimum conduit size: 3/4 inch in diameter for low voltage lighting and power circuits. Vertical distribution in multiple story buildings: made with metal conduit in fire-rated shafts, with metal conduit extending through shafts for minimum distance of 6 inches. Firestop conduit which penetrates fire-rated walls, fire-rated partitions, or fire-rated floors in accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.

3.1.3.1 Pull Wire

Install pull wires in empty conduits. Pull wire: plastic having minimum 200-pound force tensile strength. Leave minimum 36 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.

3.1.4 Conduit Installation

Unless indicated otherwise, conceal conduit under floor slabs and within finished walls, ceilings, and floors. Keep conduit minimum 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Install conduit parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural members where located above accessible ceilings and where conduit will be visible after completion of project. Run conduits in crawl space as if exposed.

3.1.4.1 Restrictions Applicable to EMT

a. Do not install underground.

b. Do not encase in concrete, mortar, grout, or other cementitious materials.

c. Do not use in areas subject to severe physical damage including but not limited to equipment rooms where moving or replacing equipment could physically damage the EMT.

d. Do not use in hazardous areas.

e. Do not use outdoors.

f. Do not use in fire pump rooms.

g. Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP).



3.1.4.2 Restrictions Applicable to Nonmetallic Conduit

a. PVC Schedule 40 and PVC Schedule 80

(1) Do not use for any circuits that feed loads within the building footprint. Nonmetallic conduit shall only be used when feeding exterior lighting and power loads and for concealed lightning protection down conductors.

(2) Do not use above grade, except where allowed in this section for rising through floor slab or indicated otherwise.

3.1.4.3 Restrictions Applicable to Flexible Conduit

Use only as specified in paragraph FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS. Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP).

3.1.4.4 Underground Conduit

Plastic-coated rigid steel; plastic-coated steel IMC; PVC, Type EPC-40 Convert nonmetallic conduit, other than PVC Schedule 40 or 80, to plastic-coated rigid, or IMC, steel conduit before rising through floor slab. Nonmetallic conduit shall only be used for loads located outside the building footprint.Plastic coating: extend minimum 6 inches above floor.

3.1.4.5 Conduit for Circuits Rated Greater Than 600 Volts

Rigid metal conduit or IMC only.

3.1.4.6 Conduit Installed Under Floor Slabs

Conduit run under floor slab: located a minimum of 12 inches below the vapor barrier. Seal around conduits at penetrations thru vapor barrier.

3.1.4.7 Conduit Through Floor Slabs

Where conduits rise through floor slabs, do not allow curved portion of bends to be visible above finished slab.

3.1.4.8 Conduit Installed in Concrete Floor Slabs

Do not install conduit in concrete floor slabs.

3.1.4.9 Stub-Ups

Provide conduits stubbed up through concrete floor for connection to free-standing equipment with adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs, set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment in rigid steel conduit, except that flexible metal conduit may be used 6 inches above floor. Where no equipment connections are made, install screwdriver-operated threaded flush plugs in conduit end.

3.1.4.10 Conduit Support

Support conduit by pipe straps, wall brackets, threaded rod conduit hangers, or ceiling trapeze. Fasten by wood screws to wood; by toggle bolts on hollow masonry units; by concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or brick; and by machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension



clamps on steel work. Threaded C-clamps may be used on rigid steel conduit only. Do not weld conduits or pipe straps to steel structures. Do not exceed one-fourth proof test load for load applied to fasteners. Provide vibration resistant and shock-resistant fasteners attached to concrete ceiling. Do not cut main reinforcing bars for any holes cut to depth of more than 1 1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than 3/4 inch in concrete joints. Fill unused holes. In partitions of light steel construction, use sheet metal screws. In suspended-ceiling construction, run conduit above ceiling. Do not support conduit by ceiling support system. Conduit and box systems: supported independently of both (a) tie wires supporting ceiling grid system, and (b) ceiling grid system into which ceiling panels are placed. Coordinate installation with above-ceiling mechanical systems to assure maximum accessibility to all systems. Spring-steel fasteners may be used for lighting branch circuit conduit supports in suspended ceilings in dry locations. Where conduit crosses building expansion joints, provide suitable expansion fitting that maintains conduit electrical continuity by bonding jumpers or other means. For conduits greater than 2 1/2 inches inside diameter, provide supports to resist forces of 0.5 times the equipment weight in any direction and 1.5 times the equipment weight in the downward direction.

3.1.4.11 Directional Changes in Conduit Runs

Make changes in direction of runs with symmetrical bends or cast-metal fittings. Make field-made bends and offsets with hickey or conduit-bending machine. Do not install crushed or deformed conduits. Avoid trapped conduits. Prevent plaster, dirt, or trash from lodging in conduits, boxes, fittings, and equipment during construction. Free clogged conduits of obstructions.

3.1.4.12 Locknuts and Bushings

Fasten conduits to sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where required by NFPA 70, where insulated bushings are used, and where bushings cannot be brought into firm contact with the box; otherwise, use at least minimum single locknut and bushing. Provide locknuts with sharp edges for digging into wall of metal enclosures. Install bushings on ends of conduits, and provide insulating type where required by NFPA 70.

3.1.4.13 Flexible Connections

Provide flexible steel conduit between 3 and 6 feet in length for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures. Install flexible conduit to allow 20 percent slack. Minimum flexible steel conduit size: 1/2 inch diameter. Provide liquidtight flexible conduit in wet and damp locations for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, movement or motors. Provide separate ground conductor across flexible connections.

3.1.5 Cable Tray Installation

Install cable trays parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural members. Support at maximum 6 foot intervals. In addition, install and ground telecommunications cable tray in accordance with TIA-569, and TIA-607 Ensure edges, fittings, and hardware are finished free from burrs and sharp edges. Provide No. 2 AWG bare copper wire throughout cable tray system, and bond to each section. Use No. 1/0 aluminum wire if cable tray is aluminum. Install conductors that run though smoke and fire partitions in 4 inch rigid steel conduits with grounding bushing, extending 12 inches beyond each side of partitions. Seal conduit on both ends to



maintain smoke and fire ratings of partitions. Provide supports to resist forces of 0.5 times the equipment weight in any direction and 1.5 times the equipment weight in the downward direction.

3.1.6 Boxes, Outlets, and Supports

Provide boxes in wiring and raceway systems wherever required for pulling of wires, making connections, and mounting of devices or fixtures. Boxes for metallic raceways: cast-metal, hub-type when located in wet locations, when surface mounted on outside of exterior surfaces, when surface mounted on interior walls exposed up to 7 feet above floors and walkways, and when specifically indicated. Boxes in other locations: sheet steel, except that aluminum boxes may be used with aluminum conduit, and nonmetallic boxes may be used with nonmetallic conduit system. Provide each box with volume required by NFPA 70 for number of conductors enclosed in box. Boxes for mounting lighting fixtures: minimum 4 inches square, or octagonal, except that smaller boxes may be installed as required by fixture configurations, as approved. Boxes for use in masonry-block or tile walls: square-cornered, tile-type, or standard boxes having square-cornered, tile-type covers. Provide gaskets for cast-metal boxes installed in wet locations and boxes installed flush with outside of exterior surfaces. Provide separate boxes for flush or recessed fixtures when required by fixture terminal operating temperature; provide readily removable fixturesfor access to boxes unless ceiling access panels are provided. Support boxes and pendants for surface-mounted fixtures on suspended ceilings independently of ceiling supports. Fasten boxes and supports with wood screws on wood, with bolts and expansion shields on concrete or brick, with toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, and with machine screws or welded studs on steel. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be separately supported except where used for fixture support; support sheet metal boxes directly from building structure or by bar hangers. Where bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of box, and support raceway with approved-type fastener maximum 24 inches from box. When penetrating reinforced concrete members, avoid cutting reinforcing steel.

3.1.6.1 Boxes

Boxes for use with raceway systems: minimum 1 1/2 inches deep, except where shallower boxes required by structural conditions are approved. Boxes for other than lighting fixture outlets: minimum 4 inches square, except that 4 by 2 inch boxes may be used where only one raceway enters outlet.

3.1.6.2 Pull Boxes

Construct of at least minimum size required by NFPA 70 of code-gauge aluminum or galvanized sheet steel, except where cast-metal boxes are required in locations specified herein. Provide boxes with screw-fastened covers. Where several feeders pass through common pull box, tag feeders to indicate clearly electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel designation.

3.1.7 Mounting Heights

Mount panelboards, enclosed circuit breakers, motor controller and disconnecting switches so height of operating handle at its highest position is maximum 78 inches above floor. Mount lighting switches and handicapped telecommunications stations 48 inches above finished floor.



Mount receptacles and telecommunications outlets 18 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

3.1.8 Conductor Identification

Provide conductor identification within each enclosure where tap, splice, or termination is made. For conductors No. 6 AWG and smaller diameter, provide color coding by factory-applied, color-impregnated insulation. For conductors No. 4 AWG and larger diameter, provide color coding by plastic-coated, self-sticking markers; colored nylon cable ties and plates; or heat shrink-type sleeves. Identify control circuit terminations in accordance with Section 23 09 23.13 20 BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC. Provide telecommunications system conductor identification as specified in Section 27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEMS.

3.1.8.1 Marking Strips

Provide marking strips in accordance with the following:

a. Provide white or other light-colored plastic marking strips, fastened by screws to each terminal block, for wire designations.

b. Use permanent ink for the wire numbers

c. Provide reversible marking strips to permit marking both sides, or provide two marking strips with each block.

d. Size marking strips to accommodate the two sets of wire numbers.

e. Assign a device designation in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 to each device to which a connection is made. Mark each device terminal to which a connection is made with a distinct terminal marking corresponding to the wire designation used on the Contractor's schematic and connection diagrams.

f. The wire (terminal point) designations used on the Contractor's wiring diagrams and printed on terminal block marking strips may be according to the Contractor's standard practice; however, provide additional wire and cable designations for identification of remote (external) circuits for the Government's wire designations.

g. Prints of the marking strips drawings submitted for approval will be so marked and returned to the Contractor for addition of the designations to the terminal strips and tracings, along with any rearrangement of points required.

3.1.9 Splices

Make splices in accessible locations. Make splices in conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter with insulated, pressure-type connector. Make splices in conductors No. 8 AWG and larger diameter with solderless connector, and cover with insulation material equivalent to conductor insulation.

3.1.9.1 Splices of Aluminum Conductors

Make with solderless circumferential compression-type, aluminum-bodied connectors UL listed for AL/CU. Remove surface oxides from aluminum



conductors by wire brushing and immediately apply oxide-inhibiting joint compound and insert in connector. After joint is made, wipe away excess joint compound, and insulate splice.

3.1.10 Covers and Device Plates

Install with edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces without use of mats or similar devices. Plaster fillings are not permitted. Install plates with alignment tolerance of 1/16 inch. Use of sectional-type device plates are not permitted. Provide gasket for plates installed in wet locations.

3.1.11 Electrical Penetrations

Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance-rated walls, partitions, floors, or ceilings in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.

3.1.12 Grounding and Bonding

Provide in accordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA 780. Ground exposed, non-current-carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding conductor in metallic and nonmetallic raceways, telecommunications system grounds, and neutral conductor of wiring systems. Make ground connection at main service equipment, and extend grounding conductor to point of entrance of metallic water service. Make connection to water pipe by suitable ground clamp or lug connection to plugged tee. If flanged pipes are encountered, make connection with lug bolted to street side of flanged connection. Supplement metallic water service grounding system with additional made electrode in compliance with NFPA 70. Interconnect all grounding media in or on the structure to provide a common ground potential. This includes lightning protection, electrical service, telecommunications system grounds, as well as underground metallic piping systems. Make interconnection to the gas line on the customer's side of the meter. Use main size lightning conductors for interconnecting these grounding systems to the lightning protection system. In addition to the requirements specified herein, provide telecommunications grounding in accordance with TIA-607. Where ground fault protection is employed, ensure that connection of ground and neutral does not interfere with correct operation of fault protection.

3.1.12.1 Ground Rods

Provide cone pointed ground rods. Measure the resistance to ground using the fall-of-potential method described in IEEE 81. Do not exceed 25 ohms under normally dry conditions for the maximum resistance of a driven ground. If this resistance cannot be obtained with a single rod,provide additional rods, spaced on center, not less than twice the distance of the length of the rod, or if sectional type rods are used, additional sections may be coupled and driven with the first rod. In high-ground-resistance, UL listed chemically charged ground rods may be used. If the resultant resistance exceeds 25 ohms measured not less than 48 hours after rainfall, notify the Contracting Officer who will decide on the number of ground rods to add.

3.1.12.2 Grounding Connections

Make grounding connections which are buried or otherwise normally inaccessible, excepting specifically those connections for which access for



periodic testing is required, by exothermic weld or compression connector.

a. Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds which are "puffed up" or which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. Mechanical connectors are not required at exothermic welds.

b. Make compression connections using a hydraulic compression tool to provide the correct circumferential pressure. Provide tools and dies as recommended by the manufacturer. Use an embossing die code or other standard method to provide visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground wire.

3.1.12.3 Ground Bus

Provide a copper ground bus in the electrical equipment rooms as indicated. Noncurrent-carrying metal parts of equipment: effectively grounded by bonding to the ground bus. Bond the ground bus to both the entrance ground, and to a ground rod or rods as specified above having the upper ends terminating approximately 4 inches above the floor. Make connections and splices of the brazed, welded, bolted, or pressure-connector type, except use pressure connectors or bolted connections for connections to removable equipment.

3.1.12.4 Resistance

Maximum resistance-to-ground of grounding system: do not exceed 5 ohms under dry conditions. Where resistance obtained exceeds 5 ohms, contact Contracting Officer for further instructions.

3.1.12.5 Telecommunications System

Provide telecommunications grounding in accordance with the following:

a. Telecommunications Grounding Busbars: Provide a telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) in the telecommunications entrance facility. Install the TMGB as close to the electrical service entrance grounding connection as practicable. Install telecommunications grounding busbars to maintain clearances as required by NFPA 70 and insulated from its support. A minimum of 2 inches separation from the wall is recommended to allow access to the rear of the busbar and adjust the mounting height to accommodate overhead or underfloor cable routing.

b. Telecommunications Bonding Conductors: Provide main telecommunications service equipment ground consisting of separate bonding conductor for telecommunications, between the TMGB and readily accessible grounding connection of the electrical service. Grounding and bonding conductors should not be placed in ferrous metallic conduit. If it is necessary to place grounding and bonding conductors in ferrous metallic conduit that exceeds3 feet in length, bond the conductors to each end of the conduit using a grounding bushing or a No. 6 AWG conductor, minimum.

c. Telecommunications Grounding Connections: Telecommunications grounding connections to the TMGB: utilize listed compression two-hole lugs, exothermic welding, suitable and equivalent one hole non-twisting lugs, or other irreversible compression type connections. Bond all metallic pathways, cabinets, and racks for telecommunications cabling and interconnecting hardware located within the same room or space as the



TMGB to the TMGB. In a metal frame (structural steel) building, where the steel framework is readily accessible within the room; bond each TMGB to the vertical steel metal frame using a minimum No. 6 AWG conductor. Where the metal frame is external to the room and readily accessible, bond the metal frame to the TGB or TMGB with a minimum No. 6 AWG conductor. When practicable because of shorter distances and, where horizontal steel members are permanently electrically bonded to vertical column members, the TGB may be bonded to these horizontal members in lieu of the vertical column members. All connectors used for bonding to the metal frame of a building must be listed for the intended purpose.

3.1.13 Equipment Connections

Provide power wiring for the connection of motors and control equipment under this section of the specification. Except as otherwise specifically noted or specified, automatic control wiring, control devices, and protective devices within the control circuitry are not included in this section of the specifications and are provided under the section specifying the associated equipment.

3.1.14 Government-Furnished Equipment

Contractor rough-in for Government-furnished equipment to make equipment operate as intended, including providing miscellaneous items such as plugs, receptacles, wire, cable, conduit, flexible conduit, and outlet boxes or fittings.

3.1.15 Repair of Existing Work

Perform repair of existing work, demolition, and modification of existing electrical distribution systems as follows:

3.1.15.1 Workmanship

Lay out work in advance. Exercise care where cutting, channeling, chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, or other surfaces is necessary for proper installation, support, or anchorage of conduit, raceways, or other electrical work. Repair damage to buildings, piping, and equipment using skilled craftsmen of trades involved.

3.1.15.2 Existing Concealed Wiring to be Removed

Disconnect existing concealed wiring to be removed from its source. Remove conductors; cut conduit flush with floor, underside of floor, and through walls; and seal openings.

3.1.15.3 Removal of Existing Electrical Distribution System

Removal of existing electrical distribution system equipment includes equipment's associated wiring, including conductors, cables, exposed conduit, surface metal raceways, boxes, and fittings, back to equipment's power source as indicated.

3.1.16 Surge Protective Devices

Connect the surge protective devices in parallel to the power source, keeping the conductors as short and straight as practically possible. Maximum allowed lead length is 3 feet.





3.3 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING

Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible side. Space the signs in accordance with NFPA 70E.


Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting: as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.


Furnish test equipment and personnel and submit written copies of test results. Give Contracting Officer 5 working days notice prior to each test.

3.5.1 Devices Subject to Manual Operation

Operate each device subject to manual operation at least five times, demonstrating satisfactory operation each time.

3.5.2 600-Volt Wiring Test

Test wiring rated 600 volt and less to verify that no short circuits or accidental grounds exist. Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring No. 6 AWG and larger diameter using instrument which applies voltage of approximately 500 volts to provide direct reading of resistance. Minimum resistance: 250,000 ohms.

3.5.3 Ground-Fault Receptacle Test

Test ground-fault receptacles with a "load" (such as a plug in light) to verify that the "line" and "load" leads are not reversed.

3.5.4 Grounding System Test

Test grounding system to ensure continuity, and that resistance to ground is not excessive. Test each ground rod for resistance to ground before making connections to rod; tie grounding system together and test for resistance to ground. Make resistance measurements in dry weather, not earlier than 48 hours after rainfall. Submit written results of each test to Contracting Officer, and indicate location of rods as well as resistance and soil conditions at time measurements were made.




SECTION 26 27 14.00 20

ELECTRICITY METERING02/11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




IEEE C37.90.1 (2012) Standard for Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus

IEEE C57.13 (2008; INT 2009) Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers

IEEE Stds Dictionary (2009) IEEE Standards Dictionary: Glossary of Terms & Definitions




ANSI C12.1 (2008) Electric Meters Code for Electricity Metering

ANSI C12.18 (2006) Protocol Specification for ANSI Type 2 Optical Port

ANSI C12.20 (2010) Electricity Meters - 0.2 and 0.5 Accuracy Classes

ANSI C12.7 (2005) Requirements for Watthour Meter Sockets

NEMA C12.19 (2008) Utility Industry End Device Data Tables



SECTION 26 27 14.00 20 Page 1


1.2 DEFINITIONS

Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in IEEE Stds Dictionary.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval.

Technical data packages consisting of technical data and computer software (meaning technical data which relates to computer software) which are specifically identified in this project and which may be defined/required in other specifications shall be delivered strictly in accordance with the CONTRACT CLAUSES and in accordance with the Contract Data Requirements List, DD Form 1423. Data delivered shall be identified by reference to the particular specification paragraph against which it is furnished. All submittals not specified as technical data packages are considered 'shop drawings' under the Federal Acquisition Regulation Supplement (FARS) and shall contain no proprietary information and be delivered with unrestricted rights.

Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, the CONTRACT CLAUSES and DD Form 1423:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Installation Drawings; G

SD-03 Product Data

Electricity meters; G

The most recent meter product data shall be submitted as a Technical Data Package and shall be licensed to the project site. Any software shall be submitted on CD-ROM and four hard copies of the software user manual shall be submitted for each piece of software provided.

Current transformer; G

External communications devices; G

Configuration Software; G

The most recent version of the configuration software for each type (manufacturer and model) shall be submitted as a Technical Data Package and shall be licensed to the project site. Software shall be submitted on CD-ROM and four hard copies of the software user manual shall be submitted for each piece of software provided.

SD-06 Test Reports

Acceptance checks and tests; G

System functional verification; G

SECTION 26 27 14.00 20 Page 2


Building meter installation sheet, per building; G

Completed meter installation schedule; G

Completed meter data schedule; G

Meter configuration template; G

Contractor shall fill in the meter configuration template and submit to the Activity for concurrence.

Meter configuration report; G

The meter configuration report shall be submitted as a Technical Data Package.


Electricity Meters and Accessories, Data Package 5; G

Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein.


System functional verification; G


1.4.1 Installation Drawings

Drawings shall be provided in hard-copy and electronic format, and shall include but not be limited to the following:

a. Wiring diagrams with terminals identified of kilowatt meter, current transformers, protocol modules, communications interfaces, Ethernet connections, .

b. One-line diagram, including meters, switch(es), current transformers, protocol modules, communications interfaces, Ethernet connections, and fuses.


Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 1 year prior to bid opening. The 1-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product, or an earlier release of the product, shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers catalogs, or brochures during the prior 1-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.

SECTION 26 27 14.00 20 Page 3


1.4.3 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Data

Products manufactured more than 1 year prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.

1.5 MAINTENANCE

1.5.1 Additions to Operation and Maintenance Data

In addition to requirements of Data Package 5, include the following on the actual electricity meters and accessories provided:

a. A condensed description of how the system operates

b. Block diagram indicating major assemblies

c. Troubleshooting information

d. Preventive maintenance

e. Prices for spare parts and supply list

1.6 WARRANTY

The equipment items and software shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment and software on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.


1.7.1 System Requirements

Electricity metering, consisting of meters and associated equipment, will be used to record the electricity consumption and other values as described in the requirements that follow and as shown on the drawings. Communication system requirements are contained in a separate specification section as identified in paragraph entitled "Communications Interfaces".

1.7.2 Selection Criteria

Metering components and software are part of a system that includes the physical meter, data recorder function and communications method. Every building site identified shall include sufficient metering components to measure the electrical parameters identified and to store and communicate the values as required.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRICITY METERS AND ACCESSORIES

2.1.1 Physical and Common Requirements

a. Provide metering system components in accordance with the Metering System Schedule shown in this specification. Provide Meter configuration template.

b. Meter shall have NEMA 3R stainless steel enclosure for surface mounting with bottom or rear penetrations.

SECTION 26 27 14.00 20 Page 4


c. Surge withstand capability shall conform to IEEE C37.90.1.

d. Use #12 SIS (XHHW, or equivalent) wiring with ring lugs for all meter connections. Color code and mark the conductors as follows:

(1) Red - Phase A CT - C1(2) Orange - Phase B CT - C2(3) Brown - Phase C CT - C3(4) Gray with white stripe - neutral current return - C0(5) Black - Phase A voltage - V1(6) Yellow - Phase B voltage - V2(7) Blue - Phase C voltage - V3(8) White - Neutral voltage

2.1.2 Current Transformer Requirements

a. Current transformer shall be installed with a rating as shown in the schedule.

b. Current transformers shall have an Accuracy Class of 0.3 (with a maximum error of plus/minus 0.3 percent at 5.0 amperes) when operating within the specified rating factor.

c. Current transformers shall be solid-core, bracket-mounted for new installations using ring-tongue lugs for electrical connections. Current transformers shall be accessible and the associated wiring shall be installed in an organized and neat workmanship arrangement. Current transformers that are retrofitted onto existing switchgear busbar can be a busbar split-core design.

d. Current transformers shall have:

(1) Insulation Class: All 600 volt and below current transformers shall be rated 10 KV BIL.

(2) Frequency: Nominal 60 Hz.

(3) Burden: Burden class shall be selected for the load.

(4) Phase Angle Range: 0 to 60 degrees.

e. Meter shall accept current input from standard instrument transformers (5A secondary current transformers).

f. Current inputs shall have a continuous rating in accordance with IEEE C57.13.

g. Provide one single-ratio current transformer for each phase per power transformer with characteristics listed in the following table.

Single-Ratio Current Transformer Characteristics

kVA Sec. Volt CT Ratio RF Meter Acc. Class

500 208Y/120 1200/5 1.33 0.3 thru B0.05

SECTION 26 27 14.00 20 Page 5


Single-Ratio Current Transformer Characteristics

kVA Sec. Volt CT Ratio RF Meter Acc. Class

2.1.3 Meter Requirements

Electricity meters shall include the following features:

a. Meter shall comply with ANSI C12.1, NEMA C12.19, and ANSI C12.20.

b. Meter sockets shall comply with ANSI C12.7.

c. Meter shall be a Class 20, transformer rated design.

d. Meter shall be rated for use at temperature from minus 40 degrees Centigrade to plus 70 degrees Centigrade.

e. The meters shall have an electronic demand recording register and shall be secondary reading as indicated. The register shall be used to indicate maximum kilowatt demand as well as cumulative or continuously cumulative demand. Demand shall be measured on a block-interval basis and shall be capable of a 5 to 60 minute interval and initially set to a 15-minute interval. It shall have provisions to be programmed to calculate demand on a rolling interval basis. Meter readings shall be true RMS.

f. The meter electronic register shall be of modular design with non-volatile data storage. Downloading meter stored data shall be capable via an optical port. Recording capability of data storage with a minimum capability of 89 days of 15 minute, 2 channel interval data. The meter shall be capable of providing at least 2 KYZ pulse outputs (dry contacts). Default initial configuration (unless identified otherwise by base personnel) shall be:

(1) First channel - kWh(2) Second channel - kVARh(3) KYZ output #1 - kWh(4) KYZ output #2 - kVARh

g. All meters shall have identical features available in accordance with this specification. The meter schedule identifies which features shall be activated at each meter location.

h. Enable switches for Time of Use (TOU), pulse and load profile measurement module at the factory.

i. Meter shall have an optical port on front of meter capable of speeds from 9600 to a minimum of 19.2k baud, and shall be initially set at 9600 baud. Optical device shall be compatible with ANSI C12.18.

j. Meters shall be 120-480 volts auto ranging.

k. Provide blank tag fixed to the meter faceplate for the addition of the meter multiplier, which will be the product of the current transformer ratio and will be filled in by base personnel on the job site. The meter's nameplate shall include:

SECTION 26 27 14.00 20 Page 6


(1) Meter ID number.(2) Rated voltage.(3) Current class.(4) Metering form.(5) Test amperes.(6) Frequency.(7) Catalog number.(8) Manufacturing date.

l. Meter covers shall be polycarbonate resins with an optical port and reset. Backup battery shall be easily accessible for change-out after removing the meter cover.

m. The normal billing data scroll shall be fully programmable. Data scroll display shall include the following.

(1) Number of demand resets.(2) End-of-interval indication.(3) Maximum demand.(4) New maximum demand indication.(5) Cumulative or continuously cumulative.(6) Time remaining in interval.(7) Kilowatt hours.

n. The register shall incorporate a built-in test mode that allows it to be tested without the loss of any data or parameters. The following quantities shall be available for display in the test mode:

(1) Present interval's accumulating demand.(2) Maximum demand.(3) Number of impulses being received by the register.

o. Pulse module simple I/O board with programmable ratio selection.

p. Meters shall be programmed after installation via an optical port. Optical display shall show TOU data, peak kWh, semi-peak kWh, off peak kWh, and phase angles.

q. Self-monitoring to provide for:

(1) Unprogrammed register.(2) RAM checksum error.(3) ROM checksum error.(4) Hardware failure.(5) Memory failure.(6) EPROM error.(7) Battery status (fault, condition, or time in service).

r. Liquid crystal alphanumeric displays, 9 digits, blinking squares confirm register operation. 6 Large digits for data and smaller digits for display identifier.

s. Display operations, programmable sequence with display identifiers. Display identifiers shall be selectable for each item. Continually sequence with time selectable for each item.

t. The meters shall support three modes of registers: Normal Mode, Alternate Mode, and Test Mode. The meter also shall support a

SECTION 26 27 14.00 20 Page 7


"Toolbox" or "Service Information" (accessible in the field) through an optocom port to a separate computer using the supplied software to allow access to instantaneous service information such as voltage, current, power factor, load demand, and the phase angle for individual phases.

u. Meter shall have a standard 4 -year warranty.

2.1.4 Disconnect Method

a. Provide a 10-pole safety disconnect complete with isolation devices for the voltage and current transformer inputs, including a shorting means for the current transformers.

2.1.5 Installation Methods

a. Transformer Mounted ("XFMR" in Metering Systems Schedule). Meter base shall be located outside on the secondary side of the pad-mounted transformer.

2.2 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACES

Meter shall have two-way communication capability and shall be BACnet compatible and shall interface with the direct digitial control system for HVAC as specified in section 23 09 23.13 20 "BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC".

2.3 SPARE PARTS

Provide the following spare parts:

a. Power Meter - two for each type used with batteries.

b. Communications interface - one for each type used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code), and to the requirements specified herein. Provide new equipment and materials unless indicated or specified otherwise.

3.1.1 Configuration Software

The standard meter shall include the latest available version of firmware and software. Meter shall either be programmed at the factory or shall be programmed in the field. Meters shall have a password that shall be provided to the contracting officer upon project completion. When field programming is performed, turn field programming device over to the Contracting Officer at completion of project. When interfacing software is used for a meter that is different than the existing meters in use at the Activity, turn the software over to the Contracting Officer at completion of the project.


Perform the following acceptance checks and tests on all installed meters.

SECTION 26 27 14.00 20 Page 8


3.2.1 Performance of Acceptance Checks and Tests

Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and include the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests, performed in accordance with NETA ATS.

a. Meter Assembly

(1) Visual and mechanical inspection.

(a) Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved shop drawings.

(b) Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Confirm the meter is firmly seated in the socket, the socket is not abnormally heated, the display is visible, and the ring and seal on the cover are intact.

(c) Inspect all electrical connections to ensure they are tight. For Class 200 services, verify tightness of the service conductor terminations for high resistance using low-resistance ohmmeter, or by verifying tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method.

(d) Record model number, serial number, firmware revision, software revision, and rated control voltage.

(e) Verify operation of display and indicating devices.

(f) Record password and user log-in for each meter.

(g) Verify grounding of metering enclosure.

(h) Set all required parameters including instrument transformer ratios, system type, frequency, power demand methods/intervals, and communications requirements. Verify that the CT ratio and the PT ratio are properly included in the meter multiplier or the programming of the meter. Confirm that the multiplier is provided on the meter face or on the meter.

(i) Provide building meter installation sheet, per building for each facility. See example Graphic E-S1.

(j) Provide the completed meter installation schedule for the installation. See example Graphic E-S2

(k) Provide the completed meter data schedule for the installation. See example Graphic E-S3.

(2) Electrical tests.

(a) Apply voltage or current as appropriate to each analog input and verify correct measurement and indication.

(b) Confirm correct operation and setting of each auxiliary input/output feature including mechanical relay, digital, and analog.

(c) After initial system energization, confirm measurements and

SECTION 26 27 14.00 20 Page 9


indications are consistent with loads present.

(d) Make note of, and report, any "Error-Code" or "Caution-Code" on the meter's display.

(3) Provide meter configuration report.

b. Current Transformers

(1) Visual and mechanical inspection.

(a) Compare equipment nameplate data with specification and approved shop drawings.

(b) Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

(c) Verify correct connection, including polarity.

(d) Inspect all electrical connections to ensure they are tight.

(e) Verify that required grounding and shorting connections provide good contact.

(2) Electrical Tests.

Verify proper operation by reviewing the meter configuration report.

3.2.2 System Functional Verification

Verify that the installed meters are working correctly in accordance with the meter configuration report:

a. The correct meter form is installed.

b. All voltage phases are present.

c. Phase rotation is correct.

d. Phase angles are correct.

e. The new meter accurately measures power magnitude and direction, and can communicate as required by paragraph entitled "Communications Interfaces".


SECTION 26 27 14.00 20 Page 10


SECTION 26 29 23

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEMS UNDER 600 VOLTS04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



IEEE 519 (1992; R 1993; Errata 2004) Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems

IEEE C62.41.1 (2002; R 2008) Guide on the Surges Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits


IEEE Std 519 (1992; Errata 2004) Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems



NEMA ICS 1 (2000; R 2008; E 2010) Standard for Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements

NEMA ICS 3.1 (2009) Guide for the Application, Handling, Storage, Installation and Maintenance of Medium-Voltage AC Contactors, Controllers and Control Centers


NEMA ICS 7 (2006) Adjustable-Speed Drives

NEMA MG 1 (2009; R 2010) Motors and Generators




MIL-STD-461 (2007; Rev F) Requirements for the Control



of Electromagnetic Interference Characteristics of Subsystems and Equipment


47 CFR 15 Radio Frequency Devices


UL 489 (2013) Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures

UL 508C (2002; Reprint Nov 2010) Power Conversion Equipment


Section 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS, and Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM apply to this section with additions and modifications specified herein.



1.3.1.1 Electromagnetic Interference Suppression

Computing devices, as defined by 47 CFR 15, MIL-STD-461 rules and regulations, shall be certified to comply with the requirements for class A computing devices and labeled as set forth in part 15.

1.3.1.2 Electromechanical and Electrical Components

Electrical and electromechanical components of the Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) shall not cause electromagnetic interference to adjacent electrical or electromechanical equipment while in operation.

1.3.2 Electrical Requirements

1.3.2.1 Power Line Surge Protection

IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, IEEE 519 Control panel shall have surge protection, included within the panel to protect the unit from damaging transient voltage surges. Surge arrestor shall be mounted near the incoming power source and properly wired to all three phases and ground. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection.

1.3.2.2 Sensor and Control Wiring Surge Protection

I/O functions as specified shall be protected against surges induced on control and sensor wiring installed outdoors and as shown. The inputs and outputs shall be tested in both normal mode and common mode using the following two waveforms:

a. A 10 microsecond by 1000 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 volts and a peak current of 60 amperes.

b. An 8 microsecond by 20 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1000



volts and a peak current of 500 amperes.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Schematic diagrams; G

Interconnecting diagrams; G

Installation drawings; G

Submit drawings for government approval prior to equipment construction or integration. Modifications to original drawings made during installation shall be immediately recorded for inclusion into the as-built drawings.

SD-03 Product Data

Variable frequency drives; G

Wires and cables

Equipment schedule

Include data indicating compatibility with motors being driven.

SD-06 Test Reports

VFD Test

Performance Verification Tests

Endurance Test


Installation instructions


VFD Factory Test Plan; G

Factory test results


Variable frequency drives, Data Package 4

Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. Provide service and maintenance information including preventive maintenance, assembly, and disassembly procedures. Include electrical drawings from electrical general sections. Submit additional information necessary to provide



complete operation, repair, and maintenance information, detailed to the smallest replaceable unit. Include copies of as-built submittals. Provide routine preventative maintenance instructions, and equipment required. Provide instructions on how to modify program settings, and modify the control program. Provide instructions on drive adjustment, trouble-shooting, and configuration. Provide instructions on process tuning and system calibration.


1.5.1 Schematic Diagrams

Show circuits and device elements for each replaceable module. Schematic diagrams of printed circuit boards are permitted to group functional assemblies as devices, provided that sufficient information is provided for government maintenance personnel to verify proper operation of the functional assemblies.

1.5.2 Interconnecting Diagrams

Show interconnections between equipment assemblies, and external interfaces, including power and signal conductors. Include for enclosures and external devices.


Show floor plan of each site, with V.F.D.'s and motors indicated. Indicate ventilation requirements, adequate clearances, and cable routes.

1.5.4 Equipment Schedule

Provide schedule of equipment supplied. Schedule shall provide a cross reference between manufacturer data and identifiers indicated in shop drawings. Schedule shall include the total quantity of each item of equipment supplied. For complete assemblies, such as VFD's, provide the serial numbers of each assembly, and a sub-schedule of components within the assembly. Provide recommended spare parts listing for each assembly or component.

1.5.5 Installation instructions

Provide installation instructions issued by the manufacturer of the equipment, including notes and recommendations, prior to shipment to the site. Provide operation instructions prior to acceptance testing.

1.5.6 Factory Test Results

Document test results and submit to government within 7 working days after completion of test.

1.6 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

Equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants.



1.7 WARRANTY

The complete system shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a period of one year, or the contracted period of any extended warrantee agreed upon by the contractor and the Government, after successful completion of the acceptance test. Any component failing to perform its function as specified and documented shall be repaired or replaced by the contractor at no additional cost to the Government. Items repaired or replaced shall be warranted for an additional period of at least one year from the date that it becomes functional again, as specified in the FAR CLAUSE 52.246-21.

1.8 MAINTENANCE

1.8.1 Spare Parts

Manufacturers provide spare parts in accordance with recommended spare parts list.

1.8.2 Maintenance Support

During the warranty period, the Contractor shall provide on-site, on-call maintenance services by Contractor's personnel on the following basis: The service shall be on a per-call basis with 36 hour response. Contractor shall support the maintenance of all hardware and software of the system. Various personnel of different expertise shall be sent on-site depending on the nature of the maintenance service required. Costs shall include travel, local transportation, living expenses, and labor rates of the service personnel while responding to the service request. The provisions of this Section are not in lieu of, nor relieve the Contractor of, warranty responsibilities covered in this specification. Should the result of the service request be the uncovering of a system defect covered under the warranty provisions, all costs for the call, including the labor necessary to identify the defect, shall be borne by the Contractor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD)

Provide frequency drive to control the speed of induction motor(s).All motors connected to VFD's shall be inverter duty rated and shall comply with NEMA MG 1 Part 31. The VFD shall include the following minimum functions, features and ratings.

a. Input circuit breaker per UL 489 with a minimum of interrupting capacity not less than the upstream overcurrent protective device and door interlocked external operator. Entire VFD assembly shall have a UL 508C short circuit rating to match the upstream overcurrent protective device. The assembly shall include the bypass contactor.

b. A converter stage per UL 508C shall change fixed voltage, fixed frequency, ac line power to a fixed dc voltage. The converter shall utilize a full wave bridge design incorporating diode rectifiers. Silicon Controlled Rectifiers (SCR) are not acceptable. The converter shall be insensitive to three phase rotation of the ac line and shall not cause displacement power factor of less than .95 lagging under any speed and load condition.

c. An inverter stage shall change fixed dc voltage to variable frequency, variable voltage, ac for application to a standard NEMA design B



squirrel cage motor. The inverter shall be switched in a manner to produce a sine coded pulse width modulated (PWM) output waveform.

d. The VFD shall be capable of supplying 120 percent of rated full load current for one minute at maximum ambient temperature.

e. The VFD shall be designed to operate from a 208 volt, plus or minus 10 percent, three phase, 60 Hz supply, and control motors with a corresponding voltage rating.

f. Acceleration and deceleration time shall be independently adjustable from one second to 60 seconds.

g. Adjustable full-time current limiting shall limit the current to a preset value which shall not exceed 120 percent of the controller rated current. The current limiting action shall maintain the V/Hz ratio constant so that variable torque can be maintained. Short time starting override shall allow starting current to reach 175 percent of controller rated current to maximum starting torque.

h. The controllers shall be capable of producing an output frequency over the range of 3 Hz to 60 Hz (20 to one speed range), without low speed cogging. Over frequency protection shall be included such that a failure in the controller electronic circuitry shall not cause frequency to exceed 110 percent of the maximum controller output frequency selected.

i. Minimum and maximum output frequency shall be adjustable over the following ranges: 1) Minimum frequency 3 Hz to 50 percent of maximum selected frequency; 2) Maximum frequency 40 Hz to 60 Hz.

j. The controller efficiency at any speed shall not be less than 96 percent.

k. The controllers shall be capable of being restarted into a motor coasting in the forward direction without tripping.

l. Protection of power semiconductor components shall be accomplished without the use of fast acting semiconductor output fuses. Subjecting the controllers to any of the following conditions shall not result in component failure or the need for fuse replacement:

1. Short circuit at controller output

2. Ground fault at controller output

3. Open circuit at controller output

4. Input undervoltage

5. Input overvoltage

6. Loss of input phase

7. AC line switching transients

8. Instantaneous overload

9. Sustained overload exceeding 115 percent of controller rated



current

10. Over temperature

11. Phase reversal

m. Solid state motor overload protection shall be included such that current exceeding an adjustable threshold shall activate a 60 second timing circuit. Should current remain above the threshold continuously for the timing period, the controller will automatically shut down.

n. A slip compensation circuit shall be included which will sense changing motor load conditions and adjust output frequency to provide speed regulation of NEMA B motors to within plus or minus 0.5 percent of maximum speed without the necessity of a tachometer generator.

o. The VFD shall be factory set for manual restart after the first protective circuit trip for malfunction (overcurrent,undervoltage, overvoltage or overtemperature) or an interruption of power. The VFD shall be capable of being set for automatic restart after a selected time delay. If the drive faults again within a specified time period (adjustable 0-60 seconds), a manual restart will be required.

p. The VFD shall include external fault reset capability. All the necessary logic to accept an external fault reset contact shall be included.

q. Provide critical speed lockout circuitry to prevent operating at frequencies with critical harmonics that cause resonant vibrations. The VFD shall have a minimum of three user selectable bandwidths.

r. Provide the following operator control and monitoring devices mounted on the front panel of the VFD:

1. Manual speed potentiometer.

2. Hand-Off-Auto ( HOA ) switch.

3. Power on light.

4. Drive run power light.

5. Local display.

s. Provide properly sized NEMA rated by-pass and isolation contactors to enable operation of motor in the event of VFD failure. Mechanical and electrical interlocks shall be installed between the by-pass and isolation contactors. Provide a selector switch and transfer delay timer.

2.2 2.6 HARMONIC MITIGATION

Perform a harmonic analysis on all VFD's provided by this project and provide harmonic mitigation as required to limit effects of harmonic currents as indicated. Each VFD shall be provided with a 3 percent input line reactor, minimum. Additional harmonic mitigation features shall be at no additional cost to the Government.



2.2.1 2.2.1 Line Reactor and Harmonic Filter

a. The VFD shall be of the clean power type. The VFD input rectifier section shall include an input ac line reactor for added harmonic filtering, a phase shifting transformer (as required by harmonic analysis), and diode bridge rectifier (as required by harmonic analysis), and a dc link reactor. All input rectifier section components including the input ac line reactor and the phase shifting transformer shall be factory mounted and wired within the confines of the VFD enclosure.

b. In accordance with IEEE Std 519, individual or simultaneous operation of VFD's shall not add more than 3 percent total harmonic voltage distortion while operating at full load and speed from the utility source or more than 5 percent while operating from a standby generator.

c. In accordance with IEEE Std 519, the maximum allowable total harmonic current demand distortion limits for each VFD operating at full load and speeds shall not exceed 5 percent as calculated and measured at the point of common coupling.

2.3 ENCLOSURES

Provide equipment enclosures conforming to NEMA 250, NEMA ICS 7, NEMA ICS 6.

2.4 WIRES AND CABLES

All wires and cables shall conform to NEMA 250, NEMA ICS 7, NFPA 70.

2.5 NAMEPLATES

Nameplates external to NEMA enclosures shall conform with the requirements of Section 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS. Nameplates internal to enclosures shall be manufacturer's standard, with the exception that they must be permanent.


2.6.1 VFD Factory Test Plan

To ensure quality, each VFD shall be subject to a series of in-plant quality control inspections before approval for shipment from the manufacturer's facilities. Provide test plans and test reports.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Per NEMA ICS 3.1, install equipment in accordance with the approved manufacturer's printed installation drawings, instructions, wiring diagrams, and as indicated on project drawings and the approved shop drawings. A field representative of the drive manufacturer shall supervise the installation of all equipment, and wiring.


Specified products shall be tested as a system for conformance to specification requirements prior to scheduling the acceptance tests.



Contractor shall conduct performance verification tests in the presence of Government representative, observing and documenting complete compliance of the system to the specifications. Contractor shall submit a signed copy of the test results, certifying proper system operation before scheduling tests.

3.2.1 VFD Test

A proposed test plan shall be submitted to the contracting officer at least 28 calendar days prior to proposed testing for approval. The tests shall conform to NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 7, and all manufacturer's safety regulations. The Government reserves the right to witness all tests and review any documentation. The contractor shall inform the Government at least 14 working days prior to the dates of testing. Contractor shall provide video tapes, if available, of all training provided to the Government for subsequent use in training new personnel. All training aids, texts, and expendable support material for a self-sufficient presentation shall be provided, the amount of which to be determined by the contracting officer.

3.2.2 Performance Verification Tests

"Performance Verification Test" plan shall provide the step by step procedure required to establish formal verification of the performance of the VFD. Compliance with the specification requirements shall be verified by inspections, review of critical data, demonstrations, and tests. The Government reserves the right to witness all tests, review data, and request other such additional inspections and repeat tests as necessary to ensure that the system and provided services conform to the stated requirements. The contractor shall inform the Government 14 calendar days prior to the date the test is to be conducted.

3.2.3 Endurance Test

Immediately upon completion of the performance verification test, the endurance test shall commence. The system shall be operated at varying rates for not less than 192 consecutive hours, at an average effectiveness level of .9998, to demonstrate proper functioning of the complete PCS. Continue the test on a day-to-day basis until performance standard is met. During the endurance test, the contractor shall not be allowed in the building. The system shall respond as designed.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION

3.3.1 Training

Coordinate training requirements with the Contracting Officer.

3.3.1.1 Instructions to Government Personnel

Provide the services of competent instructors who will give full instruction to designated personnel in operation, maintenance, calibration, configuration, and programming of the complete control system. Orient the training specifically to the system installed. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with the subject matter they are to teach. The Government personnel designated to attend the training will have a high school education or equivalent. The number of training days of instruction furnished shall be as specified. A training day is defined as eight hours of instruction, including two 15-minute breaks and excluding lunch time;



Monday through Friday. Provide a training manual for each student at each training phase which describes in detail the material included in each training program. Provide one additional copy for archiving. Provide equipment and materials required for classroom training. Provide a list of additional related courses, and offers, noting any courses recommended. List each training course individually by name, including duration, approximate cost per person, and location of course. Unused copies of training manuals shall be turned over to the Government at the end of last training session.

3.3.1.2 Operating Personnel Training Program

Provide one 2 hour training session at the site at a time and place mutually agreeable between the Contractor and the Government. Provide session to train 4 operation personnel in the functional operations of the system and the procedures that personnel will follow in system operation. This training shall include:

a. System overview

b. General theory of operation

c. System operation

d. Alarm formats

e. Failure recovery procedures

f. Troubleshooting

3.3.1.3 Engineering/Maintenance Personnel Training

Accomplish the training program as specified. Training shall be conducted on site at a location designated by the Government. Provide a one day training session to train 4 engineering personnel in the functional operations of the system. This training shall include:

a. System overview

b. General theory of operation

c. System operation

d. System configuration

e. Alarm formats

f. Failure recovery procedures

g. Troubleshooting and repair

h. Maintenance and calibration

i. System programming and configuration




SECTION 26 41 00

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM11/13

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES






NFPA 780 (2014) Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems



UL 96 (2005; Reprint Oct 2010) Standard for Lightning Protection Components

UL Electrical Constructn (2012) Electrical Construction Equipment Directory



Confirm all details of work, verify all dimensions in field, and advise Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing work. Obtain prior approval of Contracting Officer before making any departures from the design.

1.2.2 System Requirements

Provide a system furnished under this specification consisting of the latest UL Listed products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in production of lightning protection system components. Comply with NFPA 70, NFPA 780, and UL 96.

1.2.3 Lightning Protection System Installers Documentation

Provide documentation showing that the installer is certified with a commercial third-party inspection company whose sole work is lightning protection, or is a UL Listed Lightning Protection Installer. In either case, the documentation must show that they have completed and passed the



requirements for certification or listing, and have a minimum of 2 years documented experience installing lightning protection systems for DoD projects of similar scope and complexity.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval.. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with UFGS 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Overall lightning protection system; G

Each major component; G

SD-06 Test Reports

Lightning Protection and Grounding System Test Plan; G

Lightning Protection and Grounding System Test; G

SD-07 Certificates

Lightning Protection System Installers Documentation; G

Component UL Listed and Labeled; G

Lightning protection system inspection certificate; G

Roof manufacturer's warranty; G


In each standard referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word "shall" or "must" has been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these standards to "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean Contracting Officer.


1.4.1.1 Overall System Drawing

Submit installation shop drawing for the overall lightning protection system. Include on the drawings the physical layout of the equipment (plan view and elevations), mounting details, relationship to other parts of the work, and wiring diagrams.

1.4.1.2 Major Components

Submit detail drawings for each major component including manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts, and installation instructions.



1.4.2 Component UL Listed and Labeled

Submit proof of compliance that components are UL Listed and Labeled. Listing alone in UL Electrical Constructn, which is the UL Electrical Construction Directory, is not acceptable evidence. In lieu of Listed and Labeled, submit written certificate from an approved, nationally recognized testing organization equipped to perform such services, stating that items have been tested and conform to requirements and testing methods of Underwriters Laboratories.

1.4.3 Lightning Protection and Grounding System Test Plan

Provide a lightning protection and grounding system test plan. Detail both the visual inspection and electrical testing of the system and components in the test plan. Identify (number) the system test points/locations along with a listing or description of the item to be tested and the type of test to be conducted. As a minimum, include a sketch of the facility and surrounding lightning protection system as part of the specific test plan for each structure. Include the requirements specified in paragraph, "Testing of Integral Lightning Protection System" in the test plan.

1.4.4 Lightning Protection System Inspection Certificate

Provide certification from a commercial third-party inspection company whose sole work is lightning protection, stating that the lightning protection system complies with NFPA 780. Third party inspection company cannot be the system installer or the system designer. Alternatively, provide a UL Lightning Protection Inspection Master Label Certificate for each facility indicating compliance to NFPA 780.

Inspection must cover every connection, air terminal, conductor, fastener, accessible grounding point and other components of the lightning protection system to ensure 100% system compliance. This includes witnessing the tests for the resistance measurements for ground rods with test wells, and for continuity measurements for bonds. It also includes verification of proper surge protective devices for power, data and telecommunication systems. Random sampling or partial inspection of a facility is not acceptable.

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS

Confirm all details of work, verify all dimensions in field, and advise Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing work. Obtain prior approval of Contracting Officer before changing the design.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

Do not use a combination of materials that forms an electrolytic couple of such nature that corrosion is accelerated in the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from the junction of such metals. Where unusual conditions exist which would cause corrosion of conductors, provide conductors with protective coatings, such as tin or lead, or oversize conductors. Where a mechanical hazard is involved, increase conductor size to compensate for the hazard or protect conductors. When metallic conduit or tubing is provided, electrically bond conductor to conduit or tubing at the upper and lower ends by clamp type connectors or welds (including exothermic). All lightning protection components, such as



bonding plates, air terminals, air terminal supports and braces, chimney bands, clips, connector fittings, and fasteners are to comply with the requirements of UL 96 classes as applicable.

2.1.1 Main and Bonding Conductors

NFPA 780 and UL 96 Class I, Class II, or Class II modified materials as applicable.

2.2 COMPONENTS

2.2.1 Air Terminals

Provide solid air terminals with a blunt tip. Tubular air terminals are not permitted. Support air terminals more than 24 inches in length by suitable brace, supported at not less than one-half the height of the terminal.

2.2.2 Ground Rods

Provide ground rods made of copper-clad steel conforming to conform to UL 467. Provide ground rods that are not less than 3/4 inch in diameter and 10 feet in length. Do not mix ground rods of copper-clad steel or solid copper on the job.

2.2.3 Connections and Terminations

Provide connectors for splicing conductors that conform to UL 96, class as applicable. Conductor connections can be made by clamps or welds (including exothermic). Provide style and size connectors required for the installation.

2.2.4 Connector Fittings

Provide connector fittings for "end-to-end", "Tee", or "Y" splices that conform to NFPA 780 and UL 96.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INTEGRAL SYSTEM

Provide a lightning protection system that meets the requirements of NFPA 780. Lightning protection system consists of air terminals, roof conductors, down conductors, ground connections, and grounding electrodes and ground ring electrode conductor. Bond secondary conductors with grounded metallic parts within the building. Make interconnections within side-flash distances at or below the level of the grounded metallic parts.

3.1.1 Roof-Mounted Components

Coordinate with the roofing manufacturer and provide certification that the roof manufacturer's warranty is not violated by the installation methods for air terminals and roof conductors.

3.1.1.1 Air Terminals

Use adhesive shoes with adhesive approved by the roof manufacturer when installing air terminals on "rubber" (EPDM) type roofs.



3.1.1.2 Roof Conductors

Use adhesive shoes with adhesive approved by the roof manufacturer when installing roof conductors on "rubber" (EPDM) type roofs.

3.1.2 Down Conductors

Protect exposed down conductors from physical damage as required by NFPA 780. Use Schedule 80 PVC to protect down conductors. Paint the Schedule 80 PVC to match the surrounding surface with paint that is approved for use on PVC. Down conductors are to be concealed within the wall cavities.

3.1.3 Ground Connections

Attach each down conductor and ground ring electrode to ground rods by welding (including exothermic), brazing, or compression. All connections to ground rods below ground level must be by exothermic weld connection or with a high compression connection using a hydraulic or electric compression tool to provide the correct circumferential pressure. Accessible connections above ground level and in test wells can be accomplished by mechanical clamping.


Extend driven ground rods vertically into the existing undisturbed earth for a distance of not less 10 feet. Set ground rods not less than 3 feet nor more than 8 feet, from the structure foundation, and at least beyond the drip line for the facility. After the completed installation, measure the total resistance to ground using the fall-of-potential method described in IEEE 81. Maximum allowed resistance of a driven ground rod is 25 ohms, under normally dry conditions . Contact the Contracting Officer for direction on how to proceed when two of any three ground rods, driven not less than 10 feet into the ground, a minimum of 10 feet apart, and equally spaced around the perimeter, give a combined value exceeding 50 ohms immediately after having driven. For ground ring electrode, provide continuous No. 1/0 bare stranded copper cable. Lay ground ring electrode around the perimeter of the structure in a trench not less than 3 feet nor more than 8 feet from the nearest point of the structure foundation, and at least beyond the drip line for the facility. Install ground ring electrode to a minimum depth of 30 inches. Install a ground ring electrode in earth undisturbed by excavation, not earth fill, and do not locate beneath roof overhang, or wholly under paved areas or roadways where rainfall cannot penetrate to keep soil moist in the vicinity of the cable.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

3.2.1 Nonmetallic Exterior Walls with Metallic Roof

Bond metal roof sections together which are insulated from each other so that they are electrically continuous, having a surface contact of at least 3 square inches.

3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER STRUCTURES

3.4 RESTORATION

Where sod has been removed, place sod as soon as possible after completing the backfilling. Restore, to original condition, the areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Overfill to



accommodate for settling. Include necessary topsoil, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging or mulching in any restoration. Maintain disturbed surfaces and replacements until final acceptance.


3.5.1 Lightning Protection and Grounding System Test

Test the lightning protection and grounding system to ensure continuity is not in excess of 1 ohm and that resistance to ground is not in excess of 25 ohms. Provide documentation for the measured values at each test point. Test the ground rod for resistance to ground before making connections to the rod. Tie the grounding system together and test for resistance to ground. Make resistance measurements in dry weather, not earlier than 48 hours after rainfall. Include in the written report: locations of test points, measured values for continuity and ground resistances, and soil conditions at the time that measurements were made. Submit results of each test to the Contracting Officer.




SECTION 26 51 00.00 22

INTERIOR LIGHTING04/14

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM A580/A580M (2013b) Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire

ASTM A641/A641M (2009a) Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire


CALIFORNIA ENERGY COMMISSION (CEC)

CEC Title 24 (2008; Effective Jan 2010) California's Energy Efficiency Standards for Residential and Nonresidential Buildings

GREEN SEAL (GS)

GS-12 (1997) Occupancy Sensors

ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY OF NORTH AMERICA (IES)

IES HB-10 (2011) IES Lighting Handbook

IES LM-79 (2008) Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products

IES LM-80 (2008) Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources





IEEE C62.41.2 (2002) Recommended Practice on

SECTION 26 51 00.00 22 Page 1


Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits


NEMA ANSLG C78.377 (2011) American National Standard for Electric Lamps— Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products


NEMA ANSLG C82.11 (2011) Lamp Ballasts - High-Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts

NEMA C136.10 (2010) American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment-Locking-Type Photocontrol Devices and Mating Receptacles--Physical and Electrical Interchangeability and Testing

NEMA C82.77 (2002) Harmonic Emission Limits - Related Power Quality Requirements for Lighting Equipment



NEMA LL 1 (1997; R 2002) Procedures for Linear Fluorescent Lamp Sample Preparation and the TCLP Extraction


NFPA 101 (2012; Amendment 1 2012) Life Safety Code



Energy Star (1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy Efficiency Labeling System

U.S. FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC)

FCC Part 15 Radio Frequency Devices (47 CFR 15)


UL 1310 (2011; Reprint Oct 2013) UL Standard for Safety Class 2 Power Units

UL 1598 (2008; Reprint Oct 2012) Luminaires

SECTION 26 51 00.00 22 Page 2


UL 773 (1995; Reprint Mar 2002) Standard for Plug-In, Locking Type Photocontrols for Use with Area Lighting

UL 773A (2006; Reprint Nov 2013) Standard for Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for Lighting Control

UL 844 (2012) Standard for Luminaires for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations

UL 8750 (2009; Reprint Sep 2013) UL Standard for Safety Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products

UL 924 (2006; Reprint Feb 2011) Standard for Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment

UL 935 (2001; Reprint Nov 2011) Standard for Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts


Materials not considered to be lighting equipment or lighting fixture accessories are specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Lighting fixtures and accessories mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings are specified in this section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


b. Average life is the time after which 50 percent will have failed and 50 percent will have survived under normal conditions.

c. For LED luminaire light sources, "Useful Life" is the operating hours before reaching 70 percent of the initial rated lumen output (L70) with no catastrophic failures under normal operating conditions. This is also known as 70 percent "Rated Lumen Maintenance Life" as defined in IES LM-80.

d. Total harmonic distortion (THD) is the root mean square (RMS) of all the harmonic components divided by the total fundamental current.


1.4.1 Lighting Control System

Provide lighting control system as indicated. Lighting control equipment shall include, if indicated: control modules, power packs, dimming ballasts, occupancy sensors, and light level sensors.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control

SECTION 26 51 00.00 22 Page 3


approval. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

Data, drawings, and reports shall employ the terminology, classifications, and methods prescribed by the IES HB-10, as applicable, for the lighting system specified.


Photometric Plan; G

LED Luminaire Warranty; G

SD-02 Shop Drawings

LED Luminaire drawings; G

SD-03 Product Data

Fluorescent lighting fixtures; G

Fluorescent electronic ballasts; G

Fluorescent lamps; G

LED Luminaires; G

Lighting contactor; G

Time switch; G

Photocell; G

Exit signs; G

Emergency lighting equipment; G

Central emergency system; G

Occupancy sensors; G

Electronic dimming ballast; G

Dimming ballast controls; G

Local/Regional Materials

Documentation indicating distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. Indicate distance of raw material origin from the project site. Indicate relative dollar value of local/regional materials to total dollar value of products included in project.

Energy Efficiency

SD-05 Design Data

Design Data for luminaires; G

SECTION 26 51 00.00 22 Page 4


SD-06 Test Reports

LED Luminaire - IES LM-79 Test Report; G

LED Light Source - IES LM-80 Test Report; G

Operating test

Submit test results as stated in paragraph entitled "Field Quality Control."

SD-07 Certificates

Luminaire Useful Life Certificate; G

Submit certification from the manufacturer indicating the expected useful life of the luminaires provided. The useful life shall be directly correlated to the IES LM-80 test data, adjusted for the thermal properties of manufacturer's luminaire, and adjusted for local average ambient operating conditions.


Lighting Control System, Data Package 5; G

Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein, showing all light fixtures, control modules, control zones, occupancy sensors, light level sensors, power packs, dimming ballasts, schematic diagrams and all interconnecting control wire, conduit, and associated hardware.

Operational Service

Submit documentation that includes contact information, summary of procedures, and the limitations and conditions applicable to the project. Indicate manufacturer's commitment to reclaim materials for recycling and/or reuse.


1.6.1 Drawing Requirements

1.6.1.1 LED Luminaire Drawings

Include dimensions, accessories, and installation and construction details. Photometric data, including zonal lumen data, average and minimum ratio, and candlepower distribution data shall accompany shop drawings.

1.6.2 Design Data for Luminaires

a. Provide safety certification and file number for the luminaire family. Include listing, labeling and identification per NFPA 70 (NEC). Applicable testing bodies are determined by the US Occupational Safety Health Administration (OSHA) as Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories (NRTL) and include: CSA (Canadian Standards Association), ETL (Edison Testing Laboratory), and UL (Underwriters Laboratory).

SECTION 26 51 00.00 22 Page 5


1.6.3 Photometric Plan

For LED luminaires, provide computer-generated photometric analysis of the "designed to" values for the "end of useful life" of the luminaire installation using a light loss factor of 0.7. Submittal shall include the following:

a. Horizontal illuminance measurements at finished grade, taken at maximum of every 10 feet.

b. Vertical illuminance measurements at 5 feet above finished grade.

c. Minimum and maximum footcandle level.

d. Average maintained footcandle level.

e. Maximum to minimum ratio for horizontal illuminance only.

1.6.4 LED Luminaire - IES LM-79 Test Report

Submit test report on manufacturer's standard production model luminaire. Submittal shall include all photometric and electrical measurements, as well as all other pertinent data outlined under "14.0 Test Report" in IES LM-79.

1.6.5 LED Light Source - IES LM-80 Test Report

Submit report on manufacturer's standard production LED package, array, or module. Submittal shall include:

a. Testing agency, report number, date, type of equipment, and LED light source being tested.

b. All data required by IES LM-80.

1.6.5.1 Test Laboratories

Test laboratories for the IES LM-79 and IES LM-80 test reports shall be one of the following:

a. National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) accredited for solid-state lighting testing as part of the Energy-Efficient Lighting Products laboratory accreditation program.

b. One of the qualified labs listed on the Department of Energy - Energy Efficiency & Renewable Energy, Solid-State Lighting web site.

c. A manufacturer's in-house lab that meets the following criteria:

1. Manufacturer has been regularly engaged in the design and production of high intensity discharge roadway and area luminaires and the manufacturer's lab has been successfully certifying these fixtures for a minimum of 15 years.

2. Annual equipment calibration including photometer calibration in accordance with National Institute of Standards and Technology.

SECTION 26 51 00.00 22 Page 6


1.6.6 Fluorescent Electronic Ballasts

Submit ballast catalog data as required in the paragraph entitled "Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts" contained herein. As an option, submit the fluorescent fixture manufacturer's electronic ballast specification information in lieu of the actual ballast manufacturer's catalog data. This information shall include published specifications and sketches, which covers the information required by the paragraph entitled "Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts" herein. This information may be supplemented by catalog data if required, and shall contain a list of vendors with vendor part numbers.








Products manufactured more than 1 year prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.

1.6.8.3 Energy Efficiency

Comply with National Energy Policy Act and Energy Star requirements for lighting products. Submit data indicating lumens per watt efficiency and color rendition index of light source.

1.7 WARRANTY

The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render

SECTION 26 51 00.00 22 Page 7


satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

1.7.1 Electronic Ballast Warranty

Furnish the electronic ballast manufacturer's warranty. The warranty period shall not be less than 5 years from the date of manufacture of the electronic ballast. Ballast assembly in the lighting fixture, transportation, and on-site storage shall not exceed 12 months, thereby permitting 4 years of the ballast 5 year warranty to be in service and energized. The warranty shall state that the malfunctioning ballast shall be exchanged by the manufacturer and promptly shipped to the using Government facility. The replacement ballast shall be identical to, or an improvement upon, the original design of the malfunctioning ballast.

1.7.2 LED Luminaire Warranty

Provide Luminaire Useful Life Certificate.


a. Provide a written five year on-site replacement warranty for material, fixture finish, and workmanship. On-site replacement includes transportation, removal, and installation of new products.

1. Finish warranty shall include warranty against failure and against substantial deterioration such as blistering, cracking, peeling, chalking, or fading.

2. Material warranty shall include:

(a) All power supply units (drivers).

(b) Replacement when more than 10 percent of LED sources in any lightbar or subassembly(s) are defective or non-starting.

b. Warranty period must begin on date of beneficial occupancy. Contractor shall provide the Contracting Officer signed warranty certificates prior to final payment.

1.8 OPERATIONAL SERVICE

Coordinate with manufacturer for take-back program. Collect information from the manufacturer about maintenance agreement options, and submit to Contracting Officer. Services shall reclaim materials for recycling and/or reuse. Services shall not landfill or burn reclaimed materials. Indicate procedures for compliance with regulations governing disposal of mercury. When such a service is not available, local recyclers shall be sought after to reclaim the materials.



Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available

SECTION 26 51 00.00 22 Page 8


from a minimum of three sources.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES

UL 1598. Fluorescent fixtures shall have electronic ballasts .

2.1.1 Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts

The electronic ballast shall as a minimum meet the following characteristics:

a. Ballast shall comply with UL 935, NEMA ANSLG C82.11, NFPA 70, and CEC Title 24 unless specified otherwise. Ballast shall be 100 percent electronic high frequency type with no magnetic core and coil components. Ballast shall provide transient immunity as recommended by IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Ballast shall be designed for the wattage of the lamps used in the indicated application. Ballasts shall be designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are connected.

b. Power factor shall be 0.95 (minimum).

c. Ballast shall operate at a frequency of 20,000 Hertz (minimum). Ballast shall be compatible with and not cause interference with the operation of occupancy sensors or other infrared control systems. Provide ballasts operating at or above 40,000 Hertz where available.

d. Ballast shall have light regulation of plus or minus 10 percent lumen output with a plus or minus 10 percent input voltage regulation. Ballast shall have 10 percent flicker (maximum) using any compatible lamp.

e. Ballast factor shall be between 0.85 (minimum) and 1.00 (maximum). Current crest factor shall be 1.7 (maximum).

f. Ballast shall be UL listed Class P with a sound rating of "A."

g. Ballast shall have circuit diagrams and lamp connections displayed on the ballast.

h. Ballasts shall be programmed start unless otherwise indicated. Programmed start ballasts may operate lamps in a series circuit configuration. Provide series/parallel wiring for programmed start ballasts where available.

i. Ballasts for compact fluorescent fixtures shall be programmed start.

k. Ballast shall be capable of starting and maintaining operation at a minimum of 0 degrees F unless otherwise indicated.

l. Electronic ballast shall have a full replacement warranty of 5 years from date of manufacture as specified in paragraph entitled "Electronic Ballast Warranty" herein.

SECTION 26 51 00.00 22 Page 9


2.1.1.1 T-8 Lamp Ballast

a. Total harmonic distortion (THD): Shall be 10 percent (maximum).

b. Input wattage.

1. 62 watts (maximum) when operating two F32T8 lamps

2. 92 watts (maximum) when operating three F32T8 lamps

3. 114 watts (maximum) when operating four F32T8 lamps

c. Ballast efficacy factor.

1. 1.44 (minimum) when operating two F32T8 lamps

2. 0.93 (minimum) when operating three F32T8 lamps

3. 0.73 (minimum) when operating four F32T8 lamps

d. Provide three and four lamp fixtures with two ballasts per fixture where multilevel switching is indicated.

2.1.1.2 F17T8 Lamp Ballast

a. Total harmonic distortion (THD): Shall be 25 percent (maximum).

b. Input wattage:

1. 34 watts (maximum) when operating two F17T8 lamps.

2.1.2 Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Dimming Ballast

The electronic ballast shall as a minimum meet the following characteristics:

a. Ballast shall comply with NEMA ANSLG C82.11, UL 935, and NFPA 70, unless specified otherwise. Ballast shall provide transient immunity as recommended by IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Ballast dimming capability range shall be from 100 to 5 percent (minimum range) of light output, flicker free. Ballast shall start lamp at any preset light output setting without first having to go to full light output. Ballast shall be designed for the wattage of the lamps used in the indicated application. Ballasts shall be designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are connected.

b. Power factor shall be 0.95 (minimum) at full light output, and 0.90 (minimum) over the entire dimming range.

c. Ballast shall operate at a frequency of 20,000 Hertz (minimum). Ballast shall be compatible with and not cause interference with the operation of occupancy sensors or other infrared control systems. Provide ballasts operating at or above 40,000 Hertz where available.

d. Ballast factor at full light output shall be between 0.85 (minimum) and 1.00 (maximum). Current crest factor shall be 1.7 (maximum).

e. Ballast shall be UL listed Class P with a sound rating of "A".

SECTION 26 51 00.00 22 Page 10


f. Ballast shall have circuit diagrams and lamp connections displayed on the ballast.

g. Ballast shall be programmed start. Ballast may operate lamps in a series circuit configuration. Provide series/parallel wiring for programmed start ballasts where available.

h. Ballasts for compact fluorescent fixtures shall be programmed start.

i. Ballast shall be capable of starting and maintaining operation at a minimum of 0 degrees F unless otherwise indicated.

j. Total harmonic distortion (THD): Shall be 20 percent (maximum) over the entire dimming range.

2.1.2.1 T-8 Lamp Ballast

Input wattage, for indicated lamp quantity shall be:

a. 70 watts (maximum) when operating two F32T8 lamps.

b. 104 watts (maximum) when operating three F32T8 lamps.

c. 116 watts (maximum) when operating four F32T8 lamps2.1.3 Dimming Ballast Controls

The dimming ballast controls shall be a slide dimmer with on/off control. The slide dimmer shall be compatible with the ballast and control the ballast light output over the full dimming range. Dimming ballast controls shall be approved by the ballast manufacturer.

2.1.4 Fluorescent Lamps

a. T-8 rapid start low mercury lamps shall be rated 32 watts (maximum), 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI as indicated on the drawings, color temperature as indicated on the drawings, and an average rated life of 20,000 hours. Low mercury lamps shall have passed the EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leachate Procedure (TCLP) for mercury by using the lamp sample preparation procedure described in NEMA LL 1.

b. T-8 rapid start lamp, 17 watt (maximum), nominal length of 24 inches, 1300 initial lumens, CRI as indicated on the drawings, color temperature as indicated on the drawings, and an average rated life of 20,000 hours.

c. Compact fluorescent lamps shall be: CRI as indicated on the drawings, minimum, color temperature as indicated on the drawings, 10,000 hours average rated life, and as follows:

1. T-4, double twin tube, rated 13 watts, 900 initial lumens (minimum), 18 watts, 1200 initial lumens (minimum), and 26 watts, 1800 initial lumens (minimum).

Average rated life is based on 3 hours operating per start.

2.1.5 Compact Fluorescent Fixtures

Compact fluorescent fixtures shall be manufactured specifically for compact

SECTION 26 51 00.00 22 Page 11


fluorescent lamps with ballasts integral to the fixture. Providing assemblies designed to retrofit incandescent fixtures is prohibited except when specifically indicated for renovation of existing fixtures. Fixtures shall use lamps as indicated, with a minimum CRI of 80.

2.1.6 Open-Tube Fluorescent Fixtures

Provide with self-locking sockets, or lamp retainers (two per lamp).

2.2 LED LUMINAIRES

UL 1598, NEMA C82.77 and UL 8750. Provide luminaires as indicated in luminaire schedule and plates or details on project plans. Provide luminaires complete with light sources of quantity, type, and wattage indicated. All luminaires of the same type shall be provided by the same manufacturer. Details, shapes, and dimensions are indicative of the general type desired, but are not intended to restrict selection to luminaires of a particular manufacturer. Luminaires of similar designs, light distribution and brightness characteristics, and of equal finish and quality will be acceptable as approved.


a. LED luminaire housings shall be die cast or extruded aluminum.

b. LED luminaires shall be rated for operation within an ambient temperature range of minus 22 degrees F to 104 degrees F.

c. LED luminaires shall produce a minimum efficacy of 60 lumens per watt driven at a maximum 600 mA, tested per IES LM-79. Theoretical models of initial raw LED lumens per watt are not acceptable.

d. Luminaires shall have IES distribution and NEMA field angle classifications as indicated in luminaire schedule on project plans per IES HB-10.

e. Housing finish shall be baked-on enamel, anodized, or baked-on powder coat paint. Finish shall be capable of surviving ASTM B117 salt fog environment testing for 2500 hours minimum without blistering or peeling.

f. Luminaires shall be fully assembled and electrically tested prior to shipment from factory.

g. The finish color shall be as indicated in the luminaire schedule or detail on the project plans.

h. Luminaire lenses shall be constructed of tempered glass or UV-resistant acrylic.

i. Incorporate modular electrical connections, and construct luminaires to allow replacement of all or any part of the optics, heat sinks, power supply units, ballasts, surge suppressors and other electrical components using only a simple tool, such as a manual or cordless electric screwdriver.

j. Luminaires shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name,

SECTION 26 51 00.00 22 Page 12


address, model number, date of manufacture, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place. The nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

k. All factory electrical connections shall be made using crimp, locking, or latching style connectors. Twist-style wire nuts are not acceptable.

2.2.2 LED Light Sources

a. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) shall be in accordance with NEMA ANSLG C78.377:

Nominal CCT: 4000 degrees K: 3985 plus or minus 275 degrees K

b. Color Rendering Index (CRI) shall be:

Greater than or equal to 80.

c. Color Consistancy:

Manufacturer shall utilize a maximum 4-step MacAdam ellipse binning tolerance for color consistancy of LEDs used in luminaires.

2.2.3 LED Power Supply Units (Drivers)

UL 1310. LED Power Supply Units shall meet the following requirements:

a. Minimum efficiency shall be 85 percent.

b. Drive current per LED shall not exceed 600 mA, plus or minus 10 percent.

c. Shall be rated to operate between ambient temperatures of minus 22 degrees F and 104 degrees F.

d. Shall be designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are connected, typically ranging from 120 V to 480 V nominal.

e. Operating frequency shall be: 50 or 60 Hz.

f. Power Factor (PF) shall be greater than or equal to 0.90.

g. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) current shall be less than or equal to 20 percent.

h. Shall meet requirements of FCC Part 15 (47 CFR 15), Class B.

i. Shall be RoHS-compliant.

j. Shall be mounted integral to luminaire. Remote mounting of power supply is not allowed.

k. Power supplies in luminaires shall be UL listed with a sound rating of A.

l. Shall be equipped with over-temperature protection circuit that turns light source off until normal operating temperature is achieved.

SECTION 26 51 00.00 22 Page 13


2.2.4 Surge Protection

Provide surge protection integral to luminaire to meet "C Low" waveforms as defined in IEEE C62.41.2, Scenario 1 Location Category C.

2.3 RECESS- AND FLUSH-MOUNTED FIXTURES

Provide type that can be relamped from the bottom. Access to ballast shall be from the bottom. Trim for the exposed surface of flush-mounted fixtures shall be as indicated.

2.4 SUSPENDED FIXTURES

Provide hangers capable of supporting twice the combined weight of fixtures supported by hangers. Provide with swivel hangers to ensure a plumb installation. Hangers shall be cadmium-plated steel with a swivel-ball tapped for the conduit size indicated. Hangers shall allow fixtures to swing within an angle of 45 degrees. Brace pendants 4 feet or longer to limit swinging. Single-unit suspended fluorescent fixtures shall have twin-stem hangers. Multiple-unit or continuous row fluorescent fixtures shall have a tubing or stem for wiring at one point and a tubing or rod suspension provided for each unit length of chassis, including one at each end. Rods shall be a minimum 0.18 inch diameter.

2.5 FIXTURES FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS

In addition to requirements stated herein, provide fluorescent fixtures for hazardous locations which conform to UL 844 or which have Factory Mutual certification for the class and division indicated.

2.6 SWITCHES

2.6.1 Toggle Switches

Provide toggle switches as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

2.7 LIGHTING CONTACTOR

NEMA ICS 2. Provide a mechanically-held lighting contactor housed in a NEMA 1 enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6. Contactor shall have 4 poles, configured as normally open (NO). Contacts shall be rated 120 volts, 20 amperes for a resistive load. Coil operating voltage shall be 120 volts. Contactor shall have silver cadmium oxide double-break contacts and coil clearing contacts for mechanically held contactors and shall require no arcing contacts. Provide contactor with hand-off-automatic selector switch. Provide contactor as specified above along with an integral NEMA 1 enclosure with flange-mounted handle to satisfy requirement for a "combination lighting contactor" when specified.

2.8 TIME SWITCH

Provide Four channel electronic time control. The control shall have 24 hour, 7 day, 365 day or astronomic capability with 128 events available. It shall also have 4 user-definable durations and duty cycle lengths plus automatic daylight saving time and leap year adjustments. Control shall have remote override capabilities (timed, toggle, momentary contact, or enable type). Control shall have keyboard override until overridden again or until next event is reached. It shall be capable of switching loads

SECTION 26 51 00.00 22 Page 14


based on user-definable temperature and light levels with 32 events available. Control shall have momentary (latching relay) capability and shall have astronomic features plus 30 definable holidays and 6 pre-programmed holidays. Control shall provide 2 days of power outage carry-over without a battery. Control shall provide 10 years of power outage protection with a battery. The digital time display shall be 3.4 inches in height. Clock format shall be selectable, allowing a choice of 12 hour (AM/PM) or 24 hour format. Control shall be capable of interfacing (sending and receiving data) with a personal computer. Control shall be housed in a NEMA 1, lockable steel enclosure, to guard against vandalism or tampering. Contacts shall be rated for 120-277VAC, 20A.

2.9 PHOTOCELL

UL 773 or UL 773A. Photocells shall be hermetically sealed, silicon diode light sensor type, rated at 2000 watts, 120 volts, 50/60 Hz with single-pole, single-throw contacts. Photocell shall be designed to fail to the ON position. Housing shall be constructed of UV stabilized polypropylene, rated to operate within a temperature range of minus 40 to 158 degrees F. Photocell shall have a 1/2 in threaded base for mounting to a junction box or conduit. Provide swivel base type housing. Photocell shall be twist-lock receptacle type conforming to NEMA C136.10. Provide with solid brass prongs and voltage markings and color coding on exterior of housing. Photocell shall turn on at 1-3 footcandles and turn off at 3 to 15 footcandles. A time delay shall prevent accidental switching from transient light sources. Provide a directional lens in front of the cell to prevent fixed light sources from creating a turnoff condition.

2.10 EXIT SIGNS

UL 924, NFPA 70, and NFPA 101. Exit signs shall be self-powered type. Exit signs shall use no more than 5 watts.

2.10.1 Self-Powered LED Type Exit Signs (Battery Backup)

Provide with automatic power failure device, test switch, pilot light, and fully automatic high/low trickle charger in a self-contained power pack. Battery shall be sealed electrolyte type, shall operate unattended, and require no maintenance, including no additional water, for a period of not less than 5 years. LED exit sign shall have emergency run time of 1 1/2 hours (minimum). The light emitting diodes shall have rated lamp life of 70,000 hours (minimum).

2.10.2 Remote-Powered Exit Signs

Provide remote ac/dc exit signs with provisions for wiring to external ac and dc power sources. Provide signs with a minimum of two ac lamps for normal illumination and a minimum of two dc lamps for emergency lighting.

2.11 EMERGENCY LIGHTING EQUIPMENT

UL 924, NFPA 70, and NFPA 101. Provide lamps in wattage indicated.

2.11.1 Emergency Lighting Unit

Provide as indicated.

SECTION 26 51 00.00 22 Page 15


2.11.2 Fluorescent Emergency System

Each system shall consist of an automatic power failure device, test switch operable from outside of the fixture, pilot light visible from outside the fixture, and fully automatic solid-state charger in a self-contained power pack. Charger shall be either trickle, float, constant current or constant potential type, or a combination of these. Battery shall be sealed electrolyte type with capacity as required to supply power to the number of lamps shown for each system for 90 minutes at a minimum of 1100 lumens per lamp output. Battery shall operate unattended and require no maintenance, including no additional water, for a period of not less than 5 years. Emergency ballasts provided with fixtures containing solid-state ballasts shall be fully compatible with the solid-state ballasts.

2.12 CENTRAL EMERGENCY SYSTEM

Each system shall supply 1500 VA of emergency power at 120 volts, 60 Hz sine wave ac for a minimum period of 90 minutes. Sine wave ac system shall have an inverter output distortion of not more than 10 percent at unity power factor. The system shall be designed to handle surges during loss and recovery of power.

2.12.1 Operation

With normal power applied, batteries shall be automatically charged. Upon loss of normal power, system shall automatically disengage from the normal input line and switch to a self-contained inverter within 1 second when serving incandescent and fluorescent lamps. Inverter shall have built-in protection when output is shorted or overloaded. When normal power resumes, the emergency system shall automatically switch back to normal operation before the power loss. Size transfer switch for this function to handle 125 percent of full load.

2.12.2 Battery Charger

Provide two-rate charger for lead-calcium batteries. The charger shall be solid-state, completely automatic, maintaining the batteries in a fully charged condition, and recharging the batteries to full capacity as specified in UL 924.

2.12.3 Batteries

Batteries shall be sealed lead-calcium type, shall operate unattended, and shall require no maintenance, including no additional water, for a period of not less than 10 years.

2.12.4 Accessories

Provide visual indicators to indicate normal power, inverter power, and battery charger operation. Provide test switch to simulate power failure by interrupting the input line, automatic brown-out circuitry to switch to emergency power when input line voltage drops below 75 percent of normal value, and low voltage cutoff (LVD) to disconnect inverter when battery voltage drops to approximately 80 percent of nominal voltage.

2.13 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

UL listed. Comply with GS-12. Occupancy sensors and power packs shall be designed to operate on the voltage indicated. Sensors and power packs

SECTION 26 51 00.00 22 Page 16


shall have circuitry that only allows load switching at or near zero current crossing of supply voltage. Occupancy sensor mounting as indicated. Sensor shall have an LED occupant detection indicator. Sensor shall have adjustable sensitivity and adjustable delayed-off time range of 5 minutes to 15 minutes. Wall mounted sensors shall be ivory, ceiling mounted sensors shall be white. Ceiling mounted sensors shall have 360 degree coverage unless otherwise indicated.

a. Ultrasonic/Infrared Combination Sensor

Occupancy detection to turn lights on requires both ultrasonic and infrared sensor detection. Lights shall remain on if either the ultrasonic or infrared sensor detects movement. Infrared sensor shall have lens selected for indicated usage and daylight filter to prevent short wavelength infrared interference. Ultrasonic sensor frequency shall be crystal controlled.

2.14 SUPPORT HANGERS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES IN SUSPENDED CEILINGS

2.14.1 Wires

ASTM A641/A641M, galvanized regular coating, soft temper, 0.1055 inches in diameter (12 gage).

2.14.2 Wires, for Humid Spaces

ASTM A580/A580M, composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel 0.1055 inches in diameter (12 gage).

2.15 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION



2.15.2 Labels

Provide labeled luminaires in accordance with UL 1598 requirements. All luminaires shall be clearly marked for operation of specific light sources and ballasts according to proper lamp type. The following lamp characteristics shall be noted in the format "Use Only _____":

a. Light source tube diameter code (e.g. T-4, T-5, T-8), tube quantity configuration (e.g. twin, quad, triple), base type (e.g. G24q-2, GX 24 q-4), and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

b. Start type (e.g. programmed-start, rapid-start, instant-start) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

c. Correlated color temperature (CCT) and color rendering index (CRI) for all luminaires.

All markings related to lamp type shall be clear and located to be readily visible to service personnel, but unseen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

SECTION 26 51 00.00 22 Page 17



Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and to the requirements specified herein.

3.1.1 Lamps

Lamps of the type, wattage, and voltage rating indicated shall be delivered to the project in the original cartons and installed just prior to project completion. Lamps installed and used for working light during construction shall be replaced prior to turnover to the Government if more than 15 percent of their rated life has been used. Lamps shall be tested for proper operation prior to turn-over and shall be replaced if necessary with new lamps from the original manufacturer. Provide 10 percent spare lamps of each type from the original manufacturer.

3.1.2 Lighting Fixtures

Set lighting fixtures plumb, square, and level with ceiling and walls, in alignment with adjacent lighting fixtures, and secure in accordance with manufacturers' directions and approved drawings. Installation shall meet requirements of NFPA 70. Mounting heights specified or indicated shall be to the bottom of fixture for ceiling-mounted fixtures and to center of fixture for wall-mounted fixtures. Obtain approval of the exact mounting for lighting fixtures on the job before commencing installation and, where applicable, after coordinating with the type, style, and pattern of the ceiling being installed. Recessed and semi-recessed fixtures shall be independently supported from the building structure by a minimum of four wires per fixture and located near each corner of each fixture. Ceiling grid clips are not allowed as an alternative to independently supported light fixtures. Round fixtures or fixtures smaller in size than the ceiling grid shall be independently supported from the building structure by a minimum of four wires per fixture spaced approximately equidistant around the fixture. Do not support fixtures by ceiling acoustical panels. Where fixtures of sizes less than the ceiling grid are indicated to be centered in the acoustical panel, support such fixtures independently and provide at least two 3/4 inch metal channels spanning, and secured to, the ceiling tees for centering and aligning the fixture. Provide wires for lighting fixture support in this section. Lighting fixtures installed in suspended ceilings shall also comply with the requirements of Section 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS.

3.1.3 Suspended Fixtures

Suspended fixtures shall be provided with 45 degree swivel hangers so that they hang plumb and shall be located with no obstructions within the 45 degree range in all directions. The stem, canopy and fixture shall be capable of 45 degree swing. Pendants, rods, or chains 4 feet or longer excluding fixture shall be braced to prevent swaying using three cables at 120 degree separation. Suspended fixtures in continuous rows shall have

SECTION 26 51 00.00 22 Page 18


internal wireway systems for end to end wiring and shall be properly aligned to provide a straight and continuous row without bends, gaps, light leaks or filler pieces. Aligning splines shall be used on extruded aluminum fixtures to assure hairline joints. Steel fixtures shall be supported to prevent "oil-canning" effects. Fixture finishes shall be free of scratches, nicks, dents, and warps, and shall match the color and gloss specified. Pendants shall be finished to match fixtures. Aircraft cable shall be stainless steel. Canopies shall be finished to match the ceiling and shall be low profile unless otherwise shown. Maximum distance between suspension points shall be 10 feet or as recommended by the manufacturer, whichever is less.

3.1.4 Ballasts

3.1.4.1 Electronic Dimming Ballasts

All electronic dimming ballasts controlled by the same controller shall be of the same manufacturer. All fluorescent lamps on electronic dimming ballast control shall be seasoned or burned in at full light output for 100 hours before dimming.

3.1.5 Exit Signs and Emergency Lighting Units

Wire exit signs and emergency lighting units ahead of the switch to the normal lighting circuit located in the same room or area.

3.1.5.1 Exit Signs

Wire exit signs on separate circuits and serve from a separate breaker. Signs shall have only one control, which shall be the separate breaker. Paint control device red and provide lockout.

3.1.5.2 Emergency Lighting from Central Emergency System

Wire emergency lighting powered from a central emergency system as indicated on the drawings.

3.1.6 Photocell Switch Aiming

Aim switch according to manufacturer's recommendations. Set adjustable window slide for 10 footcandles photocell turn-on.

3.1.7 Occupancy Sensor

Provide quantity of sensor units indicated as a minimum. Provide additional units to give full coverage over controlled area. Full coverage shall provide hand and arm motion detection for office and administration type areas and walking motion for industrial areas, warehouses, storage rooms and hallways. Locate the sensor(s) as indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to maximize energy savings and to avoid nuisance activation and deactivation due to sudden temperature or airflow changes and usage. Set sensor "on" duration to 15 minutes.


Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

SECTION 26 51 00.00 22 Page 19



Upon completion of installation, verify that equipment is properly installed, connected, and adjusted. Conduct an operating test to show that equipment operates in accordance with requirements of this section.

3.3.1 Electronic Dimming Ballast

Test for full range of dimming capability. Observe for visually detectable flicker over full dimming range.

3.3.2 Occupancy Sensor

Test sensors for proper operation. Observe for light control over entire area being covered.


SECTION 26 51 00.00 22 Page 20


SECTION 26 55 80.00 20

SURGICAL LIGHTING FIXTURES04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM E308 (2013) Computing the Colors of Objects by Using the CIE System


NEMA ST 20 (1992; R 1997) Standard for Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications




UL 544 (1998; R 1999) Standard for Medical and Dental Equipment


Section 11 70 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MEDICAL AND DENTAL EQUIPMENT, Section 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS, Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, apply to this section with the additions and modifications specified herein.

1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

1.3.1 Lighthead Illumination Level

Lighthead shall produce a minimum of 5,000 footcandles of illumination when measured at 24 inches from the face of the light and 3,400 footcandles of illumination when measured at 36" from the face of the light.

1.3.2 Color Temperature

Correlated color of the lightbeam shall be between 4,200 degrees Kelvin after filtration, as measured on the ASTM E308 chromaticity diagram. Color rendering index shall be greater than 88.

1.3.3 Shadow Reduction

Lighting system shall provide a minimum level of 10 percent of the unshadowed level when measured inside and at the bottom of a tube 2 inch in

SECTION 26 55 80.00 20 Page 1


diameter, and 3 inch long, from a distance of 42 inches when the beam is obstructed by a disk 10 inch in diameter, 23 inches above the operating table, and normal to the axis of the tube. Paint inside of tube with flat black.

1.3.4 Beam Temperature

Radiant heat energy in the light beam 42 inches below the lighthead shall not exceed 25,000 microwatts per square centimeter at maximum intensity in the light pattern.

1.3.5 Pattern Size

Smallest pattern size in the focal range shall be a minimum of 8 inches. Pattern size shall be adjustable by either raising and lowering the unit or through operation of a focus control which changes the pattern size without movement of the unit.

1.3.6 Current Leakage

A maximum of 0.1 milliampere, as measured between the metal parts and ground.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Installation drawings; G

SD-03 Product Data

Light fixtures; G

Controls; G

Surgical Light Transformer; G

SD-07 Certificates

Installation report

Design requirements

Certify that the equipment has been properly installed, adjusted, and tested, and that each surgical light fixture meets the provisions of the paragraph entitled "Design Requirements."


Light fixtures, Data Package 5


SECTION 26 55 80.00 20 Page 2



1.5.1 Installation drawings

Submit shop drawing for each specified lighting fixture to include the following:

a. Mounting detail for the lighting fixture, transformer and control assembly.

b. Wiring diagrams indicating the internal wiring for each item of equipment, the interconnections between the items of equipment and connections to normal and emergency power in the building. Manufacturer's catalog data may be submitted for internal wiring description.


Package each lighting fixture and protect in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 LIGHT FIXTURES

2.1.1 Two Lightheads, Item U0014

Two lightheads, ceiling mounted on a dual extension arm assembly. One lighthead mounted on the shorter arm and the other lighthead mounted on the longer arm to enable the outer lighthead to pass by the inner lighthead without interference. Outer lighthead shall rotate within a clearance circle of 58.2 inches and the lighthead center describes a circle 49.5 inches when fully extended. Center of the lighthead shall be adjustable vertically from 53 inches to 78 inches above the floor.

2.1.2 Components

UL 544; The surgical lighting fixtures shall be specifically design for use in surgical operating rooms.

2.1.3 Electrical Characteristics

120 volts, 60 Hz, single-phase, three-wire grounded circuits.

2.1.4 Lamp

Quartz halogen enclosed by heat-absorbing filter. Lamp shall be color corrected and heat filtered and shall have a minimum lifespan of 500 hours. Furnish one spare lamp with each lighthead.

2.1.5 Suspension Systems

Mount each lighthead on a counterbalanced arm that can rotate 360 degrees horizontally and can provide both vertical and horizontal adjustments. Fixture shall be controllable from both inside and outside the sterile field and shall move in a free, smooth, and silent manner throughout its range of maneuverability without drifting, regardless of position. In systems with multiple arms attached to the same mount, each individual arm and lighthead shall operate independently and shall be mounted so that each

SECTION 26 55 80.00 20 Page 3


individual arm and lighthead can be positioned outside the sterile area, can bypass each other and be raised, and can be lowered and rotated.

2.2 CONTROLS

Recessed mounted. Include circuit breaker, an on/off switch located outside the sterile field, and a pilot light. Controls shall have a continuously variable intensity control range from the maximum footcandle rating of the lighting fixture to a minimum of 60 percent of the maximum footcandle rating of the lighting fixture. Include a radio frequency suppressor. Provide time-of-use meter to determine when to replace the lamp. Provide control units with electrical plug connections designed to allow eased of service or replacement.

2.3 SURGICAL LIGHT TRANSFORMER

NEMA ST 20, 250 VA, 120 V, 60 Hz primary, 22.8 V - 24 V, 60 Hz secondary.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Section 11 70 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MEDICAL AND DENTAL EQUIPMENT, and NFPA 70. Install lighthead in accordance with the approved installation drawings and submit installation report for each lighthead.

3.1.1 Wiring Methods

Provide conduit and wiring in accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

3.1.1.1 Outlet Box

Provide three-gang outlet box 3 inches depth for recessed mounted intensity control. Install box 5 feet from finished floor to center line of box.

3.1.2 Surgical Light Transformer

Provide mounting bracket for the transformer. Mount transformer on the wall, 5 feet, minimum, from finished floor.


3.2.1 Inspection

Examine each item visually for conformance to the requirements of this section.

3.2.2 Tests

Upon completion of installation, conduct an operating test to demonstrate that each surgical lighting fixture meets the requirements of this section.


SECTION 26 55 80.00 20 Page 4


SECTION 27 08 01.00 50

COMMISSIONING OF COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS01/14

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



LEED (v3/2009) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design(tm) Green Building Rating System for New Construction (LEED-NC)

1.2 SUMMARY



Requirements for commissioning the communication systems, sub-systems and equipment. This Section supplements the general requirements specified in Section 01 91 13.00 50 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS.

1.2.2 Commissioning Activities

a. The commissioning activities have been developed to support the United States Green Building Council (USGBC) LEED™ rating program and to support delivery of project performance in accordance with the Contract Documents.

(1) Commissioning activities and documentation for the LEED™ section on "Energy and Atmosphere" prerequisite of "Fundamental Building Systems Commissioning".(2) Commissioning activities and documentation for the LEED™ section on "Energy and Atmosphere" requirements for the "Enhanced Building System Commissioning" credit. (3) Activities and documentation for the LEED™ section on "Measurement and Verification" requirements for the Measurement and Verification credit.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


SECTION 27 08 01.00 50 Page 1



a. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in this Division 27 is part of the construction process. Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of the User's Maintenance personnel, is required in cooperation with the Contracting Officer and and the Commissioning Agent.

b. The following Communication systems will be commissioned:

(1) Facility telecommunications and data distribution systems.

(2) Public Address systems (Amplifiers and head-end hardware, speaker volume, and background noise - i.e. hiss or similar interference).

(3) Nurse Call System.

1.5 SUBMITTALS




PART 3 EXECUTION


The Contractor shall complete Systems Readiness Checklists to verify systems, sub-systems, and equipment installation is complete and systems are ready for Systems Functional Testing. The Commissioning Agent will prepare Systems Readiness Checklists to be used to document equipment installation. The Contractor shall complete the checklists. Completed checklists shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer and to the Commissioning Agent for review. The Commissioning Agent may spot-check a sample of completed checklists. If the Commissioning Agent determines that the information provided on the checklist is not accurate, the Commissioning Agent will return the marked-up checklist to the Contractor for correction and re-submission. If the Commissioning Agent determines that a significant number of completed checklists for similar equipment are not accurate, the Commissioning Agent will select a broader sample of checklists for review. If the Commissioning Agent determines that a significant number of the broader sample of checklists is also inaccurate, all the checklists for the type of equipment will be returned to the Contractor for correction and re-submission. Refer to Section 01 91 13.00 50 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for submittal requirements for System Readiness Checklists, Equipment Startup Reports, and other commissioning documents.

SECTION 27 08 01.00 50 Page 2





The Commissioning Process includes Systems Functional Performance Testing that is intended to test systems functional performance under steady state conditions, to test system reaction to changes in operating conditions, and system performance under emergency conditions. The Commissioning Agent will prepare detailed Systems Functional Performance Test procedures for review and approval by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall review and comment on the tests prior to approval. The Contractor shall provide the required labor, materials, and test equipment identified in the test procedure to perform the tests. The Commissioning Agent will direct and document the testing. The Contractor shall sign the test reports to verify tests were performed.


Training of the User's operation and maintenance personnel is required in cooperation with the Contracting Officer and Commissioning Agent. Provide competent, factory authorized personnel to provide instruction to operation and maintenance personnel concerning the location, operation, and troubleshooting of the installed systems. The instruction shall be scheduled in coordination with the Contracting Officer after submission and approval of formal training plans. Refer to Section 01 91 13.00 50 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS and Division 27 Sections for additional Contractor training requirements.


SECTION 27 08 01.00 50 Page 3


SECTION 27 10 00

BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM08/11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




ASTM E814 (2013) Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops

ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS ASSOCIATION (ECA)

ECA EIA/ECA 310 (2005) Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment



NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (NECA)

NECA/BICSI 568 (2006) Standard for Installing Building Telecommunications Cabling




TIA-1152 (2009) Requirements for Field Test Instruments and Measurements for Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling

TIA-568-C.0 (2009; Add 1 2010; Add 2 2012) Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises

TIA-568-C.1 (2009; Add 2 2011; Add 1 2012) Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard

TIA-568-C.2 (2009; Errata 2010) Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standards



TIA-568-C.3 (2008; Add 1 2011) Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard

TIA-569 (2012c; Addendum 1 2013; Errata 2013) Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

TIA-607 (2011b) Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises

TIA/EIA-604-2 (2004b) FOCIS 2 Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard

TIA/EIA-606 (2002a; Errata 2007; R 2007; Adm 1 2008) Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure


FCC Part 68 Connection of Terminal Equipment to the Telephone Network (47 CFR 68)



UL 50 (2007; Reprint Apr 2012) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-environmental Considerations

UL 514C (1996; Reprint Nov 2011) Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers

UL 969 (1995; Reprint Nov 2008) Standard for Marking and Labeling Systems


Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM applies to this section with additions and modifications specified herein.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in this specification shall be as defined in TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, TIA-568-C.3, TIA-569, TIA/EIA-606 and IEEE 100 and herein.

1.3.1 Main Distribution Frame (MDF)

A physical structure at a central location for terminating permanent backbone cables to interconnect with service provider (SP) equipment at the activity minimum point of presence. The MDF generally includes vendor specific components to support voice and data circuits, building surge protector assemblies, main cross connect blocks, equipment support frames, and fire rated plywood backboard. Depending upon local site conditions, the MDF and BDF may be the same space.



1.3.2 Building Distribution Frame (BDF)

A structure with terminations for connecting backbone, campus, and horizontal cabling. The BDF generally includes a cross connect, equipment support frame or lockable terminal cabinet, cable supports, and fire rated plywood backboard. The BDF shall include building protector assemblies when used for campus backbone or SP cabling.

1.3.3 Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF)

An intermediate termination point for horizontal wiring and cross- connections within telecommunications rooms. Shall be connected to MDF with both fiber and copper.

1.3.4 Telecommunications Room (TR)

An enclosed space for housing telecommunications equipment, cable, terminations, and cross-connects. The room is the recognized cross-connect between the backbone cable and the horizontal cabling.

1.3.5 Environmental Requirements

Connecting hardware shall be rated for operation under ambient conditions of 0 to 60 degrees C (32 to 140 degrees F) and in the range of 0 to 95 percent relative humidity, non-condensing.


The structured telecommunications pathway system shall include permanently installed horizontal and backbone pathways, service entrance facilities, work area pathways, telecommunications outlet boxes, conduit, and raceway, and hardware for splicing, terminating, and interconnecting. The horizontal system includes the pathway between the communication room and the work area telecommunications outlet. The horizontal system shall be suitable for star topology with the MDF /IDF at the center or hub of the star. The backbone pathway system includes intra-building and inter-building inter-connecting pathway to provide connectivity between the MDF's, BDF's, and IDF's. The backbone system shall be suitable for star topology with the MDF at the center or hub of the star.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Telecommunications drawings; G

Distribution Frames; G

In addition to Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, provide shop drawings in accordance with paragraph SHOP DRAWINGS.

SD-03 Product Data

Telecommunications cabling (backbone and horizontal); G



Patch panels; G

Telecommunications outlet/connector assemblies; G

Equipment support frame; G

Connector blocks; G

Protector Modules; G

SD-06 Test Reports

Telecommunications cabling testing; G

SD-07 Certificates

Telecommunications Contractor Qualifications; G

Manufacturer Qualifications; G

Test plan; G


Telecommunications cabling and pathway system Data Package 5; G

1.6 ADDITIONAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

All submittals of material, equipment and design must be approved by the Telecommunications Support Division (TSD) prior to installing any telecommunications wiring and equipment.


1.7.1 Shop Drawings

In exception to Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, submitted plan drawings shall be a minimum of 11 by 17 inches in size using a minimum scale of 1/8 inch per foot. Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices. Submittals shall include the nameplate data, size, and capacity. Submittals shall also include applicable federal, military, industry, and technical society publication references.

1.7.1.1 Telecommunications Drawings

Provide Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) approved drawings complete with wiring diagrams and details required to prove that the distribution system shall properly support connectivity from the telecommunications equipment room to telecommunications work area outlets. Show the entrance facility and layout of cabling and pathway runs, cross connect points, MDF, BDF, IDF, grounding system, rack elevations,



terminating block arrangements and type. Drawings shall depict final telecommunications cabling configuration, including location, color coding, gage, pair assignment, polarization, and terminating blocks layout at cross connect points and patch panels after telecommunications cable installation. Provide a plastic laminated schematic of the as-installed telecommunications cable system showing cabling, MDF's, BDF's, IDF's, and equipment rooms keyed to floor plans by room number. Mount the laminated schematic in each telecommunications room as directed by Base Telephone. The Telecommunications Contractor shall receive design approval from the Base Telephone Office via the Contracting Officer prior to installation.

1.7.1.2 Distribution Frames

Provide shop drawing showing layout of applicable equipment including incoming cable stub or connector blocks, building protector assemblyoutgoing cable connector blocks and equipment spaces and racks.


1.7.2.1 Minimum Contractor Qualifications

Prior to installation, submit data of provider's experience and qualifications. All work under this section shall be performed by and all equipment shall be provided by a certified Telecommunications Contractor, hereinafter referred to as the Contractor. The Contractor shall have the following qualifications in Telecommunications Systems installation:

a. Contractor shall have a minimum of 3 years experience in the application, installation and testing of the specified systems and equipment to be installed.

b. All supervisors and installers assigned to the installation of this system or any of its components shall be Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) Certified Cabling Installation Technicians, Installer Level 2, or have a minimum of 3 current consecutive years experience in the installation of the specified copper and fiber optic cable and components.

c. Contractor shall include names and locations of two projects successfully completed using optical fiber and copper communications cabling systems. Include specific experience in installing and testing structured telecommunications distribution systems using optical fiber and Category 5E/6 cabling systems. Include written correspondence from users that systems have performed satisfactorily for not less than 18 months.

1.7.2.2 Minimum Manufacturer Qualifications

The equipment and hardware provided under this contract will be from manufacturers that have a minimum of 3 years experience in producing the types of systems and equipment specified.

1.7.3 Test Plan

Provide a complete and detailed test plan for the telecommunications cabling system including a complete list of test equipment for the components and accessories for each cable type specified, 60 days prior to the proposed test date. Include procedures for certification, validation, and testing.



1.7.4 Additions to Operation and Maintenance Manuals

In addition to requirements of Data package 5 for the telecommunications cabling and pathway system, include the requirements of paragraph entitled"Telecommunications Drawings."

1.8 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

Provide protection from weather, moisture, extreme heat and cold, dirt, dust, and other contaminants for telecommunications cabling and equipment placed in storage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPONENTS

Components shall be UL or third party certified. Where equipment or materials are specified to conform to industry and technical society reference standards of the organizations, submit proof of such compliance. The label or listing by the specified organization will be acceptable evidence of compliance. In lieu of the label or listing, submit a certificate from an independent testing organization, competent to perform testing, and approved by the Contracting Officer. The certificate shall state that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods and that the item complies with the specified organization's reference standard. Provide a complete system of telecommunications cabling and pathway components using star topology. Provide support structures and pathways, complete with outlets, cables, connecting hardware and telecommunications cabinets/racks. Cabling and interconnecting hardware and components for telecommunications systems shall be UL listed or third party independent testing laboratory certified, and shall comply with NFPA 70 and conform to the requirements specified herein.

2.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS PATHWAY

TIA-569. Pathway shall be conduit, cable tray, or access flooring. Cantilever-type center hung tray shall not be used. Provide grounding and bonding as required by TIA-607. Cable wiring shall comply with NFPA 70. All conduits entering the Telecommunications Room should be grouped and consolidated, conduits can be "Home Run" or stubbed to cable tray, all should have bonding bushing / plastic insert, and shall extend down from the ceiling 3 to 4 inches or extended to ladder rack or onto the backboard. Conduit will be bonded to the TMGB by minimum #6 AWG green sheathed stranded conductors. All penetrations will be sealed with firestopping material in accordance Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.

2.3 Pull Boxes

Construct of galvanized sheet steel with screw-fastened covers. Minimum size of boxes shall be not less than 5-inches wide by 5-inches in length by 2 7/8-inches deep for individual 1¼-inch diameter conduit; minimum size of boxes shall be not less than 12"W x 48"L x 5"D for 3" conduit, 15"W x 60"L x 8"D for 4" conduit per TIA-569. Provide pull boxes where length of conduit exceeds 100 feet or where there are more than two 90 degree bends, or equivalent. Align conduit ends on opposite sides of pull boxes as in a pull through, do not turn or change direction in pull boxes. Provide pull boxes in straight lengths of conduit; pull points, LC, LB, condo lets are



not authorized.

2.4 BENDS

Inside radius of 2" or less conduit bend shall be at least 6 times the internal diameter of conduit. More than 2" is 10 times.

2.5 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET BOXES

Telecommunications outlet boxes should be placed as indicated on the drawings. Boxes shall be standard type 5 inches square by 2 7/8 inches deep for CAT6 with 1¼-inch diameter side knock-outs, with a single gang plaster ring. Mount flush in finished walls at height indicated by drawings. Outlet boxes for wall-mounted telephones shall be 2 by 4 by 2 1/8 inches deep with 1 CAT6 cable terminated in a standard 8P8C CAT6 wall phone plate; mounted at 54 inches above finished floor. Outlet boxes for handicapped telephone station or work counter area shall be mounted at a height 48 inches above finished floor. Outlet boxes installed for CCTV and CATV should also contain 2 CAT 6 cables.

2.6 TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING

Cabling shall be UL listed for the application and shall comply with TIA-568-C.0, TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, TIA-568-C.3 and NFPA 70. Provide a labeling system for cabling as required by TIA/EIA-606 and UL 969. Provide a labeling system in accordance with Paragraph "LABELING" and Base Telephone via the Contracting Officer guidance for cabling as required by TIA/EIA-606 and UL 969. Cable specifications must be provided in submittal and approved by Base Telephone via the Contracting Officer before installation.Cabling manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of installation shall not be used.

2.6.1 Horizontal Cabling

Provide horizontal cable in compliance with NFPA 70 and performance characteristics in accordance with TIA-568-C.1.

2.6.1.1 Horizontal Copper TIA-568-C.2, NFPA 70, UTP (unshielded twisted pair), 100 ohm. Provide a minimum of four cables to each work area outlet (faceplate), each individually twisted pair, 24/23 AWG conductors, Category 6 general purpose cable, with white PVC jacket for all odd numbered jacks, and blue PVC jacket for all even numbered jacks (unclassified service). Plenum (CMP) or riser (CMR) cable may be substituted for general purpose cable. If the cabling passes thru a plenum air space then plenum (CMP) rated cable is required. If the cabling is run in under slab conduit, outdoor rated cable shall be used. Contact AHJ for special requirements on classified service, unofficial service, under slab cabling, using water block, and any item not covered in this document.

2.7 DISTRIBUTION FRAMES Provide building distribution frames (BDF's), intermediate distribution frames (IDF's), and main distribution frames (MDF's) as shown on design drawings for terminating and cross connecting permanent cabling.



2.7.1 Equipment Support Frame EIA-310-D

Provide in accordance with ECA EIA/ECA 310 and UL 50.

a. Racks, floor mounted modular type, 16 gauge steelconstruction, minimum, treated to resist corrosion. Provide rack with vertical and horizontal cable management channels, top and bottom cable troughs, grounding lug and a surge protected power strip with 6 duplex 20 amp receptacles. Racksshould be large enough to support all telephone / data equipment required plus 25 percent spare. Rack shall be compatible with 19 inches panel mounting. Racks should have a maximum of 7’ height.Racks, floor mounted modular type, 16 gauge steel construction treated to resist corrosion. Recommend SIEMON's RS3-07-S or equivalent approved by AHJ. Provide rack with vertical and horizontal cable management channels, top cable troughs and grounding lug. Racks should be enough to support all telephone / data equipment required plus 25 percent spare. Rack shall be compatible with 19" panel mounting. Racks should have a maximum of 7' height. Must be in secured communications room.

2.7.2 Building Protector Assemblies

Building protector assembly are required on all OSP cables and shall have 710 type connector blocks for connection to the exterior cable at full capacity. M150-66 type IDC for connection to the voice cross connect blocks. 110 type IDC is not approved. For Central office a R399 type central office protector shall be used.

2.7.3 Protector Modules

UL 497, RUS TE&CM 823, three-electrode gas tube or solid state type rated for the application. Provide the number of surge protection modules equal to the number of pairs of exterior cable of the building protector assembly.

2.7.4 Connector Blocks

Insulation displacement type, Recommend Krone blocks' 6652-1-880-10 or equivalent approved by AHJ, for Category 5 and higher systems. Provide blocks for the number of backbone cables terminated on the block plus 25 percent spare. Also provide sufficient blocks for cross connects for all IDFs. Blocks shall be mounted on an 89D style bracket.

2.7.5 Patch Panels

Provide ports for the number of horizontal cables terminated on the panel plus 25 percent spare within the top 2/3 of the equipment support frame (bottom 1/3 is reserved for DATA equipment). Provide pre-connectorized ST type Optical fiber and CAT 6 copper patch cords for patch panels. Provide patch cords with connectors specified by AHJ. Patch cords shall meet minimum performance requirements specified in TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, and TIA-568-C.3 for cables, cable length and hardware specified.

2.7.5.1 Modular to 110 Block Patch Panel

Provide in accordance with TIA-568-C.1 and TIA-568-C.2. Panels shall be third party verified and shall comply with TIA Category 6 requirements. Panel shall be constructed of 2.2 mm minimum aluminum and shall be compatible with an EIA 482.6 mm equipment rack. Panel shall provide 48 non-keyed, dual modular RJ-45 ports. Recommend SIEMONS type CT patch



panels, CT-PNL-XX or equivalent approved by AHJ. Patch panels shall terminate the building cabling on 110-style insulation displacement connectors and shall utilize a printed circuit board interface, Recommend Siemon's CT Couplers, CT-F-C6-C6-XX or equivalent approved by AHJ. The rear of each panel shall have incoming cable strain-relief, routing guides, or rear cable management; DO NOT USE ZIP TIES. Panels shall have each port numbered with manufactures labels and be equipped with laminated plastic cover plates above each port.

2.7.5.2 Fiber Optic Patch Panel

Provide panel for maintenance and cross-connecting of optical fiber cables. Panel shall be constructed of 16 gauge steel or 11 gauge aluminum minimum and shall be compatible with a ECA EIA/ECA 310 19 inch equipment rack. Each panel shall provide 12 single-mode adapters as ST in accordance with TIA/EIA-604-2 with metallic alignment sleeves. Provide dust cover for unused adapters. The rear of each panel shall have a cable management tray a minimum of 8 inches deep with removable cover, incoming cable strain-relief and routing guides. DO NOT USE ZIP TIES. Panels shall have each adapter factory numbered.

2.7.6 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET BOXES

Standard type 5" x 5" x 2 7/8" square box with a single gang plaster ring.Mount flush in finished walls at height indicated by drawings. Depth of boxes shall be large enough to allow manufacturer's recommended conductor bend radii normally 2 7/8".

2.8 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTOR ASSEMBLIES

2.8.1 Outlet/Connector Copper

Outlet/connectors shall comply with FCC Part 68, TIA-568-C.1, and TIA-568-C.2. Outlet/connectors shall comply with FCC Part 68.5, TIA/EIA-568-C.1, and TIA/EIA-568-C.2. UTP Outlet/connectors shall be UL 1863 listed, non-keyed, 4-pair, dual molded 8P8C, constructed of high impact rated thermoplastic housing and shall be third party verified and shall comply with EIA/TIA Category 6 requirements, Recommend SIEMON's CT couplers, CT-F-C6-C6-xx or equivalent must be approved by AHJ, of indicated color (normally ivory or white) should match electrical face plate color and type. Outlet/connectors provided for Category 6 UTP cabling shall meet or exceed the requirements for the cable provided. Outlet/connectors shall be terminated using a 110-style PC board connector, color-coded for both T568A and T568B wiring. Each jack shall be wired T568A. UTP outlet/connectors shall comply with TIA-455-21-A for 750 mating cycles.

2.8.2 Cover Plates

Telecommunications cover plates shall comply with UL 514C, and TIA/EIA-568-C.1, TIA/EIA-568-C.2, TIA/EIA-568-C.3; flush or oversized design constructed of high impact thermoplastic, Recommend SIEMON's CT4-FP-xx or equivalent must be approved by AHJ, of ivory color, factory labeled and numbering shall be equipped with laminated plastic cover.

2.8.3 Optical Fiber Distribution Panel

Rack mounted optical fiber distribution panel (OFDP) shall be constructed of 2.2 mm minimum anodized aluminum. Distribution section shall have strain relief, routing guides for sufficient slack, user section shall have a



cover for patch cord protection. Each distribution panel shall provide 6 ST adapters. Adapters shall utilize metallic alignment sleeves. Provide dust covers for all adapters. Recommend Corning PCH or equivalent approved by AHJ.

2.9 Backboards

Provide void-free, interior grade plywood 19 mm (3/4 inch) thick as indicated. Backboards shall be fire rated, with the fire stamp visible. Boards should be installed 4'Width x 8'Height and cover at least an 8' x 8' area on the wall with the communications conduit in the telecomm room. Additional boards will be needed anywhere equipment is to be mounted.

2.10 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS Comply with UL 467, TIA-607, and NFPA 70. Components shall be identified as required by ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A. Ground rods shall be in accordance with Section 26 20 00, "Interior Distribution System." The preferred ground for the Telephone Main Grounding Bus (TMGB) bar will be to the Main electrical Distribution Panel (MDP) bus bar and building steel. All grounding and bonding conductors within the Telecommunications room will be green sheathed copper conductor, stranded, and labeled as suitable for use as such and tagged "DO NOT REMOVE". All grounding and bonding conductors running out of or side of the Telecommunications room should be protected in conduit or attached to the outside of the cable tray and sized according to references. The minimum size of the TMGB shall be no smaller than 4" by 10" by 1/4 inch thick; bus bar should be factory made and factory drilled -not fabricated or drilled onsite. All bonding and grounding terminations shall be irreversible and secured with a double hole crimp termination. Do not exceed minimum bend radius on bonding and grounding conductors.

2.11 FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL

Provide as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING. Provide asbestos-free fire stopping system capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flame and gases. System shall be UL listed and comply with ASTM E814. Include UL system number UL listed print from manufacturer for each type of floor, wall, and ceiling penetration.




ASTM D709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inches thick, white with blackcenter core. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inches high normal block style.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

ITelecommunications pathway systems, including the horizontal and backbone pathway systems, telecommunications outlet/connector assemblies, and associated hardware shall be installed in accordance with NECA/BICSI 568, TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, TIA-568-C.3, TIA-569, NFPA 70, manufacture instructions, current industry best practices, UL standards as applicable, and approval of the AHJ (authority having jurisdiction - TSD). Provide cabling in a star topology network. Metal raceway bases, covers, and dividers shall be bonded and grounded in accordance with TIA-607. Pathways shall be installed in accordance with the following minimum clearance distances of 1.2 meters(4 feet) from motors, generators, frequency converters, transformers, x-ray equipment or uninterruptible power system, 300 mm (12 in) from power conduits and cable systems, 125 mm (5 inches) from fluorescent or high frequency lighting system fixtures.

3.1.1 Cabling

Install Category 6 UTP and optical fiber telecommunications cabling and pathway system as detailed in TIA/EIA-568-C.1, TIA/EIA-568-C.2, and TIA/EIA-568-C.3. Screw terminals shall not be used. Use an approved insulation displacement connection (IDC) tool kit for copper cable terminations. Do not untwist Category 6 UTP cables more than ½" (12 mm) from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. Provide service loop on each end of the cable, minimum 10' (3 meters) in the telecommunications room, 6" (150mm) in or close to the work area outlet for UTP. Do not exceed manufacturers' cable pull tensions for copper. Provide a device to monitor cable pull tensions. Do not exceed 110 Newton pull tension for four pair copper cables. Cables that are chafed or have damaged outer jacket shall be replaced. Use only lubricants approved by cable manufacturer. Do not over cinch cables, or crush cables with staples. Only Velcro type cable straps are allowed on Category 6 cable and optical fiber cable, DO NOT USE ZIP TIES. UTP cable bend radii shall not be less than four times the cable diameter.

3.1.1.1 Horizontal Cabling

Install horizontal cabling in an approved pathway as indicated in this spec and on drawings between MDF, BDF, IDF, and telecommunications outlet assemblies at workstations. All under slab cables shall be rated for outdoor use.

3.1.2 Pathway Installations

Comply with TIA-569, except 1¼ -inch diameter conduit to each work area outlet from cable tray or telecommunication room backboard. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors (not in wet areas). Keep conduit minimum 305 mm (12 inches) away from parallel runs of electrical power equipment, flues, steam, light ballast, and hot water pipes. Install conduit parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural members where located above accessible ceilings and where conduit is visible after completion of project. Run conduits in crawl spaces as if exposed. Install no more than two 90 degree bends for a single horizontal cable run. All bends/turns in conduits will be in straight runs of conduit; a pull box shall be installed after every 180 degrees of bends or 100'; in no case will a turn be made within a pull box. The minimum size for a pull box for a single 1¼" conduit will be 5"



long by 5" wide by 2 7/8" deep, and for a 3" conduit 30"W x 54"L x9"D. All conduits should contain a bushing at the end to protect the cable from damage and required bonding. Pull points, LC, LB, condo lets, and consolidation points are not authorized.

3.1.3 Cable Tray Installation

Install cable tray components in accordance with TIA-569 and manufacturer'sinstructions. Ensure proper bonding as required by TIA-607. OnlyCMP and OFNP type cable shall be installed in a plenum space. A continuous, stranded, bonding conductor shall be run along the tray tapped to each section to ensure bonding. Remove all sharps from cable tray and pathways. Ensure bonding is on the pathway so as not to obstruct horizontal cabling.

3.1.4 Work Area Outlets

3.1.4.1 Terminations

Terminate UTP cable in accordance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2 and wiring configuration as specified.

3.1.4.2 Cover Plates

As a minimum, each jack shall have manufacturer labels numbered and be equipped with laminated plastic cover over the label. Also it shall be labeled as to its function with a blue computer icon on all even ports and a red phone icon on all the odd ports.

3.1.4.3 Cables

Unshielded twisted pair and fiber optic cables shall have a minimum of 12 inches of slack cable loosely coiled into the telecommunications outlet boxes. Minimum manufacturer's bend radius for each type of cable shall not be exceeded.

3.1.4.4 Pull Cords

Pull cords shall be installed in conduit serving telecommunications outlets that do not have cable installed.

3.1.5 Telecommunications Space Termination

Install termination hardware required for Category 6 and optical fiber system. A single punch insulation displacement tool shall be used for terminating copper cable to insulation displacement connectors (no multi punch tools, except 710 type for OSP where only a multi punch tool designed for 710 terminations will be used).

3.1.5.1 Patch Panels

Patch panels shall be mounted racks with sufficient ports to accommodate the installed cable plant plus 25 percent spares.

a. Copper Patch Panel. Copper cable entering a patch panel shall be secured to the panel as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent movement of the cable.

b. Fiber Optic Patch Panel. Fiber optic cable loop shall be 3 feet in length. The outer jacket of each cable entering a patch panel shall be



secured to the panel to prevent movement of the fibers within the panel, using clamps or brackets specifically manufactured for that purpose.

3.1.5.2 Equipment Support Frames

Install in accordance with TIA-569:

a. Racks, floor mounted modular type, recommend SIEMON's RS3-07-S / CPI T1030-712 or equivalent approved by AHJ. Permanently anchor rack to the floor per manufacturer's recommendations. Mount so there is sufficient space remaining on back board to mount lightening protection, bonding, and cable managers, or install additional backboard. Install sections of ladder rack anchored to telephone rack and at least two walls.

3.1.6 Electrical Penetrations

Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance-rated wall, partitions, floors, or ceilings as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.

3.1.7 Grounding and Bonding

Provide in accordance with TIA-607, NFPA 70 and as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

3.1.8 Firestopping

Seal openings around raceway penetrations through fire resistance ratedwalls, partitions, floors and ceiling utilizing proper firestoppingmaterials to maintain fire resistive integrity in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.

3.2 LABELING

3.2.1 Labels

All labels shall be in accordance with TIA/EIA-606; except jacks will be numbered in a logical, sequential, clockwise numbering system from 1 to X with a closet designator. Example would be 145 C 146, would be the 145th & 146th jacks from the C comm. room. All labels shall be numbered with manufactures labeling system (not fabricated or P-touch) and be equipped with laminated plastic cover. All terminations that are not to work area outlets should be in the last patch panel locations and labeled accordingly i.e. DDC, FACP, Elevator, Wall phones, or Wireless access points.

3.2.2 Cable

Cables shall be labeled using color labels on both ends with identifiers in accordance with TIA/EIA-606 and AHJ.

3.2.3 Termination Hardware

All workstation outlets and patch panel connections shall be labeled using manufacture labeling system, workstation outlets also may color coded labels and icons with encoded identifiers as per TIA/EIA-606 and AHJ.





3.4 TESTING

3.4.1 Telecommunications Cabling Testing

Perform telecommunications cabling inspection, verification, and performance tests in accordance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, TIA-568-C.3 and AHJ. Test equipment shall conform to TIA-1152.

3.4.1.1 Inspection

Visually inspect cabling jacket materials for UL or third party certification markings. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber jacket materials for UL or third party certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in telecommunications rooms and at workstations to confirm color code for tip and ring pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, TIA-568-C.3, . Visually confirm Category 6 marking of outlets, wallplates, outlet/ connectors, cables, and patch panels.

3.4.1.2 Performance Tests

a. Perform Category 6 permanent link tests in accordance with TIA-568-C.1 and TIA-568-C.2. Tests shall include wire map, length, attenuation, NEXT, and propagation delay. A channel test is not acceptable.

b. Optical fiber Links. Perform optical fiber end-to-end link tests in accordance with TIA-568-C.3.

c. As built drawings (not hand written, AutoCAD preferred) showing all telecommunications outlets and their numbers.

3.4.1.3 Final Verification Tests

Perform verification tests for CAT 6 Twisted Pair and optical fiber systems after the complete telecommunications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed. Provide summary in .pdf and detailed test results in tester format .flw, as built drawings in .pdf and .dwg, and fiber power meter/OTDR reports on a CD/CDRW to TSD office. All Test reports should have a building or project number on it. The final QC and certification of installation will be performed by TSD after the contractor has provided passing and acceptable results on all test and AS Built drawings showing all telecommunications outlets and their numbers. Test results that are a marginal may not be accepted. Also Fiber test that pass the link budget but exceed tolerance on any connector or splice are considered a failure. All discrepancies need to be repaired and re tested.

3.4.1.4 Records

a. Records to be provided for fiber shall include the cable specification sheets from the manufacturer, the cable routing and locations, all splice point locations, patch panel and jack locations, cable length, cable reel numbers and installation location, building or



project number, and the test results should be submitted in a electronic version on a CD/CDRW (do not e-mail).

b. As built drawings showing all telecommunications outlets and their numbers, Rack Elevations, communication room locations, building or project number, and pathways should be submitted in an electronic version on a CD/CDRW (do not e-mail) and a hard copy should be posted in the comm room.



SIEMON SYSTEMcabling

SDTHE SIEMON COMPANY

SD SD SD SD SD

SD

THE

SIEMON

COMPANY

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

9 10

11 12

13 14

15 16

17 18

19 20

21 22

23 24

25 26

27 28

29 30

31 32

33 34

35 36

37 38

39 40

41 42

43 44

45 46

47 48


SD SD SD SD SD


SD SD SD SD SD


SD SD SD SD SD

SD

CABLE MANAGER

CABLE MANAGER

TELECOMMUNICATIONS INFRASTRUCTURE

STANDARDS MARINE CORPS BASE

CAMP LEJEUNE

SECTION 27 10 00 Encl A

RACK ELEVATION EXAMPLE


SD SD SD SD SD

FIBER Distribution

COPPER

Connecting BLOCKS

MicroMMAC-24EMicroMMAC-24E

EPIM

EPIM

MicroMMAC-24EMicroMMAC-24E

EPIM

EPIM

ST connectorsA

B

C

D

On Backboard – PROTECTOR / BUILDING ENTRANCE (BEP), TMGB,Proper Bonding & Grounding, Cable Management and Slack on Ladder Rack.

Ladder rack should be from comm rack to at lease two walls.

Rack or

Cabinet if in unsecure area Number of

telecommunications work outlets in building determine number of patch panels and

need for additional racks

If 3 or more racks are used: place the fiber and copper

cable terminations in center racking to reduce patch cord

length

Bottom 15 RU is reserved for DATA

equipment

SD

THE

SIEMON

COMPANY

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

9 10

11 12

13 14

15 16

17 18

19 20

21 22

23 24

25 26

27 28

29 30

31 32

33 34

35 36

37 38

39 40

41 42

43 44

45 46

47 48

SD

THE

SIEMON

COMPANY

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

9 10

11 12

13 14

15 16

17 18

19 20

21 22

23 24

25 26

27 28

29 30

31 32

33 34

35 36

37 38

39 40

41 42

43 44

45 46

47 48

Work Area Outlet

387 A 388

385 A 386

Panel Dual Port Label

385 386

Tel

eco

mm

Rac

ks

Fro

nt P

ort

1

10'

8'

Telephone backboard is always the long wall farthest from door

CATV, Security,Un official providers backboard

Ladder rack around whole room and to free standing racks (some not shown so other systems can be seen)

Door always swings out ..HVAC over door

Tel

eco

mm

Rac

ks

Fro

nt

Tel

eco

mm

Rac

ks

Fro

nt

TMGB

OSP conduits

Sleeves to 2nd

floor comm. room

BEP

NOT to Scale for reference

only

TELECOMMUNICATIONS INFRASTRUCTURE STANDARDS MARINE CORPS BASE CAMP LEJEUNE

SECTION 27 10 00 Encl CTelecomm room typical layout

Light fixture

Basket tray or home run conduit


SECTION 27 51 16

RADIO AND PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES








FCC Part 15 Radio Frequency Devices (47 CFR 15)

FCC Part 68 Connection of Terminal Equipment to the Telephone Network (47 CFR 68)


UL 1449 (2006; Reprint Jul 2012) Surge Protective Devices

UL 60950 (2000; Reprint Oct 2007) Safety of Information Technology Equipment


The radio and public address system shall consist of an audio distribution network to include amplifiers, microphones, speakers, cabling, and ancillary components required to meet the required system configuration and operation. Submit Data Package 3 in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

1.2.1 Single-Channel System

The system shall control and amplify an audio program for distribution within the areas indicated.



1.2.2 System Performance

The system shall provide even sound distribution throughout the designated area, plus or minus 3 dB for the 1/1 octave band centered at 4000 Hz. The system shall provide uniform frequency response throughout the designated area, plus or minus 3 dB as measured with 1/3-octave bands of pink noise at locations across the designated area selected by the Contracting Officer. The system shall be capable of delivering 75 dB average program level with additional 10 dB peaking margin sound pressure level (SPL) in the area at an acoustic distortion level below 5 percent total harmonic distortion (THD). Unless otherwise specified the sound pressure reference level is 20 micro Pascal (0.00002 Newtons per square meter).


Submit detail drawings consisting of a complete list of equipment and material, including manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, performance charts and curves, catalog cuts, and installation instructions. Note that the contract drawings show layouts based on typical speakers. Check the layout based on the actual speakers to be installed and make necessary revisions in the detail drawings. Detail drawings shall also contain complete point to point wiring, schematic diagrams and other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a unit. Drawings shall show proposed layout of equipment and appurtenances, and equipment relationship to other parts of the work including clearances for maintenance and operation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Detail Drawings; G

SD-03 Product Data

Spare Parts

SD-06 Test Reports

Approved Test Procedures; G

Acceptance Tests

SD-07 Certificates

Components


Radio and Public Address System




Equipment placed in storage until installation shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, and other contaminants.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

Submit spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified, after approval of the detail drawings and not later than 2 months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. The data shall include a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Provide materials and equipment which are the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products, and that essentially duplicate material and equipment that have been in satisfactory use at least 2 years. All components used in the system shall be commercial designs that comply with the requirements specified. Submit copies of current approvals or listings issued by UL, or other nationally recognized testing laboratory for all components. Equipment shall be supported by a service organization that is within 50 miles of the site.

2.1.1 Identical Items

Items of the same classification shall be identical. This requirement includes equipment, modules, assemblies, parts, and components.

2.1.2 Nameplates

Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, model and catalog number, and serial number on a plate secured to the equipment.

2.2 POWER AMPLIFIERS

The amplifier shall provide a mono 70V output capable of 150 watts, minimum.

The amplifier shall provide 2 module bays for the installation of various input modules. A dual-channel (balanced or unbalanced), high-impedance input module shall come installed as a standard module in the amplifier. The amplifier shall be capable of 3 distinct modes of operation. These are Stereo, Dual Mono, and 70V Mono. In Dual Mono and 70V Mono, the amplifier shall provide the function of a 2 x 1 mixer of the installed input modules.Additionally, in the Dual Mono and 70V Mono modes, the amplifier shall allow one module to mute the other installed module if desired.

The amplifier shall drive the speaker load directly without the use of an output transformer. The amplifier shall allow a user-selectable low frequency roll-off of 65 Hz, 125 Hz, or no roll-off.

The amplifier shall have a defeatable sleep mode that greatly reduces idle power consumption when the amplifier has not received audio for more than 3 minutes. The amplifier shall also include a clip limiting feature that



automatically reduces amplifier clipping.

The amplifier shall have three indicators that correspond to status signal, and clip/limit. The amplifier shall allow the connection of external signal processing equipment when in Dual Mono or 70V Mono modes. The signal flow shall automatically be diverted to external equipment when connected to the effects loop. The amplifier shall also provide both pre- and post-EQ signal feeds for distribution to other equipment.

The amplifier shall include a system that automatically compensates forsurges or sags in AC line voltages of up to +/-10%. Additionally, the amplifier shall be protected against over-currents, overloads, excessive thermal dissipation, DC voltage, and short circuit on the outputs.

The amplifier shall be enclosed in a heavy-gauge steel chassis with recessed level control knob, which can be protected by a removable plastic cover. The amplifier shall be cooled by 2 independent continuously variable speed fans with easily removable fan filters.

The amplifier shall be provided with rack ears and fit into a 19" rack using two rack spaces.

Power amplifiers as a minimum conform to the following specifications:

Rated power output: 600 watts RMS, minimum

Frequency Response @ 1 watt: Plus or Minus 0.25 dB, 20-20,000 Hz

Distortion: Less than 2 percent at RPO, 600-13,000 Hz

Input Impedance: 50 k ohm unbalanced

Output Impedance: Balanced 4 and 8 ohms

Output voltage: 70.7 volts

Power Requirement: 110-125 Vac 60 Hz

2.3 MICROPHONE INPUT MODULES

Microphone input modules shall as a minimum conform to the following specifications:

Rated Outputs: 0.25 volts into 10,000 ohms 1.0 volts into 10,000 ohms

Frequency Response: Plus or Minus 2 dB, 20 - 20,000 Hz

Distortion: Less than 0.5 percent 20 - 20,000 Hz

Inputs: 4 transformer - coupled balanced 150 ohm

Input Sensitivity: 0.003 volts

Input Channel Isolation: 70 dB minimum



2.4 MICROPHONES

2.4.1 Desk Microphone

Microphone shall be provided at the equipment rack and shall be used for testing purposes onlu and shall as a minimum conform to the following specifications:

Element: Dynamic

Pattern: Cardioid

Frequency Response: 50 - 12,000 Hz

Impedance: Low impedance mic (150-400 ohms)

Front-to-back Ratio: 20 dB 2.5 LOUDSPEAKERS

2.5.1 Cone Speaker

The cone speaker shall as a minimum conform to the following specifications:

Application: Ceiling

Frequency range: 60 to 12,000 Hz

Power Rating: Normal - 7 watts Peak - 10 watts

Voice Coil Impedance: 8 ohms

Line Matching Transformer Type: 25/ 70.7 volt line

Capacity: 4 watts

Magnet: 10 ounces or greater

Primary Taps: 0.5, 1, 2 and 4 watts

Primary Impedance: 25 volts - 1250, 625, and 312 ohms 70.7 volts - 10k, 5k, and 2.5k ohms

Frequency Response: 30 - 20,000 Hz

Insertion Loss: Less than 1 dB

2.5.2 Ceiling Speaker Enclosures

Ceiling speaker enclosure shall be constructed of heavy gauge cold steel with interior undercoating and 1-1/2 inch thick high density fiberglass 1-1/2 lbs/cu. ft. The unit shall be round and designed for recessed installations which will be accomplished via standard screw mounting. Recessed models shall have a rust-preventive, and the surface mount unit finished in textured white . Enclosure shall include four triple compound conduit knockouts.



2.6 CABLES

2.6.1 Speaker Cable

Cables shall be of the gauge required depending upon the cable run length. In no case shall cable be used which is smaller than 18 AWG. Insulation on the conductors shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or an equivalent synthetic thermoplastic not less than 0.009 inch. Cables shall be jacketed with a PVC compound. The jacket thickness shall be 0.02 inch minimum.

2.7 TERMINALS

Terminals shall be solderless, tool-crimped pressure type.

2.8 SURGE PROTECTION

2.8.1 Power Line Surge Protection

Major components of the system such as power amplifiers, mixer-preamplifiers, and tuners, shall have a device, whether internal or external, which provides protection against voltage spikes and current surges originating from commercial power sources in accordance with IEEE C62.41.1/IEEE C62.41.2 B3 combination waveform and NFPA 70. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection. The surge protector shall be rated for a maximum let thru voltage of 350 Volts ac (line-to-neutral) and 350 Volt ac (neutral-to-ground). Surge protection device shall be UL listed and labeled as having been tested in accordance with UL 1449.

2.8.2 SIGNAL SURGE PROTECTION

Major components of the system shall have internal protection circuits which protects the component from mismatched loads, direct current, and shorted output lines. Communication cables/conductors shall have surge protection installed at each point where it exits or enters a building.

2.9 TELEPHONE INTERFACE MODULE

The Telephone Interface Module shall provide single zone paging.

It shall be compatible with all standard analog port types: loop start trunk, ground start trunk, station access (analog ring-up), page port contact closure activation, and page port voice activation. It shall include two audio outputs (page only and page and background music) with level controls, each of which shall provide audio for 70V amplifier inputs.

The module shall provide 1A @ 24V DC (+20 CU) AUX power for powering amplified speakers.

It shall include a high impedance transformer isolated background music input with volume control and variable music mute.

It shall include an adjustable output limiter with threshold and active indicator and variable music mute. It shall provide override paging (using loop start trunk or page port contact closure activation), a night ringer input (contact closure activation) with programmable tone, and a tone trigger input (contact closure activation) with programmable tone and duration.

DTMF programming shall be available through the override input. It shall



include DTMF block to help suppress DTMF tones from being heard over the paging system.

The unit shall include programmable timers to control page duration (station and trunk) that can be inhibited.

The unit shall include a programmable pre-announce/confirmation tone that can be set to be heard at the speakers being paged or at the calling telephone or both, as well as a setup tone to assist in volume setting, both of which can be inhibited.

The unit shall include a tone level control that sets the level for all tones.

The unit shall offer a tone burst, a double chime tone, and a slow whoop tone. The unit shall include a programming reset to return the system to the original factory default values.

The unit shall provide a dual form contact rated at 2A @ 30V DC and 0.6A @ 125V AC that can be used to activate external equipment.

The unit shall allow the installer to program a number of different parameters to control the way in which the AUX relay contacts activate. The unit shall allow programming of which input events the AUX relay will respond to, whether it will respond to the event only or to a combination of the event and its place in the priority structure, and if it will respond during the event or after the event ends.

It shall include non-volatile memory for setup data (no backup battery required). The unit shall be wall and rack mountable and shall inlcude all necessary rack mounting accessory kits.

The shall be UL 60950 approved (UL60950), FCC Part 68 Registered, FCC Part 15 Compliant

2.9.1 DIGITAL FEEDBACK TERMINATOR

The feedback termination device shall provide 240 seconds of memory and the ability to record up to 16 messages while simultaneously playing previously recorded messages. The device's operation shall be capable of automatic or external control.

The feedback terminator shall provide a frequency response from 100 Hz to 6.8 kHz +/-3 dB. Distortion shall be less than 1% over its bandwidth. The messages shall have a dynamic range of at least 60 dB and a signal to noise ratio of at least 60 dB.

The feedback terminator shall accommodate both loop start trunks and 4-wire dry loop interfaces, selectable by a slide switch. The input connector style for the interface shall be an RJ-11 type. Further, the device shall provide an output capable of either 8 ohms @ 0.125W or 600 ohms @ +4 dBm,selectable by slide switch. The output connector style for the interface shall be an RJ-11 type. A control to adjust the output signal level shall be provided.

A bank of DIP switches shall be accessible to set device operating features. The feedback terminator shall have the ability to start recording based on loop start, dry loop, audio triggered, or DTMF activation methods. The device shall be capable of stripping the DTMF tones out of the recorded



message in either the beginning or in the middle of the message. The deviceshall be able to regenerate DTMF tones in a message and to limit the number of DTMF tones a message can contain before the recording is aborted. The device shall allow for 2, 3, 4, or an unlimited number of DTMF tones in a message. The device shall allow a recording to be aborted by the issuance of 2 DTMF “#” digits in succession.

The selection of a pre-page tone shall be available. The recorded message shall be able to automatically replay and the time duration between message plays shall be selectable as 1, 3, 5, or 10 seconds. The feedback terminator shall have contact closures that indicate if the unit is in use, playing and/or recording. An internal jumper shall be able to set the contact for normally open or normally closed operation.The feedback terminator shall be wall mountable and use an external power supply. The power supply shall be UL listed.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

After becoming familiar with the details of the work and working conditions, verify dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancies before performing the work.

3.2 INSTALLATION

Equipment shall be installed as indicated and specified, and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations except where otherwise indicated. Equipment mounted out-of-doors or subject to inclement conditions shall be weatherproofed. The antenna shall be supported at least 60 inch clear above the roof by means of self-supported or guyed mast.

3.2.1 Wiring

Install wiring in rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, cable trays, or electric metallic tubing as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Wiring for microphone, grounding, line level, speaker and power cables shall be isolated from each other by physical isolation and metallic shielding. Shielding shall be terminated at only one end.

3.3 GROUNDING

All grounding practices shall comply with NFPA 70. The antenna mast shall be separately grounded. Equipment shall be grounded to the serving panelboard ground bus through a green grounding conductor. Metallic conduits serving the equipment shall be isolated on the equipment end with an insulating bushing to prevent noise from being transferred to the circuit. Equipment racks shall be grounded to the panelboard ground bus utilizing a #8 conductor. Grounding conductor shall be terminated to the rack using connector suitable for that purpose.

3.4 TRAINING

Conduct a training course for 4 members of the operating and maintenance staff as designated by the Contracting Officer. The training course will be given at the installation during normal working hours for a total of 4 hours and shall start after the system is functionally complete but prior



to final acceptance tests. The field instructions shall cover all of the items contained in the approved operating and maintenance manuals, as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations. Notify the Contracting Officer at least 14 days prior to the start of the training course.

3.5 ACCEPTANCE TESTS

Submit test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria, upon completion and testing of the installed system. The reports shall include the manufacturer, model number, and serial number of test equipment used in each test. Each report shall indicate the final position of controls and operating mode of the system. After installation has been completed, conduct acceptance tests, utilizing the approved test procedures, to demonstrate that equipment operates in accordance with specification requirements. Submit test plan and test procedures for the acceptance tests. The test plan and test procedures shall explain in detail, step-by-step actions and expected results to demonstrate compliance with the requirements specified. The procedure shall also explain methods for simulating the necessary conditions of operation to demonstrate system performance. Notify the Contracting Officer 14 days prior to the performance of tests. In no case shall notice be given until after the Contractor has received written Contracting Officer approval of the test plans as specified. The acceptance tests shall include originating and receiving messages at specified stations, at proper volume levels, without cross talk or noise from other links or nondesignated units.




SECTION 27 52 23.00 20

NURSE CALL SYSTEM04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



IEEE 602 (2007) Recommended Practice for Electric Systems in Health Care Facilities - White Book




UL 1069 (2007; Reprint Apr 2012) Hospital Signaling and Nurse Call Equipment

1.2 DEFINITIONS

The principles and definitions of terms used herein shall be as set forth in IEEE 602, along with UL 1069, but provisions of this section shall govern.


Nurse call system, with subsystems as indicated, shall primarily provide means for a patient to signal the nursing staff that assistance is needed. Additionally, nurse call system shall provide means for communications between staff members to serve administrative as well as emergency signaling requirements.

1.3.1 Visual Nurse Call Subsystem (VS)

Hardwired system which shall provide audible signaling and visual annunciation of emergency or code calls, utilizing light and tone signals. Type and location of equipment shall be as indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Visual nurse call subsystem

SECTION 27 52 23.00 20 Page 1


SD-03 Product Data

Master station annunciator

Toilet emergency station

Corridor/zone lights

Equipment panel

Wire/cable

Submit for each type and style of equipment.

SD-07 Certificates

Visual nurse call subsystem


Qualifications of service facility

Manufacturer recommendations for protection of stored equipment

Manufacturer recommendations for protection of equipment from supply-line transients


Nurse call systems, Data Package 5



Operating manuals



Nurse call systems and equipment shall conform to UL 1069 and meet requirements of the specified application.

1.5.2 Manufacturer Standard

Equipment shall be standard products of the same manufacturer, shall be the latest design by the manufacturer, and shall have been designed by the manufacturer to operate as a complete system for the intended use.

1.5.3 Service Facility

Equipment shall be supplemented by a factory authorized service organization, reasonably convenient to the site, which will provide service at the site within 4 hours after service is requested.

SECTION 27 52 23.00 20 Page 2


1.5.4 Subsystem Equipment Requirements

Individual items of equipment employed to make up each subsystem shall conform to UL 1069. The UL label or listing will be acceptable as evidence of compliance.

1.6 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

Protect stored equipment as recommended by the manufacturer.

1.7 SUPPLY-LINE TRANSIENTS

Protect equipment from supply-line transients as likely to be subjected in service from a commercial utility ac power system. Protection shall be integral to equipment or installed as an accessory item in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

1.8 MAINTENANCE

1.8.1 Data Package 5

Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.

1.8.2 Operating Manuals

Contents of each manual shall conform to the requirements for "Instructions and Installation Drawings" of UL 1069. Submit three manuals for each different type subsystem. Label one manual for use at each control unit or master station, and label two manuals for engineering and maintenance use. Submit manuals for the following subsystems:

a. Visual nurse call subsystem

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NURSE CALL EQUIPMENT

Equipment functions and operational characteristics shall conform to IEEE 602, UL 1069, and other requirements specified herein. ANSI and UL requirements are not repeated herein.

2.1.1 Master Station Annunciator (VS)

Wall recessed call annunciator panel providing audible and visual indication for up to 50 emergency stations. Panel shall contain indicators for call-placed annunciation, a system call placement indicator, and a combination solid-state tone generator with sound transducer with a distinct difference in signal rates for each priority signal level.

2.1.2 Toilet Emergency Station

Wall recessed emergency call station, with a red combination call and reset button, and call origination/assurance indicator. White nomenclature and nurse symbol shall appear on the call button for easy recognition.

2.1.3 Corridor/Zone Lights

Wall or Ceiling mounted as indicated, with colored lens or bulbs as

SECTION 27 52 23.00 20 Page 3


indicated.

2.1.4 Equipment Panel

Wall mounted enclosed panel containing power supply modules and other auxiliary equipment needed to provide for the complete and usable nurse call system.

2.2 SIGNALS

Priority levels and dome light indications shall be as recommended in IEEE 602 .

2.3 WIRE/CABLE

Provide interconnecting wire/cable as accessory equipment and comply with the same standards as the equipment with which used.

2.4 RACEWAYS

Provide metal raceways conforming to Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Fittings for EMT shall be compression type with ferrule and gland nut, not set screw.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Provide a complete and operational nurse call system, with subsystems, to satisfy the specified performance. Install equipment and accessory items to suit manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Provide insulated conductors in electrical metallic tubing as the wiring method. Comply with NFPA 70 for the electrical installation.

3.2 DEMONSTRATION

Upon completion of the work and at a time designated by the Contracting Officer, furnish services of a manufacturer's representative to perform an operational checkout of the system, and to demonstrate operational and other system features of the work in place.


SECTION 27 52 23.00 20 Page 4


SECTION 27 54 00.00 20

COMMUNITY ANTENNA TELEVISION (CATV) SYSTEMS04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES






NATIONAL CABLE AND TELECOMMUNICATIONS ASSOCIATION (NCTA)

NCTA RP (2003) NCTA Recommended Practices for Measurements on Cable Television Systems




47 CFR 76.605 Technical Standards


UL 969 (1995; Reprint Nov 2008) Standard for Marking and Labeling Systems


Section 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS, applies to this section with the additions and modifications specified herein.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

1.3.1 CATV

Community antenna television (CATV) system, commonly referred to as cable television, is a network of cables, headend, electronic and passive components that process and amplify television (TV) signals for distribution from the headend equipment to the individual television outlets.

SECTION 27 54 00.00 20 Page 1


1.3.2 Headend

The connection point between CATV system equipment and equipment provided by the local CATV company.

1.3.3 Distribution System

Distribution system transports and delivers adequate signals to each receiver. Provides distortion-free signal to TV sets by isolating each receiver from the system and by providing proper amount of signal to each set.

1.3.4 Cable

Drop cables are used to transport the desired signal used from the headend equipment to the wall outlet.


1.4.1 Headend

Contractor shall provide interior equipment up to headend and including the main amplifier located at the interior CATV backboard.


Distribution system shall be star topology with each outlet connected to headend equipment with the drop cable.

1.4.3 Cable

Provide drop cables to transport the desired signal from the headend equipment to the outlet.

1.4.4 System Components

System shall provide high quality TV signals to all outlets with a return path for interactive television and cable modem access. Provide any combination of items specified herein to achieve required performance, subject to approvals, limitations, acceptance test, and other requirements specified herein. System shall include amplifiers, splitters, combiners, line taps, cables, outlets, tilt compensators and all other parts, components, and equipment necessary to provide a complete and usable system.

1.4.4.1 System Bandwidth

a. Downstream: 50-750 MHz minimum.

b. Upstream 5-40 MHz minimum.

1.4.5 System Performance

System shall be in compliance with 47 CFR 76.605.

1.4.5.1 Receiver Termination Signal Level

Each termination for a TV receiver must have a minimum signal level of 0 decibel millivolts (dBmV) (1000 microvolts) at 55 MHz and of 0 dBmV (1000

SECTION 27 54 00.00 20 Page 2


microvolts) at 750 MHz and a maximum signal of 15 dBmV or a level not to overload the receiver for the entire system bandwidth.

1.4.5.2 Distribution System

a. Modulation distortion at power frequencies: 4 percent or less hum distortion;

b. Composite third order distortion for:

(1) CW carriers: 53 dB.

(2) Modulated carriers: 59 dB.

c. Subscriber terminal isolation: 18 dB or greater.

d. Carrier to second order beat ratio: 60 dB.

e. Amplitude characteristic shall be within a range of plus or minus 2 decibels from 0.75 MHz to 5.0 MHz above the lower boundary frequency of the cable television channel, referenced to the average of the highest and lowest amplitudes within these frequency boundaries.

f. Visual, aural carrier level, 24-hour variation: 47 CFR 76.605, subpart (a), rules (4), (5), and (6).

g. Frequency determination: 47 CFR 76.605, subpart (a), rules (1),(2), and (3).

1.4.5.3 All New System Tolerance

The system shall not show a serious loss of carrier to noise when the system levels are lowered 3 dB below normal or a significant distortion when the levels are increased 3 dB above normal, as observed on a TV set located at the far end extremities of the system.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

CATV system wiring diagrams and installation details; G

CATV system components; G

SD-03 Product Data

Attenuators; G

Amplifiers, including headend, trunk, bridging, and distribution; G

Cables, including drop; G

Terminators; G

SECTION 27 54 00.00 20 Page 3


Splitters/combiners; G

Line Taps; G

Outlets; G

Connectors; G

Tilt compensator; G

Grounding block; G

Submittals for each manufactured item shall be the current manufacturer's descriptive literature of catalog products, equipment drawings, diagrams, performance and characteristics curves, and catalog cuts.

SD-05 Design Data

CATV System Loss Calculations; G

SD-06 Test Reports

Operational test plan; G

Operational test procedures; G

System pretest; G

Acceptance tests; G


Connector Installation; G


1.6.1 Wiring Diagrams and Installation Details

Illustrate how each item of equipment functions in the system and include an overall system schematic indicating the relationship of CATV units on one diagram. Drawings shall include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed locations, layout and arrangements, and other items that must be shown to ensure coordinated installation.

1.6.2 CATV System Loss Calculations

Calculations shall verify that the system does not exceed the loss values specified in dBmV at the receiver terminations. Provide a drawing displaying all distribution network calculations. The drawing should accurately show taps, splitters, outlets, and the type and length of all drop cables. The drawing shall show how many taps, splitters, or outlets are served by each tap or splitter.

1.6.3 Operational Test Plan

Test plan shall define tests required to ensure that the system meets technical, operational, and performance specifications. Test plan shall be

SECTION 27 54 00.00 20 Page 4


based on NCTA RP and be in accordance with FCC proof of performance requirements. Test plan shall include plan for testing for signal leakage. Provide test requirements and guidelines.

1.6.4 Operational Test Procedures

Use test plan and design documents to develop test procedures. Procedures shall consist of detailed instructions for a test setup, execution, and evaluation of test results.

1.6.5 Connector Installation

Provide manufacturer's instructions for installing connectors.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

Electronic components of similar type shall be produced and designed by the same manufacturer as major components of the equipment and shall have the manufacturer's name and model permanently attached. Equipment shall function properly as a complete integrated system. Equipment shall be shielded. The system shall be designed to operate within 5 to 1000 MHz bandwidth using 1000 MHz passive devices and a minimum of 750 MHz active devices.

2.2 HEADEND EQUIPMENT

2.2.1 Headend Amplifiers

Provide broadband distribution amplifiers. Amplifiers shall amplify broadband signals from 40 to 750 MHz and provide an amplified return path for signals from 5 to 40 MHz for 75 ohms impedance. Amplifiers shall be bidirectional with variable slope and gain control.

2.2.2 Attenuators

Provide attenuators to equalize signal levels, when required. Variable attenuators are not permitted.

2.2.3 Power Supplies

Power supplies shall contain a current limiter circuit to protect against short circuits on the radio frequency (RF) line. Provide overvoltage protection to protect solid state equipment from line surges and induced voltages, in accordance with IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2.

2.3 DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT

2.3.1 Distribution Amplifiers

Distribution amplifiers shall be equipped for 75 ohms input and output impedance. Electronic equipment exposed to weather shall be equipped with weatherproof housings. Amplifiers shall be bidirectional with variable slope and gain control and shall amplify broadband signals from 50 to 750 MHz and provide an amplified return path for signals from 5 to 40 MHz for 75 ohms impedance.

SECTION 27 54 00.00 20 Page 5


2.3.1.1 Trunk Amplifiers

Trunk amplifiers shall have automatic level and slope control features.

2.3.1.2 Bridging Amplifiers

Bridging amplifiers shall be used to connect feeder cables to trunk cables.

2.3.2 Cables and Associated Hardware

Cabling shall be UL listed for the application and shall comply with NFPA 70. Provide a labeling system for cabling as required by UL 969. Cabling manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of installation shall not be used.

2.3.2.1 Drop Cable

UL 1581. Provide RG 6 coaxial cable with an NFPA 70 rating of CATV and with the following characteristics:

a. No. 18 AWG copper-clad steel center conductor.

b. Bonded foil inner-shield and 90 percent aluminum braid.

c. Characteristic impedance of 75 ohms.

d. Gas injected foam polyethylene dielectric

e. Nominal capacitance, conductor to shield, of 16.2 pf per 100 ft .

f. Maximum operating voltage of 350 V RMS.

g. Maximum attenuation:

CATV

MHz DB/100 ft

10 0.81

50 1.46

100 2.05

200 2.83

400 4.0

500 4.53

700 6.0

1000 7.3

h. Black polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacket.

i. 100 percent sweep testing from 5 MHz to a minimum of 1000 MHz.

SECTION 27 54 00.00 20 Page 6


2.3.3 Terminators

Terminators shall be rated for 75 ohms and 1/4 watt.

2.3.4 Splitters/Combiners

Use splitters/combiners with characteristics equal to or exceeding the characteristics listed in this paragraph over the entire operating band. All unused outlets must be terminated with 75-ohm terminators.

a. Peak to Valley: Not to exceed 1 dB across bandwidth of device.

b. Return loss: 18 dB minimum.

c. Bandwidth: 5-1000 Mh

2.3.5 Line Taps

Line taps shall have 18 dB minimum isolation from each tap to the thru-line.Pressure tapoffs are not permitted. Taps shall be rated from 5 to 1000 MHz and shall have a peak to valley not to exceed 1 dB to 1 GHz.

2.3.6 Outlets

Provide flush mounted, 75-ohm, F-type connector outlets rated from 5 to 1000 MHz in standard electrical outlet boxes.

2.3.7 Connectors

Provide one piece connectors. Drop cable connectors shall be feed thru type.

2.3.8 Tilt Compensator

Provide tilt compensators as required.


Provide ground rods and connections in accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

2.4.1 Grounding Block

Provide grounding block suitable for indoor installation.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


Distribution system shall conform to requirements specified herein. Installation shall be in accordance with IEEE C2 and NFPA 70.

3.1.1.1 Raceway

Provide cable installed in raceways such as conduit and cable trays in compliance with NFPA 70. Raceway shall comply with Section 26 20 00, INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

SECTION 27 54 00.00 20 Page 7



Provide the grounding block at the main CATV backboard. Ground this device according to the requirements of IEEE C2 and NFPA 70.

3.1.1.3 Trunk, Feeder, and Drop Cable

Provide cable to grounding blocks, to line taps, and to outlets.


3.2.1 System Pretest

Upon completing installation of the CATV system, the Contractor shall align and balance the system and shall perform complete pretesting. During the system pretest, Contractor, utilizing the approved spectrum analyzer or signal level meter, shall verify that the system is fully operational and meets all the system performance requirements of the specification. Contractor shall test the signal loss in dBmV at 55, 151, 547, and 750 MHz. The signal levels shall be 0 dBmV (1000 microvolts), minimum. The signal shall not exceed 15 dBmV over the entire system bandwidth. Any deficiencies found shall be corrected and revalidated by follow up testing. Contractor shall measure and record the video and audio carrier levels at each of the frequency levels specified at each of the following points in the system:

a. At each outlet.

b. Distribution amplifier inputs and outputs.

3.2.2 Acceptance Tests

Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer of system readiness 10 days prior to the date of acceptance testing. Contractor shall also coordinate with the local CATV provider and allow them to attend witness tests. CATV system shall be tested in accordance with the approved test plan in the presence of the Contracting Officer's representative to certify acceptable performance. System test shall verify that the total system meets all the requirements of the specification and complies with the specified standards. Contractor shall verify that no signal leakage exists in conformance with NCTA RP and 47 CFR 76.605. System leakage shall also be tested at the headend location with signal applied to system. Deficiencies revealed by the testing shall be corrected and revalidated by follow-up testing. Contractor shall conduct testing at each of the following points in the system:

a. At each outlet.


SECTION 27 54 00.00 20 Page 8


SECTION 28 31 76

INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM08/11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

Section 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS, applies to this section, with the additions and modifications specified herein. In addition, refer to the following sections for related work and coordination:

Section 21 13 13.00 20 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION

Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING for additional work related to firestopping.

1.2 REFERENCES



ASA S3.2 (2009) Method for Measuring the Intelligibility of Speech Over Communication Systems (ASA 85)

FM GLOBAL (FM)





INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION (IEC)

IEC 60268-16 (2003; ED 4.0) Sound System Equipment - Part 16: Objective Rating Of Speech Intelligibility By Speech Transmission Index


ISO 7240-16 (2007) Fire Detection And Alarm Systems — Part 16: Sound System Control And Indicating Equipment



ISO 7240-19 (2007) Fire Detection and Alarm Systems — Part 19: Design, Installation, Commissioning and Service of Sound Systems for Emergency Purposes


NFPA 170 (2012) Standard for Fire Safety and Emergency Symbols


NFPA 72 (2013) National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code



UFC 3-601-02 (2010) Operations and Maintenance: Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Fire Protection Systems

UFC 4-021-01 (2008; Change 1 2010) Design and O&M: Mass Notification Systems


UL 1480 (2003; Reprint Oct 2012) Standard for Speakers for Fire Alarm, Emergency, and Commercial and Professional Use

UL 1638 (2001; Reprint Oct 2008) Visual Signaling Appliances - Private Mode Emergency and General Utility Signaling

UL 1971 (2002; Reprint Oct 2008) Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired

UL 2017 (2008; Reprint May 2011) General-Purpose Signaling Devices and Systems

UL 268 (2009) Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems

UL 464 (2009; Reprint Apr 2012) Standard for Audible Signal Appliances

UL 864 (2003; Reprint Aug 2012) Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems

UL Electrical Constructn (2012) Electrical Construction Equipment Directory

UL Fire Prot Dir (2012) Fire Protection Equipment Directory



1.3 DEFINITIONS

Wherever mentioned in this specification or on the drawings, the equipment, devices, and functions shall be defined as follows:

a. Interface Device: An addressable device that interconnects hard wired systems or devices to an analog/addressable system.

b. Remote Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Control Unit: A control panel, electronically remote from the fire alarm and mass notification control panel, that receives inputs from automatic and manual fire alarm devices; may supply power to detection devices and interface devices; may provide transfer of power to the notification appliances; may provide transfer of condition to relays or devices connected to the control unit; and reports to and receives signals from the fire alarm control panel.

c. Fire Alarm Control Unit and Mass Notification Autonomous Control Unit (FMCP): A master control panel having the features of a fire alarm and mass notification control unit and fire alarm and mass notification control units are interconnected. The panel has central processing, memory, input and output terminals, and LCD, LED Display units

d. Local Operating Console (LOC): A unit designed to allow emergency responders and/or building occupants to operate the MNS including delivery or recorded and/or live messages, initiate strobe and textural visible appliance operation and other relayed functions.

e. Terminal Cabinet: A steel cabinet with locking, hinge-mounted door that terminal strips are securely mounted.


1.4.1 Scope

a. This work includes completion of design and providing a new, complete, fire alarm and mass notification system as described herein and on the contract drawings for the Osborne Dental Clinic, Building 460. Include in the system wiring, raceways, pull boxes, terminal cabinets, outlet and mounting boxes, control equipment, alarm, and supervisory signal initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, supervising station fire alarm system transmitter, and other accessories and miscellaneous items required for a complete operating system even though each item is not specifically mentioned or described. Provide systems complete and ready for operation.

b. Provide equipment, materials, installation, workmanship, inspection, and testing in strict accordance with the required and advisory provisions of NFPA 72, ISO 7240-16, IEC 60268-16, except as modified herein. The system layout on the drawings show the intent of coverage and are shown in suggested locations. Submit plan view drawing showing device locations, terminal cabinet locations, junction boxes, other related equipment, conduit routing, wire counts, circuit identification in each conduit, and circuit layouts for all floors. Drawings shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 170. Final quantity, system layout, and coordination are the responsibility of the Contractor.



1.4.2 Technical Data and Computer Software

Technical data and computer software (meaning technical data that relates to computer software) that are specifically identified in this project, and may be defined/required in other specifications, shall be delivered, strictly in accordance with the CONTRACT CLAUSES. Identify data delivered by reference to the particular specification paragraph against which it is furnished. Data to be submitted shall include complete system, equipment, and software descriptions. Descriptions shall show how the equipment will operate as a system to meet the performance requirements of this contract. The data package shall also include the following:

a. Identification of programmable portions of system equipment and capabilities.

b. Description of system revision and expansion capabilities and methods of implementation detailing both equipment and software requirements.

c. Provision of operational software data on all modes of programmable portions of the fire alarm and detection system.

d. Description of Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Control Panel equipment operation.

e. Description of auxiliary and remote equipment operations.

f. Library of application software.

g. Operation and maintenance manuals.

1.4.3 Keys

Keys and locks for equipment shall be identical. Provide not less than six keys of each type required. Master all keys and locks to a single key as required by the Installation Fire Department.

LOC is not permitted to be locked or lockable.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Nameplates; GInstructions; GWiring Diagrams; GSystem Layout; GSystem Operation; GNotification Appliances; GAmplifiers; G

SD-03 Product Data

Technical Data And Computer Software; GFire Alarm Control Unit and Mass Notification Control Unit (FMCP);G



Manual stations; GTransmitters (including housing); GBatteries; GBattery chargers; GSmoke sensors; GNotification appliances; GAddressable interface devices; GAmplifiers; GTone generators; GDigitalized voice generators; GDigital alarm communicator transmitter (DACT); GLocal Operating Console (LOC); G

SD-05 Design Data

Battery power; GBattery chargers; G

SD-06 Test Reports

Field Quality ControlTesting Procedures; GSmoke sensor testing procedures; G

SD-07 Certificates

InstallerFormal Inspection and TestsFinal Testing


System Operation; GFire Alarm/Mass Notification System


Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Instructions; GInstruction of Government Employees


As-Built Drawings


Equipment and devices shall be compatible and operable with existing station fire alarm system and shall not impair reliability or operational functions of existing supervising station fire alarm system.

a. In NFPA publications referred to herein, consider advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears; interpret reference to "authority having jurisdiction" to mean the Naval Facilities Engineering Command, MIDLANT, Fire Protection Engineer .

b. The recommended practices stated in the manufacturer's literature or documentation shall be considered as mandatory requirements.



c. Devices and equipment for fire alarm service shall be listed by UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by FM APP GUIDE.


1.6.1.1 Design Services

Installations requiring completion of installation drawings and specification or modifications of fire detection, fire alarm, mass notification system, fire suppression systems or mass notification systems shall require the services and review of a qualified engineer. For the purposes of meeting this requirement, a qualified engineer is defined as an individual meeting the following conditions:

a. A registered professional engineer (P.E.) in fire protection engineering.

1.6.1.2 Supervisor

NICET Fire Alarm Technicians to perform the installation of the system. A NICET Level 4 Fire Alarm Technician shall supervise the installation of the fire alarm system/mass notification system. The Fire Alarm technicians supervising the installation of equipment shall be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.

1.6.1.3 Technician

Fire Alarm Technicians with a minimum of four years of experience utilized to install and terminate fire alarm/mass notification devices, cabinets and panels. The Fire Alarm technicians installing the equipment shall be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.

1.6.1.4 Installer

Fire Alarm installer with a minimum of two years of experience utilized to assist in the installation of fire alarm/mass notification devices, cabinets and panels . An electrician shall be allowed to install wire, cable, conduit and backboxes for the fire alarm system/mass notification system. The Fire Alarm installer shall be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.

1.6.1.5 Test Personnel

Fire Alarm Technicians with a minimum of eight years of experience (NICET Level III)utilized to test and certify the installation of the fire alarm/mass notification devices, cabinets and panels. The Fire Alarm technicians testing the equipment shall be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.

1.6.1.6 Manufacturer's Representative

The fire alarm and mass notification equipment manufacturer's representative shall be present for the connection of wiring to the control panel. The Manufacturer's Representative shall be an employee of the manufacturer with necessary technical training (NICET Level III)on the



system being installed.

1.6.1.7 Manufacturer

Components shall be of current design and shall be in regular and recurrent production at the time of installation. Provide design, materials, and devices for a protected premises fire alarm system, complete, conforming to NFPA 72, except as otherwise or additionally specified herein.


1.6.2.1 Requirements for Fire Protection Service

Equipment and material shall have been tested by UL and listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by FM and listed in FM APP GUIDE. Where the terms "listed" or "approved" appear in this specification, they shall mean listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM APP GUIDE. The omission of these terms under the description of any item of equipment described shall not be construed as waiving this requirement. All listings or approval by testing laboratories shall be from an existing ANSI or UL published standard.

1.6.2.2 Fire Alarm/Mass Notification System

Furnish equipment that is compatible and is UL listed, FM approved, or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory for the intended use. All listings by testing laboratories shall be from an existing ANSI or UL published standard. Submit a unique identifier for each device, including the control panel and initiating and indicating devices, with an indication of test results, and signature of the factory-trained technician of the control panel manufacturer and equipment installer. With reports on preliminary tests, include printer information. Include the NFPA 72 Record of Completion and NFPA 72 Inspection and Testing Form, with the appropriate test reports.

1.6.2.3 Fire alarm Testing Services or Laboratories

construct fire alarm and fire detection equipment in accordance with UL Fire Prot Dir, UL Electrical Constructn, or FM APP GUIDE.


Protect equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather, humidity, and temperature variation, dirt and dust, and other contaminants.

1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) INSTRUCTIONS

Submit 6 copies of the Operation and Maintenance Instructions, indexed and in booklet form. The Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall be a single volume or in separate volumes, and may be submitted as a Technical Data Package. Manuals shall be approved prior to training. The Interior Fire Alarm And Mass Notification System Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall include:

a. "Manufacturer Data Package 5" as specified in Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.

b. Operating manual outlining step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, and shutdown. The manual shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, parts list, and



complete description of equipment and their basic operating features.

c. Maintenance manual listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guide. The manuals shall include conduit layout, equipment layout and simplified wiring, and control diagrams of the system as installed.

d. The manuals shall include complete procedures for system revision and expansion, detailing both equipment and software requirements.

e. Software delivered for this project shall be provided, on each type of CD/DVD media utilized.

f. Printouts of configuration settings for all devices.

g. Routine maintenance checklist. The routine maintenance checklist shall be arranged in a columnar format. The first column shall list all installed devices, the second column shall state the maintenance activity or state no maintenance required, the third column shall state the frequency of the maintenance activity, and the fourth column for additional comments or reference. All data (devices, testing frequencies, etc.) shall comply with UFC 3-601-02.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

1.9.1 Repair Service/Replacement Parts

Repair services and replacement parts for the system shall be available for a period of 10 years after the date of final acceptance of this work by the Contracting Officer. During guarantee period, the service technician shall be on-site within 24 hours after notification. All repairs shall be completed within 24 hours of arrival on-site.

1.9.2 Interchangeable Parts

Spare parts furnished shall be directly interchangeable with the corresponding components of the installed system. Spare parts shall be suitably packaged and identified by nameplate, tagging, or stamping. Spare parts shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer at the time of the final acceptance testing.

1.9.3 Spare Parts

Furnish the following spare parts and accessories:

a. Four fuses for each fused circuit

b. Two of each type of notification appliance in the system (e.g. speaker, FA strobe, MNS strobe, etc.)

c. Two of each type of initiating device included in the system (e.g. smoke detector, thermal detector, manual station, etc.)

1.9.4 Special Tools

Software, connecting cables and proprietary equipment, necessary for the maintenance, testing, and reprogramming of the equipment shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer.



PART 2 PRODUCTS


Submit annotated catalog data as required in the paragraph SUBMITTAL, in table format on the drawings, showing manufacturer's name, model, voltage, and catalog numbers for equipment and components. Submitted shop drawings shall not be smaller than ISO A1. Also provide UL or FM listing cards for equipment provided.


Provide materials, equipment, and devices that have been tested by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, such as UL or FM Approvals, LLC (FM), and listed or approved for fire protection service when so required by NFPA 72 or this specification. Select material from one manufacturer, where possible, and not a combination of manufacturers, for any particular classification of materials. Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products for at least two years prior to bid opening.

2.1.2 Nameplates

Major components of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, catalog number, date of installation, installing Contractor's name and address, and the contract number provided on a new plate permanently affixed to the item or equipment. Major components include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. FMCPs

b. Automatic transmitter/transceiver

2.2 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENT

All fire alarm and mass notification equipment shall be listed for use under the applicable reference standards. Interfacing of Listed UL 864 or similar approved industry listing with Mass Notification Panels listed to UL 2017 shall be done in a laboratory listed configuration, if the software programming features cannot provide a listed interface control. If a field modification is needed, such as adding equipment like relays, the manufacturer of the panels being same or different brand from manufacturer shall provide the installing contractor for review and confirmation by the installing contractor. As part of the submittal documents, provide this information.

2.3 SYSTEM OPERATION

The Addressable Interior Fire Alarm and Mass Notification System shall be a complete, supervised, noncoded, analog/addressable fire alarm and mass notification system conforming to NFPA 72, UL 864 , and UL 2017. The system shall be activated into the alarm mode by actuation of any alarm initiating device. The system shall remain in the alarm mode until the initiating device is reset and the control panel is reset and restored to normal. The system may be placed in the alarm mode by local microphones, LOC, or remotely from authorized locations/users.

Submit data on each circuit to indicate that there is at least 25 percent



spare capacity for notification appliances, 25 percent spare capacity for initiating devices. Annotate data for each circuit on the drawings. Submit a complete description of the system operation in matrix format on the drawings. Submit a complete list of device addresses and corresponding messages.

2.3.1 Alarm Initiating Devices and Notification Appliances (Visual, Voice, Textural)

a. Connect alarm initiating devices to initiating device circuits (IDC) Class "B", or to signal line circuits (SLC) Class "B" and installed in accordance with NFPA 72.

b. Connect alarm notification appliances and speakers to notification appliance circuits (NAC) Class "B".

c. The system shall operate in the alarm mode upon actuation of any alarm initiating device or a mass notification signal. The system shall remain in the alarm mode until initiating device(s) or mass notification signal is/are reset and the control panel is manually reset and restored to normal. Audible, and visual appliances and systems shall comply with NFPA 72 and as specified herein. Fire alarm system/mass notification system components requiring power, except for the control panel power supply, shall operate on 24 Volts dc.

2.3.2 Functions and Operating Features

The system shall provide the following functions and operating features:

a. The FMCP shall provide power, annunciation, supervision, and control for the system. Addressable systems shall be microcomputer (microprocessor or microcontroller) based with a minimum word size of eight bits with sufficient memory to perform as specified.

b. Provide signaling line circuits for each floor.

c. Provide signaling line circuits for the network.

d. Provide notification appliance circuits. The visual alarm notification appliances shall have the flash rates synchronized as required by NFPA 72.

e. Provide electrical supervision of the primary power (AC) supply, presence of the battery, battery voltage, and placement of system modules within the control panel.

f. Provide an audible and visual trouble signal to activate upon a single break or open condition, or ground fault. The trouble signal shall also operate upon loss of primary power (AC) supply, absence of a battery supply, low battery voltage, or removal of alarm or supervisory panel modules. Provide a trouble alarm silence feature that shall silence the audible trouble signal, without affecting the visual indicator. After the system returns to normal operating conditions, the trouble signal shall again sound until the trouble is acknowledged. A smoke sensor in the process of being verified for the actual presence of smoke shall not initiate a trouble condition.

g. Provide program capability via switches in a locked portion of the FACP to bypass the automatic notification appliance circuits, fire reporting



systemair handler shutdown features. Operation of this programming shall indicate this action on the FACP display and printer output.

h. Alarm, supervisory, and/or trouble signals shall be automatically transmitted to the fire department..

i. Alarm functions shall override trouble or supervisory functions. Supervisory functions shall override trouble functions.

j. The system shall be capable of being programmed from the panels keyboard. Programmed information shall be stored in non-volatile memory.

k. The system shall be capable of operating, supervising, and/or monitoring both addressable and non-addressable alarm and supervisory devices.

l. There shall be no limit, other than maximum system capacity, as to the number of addressable devices, that may be in alarm simultaneously.

m. Where the fire alarm/mass notification system is responsible for initiating an action in another emergency control device or system, such as an HVAC system, the addressable fire alarm relay shall be in the vicinity of the emergency control device.

n. An alarm signal shall automatically initiate the following functions:

(1) Transmission of an alarm signal to the fire department.

(2) Visual indication of the device operated on the control panel (FACP/MNCP). Indication on the remote annunciator shall be by zone or circuit, and type of device.

(3) Continuous actuation of all alarm notification appliances.

(4) Recording of the event via electronically in the history log of the fire control system unit.

(5) Operation of a duct smoke sensor shall shut down the appropriate air handler in accordance with NFPA 90A in addition to other requirements of this paragraph and as allowed by NFPA 72.

o. A supervisory signal shall automatically initiate the following functions:

(1) Visual indication of the device operated on the FACP, and on the remote annunciator, and sound the audible alarm at the respective panel.

(2) Transmission of a supervisory signal to the fire department.

(3) Recording of the event electronically in the history log of the control unit.

p. A trouble condition shall automatically initiate the following functions:

(1) Visual indication of the system trouble on the FACP, and on the graphic annunciator, and sound the audible alarm at the respective



panel.

(2) Transmission of a trouble signal to the fire department.

(3) Recording of the event in the history log of the control unit.

q. The maximum permissible elapsed time between the actuation of an initiating device and its indication at the FACP is 10 seconds.

r. The maximum elapsed time between the occurrence of the trouble condition and its indication at the FACP is 200 seconds.

s. Activation of a LOC pushbutton shall activate the audible and visual alarms in the facility. The audible message shall be the one associated with the pushbutton activated.

2.4 SYSTEM MONITORING

2.4.1 Valves

Each valve affecting the proper operation of a fire protection system, including automatic sprinkler control valves, standpipe control valves, sprinkler service entrance valve, valves at fire pumps, isolating valves for pressure type waterflow or supervision switches, and valves at backflow preventers, whether supplied under this contract or existing, shall be electrically monitored to ensure its proper position. Provide each tamper switch with a separate address, unless they are within the same room, then a maximum of five can use the same address.

2.5 MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM FUNCTIONS

2.5.1 Notification Appliance Network

The audible notification appliance network consists of speakers located to provide intelligible instructions at all locations in the building. The Mass Notification System announcements shall take priority over all other audible announcements of the system including the output of the fire alarm system in a normal or alarm state. When a mass notification announcement is activated during a fire alarm, all fire alarm system functions shall continue in an alarm state except for the output signals of the fire alarm audible and visual notification appliances.

2.5.2 Strobes

Provide strobes to alert hearing-impaired occupants.

2.5.3 Wide Area MNS

The Wide Area MNS system (if available) in the area of the building shall not be activated by the in-building MNS.

2.5.4 Voice Notification

An autonomous voice notification control unit is used to monitor and control the notification appliance network and provide consoles for local operation. Using a console, personnel in the building can initiate delivery of pre-recorded voice messages, provide live voice messages and instructions, and initiate visual strobe and optional textual message notification appliances. The autonomous voice notification control unit



will temporarily override audible fire alarm notification while delivering Mass Notification messages to ensure they are intelligible.

2.5.5 Installation-Wide Control

If an installation-wide control system for mass notification exists on the base, the autonomous control unit shall communicate with the central control unit of the installation-wide system. The autonomous control unit shall receive commands/messages from the central control unit and provide status information.

2.6 OVERVOLTAGE AND SURGE PROTECTION

2.6.1 Signaling Line Circuit Surge Protection

For systems having circuits located outdoors, communications equipment shall be protected against surges induced on any signaling line circuit and shall comply with the applicable requirements of IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Cables and conductors, that serve as communications links, shall have surge protection circuits installed at each end that meet the following waveform(s):

a. A 10 microsecond by 1000 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 volts and a peak current of 60 amperes.

b. An 8 microsecond by 20 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1000 volts and a peak current of 500 amperes. Protection shall be provided at the equipment. Additional triple electrode gas surge protectors, rated for the application, shall be installed on each wireline circuit within 3 feet of the building cable entrance. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection.

2.6.2 Sensor Wiring Surge Protection

Digital and analog inputs and outputs shall be protected against surges induced by sensor wiring installed outdoors and as shown. The inputs and outputs shall be tested with the following waveforms:

a. A 10 by 1000 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 volts and a peak current of 60 amperes.

b. An 8 by 20 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1000 volts and a peak current of 500 amperes. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection.

2.7 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICES

The initiating device being monitored shall be configured as a Class "B" initiating device circuits. The system shall be capable of defining any module as an alarm module and report alarm trouble, loss of polling, or as a supervisory module, and reporting supervisory short, supervisory open or loss of polling such as waterflow switches, valve supervisory switches, fire pump monitoring, independent smoke detection systems, relays for output function actuation, etc. The module shall be UL or FM listed as compatible with the control panel. The monitor module shall provide address setting means compatible with the control panel's SLC supervision and store an internal identifying code. Monitor module shall contain an integral LED that flashes each time the monitor module is polled and is visible through the device cover plate. Pull stations with a monitor



module in a common backbox are not required to have an LED.

2.8 ADDRESSABLE CONTROL MODULE

The control module shall be capable of operating as a relay (dry contact form C) for interfacing the control panel with other systems, and to control door holders or initiate elevator fire service. The module shall be UL or FM listed as compatible with the control panel. The indicating device or the external load being controlled shall be configured as a Class "B" notification appliance circuits. The system shall be capable of supervising, audible, visual and dry contact circuits. The control module shall have both an input and output address. The supervision shall detect a short on the supervised circuit and shall prevent power from being applied to the circuit. The control model shall provide address setting means compatible with the control panel's SLC supervision and store an internal identifying code. The control module shall contain an integral LED that flashes each time the control module is polled and is visible through the device cover plate. Control Modules shall be located in environmental areas that reflect the conditions to which they were listed.

2.9 ISOLATION MODULES

Provide isolation modules to subdivide each signaling line circuit into groups of not more than 20 addressable devices between adjacent isolation modules.

2.10 SMOKE SENSORS

2.10.1 Photoelectric Smoke Sensors

Provide addressable photoelectric smoke sensors as follows:

a. Provide analog/addressable photoelectric smoke sensors utilizing the photoelectric light scattering principle for operation in accordance with UL 268. Smoke sensors shall be listed for use with the fire alarm control panel.

b. Provide self-restoring type sensors that do not require any readjustment after actuation at the FACP to restore them to normal operation. Sensors shall be UL listed as smoke-automatic fire sensors.

c. Components shall be rust and corrosion resistant. Vibration shall have no effect on the sensor's operation. Protect the detection chamber with a fine mesh metallic screen that prevents the entrance of insects or airborne materials. The screen shall not inhibit the movement of smoke particles into the chamber.

d. Provide twist lock bases for the sensors. The sensors shall maintain contact with their bases without the use of springs. Provide companion mounting base with screw terminals for each conductor. Terminate field wiring on the screw terminals. The sensor shall have a visual indicator to show actuation.

e. The sensor address shall identify the particular unit, its location within the system, and its sensitivity setting. Sensors shall be of the low voltage type rated for use on a 24 VDC system.

f. An operator at the control panel, having a proper access level, shall have the capability to manually access the following information for



each initiating device.

(1) Primary status

(2) Device type

(3) Present average value

(4) Present sensitivity selected

(5) Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.)

2.10.2 Duct Smoke Sensors

Duct-mounted photoelectric smoke detectors shall be furnished and installed where indicated and in accordance with NFPA 90A. Units shall consist of a smoke detector as specified in paragraph Photoelectric Detectors, mounted in a special housing fitted with duct sampling tubes. Detector circuitry shall be mounted in a metallic enclosure exterior to the duct. (It is not permitted to cut the duct insulation to install the duct detector directly on the duct). Detectors shall have a manual reset. Detectors shall be rated for air velocities that include air flows between 500 and 4000 fpm. Detectors shall be powered from the fire alarm panel.

a. Sampling tubes shall run the full width of the duct. The duct detector package shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A, UL 268A, and shall be UL listed for use in air-handling systems. The control functions, operation, reset, and bypass shall be controlled from the fire alarm control panel.

b. Lights to indicate the operation and alarm condition; and the test and reset buttons shall be visible and accessible with the unit installed and the cover in place. Remote indicators shall be provided where required by NFPA 72 and these shall be provided with test and reset switches.

c. Remote lamps and switches as well as the affected fan units shall be properly identified in etched plastic placards. Detectors shall provide for control of auxiliary contacts that provide control, interlock, and shutdown functions specified in Section 23 09 23.13 20 BACnet DIRECT DIFITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC. Auxiliary contacts provide for this function shall be located within 3 feet of the controlled circuit or appliance. The detectors shall be supplied by the fire alarm system manufacturer to ensure complete system compatibility.

2.10.3 Smoke Sensor Testing

Smoke sensors shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 72 and manufacturer's recommended calibrated test method. Submit smoke sensor testing procedures for approval. In addition to the NFPA 72 requirements, smoke detector sensitivity shall be tested during the preliminary tests.

2.11 ELECTRIC POWER

2.11.1 Primary Power

Power shall be 120 VAC service for the FMCP from the AC service to the building in accordance with NFPA 72.



2.12 SECONDARY POWER SUPPLY

Provide for system operation in the event of primary power source failure. Transfer from normal to auxiliary (secondary) power or restoration from auxiliary to normal power shall be automatic and shall not cause transmission of a false alarm.

2.12.1 Batteries

Provide sealed, maintenance-free, lead-calcium batteries as the source for emergency power to the FMCP. Batteries shall contain suspended electrolyte. The battery system shall be maintained in a fully charged condition by means of a solid state battery charger. Provide an automatic transfer switch to transfer the load to the batteries in the event of the failure of primary power.

2.12.1.1 Capacity

Battery size shall be the greater of the following two capacities.

a. Sufficient capacity to operate the fire alarm system under supervisory and trouble conditions, including audible trouble signal devices for 48 hours and audible and visual signal devices under alarm conditions for an additional 15 minutes.

b. Sufficient capacity to operate the mass notification for 60 minutes after loss of AC power.

2.12.1.2 Battery Power Calculations

a. Verify that battery capacity exceeds supervisory and alarm power requirements.

(1) Substantiate the battery calculations for alarm, alert, and supervisory power requirements. Include ampere-hour requirements for each system component and each panel component, and compliance with UL 864.

(2) Provide complete battery calculations for both the alarm, alert, and supervisory power requirements. Submit ampere-hour requirements for each system component with the calculations.

(3) A voltage drop calculation to indicate that sufficient voltage is available for proper operation of the system and all components, at the minimum rated voltage of the system operating on batteries.

b. For battery calculations use the following assumptions: Assume a starting voltage of 24 VDC for starting the calculations to size the batteries. Calculate the required Amp-Hours for the specified standby time, and then calculate the required Amp-Hours for the specified alarm time. Calculate the nominal battery voltage after operation on batteries for the specified time period. Using this voltage perform a voltage drop calculation for circuit containing device and/or appliances remote from the power sources.

2.12.2 Battery Chargers

Provide a solid state, fully automatic, variable charging rate battery



charger. The charger shall be capable of providing 120 percent of the connected system load and shall maintain the batteries at full charge. In the event the batteries are fully discharged (20.4 Volts dc), the charger shall recharge the batteries back to 95 percent of full charge within 48 hours after a single discharge cycle as described in paragraph CAPACITY above. Provide pilot light to indicate when batteries are manually placed on a high rate of charge as part of the unit assembly if a high rate switch is provided.

2.13 FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT AND MASS NOTIFICATION CONTROL UNIT (FMCP)

Provide a complete control panel fully enclosed in a lockable steel cabinet as specified herein. Operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the systems shall be performed from the front of the enclosure. If more than a single unit is required at a location to form a complete control panel, the unit cabinets shall match exactly.

a. Each control unit shall provide power, supervision, control, and logic for the entire system, utilizing solid state, modular components, internally mounted and arranged for easy access. Each control unit shall be suitable for operation on a 120 volt, 60 hertz, normal building power supply. Provide each panel with supervisory functions for power failure, internal component placement, and operation.

b. Visual indication of alarm, supervisory, or trouble initiation on the fire alarm control panel shall be by liquid crystal display or similar means with a minimum of 80 characters. The mass notification control unit shall have the capability of temporarily deactivate the fire alarm audible notification appliances while delivering voice messages.

c. Provide secure operator console for initiating recorded messages, strobes and displays; and for delivering live voice messages. Provide capacity for at least eight pre-recorded messages. Provide the ability to automatically repeat pre-recorded messages. Provide a secure microphone for delivering live messages. Provide adequate discrete outputs to temporarily deactivate fire alarm audible notification, and initiate/synchronize strobes. Provide a complete set of self-diagnostics for controller and appliance network. Provide local diagnostic information display and local diagnostic information and system event log file.

2.13.1 Cabinet

Install control panel components in cabinets large enough to accommodate all components and also to allow ample gutter space for interconnection of panels as well as field wiring. The enclosure shall be identified by an engraved laminated phenolic resin nameplate. Lettering on the nameplate shall say "Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Control Panel" and shall not be less than 1 inch high. Provide prominent rigid plastic or metal identification plates for lamps, circuits, meters, fuses, and switches. The cabinet shall be provided in a sturdy steel housing, complete with back box, hinged steel door with cylinder lock, and surface mounting provisions.

2.13.2 Control Modules

Provide power and control modules to perform all functions of the FACP. Provide audible signals to indicate any alarm, supervisory, or trouble condition. The alarm signals shall be different from the trouble signal.



Connect circuit conductors entering or leaving the panel to screw-type terminals with each terminal marked for identification. Locate diodes and resistors, if any, on screw terminals in the FACP. Circuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than the UL listed voltage at the sensor or appliance connected. Circuits operating at any other voltage shall not have a voltage drop exceeding 10 percent of nominal voltage

2.13.3 Silencing Switches

2.13.3.1 Alarm Silencing Switch

Provide an alarm silencing switch at the FMCP that shall silence the audible and visual. This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm.

2.13.3.2 Supervisory/Trouble Silencing Switch

Provide supervisory and trouble silencing switch that shall silence the audible trouble and supervisory signal, but not extinguish the visual indicator. This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm, supervision, or trouble condition. Audible trouble indication must resound automatically every 24 hours after the silencing feature has been operated.

2.13.4 Non-Interfering

Power and supervise each circuit such that a signal from one device does not prevent the receipt of signals from any other device. Circuits shall be manually reset by switch from the FACP after the initiating device or devices have been restored to normal.

2.13.5 Audible Notification System

The Audible Notification System shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 72 for Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications System requirements ISO 7240-16, IEC 60268-16, except as specified herein. The system shall be a one-way multi-channel voice notification system incorporating user selectability of a minimum eight distinct sounds for tone signaling, and the incorporation of a voice module for delivery of prerecorded messages. Audible appliances shall produce a temporal code 3 tone for three cycles followed by a voice message that is repeated until the control panel is reset or silenced. Automatic messages shall be broadcast through speakers throughout the building/facility but not in stairs or elevator cabs. A live voice message shall override the automatic audible output through use of a microphone input at the control panel or the LOC.

a. When using the microphone, live messages shall be broadcast throughout a selected floor or floors or all call The system shall be capable of operating all speakers at the same time. The microprocessor shall actively interrogate circuitry, field wiring, and digital coding necessary for the immediate and accurate rebroadcasting of the stored voice data into the appropriate amplifier input. Loss of operating power, supervisory power, or any other malfunction that could render the digitalized voice module inoperative shall automatically cause the code 3 temporal tone to take over all functions assigned to the failed unit in the event an alarm is activated.

b. The Mass Notification functions shall override the manual or automatic fire alarm notification or Public Address (PA) functions. Other fire



alarm functions including transmission of a signal(s) to the fire department shall remain operational. The system shall have the capability of utilizing LOC with redundant controls of the notification system control panel. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be provided for the activation of strobe appliances. The activation of the NAC Circuits shall follow the operation of the speaker NAC circuits. Audio output shall be selectable for line level. Amplifier outputs shall be not greater than 100 watts RMS output. The strobe NAC Circuits shall provide at least 2 amps of 24 VDC power to operate strobes and have the ability to synchronize all strobes. A hand held microphone shall be provided and, upon activation, shall take priority over any tone signal, recorded message or PA microphone operation in progress, while maintaining the strobe NAC Circuits activation.

2.13.5.1 Outputs and Operational Modules

All outputs and operational modules shall be fully supervised with on-board diagnostics and trouble reporting circuits. Provide form "C" contacts for system alarm and trouble conditions. Provide circuits for operation of auxiliary appliance during trouble conditions. During a Mass Notification event the panel shall not generate nor cause any trouble alarms to be generated with the Fire Alarm system.

2.13.5.2 Mass Notification

a. Mass Notification functions shall take precedence over all other function performed by the Audible Notification System. Messages shall utilize a female voice and shall be similar to the following:

(1) 1000 Hz tones (as required in 18.4.2.1 of NFPA 72)

(2) "May I have your attention please. May I have your attention please. An fire emergency has been reported in the building. Please leave the building by the nearest exit. " (Provide a 2 second pause.) "May I have your attention please, (repeat the message)."

(3) Provide up to four additional messages as directed by the contracting officer.

b. Include ALL installation specific message in this section.

c. The LOC shall incorporate a Push-To-Talk (PTT) microphone, redundant controls and system status indicators of/for the system. The unit shall incorporate microphone override of any tone generation or prerecorded messages. The unit shall be fully supervised from the control panel. The housing shall contain a latch (not lock).

d. Auxiliary Input Module shall be designed to be an outboard expansion module to either expand the number of optional LOC's, or allow a telephone interface.

e. LOC shall incorporate a Push-To-Talk (PTT) microphone, and controls to allow Public Address paging in the facility. The Public Address paging function shall not override any alarm or notification functions and shall be disabled by such signals. The microphone shall be handheld style. All wiring to the LOC shall be supervised in accordance with UFC 4-021-01. Systems that require field modification or are not supervised for multiple LOC's shall not be approved.



f. When an installation has more than one LOC, the LOC's shall be programmed to allow only one LOC to be available for page or messaging at a time. Once one LOC becomes active, all other LOC's will have an indication that the system is busy (Amber Busy Light)and cannot be used at that time. This is to avoid two messages being given at the same time. Also, it must be possible to override or lockout the LOC's from the Master Command Panel (in accordance with NFPA 72.)

2.13.6 Memory

Provide each control unit with non-volatile memory and logic for all functions. The use of long life batteries, capacitors, or other age-dependent devices shall not be considered as equal to non-volatile processors, PROMS, or EPROMS.

2.13.7 Field Programmability

Provide control units and control panels that are fully field programmable for control, initiation, notification, supervisory, and trouble functions of both input and output. The system program configuration shall be menu driven. System changes shall be password protected and shall be accomplished using personal computer based equipment. Any proprietary equipment and proprietary software needed by qualified technicians to implement future changes to the fire alarm system shall be provided as part of this contract.

2.13.8 Input/Output Modifications

The FMCP shall contain features that allow the bypassing of input devices from the system or the modification of system outputs. These control features shall consist of a panel mounted keypad. Any bypass or modification to the system shall indicate a trouble condition on the FMCP.

2.13.9 Resetting

Provide the necessary controls to prevent the resetting of any alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal while the alarm, supervisory or trouble condition on the system still exists.

2.13.10 Instructions

Provide a typeset printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a Lexan plastic or glass cover in a stainless steel or aluminum frame. Install the instructions on the interior of the FACP. The card shall show those steps to be taken by an operator when a signal is received as well as the functional operation of the system under all conditions, normal, alarm, supervisory, and trouble. The instructions shall be approved by the Contracting Officer before being posted.

2.13.11 Walk Test

The FACP shall have a walk test feature. When using this feature, operation of initiating devices shall result in limited system outputs, so that the notification appliances operate for only a few seconds and the event is indicated on the system printer, but no other outputs occur.



2.13.12 History Logging

In addition to the required printer output, the control panel shall have the ability to store a minimum of 400 events in a log. These events shall be stored in a battery-protected memory and shall remain in the memory until the memory is downloaded or cleared manually. Resetting of the control panel shall not clear the memory.

2.14 AMPLIFIERS, PREAMPLIFIERS, TONE GENERATORS

Any amplifiers, preamplifiers, tone generators, digitalized voice generators, and other hardware necessary for a complete, operational, textual audible circuit conforming to NFPA 72 shall be housed in a remote FMCP, terminal cabinet, or in the FMCP. Submit data to indicate that the amplifiers have sufficient capacity to simultaneously drive all notification speakers at their actual tap setting plus 25 percent spare capacity. Annotate data for each circuit on the drawings.

2.14.1 Operation

The system shall automatically operate and control all building speakers except those installed in the stairs and within elevator cabs. The speakers in the stairs and elevator cabs shall operate only when the microphone is used to deliver live messages.

2.14.2 Construction

Amplifiers shall utilize computer grade solid state components and shall be provided with output protection devices sufficient to protect the amplifier against any transient up to 10 times the highest rated voltage in the system.

2.14.3 Inputs

Equip each system with separate inputs for the tone generator, digitalized voice driver and panel mounted microphone . Microphone inputs shall be of the low impedance, balanced line type. Both microphone and tone generator input shall be operational on any amplifier.

2.14.4 Tone Generator

The tone generator shall be of the modular, plug-in type with securely attached labels to identify the component as a tone generator and to identify the specific tone it produces. The tone generator shall produce a code 3 temporal tone and shall be constantly repeated until interrupted by either the digitalized voice message, the microphone input, or the alarm silence mode as specified. The tone generator shall be single channel with an automatic backup generator per channel such that failure of the primary tone generator causes the backup generator to automatically take over the functions of the failed unit and also causes transfer of the common trouble relay.

2.14.5 Protection Circuits

Each amplifier shall be constantly supervised for any condition that could render the amplifier inoperable at its maximum output. Failure of any component shall cause automatic transfer to a designated backup amplifier, illumination of a visual "amplifier trouble" indicator on the control panel, appropriate logging of the condition on the system printer, and



other actions for trouble conditions as specified.

2.15 ANNUNCIATOR

2.15.1 Annunciator Panel

Provide an annunciator that includes an LCD display. The display shall indicate the device in trouble/alarm or any supervisory device. Display the device name, address, and actual building location.

A building floor plan shall be provided mounted (behind plexiglass or similar protective material) at the annunciator location. The floor plan shall indicate all rooms by name and number including the locations of stairs and elevators. The floor plan shall show all devices and their programmed address to facilitate their physical location from the LCD display information.

2.15.2 Programming

Where programming for the operation of the annunciator is accomplished by a separate software program than the software for the FMCP, the software program shall not require reprogramming after loss of power. The software shall be reprogrammable in the field.

2.16 MANUAL STATIONS

Provide metal or plastic, semi-flush mounted, double action, addressable manual stations, that are not subject to operation by jarring or vibration. Stations shall be equipped with screw terminals for each conductor. Stations that require the replacement of any portion of the device after activation are not permitted. Stations shall be finished in fire-engine red with molded raised lettering operating instructions of contrasting color. The use of a key or wrench shall be required to reset the station. Manual stations shall be mounted at 44 inches. Stations shall have a separate screw terminal for each conductor.

2.17 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

2.17.1 Fire Alarm/Mass Notification Speakers

Audible appliances shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 464. Appliances shall be connected into notification appliance circuits. Surface mounted audible appliances shall be painted white. Recessed audible appliances shall be installed with a grill that is painted white.

a. Speakers shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 1480. Speakers shall have six different sound output levels and operate with audio line input levels of 70.7 VRMs and 25 VRMs, by means of selectable tap settings. Tap settings shall include taps of 1/8, 1/4, 1/2, 1, and 2 watt. Speakers shall incorporate a high efficiency speaker for maximum output at minimum power across a frequency range of 150 Hz to 10,000 Hz, and shall have a sealed back construction. Speakers shall be capable of installation on standard 4 inch square electrical boxes. Where speakers and strobes are provided in the same location, they may be combined into a single wall mounted unit. All inputs shall be polarized for compatibility with standard reverse polarity supervision of circuit wiring via the FMCP.

b. Provide speaker mounting plates constructed of cold rolled steel having



a minimum thickness of 16 gauge or molded high impact plastic and equipped with mounting holes and other openings as needed for a complete installation. Fabrication marks and holes shall be ground and finished to provide a smooth and neat appearance for each plate. Each plate shall be primed and painted.

c. Speakers shall utilize screw terminals for termination of all field wiring.

2.17.2 Visual Notification Appliances

Visual notification appliances shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 1971 and conform to the Architectural Barriers Act (ABA). Colored lens, such as amber, shall comply with UL 1638. The manufacturer shall have the color lens tested to the full UL 1971 polar plotting criteria, voltage drop, and temperature rise as stated in 1971. Fire Alarm/Mass Notification Appliances shall have clear high intensity optic lens, xenon flash tubes, and output white light and be marked "ALERT" in red letters. The light pattern shall be disbursed so that it is visible above and below the strobe and from a 90 degree angle on both sides of the strobe. Strobe flash rate shall be 1 flash per second and a minimum of 75 candela (actual output after derating for tinted lens) based on the UL 1971 test. Strobe shall be semi-flush mounted. Where more than two appliances are located in the same room or corridor or field of view, provide synchronized operation. Devices shall use screw terminals for all field wiring.

2.18 ENVIRONMENTAL ENCLOSURES OR GUARDS

Environmental enclosures shall be provided to permit Fire Alarm or Mass Notification components to be used in areas that exceed the environmental limits of the listing. The enclosure shall be listed for the device or appliance as either a manufactured part number or as a listed compatible accessory for the UL category that the component is currently listed. Guards required to deter mechanical damage shall be either a listed manufactured part or a listed accessory for the category of the initiating device or notification appliance.

2.19 INTERFACE TO THE BASE WIDE MASS NOTIFICATION NETWORK

2.19.1 Radio

The radio transceiver Government furnished, Government installed

2.20 AUTOMATIC FIRE TRANSMITTERS

2.20.1 Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT)

Provide DACT that is compatible with the existing supervising station fire alarm system. Coordinate requirements with the contracting officer. Transmitter shall have a means to transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions via a single transmitter. Transmitter shall have a source of power for operation that conforms to NFPA 72. Transmitter shall be capable of initiating a test signal daily at any selected time. Transmitter shall be arranged to seize telephone circuits in accordance with NFPA 72.

2.20.2 Signals to Be Transmitted to the Base Receiving Station

The signals indicated on the drawings shall be sent to the base receiving station.



2.21 WIRING

Provide wiring materials under this section as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM with the additions and modifications specified herein. All fire alarm cables shall be installed in red raceways.

2.21.1 Alarm Wiring

The SLC wiring shall be solid copper cable in accordance with the manufacturers requirements. Copper signaling line circuits and initiating device circuit field wiring shall be No. 14 AWG size twisted and shielded solid conductors at a minimum. Visual notification appliance circuit conductors, that contain audible alarm appliances, shall be solid copper No. 14 AWG size conductors at a minimum. Speaker circuits shall be copper No. 16 AWG size twisted and shielded conductors at a minimum. Wire size shall be sufficient to prevent voltage drop problems. Circuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than the UL listed voltages for the sensors and/or appliances. Power wiring, operating at 120 VAC minimum, shall be a minimum No. 12 AWG solid copper having similar insulation. Acceptable power-limited cables are FPL, FPLR or FPLP as appropriate with red colored covering. Nonpower-limited cables shall comply with NFPA 70.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF FIRE ALARM INITIATING DEVICES AND NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

3.1.1 FMCP

Locate the FMCP where indicated on the drawings. Surface mount the enclosure with the top of the cabinet 6 feet above the finished floor or center the cabinet at 5 feet, whichever is lower. Conductor terminations shall be labeled and a drawing containing conductors, their labels, their circuits, and their interconnection shall be permanently mounted in the FMCP.

3.1.2 Manual Stations:

Locate manual stations as required by NFPA 72 and as shown on the drawingss. Mount stations so that their operating handles are 4 feet above the finished floor. Mount stations so they are located no farther than 5 feet from the exit door they serve, measured horizontally.

3.1.3 Notification Appliance Devices

Locate notification appliance devices where indicated. Mount assemblies on walls as required by NFPA 72 and to meet the intelligibility requirements. Ceiling mounted speakers shall conform to NFPA 72.

3.1.4 Smoke Sensors

Locate sensors as indicated on a 4 inch mounting box. Locate smoke and heat sensors on the ceiling. Install heat sensors not less than 4 inches from a side wall to the near edge. Heat sensors located on the wall shall have the top of the sensor at least 4 inches below the ceiling, but not more than 12 inches below the ceiling. Smoke sensors are permitted to be on the wall no lower than 12 inches from the ceiling with no minimum distance from the ceiling. In raised floor spaces, install the smoke



sensors to protect 225 square feet per sensor. Install smoke sensors no closer than 5 feet from air handling supply outlets.

3.1.5 Annunciator

Locate the annunciator as shown on the drawings. Surface mount the panel, with the top of the panel 6 feet above the finished floor or center the panel at 5 feet, whichever is lower.

3.1.6 Water Flow Detectors and Tamper Switches

Connect to water flow detectors and tamper switches.

3.1.7 Local Operating Console (LOC)

Locate the LOC as required by NFPA 72 and as indicated. Mount the console so that the top message button is no higher than 44 inches above the floor.

3.2 SYSTEM FIELD WIRING

3.2.1 Wiring within Cabinets, Enclosures, and Boxes

Provide wiring installed in a neat and workmanlike manner and installed parallel with or at right angles to the sides and back of any box, enclosure, or cabinet. Conductors that are terminated, spliced, or otherwise interrupted in any enclosure, cabinet, mounting, or junction box shall be connected to screw-type terminal blocks. Mark each terminal in accordance with the wiring diagrams of the system. The use of wire nuts or similar devices is prohibited. Conform wiring to NFPA 70.

Indicate the following in the wiring diagrams.

a. Point-to-point wiring diagrams showing the points of connection and terminals used for electrical field connections in the system, including interconnections between the equipment or systems that are supervised or controlled by the system. Diagrams shall show connections from field devices to the FACP and remote fire alarm control units, initiating circuits, switches, relays and terminals.

b. Complete riser diagrams indicating the wiring sequence of devices and their connections to the control equipment. Include a color code schedule for the wiring. Include floor plans showing the locations of devices and equipment.

3.2.2 Alarm Wiring

Voltages shall not be mixed in any junction box, housing, or device, except those containing power supplies and control relays. Provide all wiring in electrical metallic conduit. Conceal conduit in finished areas of new construction and wherever practicable in existing construction. The use of flexible conduit not exceeding a 6 foot length shall be permitted in initiating device or notification appliance circuits. Run conduit or tubing (rigid, IMC, EMT, FMC, etc. as permitted by NFPA 72 and NFPA 70) concealed unless specifically indicated otherwise.

3.2.3 Conductor Terminations

Labeling of conductors at terminal blocks in terminal cabinets, FMCP, and remote FMCP and the LOC shall be provided at each conductor connection.



Each conductor or cable shall have a shrink-wrap label to provide a unique and specific designation. Each terminal cabinet, FMCP, and remote FMCP shall contain a laminated drawing that indicates each conductor, its label, circuit, and terminal. The laminated drawing shall be neat, using 12 point lettering minimum size, and mounted within each cabinet, panel, or unit so that it does not interfere with the wiring or terminals. Maintain existing color code scheme where connecting to existing equipment.

3.3 DISCONNECTION AND REMOVAL OF EXISTING SYSTEM

Completely remove existing fire alarm equipment.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

Provide firestopping for holes at conduit penetrations through floor slabs, fire rated walls, partitions with fire rated doors, corridor walls, and vertical service shafts in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.

3.5 PAINTING

Paint exposed electrical, fire alarm conduit, and surface metal raceway to match adjacent finishes in exposed areas. Paint junction boxes red in unfinished areas and conduits and surface metal raceways shall be painted with a 1-inch wide red band every 10 feet in unfinished areas.. Painting shall comply with Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.


3.6.1 Testing Procedures

Submit detailed test procedures, prepared and signed by a Registered Professional Engineer or a NICET Level 3 Fire Alarm Technician, and signed by representative of the installing company, for the fire detection and alarm system 60 days prior to performing system tests. Detailed test procedures shall list all components of the installed system such as initiating devices and circuits, notification appliances and circuits, signaling line devices and circuits, control devices/equipment, batteries, transmitting and receiving equipment, power sources/supply, annunciators, special hazard equipment, emergency communication equipment, interface equipment, Guard's Tour equipment, and transient (surge) suppressors. Test procedures shall include sequence of testing, time estimate for each test, and sample test data forms. The test data forms shall be in a check-off format (pass/fail with space to add applicable test data; similar to the forma in NFPA 72) and shall be used for the preliminary testing and the acceptance testing. The test data forms shall record the test results and shall:

a. Identify the NFPA Class of all Initiating Device Circuits (IDC), Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC), Voice Notification System Circuits (NAC Audio), and Signaling Line Circuits (SLC).

b. Identify each test required by NFPA 72 Test Methods and required test herein to be performed on each component, and describe how this test shall be performed.

c. Identify each component and circuit as to type, location within the facility, and unique identity within the installed system. Provide necessary floor plan sheets showing each component location, test location, and alphanumeric identity.



d. Identify all test equipment and personnel required to perform each test (including equipment necessary for testing smoke detectors using real smoke).

e. Provide space to identify the date and time of each test. Provide space to identify the names and signatures of the individuals conducting and witnessing each test.

3.6.2 Tests Stages

3.6.2.1 Preliminary Testing

Conduct preliminary tests to ensure that devices and circuits are functioning properly. Tests shall meet the requirements of paragraph entitled "Minimum System Tests." After preliminary testing is complete, provide a letter certifying that the installation is complete and fully operable. The letter shall state that each initiating and indicating device was tested in place and functioned properly. The letter shall also state that panel functions were tested and operated properly. The letter shall include the names and titles of the witnesses to the preliminary tests. The Contractor and an authorized representative from each supplier of equipment shall be in attendance at the preliminary testing to make necessary adjustments.

3.6.2.2 Request for Formal Inspection and Tests

When tests have been completed and corrections made, submit a signed, dated certificate with a request for formal inspection and tests to the Naval Facilities Engineering Command, MIDLANT, Fire Protection Engineer.

3.6.2.3 Final Testing

Notify the Contracting Officer in writing when the system is ready for final acceptance testing. Submit request for test at least 15 calendar days prior to the test date. The tests shall be performed in accordance with the approved test procedures in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Furnish instruments and personnel required for the tests. A final acceptance test will not be scheduled until the following are provided at the job site:

a. The systems manufacturer's technical representative

b. Marked-up red line drawings of the system as actually installed

c. Megger test results

d. Loop resistance test results

e. Complete program printout including input/output addresses

The final tests will be witnessed by the Naval Facilities Engineering Command, MIDLANT, Fire Protection Engineer. At this time, any and all required tests shall be repeated at their discretion.

3.6.2.4 System Acceptance

Following acceptance of the system, as-built drawings and O&M manuals shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer for review and acceptance. Submit



six sets of detailed as-built drawings. The drawings shall show the system as installed, including deviations from both the project drawings and the approved shop drawings. These drawings shall be submitted within two weeks after the final acceptance test of the system. At least one set of as-built (marked-up) drawings shall be provided at the time of, or prior to the final acceptance test.

a. Furnish one set of full size paper as-built drawings and schematics. The drawings shall be prepared on uniform sized mylar sheets not less than 30 by 42 inches with 8 by 4 inch title block similar to contract drawings. Furnish one set of CD or DVD discs containing software back-up and CAD based drawings in latest version of AutoCAD and DXF format of as-built drawings and schematics.

b. Include complete wiring diagrams showing connections between devices and equipment, both factory and field wired.

c. Include a riser diagram and drawings showing the as-built location of devices and equipment.

3.6.3 Minimum System Tests

Test the system in accordance with the procedures outlined in NFPA 72, ISO 7240-16, IEC 60268-16. The required tests are as follows:

a. Megger Tests: After wiring has been installed, and prior to making any connections to panels or devices, wiring shall be megger tested for insulation resistance, grounds, and/or shorts. Conductors with 300 volt rated insulation shall be tested at a minimum of 250 VDC. Conductors with 600 volt rated insulation shall be tested at a minimum of 500 VDC. The tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer and test results recorded for use at the final acceptance test.

b. Loop Resistance Tests: Measure and record the resistance of each circuit with each pair of conductors in the circuit short-circuited at the farthest point from the circuit origin. The tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer and test results recorded for use at the final acceptance test.

c. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground. The tests shall be accomplished at the preliminary test with results available at the final system test.

d. Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer's O&M manual.

e. Test each initiating device and notification appliance and circuit for proper operation and response at the control unit. Smoke sensors shall be tested in accordance with manufacturer's recommended calibrated test method. Use of magnets is prohibited. Testing of duct smoke detectors shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 72 except that, for item 12(e) (Supervision) in Table 14.4.2.2, disconnect at least 20 percent of devices. If there is a failure at these devices, then supervision shall be tested at each device.

f. Test the system for specified functions in accordance with the contract drawings and specifications and the manufacturer's O&M manual.



g. Test both primary power and secondary power. Verify, by test, the secondary power system is capable of operating the system for the time period and in the manner specified.

h. Determine that the system is operable under trouble conditions as specified.

i. Visually inspect wiring.

j. Test the battery charger and batteries.

k. Verify that software control and data files have been entered or programmed into the FACP. Hard copy records of the software shall be provided to the Contracting Officer.

l. Verify that red-line drawings are accurate.

m. Measure the current in circuits to ensure there is the calculated spare capacity for the circuits.

n. Measure voltage readings for circuits to ensure that voltage drop is not excessive.

o. Disconnect the verification feature for smoke sensors during tests to minimize the amount of smoke needed to activate the sensor. Testing of smoke sensors shall be conducted using real smoke or the use of canned smoke which is permitted.

p. Measure the voltage drop at the most remote appliance (based on wire length) on each notification appliance circuit.

3.6.3.1 Intelligibility Tests

Intelligibility testing of the System shall be accomplished in accordance with NFPA 72 for Voice Evacuation Systems, IEC 60268-16, and ASA S3.2. Following are the specific requirements for intelligibility tests:

a. Intelligibility Requirements: Verify intelligibility by measurement after installation.

b. Ensure that a CIS value greater than the required minimum value is provided in each area where building occupants typically could be found. The minimum required value for CIS is .7 .

c. Areas of the building provided with hard wall and ceiling surfaces (such as metal or concrete) that are found to cause excessive sound reflections may be permitted to have a CIS score less than the minimum required value if approved by the DOD installation, and if building occupants in these areas can determine that a voice signal is being broadcast and they must walk no more than 33 feet to find a location with at least the minimum required CIS value within the same area.

d. Areas of the building where occupants are not expected to be normally present are permitted to have a CIS score less than the minimum required value if personnel can determine that a voice signal is being broadcast and they must walk no more than 50 feet to a location with at least the minimum required CIS value within the same area.

e. Take measurements near the head level applicable for most personnel in



the space under normal conditions (e.g., standing, sitting, sleeping, as appropriate).

f. The distance the occupant must walk to the location meeting the minimum required CIS value shall be measured on the floor or other walking surface as follows:

(1) Along the centerline of the natural path of travel, starting from any point subject to occupancy with less than the minimum required CIS value.

(2) Curving around any corners or obstructions, with a 12 inches clearance there from.

(3) Terminating directly below the location where the minimum required CIS value has been obtained.

Use commercially available test instrumentation to measure intelligibility as specified by ISO 7240-19 and ISO 7240-16 as applicable. Use the mean value of at least three readings to compute the intelligibility score at each test location.

3.7 INSTRUCTION OF GOVERNMENT EMPLOYEES

3.7.1 Instructor

Include in the project the services of an instructor, who has received specific training from the manufacturer for the training of other persons regarding the inspection, testing, and maintenance of the system provided. The instructor shall train the Government employees designated by the Contracting Officer, in the care, adjustment, maintenance, and operation of the fire alarm and fire detection system. Each instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of this installation. The instructor shall be trained in operating theory as well as in practical O&M work. Submit the instructors information and qualifications including the training history.

3.7.2 Required Instruction Time

Provide 8 hours of instruction after final acceptance of the system. The instruction shall be given during regular working hours on such dates and times as are selected by the Contracting Officer. The instruction may be divided into two or more periods at the discretion of the Contracting Officer. The training shall allow for rescheduling for unforeseen maintenance and/or fire department responses.

3.7.2.1 Technical Training

Equipment manufacturer or a factory representative shall provide 1 days of on site. Training shall allow for classroom instruction as well as individual hands on programming, troubleshooting and diagnostics exercises. Training shall occur within 6 months of system acceptance.

3.8 Technical Data and Computer Software

Provide, in manual format, lesson plans, operating instructions, maintenance procedures, and training data for the training courses. The operations training shall familiarize designated government personnel with proper operation of the installed system. The maintenance training course



shall provide the designated government personnel adequate knowledge required to diagnose, repair, maintain, and expand functions inherent to the system.




SECTION 31 23 00.00 20

EXCAVATION AND FILL02/11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AWWA C600 (2010) Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances


ASTM C136 (2006) Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

ASTM C33/C33M (2013) Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates

ASTM D1140 (2000; R 2006) Amount of Material in Soils Finer than the No. 200 (75-micrometer) Sieve

ASTM D1556 (2007) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method

ASTM D1557 (2012) Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3) (2700 kN-m/m3)

ASTM D2216 (2010) Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by Mass

ASTM D2321 (2011) Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications

ASTM D2487 (2011) Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)

ASTM D4318 (2010) Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils

ASTM D6938 (2010) Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)

SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 1


U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)

EM 385-1-1 (2008; Errata 1-2010; Changes 1-3 2010; Changes 4-6 2011; Change 7 2012) Safety and Health Requirements Manual


EPA SW-846.3-3 (1999, Third Edition, Update III-A) Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste: Physical/Chemical Methods

1.2 DEFINITIONS

1.2.1 Capillary Water Barrier

A layer of clean, poorly graded crushed rock, stone, or gravel having a high porosity which is placed beneath a building slab with or without a vapor barrier to cut off the capillary flow of pore water to the area immediately below a slab.

1.2.2 Degree of Compaction

Degree of compaction is expressed as a percentage of the maximum density obtained by the test procedure presented in ASTM D1557, for general soil types, abbreviated as percent laboratory maximum density.

1.2.3 Hard Materials

Weathered rock, dense consolidated deposits, or conglomerate materials which are not included in the definition of "rock" but which usually require the use of heavy excavation equipment, ripper teeth, or jack hammers for removal.

1.2.4 Rock

Solid homogeneous interlocking crystalline material with firmly cemented, laminated, or foliated masses or conglomerate deposits, neither of which can be removed without systematic drilling and the use of expansion jacks or feather wedges, or the use of backhoe-mounted pneumatic hole punchers or rock breakers; also large boulders, buried masonry, or concrete other than pavement exceeding 1 cubic yard in volume. Removal of hard material will not be considered rock excavation because of intermittent drilling and blasting that is performed merely to increase production.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-06 Test Reports

Borrow Site Testing; G

Fill and backfill test

Select material test

SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 2


Porous fill test for capillary water barrier

Density tests

Moisture Content Tests

Copies of all laboratory and field test reports within 24 hours of the completion of the test.


Perform in a manner to prevent contamination or segregation of materials.

1.5 CRITERIA FOR BIDDING

Base bids on the following criteria:

a. Surface elevations are as indicated.

b. Pipes or other artificial obstructions, except those indicated, will not be encountered.

c. Ground water elevations indicated by the boring log were those existing at the time subsurface investigations were made and do not necessarily represent ground water elevation at the time of construction.

d. Material character is indicated by the boring logs.

e. Hard materials will not be encountered.

f. Borrow material and bedding material in the quantities required is not available at the project site or on Government property.

g. Blasting will not be permitted. Remove material in an approved manner.

1.6 REQUIREMENTS FOR OFF SITE SOIL

Soils brought in from off site for use as backfill shall be tested for petroleum hydrocarbons, BTEX, PCBs and HW characteristics (including toxicity, ignitability, corrosivity, and reactivity). Backfill shall not contain concentrations of these analytes above the appropriate State and/or EPA criteria, and shall pass the tests for HW characteristics. Determine petroleum hydrocarbon concentrations by using appropriate State protocols. Determine BTEX concentrations by using EPA SW-846.3-3 Method 5035/8260B. Perform complete TCLP in accordance with EPA SW-846.3-3 Method 1311. Perform HW characteristic tests for ignitability, corrosivity, and reactivity in accordance with accepted standard methods. Perform PCB testing in accordance with accepted standard methods for sampling and analysis of bulk solid samples. Provide borrow site testing for petroleum hydrocarbons and BTEX from a grab sample of material from the area most likely to be contaminated at the borrow site (as indicated by visual or olfactory evidence), with at least one test from each borrow site. For each borrow site, provide borrow site testing for HW characteristics from a composite sample of material, collected in accordance with standard soil sampling techniques. Do not bring material onsite until tests results have been received and approved by the Contracting Officer.

SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 3



1.7.1 Utilities

Movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes and utilities during construction shall be at the Contractor's risk. Excavation made with power-driven equipment is not permitted within two feet of known Government-owned utility or subsurface construction. For work immediately adjacent to or for excavations exposing a utility or other buried obstruction, excavate by hand. Start hand excavation on each side of the indicated obstruction and continue until the obstruction is uncovered or until clearance for the new grade is assured. Support uncovered lines or other existing work affected by the contract excavation until approval for backfill is granted by the Contracting Officer. Report damage to utility lines or subsurface construction immediately to the Contracting Officer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

2.1.1 Satisfactory Materials

Any materials classified by ASTM D2487 as GW, GP, GM, GP-GM, GW-GM, GC, GP-GC, GM-GC, SW, SP, SM, SC, SP-SM, CL, ML, CL-ML, free of debris, roots, wood, scrap material, vegetation, refuse, soft unsound particles, and deleterious, or objectionable materials. Unless specified otherwise, the maximum particle diameter shall be one-half the lift thickness at the intended location.

2.1.2 Unsatisfactory Materials

Materials which do not comply with the requirements for satisfactory materials. Unsatisfactory materials also include man-made fills, trash, refuse, or backfills from previous construction and soil materials classified as CH, MH, OL, HO and topsoil. Unsatisfactory material also includes material classified as satisfactory which contains root and other organic matter, frozen material, and stones larger than 3 inches. The Contracting Officer shall be notified of any contaminated materials.

2.1.3 Cohesionless and Cohesive Materials

Cohesionless materials include materials classified in ASTM D2487 as GW, GP, SW, and SP. Cohesive materials include materials classified as GC, SC, ML, CL, MH, and CH. Materials classified as GM, GP-GM, GW-GM, SW-SM, SP-SM, and SM shall be identified as cohesionless only when the fines are nonplastic (plasticity index equals zero). Materials classified as GM and SM will be identified as cohesive only when the fines have a plasticity index greater than zero.

2.1.4 Common Fill

Approved, unclassified soil material with the characteristics required to compact to the soil density specified for the intended location.

2.1.5 Select Material (Engineered Fill)

Provide materials classified as GW, GP, SW, SP, or SP-SM by ASTM D2487 where indicated. The liquid limit of such material shall not exceed 35 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D4318. The plasticity index

SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 4


shall not be greater than 9 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D4318, and not more than 35 percent by weight shall be finer than No. 200 sieve when tested in accordance with ASTM D1140, and shall have a modified proctor (ASTM D1557) minimum density of at least 105 pounds per cubic foot.

2.1.6 Topsoil

Provide as specified in Section 32 92 23 SODDING.

2.2 POROUS FILL FOR CAPILLARY WATER BARRIER

ASTM C33/C33M coarse aggregate Size 57 and conforming to the general soil material requirements specified in paragraph entitled "Satisfactory Materials."

2.3 UTILITY BEDDING MATERIAL

Except as specified otherwise in the individual piping section, provide bedding for buried piping in accordance with AWWA C600, Type 4, except as specified herein. Backfill to top of pipe shall be compacted to 95 percent of ASTM D1557 maximum density. Plastic piping shall have bedding to spring line of pipe. Provide ASTM D2321 materials as follows:

a. Class I: Angular, 0.25 to 1.5 inches, graded stone, including a number of fill materials that have regional significance such as coral, slag, cinders, crushed stone, and crushed shells.

b. Class II: Coarse sands and gravels with maximum particle size of 1.5 inches, including various graded sands and gravels containing small percentages of fines, generally granular and noncohesive, either wet or dry. Soil Types GW, GP, SW, and SP are included in this class as specified in ASTM D2487.

2.3.1 Sand

Clean, coarse-grained sand classified as SW or SP by ASTM D2487 for bedding and backfill as indicated.

2.4 BORROW

Obtain borrow materials required in excess of those furnished from excavations from sources outside of Government property.

2.5 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE

Polyethylene plastic and metallic core or metallic-faced, acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene plastic warning tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried utility lines. Provide tape on rolls, 3 inch minimum width, color coded as specified below for the intended utility with warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously over the entire tape length. Warning and identification to read, "CAUTION, BURIED (intended service) LINE BELOW" or similar wording. Color and printing shall be permanent, unaffected by moisture or soil.

SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 5


Warning Tape Color Codes

Red: Electric

Yellow: Gas

Orange: Telephone and Other Communications

Blue: Potable Water Systems

Green: Sewer Systems

White: Steam Systems

2.5.1 Warning Tape for Metallic Piping

Acid and alkali-resistant polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing requirements specified above. Minimum thickness of tape shall be 0.003 inch. Tape shall have a minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise, and 1250 psi crosswise, with a maximum 350 percent elongation.

2.5.2 Detectable Warning Tape for Non-Metallic Piping

Polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing requirements specified above. Minimum thickness of the tape shall be 0.004 inch. Tape shall have a minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise and 1250 psi crosswise. Tape shall be manufactured with integral wires, foil backing, or other means of enabling detection by a metal detector when tape is buried up to 3 feet deep. Encase metallic element of the tape in a protective jacket or provide with other means of corrosion protection.

2.6 DETECTION WIRE FOR NON-METALLIC PIPING

Detection wire shall be insulated single strand, solid copper with a minimum of 12 AWG.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION

3.1.1 Shoring and Sheeting

Provide shoring cribbing, trench boxes, underpinning, and sheeting as required. In addition to Section 25 A and B of EM 385-1-1 and other requirements set forth in this contract, include provisions that will accomplish the following:

a. Prevent undermining of pavements, foundations and slabs.

b. Prevent slippage or movement in banks or slopes adjacent to the excavation.

c. Minimize damage to existing trees that are to remain.

3.1.2 Drainage and Dewatering

Provide for the collection and disposal of surface and subsurface water encountered during construction.

SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 6


3.1.2.1 Drainage

So that construction operations progress successfully, completely drain construction site during periods of construction to keep soil materials sufficiently dry. The Contractor shall establish/construct storm drainage features (ponds/basins) at the earliest stages of site development, and throughout construction grade the construction area to provide positive surface water runoff away from the construction activity and/or provide temporary ditches, dikes, swales, and other drainage features and equipment as required to maintain dry soils, prevent erosion and undermining of foundations. When unsuitable working platforms for equipment operation and unsuitable soil support for subsequent construction features develop, remove unsuitable material and provide new soil material as specified herein. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to assess the soil and ground water conditions presented by the plans and specifications and to employ necessary measures to permit construction to proceed. Excavated slopes and backfill surfaces shall be protected to prevent erosion and sloughing. Excavation shall be performed so that the site, the area immediately surrounding the site, and the area affecting operations at the site shall be continually and effectively drained.

3.1.2.2 Dewatering

Groundwater flowing toward or into excavations shall be controlled to prevent sloughing of excavation slopes and walls, boils, uplift and heave in the excavation and to eliminate interference with orderly progress of construction. French drains, sumps, ditches or trenches will not be permitted within 3 feet of the foundation of any structure, except with specific written approval, and after specific contractual provisions for restoration of the foundation area have been made. Control measures shall be taken by the time the excavation reaches the water level in order to maintain the integrity of the in situ material. While the excavation is open, the water level shall be maintained continuously, at least 2 feet below the working level.

3.1.3 Underground Utilities

Location of the existing utilities indicated is approximate. The Contractor shall physically verify the location and elevation of the existing utilities indicated prior to starting construction. The Contractor shall contact the Public Works Department for assistance in locating existing utilities.

3.1.4 Machinery and Equipment

Movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes during construction shall be at the Contractor's risk. Repair, or remove and provide new pipe for existing or newly installed pipe that has been displaced or damaged. The compaction effort within the vibratory equipment exclusion zone indicated shall be accomplished by hand compaction only. Use of vibratory equipment within the exclusion zone shall not be permitted.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

3.2.1 Clearing and Grubbing

Unless indicated otherwise, remove trees, stumps, logs, shrubs, brush and vegetation and other items that would interfere with construction

SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 7


operations as indicated. Remove stumps entirely. Grub out matted roots and roots over 2 inches in diameter to at least 18 inches below existing surface.

3.2.2 Stripping

Strip suitable soil from the site where excavation or grading is indicated and stockpile separately from other excavated material. Material unsuitable for use as topsoil shall be wasted. Locate topsoil so that the material can be used readily for the finished grading. Where sufficient existing topsoil conforming to the material requirements is not available on site, provide borrow materials suitable for use as topsoil. Protect topsoil and keep in segregated piles until needed.

3.2.3 Unsuitable Material

Remove vegetation, debris, decayed vegetable matter, sod, mulch, and rubbish underneath paved areas or concrete slabs, and miscellaneous utilities as indicated and required.

3.3 EXCAVATION

Excavate to contours, elevation, and dimensions indicated. Reuse excavated materials that meet the specified requirements for the material type required at the intended location. Keep excavations free from water. Excavate soil disturbed or weakened by Contractor's operations, soils softened or made unsuitable for subsequent construction due to exposure to weather. Excavations below indicated depths will not be permitted except to remove unsatisfactory material. Unsatisfactory material encountered below the grades shown shall be over-excavated as directed. Refill with select material and compact to 95 percent of ASTM D1557 maximum density. Unless specified otherwise, refill excavations cut below indicated depth with select material and compact to 95 percent of ASTM D1557 maximum density. Satisfactory material removed below the depths indicated, without specific direction of the Contracting Officer, shall be replaced with select materials to the indicated excavation grade Determination of elevations and measurements of approved overdepth excavation of unsatisfactory material below grades indicated shall be done under the direction of the Contracting Officer. The compaction effort within the vibratory equipment exclusion zone indicated shall be accomplished by hand compaction only. Use of vibratory equipment within the exclusion zone shall not be permitted.

3.3.1 Structures With Spread Footings

Ensure that footing subgrades have been inspected and approved by the Contracting Officer prior to concrete placement. Fill over excavations with concrete during foundation placement.

3.3.2 Pipe Trenches

Excavate to the dimension indicated. Grade bottom of trenches to provide uniform support for each section of pipe after pipe bedding placement. Tamp if necessary to provide a firm pipe bed. Recesses shall be excavated to accommodate bells and joints so that pipe will be uniformly supported for the entire length. Hard material and/or rock, where encountered, shall be excavated to a depth of at least 6 inches below the bottom of the pipe.

SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 8


3.3.3 Excavated Materials

Satisfactory excavated material required for fill or backfill shall be placed in the proper section of the permanent work required or shall be separately stockpiled if it cannot be readily placed. Satisfactory material in excess of that required for the permanent work and all unsatisfactory material shall be disposed of as specified in Paragraph "DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL."

3.3.4 Final Grade of Surfaces to Support Concrete

Excavation to final grade shall not be made until just before concrete is to be placed. Only excavation methods that will leave the foundation rock in a solid and unshattered condition shall be used. Approximately level surfaces shall be roughened, and sloped surfaces shall be cut as indicated into rough steps or benches to provide a satisfactory bond.

3.4 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

Unsatisfactory material in surfaces to receive fill or in excavated areas shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory materials as directed by the Contracting Officer. The surface shall be scarified to a depth of 6 inches before the fill is started. Sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal shall be plowed, stepped, benched, or broken up so that the fill material will bond with the existing material. When subgrades are less than the specified density, the ground surface shall be broken up to a minimum depth of 6 inches, pulverized, and compacted to the specified density. When the subgrade is part fill and part excavation or natural ground, the excavated or natural ground portion shall be scarified to a depth of 12 inches and compacted as specified for the adjacent fill. Material shall not be placed on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost. Compaction shall be accomplished by sheepsfoot rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, or other approved equipment well suited to the soil being compacted. Material shall be moistened or aerated as necessary to plus or minus 3 percent of optimum moisture. Minimum subgrade density shall be as specified herein. The compaction effort within the vibratory equipment exclusion zone indicated shall be accomplished by hand compaction only. Use of vibratory equipment within the exclusion zone shall not be permitted.

3.4.1 Proof Rolling

Proof rolling shall be done on an exposed subgrade outside of exclusion zone and free of surface water (wet conditions resulting from rainfall) which would promote degradation of an otherwise acceptable subgrade. After stripping, proof roll the existing subgrade of the building and, retaining walls with six passes of a smooth drum roller with a minimum axle weight of 10 tons. Operate the roller in a systematic manner to ensure the number of passes over all areas, and at speeds between 2 1/2 to 3 1/2 miles per hour. When proof rolling under buildings, the building subgrade shall be considered to extend 10 feet beyond the building lines, and one-half of the passes made with the roller shall be in a direction perpendicular to the other passes. Notify the Contracting Officer a minimum of 3 days prior to proof rolling. Proof rolling shall be performed in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Rutting or pumping of material shall be undercut as directed by the Contracting Officer and replaced with select material. Pause proof rolling operations as required to allow groundwater that may be brought to the surface during proof rolling operations to recede. Rubber tired equipment shall not be allowed on exposed subgrade. Proof rolling

SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 9


shall be performed in the areas indicated as exclusion zone.

3.5 FILLING AND BACKFILLING

Fill and backfill to contours, elevations, and dimensions indicated. Compact each lift before placing overlaying lift. Heavy equipment for spreading and compacting backfill shall not be operated within the vibratory equipment exclusion zone indicated or closer to foundations or retaining walls than a distance equal to the height of backfill above the top of footing. Areas within the vibratory exclusion zone indicated and areas not accessible to rollers or compactors shall be compacted by hand. Use of vibratory equipment within the indicated exclusion zone shall not be permitted.

3.5.1 Common Fill Placement

Provide for general site structures. Use satisfactory materials. Place in 8 inch loose lifts. Compact areas not accessible to rollers or compactors by hand. Aerate material excessively moistened by rain to a satisfactory moisture content. Finish to a smooth surface by blading, rolling with a smooth roller, or both.

3.5.2 Select Material Placement

Provide under porous fill of structures, paved areas and under concrete slabs. Place in 8 inch loose lifts. Do not place over wet or frozen areas. Backfill adjacent to structures shall be placed as structural elements are completed and accepted. Backfill against concrete only when approved. Place and compact material to avoid loading upon or against structure. Care shall be taken to provide a smooth, gently sloping ground surface at the end of each day's earthwork activities to prevent the potential of ponding and absorption of surface water.

3.5.3 Backfill and Fill Material Placement Over Pipes and at Walls

Backfilling shall not begin until construction below finish grade has been approved, underground utilities systems have been inspected, tested and approved, forms removed, and the excavation cleaned of trash and debris. Backfill shall be brought to indicated finish grade. Where pipe is coated or wrapped for protection against corrosion, the backfill material up to an elevation 2 feet above sewer lines and 1 foot above other utility lines shall be free from stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension. Compact in layers not more than 4 inches in compacted thickness. Backfill shall be placed carefully around pipes or tanks to avoid damage to coatings, wrappings, or tanks. Backfill shall not be placed against foundation walls prior to 7 days after completion of the walls. As far as practicable, backfill shall be brought up evenly on each side of the wall and sloped to drain away from the wall.

3.5.4 Porous Fill Placement

Provide under floor and area-way slabs on a compacted subgrade. Place in 4 inch lifts with a minimum of two passes of a hand-operated plate-type vibratory compactor.

3.5.5 Trench Backfilling

Backfill as rapidly as construction, testing, and acceptance of work permits. Place and compact backfill under structures and paved areas in 6

SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 10


inch lifts to top of trench and in 6 inch lifts to one foot over pipe outside structures and paved areas.

3.6 BORROW

Where satisfactory materials are not available in sufficient quantity from required excavations, approved borrow materials shall be obtained as specified herein.

3.7 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE

Provide buried utility lines with utility identification tape. Bury tape 12 inches below finished grade; under pavements and slabs, bury tape 6 inches below top of subgrade.

3.8 BURIED DETECTION WIRE

Bury detection wire directly above non-metallic piping at a distance not to exceed 12 inches above the top of pipe. The wire shall extend continuously and unbroken, from manhole to manhole. The ends of the wire shall terminate inside the manholes at each end of the pipe, with a minimum of 3 feet of wire, coiled, remaining accessible in each manhole. The wire shall remain insulated over it's entire length. The wire shall enter manholes between the top of the corbel and the frame, and extend up through the chimney seal between the frame and the chimney seal. For force mains, the wire shall terminate in the valve pit at the pump station end of the pipe.

3.9 COMPACTION

Determine in-place density of existing subgrade; if required density exists, no compaction of existing subgrade will be required. Density requirements specified herein are for cohesionless materials. When cohesive materials are encountered or used, density requirements may be reduced by 5 percent.

Areas within the vibratory exclusion zone indicated and areas not accessible to rollers or compactors shall be compacted by hand. Use of vibratory equipment within the indicated exclusion zone or closer to foundations or retaining walls than a distance equal to the height of backfill above the top of footing shall not be permitted.

3.9.1 General Site

Compact underneath areas designated for vegetation and areas outside the 10 foot line of the paved area or structure to 85 percent of ASTM D1557.

3.9.2 Structures, Spread Footings, and Concrete Slabs

Compact top 12 inches of subgrades to 95 percent of ASTM D1557. Compact select material to 95 percent of ASTM D1557.

3.9.3 Adjacent Area

Compact areas within 10 feet of structures to 90 percent of ASTM D1557.

3.9.4 Impervious Paved Areas

Compact top 12 inches of subgrades to 98 percent of ASTM D1557. Below 12 inches, compact select materials to 95 percent of ASTM D1557.

SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 11


3.10 FINISH OPERATIONS

3.10.1 Grading

Finish grades as indicated within one-tenth of one foot. Grade areas to drain water away from structures. Maintain areas free of trash and debris. For existing grades that will remain but which were disturbed by Contractor's operations, grade as directed.

3.10.2 Topsoil

Provide as specified in Section 32 92 23 SODDING.

3.10.3 Protection of Surfaces

Protect newly backfilled, graded, and topsoiled areas from traffic, erosion, and settlements that may occur. Repair or reestablish damaged grades, elevations, or slopes.

3.11 DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL

Remove from Government property surplus or other soil material not required or suitable for filling or backfilling, and brush, refuse, stumps, roots, and timber.


3.12.1 Sampling

Take the number and size of samples required to perform the following tests.

3.12.2 Testing

Perform one of each of the following tests for each material used. Provide additional tests for each source change.

3.12.2.1 Select Material Testing

Test select material in accordance with ASTM C136 for conformance to ASTM D2487 gradation limits; ASTM D1140 for material finer than the No. 200 sieve; ASTM D1557 for moisture density relations, as applicable.

3.12.2.2 Porous Fill Testing

Test porous fill in accordance with ASTM C136 for conformance to gradation specified in ASTM C33/C33M.

3.12.2.3 Density Tests

Test density in accordance with ASTM D1556, or ASTM D6938. When ASTM D6938 density tests are used, verify density test results by performing an ASTM D1556 density test at a location already ASTM D6938 tested as specified herein. Perform an ASTM D1556 density test at the start of the job, and for every 10 ASTM D6938 density tests thereafter. Test each lift at randomly selected locations every 2000 square feet of existing grade in fills for structures, concrete slabs and paved areas, and every 2500 square feet for other fill areas and every 2000 square feet of subgrade in cut. Include density test results in daily report.

SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 12


Bedding and backfill in trenches: One test per 50 linear feet in each lift.

3.12.2.4 Moisture Content Tests

In the stockpile, excavation or borrow areas, a minimum of two tests per day per type of material or source of materials being placed is required during stable weather conditions. During unstable weather, tests shall be made as dictated by local conditions and approved moisture content shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D2216. Include moisture content test results in daily report.


SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 13


SECTION 31 31 16

SOIL TREATMENT FOR SUBTERRANEAN TERMITE CONTROL08/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



7 USC Section 136 Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Termiticide Application Plan; GTermiticidesFoundation ExteriorUtilities and VentsCrawl and Plenum Air SpacesVerification of MeasurementApplication EquipmentWarranty

SD-04 Samples

Termiticides

SD-06 Test Reports

Equipment Calibration and Tank MeasurementSoil MoistureQuality Assurance

SD-07 Certificates

Qualifications


Comply with 7 USC Section 136 for requirements on Contractor's licensing, certification, and record keeping. Maintain daily records using Pest Management Maintenance Record, DD Form 1532-1 and submit copies of records when requested by the Contracting Officer. These forms may be obtained from the main web site:



http://www.dtic.mil/whs/directives/infomgt/forms/ddforms1500-1999.htm

Upon completion of this work, submit Pest Management Report DD Form 1532 signed by an officer of the Contractor,identifying target pest, type of operation, brand name and manufacturer of pesticide, formulation, concentration or rate of application used.


For the application of pesticides, use the services of a whose principal business is pest control. The shall be licensed and certified in the state where the work is to be performed. Termiticide applicators shall also be certified in the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) pesticide applicator category which includes structural pest control. Submit the qualifications and state license number of the termiticide applicator.

The applicator shall:

a. Have personnel with a state of North Carolina certification as required by Pesticide Law of 1971 as amended.

b. Check in with insect vectors personnel prior to application of pesticide and herbicides.

c. Provide a submittal with the following information to the Contracting Officer:

(1) Quantity of pesticide used.(2) Rate of dispersion.(3) Percent of use.(4) Total amount used.

1.3.2 Safety Requirements

Formulate, treat, and dispose of termiticides and their containers in accordance with label directions. Draw water for formulating only from sites designated by the Contracting Officer, and fit the filling hose with a backflow preventer meeting local plumbing codes or standards. The filling operation shall be under the direct and continuous observation of a contractor's representative to prevent overflow. Secure pesticides and related materials under lock and key when unattended. Ensure that proper protective clothing and equipment are worn and used during all phases of termiticide application. Dispose of used pesticide containers off Government property.


1.4.1 Delivery

Deliver termiticide material to the site in the original unopened containers bearing legible labels indicating the EPA registration number and manufacturer's registered uses. All other materials, to be used on site for the purpose of termite control, shall be delivered in new or otherwise good condition as supplied by the manufacturer or formulator.

1.4.2 Inspection

Inspect termiticides upon arrival at the job site for conformity to type



and quality in accordance with paragraph TERMITICIDES. Each label shall bear evidence of registration under the Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act (FIFRA), as amended or under appropriate regulations of the host county. Other materials shall be inspected for conformance with specified requirements. Remove unacceptable materials from the job site.

1.4.3 Storage

Store materials in designated areas and in accordance with manufacturer's labels. Termiticides and related materials shall be kept under lock and key when unattended.

1.4.4 Handling

Observe manufacturer's warnings and precautions. Termiticides shall be handled in accordance with manufacturer's labels, preventing contamination by dirt, water, and organic material. Protect termiticides from sunlight as recommended by the manufacturer.

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS

The following conditions will determine the time of application.

1.5.1 Soil Moisture

Soils to be treated shall be tested immediately before application. Test soil moisture content to a minimum depth of 3 inches. The soil moisture shall be as recommended by the termiticide manufacturer. The termiticide will not be applied when soil moisture exceeds manufacturer's recommendations because termiticides do not adhere to the soil particles in saturated soils.

1.5.2 Runoff and Wind Drift

Do not apply termiticide during or immediately following heavy rains. Applications shall not be performed when conditions may cause runoff or create an environmental hazard. Applications shall not be performed when average wind speed exceeds 10 miles per hour. The termiticide shall not be allowed to enter water systems, aquifers, or endanger humans or animals.

1.5.2.1 Vapor Barriers and Waterproof Membranes

Termiticide shall be applied prior to placement of a vapor barrier or waterproof membrane.

1.5.2.2 Utilities and Vents

Prior to application, HVAC ducts and vents located in treatment area shall be turned off and blocked to protect people and animals from termiticide. Submit written verification that utilities and vents have been located and treated as specified.

1.5.3 Placement of Concrete

Place concrete covering treated soils as soon as the termiticide has reached maximum penetration into the soil. Time for maximum penetration shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.



1.6 WARRANTY

Submit a copy of Contractor's 5-year written warranty against infestations or reinfestations by subterranean termites of the buildings or building additions constructed under this contract. Warranty shall include annual inspections of the buildings or building additions. If live subterranean termite infestation or subterranean termite damage is discovered during the warranty period, and the soil and building conditions have not been altered in the interim:

a. Retreat the soil and perform other treatment as may be necessary for elimination of subterranean termite infestation;

b. Repair damage caused by termite infestation; and

c. Reinspect the building approximately 180 days after the retreatment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TERMITICIDES

Submit manufacturer's label and Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for termiticides proposed for use. Provide termiticides currently registered by the EPA or approved for such use by the appropriate agency of the host county. Select non-repellant termiticide for maximum effectiveness and duration after application. The selected termiticide shall be suitable for the soil and climatic conditions at the project site. Submit samples of the pesticides used in this work. The Contracting Officer may draw, at any time and without prior notice, from stocks at the job site; should analysis, performed by the Government, indicate such samples to contain less than the amount of active ingredient specified on the label, work performed with such products shall be repeated, with pesticides conforming to this specification, at no additional cost to the Government.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 VERIFICATION OF MEASUREMENT

Once termiticide application has been completed, measure tank contents to determine the remaining volume. The total volume measurement of used contents for the application shall equal the established application rate for the project site conditions. Provide written verification that the volume of termiticide used meets the application rate.

3.2 TECHNICAL REPRESENTATIVE

The certified installation pest management coordinator shall be the technical representative, shall be present at all meetings concerning treatment measures for subterranean termites, and may be present during treatment application. The command Pest Control Coordinator shall be contacted prior to starting work.

3.3 SITE PREPARATION

Prepare the site in accordance with Section 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL. Work related to final grades, landscape plantings, foundations, or any other alterations to finished construction which might alter the condition of treated soils, must be coordinated with this specification.



3.3.1 Ground Preparation

Eliminate food sources by removing debris from clearing and grubbing and post construction wood scraps such as ground stakes, form boards, and scrap lumber from the site, before termiticide application begins.

3.3.2 Verification

Before work starts, verify that final grades are as indicated and smooth grading has been completed in accordance with Section 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL. Soil particles shall be finely graded with particles no larger than 1 inch and compacted to eliminate soil movement to the greatest degree.

3.3.3 Foundation Exterior

Provide written verification that final grading and landscape planting operations will not disturb treatment of the soil on the exterior sides of foundation walls, grade beams, and similar structures.

3.3.4 Utilities and Vents

Provide written verification that the location and identity of HVAC ducts and vents, water and sewer lines, and plumbing have been accomplished prior to the termiticide application.

3.3.5 Crawl and Plenum Air Spaces

Provide written verification that the location and identity of crawl and plenum air spaces have been accomplished prior to the termiticide application.

3.3.6 Application Plan

Submit a Termiticide Application Plan with proposed sequence of treatment work with dates and times for approval before starting the specified treatment. Include the termiticide trade name, EPA registration number, chemical composition, formulation, concentration of original and diluted material, application rate of active ingredients, method of application, area/volume treated, amount applied; and the name and state license number of the state certified applicator.

3.4 TERMITICIDE TREATMENT

3.4.1 Equipment Calibration and Tank Measurement

Submit a listing of equipment to be used. Immediately prior to commencement of termiticide application, calibration tests shall be conducted on the application equipment to be used and the application tank shall be measured to determine the volume and contents. These tests shall confirm that the application equipment is operating within the manufacturer's specifications and will meet the specified requirements. Submit written certification of the equipment calibration test results within 1 week of testing.

3.4.2 Mixing and Application

Formulating, mixing, and application shall be performed in the presence of the Contracting Officer or the technical representative. A closed system



is recommended as it prevents the termiticide from coming into contact with the applicator or other persons. Water for formulating shall only come from designated locations. Filling hoses shall be fitted with a backflow preventer meeting local plumbing codes or standards. Overflow shall be prevented during the filling operation. Prior to each day of use, the equipment used for applying termiticides shall be inspected for leaks, clogging, wear, or damage. Any repairs are to be performed immediately.

3.4.3 Treatment Method

For areas to be treated, establish complete and unbroken vertical and/or horizontal soil poison barriers between the soil and all portions of the intended structure which may allow termite access to wood and wood related products. Application shall not be made to areas which serve as crawl spaces or for use as a plenum air space.

3.4.3.1 Surface Application

Use surface application for establishing horizontal barriers. Surface applicants shall be applied as a coarse spray and provide uniform distribution over the soil surface. Termiticide shall penetrate a minimum of 1 inch into the soil, or as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.4.3.2 Rodding and Trenching

Use rodding and trenching for establishing vertical soil barriers. Trenching shall be to the depth of the foundation footing. Width of trench shall be as recommended by the manufacturer, or as indicated. Rodding or other approved method may be implemented for saturating the base of the trench with termiticide. Immediately after termiticide has reached maximum penetration as recommended by the manufacturer, backfilling of the trench shall commence. Backfilling shall be in 6 inch rises or layers. Each rise shall be treated with termiticide.

3.4.4 Sampling

The Contracting Officer may draw from stocks at the job site, at any time and without prior notice, take samples of the termiticides used to determine if the amount of active ingredient specified on the label is being applied.

3.5 CLEAN UP, DISPOSAL, AND PROTECTION

Once application has been completed, proceed with clean up and protection of the site without delay.

3.5.1 Clean Up

The site shall be cleaned of all material associated with the treatment measures, according to label instructions, and as indicated. Excess and waste material shall be removed and disposed off site.

3.5.2 Disposal of Termiticide

Dispose of residual termiticides and containers off Government property, and in accordance with label instructions and EPA criteria.



3.5.3 Protection of Treated Area

Immediately after the application, the area shall be protected from other use by erecting barricades and providing signage as required or directed. Signage shall be placed inside the entrances to crawl spaces and shall identify the space as treated with termiticide and not safe for children and animals.

3.6 CONDITIONS FOR SATISFACTORY TREATMENT

3.6.1 Equipment Calibrations and Measurements

Where results from the equipment calibration and tank measurements tests are unsatisfactory, re-treatment will be required.

3.6.2 Testing

Should an analysis, performed by a third party, indicate that the samples of the applied termiticide contain less than the amount of active ingredient specified on the label, and/or if soils are treated to a depth less than specified or approved, re-treatment will be required.

3.6.3 Disturbance of Treated Soils

Soil and fill material disturbed after treatment shall be re-treated before placement of slabs or other covering structures.

3.6.4 Termites Found Within the Warranty Period

If live subterranean termite infestation or termite damage is discovered during the warranty period, re-treat the site.

3.7 RE-TREATMENT

Where re-treatment is required, comply with the requirements specified in paragraph WARRANTY.




SECTION 32 05 33

LANDSCAPE ESTABLISHMENT02/10

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DEFINITIONS

1.1.1 Pesticide

Any substance or mixture of substances, including biological control agents, that may prevent, destroy, repel, or mitigate pests and are specifically labeled for use by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). Also, any substance used as a plant regulator, defoliant, disinfectant, or biocide. Examples of pesticides include fumigants, herbicides, insecticides, fungicides, nematicides, molluscicides and rodenticides.

1.1.2 Stand of Turf

100 percent ground cover of the established species.


Section 32 84 24 TEMPORARY IRRIGATION SPRINKLER SYSTEM applies to this section for installation of irrigation equipment requirements, with additions and modifications herein.

Section 32 92 23 SODDING applies to this section for installation of sod requirements, with additions and modifications herein.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



Integrated Pest Management Plan; G

SD-07 Certificates

Maintenance inspection report


Maintenance


1.4.1 Delivery

Deliver fertilizer AND iron to the site in original containers bearing manufacturer's chemical analysis, name, trade name, or trademark, and indication of conformance to state and federal laws. Instead of



containers, fertilizer, may be furnished in bulk with a certificate indicating the above information.

1.4.2 Storage

1.4.2.1 Fertilizer, Lime, Iron, Mulch Storage

Material shall be stored in designated areas. Lime and fertilizer shall be stored in cool, dry locations away from contaminants.

1.4.3 Handling

Do not drop or dump materials from vehicles.



Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available from a minimum of three sources. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total local material requirements. Landscaping materials may be locally available.

1.6 MAINTENANCE

Submit Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals for grassing. Include instructions indicating procedures during one typical year including variations of maintenance for climatic conditions throughout the year. Provide instructions and procedures for watering; promotion of growth, including fertilizing, and mowing; and integrated pest management. O&M Manuals shall include pictures of planting materials cross referenced to botanical and common names, with a description of the normal appearance in each season.

Develop a water monitoring program for surface and ground water on the project site in accordance with ASTM D5851 and consistent with the water management program utilized during construction operations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 POST-PLANT FERTILIZER

Fertilizer for sod shall be as recommended by plant supplier, except synthetic chemical fertilizers are not permitted. Fertilizers containing petrochemical additives or that have been treated with pesticides or herbicides are not permitted.

2.1.1 Granular Fertilizer

Organic, granular controlled release fertilizer recommended by laboratory analysis.

2.2 WATER

Source of water shall be approved by the Contracting Officer, and be of suitable quality for irrigation.



2.3 MULCHES TOPDRESSING

Free from noxious weeds, mold, pesticides, or other deleterious materials.

2.3.1 Organic Mulch Materials

Shredded hardwood from site when available. Biobased content shall be a minimum of 100 percent.

2.4 PESTICIDES

Pesticides and herbicides are not permitted. Submit an Integrated Pest Management Plan, including weed and pest management strategies with proposed alternatives to herbicides and pesticides. Use biological pest controls as approved in the Plan.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXTENT OF WORK

Provide landscape construction maintenance to include irrigation equipment cleaning and adjustments, mowing, edging, overseeding, aeration, fertilizing, watering, and weeding, for all newly installed landscape areas and existing plant material, unless indicated otherwise, and at all areas inside or outside the limits of the construction that are disturbed by the Contractor's operations.

3.1.1 Policing

The Contractor shall police all landscaped areas. Policing includes removal of leaves, branches and limbs regardless of length or diameter, dead vegetation, paper, trash, cigarette butts, garbage, rocks or other debris. Policing shall extend to both sides of fencing or walls. Collected debris shall be promptly removed and disposed of at an approved disposal site.

3.1.2 Drainage System Maintenance

The Contractor shall remove all obstructions from surface and subsurface drain lines to allow water to flow unrestricted in swales, gutters, catch basins, storm drain curb inlets, and yard drains. Remove grates and clear debris in catch basins. Open drainage channels are to be maintained free of all debris and vegetation at all times. Edges of these channels shall be clear of any encroachment by vegetation.

3.2 IRRIGATION ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD

The irrigation establishment period will commence on the date that inspection by the Contracting Officer shows that the new temporary irrigation equipment furnished under this contract have been satisfactorily installed and is functional and shall continue for a period of 365 days.

3.2.1 Maintenance During the Irrigation Establishment Period

Begin maintenance immediately after irrigation equipment has been installed and is functional. Inspect irrigation equipment at least once a week during the installation and establishment period and perform needed maintenance promptly. Automatic controllers not equipped with rain shut-off sensors shall be turned off during periods of rain that exceed



twelve hours of continuous rainfall in one day or during rain storms of one day or more. Once the rain has subsided timers shall be reactivated. Irrigation controllers shall be inspected and reprogrammed after power outages. Contractor shall be responsible for winterization and startup. Sprinkler heads shall direct water away from buildings and hard surfaced areas.

3.2.2 Water Restrictions

The Contractor shall abide by state, local or other water conservation regulations in force during the establishment period. Automatic controller shall be adjusted to comply with the water conservation regulations schedule.

3.2.3 Fire Hydrants

To use a fire hydrant for irrigation, the Contractor shall obtain prior clearance from the Contracting Officer and provide the tools and connections approved for use on fire hydrants. If a fire hydrant is used, Contractor shall provide a reduced pressure backflow preventer for each connection between hose and fire hydrant. Backflow preventer used shall be tested once per month by a certified backflow preventer tester.

3.2.4 Final Acceptance

Upon completion of the irrigation establishment period and final acceptance of groundcover and exterior plants, irrigation equipment shall be removed.

3.3 TURF ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD

Turf establishment period will commence on the date that inspection by the Contracting Officer shows that the new turf furnished under this contract has been satisfactorily installed to a 100 percent stand of coverage. The establishment period shall continue for a period of 365 days.

3.3.1 Frequency of Maintenance

Begin maintenance immediately after turf has been installed. Inspect areas once a week during the installation and establishment period and perform needed maintenance promptly.

3.3.2 Promotion of Growth

Turf shall be maintained in a manner that promotes proper health, growth, natural color.Turf shall have a neat uniform manicured appearance, free of bare areas, ruts, holes, weeds, pests, dead vegetation, debris, and unwanted vegetation that present an unsightly appearance. Mow, remove excess clippings, eradicate weeds, water, fertilize, overseed, aerate, topdress and perform other operations necessary to promote growth, as approved by Contracting Officer and consistent with approved Integrated Pest Management Plan. Remove noxious weeds common to the area from planting areas by mechanical means.

3.3.3 Mowing

3.3.3.1 Turf

Turf shall be mowed at a uniform finished height. Mow turfed areas to a minimum average height of 2.5 inches when average height of grass becomes 3



inches for spring/summer maintenance and to a minimum average height of 2.5 inches when the average height of grass reaches 3 inches for fall/winter maintenance. The height of turf is measured from the soil. Mowing of turf shall be performed in a manner that prevents scalping, rutting, bruising, uneven and rough cutting. Prior to mowing, all rubbish, debris, trash, leaves, rocks, paper, and limbs or branches on a turf area shall be picked up and disposed. Adjacent paved areas shall be swept/vacuumed clean.

3.3.4 Turf Edging and Trimming

Perimeter of planter bed edges, sidewalks, driveways, curbs, and other paved surfaces shall be edged. Uniformly edge these areas to prevent encroachment of vegetation onto paved surfaces and to provide a clear cut division line between planter beds, turf, and ground cover. Edging is to be accomplished in a manner that prevents scalping, rutting, bruising, uneven and rough cutting. Edging shall be performed on the same day that turf is mowed. Use of string line trimmers is permitted in "soft" areas such as an edge between turfgrass and a planter bed. Care shall be exercised to avoid damage to any plant materials, structures, and other landscape features.

Trimming around trees, fences, poles, walls, irrigation valve boxes and other similar objects is to be accomplished to match the height and appearance of surrounding mowed turf growth. Trimming shall be performed on the same day the turf's mowed. Care shall be exercised to avoid "Girdling" trees located in turf areas. The use of protective tree collars on trees in turf areas may be utilized as a temporary means to avoid injury to tree trunks. At the end of the plant establishment period Contractor will be responsible for removing all protective tree collars.

3.3.5 Post-Fertilizer Application

Apply turf fertilizer in a manner that promotes health, growth, vigor, color and appearance of cultivated turf areas. The method of application, fertilizer type and frequencies shall be determined by the laboratory soil analysis results the requirements of the particular turf species. Organic fertilizer shall be used. In the event that organic fertilizer is not producing the desired effect, the Contractor shall contract the Contracting Officer for approval prior to the use of a synthetic type of fertilizer. Fertilizer shall be applied by approved methods in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

3.3.6 Turf Watering

The Contractor shall perform irrigation in a manner that promotes the health, growth, color and appearance of cultivated vegetation and that complies with all Federal, State, and local water agencies and authorities directives. The Contractor shall be responsible to prevent over watering, water run-off, erosion, and ponding due to excessive quantities or rate of application. The Contractor shall abide by state, local or other water conservation regulations or restrictions in force during the establishment period.

3.3.7 Turf Aeration

Upon completion of weed eradication operations and Contracting Officer's approval to proceed, aerate turf areas by approved device. Core, by pulling soil plugs, to a minimum depth of 2 inches. Leave all soil plugs that are produced in the turf area. After aeration operations are complete,



topdress entire area 1/4 inch depth with the following mixture:

40 percent sand50 percent humus10 percent gypsum

Blend all parts of topdressing mixture to a uniform consistency throughout. Keep clean at all times at least one paved pedestrian access route and one paved vehicular access route to each building. Clean all soil plugs off of other paving when work is complete. This work shall commence 10 days prior final acceptance of the maintenance establishment period.

3.3.8 Turf Clearance Area

Trees located in turf areas shall be maintained with a growth free clearance of 6 feet from the tree trunk base. The use of mechanical weed whips to accomplish the turf growth free bed area is prohibited.

3.3.9 Replanting

Replant in accordance with Section 32 92 23 SODDING and within specified planting dates areas which do not have a satisfactory stand of turf.

3.3.10 Final Inspection and Acceptance

Final inspection will be make upon written request from the Contractor at least 10 days prior to the last day of the turf establishment period. Final turf acceptance will be based upon a satisfactory stand of turf.

3.3.11 Unsatisfactory Work

When work is found to not meet design intent and specifications, maintenance period will be extended at no additional cost to the Government until work has been completed, inspected and accepted by Contracting Officer.


3.4.1 Maintenance Inspection Report

Provide maintenance inspection report to assure that landscape maintenance is being performed in accordance with the specifications and in the best interest of plant growth and survivability. Site observations shall be documented at the start of the establishment period, then quarterly following the start, and at the end of establishment period. Results of site observation visits shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer within 7 calendar days of each site observation visit.




SECTION 32 16 13

CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND GUTTERS04/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO)

AASHTO M 182 (2005; R 2009) Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf and Cotton Mats


ASTM A615/A615M (2013) Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM C143/C143M (2012) Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete

ASTM C171 (2007) Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete

ASTM C172/C172M (2010) Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete

ASTM C173/C173M (2012) Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method

ASTM C231/C231M (2010) Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method

ASTM C309 (2011) Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete

ASTM C31/C31M (2012) Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field

ASTM D1751 (2004; E 2013; R 2013) Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)

ASTM D1752 (2004a; R 2008) Standard Specification for



Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion

ASTM D5893/D5893M (2010) Cold Applied, Single Component, Chemically Curing Silicone Joint Sealant for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements



Provide plant, equipment, machines, and tools used in the work subject to approval and maintained in a satisfactory working condition at all times. The equipment shall have the capability of producing the required product, meeting grade controls, thickness control and smoothness requirements as specified. Use of the equipment shall be discontinued if it produces unsatisfactory results. The Contracting Officer shall have access at all times to the plant and equipment to ensure proper operation and compliance with specifications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Concrete

SD-06 Test Reports

Field Quality Control

1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

1.4.1 Placing During Cold Weather

Do not place concrete when the air temperature reaches 40 degrees F and is falling, or is already below that point. Placement may begin when the air temperature reaches 35 degrees F and is rising, or is already above 40 degrees F. Make provisions to protect the concrete from freezing during the specified curing period. If necessary to place concrete when the temperature of the air, aggregates, or water is below 35 degrees F, placement and protection shall be approved in writing. Approval will be contingent upon full conformance with the following provisions. The underlying material shall be prepared and protected so that it is entirely free of frost when the concrete is deposited. Mixing water and aggregates shall be heated as necessary to result in the temperature of the in-place concrete being between 50 and 85 degrees F. Methods and equipment for heating shall be approved. The aggregates shall be free of ice, snow, and frozen lumps before entering the mixer. Covering and other means shall be provided for maintaining the concrete at a temperature of at least 50 degrees F for not less than 72 hours after placing, and at a temperature above freezing for the remainder of the curing period.



1.4.2 Placing During Warm Weather

The temperature of the concrete as placed shall not exceed 85 degrees F except where an approved retarder is used. The mixing water and/or aggregates shall be cooled, if necessary, to maintain a satisfactory placing temperature. The placing temperature shall not exceed 95 degrees F at any time.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE

Provide concrete conforming to the applicable requirements of Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE except as otherwise specified. Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3500 psi at 28 days. Maximum size of aggregate shall be 1-1/2 inches. Submit copies of certified delivery tickets for all concrete used in the construction.

2.1.1 Air Content

Mixtures shall have air content by volume of concrete of 5 to 7 percent, based on measurements made immediately after discharge from the mixer.

2.1.2 Slump

The concrete slump shall be 3 inches plus or minus 1 inch where determined in accordance with ASTM C143/C143M.

2.1.3 Reinforcement Steel

Reinforcement bars shall conform to ASTM A615/A615M.

2.2 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS

2.2.1 Impervious Sheet Materials

Impervious sheet materials shall conform to ASTM C171, type optional, except that polyethylene film, if used, shall be white opaque.

2.2.2 Burlap

Burlap shall conform to AASHTO M 182.

2.2.3 White Pigmented Membrane-Forming Curing Compound

White pigmented membrane-forming curing compound shall conform to ASTM C309, Type 2.

2.3 CONCRETE PROTECTION MATERIALS

Concrete protection materials shall be a linseed oil mixture of equal parts, by volume, of linseed oil and either mineral spirits, naphtha, or turpentine. At the option of the Contractor, commercially prepared linseed oil mixtures, formulated specifically for application to concrete to provide protection against the action of deicing chemicals may be used, except that emulsified mixtures are not acceptable.



2.4 JOINT FILLER STRIPS

2.4.1 Contraction Joint Filler for Curb and Gutter

Contraction joint filler for curb and gutter shall consist of hard-pressed fiberboard.

2.4.2 Expansion Joint Filler, Premolded

Expansion joint filler, premolded, shall conform to ASTM D1751 or ASTM D1752, 1/2 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 JOINT SEALANTS

Joint sealant, cold-applied shall conform to ASTM D5893/D5893M.

2.6 FORM WORK

Design and construct form work to ensure that the finished concrete will conform accurately to the indicated dimensions, lines, and elevations, and within the tolerances specified. Forms shall be of wood or steel, straight, of sufficient strength to resist springing during depositing and consolidating concrete. Wood forms shall be surfaced plank, 2 inches nominal thickness, straight and free from warp, twist, loose knots, splits or other defects. Wood forms shall have a nominal length of 10 feet. Radius bends may be formed with 3/4 inch boards, laminated to the required thickness. Steel forms shall be channel-formed sections with a flat top surface and with welded braces at each end and at not less than two intermediate points. Ends of steel forms shall be interlocking and self-aligning. Steel forms shall include flexible forms for radius forming, corner forms, form spreaders, and fillers. Steel forms shall have a nominal length of 10 feet with a minimum of 3 welded stake pockets per form. Stake pins shall be solid steel rods with chamfered heads and pointed tips designed for use with steel forms.

2.6.1 Sidewalk Forms

Sidewalk forms shall be of a height equal to the full depth of the finished sidewalk.

2.6.2 Curb and Gutter Forms

Curb and gutter outside forms shall have a height equal to the full depth of the curb or gutter. The inside form of curb shall have batter as indicated and shall be securely fastened to and supported by the outside form. Rigid forms shall be provided for curb returns, except that benders or thin plank forms may be used for curb or curb returns with a radius of 10 feet or more, where grade changes occur in the return, or where the central angle is such that a rigid form with a central angle of 90 degrees cannot be used. Back forms for curb returns may be made of 1-1/2 inch benders, for the full height of the curb, cleated together. In lieu of inside forms for curbs, a curb "mule" may be used for forming and finishing this surface, provided the results are approved.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

The subgrade shall be constructed to the specified grade and cross section



prior to concrete placement. Subgrade shall be placed and compacted in conformance with Section 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL.

3.1.1 Sidewalk Subgrade

The subgrade shall be tested for grade and cross section with a template extending the full width of the sidewalk and supported between side forms.

3.1.2 Curb and Gutter Subgrade

The subgrade shall be tested for grade and cross section by means of a template extending the full width of the curb and gutter. The subgrade shall be of materials equal in bearing quality to the subgrade under the adjacent pavement.

3.1.3 Maintenance of Subgrade

The subgrade shall be maintained in a smooth, compacted condition in conformity with the required section and established grade until the concrete is placed. The subgrade shall be in a moist condition when concrete is placed. The subgrade shall be prepared and protected to produce a subgrade free from frost when the concrete is deposited.

3.2 FORM SETTING

Set forms to the indicated alignment, grade and dimensions. Hold forms rigidly in place by a minimum of 3 stakes per form placed at intervals not to exceed 4 feet. Corners, deep sections, and radius bends shall have additional stakes and braces, as required. Clamps, spreaders, and braces shall be used where required to ensure rigidity in the forms. Forms shall be removed without injuring the concrete. Bars or heavy tools shall not be used against the concrete in removing the forms. Any concrete found defective after form removal shall be promptly and satisfactorily repaired. Forms shall be cleaned and coated with form oil each time before concrete is placed. Wood forms may, instead, be thoroughly wetted with water before concrete is placed, except that with probable freezing temperatures, oiling is mandatory.

3.2.1 Sidewalks

Set forms for sidewalks with the upper edge true to line and grade with an allowable tolerance of 1/8 inch in any 10 foot long section. After forms are set, grade and alignment shall be checked with a 10 foot straightedge. Forms shall have a transverse slope as indicated with the low side adjacent to the roadway. Side forms shall not be removed for 12 hours after finishing has been completed.

3.2.2 Curbs and Gutters

The forms of the front of the curb shall be removed not less than 2 hours nor more than 6 hours after the concrete has been placed. Forms back of curb shall remain in place until the face and top of the curb have been finished, as specified for concrete finishing. Gutter forms shall not be removed while the concrete is sufficiently plastic to slump in any direction.



3.3 SIDEWALK CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING

3.3.1 Formed Sidewalks

Place concrete in the forms in one layer. When consolidated and finished, the sidewalks shall be of the thickness indicated. After concrete has been placed in the forms, a strike-off guided by side forms shall be used to bring the surface to proper section to be compacted. The concrete shall be consolidated by tamping and spading or with an approved vibrator, and the surface shall be finished to grade with a strike off.

3.3.2 Concrete Finishing

After straightedging, when most of the water sheen has disappeared, and just before the concrete hardens, finish the surface with a wood or magnesium float or darby to a smooth and uniformly fine granular or sandy texture free of waves, irregularities, or tool marks. A scored surface shall be produced by brooming with a fiber-bristle brush in a direction transverse to that of the traffic, followed by edging.

3.3.3 Edge and Joint Finishing

All slab edges, including those at formed joints, shall be finished with an edger having a radius of 1/8 inch. Transverse joint shall be edged before brooming, and the brooming shall eliminate the flat surface left by the surface face of the edger. Corners and edges which have crumbled and areas which lack sufficient mortar for proper finishing shall be cleaned and filled solidly with a properly proportioned mortar mixture and then finished.

3.3.4 Surface and Thickness Tolerances

Finished surfaces shall not vary more than 5/16 inch from the testing edge of a 10-foot straightedge. Permissible deficiency in section thickness will be up to 1/4 inch.

3.4 CURB AND GUTTER CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING

3.4.1 Formed Curb and Gutter

Concrete shall be placed to the section required in a single lift. Consolidation shall be achieved by using approved mechanical vibrators. Curve shaped gutters shall be finished with a standard curb "mule".

3.4.2 Concrete Finishing

Exposed surfaces shall be floated and finished with a smooth wood float until true to grade and section and uniform in texture. Floated surfaces shall then be brushed with a fine-hair brush with longitudinal strokes. The edges of the gutter and top of the curb shall be rounded with an edging tool to a radius of 1/2 inch. Immediately after removing the front curb form, the face of the curb shall be rubbed with a wood or concrete rubbing block and water until blemishes, form marks, and tool marks have been removed. The front curb surface, while still wet, shall be brushed in the same manner as the gutter and curb top. The top surface of gutter and entrance shall be finished to grade with a wood float.



3.4.3 Joint Finishing

Curb edges at formed joints shall be finished as indicated.

3.4.4 Surface and Thickness Tolerances

Finished surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4 inch from the testing edge of a 10-foot straightedge. Permissible deficiency in section thickness will be up to 1/4 inch.

3.5 SIDEWALK JOINTS

Sidewalk joints shall be constructed to divide the surface into rectangular areas. Transverse contraction joints shall be spaced at a distance equal to the sidewalk width or as indicated, and shall be continuous across the slab. Longitudinal contraction joints shall be constructed as indicated. Transverse expansion joints shall be installed at sidewalk returns and opposite expansion joints in adjoining curbs. Where the sidewalk is not in contact with the curb, transverse expansion joints shall be installed as indicated. Expansion joints shall be formed about structures and features which project through or into the sidewalk pavement, using joint filler of the type, thickness, and width indicated. Expansion joints are not required between sidewalks and curb that abut the sidewalk longitudinally.

3.5.1 Sidewalk Contraction Joints

The contraction joints shall be formed in the fresh concrete by cutting a groove in the top portion of the slab to a depth of at least one-fourth of the sidewalk slab thickness, using a jointer to cut the groove, or by sawing a groove in the hardened concrete with a power-driven saw, unless otherwise approved. Sawed joints shall be constructed by sawing a groove in the concrete with a 1/8 inch blade to the depth indicated. An ample supply of saw blades shall be available on the job before concrete placement is started, and at least one standby sawing unit in good working order shall be available at the jobsite at all times during the sawing operations.

3.5.2 Sidewalk Expansion Joints

Expansion joints shall be formed with 1/2 inch joint filler strips. Joint filler in expansion joints surrounding structures and features within the sidewalk may consist of preformed filler material conforming to ASTM D1752 or building paper. Joint filler shall be held in place with steel pins or other devices to prevent warping of the filler during floating and finishing. Immediately after finishing operations are completed, joint edges shall be rounded with an edging tool having a radius of 1/8 inch, and concrete over the joint filler shall be removed. At the end of the curing period, expansion joints shall be cleaned and filled with cold-applied joint sealant. Joint sealant shall be gray or stone in color. The joint opening shall be thoroughly cleaned before the sealing material is placed. Sealing material shall not be spilled on exposed surfaces of the concrete. Concrete at the joint shall be surface dry and atmospheric and concrete temperatures shall be above 50 degrees F at the time of application of joint sealing material. Excess material on exposed surfaces of the concrete shall be removed immediately and concrete surfaces cleaned.

3.5.3 Reinforcement Steel Placement

Reinforcement steel shall be accurately and securely fastened in place with



suitable supports and ties before the concrete is placed.

3.6 CURB AND GUTTER JOINTS

Curb and gutter joints shall be constructed at right angles to the line of curb and gutter.

3.6.1 Contraction Joints

Contraction joints shall be constructed directly opposite contraction joints in abutting portland cement concrete pavements and spaced so that monolithic sections between curb returns will not be less than 5 feet nor greater than 15 feet in length.

a. Contraction joints shall be constructed by means of 1/8 inch thick separators and of a section conforming to the cross section of the curb and gutter. Separators shall be removed as soon as practicable after concrete has set sufficiently to preserve the width and shape of the joint and prior to finishing.

3.6.2 Expansion Joints

Expansion joints shall be formed by means of preformed expansion joint filler material cut and shaped to the cross section of curb and gutter. Expansion joints shall be provided in curb and gutter directly opposite expansion joints of abutting portland cement concrete pavement, and shall be of the same type and thickness as joints in the pavement. Where curb and gutter do not abut portland cement concrete pavement, expansion joints at least 1/2 inch in width shall be provided at intervals not less than 30 feet nor greater than 120 feet. Expansion joints shall be provided in nonreinforced concrete gutter at locations indicated. Expansion joints shall be sealed immediately following curing of the concrete or as soon thereafter as weather conditions permit. Expansion joints and the top 1 inch depth of curb and gutter contraction-joints shall be sealed with joint sealant. The joint opening shall be thoroughly cleaned before the sealing material is placed. Sealing material shall not be spilled on exposed surfaces of the concrete. Concrete at the joint shall be surface dry and atmospheric and concrete temperatures shall be above 50 degrees F at the time of application of joint sealing material. Excess material on exposed surfaces of the concrete shall be removed immediately and concrete surfaces cleaned.

3.7 CURING AND PROTECTION


Protect concrete against loss of moisture and rapid temperature changes for at least 7 days from the beginning of the curing operation. Protect unhardened concrete from rain and flowing water. All equipment needed for adequate curing and protection of the concrete shall be on hand and ready for use before actual concrete placement begins. Protection shall be provided as necessary to prevent cracking of the pavement due to temperature changes during the curing period.

3.7.1.1 Mat Method

The entire exposed surface shall be covered with 2 or more layers of burlap. Mats shall overlap each other at least 6 inches. The mat shall be thoroughly wetted with water prior to placing on concrete surface and shall



be kept continuously in a saturated condition and in intimate contact with concrete for not less than 7 days.

3.7.1.2 Impervious Sheeting Method

The entire exposed surface shall be wetted with a fine spray of water and then covered with impervious sheeting material. Sheets shall be laid directly on the concrete surface with the light-colored side up and overlapped 12 inches when a continuous sheet is not used. The curing medium shall not be less than 18 inches wider than the concrete surface to be cured, and shall be securely weighted down by heavy wood planks, or a bank of moist earth placed along edges and laps in the sheets. Sheets shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced if torn or otherwise damaged during curing. The curing medium shall remain on the concrete surface to be cured for not less than 7 days.

3.7.1.3 Membrane Curing Method

A uniform coating of white-pigmented membrane-curing compound shall be applied to the entire exposed surface of the concrete as soon after finishing as the free water has disappeared from the finished surface. Formed surfaces shall be coated immediately after the forms are removed and in no case longer than 1 hour after the removal of forms. Concrete shall not be allowed to dry before the application of the membrane. If any drying has occurred, the surface of the concrete shall be moistened with a fine spray of water and the curing compound applied as soon as the free water disappears. Curing compound shall be applied in two coats by hand-operated pressure sprayers at a coverage of approximately 200 square feet/gallon for the total of both coats. The second coat shall be applied in a direction approximately at right angles to the direction of application of the first coat. The compound shall form a uniform, continuous, coherent film that will not check, crack, or peel and shall be free from pinholes or other imperfections. If pinholes, abrasion, or other discontinuities exist, an additional coat shall be applied to the affected areas within 30 minutes. Concrete surfaces that are subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after the curing compound has been applied shall be resprayed by the method and at the coverage specified above. Areas where the curing compound is damaged by subsequent construction operations within the curing period shall be resprayed. Necessary precautions shall be taken to insure that the concrete is properly cured at sawed joints, and that no curing compound enters the joints. The top of the joint opening and the joint groove at exposed edges shall be tightly sealed before the concrete in the region of the joint is resprayed with curing compound. The method used for sealing the joint groove shall prevent loss of moisture from the joint during the entire specified curing period. Approved standby facilities for curing concrete pavement shall be provided at a location accessible to the jobsite for use in the event of mechanical failure of the spraying equipment or other conditions that might prevent correct application of the membrane-curing compound at the proper time. Concrete surfaces to which membrane-curing compounds have been applied shall be adequately protected during the entire curing period from pedestrian and vehicular traffic, except as required for joint-sawing operations and surface tests, and from any other possible damage to the continuity of the membrane.

3.7.2 Backfilling

After curing, debris shall be removed and the area adjoining the concrete shall be backfilled, graded, and compacted to conform to the surrounding



area in accordance with lines and grades indicated.

3.7.3 Protection

Completed concrete shall be protected from damage until accepted. Repair damaged concrete and clean concrete discolored during construction. Concrete that is damaged shall be removed and reconstructed for the entire length between regularly scheduled joints. Refinishing the damaged portion will not be acceptable. Removed damaged portions shall be disposed of as directed.

3.7.4 Protective Coating

Protective coating, of linseed oil mixture, shall be applied to the exposed-to-view concrete surface after the curing period, if concrete will be exposed to de-icing chemicals within 6 weeks after placement. Concrete to receive a protective coating shall be moist cured.

3.7.4.1 Application

Curing and backfilling operation shall be completed prior to applying two coats of protective coating. Concrete shall be surface dry and clean before each application. Coverage shall be by spray application at not more than 50 square yards/gallon for first application and not more than 70 square yards/gallon for second application, except that the number of applications and coverage for each application for commercially prepared mixture shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Coated surfaces shall be protected from vehicular and pedestrian traffic until dry.

3.7.4.2 Precautions

Protective coating shall not be heated by direct application of flame or electrical heaters and shall be protected from exposure to open flame, sparks, and fire adjacent to open containers or applicators. Material shall not be applied at ambient or material temperatures lower than 50 degrees F.


Submit copies of all test reports within 24 hours of completion of the test.


Perform the inspection and tests described and meet the specified requirements for inspection details and frequency of testing. Based upon the results of these inspections and tests, take the action and submit reports as required below, and any additional tests to insure that the requirements of these specifications are met.

3.8.2 Concrete Testing

3.8.2.1 Strength Testing

Provide molded concrete specimens for strength tests. Samples of concrete placed each day shall be taken not less than once a day nor less than once for every 250 cubic yards of concrete. The samples for strength tests shall be taken in accordance with ASTM C172/C172M. Cylinders for acceptance shall be molded in conformance with ASTM C31/C31M by an approved



testing laboratory. Each strength test result shall be the average of 2 test cylinders from the same concrete sample tested at 28 days, unless otherwise specified or approved. Concrete specified on the basis of compressive strength will be considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed the specified strength, and no individual strength test result falls below the specified strength by more than 500 psi.

3.8.2.2 Air Content

Determine air content in accordance with ASTM C173/C173M or ASTM C231/C231M. ASTM C231/C231M shall be used with concretes and mortars made with relatively dense natural aggregates. Two tests for air content shall be made on randomly selected batches of each class of concrete placed during each shift. Additional tests shall be made when excessive variation in concrete workability is reported by the placing foreman or the Government inspector. If results are out of tolerance, the placing foreman shall be notified and he shall take appropriate action to have the air content corrected at the plant. Additional tests for air content will be performed on each truckload of material until such time as the air content is within the tolerance specified.

3.8.2.3 Slump Test

Two slump tests shall be made on randomly selected batches of each class of concrete for every 250 cubic yards, or fraction thereof, of concrete placed during each shift. Additional tests shall be performed when excessive variation in the workability of the concrete is noted.

3.8.3 Surface Evaluation

The finished surface of each category of the completed work shall be uniform in color and free of blemishes and form or tool marks.

3.9 SURFACE DEFICIENCIES AND CORRECTIONS

3.9.1 Thickness Deficiency

When measurements indicate that the completed concrete section is deficient in thickness by more than 1/4 inch the deficient section will be removed, between regularly scheduled joints, and replaced.

3.9.2 High Areas

In areas not meeting surface smoothness and plan grade requirements, high areas shall be reduced either by rubbing the freshly finished concrete with carborundum brick and water when the concrete is less than 36 hours old or by grinding the hardened concrete with an approved surface grinding machine after the concrete is 36 hours old or more. The area corrected by grinding the surface of the hardened concrete shall not exceed 5 percent of the area of any integral slab, and the depth of grinding shall not exceed 1/4 inch. Pavement areas requiring grade or surface smoothness corrections in excess of the limits specified above shall be removed and replaced.

3.9.3 Appearance

Exposed surfaces of the finished work will be inspected by the Government and any deficiencies in appearance will be identified. Areas which exhibit excessive cracking, discoloration, form marks, or tool marks or which are



otherwise inconsistent with the overall appearances of the work shall be removed and replaced.




SECTION 32 84 24

IRRIGATION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS08/11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE (API)

API Std 598 (2009) Valve Inspecting and Testing


ASSE Series 5000 (2009) Cross-Connection Control Professional Qualification Standard


AWWA C500 (2009) Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service

AWWA C511 (2007) Standard for Reduced-Pressure Principle Backflow Prevention Assembly


AWWA C901 (2008) Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Tubing, 1/2 In. (13mm) Through 3 In. (76 mm), for Water Service




ASTM D1785 (2012) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC), Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120

ASTM D2241 (2009) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series)

ASTM D2464 (2013) Standard Specification for Threaded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

ASTM D2466 (2013) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe



Fittings, Schedule 40

ASTM D2564 (2012) Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems

ASTM D2774 (2012) Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pressure Piping

ASTM D2855 (1996; R 2010) Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings

FOUNDATION FOR CROSS-CONNECTION CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC RESEARCH (FCCCHR)

FCCCHR List (continuously updated) List of Approved Backflow Prevention Assemblies









NSF/ANSI 14 (2013) Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials




Provide a design for the Temporary Irrigation Sprinkler System to provide a minimum 1-inch of water per week to new landscaped and grassed areas. The temporary system piping may be installed above grade, but shall not create a trip hazard for pedestrians or block vehicular paths. If the temporary irrigation system is installed below grade, irrigation heads, valves, and valve boxes shall be removed and the ground brought to a level condition and sodded. Sleeves shall be installed under walks as required.



Contractor shall evaluate existing water pressure and temporary irrigation system pressure requirements to determine if an irrigation booster pump is required. The temporary irrigation system shall be removed after one year.

a. Head, piping, valve, controller, sensor layout.

b. Pipe, valve, backflow preventer, and controller.

c. Point of connection to water source.

d. Indicate wiring diagram between existing power source and controller/water pump.

e. Number and extent of control valve circuits.

f. Provide details of all irrigation components and accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Temporary Irrigation sprinkler system

Drawings including irrigation legend prepared by a licensed, registered or certified Landscape Architect or Irrigation Specialist.

SD-03 Product Data

Piping materials, tubing, and fittings

Valves and accessories

Sprinkler heads

Backflow preventers

Automatic controller

Solvent cement

Control wiring

Water hammer arresters

Water meter

Rain shut-off device

Freeze shut-off device

Tapping tee

Valve boxes and lids



SD-05 Design Data

System pressure calculations

Irrigation requirements

SD-06 Test Reports

Valves, and accessories tests

Backflow preventers

Pressure test

Operation test

Including verification of sprinkler head layout

Submit record of pressure tests conducted on recording gage.

SD-07 Certificates

Backflow preventers

ASSE Series 5000, Submit a certificate of Full Approval or a current Certificate of Approval from FCCCHR List for size, and make of backflow preventer being provided for this project. A Certificate of Provisional Approval will not be acceptable.


1.4.1 Delivery

Deliver materials in original rolls, packages, cartons, and containers with the name of manufacturer, brand, and model. Inspect materials delivered to the site for damage.

1.4.2 Storage

Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective covering. Store plastic piping and rubber gaskets under cover out of direct sunlight. Do not store materials directly on ground. Keep inside of pipes and fittings free from dirt and debris.

1.4.3 Handling

Handle and carry pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories in such a manner as to ensure delivery to trench in sound undamaged condition. Do not drag pipe.


1.5.1 Required Test

Submit tests signed by an authorized official of a testing laboratory of sprinkler head, valve, automatic controller, emitter heads, vacuum breaker, backflow preventer, and water hammer arrester.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

2.1.1 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Fittings and Solvent Cement

NSF/ANSI 14, seal of approval for potable water.

2.1.1.1 Pipe

ASTM D1785, PVC 1120 Schedule 40 or 80; or ASTM D2241, PVC 1120 SDR 21, Class 200. Provide ultra-violet resistant piping for on-grade use.

2.1.1.2 Fittings

a. Solvent Welded Socket Type: ASTM D2466, Schedule 40. Provide ultra-violet resistant fittings.

b. Threaded Type: ASTM D2464, Schedule 80. Provide ultra-violet resistant fittings.

2.1.1.3 Solvent Cement

ASTM D2564.

2.1.2 Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Piping

2.1.2.1 Pipe

AWWA C901, outside diameter (od) base with dimension ratio (DR) of 9.3 to provide 150 psi minimum pressure rating.

2.1.2.2 Fittings

ASTM D3261, DR of 9.3.

2.1.3 Pipe Sleeving

a. Provide PVC piping two times the diameter of main or lateral piping.

b. Provide grey PVC electrical conduit sized according to number of control wires. Minimum 2 inch size.

2.2 IRRIGATION SPRINKLER HEADS

2.2.1 Pop-Up Irrigation Head

2.2.1.1 Gear Rotor Irrigation Head, Full or Part Circle

Sprinkler body, nozzle, and screen constructed of heavy-duty, ultra-violet resistant plastic. Heavy duty, stainless steel internal construction with plastic body and match precipitation rates for standard low or flat angle trajectories. Single-stream, water lubricated, gear drive type. Part circle sprinkler with an adjustable arc coverage of 30 to 360 degrees. Pop-up height of 6 inches as measured from top of cap at normal installation to middle of nozzle orifice. Provide wiper seal that positively seals against nozzle flange to keep debris out of rotor and cleans debris from pop-up steam as it retracts. Provide check valve in head.



2.2.1.2 Spray Irrigation Head, Full or Part Circle

Sprinkler body, nozzle, and screen constructed of heavy-duty, ultra-violet resistant plastic with wiper seal. Plastic nozzle with matched precipitation rate and an adjustable screw capable of regulating the radius and flow. Capable of housing under the nozzle; protective, non-clogging filter screen and/or pressure compensating devices. Screen used in conjunction with the adjusting screw from regulating. Pop-up height of 6 inches as measured from the top of cap at normal installation to middle of nozzle orifice. Provide check valve below each sprinkler body on riser.

2.3 VALVES

2.3.1 Isolation Valve

2.3.1.1 Ball Valves, Less than 3 Inches

API Std 598, plastic body, soldered ends.

2.3.1.2 Gate Valves, 3 Inches and Larger

AWWA C500, bottom wedging double discs, parallel seats, non-rising stems, open by counterclockwise turning. Provide flanged end connections. Provide bronze interior construction of valves including stem containing a maximum 2 percent aluminum and maximum 16 percent zinc.

2.3.2 Control Valves

2.3.2.1 Pressure Regulating Master Control Valve

Automatic mechanical self-cleaning, self-purging control system having an adjustable pressure setting operated by a solenoid on alternating current (ac) with 0.70 amperes at 24 volts. Valve shall close slowly and be free of chatter in each diaphragm position. Provide a manual flow stem to adjust closing speed and internal flushing. Provide an adjusting screw for setting pressure and schrader valve for monitoring pressure. Provide one inlet tappings capable of being installed as a straight pattern valve. Provide heavy duty plastic valve body with brass seat that is removable and serviceable from top without removing valve body from system. Maximum working pressure of valve is 150 psi and pilot range from 10 to 125 psi.

2.3.2.2 Remote Control Valve, Electrical

Solenoid actuated angle valves of 3/4 to 3 inch size, alternating current (ac), 60/50 cycle .4 amps in rush current and .28 amps holding current. Provide plastic valve housing suitable for service at 150 psi operating pressure. Provide pressure regulating module capable of regulating outlet pressure between 15 to 25 psi (plus or minus) 5 psi and adjustable screw for setting pressure schrader valve connection for monitoring pressure.

2.3.2.3 Manual Angle Control Valve, Manual Globe Control Valve

Less than 2 1/2 inch MSS SP-80, type 3, Class 150 threaded ends. Angle valve 2 1/2 inch and larger MSS SP-85, Type II, Class 250 threaded ends.



2.3.3 Backflow Preventers

2.3.3.1 Reduced Pressure Type Backflow Preventers

AWWA C511. Provide backflow preventers complete with 150 psi rated flanged, brass mounted gate valve and strainer, 304stainless steel or bronze, internal parts. Total pressure drop through complete assembly shall be a maximum of 10 psi at rated flow. Listing of particular make, model/design, and size in FCCCHR List will be acceptable as required proof for testing and certification.

a. Piping Assembly: Red brass pipe and fittings.

b. Strainers: Bronze or brass construction with gasket caps. Equip units with No. 200 mesh stainless steel screen elements.

2.4 ACCESSORIES AND APPURTENANCES

2.4.1 Tapping Tee

Bronze flat, double strap, with neoprene gasket or "O"-ring seal.

2.4.2 Water Meter

Meter to include roll sealed register, magnetic drive, straight reading (odometer shall indicate in gallons, large numerals, glass lens for legibility,) low flow indicator to detect leaks, tamper proof seal pin to detect theft; sturdy durable, corrosion resistant main case, electrical grounding continuity; nutating disc measuring chamber with minimum head loss.

2.4.3 Drip Head Accessories2.4.3.1 Valve Boxes

Plastic valve box for each isolation valve, control valve. Provide box sizes that are suitable and adjustable for valve used.

a. Cast the word "IRRIGATION" on cover.

b. Stencil, engrave, or brand controller and valve sequence on remote control valve cover. Letters minimum 4 inches height.

2.4.4 Backflow Preventer Accessories

2.4.4.1 Pressure Gages

ASME B40.100, single style pressure gage for water with 4 1/2 inch dial, brass or aluminum case, bronze tube, gage cock, pressure snubber, and siphon. Provide scale range suitable for irrigation systems.

2.4.5 Moisture Sensing Device

2.4.5.1 Automatic Rain Shut-Off Device

One piece, maintenance and adjustment free, reacts to a minimum 1/8 inch of rain water, unaffected by humidity levels, commercial grade materials, no exposed mechanical switch or electrodes, solid state construction with internal relay operating voltage of, static charge pretested, maximum switch current of.



2.4.5.2 Automatic Freeze Shut-Off Device

Construct of a PVC cylinder with a sensing element mounted at top of cylinder capable of interrupting the control valve common wire as temperatures approach 32 degrees F. Operating voltage 24 VAC, maximum current one amp. Static charge protection with snubber network.

2.5 Automatic Controller Electrical

Controller, NEMA ICS 2 with 120-volt single phase service, operating with indicated station, and grounded chassis. Provide enclosure NEMA ICS 6 Type 3R, with locking hinge cover, pedestal mounted.

2.6 ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS

2.6.1 Control Wiring for Electrically Operated Valves

NFPA 70, copper conductor 14 gage wire, Type UF.

2.6.2 Conduit

UL 651, rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit, Schedule 40.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Install sprinkler system after site grading has been completed.

3.1.1 Piping System

3.1.1.1 Sterilization

Sprinkler system fed from a potable water system sterilized upstream of backflow preventer in accordance with AWWA C651. Sterilize new water lines for a minimum of 24 hours to meet state and federal health test requirements before placing in service. Minimum retention period shall be 3 hours.

3.1.2 Piping Installation

3.1.2.1 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe

a. Solvent-Cemented Joints: ASTM D2855.

b. Threaded Joints: full cut with a maximum of three threads remain exposed on pipe and nipples. Make threaded joints tight without recourse to wicks or fillers, other than polytetrafluoroethylene thread tape.

c. Piping: ASTM D2774 or ASTM D2855, and pipe manufacturer's instructions. Install pipe in a serpentine (snaked) manner to allow for expansion and contraction in trench before backfilling. Install pipes at temperatures over 40 degrees F.

3.1.3 Irrigation Heads

Install plumb and level with terrain.



3.1.3.1 Pop-Up Irrigation Head

Install plumb and level with terrain. Provide swing joint assembly attachment between lateral line and pop-up body. Top of irrigation head shall be flush wit surrounding finish grade.

3.1.4 Valves

3.1.4.1 Isolation Valves

Install in a valve box extending from grade to below valve body, with a minimum of 4 inches cover measured from finish grade to top of valve stem.

3.1.4.2 Control Valves

Plumb valve in a valve box extending from grade to below valve body, with minimum of 4 inch cover measured from grade to top of valve. Install automatic valves beside sprinkler heads with a valve box.

3.1.5 Backflow Preventers

a. Install backflow preventer in new connection to existing water distribution system, between connection and control valves.

b. Flush pipe lines prior to installing device.

c. Device shall not be installed in pits or where any part of the device could become submerged in standing water

d. Install device a minimum of 12 inches from trees, walls, fences, structures and other obstructions.

3.1.5.1 Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventer

a. Protect device by a strainer located upstream.

b. Install device a minimum of 12 inches between finish grade and bottom of relief port.

3.1.6 Accessories

3.1.6.1 Connection To Existing Water Supply Systems (Tapping Tee)

Use tapping or drilling machine valve and mechanical joint type sleeves for connections to be made under pressure. Bolt sleeves around mains; bolt valve conforming to AWWA C500 to the branch. Open valve, attach drilling machine, make tap, close valve, and remove drilling machine, without interruption of service. Notify Contracting Officer in writing at least 15 days prior to the date the connections are required; receive approval before any service is interrupted. Provide materials required to make connections into the existing water supply systems and perform excavating, backfilling, and other incidental labor as required. Furnish the labor and the tapping or drilling machine for making the actual connections to the existing systems.

3.1.6.2 Water Meter

Install meter upstream of backflow preventer per manufacturer's



recommendations and local PWC Utility Department Instructions.

3.1.6.3 Rain and Freeze Shut-Off Devices

a. Install as per manufacturer's recommendations.

b. For pedestal mounted controllers, mount to side of controller housing.

3.1.7 Electrical Circuits

Bury wires beside mainline pipe in same trench. Provide grey electrical conduit where wires run under paved or non-paved pedestrian paths and vehicular roads. Tag wires at controller and control valve location with plastic tie wrapped tags. Provide one control wire to each control valve location and one common wire looped from controller to each control valve. provide one separate control valve wire of a different color from controller to each control valve cluster.

3.1.7.1 Loops

Provide a 12 inch loop of wire at each valve where controls are connected.

3.1.7.2 Expansion and Contraction

Bundle multiple tubes or wires and tape together at 20 foot intervals with 12 inch loop for expansion and contraction.

3.1.7.3 Splices

Make electrical splices waterproof. Locate all field electrical splices in valve boxes.

3.1.8 Automatic Controller

Determine exact location of controllers in field before installation. Coordinate the electrical service to these locations. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and NFPA 70.

3.1.9 Flushing

After piping, risers, and valves are in place and connected, but prior to installation of sprinkler heads and valves, flush piping system under a full head of water. Maintain flushing for 3 minutes.

3.1.10 Adjustment

After grading, plant installation, and rolling of planted areas, adjust sprinkler heads flush with finished grade. Make adjustments by providing new nipples of proper length or by use of heads having an approved device, integral with head, which will permit adjustment in height of head without changing piping.

3.1.11 Sterilization

Sprinkler system fed from a potable water system shall be sterilized upstream of backflow preventer in accordance with AWWA C651. Sterilize new waterlines for a minimum of 24-hours, to meet state and federal health test requirements before placing in service. Minimum retention period shall be 3 hours.




The Contractor will conduct and the Contracting Officer and the QC representative will witness field inspections and field tests specified in this section. Perform field tests, and provide labor, equipment, and incidentals required for testing.

3.2.1 Pressure Test

3.2.1.1 Duration

During pressure test, maintain a hydrostatic pressure of 150 psi without pumping for a period of one hour with an allowable pressure drop of 5 psi before backfilling system.

3.2.1.2 Leaks

Correct leaks. Make necessary corrections to stop leakage.

3.2.1.3 Retest

Retest system twice until pressure can be maintained for duration of test.

3.2.2 Operation Test

3.2.2.1 Accessories

At conclusion of pressure test, install irrigation heads or drip heads, quick coupling assemblies, and hose bib, and test entire system for operation under normal operating pressure. Make necessary corrections or adjustments to raise or lower pressure for each system if tests results do not match pressure requirements.




SECTION 32 92 23

SODDING04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM C602 (2013) Agricultural Liming Materials

ASTM D4427 (2013) Peat Samples by Laboratory Testing

ASTM D4972 (2001; R 2007) pH of Soils

TURFGRASS PRODUCERS INTERNATIONAL (TPI)

TPI GSS (1995) Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA)

DOA SSIR 42 (1996) Soil Survey Investigation Report No. 42, Soil Survey Laboratory Methods Manual, Version 3.0

1.2 DEFINITIONS

1.2.1 Stand of Turf

100 percent ground cover of the established species.


Section 32 84 24 TEMPORARY IRRIGATION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS and Section 32 05 33 LANDSCAPE ESTABLISHMENT applies to this section for pesticide use and plant establishment requirements, with additions and modifications herein.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Fertilizer

Include physical characteristics, and recommendations.

SD-06 Test Reports



Topsoil composition tests (reports and recommendations).

SD-07 Certificates

Sod farm certification for sods. Indicate type of sod in accordance with TPI GSS.


1.5.1 Delivery

1.5.1.1 Sod Protection

Protect from drying out and from contamination during delivery, on-site storage, and handling.

1.5.1.2 Fertilizer, Gypsum, Sulfur, Iron, and Lime Delivery

Deliver to the site in original, unopened containers bearing manufacturer's chemical analysis, name, trade name, trademark, and indication of conformance to state and federal laws. Instead of containers, fertilizer, gypsum, sulphur, iron, and lime may be furnished in bulk with certificate indicating the above information.

1.5.2 Storage

1.5.2.1 Sod Storage

Lightly sprinkle with water, cover with moist burlap, straw, or other approved covering; and protect from exposure to wind and direct sunlight until planted. Provide covering that will allow air to circulate so that internal heat will not develop. Do not store sod longer than 24 hours. Do not store directly on concrete or bituminous surfaces.

1.5.2.2 Topsoil

Prior to stockpiling topsoil, treat growing vegetation with application of appropriate specified non-selective herbicide. Clear and grub existing vegetation three to four weeks prior to stockpiling topsoil.

1.5.2.3 Handling

Do not drop or dump materials from vehicles.

1.6 TIME RESTRICTIONS AND PLANTING CONDITIONS

1.6.1 Restrictions

Do not plant when the ground is frozen, snow covered, muddy, or when air temperature exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit.

1.7 TIME LIMITATIONS

1.7.1 Sod

Place sod a maximum of thirty six hours after initial harvesting, in accordance with TPI GSS as modified herein.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SODS

2.1.1 Classification

Nursery grown, certified as classified in the TPI GSS. Machine cut sod at a uniform thickness of 3/4 inch within a tolerance of 1/4 inch, excluding top growth and thatch. Each individual sod piece shall be strong enough to support its own weight when lifted by the ends. Broken pads, irregularly shaped pieces, and torn or uneven ends will be rejected. Wood pegs and wire staples for anchorage shall be as recommended by sod supplier.

2.1.2 Purity

Sod species shall be genetically pure, free of weeds, pests, and disease.

2.1.3 Planting Dates

Lay sod from 15 March to 30 April for warm season spring planting and from 15 October to 30 November for cool season fall planting.

2.1.4 Composition

2.1.4.1 Proportion

Proportion grass species as follows.

Botanical Name Common Name Percent

Eremochloa ophiuroides

Centipede grass

100%

2.1.4.2 Sod Farm Overseeding

At the sod farm provide sod with overseeding of type recommended by seed producer.

2.2 TOPSOIL

2.2.1 Off-Site Topsoil

Conform to requirements specified in paragraph entitled "Composition." Additional topsoil shall be furnished by the Contractor.

2.2.2 Composition

Containing from 5 to 10 percent organic matter as determined by the topsoil composition tests of the Organic Carbon, 6A, Chemical Analysis Method described in DOA SSIR 42. Maximum particle size, 3/4 inch, with maximum 3 percent retained on 1/4 inch screen. The pH shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D4972. Topsoil shall be free of sticks, stones, roots, and other debris and objectionable materials. Other components shall conform to the following limits:



Silt 7 to 17 percent

Clay 4 to 12 percent

Sand 70 to 82 percent

pH 5.5 to 7.0

Soluble Salts 600 ppm maximum

2.3 SOIL CONDITIONERS

Add conditioners to topsoil as required to bring into compliance with "composition" standard for topsoil as specified herein.

2.3.1 Lime

Commercial grade hydrate or burnt limestone containing a calcium carbonate equivalent (C.C.E.) as specified in ASTM C602 of not less than 110 percent.

2.3.2 Aluminum Sulfate

Commercial grade.

2.3.3 Sulfur

100 percent elemental

2.3.4 Iron

100 percent elemental

2.3.5 Peat

Natural product of peat moss derived from a freshwater site and conforming to ASTM D4427. Shred and granulate peat to pass a 1/2 inch mesh screen and condition in storage pile for minimum 6 months after excavation.

2.3.6 Sand

Clean and free of materials harmful to plants.

2.3.7 Gypsum

Coarsely ground gypsum comprised of calcium sulfate dihydrate 91 percent, calcium 22 percent, sulfur 17 percent; minimum 96 percent passing through 20 mesh screen, 100 percent passing thru 16 mesh screen.

2.3.8 Calcined Clay

Calcined clay shall be granular particles produced from montmorillonite clay calcined to a minimum temperature of 1200 degrees F. Gradation: A minimum 90 percent shall pass a No. 8 sieve; a minimum 99 percent shall be retained on a No. 60 sieve; and a maximum 2 percent shall pass a No. 100 sieve. Bulk density: A maximum 40 pounds per cubic foot.



2.4 FERTILIZER

2.4.1 Granular Fertilizer

Organic, granular controlled release fertilizer as recommended by laboratory soil analysis.

2.5 WATER

Source of water shall be approved by Contracting Officer and of suitable quality for irrigation containing no element toxic to plant life.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

3.1.1 Extent Of Work

Provide soil preparation (including soil conditioners), fertilizing, and sodding of all newly graded finished earth surfaces, unless indicated otherwise, and at all areas inside or outside the limits of construction that are disturbed by the Contractor's operations.

3.1.2 Soil Preparation

Provide 4 inches of off-site topsoil to meet indicated finish grade. After areas have been brought to indicated finish grade, incorporate fertilizer, pH adjusters, and soil conditioners into soil a minimum depth of 4 inches by disking, harrowing, tilling or other method approved by the Contracting Officer. Remove debris and stones larger than 3/4 inch in any dimension remaining on the surface after finish grading. Correct irregularities in finish surfaces to eliminate depressions. Protect finished topsoil areas from damage by vehicular or pedestrian traffic.

3.1.2.1 Soil Conditioner Application Rates

Apply soil conditioners at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis of the off site topsoil.

3.1.2.2 Fertilizer Application Rates

Apply fertilizer at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis of the off site topsoil.

3.2 SODDING

3.2.1 Finished Grade and Topsoil

Prior to the commencement of the sodding operation, the Contractor shall verify that finished grades are as indicated on drawings; the placing of topsoil, smooth grading, and compaction requirements have been completed in accordance with Section 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL.

The prepared surface shall be a maximum 1 inch below the adjoining grade of any surfaced area. New surfaces shall be blended to existing areas. The prepared surface shall be completed with a light raking to remove from the surface debris and stones over a minimum 5/8 inch in any dimension.



3.2.2 Placing

Place sod a maximum of 36 hours after initial harvesting, in accordance with TPI GSS as modified herein.

3.2.3 Sodding Slopes and Ditches

For slopes 2:1 and greater, lay sod with long edge perpendicular to the contour. For V-ditches and flat bottomed ditches, lay sod with long edge perpendicular to flow of water. Anchor each piece of sod with wood pegs or wire staples maximum 2 feet on center. On slope areas, start sodding at bottom of the slope.

3.2.4 Finishing

After completing sodding, blend edges of sodded area smoothly into surrounding area. Air pockets shall be eliminated and a true and even surface shall be provided. Frayed edges shall be trimmed and holes and missing corners shall be patched with sod.

3.2.5 Rolling

Immediately after sodding, firm entire area except for slopes in excess of 3 to 1 with a roller not exceeding 90 pounds for each foot of roller width.

3.2.6 Watering

Start watering areas sodded as required by daily temperature and wind conditions. Apply water at a rate sufficient to ensure thorough wetting of soil to minimum depth of 6 inches. Run-off, puddling, and wilting shall be prevented. Unless otherwise directed, watering trucks shall not be driven over turf areas. Watering of other adjacent areas or plant material shall be prevented.

3.3 PROTECTION OF TURF AREAS

Immediately after turfing, protect area against traffic and other use.

3.4 RESTORATION

Restore to original condition existing turf areas which have been damaged during turf installation operations. Keep clean at all times at least one paved pedestrian access route and one paved vehicular access route to each building. Clean other paving when work in adjacent areas is complete.




SECTION 33 11 00

WATER DISTRIBUTION02/11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AWWA B300 (2010; Addenda 2011) Hypochlorites

AWWA B301 (2010) Liquid Chlorine

AWWA C104/A21.4 (2008; Errata 2010) Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water

AWWA C105/A21.5 (2010) Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems

AWWA C110/A21.10 (2012) Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings for Water

AWWA C111/A21.11 (2012) Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings

AWWA C151/A21.51 (2009) Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water

AWWA C153/A21.53 (2011) Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service

AWWA C500 (2009) Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service

AWWA C502 (2005) Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants

AWWA C503 (2005) Wet-Barrel Fire Hydrants

AWWA C509 (2009) Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service

AWWA C600 (2010) Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances



ASTM C94/C94M (2013a) Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete




NFPA 24 (2013) Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances


UL 246 (2011; Reprint Aug 2011) Hydrants for Fire-Protection Service

UL 262 (2004; Reprint Oct 2011) Gate Valves for Fire-Protection Service

UNI-BELL PVC PIPE ASSOCIATION (UBPPA)

UBPPA UNI-B-3 (2000) Recommended Practice for the Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe (Nominal Diameters 4-36 Inch)

1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

1.2.1 Water Distribution Mains

Provide water distribution mains indicated as 4 through 8 inch diameter pipe sizes of ductile-iron pipe as indicated. Also provide water main accessories and gate valves as specified and where indicated.

1.2.2 Water Service Lines

Provide water service lines from water distribution main to building service at a point approximately 5 feet from building. Water service lines shall be ductile iron pipe as specified for water mains. Service line pipe appurtenances and valves shall be as specified for water mains. Provide water service line appurtenances as specified and where indicated.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Piping Materials

Water distribution main piping, fittings, joints, valves, and coupling

Water service line piping, fittings, joints, valves, and coupling

Hydrants

Valve boxes

Submit manufacturer's standard drawings or catalog cuts, except submit both drawings and cuts for push-on joints. Include



information concerning gaskets with submittal for joints and couplings.

SD-06 Test Reports

Bacteriological Disinfection; G

Test results from commercial laboratory verifying disinfection

SD-07 Certificates

Water distribution main piping, fittings, joints and valves

Water service line piping, fittings, joints, valves, and coupling

Shop-applied lining

Fire hydrants

Certificates shall attest that tests set forth in each applicable referenced publication have been performed, whether specified in that publication to be mandatory or otherwise and that production control tests have been performed at the intervals or frequency specified in the publication. Other tests shall have been performed within 3 years of the date of submittal of certificates on the same type, class, grade, and size of material as is being provided for the project.


Installation procedures for water piping


1.4.1 Delivery and Storage

Inspect materials delivered to site for damage. Unload and store with minimum handling. Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective covering. Store jointing materials and rubber gaskets under cover out of direct sunlight. Do not store materials directly on the ground. Keep inside of pipes, fittings, valves and hydrants free of dirt and debris.

1.4.2 Handling

Handle pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants, and other accessories in a manner to ensure delivery to the trench in sound undamaged condition. Take special care to avoid injury to coatings and linings on pipe and fittings; make repairs if coatings or linings are damaged. Do not place any other material or pipe inside a pipe or fitting after the coating has been applied. Carry, do not drag pipe to the trench. Use of pinch bars and tongs for aligning or turning pipe will be permitted only on the bare ends of the pipe. The interior of pipe and accessories shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter before being lowered into the trench and shall be kept clean during laying operations by plugging or other approved method. Before installation, the pipe shall be inspected for defects. Material found to be defective before or after laying shall be replaced with sound material without additional expense to the Government. Store rubber gaskets that are not to be installed immediately, under cover out of direct



sunlight.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER DISTRIBUTION MAIN MATERIALS

2.1.1 Piping Materials

2.1.1.1 Ductile-Iron Piping

a. Pipe and Fittings: Pipe, AWWA C151/A21.51, Pressure Class 250. Fittings, AWWA C110/A21.10 or AWWA C153/A21.53. Fittings shall have pressure rating at least equivalent to that of the pipe. Ends of pipe and fittings shall be suitable for the specified joints. Pipe and fittings shall have cement-mortar lining, AWWA C104/A21.4, standard thickness.

b. Joints and Jointing Material:

(1) Joints: Joints for pipe and fittings shall be manufacturer designed restrained joints or mechanical joints unless otherwise indicated.

(2) Mechanical Joints: Dimensional and material requirements for pipe ends, glands, bolts and nuts, and gaskets, AWWA C111/A21.11.

2.1.1.2 Restrained Joints or Restrained Joint Piping Systems

Except where indicated otherwise, provide restrained joints or restrained joint piping systems. Restrained joints or restrained joint piping systems shall be of one type and from one manufacturer for the project. Mixing of different types and sources will not be permitted. The use of gripper rings with push up joints shall not be permitted.

a. Restrained Joints: Manufacturer designed thrust restrained mechanical joints rated for a minimum of 250 psi. Restrained joint shall allow a minimum of 2 degrees of vertical and horizontal deflection between pipe segments after joint has been made up. Mechanical joints shall be in accordance with AWWA C111/A21.11.

b. Restrained Joint Piping Systems: Manufacturer designed thrust restrained joint piping systems. Ductile iron pipe shall comply with AWWA C151/A21.51, Pressure Class 250. Ductile iron fittings shall comply with AWWA C110/A21.10. After joints have been made-up and fully extended, joints shall allow a minimum of 2 degrees of vertical and horizontal deflection between pipe segments. Systems requiring field welding of restraining rings shall not be permitted.

2.1.2 Valves, Hydrants, and Other Water Main Accessories

2.1.2.1 Gate Valves on Buried Piping

AWWA C509 or UL 262. Unless otherwise specified, valves conforming to: (1)AWWA C509 shall be nonrising stem type with mechanical-joint ends or resilient-seated gate valves 6 to 12 inches in size, and (2) UL 262 shall be inside-screw type with operating nut, double-disc or split-wedge type gate, designed for a hydraulic working pressure of 150 psi, and shall have mechanical-joint ends or push-on joint ends as appropriate for the pipe to which it is joined. Materials for UL 262 valves shall conform to the



reference standards specified in AWWA C500. Valves shall open by counterclockwise rotation of the valve stem. Stuffing boxes shall have 0-ring stem seals. Stuffing boxes shall be bolted and constructed so as to permit easy removal of parts for repair. In lieu of mechanical-joint ends and push-on joint ends, valves may have special ends for connection to cement piping or to sleeve-type mechanical coupling. Valve ends and gaskets for connection to cement piping or to sleeve-type mechanical coupling shall conform to the applicable requirements specified respectively for the joint or coupling.

2.1.2.2 Fire Hydrants

Dry-barrel type. Paint hydrants with at least one coat of primer and two coats of yellow enamel paint. Stencil hydrant number and main size on the hydrant barrel using black stencil paint.

a. Dry-Barrel Type Fire Hydrants: AWWA C502 or UL 246, "Base Valve" design, shall have 6 inch inlet, 5 1/4 inch valve opening, one 4 1/2 inch pumper connection, and two 2 1/2 inch hose connections. Inlet shall have mechanical-joint end only, except where flanged end is indicated; end shall conform to the applicable requirements as specified for the joint. Size and shape of operating nut, cap nuts, and threads on hose and pumper connections shall be as specified in AWWA C502 or AWWA C503 or UL 246. Hydrants indicated as "traffic type," shall have frangible sections as mentioned in AWWA C502 breakable features as mentioned in AWWA C503. The traffic type hydrant shall have special couplings joining upper and lower sections of hydrant barrel and upper and lower sections of hydrant stem and shall be designed to have the special couplings break from a force not less than that which would be imposed by a moving vehicle; hydrant shall operate properly under normal conditions.

2.1.2.3 Valve Boxes

Provide a valve box for each gate valve on buried piping. Valve boxes shall be of cast iron of a size suitable for the valve on which it is to be used and shall be adjustable. Cast-iron boxes shall have a minimum cover and wall thickness of 3/16 inch. Provide a round head. Cast the word "WATER" on the lid. The least diameter of the shaft of the box shall be 5 1/4 inches.

2.1.2.4 Tapping Sleeves

Tapping sleeves of the sizes indicated for connection to existing main shall be ductile, or malleable iron, split-sleeve type with flanged or grooved outlet, and with bolts, follower rings and gaskets on each end of the sleeve. Construction shall be suitable for a maximum working pressure of 150 psi. Bolts shall have square heads and hexagonal nuts. Longitudinal gaskets and mechanical joints with gaskets shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the sleeve. When using grooved mechanical tee, it shall consist of an upper housing with full locating collar for rigid positioning which engages a machine-cut hole in pipe, encasing an elastomeric gasket which conforms to the pipe outside diameter around the hole and a lower housing with positioning lugs, secured together during assembly by nuts and bolts as specified, pretorqued to 50 foot-pound.

2.1.2.5 Disinfection

Chlorinating materials shall conform to the following:



Chlorine, Liquid: AWWA B301.

Hypochlorite, Calcium and Sodium: AWWA B300.

2.1.2.6 Tracer Wire for Nonmetallic Piping

Provide bare copper or aluminum wire not less than 0.10 inch in diameter in sufficient length to be continuous over each separate run of nonmetallic pipe.

2.2 WATER SERVICE LINE MATERIALS

Water service line materials shall comply with the requirements of water distribution main materials.

2.2.1 Water Service Line Appurtenances

Water service line appurtenances shall comply with the requirements of valves, hydrants and other water main accessories.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPELINES

3.1.1 General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines

These requirements shall apply to all pipeline installation except where specific exception is made in the "Special Requirements..." paragraphs.

3.1.1.1 Location of Water Lines

Terminate the work covered by this section at a point approximately 5 feet from the building, unless otherwise indicated. Do not lay water lines in the same trench with gas lines or electric wiring.

a. Water Piping Installation Parallel With Sewer Piping

(1) Normal Conditions: Lay water piping at least 10 feet horizontally from a sewer or sewer manhole whenever possible. Measure the distance edge-to-edge.

(2) Unusual Conditions: When local conditions prevent a horizontal separation of 10 feet, the water piping may be laid closer to a sewer or sewer manhole provided that:

(a) The bottom (invert) of the water piping shall be at least 18 inches above the top (crown) of the sewer piping.

(b) Where this vertical separation cannot be obtained, the sewer piping shall be constructed of AWWA-approved water pipe and pressure tested in place without leakage prior to backfilling. Approved waste water disposal method shall be utilized.

(c) The sewer manhole shall be of watertight construction and tested in place.

b. Installation of Water Piping Crossing Sewer Piping



(1) Normal Conditions: Water piping crossing above sewer piping shall be laid to provide a separation of at least 18 inches between the bottom of the water piping and the top of the sewer piping.

(2) Unusual Conditions: When local conditions prevent a vertical separation described above, use the following construction:

(a) Sewer piping passing over or under water piping shall be constructed of AWWA-approved ductile iron water piping, pressure tested in place without leakage prior to backfilling.

(b) Water piping passing under sewer piping shall, in addition, be protected by providing a vertical separation of at least 18 inches between the bottom of the sewer piping and the top of the water piping; adequate structural support for the sewer piping to prevent excessive deflection of the joints and the settling on and breaking of the water piping; and that the length, minimum 20 feet, of the water piping be centered at the point of the crossing so that joints shall be equidistant and as far as possible from the sewer piping.

c. Sewer Piping or Sewer Manholes: No water piping shall pass through or come in contact with any part of a sewer manhole.

3.1.1.2 Earthwork

Perform earthwork operations in accordance with Section 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL.

3.1.1.3 Pipe Laying and Jointing

Remove fins and burrs from pipe and fittings. Before placing in position, clean pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories, and maintain in a clean condition. Provide proper facilities for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. Do not under any circumstances drop or dump pipe, fittings, valves, or any other water line material into trenches. Cut pipe in a neat workmanlike manner accurately to length established at the site and work into place without springing or forcing. Replace by one of the proper length any pipe or fitting that does not allow sufficient space for proper installation of jointing material. Blocking or wedging between bells and spigots will not be permitted. Lay bell-and-spigot pipe with the bell end pointing in the direction of laying. Grade the pipeline in straight lines; avoid the formation of dips and low points. Support pipe at proper elevation and grade. Secure firm, uniform support. Wood support blocking will not be permitted. Lay pipe so that the full length of each section of pipe and each fitting will rest solidly on the pipe bedding; excavate recesses to accommodate bells, joints, and couplings. Provide anchors and supports where indicated and where necessary for fastening work into place. Make proper provision for expansion and contraction of pipelines. Keep trenches free of water until joints have been properly made. At the end of each work day, close open ends of pipe temporarily with wood blocks or bulkheads. Do not lay pipe when conditions of trench or weather prevent installation. Depth of cover over top of pipe shall not be less than 30 inches.

3.1.1.4 Installation of Tracer Wire

Install a continuous length of tracer wire for the full length of each run of nonmetallic pipe. Attach wire to top of pipe in such manner that it



will not be displaced during construction operations.

3.1.1.5 Connections to Existing Water Lines

Make connections to existing water lines after approval is obtained and with a minimum interruption of service on the existing line. Make connections to existing lines under pressure.

3.1.1.6 Penetrations

Pipe passing through walls of structures shall be provided with ductile-iron or Schedule 40 steel wall sleeves. Annular space between walls and sleeves shall be filled with rich cement mortar. Annular space between pipe and sleeves shall be filled with mastic.

3.1.2 Special Requirements for Installation of Water Mains

3.1.2.1 Installation of Ductile-Iron Piping

Unless otherwise specified, install pipe and fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled "General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines" and with the requirements of AWWA C600 for pipe installation, joint assembly, valve-and-fitting installation, and thrust restraint.

a. Jointing: Make mechanical joints with the gaskets, glands, bolts, and nuts specified for this type joint; assemble in accordance with the applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for joint assembly and the recommendations of Appendix A to AWWA C111/A21.11. Make restrained joints in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.

b. Allowable Deflection: The maximum allowable deflection shall be as given in AWWA C600. If the alignment requires deflection in excess of the above limitations, special bends or a sufficient number of shorter lengths of pipe shall be furnished to provide angular deflections within the limit set forth.

c. Pipe Restraint and Anchorage: Prove restrained joint pipe, unless indicated otherwise. The use of concrete thrust blocks (reaction backing), unless otherwise indicated, is not required nor permitted where restrained joint pipe is used. Where retrained joints cannot be used, provide concrete thrust blocks or metal harness as indicated or required. Thrust blocks shall be in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C600 for thrust restraint. Use concrete ASTM C94/C94M, having a minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi at 28 days. Metal harness shall be in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C600 for thrust restraint, using tie rods and clamps as shown in NFPA 24, except as indicated otherwise.

d. Exterior Protection: Completely encase buried ductile iron pipelines with polyethylene tube or sheet, using Class A polyethylene film, in accordance with AWWA C105/A21.5.

3.1.2.2 Installation of Valves and Hydrants

a. Installation of Valves: Install gate valves, AWWA C500 and UL 262, in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C600 for valve-and-fitting installation and with the recommendations of the Appendix ("Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Gate Valves") to AWWA C500. Install gate valves, AWWA C509, in accordance with the requirements of



AWWA C600 for valve-and-fitting installation and with the recommendations of the Appendix ("Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Gate Valves") to AWWA C509. Make and assemble joints to gate valves as specified for making and assembling the same type joints between pipe and fittings.

b. Installation of Hydrants: Install hydrants, except with restrained joints, in accordance with AWWA C600 for hydrant installation and as indicated. Make and assemble joints as specified for making and assembling the same type joints between pipe and fittings. Install hydrants with the 4 1/2 inch connections facing the adjacent paved surface. If there are two paved adjacent surfaces, contact the Contracting Officer for further instructions.

3.1.3 Installation of Water Service Piping

Install water service piping in accordance with the requirements of paragraph 3.1 entitled "INSTALLATION OF PIPELINES".

3.1.3.1 Location

Connect water service piping to the building service where the building service has been installed. Where building service has not been installed, terminate water service lines approximately 5 feet from the building line at a point directed by the Contracting Officer; such water service lines shall be closed with plugs or caps.

3.1.4 Disinfection

Prior to disinfection, obtain Contracting Officer approval of the proposed method for disposal of waste water from disinfection procedures. Disinfect new water piping and existing water piping affected by Contractor's operations in accordance with AWWA C651. Fill piping systems with solution containing minimum of 50 parts per million of available chlorine and allow solution to stand for minimum of 24 hours. Flush solution from the systems with domestic water until maximum residual chlorine content is within the range of 0.2 and 0.5 parts per million, or the residual chlorine content of domestic water supply. Obtain at least two consecutive satisfactory bacteriological samples from new water piping, analyze by a certified laboratory, and submit the results prior to the new water piping being placed into service. Disinfection of systems supplying nonpotable water is not required.


3.2.1 Field Tests and Inspections

Prior to hydrostatic testing, obtain Contracting Officer approval of the proposed method for disposal of waste water from hydrostatic testing. The Contracting Officer will conduct field inspections and witness field tests specified in this section. The Contractor shall perform field tests, and provide labor, equipment, and incidentals required for testing. The Contractor shall produce evidence, when required, that any item of work has been constructed in accordance with the drawings and specifications.

3.2.2 Testing Procedure

Test water mains and water service lines in accordance with the applicable specified standard, except for the special testing requirements given in



paragraph entitled "Special Testing Requirements." Test ductile-iron water mains and water service lines in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C600 for hydrostatic testing. The amount of leakage on ductile-iron pipelines with mechanical-joints or restrained joints shall not exceed the amounts given in AWWA C600; no leakage will be allowed at joints made by any other method. Test PVC plastic water mains and water service lines made with PVC plastic water main pipe in accordance with the requirements of UBPPA UNI-B-3 for pressure and leakage tests. The amount of leakage on pipelines made of PVC plastic water main pipe shall not exceed the amounts given in UBPPA UNI-B-3. Test water service lines in accordance with applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for hydrostatic testing.

3.2.3 Special Testing Requirements

For pressure test, use a hydrostatic pressure 50 psi greater than the maximum working pressure of the system, except that for those portions of the system having pipe size larger than 2 inches in diameter, hydrostatic test pressure shall be not less than 200 psi. Hold this pressure for not less than 2 hours. Prior to the pressure test, fill that portion of the pipeline being tested with water for a soaking period of not less than 24 hours. For leakage test, use a hydrostatic pressure not less than the maximum working pressure of the system. Leakage test may be performed at the same time and at the same test pressure as the pressure test.

3.3 CLEANUP

Upon completion of the installation of water lines, and appurtenances, all debris and surplus materials resulting from the work shall be removed.




SECTION 33 61 00

PREFABRICATED UNDERGROUND COOLING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM04/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASME B16.11 (2009) Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded

ASME B16.18 (2001; R 2005) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings

ASME B16.22 (2001; R 2010) Standard for Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings

ASME B16.26 (2006) Standard for Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes

ASME B16.9 (2007) Standard for Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings

ASME B31.1 (2007; Addenda 2008) Power Piping



ASTM A 105/A 105M (2010) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications

ASTM A 106/A 106M (2010) Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service

ASTM A 234/A 234M (2010a) Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service

ASTM A 53/A 53M (2010) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless

ASTM B 62 (2009) Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings



ASTM B 75 (2002) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube

ASTM B 88 (2009) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube

ASTM C 518 (2010) Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus

ASTM C 591 (2009) Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation

ASTM D 3350 (2010) Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials


This Section applies to both Division 22, Plumbing and Division 23, Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning. The system consists of a buried prefabricated chilled water and low temperature hot water distribution system including service connections to a point 12 inches inside of the building. The contract drawings show the specific arrangement of piping, sizes and grades of pipe, and other details. The systems are designed for an operating pressure of 150 psig and an operating temperature of 250 degrees F for hot water and 42 degrees Ffor chilled water.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Distribution System; G

Detail drawings consisting of fabrication and assembly drawings, for all parts of the work in sufficient detail to check conformity with the requirements of the contract documents, prior to installation. Show in the detail drawings complete piping, wiring and schematic diagrams and any other details to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a unit. Show on the drawings proposed layout, method of compensation for pipe expansion and contraction, anchorage of equipment and appurtenances, and equipment relationship to other parts of the work including clearances required for maintenance and operation. Clearly identify on the drawings any proposed deviations from the requirements of the contract documents.

SD-03 Product Data


Data composed of catalog cuts, brochures, circulars, specifications and product data, and printed information in



sufficient detail and scope to verify compliance with the requirements of the contract documents.

SD-07 Certificates


The manufacturer's or system fabricator's written certification stating that the distribution system furnished meets all the requirements of this specification.

Welding

Prior to welding operations, a copy of qualified procedures and a list of names and identification symbols of qualified welders and welding operators.



Six copies of operation and 6 copies of maintenance manuals for the equipment furnished, 1 complete set prior to performance testing and the remainder upon acceptance. Detail in the operation manuals the step-by-step procedures required for equipment startup, operation, and shutdown. Include in the operation manuals the manufacturer's name, model number, parts list, and brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features. List in the maintenance manuals routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guides. Include in the maintenance manuals piping and equipment layout and simplified wiring and control diagrams of the equipment system as installed. Manuals shall be approved prior to the field performance testing.


Weld piping in accordance with qualified procedures using performance qualified welders and welding operators. Qualify procedures and welders in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IX. Welding procedures qualified by others, and welders and welding operators qualified by another employer may be accepted as permitted by ASME B31.1. Notify the Contracting Officer 24 hours in advance of tests performed at the work site, if practicable. The welder or welding operator shall apply the personally assigned symbol near each weld made as a permanent record.


After delivery to the jobsite, protect all materials and equipment from anything which could cause damage to the material or equipment. Seal piping at each end to keep the interior clean and free of dirt and debris. Keep fittings together and keep their interior surfaces clean at all times. Insulation shall be kept dry and clean. Equipment shall be delivered and stored with protective crating and weatherproof wrapping to provide protection from the weather, humidity, temperature variations, dirt and dust or other contaminants.



1.6 COORDINATION OF TRADES

Furnish piping, offsets, fittings, and accessories as required to provide a complete installation and to eliminate interference with other construction. Coordinate pipe and fitting locations with space required for trades in the adjacent installation area.



The Contractor shall become familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions in the field and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any work.


Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories that may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the plumbing, fire protection, electrical, structural and grading conditions that would affect the work to be performed and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing required offsets, fittings, and accessories to meet such conditions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Provide system components which are standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the product and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening. The system shall be supported by a service organization that is, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, reasonably convenient to the site. Piping including fittings for changes in direction shall be factory assembled including pipe, insulation and casing.

2.2 PIPING AND CASING MATERIALS

2.2.1 General

Metallic pressure pipe, fittings, and piping accessories shall conform to the requirements of ASME B31.1 and shall be types suitable for the temperature and pressure of the water.

2.2.2 Piping

2.2.2.1 Steel Pipe

Piping shall conform to ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B, standard weight, black or to ASTM A 106/A 106M, Grade B, standard weight. Furnish steel piping materials for chilled water and heating hot water applications.

2.2.2.2 Copper Tubing

Copper tubing shall conform to ASTM B 88, Type K or L. Furnish copper tubing for all potable water applications.



2.2.2.3 Joints and Fittings for Copper Tubing

Wrought copper and bronze solder-joint pressure fittings shall conform to ASME B16.22 and ASTM B 75. Cast copper alloy solder-joint pressure fittings shall conform to ASME B16.18. Cast copper alloy fittings for flared copper tube shall conform to ASME B16.26 and ASTM B 62. Brass or bronze adapters for brazed tubing may be used for connecting tubing to flanges and to threaded ends of valves and equipment.

2.2.3 Casings

2.2.3.1 Polyethylene (PE) Casing

Polyethylene casings shall conform to ASTM D 3350, Type III, Class C, Category 3 or 4, Grade P 34 with thickness as follows:

Casing Diameter Minimum Thickness (in inches) (in mils)

10 and smaller 125 10 to 18 150 18 through 24 200 over 24 225

2.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS

2.3.1 Steel Pipe

All steel pipe shall be welded. Steel welding fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 105/A 105M or ASTM A 234/A 234M. Welding fittings shall also conform to ASME B16.9 for buttweld fittings and ASME B16.11 for socket-weld fittings. Long radius buttwelding elbows conforming to ASME B16.9 shall be used.

2.4 END SEALS

2.4.1 General

Each preinsulated section of piping shall have a complete sealing of the insulation to provide a permanent water and vapor seal at each end of the preinsulated section of piping. Preinsulated sections of piping modified in the field shall be provided with an end seal which is equivalent to the end seals furnished with the preinsulated section of piping. End seals must be tested and certified in accordance with paragraph "Casing and End Seal Testing and Certification".

2.4.2 Types

End seals provided shall be one of the following types:

a. Carrying the outer casing over tapered pipe insulation ends and extending it to the carrier pipe. Sufficient surface bonding area shall be provided between the casing and the carrier pipe.

b. Using specially designed molded caps made of polyethylene or rubber of standard manufactured thickness. A minimum 1-1/2 inch surface bonding area shall be provided between the cap and both the casing and carrier pipe.



c. Shrink sleeves.

2.4.3 Casing and End Seal Testing and Certification

Testing and certification procedures by an independent testing laboratory shall demonstrate that casings and end seals are capable of resisting penetration of water into the casing and insulation. The test shall be performed on the type of prefabricated system to be furnished. If more than one type of prefabricated system is to be used, then the tests shall be performed on each type. The test shall consist of hot and cold cycle testing followed by immersion in a water filled chamber with a head pressure. The hot and cold cycle testing shall consist of 14 days of temperature cycling. A fluid with a temperature of 40 degrees F shall circulate through the carrier pipe alternating every 24-hours with a fluid with a temperature of 200 degrees F circulating through the carrier pipe for a low temperature hot water or dual temperature service or 75 degrees F for a chilled water service. While the hot and cold cycle test is being performed, the test sample is either buried or encased in dry bedding sand with a minimum of 12 inches of sand all around the test sample. The carrier pipe size of the test sample shall be 3 inches in diameter and shall be restrained during the test period. The insulation thickness shall not exceed the maximum thickness provided for the piping in the project. Transition time for temperature cycle testing shall not exceed 15 minutes in going from cold to hot and 30 minutes in going from hot to cold. The fluid in the carrier pipe may be water, oil or heat transfer fluid. Following the hot and cold cycling test, the test sample shall be immersed in a water filled chamber. The pressure on the highest point of the test sample shall not be less than 20 feet of water head pressure subjected over the entire length of the 8 foot test sample of prefabricated pipe. The water shall contain a dye penetrant, which will be used to check for end seal leakage. The pressure in the chamber must be held for not less than 48 hours. Upon completion of this pressure test, the test sample shall be cut open. With the use of a light that will readily show the presence of the dye that was in the water, the test sample shall be inspected. Evidence of the dye inside the test sample shall indicate that the end seal is not acceptable and cannot be certified.

2.5 INSULATION

Comply with EPA requirements in accordance with Section 01 62 35 RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS.

2.5.1 Factory Applied Insulation

Prefabricated pipe and fittings shall be insulated in the factory. Foam insulation for prefabricated insulated pipe and fittings shall be polyurethane foam meeting the requirements of ASTM C 591 having a density not less than 2 pounds per cubic foot (pcf). The polyurethane foam shall completely fill the annular space between the carrier pipe and the casing. Insulation thickness shall be a minimum of 2.0 inches. The insulation thermal conductivity factor shall not exceed the numerical value of 0.15 Btu-inch/square foot-degree F-hour at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518. Manufacturer shall certify that the insulated pipe is free of insulation voids.


Field applied insulation for fittings, and field casing closures, if required, and other piping system accessories shall be polyurethane



matching the pipe insulation. Thickness shall match adjacent piping insulation thickness. Buried fittings and accessories shall have field applied polyurethane insulation to match adjacent piping and shall be protected with a covering matching the pipe casing. Shrink sleeves with a minimum thickness of 50 mils shall be provided over casing connection joints.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions in the field and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing the work.

3.2 INSTALLATION

For all preinsulated, prefabricated systems, obtain the services of a trained representative of the pipe system manufacturer to instruct the Contractor's work forces in the installation procedures to ensure that the system is installed in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions and the plans and specifications. The manufacturer's representative shall be a person who regularly performs such duties for the manufacturer. Furnish the Contracting Officer a list of names of personnel trained and certified by the pipe system manufacturer in the installation of this system. Only personnel whose names appear on the list will be allowed to install the system. The list shall not be more than 1 year old.

3.3 PIPING SYSTEMS

3.3.1 Buried Insulated Systems

Buried insulated systems shall consist of carrier pipe, insulation, casing, end seals, fittings and accessories as specified.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS

Install the piping system furnished in accordance with the piping system manufacturer's instructions. Piping shall be installed without springing or forcing other than what has been calculated for cold spring. Pipe ends shall have burrs removed by reaming and shall be installed to permit free expansion and contraction without damage to joints or hangers. When nonferrous metallic pipe (e.g., copper tubing) is adjacent to or crosses any ferrous piping material, a minimum separation of 12 inches shall be maintained between pipes. Connections between different types of pipe and accessories shall be made with transition fittings approved by the manufacturer of the piping system.

3.4.1 Pitching of Horizontal Piping

Horizontal piping shall be pitched at a grade of not less than 1 inch in 40 feet toward the drain points unless otherwise indicated.

3.4.2 Open Ends

Open ends of pipelines and equipment shall be properly capped or plugged during installation to keep dirt and other foreign matter out of the system.



3.4.3 Cutting Prefabricated Piping Sections

Where prefabricated pipe sections are field cut, new end seals similar to the factory applied end seal shall be provided and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

3.4.4 Joints

3.4.4.1 Welded Joints

Welded joints between sections of pipe and between pipe and fittings shall be provided where specified or indicated.

3.4.5 Anchors

Anchor design shall be in accordance with the published data of the manufacturer and for prefabricated systems shall be factory fabricated by the prefabricated system manufacturer. In all cases, the design shall be such that water penetration, condensation, or vapor transmission will not wet the insulation.

3.4.6 Field Casing Closures

Field insulation and encasement of joints shall be accomplished after the visual and pressure tests specified are completed. Field insulation and encasement shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Thickness dimensions of the insulation and casing materials shall not be less than those of the adjoining prefabricated section. Insulating material shall be foamed in place polyurethane. Care should be taken to ensure that field closures are made under conditions of temperature and cleanliness required to produce a sound, continuous vapor barrier. A standard polyethylene heat shrink sleeve shall be installed over the casing and shall have a 6 inch minimum overlap at each end.

3.4.7 Underground Warning Tape

Underground warning tape shall be buried above each pipe during the trench backfilling and shall be buried approximately 12 inches deep. Tape shall be 0.004 inch thick polyethylene tape with metallic core. Tape shall be 6 inches wide and be printed with repetitive caution warnings along its length. Tapes shall be yellow in color with black letters. Tape color and lettering shall not be affected by moisture or other substances contained in the backfill material.

3.5 EARTHWORK

Earthwork shall be performed in accordance with Section 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL.

3.6 ELECTRICAL WORK

Electrical work shall be performed in accordance with either Section 33 71 02.00 20UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION, or 33 71 01 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION.

3.7 TESTING

Conduct tests before, during, and after installation of the system. Provide all instruments, equipment, facilities, and labor required to



properly conduct the tests. Test pressure gauges for a specific test shall have dials indicating not less than 1.5 times nor more than 2 times the test pressure. It is the Contractor's responsibility to make the pipe system workable at no cost to the Government.

3.7.1 Metallic Pipe Welds

An approved independent testing firm or firms regularly engaged in radiographic testing shall perform a radiographic examination of the field welds. The radiographic testing shall be performed in accordance with ASME B31.1. All radiographs shall be reviewed and interpreted by a Certified Level III Radiographer employed by the testing firm. Any welds found to be unacceptable shall be removed, rewelded and radiographically reexamined in accordance with the above criteria. Such repair and reexamination shall be accomplished at no cost to the Government.

3.7.2 Carrier Pipe Cleaning and Testing

Distribution piping shall be tested as required before backfilling and with all joints exposed. The area between joints may be backfilled as necessary to prevent pipe movement.

3.7.2.1 Cleaning Carrier Pipe

Prior to testing, the interior of the carrier pipe shall be cleaned combined with the pipe cleaning work specified in Division 23 Section 23 64 26 CHILLED WATER SYSTEMS respectively. Coordinate cleaning work with installer of Section 23 64 26 PLUMBING HEALTHCARE FACILITIES and Section 23 64 26 CHILLED WATER SYSTEMS.

3.7.2.2 Hydrostatic Pressure Cycling and Tests

Hydrostatic pressure cycling shall have 4 cycles. Each cycle shall consist of a 10 minute period at 150 psig followed by a 5 minute period at a pressure less than 50 psig. The next cycle shall begin immediately following the completion of the previous cycle. Pressure rise and drop shall not exceed 100 psi per minute. The pressure gauge shall be located and the pressure measured at the opposite end of the system from where the pressure is applied. After completion of the hydrostatic pressure cycling, the first hydrostatic pressure test shall be performed. During the first hydrostatic pressure test, the system shall be proven tight at a pressure of 1.5 times the working pressure up to 150 psig. This pressure shall be held for a minimum of 1 hour. The method of pressurizing the system shall be disconnected from the system before starting the 1 hour pressure holding period. If the pressure cannot be held for the specified length of time, the cause of pressure loss shall be determined, corrected and the hydrostatic pressure cycling and first hydrostatic pressure test shall be repeated until the system can hold the required pressure for at least 1 hour. After successful completion of the first hydrostatic pressure test, the water shall be drained out of the piping system and the piping system filled with treated water as defined in paragraph TREATED WATER for the remaining tests and for permanent operation of the system. The hydrostatic pressure cycling and tests shall be repeated after the system has been filled with treated water, using the same test conditions and criteria.

3.7.2.3 Operational Test

Operational test shall be performed on the complete system or testable portions thereof. The test shall be conducted with full design flows and



operating temperatures in all runs of piping as if in service, to demonstrate satisfactory function and operating effectiveness. The operational test will have two cycles. Each cycle shall consist of a 6-hour period with treated water in the system at the maximum operating temperature of 200 degrees F and maximum flow rate, and a period of at least 6-hours with no flow. Supply temporary pumps, piping end loops, drain valves, vent valves, piping connections, boilers, chillers and the gauges required to circulate the water at the desired temperatures and flow rates. Water shall be circulated through supply lines and returned through the return piping to demonstrate that the pressure drop is compatible with the flow rate and size of pipe and to show that obstructions do not exist in the piping system. Any unusual indicated pressure drop will be investigated and any obstructions removed. Any leaks found shall be repaired. After any obstructions have been removed and any leaks repaired, the operational test shall be repeated until successfully passed.

3.7.2.4 Final Hydrostatic Test

After successful completion of the operational test, the system shall be pressurized to 150 psig. This pressure shall be held for a minimum of 4 hours. Means of pressurizing shall be disconnected prior to the start of the 4-hour pressure holding period. If the pressure cannot be held for the specified length of time, the cause of the pressure loss shall be determined, corrected, and all of the hydrostatic pressure cycling and tests repeated.




SECTION 33 71 01

OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION07/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




ASTM A153/A153M (2009) Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware






IEEE C37.42 (2009) Standard Specifications for High-Voltage (> 1000 V) Expulsion-Type Distribution-Class Fuses, Fuse and Disconnecting Cutouts, Fuse Disconnecting Switches, and Fuse Links, and Accessories Used with These Devices




RUS 202-1 (2004) List of Materials Acceptable for Use on Systems of RUS Electrification Borrowers


UL 6 (2007; reprint Nov 2010) Electrical Rigid



Metal Conduit-Steel


Section 26 08 00 APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING applies to this section with additions and modifications specified herein.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in IEEE 100.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Fuses; G



In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.









1.6 MAINTENANCE


Devices and equipment shall be visually inspected by the Contractor when received and prior to acceptance from conveyance. Stored items shall be protected from the environment in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. Damaged items shall be replaced.

1.8 WARRANTY


PART 2 PRODUCTS


Consider materials specified herein or shown on contract drawings which are identical to materials listed in RUS 202-1 as conforming to requirements. Equipment and component items, not hot-dip galvanized or porcelain enamel finished, shall be provided with corrosion-resistant finishes which shall withstand 480 hours of exposure to the salt spray test specified in ASTM B117 without loss of paint or release of adhesion of the paint primer coat to the metal surface in excess of 1/16 inch from the test mark. The described test mark and test evaluation shall be in accordance with ASTM D1654 with a rating of not less than 7 in accordance with TABLE 1, (procedure A). Cut edges or otherwise damaged surfaces of hot-dip galvanized sheet steel or mill galvanized sheet steel shall be coated with a zinc rich paint conforming to the manufacturer's standard.

2.2 HARDWARE

Hardware shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M and ASTM A123/A123M.

2.3 FUSES

Type K fuses conforming to IEEE C37.42 with ampere ratings equal to 150 percent of the transformer full load rating.

2.4 CONDUIT RISERS AND CONDUCTORS

The riser shall be PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduitconforming to UL 6. Provide conductors and terminations as specified in Section 33 71 02.00 20 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.

2.5 CAULKING COMPOUND

Compound for sealing of conduit risers shall be of a puttylike consistency workable with hands at temperatures as low as 35 degrees F, shall not slump at a temperature of 300 degrees F, and shall not harden materially when



exposed to air. Compound shall readily caulking or adhere to clean surfaces of the materials with which it is designed to be used. Compound shall have no injurious effects upon the workmen or upon the materials.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

3.1.1 Hardware

Provide hardware with washer against wood and with nuts and lock nuts applied wrench tight. Provide locknuts on threaded hardware connections. Locknuts shall be M-F style and not palnut style.

3.1.2 Risers

Secure galvanized steel conduits on poles by two hole galvanized steel pipe straps spaced as indicated and within 3 feet of any outlet or termination. Ground metallic conduits.




SECTION 33 71 02.00 20

UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION08/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


ASSOCIATION OF EDISON ILLUMINATING COMPANIES (AEIC)

AEIC CS8 (2007) specification for Extruded Dielectric Shielded Power Cables Rated 5 Through 46 kV


ASTM B1 (2012) Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire

ASTM B3 (2012) Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire

ASTM B496 (2013) Standard Specification for Compact Round Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors

ASTM B8 (2011) Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft

ASTM B800 (2005; R 2011) Standard Specification for 8000 Series Aluminum Alloy Wire for Electrical Purposes-Annealed and Intermediate Tempers

ASTM B801 (2007; R 2012) Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Conductors of 8000 Series Aluminum Alloy for Subsequent Covering or Insulation

ASTM F512 (2012) Smooth-Wall Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Conduit and Fittings for Underground Installation



IEEE 386 (2006; INT 1 2011) Standard for Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power Distribution Systems Above 600V

SECTION 33 71 02.00 20 Page 1


IEEE 400.2 (2013) Guide for Field Testing of Shielded Power Cable Systems Using Very Low Frequency (VLF)

IEEE 48 (2009) Standard for Test Procedures and Requirements for Alternating-Current Cable Terminations Used on Shielded Cables Having Laminated Insulation Rated 2.5 kV through 765 kV or Extruded Insulation Rated 2.5 kV through 500 kV






ANSI C119.1 (2011) Electric Connectors - Sealed Insulated Underground Connector Systems Rated 600 Volts

ANSI/NEMA WC 71/ICEA S-96-659 (1999) Standard for Nonshielded Cables Rated 2001-5000 Volts for use in the Distribution of Electric Energy

NEMA RN 1 (2005) Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit

NEMA TC 6 & 8 (2003) Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installations

NEMA TC 9 (2004) Standard for Fittings for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation

NEMA WC 74/ICEA S-93-639 (2012) 5-46 kV Shielded Power Cable for Use in the Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy




TIA-758 (2012b) Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard

SECTION 33 71 02.00 20 Page 2



RUS Bull 1751F-644 (2002) Underground Plant Construction


UL 1072 (2006; Reprint Jun 2013) Medium-Voltage Power Cables

UL 1242 (2006; Reprint Jul 2012) Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit -- Steel

UL 44 (2010) Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables


UL 486A-486B (2013) Wire Connectors

UL 510 (2005; Reprint Jul 2013) Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape

UL 514B (2012) Conduit, Tubing and Cable Fittings



UL 83 (2008) Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables

UL 854 (2004; Reprint Sep 2011) Standard for Service-Entrance Cables

1.2 DEFINITIONS


b. In the text of this section, the words conduit and duct are used interchangeably and have the same meaning.

c. In the text of this section, "medium voltage cable splices," and "medium voltage cable joints" are used interchangeably and have the same meaning.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SECTION 33 71 02.00 20 Page 3


SD-03 Product Data

Medium voltage cable; G

Medium voltage cable terminations; G

SD-06 Test Reports

Medium voltage cable qualification and production tests; G

Field Acceptance Checks and Tests; G

Cable Installation Plan and Procedure

Six copies of the information described below in 8-1/2 by 11 inch binders having a minimum of three rings from which material may readily be removed and replaced, including a separate section for each cable pull. Sections shall be separated by heavy plastic dividers with tabs, with all data sheets signed and dated by the person supervising the pull.

a. A list of equipment used, with calibration certifications. The manufacturer and quantity of lubricant used on pull.

b. The cable manufacturer and type of cable.

c. The dates of cable pulls, time of day, and ambient temperature.

d. The length of cable pull and calculated cable pulling tensions.

e. The actual cable pulling tensions encountered during pull.

SD-07 Certificates

Cable splicer/terminator; G

Cable Installer Qualifications


1.4.1 Certificate of Competency for Cable Splicer/Terminator

The cable splicer/terminator must have a certification from the National Cable Splicing Certification Board (NCSCB) in the field of splicing and terminating shielded medium voltage (5 kV to 35 kV) power cable using pre-manufactured kits (pre-molded, heat-shrink, cold shrink). Submit "Proof of Certification" for approval, for the individuals that will be performing cable splicer and termination work, 30 days before splices or terminations are to be made.

1.4.2 Cable Installer Qualifications

Provide at least one onsite person in a supervisory position with a documentable level of competency and experience to supervise all cable pulling operations. Provide a resume showing the cable installers' experience in the last three years, including a list of references complete with points of contact, addresses and telephone numbers.

SECTION 33 71 02.00 20 Page 4










PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUIT, DUCTS, AND FITTINGS

2.1.1 Rigid Metal Conduit

UL 6.

2.1.1.1 Rigid Metallic Conduit, PVC Coated

NEMA RN 1, Type A40, except that hardness shall be nominal 85 Shore A durometer, dielectric strength shall be minimum 400 volts per mil at 60 Hz, and tensile strength shall be minimum 3500 psi.

2.1.2 Intermediate Metal Conduit

UL 1242.

2.1.2.1 Intermediate Metal Conduit, PVC Coated

NEMA RN 1, Type A40, except that hardness shall be nominal 85 Shore A durometer, dielectric strength shall be minimum 400 volts per mil at 60 Hz,

SECTION 33 71 02.00 20 Page 5


and tensile strength shall be minimum 3500 psi.

2.1.3 Plastic Conduit for Direct Burial

UL 651,Schedule 40 or Schedule 80.

2.1.4 Plastic Duct for Concrete Encasement

NEMA TC 6 & 8 and ASTM F512, UL 651, EPC-40-PVC .

2.1.5 Conduit Sealing Compound

Compounds for sealing ducts and conduit shall have a putty-like consistency workable with the hands at temperatures as low as 35 degrees F, shall neither slump at a temperature of 300 degrees F, nor harden materially when exposed to the air. Compounds shall adhere to clean surfaces of fiber or plastic ducts; metallic conduits or conduit coatings; concrete, masonry, or lead; any cable sheaths, jackets, covers, or insulation materials; and the common metals. Compounds shall form a seal without dissolving, noticeably changing characteristics, or removing any of the ingredients. Compounds shall have no injurious effect upon the hands of workmen or upon materials. Inflatable bladders may be used as an option.

2.1.6 Fittings

2.1.6.1 Metal Fittings

UL 514B.

2.1.6.2 PVC Conduit Fittings

UL 514B, UL 651.

2.1.6.3 PVC Duct Fittings

NEMA TC 9.

2.2 LOW VOLTAGE INSULATED CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

Insulated conductors shall be rated 600 volts and conform to the requirements of NFPA 70, including listing requirements. Wires and cables manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to the site shall not be accepted. Service entrance conductors shall conform to UL 854, type USE.

2.2.1 Conductor Types

Cable and duct sizes indicated are for copper conductors and THHN/THWN unless otherwise noted. All conductors shall be copper.

2.2.2 Conductor Material

Unless specified or indicated otherwise or required by NFPA 70, wires in conduit, other than service entrance, shall be 600-volt, Type THWN/THHN conforming to UL 83 or Type XHHW or RHW conforming to UL 44. Copper conductors shall be annealed copper complying with ASTM B3 and ASTM B8. Aluminum conductors shall be Type AA-8000 aluminum conductors complying with ASTM B800 and ASTM B801, and shall be of an aluminum alloy listed or labeled by UL as "component aluminum-wire stock (conductor material). Type

SECTION 33 71 02.00 20 Page 6


EC/1350 is not acceptable. Intermixing of copper and aluminum conductors is not permitted.

2.2.3 Cable Marking

Insulated conductors shall have the date of manufacture and other identification imprinted on the outer surface of each cable at regular intervals throughout the cable length.

Each cable shall be identified by means of a fiber, laminated plastic, or non-ferrous metal tags, or approved equal, in each manhole, handhole, junction box, and each terminal. Each tag shall contain the following information; cable type, conductor size, circuit number, circuit voltage, cable destination and phase identification.

Conductors shall be color coded. Conductor identification shall be provided within each enclosure where a tap, splice, or termination is made. Conductor identification shall be by color-coded insulated conductors, plastic-coated self-sticking printed markers, colored nylon cable ties and plates, heat shrink type sleeves,or colored electrical tape. Control circuit terminations shall be properly identified. Color shall be green for grounding conductors and white for neutrals; except where neutrals of more than one system are installed in same raceway or box, other neutrals shall be white with a different colored (not green) stripe for each. Color of ungrounded conductors in different voltage systems shall be as follows

a. 208/120 volt, three-phase

(1) Phase A - black

(2) Phase B - red

(3) Phase C - blue

2.3 LOW VOLTAGE WIRE CONNECTORS AND TERMINALS

Shall provide a uniform compression over the entire conductor contact surface. Use solderless terminal lugs on stranded conductors.

a. For use with copper conductors: UL 486A-486B.

b. For use with aluminum conductors: UL 486A-486B. For connecting aluminum to copper, connectors shall be the circumferentially compressed, metallurgically bonded type.

2.4 LOW VOLTAGE SPLICES

Provide splices in conductors with a compression connector on the conductor and by insulating and waterproofing using one of the following methods which are suitable for continuous submersion in water and comply ANSI C119.1.

2.4.1 Heat Shrinkable Splice

Provide heat shrinkable splice insulation by means of a thermoplastic adhesive sealant material which shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.

SECTION 33 71 02.00 20 Page 7


2.4.2 Cold Shrink Rubber Splice

Provide a cold-shrink rubber splice which consists of EPDM rubber tube which has been factory stretched onto a spiraled core which is removed during splice installation. The installation shall not require heat or flame, or any additional materials such as covering or adhesive. It shall be designed for use with inline compression type connectors, or indoor, outdoor, direct-burial or submerged locations.

2.5 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE

Cable (conductor) sizes are designated by American Wire Gauge (AWG) and Thousand Circular Mils (Kcmil). Conductor and conduit sizes indicated are for copper conductors unless otherwise noted. Insulated conductors shall have the date of manufacture and other identification imprinted on the outer surface of each cable at regular intervals throughout cable length. Wires and cables manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to the site shall not be accepted. Provide single conductor type cables unless otherwise indicated.

2.5.1 Cable Configuration

Provide Type MV cable, conforming to NEMA WC 74/ICEA S-93-639 and UL 1072. Provide cables manufactured for use in duct applications . Cable shall be rated 15 kV with 133 percent insulation level.

2.5.2 Conductor Material

Provide concentric-lay-stranded, Class B conductors. Provide soft drawn copper cables complying with ASTM B3 and ASTM B8 for regular concentric and compressed stranding or ASTM B496 for compact stranding .

2.5.3 Insulation

Provide ethylene-propylene-rubber (EPR) insulation conforming to the requirements of ANSI/NEMA WC 71/ICEA S-96-659 and AEIC CS8 .

2.5.4 Shielding

Cables rated for 2 kV and above shall have a semiconducting conductor shield, a semiconducting insulation shield, and an overall copper tape shield for each phase.

2.5.5 Neutrals

Neutral conductors of shall be copper , employing the same insulation and jacket materials as phase conductors, except that a 600-volt insulation rating is acceptable.

2.6 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE TERMINATIONS

IEEE 48 Class 1; of the molded elastomer, prestretched elastomer, or heat-shrinkable elastomer. Acceptable elastomers are track-resistant silicone rubber or track-resistant ethylene propylene compounds, such as ethylene propylene rubber or ethylene propylene diene monomer. Separable insulated connectors may be used for apparatus terminations, when such apparatus is provided with suitable bushings. Terminations, where required, shall be provided with mounting brackets suitable for the intended installation and with grounding provisions for the cable shielding,

SECTION 33 71 02.00 20 Page 8


metallic sheath, or armor. Terminations shall be provided in a kit, including: skirts, stress control terminator, ground clamp, connectors, lugs, and complete instructions for assembly and installation. Terminations shall be the product of one manufacturer, suitable for the type, diameter, insulation class and level, and materials of the cable terminated. Do not use separate parts of copper or copper alloy in contact with aluminum alloy parts in the construction or installation of the terminator.

2.6.1 Cold-Shrink Type

Terminator shall be a one-piece design, utilizing the manufacturer's latest technology, where high-dielectric constant (capacitive) stress control is integrated within a skirted insulator made of silicone rubber. Termination shall not require heat or flame for installation. Termination kit shall contain all necessary materials (except for the lugs). Termination shall be designed for installation in low or highly contaminated indoor and outdoor locations and shall resist ultraviolet rays and oxidative decomposition.

2.6.2 Heat Shrinkable Type

Terminator shall consist of a uniform cross section heat shrinkable polymeric construction stress relief tubing and environmentally sealed outer covering that is nontracking, resists heavy atmospheric contaminants, ultra violet rays and oxidative decomposition. Provide heat shrinkable sheds or skirts of the same material. Termination shall be designed for installation in low or highly contaminated indoor or outdoor locations.

2.6.3 Separable Insulated Connector Type

IEEE 386. Provide connector with steel reinforced hook-stick eye, grounding eye, test point, and arc-quenching contact material. Provide connectors of the loadbreak or deadbreak type as indicated, of suitable construction for the application and the type of cable connected, and that include cable shield adaptors. Provide external clamping points and test points.

a. 200 Ampere loadbreak connector ratings: Voltage: 15 kV, 95 kV BIL. Short time rating: 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes.

b. 600 Ampere deadbreak connector ratings: Voltage: 15 kV, 95 kV BIL. Short time rating: 25,000 rms symmetrical amperes. Connectors shall have 200 ampere bushing interface for surge arresters as indicated.

2.7 TAPE

2.7.1 Insulating Tape

UL 510, plastic insulating tape, capable of performing in a continuous temperature environment of 80 degrees C.

2.7.2 Buried Warning and Identification Tape

Provide detectable tape in accordance with Section 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL

SECTION 33 71 02.00 20 Page 9


2.8 PULL ROPE

Shall be plastic or flat pull line (bull line) having a minimum tensile strength of 200 pounds.


2.9.1 Driven Ground Rods

Provide copper-clad steel ground rods conforming to UL 467 not less than 3/4 inch in diameter by 10 feet in length. Sectional type rods may be used for rods 20 feet or longer.

2.9.2 Grounding Conductors

Stranded-bare copper conductors shall conform to ASTM B8, Class B, soft-drawn unless otherwise indicated. Solid-bare copper conductors shall conform to ASTM B1 for sizes No. 8 and smaller. Insulated conductors shall be of the same material as phase conductors and green color-coded, except that conductors shall be rated no more than 600 volts. Aluminum is not acceptable.


Provide concrete in accordance with Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE . In addition, provide concrete for encasement of underground ducts with 3000 psi minimum 28-day compressive strength. Concrete associated with electrical work for other than encasement of underground ducts shall be 4000 psi minimum 28-day compressive strength unless specified otherwise.


2.11.1 Medium Voltage Cable Qualification and Production Tests

Results of AEIC CS8 qualification and production tests as applicable for each type of medium voltage cable.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Install equipment and devices in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions and with the requirements and recommendations of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 as applicable. In addition to these requirements, install telecommunications in accordance with TIA-758 and RUS Bull 1751F-644.

3.2 CABLE INSPECTION

Prior to installation, each cable reel shall be inspected for correct storage positions, signs of physical damage, and broken end seals. If end seal is broken, moisture shall be removed from cable prior to installation in accordance with the cable manufacturer's recommendations.

3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION PLAN AND PROCEDURE

The Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer an installation manual or set of instructions which addresses such aspects as cable construction, insulation type, cable diameter, bending radius, cable temperature limits for installation, lubricants, coefficient of friction, conduit cleaning,

SECTION 33 71 02.00 20 Page 10


storage procedures, moisture seals, testing for and purging moisture, maximum allowable pulling tension, and maximum allowable sidewall bearing pressure. The Contractor shall then perform pulling calculations and prepare a pulling plan which shall be submitted along with the manufacturers instructions in accordance with SUBMITTALS. Cable shall be installed strictly in accordance with the cable manufacturer's recommendations and the approved installation plan.

Calculations and pulling plan shall include:

a. Site layout drawing with cable pulls identified in numeric order of expected pulling sequence and direction of cable pull.

b. List of cable installation equipment.

c. Lubricant manufacturer's application instructions.

d. Procedure for resealing cable ends to prevent moisture from entering cable.

e. Cable pulling tension calculations of all cable pulls.

f. Cable percentage conduit fill.

g. Cable sidewall bearing pressure.

h. Cable minimum bend radius and minimum diameter of pulling wheels used.

i. Cable jam ratio.

j. Maximum allowable pulling tension on each different type and size of conductor.

k. Maximum allowable pulling tension on pulling device.

3.4 UNDERGROUND FEEDERS SUPPLYING BUILDINGS

Terminate underground feeders supplying building at a point 5 feet outside the building and projections thereof, except that conductors shall be continuous to the terminating point indicated. Coordinate connections of the feeders to the service entrance equipment with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Conduit shall be PVC, Type EPC-40 from the supply equipment to a point 5 feet outside the building and projections thereof. Protect ends of underground conduit with plastic plugs until connections are made.

Encase the underground portion of the conduit in a concrete envelope and bury as specified for underground duct with concrete encasement.

3.5 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT AND DUCT SYSTEMS

3.5.1 Requirements

Depths to top of the conduit shall be in accordance with NFPA 70. Run conduit in straight lines except where a change of direction is necessary. Numbers and sizes of ducts shall be as indicated. Ducts shall have a continuous slope downward toward underground structures and away from buildings, laid with a minimum slope of 3 inches per 100 feet. Depending on the contour of the finished grade, the high-point may be at a terminal,

SECTION 33 71 02.00 20 Page 11


a manhole, a handhole, or between manholes or handholes. Short-radius manufactured 90-degree duct bends may be used only for pole or equipment risers, unless specifically indicated as acceptable. The minimum manufactured bend radius shall be 18 inches for ducts of less than 3 inch diameter, and 36 inches for ducts 3 inches or greater in diameter. Otherwise, long sweep bends having a minimum radius of 25 feet shall be used for a change of direction of more than 5 degrees, either horizontally or vertically. Both curved and straight sections may be used to form long sweep bends, but the maximum curve used shall be 30 degrees and manufactured bends shall be used. Ducts shall be provided with end bells whenever duct lines terminate in structures.

3.5.2 Treatment

Ducts shall be kept clean of concrete, dirt, or foreign substances during construction. Field cuts requiring tapers shall be made with proper tools and match factory tapers. A coupling recommended by the duct manufacturer shall be used whenever an existing duct is connected to a duct of different material or shape. Ducts shall be stored to avoid warping and deterioration with ends sufficiently plugged to prevent entry of any water or solid substances. Ducts shall be thoroughly cleaned before being laid. Plastic ducts shall be stored on a flat surface and protected from the direct rays of the sun.

3.5.3 Conduit Cleaning

As each conduit run is completed, for conduit sizes 3 inches and larger, draw a flexible testing mandrel approximately 12 inches long with a diameter less than the inside diameter of the conduit through the conduit. After which, draw a stiff bristle brush through until conduit is clear of particles of earth, sand and gravel; then immediately install conduit plugs. For conduit sizes less than 3 inches, draw a stiff bristle brush through until conduit is clear of particles of earth, sand and gravel; then immediately install conduit plugs.

3.5.4 Galvanized Conduit Concrete Penetrations

Galvanized conduits which penetrate concrete (slabs, pavement, and walls) in wet locations shall be PVC coated and shall extend from at least 2 inches within the concrete to the first coupling or fitting outside the concrete (minimum of 6 inches from penetration).

3.5.5 Multiple Conduits

Separate multiple conduits by a minimum distance of 2 1/2 inches, except that light and power conduits shall be separated from control, signal, and telephone conduits by a minimum distance of 3 inches. Stagger the joints of the conduits by rows (horizontally) and layers (vertically) to strengthen the conduit assembly. Provide plastic duct spacers that interlock vertically and horizontally. Spacer assembly shall consist of base spacers, intermediate spacers, ties, and locking device on top to provide a completely enclosed and locked-in conduit assembly. Install spacers per manufacturer's instructions, but provide a minimum of two spacer assemblies per 10 feet of conduit assembly.

3.5.6 Conduit Plugs and Pull Rope

New conduit indicated as being unused or empty shall be provided with plugs on each end. Plugs shall contain a weephole or screen to allow water

SECTION 33 71 02.00 20 Page 12


drainage. Provide a plastic pull rope having 3 feet of slack at each end of unused or empty conduits.

3.5.7 Conduit and Duct Without Concrete Encasement

Provide not less than 3 inches clearance from the conduit to each side of the trench. Grade bottom of trench smooth; where rock, soft spots, or sharp-edged materials are encountered, excavate the bottom for an additional3 inches, fill and tamp level with original bottom with sand or earth free from particles, that would be retained on a 1/4 inch sieve. The first 6 inchlayer of backfill cover shall be sand compacted as previously specified. The rest of the excavation shall be backfilled and compacted in 3 to 6 inch layers. Provide color, type and depth of warning tape as specified in Section 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL.

3.5.8 Duct Encased in Concrete

Construct underground duct lines of individual conduits encased in concrete. Do not mix different kinds of conduit in any one duct bank. Concrete encasement surrounding the bank shall be rectangular in cross-section and shall provide at least 3 inches of concrete cover for ducts. Separate conduits by a minimum concrete thickness of 2 1/2 inches, except separate light and power conduits from control, signal, and telecommunications conduits by a minimum concrete thickness of 3 inches. Before pouring concrete, anchor duct bank assemblies to prevent the assemblies from floating during concrete pouring. Anchoring shall be done by driving reinforcing rods adjacent to duct spacer assemblies and attaching the rods to the spacer assembly. Provide color, type and depth of warning tape as specified in Section 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL.

3.5.8.1 Partially Completed Duct Banks

During construction wherever a construction joint is necessary in a duct bank, prevent debris such as mud, and, and dirt from entering ducts by providing suitable conduit plugs. Fit concrete envelope of a partially completed duct bank with reinforcing steel extending a minimum of 2 feet back into the envelope and a minimum of 2 feet beyond the end of the envelope. Provide one No. 4 bar in each corner, 3 inches from the edge of the envelope. Secure corner bars with two No. 3 ties, spaced approximately one footapart. Restrain reinforcing assembly from moving during concrete pouring.

3.5.8.2 Removal of Ducts

Where duct lines are removed from existing underground structures, close the openings to waterproof the structure. Chip out the wall opening to provide a key for the new section of wall.

3.6 CABLE PULLING

Pull cables down grade with the feed-in point at the manhole or buildings of the highest elevation. Use flexible cable feeds to convey cables through manhole opening and into duct runs. Do not exceed the specified cable bending radii when installing cable under any conditions, including turnups into switches, transformers, switchgear, switchboards, and other enclosures. Cable with tape shield shall have a bending radius not less than 12 times the overall diameter of the completed cable. If basket-grip type cable-pulling devices are used to pull cable in place, cut off the section of cable under the grip before splicing and terminating.

SECTION 33 71 02.00 20 Page 13


3.6.1 Cable Lubricants

Use lubricants that are specifically recommended by the cable manufacturer for assisting in pulling jacketed cables.

3.7 CONDUCTORS INSTALLED IN PARALLEL

Conductors shall be grouped such that each conduit of a parallel run contains 1 Phase A conductor, 1 Phase B conductor, 1 Phase C conductor, and 1 neutral conductor.

3.8 LOW VOLTAGE CABLE SPLICING AND TERMINATING

Make terminations and splices with materials and methods as indicated or specified herein and as designated by the written instructions of the manufacturer. Do not allow the cables to be moved until after the splicing material has completely set. Make splices in underground distribution systems only in accessible locations such as manholes,handholes, or aboveground termination cabinets.

3.9 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE TERMINATIONS

Make terminations in accordance with the written instruction of the termination kit manufacturer.

3.10 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE JOINTS

Provide power cable joints (splices) suitable for continuous immersion in water. Make joints only in accessible locations in manholes or handholes by using materials and methods in accordance with the written instructions of the joint kit manufacturer.

3.11 GROUNDING SYSTEMS

Provide grounding system as indicated, in accordance with NFPA 70 and IEEE C2, and as specified herein.

Noncurrent-carrying metallic parts associated with electrical equipment shall have a maximum resistance to solid earth ground not exceeding the following values:

Pad-mounted transformers without protective fences 5 ohms


Provide cone pointed driven ground rods driven full depth plus 6 inches, installed to provide an earth ground of the appropriate value for the particular equipment being grounded.If the specified ground resistance is not met, an additional ground rod shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70 (placed not less than 6 feet from the first rod). Should the resultant (combined) resistance exceed the specified resistance, measured not less than 48 hours

SECTION 33 71 02.00 20 Page 14


after rainfall, the Contracting Officer shall be notified immediately.

3.11.2 Grounding Connections

Make grounding connections which are buried or otherwise normally inaccessible, by exothermic weld or compression connector.

a. Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds which are "puffed up" or which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. Mechanical connectors are not required at exothermic welds.

b. Make compression connections using a hydraulic compression tool to provide the correct circumferential pressure. Tools and dies shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. An embossing die code or other standard method shall provide visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground wire.

3.11.3 Grounding Conductors

Provide bare grounding conductors, except where installed in conduit with associated phase conductors.

3.12 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING

Provide in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL.

3.12.1 Reconditioning of Surfaces

3.12.1.1 Unpaved Surfaces

Restore to their original elevation and condition unpaved surfaces disturbed during installation of duct. Preserve sod and topsoil removed during excavation and reinstall after backfilling is completed. Replace sod that is damaged by sod of quality equal to that removed. When the surface is disturbed in a newly seeded area, re-seed the restored surface with the same quantity and formula of seed as that used in the original seeding, and provide topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, or mulching.


Provide concrete in accordance with Section .03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE


3.14.1 Performance of Field Acceptance Checks and Tests

Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and include the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests, performed in accordance with NETA ATS.

3.14.1.1 Medium Voltage Cables

Perform tests after installation of cable, splices, and terminators and before terminating to equipment or splicing to existing circuits.

SECTION 33 71 02.00 20 Page 15


a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection

(1) Inspect exposed cable sections for physical damage.

(2) Verify that cable is supplied and connected in accordance with contract plans and specifications.

(3) Inspect for proper shield grounding, cable support, and cable termination.

(4) Verify that cable bends are not less than ICEA or manufacturer's minimum allowable bending radius.

(5) Inspect for proper fireproofing.

(6) Visually inspect jacket and insulation condition.

(7) Inspect for proper phase identification and arrangement.

b. Electrical Tests

(1) Perform a shield continuity test on each power cable by ohmmeter method. Record ohmic value, resistance values in excess of 10 ohms per 1000 feet of cable must be investigated and justified.

(2) Perform acceptance test on new cables before the new cables are connected to existing cables and placed into service, including terminations and joints. Perform maintenance test on complete cable system after the new cables are connected to existing cables and placed into service, including existing cable, terminations, and joints. Tests shall be very low frequency (VLF) alternating voltage withstand tests in accordance with IEEE 400.2. VLF test frequency shall be 0.05 Hz minimum for a duration of 60 minutes using a sinusoidal waveform. Test voltages shall be as follows:

CABLE RATING AC TEST VOLTAGEfor ACCEPTANCE TESTING

5 kV 10kV rms(peak)

8 kV 13kV rms(peak)

15 kV 20kV rms(peak)



CABLE RATING AC TEST VOLTAGEfor MAINTENANCE TESTING

5 kV 7kV rms(peak)

8 kV 10kV rms(peak)

SECTION 33 71 02.00 20 Page 16


CABLE RATING AC TEST VOLTAGEfor MAINTENANCE TESTING






Inspect ground system for compliance with contract plans and specifications

b. Electrical tests

Perform ground-impedance measurements utilizing the fall-of-potential method in accordance with IEEE 81. On systems consisting of interconnected ground rods, perform tests after interconnections are complete. On systems consisting of a single ground rod perform tests before any wire is connected. Take measurements in normally dry weather, not less than 48 hours after rainfall. Use a portable megohmmeter tester in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to test each ground or group of grounds. The instrument shall be equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions thereof to indicate the ground value of the ground rod or grounding systems under test.

3.14.2 Follow-Up Verification

Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests, the Contractor shall show by demonstration in service that circuits and devices are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function. As an exception to requirements stated elsewhere in the contract, the Contracting Officer shall be given 5 working days advance notice of the dates and times of checking and testing.


SECTION 33 71 02.00 20 Page 17